Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Architecture 15
Art and Design 18 Autobiography and Memoirs 22
Biography 25
Children's Books 31 Diaries and Letters 36 Drama 41
Economics 47
Feminism 49
Fiction 51
Crime Fiction and Thrillers 51
Novels 54
Science Fiction 66 Short Stories 67 Film 71
Food and Drink 74
Geography and the Environment 77
History 79
American History 79 Ancient History 82
Asian, African and Middle Eastern History 84 British History 87
European History 90 Latin American History 92
World History 93 Home and Garden 94 Humour 96
Literary Criticism 99
Mathematics. Science and Technology 102 Media 107
Medicine and Psychiatry 109
Music 111
Mythology 114
Natural History 117
Occult and Paranormal 121
Philosophy 123
Poetry 127
Politics 133
Psychology 136
Reference 138
Religion 142
Sex and Love 145 Sociology 147
Travel and Exploration 150
Index 155
Introduction
The intention of this book is to furnish an -imaginary library" of some three thousand volumes in which a reasonably literate
person can hope to find both instruction and inspiration, art and amusement. It was Andre Malraux who first coined the term
"muse'e imaginaire" to describe the choice of the world's art which a man might make to furnish his own private museum.
Modern printing, Malraux proceeded to argue, has actually made such a collection a practical possibility. Masterpieces which
men of the eighteenth century and before had to travel to see are now within the reach of all who can afford a postcard or a
newspaper supplement. Mechanical reproduction has removed art from the hands of the few and made it accessible to all.
Printing has done the same for books: the paperback is scarcely more expensive than the fine art print.
Our problem is no longer one of access; it is more likely to be one of choice. How are we to choose among the thousands of
available titles? To enter a library is immediately to be seized by a kind of panic; one risks starving among such plenty. The
confession that one does not know what to read next, or where to begin in an unfamiliar subject, is shameful in a society in
which nobody wishes to be a beginner and where naivete is likely to earn the scorn accorded to all newcomers. This book seeks
to be a kind of reader's ticket to that immense library which man (dedicated or venal, brilliant or dogged, wise or witty) has put
together ever since he first began to leave a written record of his experiences and his opinions.
Our first notion was to supply lists of unadorned titles in each of the standard library categories. But to give no information
about the books proposed would be to leave the reader in the bemused condition of a guest at a crowded party to whom the host
has nothing more to say than "You know everybody here, of course". So we decided that it was essential to give a brief account
of each recommended book, however laughable or superficial an authority might find it. We have tried to be as specific as
possible in the information conveyed, in order to avoid the kind of Shorter Notice which once said of Ezra Pound's Cantos that
some were good and some were bad.
The method we adopted, in order to make our cull, was to ask our collaborators (for whose generosity and learning we cannot
say enough) to make lists in the categories in which they were expert. (The categories began as standard Dewey headings, but
gradually shifted and changed to accommodate a wider range both of interests and of books. They are now perhaps arbitrary,
but, we hope, comfortably commodious.) We limited our collaborators to a given number of books, though we recognized that
this limitation, like giving only so many visas to a huge concourse of worthy people, was bound to lead to unhappy exclusions.
Many good things found no place in our narrow lifeboat. In particular, we have excluded technical books accessible only to
specialists: a necessary restriction, reflecting the inevitable distinction between a menu and a list of all available forms of
nutriment. We then circulated the lists among friends and those who were willing to lend us their time, so that no single person
was, in the end, exclusively responsible in any given department. (The editorial decision was, however, final.
Acknowledgements our collaborators deserve; the blame is ours.) Mavericks and texts of perhaps marginal value thus
scrambled their way aboard, sometimes at the expense of worthy work which more blandly covered similar ground. It is,
therefore, no scandal not to find your favourite (or your own) book in these pages: we are not judging, though we have been
obliged to choose.
This is in short, an imaginary library, not the imaginary library.
It can, and should, be supplemented by further reading and broader research. (We have indicated, wherever possible, books
with informative bibliographies: often these will provide an ancillary or alternative list, the part thus standing for the whole.) If
first publication leads to a sort of informed common pursuit whereby new volumes are proposed for future editions, something
more interesting, more exciting, may well be on the way. As for how The List of Books can best be read, we propose no
prescription. One may browse; one may plough. We have made the index a straightforward author index, trying to imagine who
a frustrated reader might be looking for, rather than merely supplying a dutiful rehash of earlier material, in alphabetical and
inverted order, Purists, For the satisfaction of. (For those who relish indexes, the wittiest we know is in C. D. Broad's Five
Types of Ethical Theory.)
"They said it couldn't be done—and it couldn't" is a joke at least as old as George Jean Nathan. The last man who knew
everything died at the end of the eighteenth century: he will never be replaced. The Tower of Babel is an example that should
be enough to deter anyone who seeks to make a self-importantly impertinent edifice of human intelligence—but there is no
evidence that the suburbs of Babel, with their rows of modest bungalows whose occupants are too timid to attempt a second
floor, are man's happiest environment. In fact, the collation of these lists has been enough to pull down most people's vanity,
and certainly ours; for the more one looks at what is available in an unfamiliar field, the more urgent the desire one feels to
abandon the affectations of the editor and assume the modesty of the student. We hope to revise The List of Books every
second year, and we shall be vigilant for new titles to add to it. The next edition will carry a section devoted to important
additions, in each category, and we welcome (though we cannot promise always to acknowledge) suggestions—perhaps in the
form of short reviews—for additions to these imaginary shelves.
F.R.; K.M.; London, 1980
Acknowledgements
The Editors and the Publishers would like to thank the following people without whose witty, wise and erudite contributions
(ranging from suggestions and advice to complete reviews) this book would never have reached its present form.
Valerie Alderson; Brian Aldiss; John Alexander; Roger Baker; Georgina Battiscombe; Robert Benewick; Ruth Binney;
Nikolaus Boulting; William Boyd; Michael Broadbent; Henry Brougham; R. Allen Brown; Sandy Carr; Jeremy Catto; John
Clark; W. Owen Cole; Leo Cooper; Jane Cousins; Nona Coxhead; Sarah Culshaw; Marcus Cunliffe; D. C. Earl; G. R. Elton;
Barry Fantoni; Antony Flew; Anthony Fothergill; Christopher Hale; Ragnhild Hatton; Tim Heald; Roger Hearn; Christopher
Hill: Christopher Hird; Richard Hollis; Richard Holmes; Antony Hopkins; Philip Howard; Joel Hurstfield; Tom Hutchinson;
Angela Jeffs; Emrys Jones; H. R. F. Keating; Brian Klug; Alan Knight; Eric Laithwaite; Peter Levi; Sir Bernard Lovell; John
Lynch; Rosemary McLeish; Valerie McLeish; Sir Philip Magnus; Stephen Mennell; Peggy Miller; Patrick Moore; Michael
Morris; Raymond Mortimer; John Nicholson; Robert Nye; John Paterson; Stewart Perowne; David Robinson; John Robinson;
Sheila Rowbotham; Martin Sherwood; Maurice Shock; Paul Sidey; Tony Smith; Vernon Sproxton; John Stevenson; Brian
Street; Jonathan Sumption; John Russell Taylor; Ion Trewin; J. C. Trewin; Lord Vaizey; Gwynne Vevers; Jonathan Walters;
Colin Wilson
Books of the decade, 1970 — 80
These lists cream the crop: one was compiled by the editors. the other by our American colleagues. By and large they represent
some of the best, the most influential or most significant books published in each of our categories since 1970. Where books
appear in both lists. we have left them there: duplication is an indication of one kind of specialness, at least.
British choice
Attenborough, D.: Life on Earth (1979)
Berger. J.: Ways of Seeing (1972)
Berryman, J.: Selected Poems (1972)
Boston Women's Collective: Our Bodies, Ourselves (1972)
Brown, D.: Bury My Heart at Wounded Knee (1972)
Clarke, R. and Hindley, G.: The Challenge of the Primitives (1975)
Davidson, A.: Mediterranean Seafood (1972)
Gerbi, A.: The Dispute of the New World: The History of a Polemic, 1750-1900 (1973)
Greer, G.: The Female Eunuch (1970)
Halberstam, D.: The Best and the Brightest(1972)
Harvey, J.: The Master Builders: Architecture in the Middle Ages (1971)
Hill, C.: The World Turned Upside Down: Radical Ideas During the English Revolution (1972)
Hindley, G. (ed): The Larousse Encyclopaedia of Music (1971)
Johnson, H.: The World Atlas of Wine (1971)
Koestler, A.: The Case of the Midwife Toad (1971)
Ladurie, E. le Roy: Montaillou (1975)
Lovell, B.: In the Centre of Immensities (1979)
Mendelssohn, K.: Science and Western Domination (1976)
Morison, S.: The Great Explorers (1978)
Papanek. V.: Design for the Real World (1971)
Schumacher, E.: Small Is Beautiful (1973)
Sendak, M.: Where the Wild Things Are (1970)
Skinner. B. F.: Beyond Freedom and Dignity (1971)
Solzhenitsyn, A.: The Gulag Archipelago (1974)
Steadman. R.: America (1974)
Thome, C.: Allies of a Kind (1978)
Ward, B.: The Home of Man (1976)
Wilson, C.: The Occult (1971)
Woodward, B. and Bernstein, C.: All the President's Men (1974)
American choice
Bellow, S.: Mr. Sammler's Planet (1970)
Bettelheim, B.: The Uses of Enchantment(1977)
Boorstin, D. J.: The Americans: The Democratic Experience (1973)
Boston Women's Collective: Our Bodies, Ourselves (1972)
Brand, S.: The Last Whole Earth Catalog (1975)
Brown, D.: Bury My Heart at Wounded Knee (1971)
Clavell, J.: Shogun (1975)
Collier, P. and Horowitz, D.: The Rockefellers: An American Dynasty (1976)
Comfort, A.: The Joy of Sex(1972)
Cooke. A.: Alistair Cooke's America (1973)
FitzGerald. F.: Fire in the Lake (1972)
Halberstam, D.: The Best and the Brightest (1972)
Haley, A.: Roots (1976)
Hardwick, E.: Seduction and Betrayal: Women and Literature (1974)
Hellman, L.: Pentimento (1973)
Herr, M.: Dispatches (1977)
Howe, I.: World of Our Fathers(1976)
Jong, E.: Fear of Flying(1973)
Kluger, R.: Simple Justice: The History of Brown v. Board of Education (1976)
Lash, J. P.: Eleanor and Franklin (1972)
McCullough, D.: The Path between the Seas: The Creation of the Panama Canal,1870-1914 (1977)
Marquez, G. G.: One Hundred Years of Solitude (1970)
Milford, N.: Zelda: A Biography (1970) Morgan, M.: The Total Woman (1973)
Pirsig, R. M.: Zen and the Art of Motorcycle Maintenance (1974)
Singer, I. B.: Enemies: A Love Story (1972)
Skinner. B. F.: Beyond Freedom and Dignity (1971)
Terkel, S.: Working (1974)
Thomas, L.: The Lives of a Cell (1974)
Toffler, A.: Future Shock (1971)
Updike, J.: Rabbit Redux (1971)
Vidal, G.: Burr A Novel (1973)
Vonnegut, K.: Slaughterhouse Five (1973)
Ward, B.: The Home of Man (1976)
Wolfe, T.: Radical Chic and Mau-Mauing the Flak Catchers (1970)
Woodward, B. and Bernstein, C.: All the President's Men (1974); The Final Days (1976)
Wouk, H.: The Winds of War(1971)
Editors' choice
Each editor was asked, independently, which twenty-five books he would pack for a desert island holiday. This list is the
combined result. Several books were common choices; apart from them, each editor was surprised by several of the books on
the other's list.
Aeschylus: The Oresteia
Albee, Edward: Who's Afraid of Virginia Woolf?
Attenborough, David: Life on Earth
Aristophanes: Thesmophoriazusae
Austen, Jane: Emma
Berlioz, Hector: Memoirs
Burke, Kenneth: A Grammar of Motives
Byron: Letters and Journals
Cavafy, Constantine: Collected Poems
Dante: The Divine Comedy
Donne, John: Poems
Dostoyevsky, Fyodor: The Brothers Karamazov
Durrell, Gerald: My Family and Other Animals
Durrell, Lawrence: Reflections on a Marine Venus
Eliot, George: Middlemarch
Eliot, T. S.: Four Quartets
Flaubert, Gustave: Madame Bovary
Ford, Ford Madox: Parade's End
Frazer. Sir James: The Golden Bough
Gibbon, Edward: The Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire Heller, Joseph: Catch 22
Hockney, David: Hackney
Homer: The Odyssey
Innes, Michael: Operation Pax
Jarrell, Randall: Pictures from an Institution
Jonson, Ben: The Alchemist
Kafka, Franz: The Trial
McCabe, J. and Kilgore, A.: Laurel and Hardy
McCarthy, Mary: The Groves of Academe
Montaigne, Michel de: Essays
Nabokov, Vladimir: Pale Fire
Nietzsche, Friedrich: Thus Spake Zarathustra
Orwell, George: Collected Essays
Pascal, Blaise: Pensees
Proust, Marcel: Remembrance of Things Past
Rabelais, Francois: Gargantua and Pantagruel
Renoir, Jean: Renoir, My Father
Runciman, Steven: A History of the Crusades
Shakespeare, William: Collected Works
Singer, Isaac Bashevis: A Crown of Feathers
Stendhal: The Charterhouse of Panna
Thesiger, W.: The Marsh Arabs
Thucydides: The Peloponnesian War
Tolstoy, Leo: War and Peace
Villon, Francois: Poems
White, E. W.: Stravinsky
Wittgenstein, Ludwig: Philosophical Investigations
Getting to grips with the twentieth century
If books reflect historical, sociological and cultural growth, the ones recommended here may, we hope, help to account for or
explain some of the directions human existence has taken in our century. Some of these books are dated, many are infuriating
or partial; all are landmarks.
Acheson, D.: Present at the Creation (1967)
Anderson, P.: Considerations on Western Marxism (1976)
Austin, W.: Music in the 20th Century (1966)
Banham, R.: Theory and Design in the First Machine Age (1960)
Beauvoir, S. de: The Second Sex (1949) Beckett, S.: Waiting for Godot (1952)
Berry. B. J. L.: The Human Consequences of Urbanization (1973)
Brittain, V.: Testament of Youth (1933)
Brownlow, K.: The Parade's Gone By (1968)
Bruce, L.: The Essential Lenny Bruce (1975)
Capote, T.: In Cold Blood (1966)
Carr, E. H.: The Russian Revolution (1979)
Carson, R.: Silent Spring (1962)
Cherry-Garrard, A.: The Worst Journey in the World (1912)
Clark, R. M.: The Scientific Breakthrough (1974)
Clarke, R. and Hindley, G.: The Challenge of the Primitives (1975)
Eliot, T. S.: The Waste Land (1923)
Esslin, M.: The Theatre of the Absurd (1961)
Fanon, F.: The Wretched of the Earth (1961)
Friedan, B.: The Feminine Mystique (1962)
Friedman, M.: Capitalism and Freedom (1962)
Frith, S.: The Sociology of Rock (1978)
Graves, R.: Goodbye to All That (1929)
Halberstam, D.: The Best and the Brightest (1972)
Harrison, J.: Marxist Economics for Socialists (1978)
Hebblethwaite, P.: The Christian-Marxist Dialogue and Beyond (1976)
Ionesco, E.: The Bald Prima Donna (1948)
Jones, E.: The Life and Work of Sigmund Freud (1953)
Joyce, J.: Ulysses (1921)
Kafka, F.: The Diaries of Franz Kafka (1948)
Kafka, F.: The Trial (1937)
Keynes, J.M.: The General Theory of Employment. Interest and Money (1936)
Klee, P.: On Modem A n(1943)
Kolko, G.: Main Currents in Modern American History (1976)
Le Corbusier: Towards an Architecture (1923)
Lichtheim, G.: Europe in the 20th Century (1972)
Lorenz, K.: On Aggression (1963)
McAleavy, H.: The Modern History of China (1967)
Macartney, C. A. and Palmer, A. W.: Independent Eastern Europe (1962)
McGlashan, A.: Gravity and Levity (1976)
Mailer, N.: Marilyn (1973)
Mailer, N.: The Naked and the Dead (1948)
Malaparte, C.: Kaput (1964)
Niebuhr, R.: Moral and Immoral Society (1932)
Orwell, G.: Animal Fann (1946)
Orwell, G.: The Road to Wigan Pier (1937)
Papanek, V.: Design for the Real World (1971)
Pirandello, L.: Six Characters in Search of an Author (1929)
Piven, F. F. and Cloward, R. A.: Poor People's Movements (1977)
Reich, W.: The Sexual Revolution (1930)
Rosen, S.: Future Facts (1976)
Rosenberg, H.: The Anxious Object (1964)
Schumacher, E.: Small Is Beautiful (1973)
Sinclair, A.: Prohibition: The Era of Excess (1962)
Solzhenitsyn, A. I.: The Gulag Archipelago (1974)
Stem, J. P.: The Fuhrer and the People (1975)
Taylor, A. J. P.: English History, 1914-1945(1965)
Terkel, S.: Work (1974)
Wing, J. K.: Reasoning about Madness (1978)
Home reference books
There is a place in most home libraries for a small collection of general reference books. We provide two basic lists, by no
means mutually exclusive; one British and one American.
British
Every collection should contain a dictionary, such as The Concise Oxford English Dictionary or Chambers Twentieth
Century Dictionary, plus/or Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English (P. Proctor) and The Complete Plain Words
(Ernest Gowers).
Many people will also find a constant use for The Concise Dictionary of 26 Languages (compiled by Peter M. Bergman).
Still concerned with words, the collection should contain The Concise Oxford Dictionary of Quotations or The Penguin
Dictionary of Quotations.
There should be an atlas, such as The Times Atlas of the World: Concise Edition or New Concise Atlas of the Earth, the
indexes of which can be used as a world gazetteer. For annually updated information on world affairs get The Statesman's
Year Book, Europa Year Book or Whitaker's Almanack.
For biographical information consult Who Did What (historical and international) and Who's Who (contemporary and
British); much international coverage is provided by a good one-volume encyclopaedia such as Columbia Encyclopaedia or
Hutchinson's New 20th Century Encyclopaedia. The historical aspect of recent developments is summarized in Chronology
of the Modern World.
Finally, two useful books on general medical and legal matters: Reader's Digest Family Health Guide and Know Your
Rights (neither, of course, is meant to supplement professional advice). In any case, every home should have a book on first
aid, such as The Pocket Medical and First Aid Guide (Dr James Bevan).
American
Every collection should contain a dictionary, such as Webster's New Collegiate Dictionary (the second edition is the
recommended unabridged version; the seventh is the desk edition) or The Random House College Dictionary.
The collection might also contain Roget's Thesaurus of Synonyms and Antonyms and Bartlett's Familiar Quotations.
There should be an atlas. Two good ones are The New York Times Atlas of the World and the Rand McNally New
International Atlas, the indexes of which can be used as a world gazetteer. Annually updated information on world affairs is
contained in The World Almanac and Book of Facts.
For biographical information consult Who's Who in America and Who's Who in the World. There is also a Who's Who for
each state.
Two reliable encyclopaedias for home use are Encyclopaedia Britannica and The World Book Encyclopedia. An excellent
one-volume encyclopaedia is The New Columbia Encyclopaedia.
Every home should have a book on first aid, such as Basic First Aid or Standard First and Personal Safety, both published
by the American National Red Cross.
Also useful: Know Your Rights: A Guide to Everyday Law, by Ronald Irving and Charles Anthony.
Anthropology
Anthropology was born as a formal discipline in the 19th century, when a previously haphazard interest in the cultural and
social behaviour of remote peoples was supplied with a theoretical basis and scientific procedures. At first it was very closely
linked with its sister-subject sociology; both were concerned with man the organizer, with the forces and movements which
mould human society. Gradually, however, the disciplines began to grow apart: sociology became ever more political (and
analytically "scientific"), anthropology more historical (and descriptively "artistic"). The books in this list follow the bias
towards study of the cultures of "primitive" peoples; but there are also representatives of a more modern trend towards treating
man as a single phenomenon (with local and historical variants) and extrapolating from the techniques and discoveries of
"primitive" anthropology a series of proposed solutions to the self-destructive energy of technological man. Once again the
wheel has come full circle: sociology and anthropology go hand in hand, and their concern is social change. their scenario
nothing less than the future of the human race itself.
See AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Mead); GEOGRAPHY (Forde, Sauer); HISTORY/AMERICAN (Josephy); HISTORY/BRITISH
(Thomas); MATHEMATICS (Bronowski): MYTHOLOGY (Frazer. Kirk, Huxley, Levi-Strauss); RELIGION (Castaneda)
Agee, J. and Evans, W. Let Us Now Praise Famous Men (1941) Study in words and photographs of three poor tenant families
in the southern USA in 1936. Overpraised in its time, and the prose now seems self-consciously "poetic"; but the pictures
especially are haunting, moving, devastating.
Clarke, R. and Hindley, G. The Challenge of the Primitives (1975) * As the future of technological society grows ever more
doubtful, some anthropologists are suggesting that a return to "primitive" concepts of kinship with nature may provide viable
alternatives. This book readably and succinctly distils the essence of this hopeful philosophy.
Dumont, Louis Homo Hierarchichus (1966)& Class, caste, hierarchies in general—the enabling structures of society, or its
main inhibitors? Clear, readable introduction.
Greenway, John Down among the Wild Men (1972) & Popular anthropology at its readable best: partly a witty
autobiographical account of fifteen years' study of Old Stone Age aborigines in Australia, partly a scientific account of his
findings and conclusions. Also: Literature among the Primitives; The Inevitable Americans; Ethnomusicology, etc
Lienhardt, Godfrey Divinity and Experience: The Religion of the Dinka (1961)(0
Fascinating attempt to explain another society's religion, with all the respect and complexity usually reserved for one's own.
Also: Social Anthropology
Handy, E. S. Craighill and Elizabeth Green Handy, American, c.1893-1980 and 1921-.
Native Planters in Old Hawaii: Their Life, Lore, and Environment (With Mary Kawena Pukui). Rec: Counterpunch NF
Modern archaeology was born in 1708, with the first excavations at Pompeii. At first it was informal and irresponsible, little
more than an aristocratic upgrading of the treasure-hunting and tomb-robbing characteristic of any historical period. In the 19th
century it became badged with more serious, systematic study, the archaeologists seeking for information about ancient
cultures as eagerly as for their glittering artefacts. The great names of 19th-century archaeology—Schliemann. Evans, Petrie—
made their subject a true sibling of anthropology and cultural history, the passion of the polymath, and it is mainly their
enthusiastic work which led to our century's obsession with the minutiae of ancient life. Archaeology continued as a genial,
gentlemanly pursuit for inspired individualists until World War H. Since then, it has evolved (or declined) from an art to a
science. The exactitudes of statistics, aerial photography (itself a legacy of 20th-century warfare), chemical analysis and other
scientific disciplines are applied, and the results are, first, that archaeology now has areas as arcane and specialized as nuclear
physics or X-ray crystallography, and second, that as our view of the distant past comes into ever sharper focus, we find it
extraordinarily like our own: the notion of what -civilization" is travels further backwards in time, and wider in geography,
with every newly published paper. Art or science? Amateur or specialist? The list covers books in both areas—and shades (like
archaeology itself, one of the most humane of disciplines) into history and cultural anthropology too.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Geipel); ART (Frankfort); CHILDREN'S BOOKS (Brothwell): GEOGRAPHY (Sauer);
HISTORY/ANCIENT (Grant, Lehmann)
Bray, W. and Trump, D. H. A Dictionary of Archaeology (1970) Convenient one-volume reference work. Covers the whole
field of archaeology from human evolution and the prehistoric period to the civilizations of Egypt, the Near East and the
Americas.
Brothwell, D. R. and Higgs, E. Science in Archaeology (1969) 1111 "What the archaeologist is able to learn about the
past depends to a great extent on the completeness and discrimination with which he avails himself of the resources being made
available on an ever more generous scale by his colleagues in a growing range of scientific disciplines.- The important
contributions of science to archaeology are discussed: professionals' version of Wilson (qv). See CHILDREN'S BOOKS
Chadwick, John The Mycenaean World (1976) 0 a Terse, stimulating challenge to the orthodox view of Cretan prehistory by
one of the pioneer code-breakers of Linear B.
Chang, Kwang-Chih The Archaeology of Ancient China (1963) 9 -I 11 Chinese civilization from its primitive farming
beginnings (3rd millennium BC) to the early historic periods (2nd millennium AD). See FOOD; HISTORY/ASIAN (Eberhard,
for later history)
Clark, Grahame World Prehistory (1969) 0 a Comprehensive introduction (regularly updated) to the intellectual, material
and social progress of mankind. A suitcase of a book: everything you need is here. Also: Archaeology and Society
Cottrell, Leonard The Land of Shinar (1965) & Sniffed at by narrower academics for his easy style, Cottrell is one of the great
popularizers of archaeology. This book deals with Sumeria, the possible site of the Garden of Eden, a "lost" culture as full of
vitality as Egypt or Persia. Also: Lost Cities; The Bull of Minos, etc
Cunliffe, Barry Fishbourne (1971) M*
Cunliffe's account of the dig at the Roman villa, Fishbourne, England, is a fine case-study of the modern archaeologist at work,
balancing trowel and brush against sophisticated laboratory techniques.
Frere, Sheppard Britannia (1967) 10 History of Roman Britain, from archaeological evidence. Ponderous style never entirely
engulfs the author's enthusiasm or the fascination of the subject.
Hume, Ivor Historical Archaeology (1969) • Application of archaeological disciplines to a known historical period: colonial
America. Good specialist book, of interest to the layman attracted by the period or by the unusual conjunction of disciplines.
MacKendrick, Paul The Greek Stones Speak (1962) ai a Elegant, stylish: ancient culture revealed by trowel. In its time,
unrivalled for enthusiastic clarity; still an excellent general introduction. Updated edition badly needed—it's too good to lose.
Also: The Mute Stones Speak (a less dated, but also less exciting, account of Italian archaeology)
Raistrick, Arthur Industrial Archaeology (1972) & Sandars, Nancy K. Prehistoric Art in Europe (1968)
Superb volume from recommended Pelican History of Art series. See MYTHOLOGY
Ucko, P. J. and Dimbleby, G. W. (eds) The Domestication and Exploitation of Plants and Animals (1969) 10 P
Analysis of innovatory collaboration between archaeologists and natural scientists, to their mutual benefit and enlightenment.
Also: Man, Settlement and Urbanism
Willey, Gordon An Introduction to American Archaeology
(2 vols, 1966-71) 0 -if
Architecture is, in a real sense, the measure of man's unnaturalness. Ever since he adapted the cave for his convenience, he has
rebelled against the kind of shelter which unshaped nature provides. Thus the history of architecture is that of man against
nature, however naturally he has sought to harmonize his antagonism with the materials and environment he finds on earth. The
story of architecture is told (and lived) principally by urban man. for whom buildings become the reflection of society, its
organization and its myths. This means that the debate on architectural aesthetics is also about morals. politics, religion: hence
its intense importance, its furious partialities. ("You say," said Nietzsche, "that there can be no argument about matters of taste?
All life is an argument about matters of taste.") The architect makes his artistic and concrete statement—in obstinately durable
form—and then moves on, sometimes with giant strides, sometimes on feet of clay, rarely leaving satisfactory explanation or
justification. Vitruvius and Le Corbusier, in the following list, are distinguished exceptions (and prove, perhaps, the dangers of
universalizing assertions. however impressive the credentials of the dogmatists). The majority of books cited here are by critics
and scholars, though the true critic of the building is often and decisively the man who uses it. In the present century, however,
the architectural critic has become an influential and creative force. Architecture is three-dimensional thought: hence the
significance of the "philosophers" who are its critics and proponents.
See ART (Frankfort, Giedion, Pevsner, Stedman): CHILDREN'S BOOKS (Macaulay); GEOGRAPHY (Hall, Jacobs, Morgan,
Pahl. Scientific American, Tunnard): HISTORY/BRITISH (Brown)
Banham, Reyner Theory and Design in the First Machine Age (1960)
Theories which complemented architecture and design, 1900-40, when architects and designers really tried to come to terms
with the potential of industry and science. Banham's tone here, as always, is clear, fervent, readable. Leads usefully to Jencks
(qv) and Newman(qv): the seeds are planted here. Also: The Architecture of the Well-Tempered Environment; Los Angeles:
The Architecture of Four Ecologies; A Guide to Modern Architecture, etc
Clifton-Taylor, Alec The Pattern of English Building (1960) 9-1J 0 Lateral approach to architectural history; deals less with
the development of "great styles" than with the close relationship between geology and traditional building materials,
topography and the building types which characterize England's architecture.
Collins, Peter Architectural Judgement (1971) P J Collins asks not about our response to buildings but why, in "their
professional judgement", architects, planners and developers choose one building rather than another. For believers in absolute
aesthetic standards, an essential antidote. Also: Changing Ideals in Modern Architecture, 1750 - 1950
Downing, A. J. Rural Essays (1853) & Downing designed many fine homes and gardens, but was especially intrigued by
American "cottage architecture"—the homely constructions, often home-made, of the lower middle class; country churches,
county courthouses and the like. His book makes for nostalgic imaginings. See Kouwenhoven.
Fleming, J., Honour, H. and Pevsner, N. Penguin Dictionary of Architecture (1966) Oaf
Basic guide to architects, architectural terms, building materials, ornamentation, styles and movements. See Pevsner; ART
(Honour, Pevsner)
Giedion, Sigfried Space, Time and Architecture: The Growth of a New Tradition( 1941 ) *
Polemical, path-finding book succeeds admirably in placing architecture, construction and city planning of the industrial era
(mid 18th century onwards) in the wider context of art and science. See ART
Harvey, John The Master Builders: Architecture in the Middle Ages (1971).
Also: The Gothic World, 1100-1600, The Medieval Architect; Cathedrals of England and Wales
Heydenreich, L. and Lotz, W. The Architecture of Italy. 1400-1600 (1970) P Hitchcock, Henry-Russell Architecture:
Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries (1958) Ala
Despite limited illustrations, an excellent summary of 19th- and 20th-century European, British and American architecture.
Also: Modern Architecture in England; Rococo Architecture in Southern Germany
Jencks, Charles The Language of Post-Modern Architecture (1977) Stimulating analysis of recent trends. Useful adjunct to the
more theoretical writings of such men as Venturi (qv); a literate, often witty guide. Also: Modern Movements in Architecture
Lancaster, Osbert A Cartoon History of Architecture (1975) £ afm Lancaster a true caricaturist: drawings pinpoint subject;
waspish comments make equally vivid impact. "Wimbledon Transitional", "Stockbroker Tudor", "Bypass Variegated"—all
begin here.
A Cartoon History of Architecture (1975) by Osbert Lancaster. Lancaster was a famous cartoonist who also wrote for the
Architectural Review for many years. His eye for detail and dry wit make this a both amusing and highly insightful guide to the
vagaries of taste.
Illustrated History of Architecture 800-1914 (1993) by Jill Lever and John Harris. First published in 1966 as the illustrated
Glossary of Architecture. The effectiveness of this dictionary derives from the way the authors have combined clearly written
definitions of key terms with a remarkable collection of photographs with which to illustrate them.
Murray, Peter The Architecture of the Italian Renaissance (1963) a* Readable, scholarly; useful luggage for travellers. Also:
A History of English Architecture; Piranesi and the Grandeur of Ancient Rome; A History of World Art
Newman, Oscar Defensible Space: People and Design in the Violent City (1972) 109a
Influential in promoting the view that architecture should be based on the study of people's psychological needs (eg for privacy,
contact, security). Essential sociological balance for the theories of (for example) Le Corbusier (qv).
An Outline of European Architecture (1963) by Nikolaus Pevsner. A confident sweep through Western (including American)
architecture: Pevsner's slightly awkward prose style persuades through its passion and its directness.
Experiencing Architecture (1959) by Steen Eiler Rasmussen. A refreshingly clear and unpretentious approach that
concentrates on the many different ways of perceiving architectural forms: as an interplay of solids and voids, as a succession
of rhythmic patterns, and even in terms of the acoustical character of buildings.
Richards, James An Introduction to Modern Architecture (1940) Q a f Recent history is often less digestible than the study of
dead civilizations. Modern architecture is no exception; even so this book persuasively argues that architecture is a social art
related to 20th-century life rather than (in the author's own words) an "academic exercise in applied ornament". Usefully read
in conjunction with Giedion (qv), Mumford (qv), and Newman (qv). Also: The Anti-Rationalists; The Castles on the Ground;
The Functional Tradition in Industrial Building
Richards, James (ed) Who's Who in Architecture: From 1400 to the Present Day (1977)
Biographical and critical studies of professional architects from Alberti and Brunelleschi onwards. Comprehensive coverage of
architects of the Western world, including the USA and Latin America; new edition adds names from Israel, Africa and the Far
East.
Ruskin, John The Seven Lamps of Architecture (1849) 1L !* Though Ruskin himself later called it "a wretched rant",
this book, together with Pugin's and Morris's writings, really paved the way for modern architectural history and criticism,
laying down criteria by which to judge buildings which were not simply those of Vitruvius or Alberti dressed up in 18th-
century tasteful finery. A founding father, Ruskin writes with grace as well as passion, and puts forward an eloquent case,
among other things for the preservation of historic buildings. Also: The Stones of Venice. See LITERARY CRITICISM
The Seven Lamps of Architecture (1849) by John Ruskin. A highly idiosyncratic look at the fundamentals of architecture.
Ruskin's high moral tone and sometimes eccentric opinions will not appeal to everyone but, after nearly 150 years, he is still
worth reading for the poetic vigour of his prose style and the brilliance of his observations.
Scott, Geoffrey The Architecture of Humanism (1914) T * A furious attack on 19th- and early-20th-century "practicality" and
a compelling psychological defence of the ornate forms of the baroque. Looking back, 60 years on, how right Scott was!
Venturi, Robert Complexity and Contradiction in Architecture (1977) In the late 20th century, architecture is evolving from
"modernism", the human dimension reasserting itself. Seminal text by a leading US practitioner. Usefully read in conjunction
with Jencks (qv).
Wright, Frank Lloyd Modern Architecture (1931) 0 As important for America as Le Corbusier (qv) was for France and
Gropius (qv) for Germany, Wright in this famous book states with the passion that imbued all his work the principles of his
very personal architecture. Also: When Democracy Builds. etc. See Mumford.
Laurie D. Olin
Laurie Olin is a professor of landscape architecture at Harvard's Graduate School of Design. He teaches a landscape-design
studio and lectures on the history and evolution of landscapes. He has received Guggenheim and Rome Prize Fellowships for
study in landscape architecture; which he has taught at the University of Washington, the University of Pennsylvania and
Harvard. He is a founding partner of Hanna/Olin Ltd., a landscape-architectural firm located in Philadelphia.
These books should dispel either of two notions: the first that the world and our society are fixed or complete, and the second
that any particular current trend is destiny. Things can and must change, but to a surprising degree such change can be shaped
by dreams and design just as it can by chance or the forces currently at work in society.
Frank Lloyd Wright. An American Architecture. Edgar Kaufmann, ed. New York: Bramhall House, 1955.
One of the several books about Frank Lloyd Wright's work. As a young architecture student I found this book was truly an
inspiration. The clear exposition of Wright's ideas concerning the relationship between buildings and society, between structure
and form, between ornament and materials, and his attitudes toward society, work and art opened up the possibilities of
architecture and imagination.
Loren C. Eiseley. The Immense Journey (1957). Alexandria, Va.: Time—Life Books, 1981.
The first and possibly the best of his many books. More than Rachel Carson's Silent Spring, which came later, this collection of
essays explicated an ecological point of view to which I still aspire. Eiseley follows Thoreau as one who presents the longer
view of man as a part of nature, who struggles with this truth and the beauty of evolution and its unfinished workings and
experiments.
Theodore Roethke. Words for the Wind (1957). Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1981. (Pb)
The third volume of poetry published by one of the most influential teachers I ever had. Roethke introduced me to all the
modern poets as well as to the seventeenth-century metaphysical ones, but it was in the close reading of his work that I began
to see how one of my own contemporaries could make art from a living language. using material from his own experience and
mine, and give it form based upon classical and historical precedents. It was intelligent, passionate and beautiful. More
importantly, like William Carlos Williams and Wallace Stevens, the two American poets I came to value the most, his poetry
seemed always fresh and to admonish you to "change your life."
W. G. Hoskins. The Making of the English Landscape. New York: Penguin, 1970.
This deceptively concise and readable book by the current preeminent cultural geographer of Britain led me to spend several
years of my life involved in the study of the evolution of landscapes in Europe and Britain. It also led me to classical
archaeology, to the history of settlement patterns and agriculture, to the persistence of archetypes and themes in the design of
gardens and parks, and finally to make comparisons and connections between social, ecological and artistic history and theory.
More importantly, it led me to want both to share such views with others through teaching and to add my contribution to the
palimpsest of design on the land.
Certain historic comic strips and movies were equally important to my drawing and graphic development.
Moshe Safdie
Moshe Safdie is an internationally known architect and urban designer with a practice in Montreal, Cambridge, Massachusetts
and Jerusalem. He has been director of Harvard's Urban Design Program of the Graduate School of Design and is the Ian
Woodner Professor of Architecture and Urban Design. He has written three books: Beyond Habitat, For Everyone a Garden and
Form and Purpose. In addition to lecturing frequently at conferences and on campuses, his current projects range from the
Montilla business district in Jerusalem to the Montreal waterfront, a Hebrew school in Mexico City, housing in the Republic of
Singapore, the National Gallery of Canada in Ottawa and Columbus Circle in New York City.
By definition, an architect's principal source of inspiration and learning is the study of the visual environment, cities and
buildings, observed in reality and in reproductions of drawings and photographs. The architect's eye is a greater scanner sorting
out relevancies, perceived and hidden orders, organization and patterns. The written word coexists as stimulation with the
image.
I have chosen three books. The impact of the first has been to place my consciousness within an ethical and moral framework.
The second is a book of science that connects the body theory of design to a greater universal context. The third is a book
specifically about architecture and cities, to give particular emphasis to the significance of one set of images and experiences
over others.
Sir D'Arcy W. Thompson. On Growth and Form (1917). 2 vols. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1984. (Pb)
Architects trained through the tradition of art history tend to think of architecture as a series of culturally based developments,
buildings and cities shaped by behavioral and psychic forces, styles evolving from one generation to the other shaped primarily
by the will of human beings. D'Arcy Thompson's On Growth and Form, published in 1917, which laid the foundation for the
science of morphology, has reshaped my understanding of the process and meaning of design. Introduced to the book by Louis
Kahn and Ann Tyng at age twenty-three, I came to appreciate the inseparable connection between design by nature and design
by man. What Thompson had proposed and demonstrated was that the forms or organisms in nature, from the simplest to the
most complex, evolved in the Darwinian sense to satisfy the criteria essential to survival. From the overused example of the
Nautilus shell to the more subtle demonstrations in the shapes of various plants; sea, land and air, fauna and flora, the bond
structure of the vulture's wing; the geometry of leaves of plants in the desert and the tundra, Thompson forever seeks and
demonstrates the connection of form to purpose.
It becomes possible to distinguish those developments in architecture and urbanism rooted in purpose, in the constraints of the
physical environment, of materials and place, and of life-style from those capricious and arbitrary explorations that surely must
have occurred in every age and engaged the builders of every period. It is in the nature of the human psyche to explore with the
same certainty that molecules and cells mutate and, in the long run, the history of architecture sorts out the explorations worthy
of survival and repetition from those destined to become dead ends.
If before D'Arcy Thompson I might have conceived the act of design as shaping in one's own image, after Thompson I was
conscious that form must evolve from the deep understanding and response to the physical and psychological structures and
constraints that shape our environment in a similar even though more complex manner as in morphology.
Bernard Rudofsky. Architecture Without Architects (1964). Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1969. (Pb)
With Thompson absorbed it was natural to seek in architecture that mode of building which most closely approximates
morphology in the linkage between form and purpose. The third book, Bernard Rudofsky's Architecture Without Architects,
really an exhibition catalog, is more in the tradition of architectural picture books. At a time that in our culture the architect
reigned supreme as form-giver—the one to give shape not only to buildings and cities, but to society itself—Rudofsky cried
out that the emperor was naked. Illustrating buildings and villages designed by nonarchitects, untrained human beings building
"in the vernacular," he demonstrated a world of immense beauty and complexity and, like D'Arcy Thompson, made the
connection showing how a particular form evolved in response to the inventive use of available technologies and materials, of
site and climate, where decoration emerged from myth and ritual, where efficiency, in the morphological sense, begets a sense
of order, fitness and, perhaps most relevantly, spiritual uplift.
Rudofsky establishes criteria that transcend the standard fare of art-history evaluations, suggesting the greater and more
fundamental measure from which no architect should attempt to escape. In an art world that proclaims that all is possible,
D'Arcy Thompson and Rudofsky suggest that the search is not for that which is possible, an infinity of choices, but for that
which is appropriate, a diminishing set of choices in search of truth.
Anne Whiston Spirn is associate professor of landscape architecture at Harvard's Graduate School of Design. Her research and
publications grow out of her work on theories of nature and city design, best illustrated in her recent award-winning book The
Granite Garden: Urban Nature and Human Design. She was a fellow of the Bunting Institute at Radcliffe in 1978 and a Noyes
fellow in 1985. She holds a B.A. from Radcliffe College and a M.L.A. from the University of Pennsylvania.
It was only after writing these notes that I realized that all five of the books are in one way or another a product of Harvard.
Eliot was an undergraduate at Harvard College, McHarg and Alexander studied at the Harvard Graduate School of Design, and
John Dewey delivered Art as Experience as a Harvard lecture series founded in memory of William James.
Thomas Stearns Eliot. Four Quartets (1935-42). New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1968. (Pb)
I bought my first copy of the Four Quartets in a bookstore in Copenhagen. I was sixteen, living for a year on a farm and going
to school in Denmark. The Four Quartets was one of a handful of books in English that I read and reread. At first these books
were a linguistic refuge, the still center in a storm of unfamiliar words. Later, when Danish became a comfortable everyday
language, the words of the poems acquired a newness, as if heard for the first time. Eliot's use of the garden as metaphor, his
juxtaposition of nature's time and human time, struck a deep resonance. I was a city girl (suburban, really) exposed for the first
time to the violent vicissitudes of nature and a life founded on nature's rhythms as well as man's. Over the past twenty years, I
have returned to the Four Quartets again and again. They drive me to find a way to design landscapes that embody time past,
time present, and time future, that highlight the poignant contrast between nature's time and human time.
Ian L. McHarg. Design with Nature (1969). New York: Natural History Press, 1971. (Pb)
Design with Nature introduced me to my profession. Through this book, I learned that landscape architecture consisted of more
than the design of gardens, that it extended to the park, the parkway, the region. Through this profession I hoped to create
"useful" art and thereby to fuse the poetic imagery of Eliot and the pragmatic aesthetic of Dewey. I subsequently studied
landscape architecture with McHarg at the University of Pennsylvania and later worked for five years in his professional office
on a wide variety of planning and design projects. These projects ranged in scope from a study of an entire metropolitan region
to portions of cities, from plans for new communities to park designs. In the office, I gained a different appreciation for the
book: for its power to shape values and to create the demand for a particular type of professional practice. Design With Nature
demonstrated for me the potential of a book to change the way the environment is perceived and built. But McHarg neglected
the city, and that was the seed for my own book.
Christopher Alexander. Notes on the Synthesis of Form. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1964. (Pb)
.et al. A Pattern Language which Generates Multi-Service Centers. Berkeley, Calif.: Center for Environmental
Structure, 1968.
These two books stand for me as one. As a graduate student in landscape architecture, the first provided a theoretical frame and
the second the application that made the theory comprehensible and meaningful. Alexander's work opened up new worlds for
me. As a visually oriented person trained in a highly verbal educational tradition, I found that the diagrams in Multi-Service
Centers packed a jolt in the way they fused abstract ideas, empirical data, and physical form. A door opened: this was a
language that seemed more native to me than words. Alexander also dispelled the mystique of design: he highlighted a
framework within which the real mystery—the flash of insight that illuminates a meaningful pattern—was facilitated.
ARCHITECTURE - INTRODUCTION
Joe Staines
Architecture is unique among the arts, in as much as it is impossible to avoid. From birth to death, the spaces that surround us
are largely defined by structures – walls, doors, windows, corridors – that have been consciously designed and built, albeit with
varying degrees of finesse. The very ubiquity of architecture leads most people to take it for granted. It usually enters our
awareness only for the most negative reasons: the destruction of something familiar and well loved, or the arrival of something
else that seems incongruous or out of scale. The experience of architecture can be much more rewarding than this, and the
following books have been chosen because all the authors, in their varying ways, have the ability to make the act of looking at
the build environment seem like an active and creative process, an act of interpretation as much as one of contemplation.
All find architectural values are human values, else not valuable.
FRANK LLOYD WRIGHT
The Seven Lamps of Architecture (1849) by John Ruskin. A highly idiosyncratic look at the fundamentals of architecture.
Ruskin’s high moral tone and sometimes eccentric opinions will not appeal to everyone but, after nearly 150 years, he is still
worth reading for the poetic vigour of his prose style and the brilliance of his observations.
Experiencing Architecture (1959) by Steen Eiler Rasmussen. A refreshingly clear and unpretentious approach that
concentrates on the many different ways of perceiving architectural forms: as an interplay of solids and voids, as a succession
of rhythmic patterns, and even in terms of the acoustical character of buildings.
An Outline of European Architecture (1963) by Nikolaus Pevsner. A confident sweep through Western (including American)
architecture: Pevsner’s slightly awkward prose style persuades through its passion and its directness.
A Cartoon History of Architecture (1975) by Osbert Lancaster. Lancaster was a famous cartoonist who also wrote for the
Architectural Review for many years. His eye for detail and dry wit make this a both amusing and highly insightful guide to the
vagaries of taste.
Illustrated History of Architecture 800-1914 (1993) by Jill Lever and John Harris. First published in 1966 as the Illustrated
Glossary of Architecture. The effectiveness of this dictionary derives from the way the authors have combined clearly written
definitions of key terms with a remarkable collection of photographs with which to illustrate them.
The Classical Language of Architecture (1963) by John Summerson. Originally a series of radio talks, this is an elegantly
phrased and lucid account of the way in which the essential elements of Classical Greek and Roman architecture have been
used and reinterpreted by succeeding generations of architects from Bramante to Le Corbusier.
Masterpieces of Architectural Design (1982) edited by Helen Powell and David Leatherbarrow. Architects have used drawing
in a variety of ways over the centuries: as a conceptual tool, as a means of communicating with builders, and as a way of
impressing clients. This book presents over 100 fascinating examples accompanied by short but apposite commentaries.
GOTHIC ARCHITECTURE
Joe Staines
The rebuilding of the east end of the abbey church of St Denis, just north of Paris, was begun in 1140. It took just four years
and is widely regarded as the first consistent manifestation of Gothic architecture. It was rapidly followed by similar building
and rebuilding programmes across the Isle de France, then in England, and eventually throughout Europe. The vital elements of
Gothic building - the pointed arch, the rib vault, and the flying buttress - all enabled the medieval master builder to replace the
solid but earthbound architecture of the Romanesque with something more dynamic and transcendent. Walls, no longer load-
bearing, could be filled with windows of coloured glass, creating - as at Chartres - a jewel-like glow within the often vast
interiors. The Gothic cathedral dominated the surrounding landscape and the lives of those within it, so it is hardly surprising
that subsequent architectural history has concentrated on ecclesiastical buildings almost entirely at the expense of secular ones.
Gothic is not only the best, but the only rational architecture, as being that which can fit itself most easily to all services, vulgar
or noble ... it can shrink into a turret, expand into a hall, coil into a staircase, or spring into a spire, with undegraded grace and
unexhausted energy.
JOHN RUSKIN
Cathedral (1974) by David Macaulay. The story of the construction of an imaginary, but typical, French cathedral is told for
children using vivid explanatory drawings and a minimum of text. Much essential information is imparted in the most painless
of ways.
The Cathedral Builders (1980) by jean Gimpel. The perfect compliment to Macaulay's book, written by an enthusiast. A
stimulating text gives us the political and religious background to the `cathedral crusade', and provides a detailed view into the
lives of the various itinerant craftsmen responsible for its realization.
Gothic (1967) by George Henderson. Henderson sees the Gothic as rather more than a revolution in architectural construction.
His short book provides an overview of all the medieval visual arts, concentrating on their stylistic unity and emphasizing both
their human quality and their ornamental daring.
Gothic Architecture (1962) by Paul Frank. A wide-ranging history of Gothic architecture that stresses the importance of
structural developments. This is a classic account written by one of the subject's greatest scholars in a style that is thoroughly
readable and enjoyable. Includes a brief survey of secular architecture.
The Gothic Cathedral (1956) by Otto von Simson. For Simson, the symbolic function of the great cathedrals - as an image of
the City of God - is their greatest importance. Using contemporary texts, especially the writings of Abbot Suger of St Denis, he
tries to show the true significance of these buildings for medieval man.
Medieval Architecture, Medieval Learning (1992) by Charles M Radding and William W Clark. In this challenging book a
historian and an an historian attempt to unravel the connections and shared approaches between architecture and scholasticism
in the 11th and 12th centuries. Not an easy read but worth the effort.
The Nature of Gothic (1853) by John Ruskin. This chapter from The Stones of Venice was so admired by William Morris that
he printed it as a separate work. It is not difficult to understand Morris's enthusiasm, for here is Ruskin at his most rhapsodic:
confidently defusing the essentials of Gothic architecture, extolling its superiority - both aesthetic and moral - to all other
architectural styles, and linking this superiority to the independent character of those from northern climes.
He departed not a little from the work regulated by measure, order and rule which other men did according to a common use
and after Vitruvius and the antiquities, to which he would not conform ...
GIORGIO VASARI ON THE ARCHITECTURE OF MICHELANGELO
Introduction to Architecture (1983) by Stephen Gardiner. A valuable textbook which looks at the origins and development of
each style, followed by important examples of each type being examined, and concluding with a review of the international
impact and national variations of the style in question.
The Architecture of the Italian Renaissance (1969) by Peter Murray. Clear, beautifully illustrated account, ideal for the
beginner.
The Penguin Dictionary of Architecture (1966) by John Fleming, Hugh Honour, and Nikolaus Pevsner. An invaluable aid for
the newcomer to the many terms used within this discipline.
History of Italian Renaissance Art (1970) by Frederick Ham. Packed with information on all major and minor painters,
sculptors, and architects, all placed within a broad historical context. For over 20 years this has been considered to be the best
book written on this period.
Architectural Principles in the Age of Humanism (1949) by Rudolf Wittkower. A seminal work, lucid and stimulating.
Relating Renaissance architecture to Renaissance music, philosophy, and science, Wittkower argues that its aesthetic principles
were grounded not in a secular view of the world, but a deeply religious one - that it was, fundamentally, a 'sacred' architecture.
An Outline of European Architecture (1943) by Nikolaus Pevsner. Reprinted many times, this remains a standard reference
book of exceptional quality. It is scholarly in approach, but the reader's perseverance is well rewarded in the wealth of
information it contains.
Baroque and Rococo (1964) by Germain Bazin. The author explores the richness and complexity of this period, and takes into
account the persistence of earlier styles. A scholarly but accessible study of the architecture as well as painting and sculpture of
the Baroque and Rococo.
In the 19th century, the Industrial Revolution presented architecture with new approaches to development, as a result of both
mass increases in production and technological innovation. Enlarged urban development and, in the densely occupied cities, the
need to install comprehensive servicing systems, such as the provision of drainage and water, as well as advances in mobility
and communication, led to strategic planning, which produced both structured urban designs and, in the latter part of the
century, suburbanization. The rise of the new bourgeois classes in cities generated places of leisure and consumption: new
parks marked the urbanization of landscape, and technological advancement made possible the construction of the arcade.
Technical innovation from the middle of the 18th century, which included the development of iron as a structural material and
the birth of the steam engine, encouraged a division in the roles of the engineer and the architect. The new materials and
techniques of construction presented multiple rather than singular solutions to design projects. This presaged 20th-century
diversity. Advances in the production of power, leading, for example, to the invention of the lift and the electric light, resulted
not only in more ambitious constructions, but in architecture as a more sophisticated means of tempering the environment,
which might respond to individual need while expressing changes in society.
Unremittingly science enriches itself and life with newly discovered useful
materials and natural powers that work miracles, with new methods and
techniques, with new tools and machines. It is already evident that inventions
no longer are, as they had been in earlier times, means for warding off want
and for helping consumption; instead, want and consumption are the means
to market the inventions. The order of things has been reversed.
GOTTFRIED SEMPER
Neo-Classical and Nineteenth Century Architecture (1979) by Robin Middleton and David Watkin. (The paperback version
is in two volumes: The Enlightenment in France and England and The Diffusion and Development of Classicism and the
Gothic Revival.) This is one of the most useful and readable studies of the period 1750-1850, covering its major themes, which
include the influence of the antique, visionary architecture, Neo-Classicism, and the Gothic revival. It includes an invaluable
list of the main architectural protagonists and a comprehensive bibliography.
The Architecture of the French Enlightenment (1980) by Allan Braham. This is a well-illustrated, thorough survey of the
period, which includes a study of pre- and post-Revolutionary architecture.
The Writing of the Walls: Architectural Theory in the Late Enlightenment (1986) by Anthony Vidler. Another, more
particularised, investigation of architectural theory of the period.
Laugier and Eighteenth Century French Theory (1962) by Wolfgang and Anni Herrmann. This is a translation of An Essay
on Architecture (1753) by Marc-Antoine Laugier. Whereas the source text may be hard to read, the introduction by the
Herrmann provides an excellent guide to the theorist who, using the idea of the `primitive hut', pro-posed a `natural'
architecture.
Boullee and Visionary Architecture (1976) by Helen Rosenau. Covers the grandiose building projects of one of the most
extraordinary architects of the period.
Claude-Nicolas Ledoux - Architecture and Social Reform at the End of the Ancien Regime (1990) by Anthony Vidler.
This is one of the few thorough English-language studies of the visionary architect Ledoux.
Sources of Architectural Form: A Critical History of Western Design Theory (1995) by Mark Gelernter. Chapter 6 (The
Enlightenment) and Chapter 7 (The 19th Century) are useful in presenting the background of ideas to the development of
architecture.
History of Modern Architecture (1971) by Leonardo Benevolo. This work is in two volumes. Volume 1 covers the period
from 1740 to the 20th century, and has important sections on the birth of industrial towns that are relevant to a study of 19th-
century architecture.
The Modern City: Planning in the 19th Century (1970) by Francoise Choay. This book covers one of the most important
themes in the development of 19th-century architecture.
Architecture: Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries (1958) by Henry-Russell Hitchcock. Readable general study by a major
architectural historian.
The Four Elements of Architecture and Other Writings (1851-69; translated 1989 by H F Mallgrave and W Herrmann) by
Gottfried Semper. Semper was one of the most important 19th-century architectural theorists. The style of these texts may be
harder to read, but they are of great importance in establishing his ideas about the origins of architecture, and how structure
might relate to architecture and the expression of style.
Heavenly Mansions and Other Essays (1949) by John Summerson. John Summerson was one of Britain's foremost
architectural historians in the 20th century. This is a series of readable essays including a fascinating text on Viollet-le-Duc.
The Rise of an American Architecture (1970) edited by Edgar Kaufmann Jr. Interesting account that includes the
development of cities and parks, and the skyscraper.
The Gothic: Literary Sources and Interpretations through Eight Centuries (1959) by Paul Frankl. Important study of
Gothic architecture that includes its incamadon in 19th-century architecture. See also Gothic Architecture (1960) by the same
author.
Mechanization Takes Command (1948) by Sigfried Giedion. A look at construction in terms of concepts of comfort and its
acquisition; for example, bathing and hygiene. Although there are many omissions, or issues covered too thinly, it at least
addresses and introduces the cultural climate in which architecture was developing in the 20th century.
In Search of Modern Architecture - A Tribute to Henry-Russell Hitchcock (1982) by Helen Searing. This book was
produced as a festschrift for the famous architectural historian. It includes an interesting range of essays including architectural
and urban design topics from 1740 up to the 20th century.
20TH-CENTURY ARCHITECTURE
Rosamund Diamond
The history of modem architecture could be described as a history of ideas, in which the apparent divergence of approaches,
and the number of movements, in contrast to previous centuries, resulted from the wide range of possibilities made available by
new technologies. This not only made architects address different methods of construction, but also the social effects of their
buildings, individually and collectively, in shaping and reflecting the way people live in the modem age. Architects such as Le
Corbusier projected visions of whole conurbations and environments to support the new social structures that they envisioned.
It is hard to be precise in attempting to trace the start of modem architecture when one considers both its technological and its
visionary characteristics.
In one sense its origin may be found in the origins of the Industrial Revolution, but in another it lies as much in the
development of ideas in the middle of the 18th century. The individual's place in an increasingly mechanized field of
production is often questioned in the debates of 20th-century architecture, and this growing dilemma is expressed in the late
century's divergence of stylistic approaches.
The machinery of society, profoundly out of gear, oscillates between an
amelioration, of historial importance, and a catastrophe. The primordial instinct of
every human being is to assure himself of shelter. The various classes of workers in
society today no longer have dwellings adapted to their needs; neither the artisan
nor the intellectual. It is a question of building which is at the root of the social
unrest of today; architecture or revolution.
LE CORBUSIER
History of Modern Architecture (Volume 2, 1971) by Leonardo Benevolo. This is a very interesting history of modem
architecture because, unlike many of the personality-dominated histories, it sets architecture and urbanism into its industrial,
economic, and social contexts.
Space, Time and Architecture: The Growth of a New Tradition (1941) by Sig&ied Giedion. This study of modem
architecture and its development in the USA has been one of the most frequently read by students. It avoids some of the
ideological influences that Benevolo and Tafuri (see below) present as central to their studies of modern architecture.
Modern Architecture: A Critical History (1980) by Kenneth Frampton. This is one of the most valuable recent brief
introductory studies of modern architecture, by one of the leading critical writers on the subject, including contemporary work.
Theory and Design in the First Machine Age (1960), Age of the Masters (1962), Architecture of the Well-Tempered
Environment (1969), all by Reyner Banham. Banham's work is always carefully researched, placed in a general cultural
context, and very readable. On the one hand, he apparently has an easy style which concerns his sense of the power of things
contemporary and immediate; on the other, it is this, together with his scholarship, that allows him to question the
developments of modem architecture, their successes and failures, rather than freezing them as historical events. The last title is
still important as a critical study of the impact of environmental engineering.
Programmes and Manifestos on 20th-Century Architecture (1970) edited by Ulrich Conrads, translated by Michael
Bullock. This is a good source book of some of the most important statements of position made by architects between 1900 and
the early 1960s.
Architecture Culture 1943-1968 (1993) by Joan Ockman with the collaboration of Edward Eigen. This is another version of
the previous book with the inclusion of a later generation of architects.
Sources of Modern Architecture (1967) by Dennis Sharp. A very useful bibliography listing many significant architects of the
Modem movement, with basic information on their lives and their work, and publications by or on them.
Modern Architecture (2 volumes; 1986) by Manfredo Tafuri and Francesco Dal Co. Like the work of Benevolo, this sets
architecture into a political and cultural context, that is prepared to reassess history and with it the Modem movement.
Key Buildings of the Twentieth Century (1985, 1990) by David Dunster. Volume 1 covers houses 1900-44 and Volume 2
1945-89. Both consist of brief studies of individual buildings significant to the development of 20th-century architecture,
providing a useful companion to the broader histories.
Oeuvre Complete (1910-65) by Le Corbusier, edited by W Boesiger. In seven volumes, an extraordinary record of one of the
century's most important architects, including his own descriptions of his work.
Complexity and Contradiction in Architecture (1966) by Robert Venturi. One of the few architectural treatises of the late
20th century. It presages what is now described as Post-Modem architecture.
Learning from Las Vegas (1972) by Robert Venturi, Denise Scott Brown, and Steve Izenour. This is a study of the popular
culture that the authors identify as confronting contemporary architecture.
The Language of Post-Modern Architecture (1984) by Heinrich Klote, translated by Radka Donnell. Thorough general
review of the main Post-Modernists, although to understand this late 20th-century development, general cultural works that
examine other arts should be studied.
Art and Design
At first sight, it might seem that there are too many art books: too much reading goes on, and not enough looking. But for most
people, art books are a personal gallery to the majority of the world's great pictures, the only possible ticket to the contents of
far-flung galleries. For this reason, art books are recommended here for quality of pictures, standard of reproduction, first;
second comes authority or accessibility of text. We have, however, chosen not so much picture books about individual artists,
as books about trends, about art itself. Where art becomes a practical as well as an aesthetic matter, and particularly in the new,
prescriptive discipline of design, things are a little different. Here theory and philosophy are crucial matters, and elegance of
text bulks large. The best books of all—and it is interesting to see how many of them are by artists themselves—are those
which combine experience, vision and articulacy of style. They are the cream of a rich and nourishing list.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Agee, Kroeber, Turner): ARCHAEOLOGY (Sandars); ARCHITECTURE (Banham, Clark.
Kouwenhoven, Lancaster, Lawrence, Newman, Soper); AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Cellini, Clark); BIOGRAPHY (Freud, Grigson,
Hudson, Lindsay, Renoir, Thompson); DIARIES (Dali, Van Gogh); GEOGRAPHY (Tunnard); HISTORY/AMERICAN
(Josephy, Jones); HISTORY/ ASIAN (Basham); HISTORY/BRITISH (Burn, Burton, Dillon, George, Strong); HOME (Conran,
Jeffs, Johnson, Kron); HUMOUR (Hollowood, Larry, New Yorker, Searle, Schulz, Steadman, Steinberg); LITERARY
CRITICISM (Benjamin); MATHEMATICS (Hofstadter); MEDIA (Evans. Maclean); MEDICINE (Trevor-Roper); MUSIC
(Hoffnung); NATURAL HISTORY (Audubon, Be-wick, Holden)
Black, J. A. and Garland, M. A History of Fashion (1975) Audacious successful attempt to trace the history of fashion
practically from Adam and Eve, certainly from the age of skins and paint, to the kaleidoscopic seventies. See Adburgham.
Frankfort, H. The Art and Architecture of the Ancient Orient (1954) a*-if
Haydon, Benjamin Robert Autobiography and Journals (1853) Life and reflections of a painter with genius but no talent.
Haydon knew everybody, and always has something interesting to say, not least about his own contradictory nature.
Ivins, William M. Prints and Visual Communication (1953) it J Apparently dry subject (how various graphic processes
evolved conventions of representation in order to put over their meaning) transformed into a breathless historical detective
story which illuminates far more than its immediate subject.
Jones, Owen The Grammar of Ornament (1856) * Though it was not regarded as art, decoration was a subject of consuming
interest to the Victorians. Industry, newly mechanized, had a voracious appetite for new patterns. What better, Jones and many
others thought, than the study of nature and history? Theories still relevant; colour lithographs a joy for all.
Laver, James Taste and Fashion: From the French Revolution to the Present Day (1937)
Elegant text; delightful plates. Revised edition (1945) recommended.
Richter, Jean Paul (ed) The Literary Works of Leonardo da Vinci (1939)
Richter's sleuth work in collating innumerable intriguing notes from the artist's notebooks and manuscripts, aided by his
cultivated ability to read Leonardo's reversed writings without the use of a mirror, makes Leonardo's contributions to art and
science seem all the more remarkable. 1970 reprint recommended. See BIOGRAPHY (Freud)
Rothenstein, John Modern English Painters, 1952– 1974 (1976) aka Lively accounts of fifty 20th-century artists, most of
whom the former director of the Tate Gallery, London, knew personally and describes with a fund of anecdote as well as crisp
critical perception. Compare with his autobiography, Brave Day
Hideous Night.
Scharf, Aaron Art and Photography (1968) 0.1 Standard work on the tricky relations between the traditional arts and
photography. Breezy; full of oddities as well as serious information; cheerily opinionated.
Vasari, Giorgio Lives of the Artists (1550 -68) 0* Anecdotal and a pleasure to read, but also an interesting historical
document which covers every aspect of art and artists in Renaissance Italy when, as Gombrich (qv) puts it, "artists became
conscious and over-conscious of the great achievements of the past that weighed on them".
James Ackerman
James Ackerman is the Arthur Kingsley Porter Professor of Fine Arts. His essays and articles are on the history of architecture.
critical and historical theory, and the interaction of art and science. His books focus on his long-held fascination with Rome:
The Architecture of Michelangelo, Palladio and Palladio's Villas. Recently he has expanded his artistic interests to film:
Looking for Renaissance Rome (1976) and Palladio the Architect and His Influence in America (1980).
I'm not sure that any of these books (except possibly for Barthes) would have the same impact today that they did when
published: they are still worth reading, but they were written in and for another milieu. If all important books retained their
value permanently we wouldn't need to produce any new ones.
Roger Fry. Vision and Design (1920). New York: Oxford University Press, 1981. (Pb)
I was sixteen when I bought this book of essays on various themes, and I was overwhelmed by my first contact with its subtle
and sensitive approach to art. Fry's elegant prose reinforced his message that the essence of art resides not in the reproduction
of nature but in form, color, rhythm and other abstract characteristics. Today his idealistic position seems rather old hat, but his
writing is still much more engaging and persuasive than that of almost any of our current critics.
Sigfried Giedion. Space, Time, and Architecture. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1941.
In my post-college years, this book introduced me and my fellow students to modern architecture when hardly any examples of
it could be found in America. For Giedion, the new architecture, especially that of Europe, was not only the first great
expression since the Baroque period, but was destined to revolutionize the way we live. We swallowed the argument whole and
did what we could to crusade for a totally modern environment. Today I see the shortcomings as well as the virtues of Giedion
and architectural modernism, but I am offended by the shallow attack on both by some "postmodern" critics.
E. H. Gombrich. Art and Illusion: A Study in the Psychology of Pictorial Representation (1960). Princeton: Princeton
University Press, 1961. (Pb)
This book fundamentally influenced the way I speak and write about pictures. Gombrich's central argument, which was based
on the most advanced research in perception psychology, was that artists cannot see the visual world except in terms of
formulas that shape their perceptions, and that to a great extent these formulas are based on their experience of existing works
of art. We, in turn, approach their work with our own formulas. The book laid to rest the claim of Ruskin and later criticism that
the best painters of nature had learned to look with an "innocent eye," uncontaminated by concepts or knowledge. Gombrich
showed how much every effort to project onto a flat surface the "real" world we perceive as we move about and use two eyes is
affected by the social environment, by preexisting art and by personal experience.
Percy W. Bridgman. The Way Things Are (1959). New York: Viking, 1961.
No intellectual innovation in this century is comparable in its far-reaching impact to that sparked by the discovery in natural
science and mathematics that no proposition can claim to have absolute authority; each can be verified only in terms of the
operations employed to measure it. This book, by a Nobel Prize—winner in physics, articulating what he calls "operational"
reasoning, helped me to see the implications of this concept for the criticism of literature and art. The humanities as well as the
sciences had been in the grip of absolute principles and were liberated by their dissolution. Incidentally, nearly all the major
humanistic writings of the past generation have been the work of scientists, not humanists.
Roland Barthes. The Pleasure of the Text. Richard Miller, trans. New York: Hill & Wang, 1975. (Pb)
This is the only relatively recent book I have included, which proves that the mind becomes less receptive with age. It is a
collection of Pascalian Pensees which, as the title implies, ruminate on the relaxed and sensuous enjoyment of reading. It was
calculated to counteract and balance the excessive sophistication and Puritanism of modern criticism. Since Barthes, as one of
the fathers of structuralist /semiotic interpretation, exerted a powerful influence on the making of that criticism, one of the
pleasures of Pleasure is in its sly subversiveness. Because a major enjoyment in the reading of this or of almost any well-
crafted text is in the quality of the language, much is lost in translation.
Oleg Grabar
Oleg Grabar is the Aga Khan Professor of Islamic Art at Harvard with a long-standing interest in Islamic art, architecture and
archaeology. His responsibilities on the steering committee of the Aga Khan Award for Architecture take him throughout the
world. This year marks the fiftieth and fifty-first Ph.D. theses he has supervised. The Formation of Islamic Art and Alhambra
are his best-known books and he is currently completing two more general books on Islamic architecture.
Alexandre Dumas. The Three Musketeers (1844). New York: Penguin, 1982. (Pb)
. The Count of Monte Cristo (1844-45). New York: Bantam, 1981. (Pb)
These are the books I have most often reread since the age of twelve or thirteen for, regardless of their technical imperfections
and psychological shallowness, they keep reminding me of the facts that dealing with the past is always talking about people,
that imagination is part of the historian's trade, that the past can be fun, and especially that such contemporary terms as
"model," "scenario," and "intervention" are nothing but fancy transformations of a novelist's plot to grab a reader's attention.
Ernst H. Kantorowicz. Frederick the Second (1927). E. O. Lorimer, trans. New York: Frederick Ungar, 1957.
This book, read when I was an undergraduate, fascinated me with its imagination in reconstructing dramatic events and in
weaving complex ideological struggles around an extraordinary individual. The book is inseparable in my mind from other
books by the same historian and from my eventual acquaintance with him and the sheer brilliance of his mind and
conversation. The book or books are like the imperfect mementos of a man who felt the past as an adventure with a mission.
The adventure was people, the mission ordering power.
Earl Baldwin Smith. Architectural Symbolism of Imperial Rome and the Middle Ages (1956). New York: Hacker Art Books,
1978.
Here again a flawed book is in fact tied to Smith's teaching and to my growing awareness of the meanings associated with
forms and of the possibility of the universal principles of artistic processes and interpretations. Smith's work is inseparable in
my mind with several articles written by Richard Krautheimer, Andre Grabar, Karl Lehman and other more-or-less
contemporary historians who, wittingly or not, transferred their own.- visceral perception of contemporary totalitarianism into
an explanation of the past.
Roman Jakobson. "Linguistics and Poetics." In Style in Language, Thomas A. Sebeok, ed. Cambridge: Technology Press of
M.I.T., 1960.
Another, particularly vibrant introduction to a world in which theoretical models seem almost capable of explaining the
realities of art. From this and structuralism it was just a step to semiology, even though nothing has as yet succeeded as well as
Jakobson's formulas, because Jakobson felt and knew poetry before he worried about its structure.
It is inevitable that the lavishly illustrated coffee-table book will attract most attention in this as in other artistic subjects, and
most libraries have a good stock of volumes of this sort. But in this extremely short reading list I have also included more
modest books which provide a clear discussion of the artefacts, and offer helpful critical guidelines on an introductory level. So
readers are advised to `move about' between the different books for illustrations and commentary, and to be aware that each
particular selection of objects or pictures is always (and inevitably) going to give a rather limited impression of what is
available. The more recent books can take advantage of any discoveries that have been made, and most contain suggestions for
further reading.
Yet Greek art is not only the first entirely self-conscious art that we know of,- it stands apart from all other traditions in its
almost exclusive search for beauty, and in particular the beauty of the human form ...
ROGER FRY
Oxford History of Classical Art (1993) edited by John Boardman. An excellent, new survey of both Greek and Roman art in a
relatively large format, with good illustrations and up-to-date suggestions for reading in specialist areas.
Minoan and Mycenean Art (1981) by R Higgins. The art of the societies of Bronze Age Crete (Minoan) and mainland Greece
(Mycenaean) presented in the second edition of a popular introduction.
Greek Art (1985) by John Boardman. The most comprehensive, and consequently also the most concise, of a series of
illustrated handbooks by a distinguished commentator.
Art and Experience in Classical Greece (1972), Art in the Hellenistic Age (1986) by Jerry Pollitt. These two books offer
stimulating interpretations of Greek art in major periods. The latter considers Greek art from the time of Alexander the Great
until the domination of Rome.
Archaic Greek Art (1971) Classical Greek Art (1973) Hellenistic Art (1973) by J Charbonneaux and others. These three
volumes provide superb illustrations.
Art of the Etruscans (1970) by M Moretti and G Maetzke. An illustrated guide to the art of the culture dominant in central
Italy before the Romans.
Roman Art (1991) by Susan Walker. A short, well-illustrated introduction to the subject, which draws on the artefacts in the
British Museum in London.
Roman Art (1976) by Donald Strong. One of the best and most reliable introductions.
Handbook of Roman Art (1983) edited by Martin Henig. A careful, collective survey of major aspects, which also includes a
helpful chapter on `Late Antiquity'.
Roman Painting (1953) by A Maiuri. Extremely valuable for its excellent illustrations of the remarkable survivals.
MEDIEVAL ART
Chris Murray
A very elastic term, `medieval' changes its scope according to context. Here it is being used in its widest sense: the period from
the end of the Roman Empire (4th century AD) to the beginning of the Renaissance (15th century). This vast stretch of time, far
from being an artistic Dark Age - first barbaric and then dominated by monkish virtues, stern and life-denying - was a period of
extraordinary variety and richness. In varying degrees, the styles of the collapsed Roman civilization blended with those of
such `barbaric' peoples as the Celts and the Anglo-Saxons to produce styles expressing the complex and dynamic character of a
new civilization - Christendom. In Byzantium in particular, where the Roman legacy was strongest, the need to express a
spiritual sense of the world produced a style of great grandeur and power. The masterpieces of medieval art include stained
glass, metalwork, manuscript illumination, sculpture (in stone, metal, wood, and ivory), frescoes, and panel paintings. The
main artistic divisions are: early Christian, Byzantine, Romanesque, and Gothic.
The contrast between suffering and joy, between adversity and
happiness, appeared more striking. All experience had yet to the minds of
men the directness and absoluteness of the pleasure and pain of child-life.
Every event, every action, was still embodied in expressive and solemn
forms, which raised them to the dignity of a ritual.
JOHAN HUIZINGA
Early Christian and Byzantine Art (1970) by John Beckwith. A scholarly yet quite accessible account. This covers the very
earliest part of the Middle Ages. Most of the book looks at Byzantine art, but the section on early Christian an, tracing how
Roman styles were gradually transformed by the need to find a Christian form of expression, is welcome as this is a much
neglected period.
A Concise History of Painting from Prehistory to the 13th Century (1967) by David Talbot Rice. The title is somewhat
misleading, for an until the Christian era is covered in 60 pages, the rest of the book (another 200 pages) being devoted to
medieval an. Brief text (many illustrations) by one of the leading scholars of early art.
Medieval Art (1989) by James Snyder. A clear, perceptive, and enthusiastic account of the period from the 4th century to the
14th, covering all the arts. Nearly 700 beautiful illustrations, giving a strong impression of the range and vitality of the
medieval arts.
Byzantine Style and Civilization (1975) by Steven Runciman. A short, classic study, beautifully illustrated. Byzantine art,
which has a history of over 900 years, forms the richest and stylistically most consistent expression of medieval art.
Early Medieval Art (1969) by John Beckwith. A standard work that looks at the period from the coronation of Charlemagne
(800 AD) to the 12th century - that is, the styles known as Carolingian, Ottonian, and Romanesque. A European art is forming
out of the many tribal divisions of Europe.
Gothic Art (1967) by Andrew Martindale. This can be seen as a companion to Beckwith (published in the same series). It
covers the period from the 12th century to the 14th. For many, Gothic an is the quintessential an of the Middle Ages.
Cambridge Introductions to the History of Art: The Middle Ages (1982) by Anne Shaver-Crandell. Although this looks
mostly at architecture, it is the best short introduction. The author covers the period from the 11th century to the 14th.
Gothic (1967) by George Henderson. A stimulating complement to Martindale, this examines Gothic an in terms of the ideas,
and the political and social order, of the late Middle Ages.
The Rise of the Artist (1972) by Andrew Martindale. A short but fascinating account of the changing role of the artist (and
therefore art and society) in the late Middle Ages, when courts were becoming increasingly important sources of patronage.
The Renaissance (French for `rebirth') was a relatively brief but vital period in the history of Western European culture in
which inspiration came from the antique remains of ancient Greece and Rome. It reflects both the continuation of the Christian
beliefs found in the preceding Middle Ages and the revival of humanist thought, resulting in an increasing emphasis on the
individual and on secular concerns. The Renaissance, which is usually seen as extending approximately from 1400 to 1600,
includes the approach known as Mannerist, which was subsequently viewed as a falling-away of the achievements of the High
Renaissance period, but is now recognized as a valid and important style in its own right.
With the commencement of the 17th century, the dominant style was that of Baroque, which echoed a time of renewed Catholic
fervour and confidence in the church, and this is clearly seen in the dramatic and turbulent approach which incorporates
illusionism on a grand scale combined with sumptuous decoration and the merging of all three art forms - painting, sculpture,
and architecture. Interiors were especially lavishly conceived, with decorated ceilings particularly revered at this time. The
Baroque in Germany and eastern Europe became even more lavish and exuberant; in France and England, on the other hand, it
was tempered by a preference for Classical restraint.
The deity which invests the science of the painter functions in such a
way that the mind of the painter is transformed into a copy of the divine
mind, since it operates freely in creating many kinds of animals, plants,
fruits, landscapes, countrysides, ruins, and awe-inspiring places.
LEONARDO DA VINCI
History of Italian Renaissance Art (1970) by Frederick Hartt. Considered for over 20 years to be the best book written on this
period, it is packed with information on individual painters, sculptors, and architects, all placed within a historical context.
The Art of the Renaissance (1963) by Peter and Linda Murray. Covers the early Renaissance, commencing with Giotto and
culminating in the High Renaissance giants of painting and sculpture - Leonardo, Michelangelo, and Raphael.
The Late Renaissance and Mannerism (1967) by Linda Murray. A companion to The Art of the Renaissance, this begins with
the late works of the major High Renaissance artists and continues to the close of the 16th century and Mannerism, ending with
an appraisal of the art of El Greco.
Baroque and Rococo (1964) by Germain Bin. Bazin explores the richness and complexity of the Baroque and Rococo, taking
into account the persistence of earlier styles, and studies in depth the `Baroque' and `Realist' approaches to an, both of these
considered to be the two `new styles' of this period. The `Romanticism' of Rococo is also analysed.
Painting and Experience in 15th Century Italy (1972) by Michael Baxandall. This book serves as an introduction to painting
in Italy during the early Renaissance, and also introduces the reader to the technique of reading social history from the style of
the pictures produced. For Baxandall, Renaissance painting is closely `related to such activities as preaching, dancing, and
gauging barrels'.
The Medici (1980) by Marcel Brion. A history of this famous dynastic family of 15th-and 16th-century Florence, with
emphasis placed on their role as influential patrons of the arts. This book also gives clear insights into the social conditions,
intellectual climate, and artistic ideas that prevailed during this period.
Encyclopedia of the Italian Renaissance (1981) edited by J R Hale. An invaluable guide to every aspect of the Italian
Renaissance.
Patronage in Renaissance Italy (1994) by Mary Hollingsworth. Perhaps a little demanding for the uninitiated, but worth the
effort, for patronage was a vitally important factor in the development of Renaissance an.
Baroque (1977) by John Rupert Martin. Still one of the best introductions to the Baroque. Instead of looking at the Baroque in
Italy, the Baroque in France, and so on (the standard approach), Martin looks at the whole broad range of 17th-century art in
terms of such concepts as space, light, allegory, `passions of the soul'. A delight.
Neo-Classicism was a style of the late 18th and early 19th centuries strongly influenced by Classical an from the ancient Greek
and Roman empires - even to the point of some painters and sculptors taking their subject matter from ancient history and the
antique. This is seen especially in the works of the French artist Jacques Louis David. Neo-Classicism places great emphasis on
draughtsmanship, on pure, clean con-tours, on idealized and noble subjects treated in a solid, three-dimensional way. David's
The Death of Socrates is a key example.
The Romantic style of the 19th century arose as a direct reaction against the intellectual conceptions of the Neo-Classicists.
The clearly defined forms and cool tones of Neo-Classicism gives way to indefinite shapes, warm tones, and atmospheric
effects. In the French school of Romanticism, led by Eugene Delacroix, a love of the Oriental and exotic is seen; J M W Turner
and William Blake are considered to be the leading English Romantics.
How awful is the silence of the waste, / Where nature lifts her
mountains to the sky. / Majestic solitude, behold the tower /
Where hopeless Owen, long imprisoned, pined /
And wrung his hands for liberty, in vain.
JMW TURNER
Neo-Classicism (1968) by Hugh Honour. Short standard work. Honour's achievement lies in showing that Neo-Classicism, far
from being a conservative movement supporting establishment values, was the culmination of Enlightenment radicalism, high-
minded, idealistic, revolutionary. Artistically and politically it was the avant-garde of its day.
Civilisation (1969) by Kenneth Clark. This book is a classic portrayal of how western Europe evolved after the collapse of the
Roman Empire, and provides a very readable account of the major art produced within each age, a particularly good section
covering the time of both Neo-Classical and Romantic works of the 18th and early 19th centuries.
The Romantic Rebellion (1973) by Kenneth Clark. Here Clark gives a far more detailed account of Romanticism. Lucid and
authoritative, his account is of particular value because it focuses on the constant interplay between Romanticism and
Classicism.
The Story ofArt (1950) by E H Gombrich. The classic, standard textbook for all those interested in the arts as a total picture of
human endeavour from prehistoric times to the experimental art of the first half of the 20th century. The Age of Reason and the
subsequent break in tradition are clearly and interestingly set out by the author.
Rococo to Revolution (1966) by Michael Levey. This book covers the major trends in 18th-century painting, and is based on a
series of lectures given at Cambridge during the author's tenure there as Slade professor of an.
The Arts and Crafts Movement (1991) Elizabeth Cumming and Wendy Kaplan. Surveys all aspects of design within the
movement, including architecture, furniture, glass, ceramics, textiles, and books.
The Art of J M W Turner (1990) by David Blayney Brown. This is a comprehensive coverage of all aspects of the artist's
work, is beautifully illustrated, and avoids an academic approach in favour of using revealing analysis which vividly brings the
subject to life. Incorporating many original sources of information, such as letters, critics' reviews, and political records, the
author gives a complete background to Turner's life and times.
Art of the Romantic Era (1966) by Marcel Brion. Superbly illustrated history of Romantic art. This very accessible account is
particularly interesting because it looks not only at the many major figures, but also at a host of fascinating minor ones.
IMPRESSIONISM TO POST-IMPRESSIONISM
Francesca M Speight
This period includes the school of Realism, headed by the French artist Gustave Courbet, which turned its back on the
ennobling subject matter beloved by the official Academy, and focused instead on everyday contemporary scenes depicted in
an accurate manner rather than idealized or transformed into `picturesque' works. Another form of Realism is found in the
French Impressionist movement's output, but they saw their motifs in terms of the analysis of light, which produced a new way
of observing reality and has earned them the accolade of `the first modern movement' in the history of art.
Working through Impressionism and developing their own distinctive individuality where the Post-Impressionists, including
Georges Seurat (Neo-Impressionism), Paul Gauguin (a form of Symbolism), Vincent van Gogh (early Expressionism), and
Paul Cezanne (combining Realism and Classicism).
This period also includes the Pre-Raphaelite Brotherhood, an English group of idealistic young men drawn to medieval legends
and romantic literary sources as subject matter, but using a technique of microscopically detailed analysis, in which truth to
nature was uncompromisingly observed.
Impressionism (1967) by Phoebe Pool. A good basic textbook on the movement, ideal as an introduction.
The History of Impressionism (1973) by John Rewald. A detailed, extensively researched history of the movement by one of
the leading authorities. It was works like this that rescued Impressionism from chocolate-box sentimentality and gave it (after
decades of critical neglect) a firm intellectual and aesthetic foundation. Essential reading.
A History of Modern Art (1969) by H H Amason. A comprehensive guide, commencing with the prehistory of modem
painting and continuing through all the major movements and individual figures up to Conceptualism.
The Victorian Treasure House (1973) by Peter Conrad. A wide-ranging study of Victorian art, with excellent coverage of the
history and artistic output of the Pre-Raphaelites.
The New Painting: Impressionism 1847-1886 (1986) by Charles S Moffet. A scholarly presentation of the history of the
movement, with each of the Impressionist exhibitions dealt with in detail.
Impressionism and Post-Impressionism 1874-1904 (1966) by Linda Nochlin. A collection of sources and documents in the
History of An series, containing the critics' views of the movement at that time, accounts of the individual major masters, and
source material concerning Cezanne and the Neo Impressionists, van Gogh, Gauguin, and the Symbolists.
Cezanne (1989) by Hajo Duchting. This monograph critically analyses the successive stages of Cezanne's an in both subject
matter and style, culminating in the late, great paintings which earned him the name of the father of Modernism.
Realism (1971) by Linda Nochlin. A standard work, lucid and scholarly, which sets the many expressions of Realism within
the political and social upheavals of the second half of the 19th century.
20TH-CENTURY ART
Francesca M Speight
This period commences with Cubism, a movement considered to be the source of all subsequent abstract an. Pablo Picasso and
Georges Braque were the leading exponents of this new, intellectual approach to perception. Cubism produced many offshoots,
including such styles as Neo-Plasticism, represented by Piet Mondrian, and also the geometric reliefs of Britain's Ben
Nicholson. Concurrently a representational and intensely romantic stance in art continued alongside abstraction, as seen in
Fauvism in France and Expressionism in Germany.
Other major movements to emerge in the 20th century include Surrealism, with Salvador Dali and Rene Matte perhaps the
best-known exponents; American Abstract Expressionism exemplified by such artists as Jackson Pollock and Willem de
Kooning; and Pop an, which began in England but was taken up on a bigger and brasher scale by such Americans as Andy
Warhol and Roy Lichtenstein. Subsequent developments include Land art, Conceptual art, Installation an, Op an, and many
variations on past styles. The enfant terrible and darling of the art world at present is Damien Hirst, with his installations of
animal corpses displayed in tanks of formaldehyde. The shock element has always been associated with the avant-garde since
Courbet produced his unidealized peasant scenes, and it seems destined to stay.
Sometimes I think that extreme beauty must be absolutely humourless. But then I think of Marilyn Monroe and she had the
best fun lines.
ANDY WARHOL
The Story of Modern Art (1980) by Norbert Lynton. The author states his intention of not only helping readers towards a
confident relationship with modem art through providing information, but also actively encouraging the reader to combine this
information of historical facts and knowledge of the works themselves with his or her experience of modem life and thought.
Painting in the Twentieth Century (1961) by Werner Haftmann. Two invaluable volumes of material of modern art. Volume 1
is solely text and sources information; volume 2 consists mainly of illustrations to complement volume 1. However, the second
volume contains an excellent commentary throughout.
Art Today (1977) by Edward Lucie-Smith. Informative and lavishly illustrated, this book takes the reader through the birth of
Modernism in both painting and sculpture and continues to Post-Modernism and the revival of Classicism.
The Bride and the Bachelors (1965) by Calvin Tomkins. The eyewitness description of the Swiss sculptor Jean Tinguely
creating a self-destructing sculpture, complete with tooting horns and smoke bombs, is enough to make this book worth
seeking out. The essay on Marcel Duchamp is a good introduction to this seminal figure. Tomkins also writes about Robert
Rauschenberg and the composer John Cage.
The Shock of the New (1980) by Robert Hughes. One of the most lucid and authoritative histories of 20th-century art. Hughes
has broad sympathies, but is not shy about expressing his own preferences. Lavishly illustrated.
Warhol: The Biography (1989) by Victor Bockris. Warhol's life encompassed the heyday of the New York art scene, from
1950s Abstract Expressionism to the gallery graffiti of the 1980s. This acclaimed biography shows the interaction between the
artist's life and work. The films, freaks, drugs, and rock and roll are amply covered. An insider's view.
David Hockney (1976) by David Hockney. Britain's best-known living artist is also one of the best and least pretentious
communicators on the subject. This book has hundreds of pictures with his explanations.
How to Look at Modern Art (1991) by Philip Yenawine. A stimulating introduction to a broad range of modern artists. The
author (director of education at the Museum of Modem Art in New York) is less concerned with exploring the many complex
theories that underlie modern an than with encouraging readers/viewers to explore their own reactions to specific works.
What Is Post-Modernism? (1986) by Charles Jencks. Short, surprisingly lucid account of a very complex and still
controversial subject. A good starting point, wherever your sympathies may lie.
PHOTOGRAPHY
Susan Sontag
To write about photography, as I discovered when I was writing my own essays on the subject, is nothing less than to write
about the world. There is no activity that is distinctively modem which so evidently touches on and obliges us to confront the
principal issues of modernity - political, moral, and aesthetic. We all take photographs or think we could or should. More
important, we all understand a great deal of the world - indeed, reality itself - through the medium of, and by the standards set
by, photographed images. Resisting the temptation to use my allotment of recommendations to cite some contemporary
favourite books of photographs, from The Americans (1958) by Robert Frank to The Silence (1995) by Gilles Peress, I've
chosen instead to list a number of books which can give the curious reader a complex sense of the history of photography and
the rich debate about the many issues raised by its imperious scope.
Earlier much futile thought had been devoted to the question of whether
photography is an an. The primary question - whether the very invention of
photography had not transformed the entire nature of an - was not raised.
WALTER BENJAMIN
Looking at Photographs (1973) by John Szarkowski. One hundred pictures from the collection of the Museum of Modern Art
chosen and commented on by John Szarkowski, the director of the Department of Photography at MoMA for several decades
and a leading influence in the formation of contemporary photographic taste.
Art and Photography (1968) by Aaron Scharf. A rapid, lucid historical overview of the relation between photography and
other visual arts, particularly painting.
Photographers on Photography (1966) edited by Nathan Lyons. An anthology of statements by some of the great
photographers, starting from the turn of the century. Among those included are Alfred Stieglitz, Berenice Abbott, Man Ray,
Ansel Adams, Paul Strand, Henri Cartier-Bresson, and Robert Frank.
Photography in the Modern Era (1989) edited by Christopher Phillips. A more ample collection of statements by important
photographers and critical writings and manifestoes about photography covering the period from 1913 to 1940. The critics
(many of them visual artists in their own right) and photographers are all European. Among them are Jean Cocteau, Laszlo
Moholy-Nagy, August Sander, Alexander Rodchenko, and F T Marinetti.
Photography in Print (1981) edited by Vicki Goldberg. Another anthology of statements by photographers and critics, this
one covering the whole history of photography from Niepce and Fox Talbot forward. Perhaps not surprisingly (so rich is this
literature), there is hardly any overlap between the documents selected for this anthology and the two listed above.
On Photography (1977) by Susan Sontag. A cycle of six essays written between 1973 and 1976 about some of the problems,
aesthetic and moral, posed by the omnipresence of photographed images. The first book-length consideration in English on
photography as such.
Camera Lucida (1980) by Roland Barthes. One of the last books by the great French critic, and a highly personal, partly
autobiographical, meditation on the pathos and seductiveness of certain kinds of photographed images.
The Waking Dream (1993) by Maria Morris Hambourg and Pierre Apraxine (curators). The catalogue for the exhibition in
1993 at New York's Metropolitan Museum of Art of selections from the Gilman Paper Company holdings, which may be the
world's most beautiful and original private photography collection. The span of the collection, which includes great
photographs by unknown photographers as well as little-known masterpieces by most of the great names, is from 1839, the
inception of photography, to the 1930s.
The Photographic Experience, 1839-1914: Images and Attitudes (1993) by Heinz K Henisch and Bridget A Henisch. A
sophisticated, sociologically alert retelling of the complex development of photography in all genres: as art, as commerce, as an
adjunct to science and to the exercise of political power.
Photography Against the Grain: Essays and Photo Works 1973-1983 (1984) by Allan Sekula. An incisive early example of
the recent literature on the ideological implications, frequently conformist, of the taking of photographs in many conventional
contexts.
FASHION: HISTORY OF FASHION
Jacqueline Herald
The first histories of dress were published in the 19th century. They focused on period costume and were used as a visual
reference source for theatre designers and artists depicting historical themes. In the early 20th century, more radical texts on
fashion considered the psychological dimension of dress and identity. More recently, books on historic and contemporary
fashion have fallen into four main categories: manuals on cut and construction of historic garments; glossy descriptive books
about haute couturiers, emphasizing style, texture of fabrics, and ingenious decorative details; educational books with line
drawings, presenting a chronology of dress and how it reflects the lifestyle of a particular period; and socio-anthropological
studies of dress as cultural system of signs, denoting distinctions of gender, class, and attitude, both individually and
collectively.
Common sense and most historians of costume have assumed that the
demands of either utility, status or sex must have been responsible for
the invention of clothing. However ... scholars have recently informed
us that the original purpose of clothing was magical.
ALISON I.CTRIE
A History of Men's Fashion (1993) by Farid Chenoune. Generally fashion histories have focused on women; this is an
interesting overview of the development of menswear since the French Revolution.
Adorned in Dreams: Fashion and Modernity (1985) by Elizabeth Wilson. An excellent introduction: a brief history followed
by discussion of the industry, eroticism, gender and identity, fashion in the city, popular culture, and dress reform.
Chic Thrills: A Fashion Reader (1992) edited by Juliet Ash and Elizabeth Wilson.
A compilation of essays on the language of clothes, the relationship between high fashion and popular culture, and on utopian
and alternative dress.
Costume and Fashion: A Concise History (1985) by James Laver. Laver pioneered the study of dress history in the 1960s,
setting fashion in the context of cultural and economic change.
Dress and Morality (1986) by Aileen Ribeiro. A historical inquiry into attitudes towards extravagance and modesty and how
individuals, church, and state affected the clothed image.
Dress and Gender: Making and Meaning (1992) edited by Ruth Barnes and Joanne B Eicher. An intriguing range of
anthropological case studies on the meaning of apparel and textiles in determining women's status within different cultures
around the world.
Fashion, Culture and Identity (1992) by Fred David. A sociological analysis of what makes the fashion industry tick,
partially based on interviews with fashion designers.
Fashions of a Decade: 1920s to 1990s (1991-93) by Patricia Baker, Vicky Carnegie, Yvonne Connikie, Maria Constantino,
Elane Feldman, Jacqueline Herald. Aimed at teenagers, lively, with images of the period and newly commissioned illustrations.
Succinct text, nevertheless introduces many aspects of fashion history. A good starting point for the younger reader.
Seeing Through Clothes (1975) by Anne Hollander. Discusses the history of different ways of depicting people, attitudes of
the period, especially in historic painting and sculpture.
The Face of Fashion (1993) by Jennifer Craik. An up-to-date sociocultural approach; well argued and accessible text on how
identities are communicated through clothes.
A style does not go out of style as long as it adapts itself to its period.
When there is an incompatibility between the style and a certain state
of mind, it is never the style that triumphs.
COCO CHANEL
The Fashion Conspiracy (1988) by Nicholas Coleridge. A lively, gossipy, and highly entertaining account of the top designers'
fashion empires, from catwalk to sweatshop, written by the editor of Harpers and Queen magazine.
Jocks and Nerds (1989) by Richard Martin and Harold Koda. This is a witty visual history of men's fashion in the 20th
century. It examines the leaders of style within social types and the particular looks associated with them, including the
Cowboy, the Military Man, the Rebel, Joe College, the Businessman, and the Man about Town.
Fashion Sourcebook (1988) by Amy de la Haye. A general directory of the key people, ideas, and looks in 20th-century
fashion.
Street Style (1994) by Ted Polhemus. The book of the Victoria and Albert Museum exhibition of that name, tracing the
transition of subcultural dress from sidewalk to catwalk. It looks at punks, New Romantics, New Age travellers, and other
groups which have hit the music stage and the news headlines and then influenced mainstream fashion in modified forms.
Women of Fashion (1991) by Valerie Steele. A look at some of the most influential women in the world of fashion in this
century, including the great Coco Chanel and Elsa Schiaparelli.
Cult Objects (1985) by Deyan Sudjic. The `yuppie' 1980s is the period in which, arguably, conspicuous consumption adopted
an unprecedented degree of status for everyone. Cult looks and individual credibility did not just depend on clothes, but on the
gadgets and accessories wom or displayed with them. Sudjic discusses with humour and irony the reasons behind the language
of Rolex watches, Anglepoise lamps, four-wheel drive vehicles in to, and dress classics such as Levi 501s and the Burberry
raincoat.
There are numerous books on the crafts, which fall into distinct categories. Potted histories can be found in dictionaries of
decorative arts, which are useful for general reference: more detailed and often generously illustrated books on craft are
devoted either to a particular craft discipline or the types of objects most closely associated with it (such as textiles, ceramics,
jewellery), or to a particular country or culture. In an industrial or postindustrial world, the crafts are often viewed with
nostalgia, being perceived as traditional and handmade from natural materials, even though contemporary craft practice
incorporates machines, computers, and synthetic media. A very large proportion of the books available are of the `how to do it'
type, extremely instructive but sometimes lacking in imagination.
The story of craft is not only the story of man's increasing skill with materials
and increasing power over the natural environment; it provides in addition,
evidence of the way in which society itself has developed. Men often define
themselves through the skills they acquire, and the uses to which they put them.
EDWARD LUCIE-SMITH
World Crafts (1992) by Jacqueline Herald. Written in collaboration with Oxfam Trading, this explains the processes and
meaning behind crafts from around the world, particularly in developing countries where women especially have turned to craft
as a means of generating income. It explains the reasons for changes to traditional designs in adapting products to the Western
tourist and export markets.
The Story of Craft (1981) by Edward Lucie-Smith. To the expert, this is an infuriatingly general history. However, it is a
worthwhile introduction to the craftsperson's role in society from the ancient world to today's craft revival. The focus is
Europe, but Islam and the Far East are discussed for their contribution to craft skills and organization, and in relation to modem
craft movements.
International Crafts (1991) edited by Martina Margetts. This is a compendium of the best of contemporary craft from around
the world, covering many different techniques and media. Although highly selective, it is a useful survey and includes a good
introductory essay on the state of crafts in the late 20th century.
The Unknown Craftsman (1989) by Soetsu Yanagi. Subtitled `A Japanese Insight into Beauty', this book by the poet and an
critic Yanagi, who was close to the British potter Bernard Leach and to the Japanese potter Shoji Hamada, questions the value
of handwork. He was instrumental in the 1920s in cultivating the appreciation of Japanese folk an as the country was rapidly
industrializing. His collection of folk an became the nucleus of the Mingei-kan, the Japanese Folk Art Museum in Tokyo. The
questions raised have a universal relevance in that they consider the artistic role of the studio-based maker within a mechanized
world.
Women and Craft (1987) by Gillian Elinor and others. A feminist look at women's craft as personal creativity in domestic and
professional settings.
DESIGN
Guy Julier
Since its inception as a professional activity in the late 19th century, design has been a haphazard activity. In bridging the gap
between the conception and execution of objects, designers have invariably moved between the creative and the formulaic, the
intellectual and the manual, the cultural and the commercial. Its lack of `rules' or professional norms is mirrored in the breadth
of design writing. In its early form, design publications sought professional legitimacy by drawing on traditional modes of
architectural and art criticism and history. Design was explained as the result of the work of individual `hero' designers.
However, in recent years, with the development of design history and criticism as a separate academic discipline, design
writing has taken in a broader range of perspectives. On the one hand writers have sought explanations for the look or existence
of artefacts in terms of their production, taking into account such aspects as technology, materials, the organization of labour,
and distribution systems. Consumption has also been taken into account: thus design has begun to be read from the point of
view of the user's experience. This may range from the very scientific approach within ergonomics to the more theoretical
readings of the role of desire and fantasy in consumerism, informed by a psychoanalytical approach. It remains clear, however,
that with the growing professionalization of design practice and its ascendant academic status, the historical gap between its
practice and criticism is narrowing.
Design has a twofold relation, having in the first place, a strict reference to utility
in the thing designed; and secondarily, to the beautifying or ornamenting that utility.
The word design, however, with the many has become identified rather
with its secondary than with its whole signification - with ornament, as apart from,
and often even as opposed to, utility. From thus confounding that which is
in itself but an addition, with that which is essential, has arisen many of those
great errors in taste which are observable in the works of modern designers.
HENRY COLE, 1849
Pioneers of the Modern Movement (1936) by Nikolaus Pevsner. Republished as Pioneers of Modern Design 1960. Invariably
invoked as the first design-history book to be published, Pevsner's account tracks the development of design practice and ideas
from the doctrines of William Moms in the late 19th century to the Modernist canons of Walter Gropius in the 1920s. Relying
on an account of individual architect/designers, the book assesses each of them in terms of their contributions towards
Modernism as the zenith of design.
Mechanization Takes Command: A Contribution to Anonymous History (1948) by Sigfried Giedion. Whereas Pevsner was
clearly a Modernist, Giedion's history of design is that of a technological determinist. His study tracks the rise of the designer
and designed objects as the result of developments in industrial production and materials technology.
Theory and Design in the First Machine Age (1960) by Reyner Barham. This lively text suggests that the history of design in
the early 20th century was not so much a development to a purist aesthetic as Pevsner had argued. Rather, the pioneer
European modernists were in fact responding to the exciting new challenges of technological development such as
transportation and electrification.
Objects of Desire (1985) by Adrian Forty. Forty places the history of design within social history. He reads the development of
office design as part of the changing pat-terns of labour, the development of bathrooms through attitudes to hygiene. Thus he
retrieves the `consumer' as a key force in the shaping of design practice and ideas.
An Introduction to Design and Culture in the Twentieth Century (1986) by Penny Sparke. Key developments in design are
treated thematically in this inquiry: issues such as education, materials technology, mass consumption, and the rise of
consultant design are covered in this global account. The book therefore reveals the eclectic nature of design history.
Twentieth-Century Ornament (1990) by Jonathon Woodham. Lavishly illustrated, this book eschews a discussion of heady
design philosophy in favour of popular artefacts - ceramics, textiles, fashion, posters, public monuments, and entertainment
architecture. The text analyses interactions between taste and consumerism, the decorative arts, the fine arts and architecture
and design, to reveal tensions which invariably give rise to reaffirmations of nostalgia and nationalism in ornament.
A View from the Interior: Feminism, Women and Design (1989) edited by Judy Attfield and Pat Kirkham. Drawing on a
range of feminist readings of design and the consumption of design, this discursive book largely centres on women and design
in Britain since the mid-19th century. It analyses how views of femininity have been constructed within design as well as the
lived experience of women designers and consumers.
Graphic Design: A Concise History (1994) by Richard Hollis. Covering most 20th-century graphic design forms - from the
poster to digitization - this whirlwind tour links the major graphic designers to their commercial and theoretical contexts.
Quotations and Sources on Design and the Decorative Arts (1993) by Paul Greenhalgh. This compendium of quotations is
arranged thematically and provides a useful short cut to source material as well as key reflections within the historiography of
design.
The Meanings of Modern Design (1990) by Peter Dormer. This highly readable critique considers design as the product of
economic forces. It then analyses the various, and sometimes contradictory, value systems which define and guide design
practice. Thus he discusses such contemporary conceptions as `craft', `style', `engineering', and `high design'.
Design After Modernism (1986) edited by John Thackara. After two decades of design history and criticism that either
confirmed the Pevsnerian approach or struggled free from it, this book brought together a series of texts reflecting the
eclecticism of design writing. It also marked the convergence of practice and theory in design - some of its contributors, such
as Nigel Coates, were also professional practitioners of design. New challenges to design, such as the development of digitized
technologies, were thus brought into the debate for the first time.
Manufactured Pleasures: Psychological Responses to Design (1994) by Ray Crozier. A discursive text which examines the
major psychoanalytic theories and subsequently considers how our perception of artefacts is governed by the subconscious.
Autobiography and Memoirs
The opportunity to make a recension of one's own life is clearly difficult to resist—and results, more often than not, in mayfly
publishing, a few hours' dance in the sun followed by oblivion. Our choice (a selective one) is based first on excellence (of
perception or style), and second on relevance (a person of lasting interest or an age defined). Particularly interesting are
memoirs which can be checked for bias. and those of writers whose main work is in other fields. The selection of material from
one's own life is a critical act, sometimes as revealing as the incidents of that life themselves. If Beethoven had written an
autobiography, would it have been about earache or symphonies?
See ART (Haydon); BIOGRAPHY (Trelawny); CHILDREN'S BOOKS (Durrell); DRAMA (Cibber); FILM (Brown. Fields,
Griffith, Love, Montagu, Niven, Parrish); HISTORY/BRITISH (Burnet); HUMOUR (Milligan); MATHEMATICS
(Heisenberg, Watson); MEDIA (Higham, Knopf); MEDICINE (Copeland); MUSIC (Berlioz, Kirkpatrick, Stravinsky, Varese);
NATURAL HISTORY (Bewick, Burton, Durrell, Maxwell, Waterton); OCCULT (Bennett, J. B., Lethbridge); RELIGION
(Newman, Phillips); TRAVEL (Genet, Lawrence. Schultz, Twain)
Bamford, Francis (ed) A Royalist's Notebook: The Commonplace Book of Sir John Oglander, Knight, of Nunwell, 1622–
1652 (1936) 9 Ise
Oglander lived on the Isle of Wight during the English Civil War. The book transcends temporal detail as a picture of the horror
evoked by such uprisings; particularly good on social horror, the bewilderment of the ruling class when the lower orders
suddenly, inexplicably, get out of hand.
Fox, George Journal (1694) 9 Written by the founder of Quakerism, with hindsight, in sedater, pacifist old age; a vivid picture
of the social and religious crisis from which the Quakers emerged. Franklin, Benjamin Autobiography (1771-88)
The quintessential American success story, from rags not only to riches, but also to great political influence and power and an
eternal warm spot in the hearts of all his countrymen. Franklin the adventurer, the printer and businessman, the scientist, the
politician are here; Franklin the lover and friend must be assumed from other sources. See BIOGRAPHY (Van Doren)
Gandhi, Mahatma Autobiography: The Story of My Experiences with Truth (1924)
Written in and out of prison during the early 1920s, this simple, direct, revealing document inspired millions, and led others to
assume that Gandhi, however great, was after all only a man.
Gosse, Edmund Father and Son( 1907) 0P Study of a relationship: classic of the genre. Gosse senior was an eminent
marine biologist (he crossed swords with Darwin), and a fanatical member of the Plymouth Brethren. A widower, he brought
up his son (author of this book) "in the nurture and admonition of the Lord", until the boy finally went to boarding school and
discovered his own soul.
Hart, Basil Liddell (ed) The Rornmel Papers (1950) IS * One of the best diaries from World War II. Charts Rommel's gradual
disillusionment with Hitler, from the time of his own early victories to his forced suicide. Bitter, eloquent evidence for the
grandeur and waste of war. See Speer; BIOGRAPHY (Bullock); HISTORY/EUROPEAN; POLITICS (Stern)
Lee, Laurie Cider with Rosie (1959) it * Superb evocation of childhood and 1920s British countryside, a book as good as that
of Hudson (qv). Also: As I Walked Out One Midsummer Morning, etc
Saint Simon, Louis de Rouvroy, Duc de Memoirs (18th century) P* Discursive, ironic, waspish: among the best memoirs
ever published. Vivid, caustic picture by a survivor of Louis XIV's court. Style at first indigestible, then compulsive.
Sitwell, Osbert Left Hand, Right Hand (1944 – 46) too The Sitwells were to 1920s and 1930s Britain what the Algonquin set
was to the USA: inessential but definitive. Eccentrics all, they were often extremely funny, and never lost an iron grasp of their
own self-importance and their putative place in English letters. (See John Pearson's Facades for efficient outside account.) See
OCCULT (Sitwell, S.); POETRY (Sitwell, E.)
Modern biography combines the skills of historian, essayist, psycho-analyst, critic and (biographers like to think) novelist. The
books in this list are chosen, like those in Autobiography and Memoirs, for the importance or interest of the subject and for
evocation of period or character. They fall into two categories: objective, where historian and critic predominate, and
subjective, where memoirist and analyst tend to take over (and where what a writer says about his subject is often deeply
revealing of himself). One or two cases (for example Sartre on Genet and Troyat on Tolstoy) stray delightfully (or
scandalously) into fiction. Whether biography is an art or not—and despite the documentary fetish which has led to renewed
prolixity in recent times (for example in Michael Holroyd, after all the slimming work of Lytton Strachey)—it is nearly always
metaphorical or allegorical: for a life can never be written: it must be lived.
See ART (Smith, Vasari); DRAMA (Fitzsimons); HISTORY/ AMERICAN (Aaron. Morgan, Woodward);
HISTORY/ANCIENT (Selzer); HISTORY/ASIAN (Suyin); HISTORY/BRITISH (Hibbert, Longford, Magnus, Neale, Plumb,
Scarisbrick, Willson); HISTORY/EUROPEAN (Geyl, Grey, Massie, Origo, Tyler); FILM (McCabe. Septon, Taylor);
LITERARY CRITICISM (Hazlitt); MATHEMATICS (Davis, Moszkowski. Reid); MEDIA (Berg); MUSIC (Einstein, Nichols,
Nolan, White); NATURAL HISTORY (Adams, Blunt); PSYCHOLOGY (Watson); RELIGION (Wat, Wendel); TRAVEL
(Ronay)
Boswell, James The Life of Samuel Johnson L1.D. (1791) P * Perhaps the one assured world classic in English biography.
Remarkable for its almost proverbial re-creation of Johnson's talk; for acute observation of English foible and eccentricity; for
power to set a scene and adjudge an encounter; for gathering sense of the moral greatness of its subject, and above all for deep
underlying affection. Also: A Journal of a Tour to the Hebrides. See Bate; Johnson; Krutch; DIARIES; LITERARY
CRITICISM (Johnson); REFERENCE (Johnson); TRAVEL (Johnson)
Bullock, Alan Hitler: A Study in Tyranny (1952) 109J Measured, convincing, composedly British account of Hitler's
extraordinary character and destructive genius. The narrative of the years up to 1940 is unsurpassed; more recent research, and
re-assessment of evidence from the Nuremberg Trials, have challenged Bullock's picture of the final years. See
AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Hart, Speer); POLITICS (Arendt, Stern)
Froude, James Thomas Carlyle (4 vols, 1882-84) 9 One of the great Victorian classics of biography. Central to Carlyle's life
was his unhappy and unfulfilled marriage, which Fro ude depicted with a sympathy (for the wife) and a frankness that outraged
his contemporaries; yet Carlyle the writer and prophet emerges with a bitter grandeur. Excellent one-volume abridgement by
John Clubbe (1979). Also: My Relations with Carlyle. See DIARIES (Carlyle); LITERARY CRITICISM (Carlyle)
Gerin, Winifred Branwell Bronte (1961) * The most haunting of an impressive series of biographies which together
reconstruct the entire Bronte world. Also: The Brontës (2 vols. See Gaskell; FICTION/NOVELS (Bronte)
Green, Peter Kenneth Grahame, 1859-1932 (1959) f * At Classical scholar subjects the author of much-loved The Wind in the
Willows to a sensitive post-Freudian interpretation, emphasizing the passing of an Edwardian bachelor golden age. Provoking,
and thought-provoking too. See CHILDREN'S BOOKS (Grahame)
Grigson, Geoffrey Samuel Palmer: The Visionary Years (1947) P 3 Mt Grigson has written on folklore, herbalism, wild
flowers, topography, poetry and painting; probably none of his books have combined these elements so magically as this early
biographical study. The book put Palmer (the most English of rural
painters) on the map after years of neglect. Also: Samuel Palmer's Valley of Vision
Howarth, David The Desert King: Ibn Saud, Founder of Saudi Arabia (1964)
Wonderful swashbuckling biography of the father of his country—and also of more than 125 sons and an uncounted number of
daughters (not uncountable, just uncounted).
Johnson, Dr Samuel The Lives of the Most Eminent English Poets (1783) P*?
Celebrated studies of 52 poets (including Donne, Milton, Dryden, Pope, Gray) from the early 17th century to the late 18th.
18th-century prose at its magisterial, grandiloquent best. See Bate: Boswell; Krutch; LITERARY CRITICISM; REFERENCE;
TRAVEL
Nicolson, Harold King George V: His Life and Reign (1952) P./
Dignified, engaging portrait of a monarch at the centre of a declining empire. Also: Curzon: The Last Phase; The Development
of English Biography; Some People. See DIARIES
Renoir, Jean Renoir My Father (1962) & Intimate, uninhibited picture of a great painter. From life—or studio portrait?
The father-figure is very like a Michel Simon performance from one of Jean Renoir's early films. Still, a stylish evocation of
French country life, and of the quirks and dedication of the creative mind.
Renoir, Jean, French, 1894-1979.
Renoir, My Father. Rec: Counterpunch Trans
Sandburg, Carl Abraham Lincoln: The Prairie Years (2 vols, 1926-29); The War Years (4 vols, 1939)
There are many biographies of Lincoln—he is an irresistible subject—and many are good, but Sandburg's magnum opus is
probably the most monumental and endearing. See DIARIES (Lincoln)
Thompson, E. P. William Morris: From Romantic to Revolutionary (1955) 9 Brilliant, dogmatic biography by leading
left-wing historian. "The transformation of the eccentric artist and romantic literary man into the socialist agitator may be
counted among the great conversions of the world." See HISTORY/BRITISH
Tomalin, Claire The Life and Death of Mary Wollstonecraft (1974) Short, admirably balanced life of the first British feminist
(1759-97), author of Vindication of the Rights of Women. See FEMINISM (Wollstonecraft)
Trelawny, Edward John Records of Shelley, Byron, and the Author (1858)
Trelawny was a natural raconteur, and his bubbling, opinionated and often mendacious biography, packed with dramatic
incident and reconstructed dialogue, reads with all the life and outrageousness of a Ken Russell film. See Holmes; Marchand;
DIARIES (Byron); POETRY (Byron)
Trevor-Roper, Hugh A Hidden Life: The Enigma of Sir Edmund Backhouse (1976)
Full of fantastic sexual adventures at the turn of the 19th century, this remarkable biography patiently reconstructs the life of a
forger, swindler and conman who, among other things, sold the British Government 200,000 non-existent rifles in 1915. Also:
Archbishop Laud; The Last Days of Hitler
Zweig, Stefan Three Masters (1920) * These studies of Balzac, Dickens and Dostoyevsky show the early influence of
Freudian psychology, and Zweig's own special brand of imaginative-biographical criticism. Also: Master Builders (HOlderlin,
von Kleist, Nietzsche). See FICTION/NOVELS (Balzac, Dickens, Dostoyevsky)
BIOGRAPHY
Claire Tomalin
Biographies are on the whole ephemeral. Nothing seems so old-fashioned as the biographies of the 1920s, gathering dust on
library shelves. The exceptions are those that are fired by passion and understanding of their subject and period, and writ-ten
with as much an as good fiction. A biography cannot put you inside someone else's skin, as fiction tries to, but it can (and
should) immerse you in another world. The biographer draws on many disciplines - history, geography, sociology, medicine,
psychology, an history among them - and has to be a scholarly jackdaw, picking up bits of information wherever they can be
found. There may also be an intention to establish or restore a reputation, reveal a social problem, or do justice where it has not
hitherto been done. Among the earliest English-language biographies are William Roper's of his father-in-law Thomas More
(1626) and Izaac Walton's of the poet John Donne (1641); biography has been much more popular with the English and the
Americans than with other nations.
A true delineation of the smallest man, and his scene of pilgrimage through life, is
capable of interesting the greatest man; ... all men are to an unspeakable degree
brothers, each man's life a strange emblem of every man's; and ... Human
Portraits, faithfully drawn, are of all pictures the welcomest on human walls.
THOMAS CARLYLE
The Life of Samuel Johnson (1791) by James Boswell. By general consent one of the greatest books in the language, for its
first-hand portrait of the man and rendering of his conversation, and for the art with which Boswell put his material together
after the death of his friend.
Memoirs of the Author of A Vindication of the Rights of Woman (1798) by William Godwin. Written immediately after the
death of Godwin's wife, Mary Wollstonecraft, in childbirth. Its frankness about her private life, extraordinary for the time,
made it a cause of scandal, but it is a deeply affecting short account in which the characters of both author and subject emerge
with striking force.
Life of John Sterling (1851) by Thomas Carlyle. Sterling was a minor literary figure, poet, and friend of the poet and critic S
T Coleridge, and a political idealist who in his youth planned to assist in the overthrow of Ferdinand VII of Spain, only failing
to join the disastrous expedition at the last minute, remaining behind to get married instead. He died in his thirties of
tuberculosis, mourned by his many devoted friends, but he would scarcely be remembered were it not for Carlyle's affectionate
tribute.
The Life of Charlotte Bronte (1857) by Elizabeth Gaskell. Another scandalous book when it first appeared, it is the tribute of
a friend and a finely judged account of the almost overwhelming difficulties facing a woman of genius attempting to work in a
society that preferred women to be purely domestic creatures. It remains brilliantly readable, and can profitably be followed up
by Jenny Uglow's excellent Elizabeth Gaskell 1993.
John Keats (1968) by Robert Gittings. Casts new light on the process of composition as well as the life of the poet; a masterly
study.
Henry James (1953-1972) by Leon Edel. A five-volume study, totally absorbing to admirers of James's work. It is the product
of immense labour, feelingly written, and still the best available. (There is an abridged version, but what Jamesian would want
that?)
Disraeli (1966) by Robert Blake. A classic political biography, magisterial in pace and tone, and enthralling.
The Rise and Fall of the Man of Letters (1969) by John Gross. Could be called a group biography, one of the most
entertaining, original, and informative ever written.
Alan Turing: The Enigma of Intelligence (1983) by Andrew Hodge. This gave many readers their first insight into the
development of computer technology, and at the same time an appalling revelation about officially sanctioned persecution of
homosexuals, for Turing ended his life in suicide.
Mrs Humphry Ward (1990) by John Sutherland. Minor subject, major biography of a best-selling niece of Matthew Arnold
and aunt of Aldous Huxley, indomitable charity worker, hypochondriac, and anti-suffragette: a witty, marvellous book.
Coleridge: Early Visions (1989) by Richard Holmes. A finely wrought account which takes the reader out walking the fells
with the poet as well as into his intricate and sometimes disordered mind; the narrative rises to a wonderful climax.
Children's Books
Any list of children's books should make nostalgic browsing for adults; but it should also include the sort of books children
actually still read. This list is a choice of classics (all recommend-ably readable, and read) and good contemporary books,
potentially of classic status too.
See DIARIES (Frank); FICTION/NOVELS (Swift, Twain): FICTION/SHORT STORIES (Grimm): HUMOUR (Schulz);
REFERENCE (Merit, New Arthur Mee, Opie); RELIGION (Bible)
De La Mare, Walter Come Hither(1923) * Wide-ranging poetry anthology by one of the best-loved 20th-century poets. If
you buy no other poetry anthologies, buy this one. (8+) Also: Collected Stories for Children; Three Royal Monkeys, etc
Dixon, E. (ed) Fairy Tales from the Arabian Nights ( 1958) * Arabia, China and India all contributed to these folk tales of
the East, which have been used as bedtime stories since Scheherazade first captured her audience. This well-illustrated edition
(pictures by Kiddell-Monro) recommended. (7+)
Garfield, Leon The Strange Affair of Adelaide Harris (1971) Garfield is a leading exponent of the historical novel with an
18th- or 19th-century setting; this book introduces an element of farce, which allows full play for his ironic wit. Alarums and
excursions at Dr Bunnion's Academy after Harris attempts to expose his infant sister according to the customs of ancient
Sparta. (10+)
Milne, A. A. Winnie-the-Pooh (1926) *.11A This clumsy, greedy and lovable bear has been bumbling his way into
children's affections for more than half a century. Timeless; enchanting. (6+) Also: The House at Pooh Corner, When We Were
Very Young; Now We Are Six, etc
Potter, Beatrix The Tale of Peter Rabbit (1900) * Although Potter's animals are anthropomorphized, they never suffer
from the coy sentimentality displayed by less able executants. Her down-to-earth directness makes no concessions to "childish"
vocabulary or tender emotions: Peter's father was "put in a pie and eaten". (2+) Also: The Tale of Mrs Tiggywinkle; The Tale of
Benjamin Bunny, etc
Proysen, Alf Little Old Mrs Pepperpot and Other Stories (1958) lb Old woman wakes up one morning, finds herself
size of a pepperpot, loses no opportunity to take full advantage. Witty slapstick, like updated folk-tales. (6+)
Sendak, Maurice Where the Wild Things Are (1970) * Original, imaginative picture book: little boy can tame wild things
simply by staring at them. Especially good with young children who suffer from nightmares about wild animals and monsters.
Also: In the Night Kitchen, etc
Sharmat, Marjorie Getting Something on Maggie Marmelstein (1971) Splendid saga of life at American Junior High School.
Thaddeus Gideon Smith V has a worst enemy, Maggie Marmelstein, who Knows Something Terrible about him. He sets out to
restore the balance of the sex-war by playing Frog to her Princess in the school play. (9+ ) Also: Goodnight Andrew, Goodnight
Craig; Gladys Told Me to Meet Her Here, etc.
Wilder, Laura Ingalls The Little House in the Big Woods (1932)
In this and other "Little House" books the author wrote about her own childhood in 19th-century pioneer America. Warmth and
sincerity have endeared these stories to generations of children. (8+) Also: Little House on the Prairie, etc
CHILDREN'S LITERATURE
Alison Lurie
Until about 20 years ago children's literature was the Cinderella of literary studies. Everyone read fairy tales and books like
Tom Sawyer, The Wizard of Oz, and Winnie-the-Pooh when they were young, but almost no one thought about them seriously
later. This meant that some of the most original and influential works of all time were overlooked by critics and scholars. Today
the situation is much improved. Many universities in America now offer courses in children's literature, and there are several
first-rate periodicals in the field, including Children's Literature, Children's Literature Quarterly, and The Lion and the Unicorn.
And good books about the subject, including those listed below, continue to appear.
Nothing you do for children is ever wasted. They seem
not to notice us, hovering, averting our eyes, and they seldom
offer thanks, but what we do for them is never wasted.
GARRISON KEILLOR
Childhood's Pattern: A Study of the Heroes and Heroines of Children's Fiction 1770-1950 (1975) by Gillian Avery. A very
well-informed, interesting, and thoughtful study by a recognized British authority, who is also the author of many much-
admired historical novels for children. It is especially good on England and on the 18th and early 19th centuries.
The Seed and the Vision: On the Writing and Appreciation of Children's Books (1993) by Eleanor Cameron. A collection
of sensitive and wide-ranging essays by the American critic, author of many popular children's books, and winner of the
Commonwealth Award. The focus is meditative and personal rather than analytic.
Secret Gardens: A Study of the Golden Age of Children's Literature (1985) by Humphrey Carpenter. Brilliant, original, and
knowledgeable discussion of the most famous writers for children by a well-known British biographer who is also the coeditor
of the Oxford Companion to Children's Literature.
Audacious Kids: Coming of Age in America's Classic Children's Books (1992) by Jerry Griswold. This is a lively,
intelligent, and much needed study of American fiction for children from a cultural-history point of view. It includes and
analyses some immensely popular books like Toby Tyler and Pollyanna, which have often been over-looked by other writers.
Fairy Tales and After: From Snow White to E B White (1978) by Roger Sale. An unusual and well-written collection of
essays on works of children's literature and folk-lore, and what they have meant to the author, addressed to the general reader
as well as the expert. Professor Sale's earlier book, Man Reading and Child Reading: Oz, Babar, and Pooh is also interesting.
Breaking the Magic Spell: Radical Theories of Folk and Fairy Tales (1979) by Jack Zipes. Professor Zipes, a world-class
expert on the folk tale, is also one of the most interesting and original writers on modem fairy tales. As the title suggests, his
approach is radical, with an emphasis on social and political history. His recent Don't Bet on the Prince: Contemporary
Feminist Fairy Tales in North America and England (1986) combines the best examples of the genre with a first-rate analysis.
Diaries and Letters
For the reader, diaries and letters offer the voyeur's pleasure of a peep into other people's (more or less) unguarded lives; for the
writer, anticipating this reaction, they are often a carefully contrived and artfully autobiographical form. The books on this list
are of three kinds: those written from the start with publication in mind; those arranged, more or less cosmetically, for
publication by the writers themselves; and (a rare few) intimate, personal documents intended for the writers' use alone.
See ART (Delacroix, Haydon, Pisarro); DRAMA (Redfield); FEMINISM (Rosen); HISTORY/ASIAN (Preble); HUMOUR
(Gros-smith); LITERARY CRITICISM (Keats); MEDIA (King, Nowell-Smith); NATURAL HISTORY (Banks, Douglas-
Hamilton, Holden, White); OCCULT (Reyner); RELIGION (Bonhoeffer, Weil); TRAVEL (Cook, Lewis)
Abelard, Pierre and Héloïse, French writing in Latin, 1079-1142 and 1101-1164.
Letters. Rec: Rexmo Ward
Historia Calamitatum. Rec: Ward
Barrett, E. and Browning, R. The Letters of Robert Browning and Elizabeth Barrett, 1845-46(1897)
Love letters can make boring reading, unless you happen to be the recipient. However, these are extraordinary. A bizarre,
intriguing literary courtship. See Heyden; BIOGRAPHY (Pickering); POETRY (Browning)
Carlyle, Thomas (ed) The Letters and Speeches of Oliver Cromwell (1845)
Cromwell's letters, and even more his speeches, are vivid evidence for the revolutionary puritan conscience, the zealot as self-
inventor, denier of self. Carlyle supplies idiosyncratic running commentary, snaking points of his own about mid-19th-century
British society. Two revolutionaries, in action and thought, in endlessly fascinating juxtaposition. See BIOGRAPHY (Froude);
LITERARY CRITICISM
Durrell, L. and Miller, H. Lawrence Durrell, Henry Miller: A Private Correspondence (1963)
Exchange began when Durrell (aged 23) wrote Miller (43) a fan-letter about Tropic of Cancer; it continued over several
decades. Energetic, ego-brimming letters, full of spontaneity and trail-blazing self-evaluation. See CHILDREN'S BOOKS
(Durrell, G.); F1CTION/NOVELS (Durrell); POETRY (Durrell); SEX (Miller); TRAVEL (Durrell)
Edgeworth, Maria Letters from England, 1813 -44 (1971) & Personal letters of English novelist (1767 -1849).
Her circle of friends and acquaintances included Wedgwood, Darwin, Byron and Walter Scott; but her most delightful letters
are those to her numerous family, on landscape, town life and above all human foible, viewed with unaffected warmth and wit.
This selection by Christine Colvin recommended. Its introduction, notes and index are models of thoroughness and tact.
Fitzgerald, F. Scott and Perkins, Max Dear Scott, Dear Max (1971) Fascinating exchange of letters between celebrated writer
and equally well-known editor. Intriguing expose of a working relationship that illuminates the nuts and bolts, dollars and
cents, of being a famous novelist. Compare with Bennett (qv) and (for private agonies of authorship) Simenon
(AUTOBIOGRAPHY) and Steinbeck (qv). See BIOGRAPHY (Milford); FICTION/NOVELS; FICTION/SHORT STORIES;
FILM (Latham); MEDIA (Berg)
Frank, Anne The Diary of Anne Frank (1947) * Difficult to avoid words like "deeply moving" and "unique" in relation to this
justly famous diary, a rare document of the unsullied, untarnished human spirit. See Tuttle.
Heyden, P. and Kelley, P. (eds) Elizabeth Barrett Browning's Letters to Mrs David Ogilvy (1973)
Intimate letters to a close friend (and fellow poetess), on family matters (chiefly children) and on literary life. Newly
discovered in 1971, these letters are unforced, affectionate and reveal what an unexpectedly witty woman EBB could be. See
Barrett; BIOGRAPHY (Pickering)
Kierkegaard Soren The Last Years (1865) Kierkegaard—the "depression over Denmark"— was the father of both secular and
religious existentialism. These diaries and their brilliant introduction make a good beginning to his thought. Also: The Present
Age. See PHILOSOPHY
Kilvert, Francis Thomas Kilvert's Diary (1938-40) Mo Diary of 1870s country curate in a remote Welsh community.
Kilvert's admirable, unselfconscious personality shines undiminished from its pages; book is also a bleak testimony to the
nasty, brutish and short lives many people led in rural Victorian Britain. See Woodeforde.
Lawrence, D. H. The Collected Letters of D. H. Lawrence (1932) Lawrence used his letters like weapons: often scathing and
always stimulating, he berated friends and intellectuals, attacked established dogma and passionately propagated his own. See
FICTION/NOVELS; FICTION/SHORT STORIES; HISTORY/EUROPEAN; LITERARY CRITICISM; POETRY: TRAVEL
Mansfield, Katherine The Journal of Katherine Mansfield(1927) Another Bloomsbury journal that reveals best and worst of
the movement: arch self-consciousness coupled with memorable observation. For example, Mansfield on E. M. Forster, he
"never gets any further than warming the teapot. Feel this teapot. Is it not beautifully warm? Yes, but there ain't going to be no
tea." See FICTION/SHORT STORIES
Sacco, N. and Vanzetti, B. The Letters of Sacco and Vanzetti (1928) Atheists, anarchists, draft dodgers, Sacco and Vanzetti
appeared enormously threatening to most Americans in the 1920s, even though they probably did not commit the armed
robbery and murders for which they were finally executed in 1927. The long years of protests and counter-protests, as well as
court manoeuvres, produced many remarkable and moving letters from these nearly illiterate but enormously articulate men.
A selective list, covering a huge and varied field. Crucial playwrights, with typical (or best introductory) works: standard
guides and works of criticism, especially those that explain or define a vital area: a few biographies and memoirs for fun. The
interested reader will want to explore the heights (and crevasses) for himself—this list provides a base camp and a survival kit.
See DIARIES (Warren); HISTORY/BRITISH (Strong); HUMOUR (Green); LITERARY CRITICISM (Bradley, Johnson,
Stendhal)
Beckett, Samuel, Irish writing in French and English, 1906-1989. Nobel Laureate
Trilogy: Molloy, Malone Dies, The Unnamamable. Rec: Meaningful
Murphy. Rec: Bloom
Watt. Rec: Bloom
Waiting for Godot. Rec: Bloom Fadiman 3 Fadiman 4 GBWW NYPL Ward
Endgame. Rec: Bloom Fadiman 3 Fadiman 4
Krapp's Last Tape. Rec: Bloom Fadiman 3 Fadiman 4
Molloy. Rec: Bloom Ward
Malone Dies. Rec: Bloom Ward
The Unnamable. Rec: Bloom Ward
How It Is. Rec: Bloom
Brook, Peter The Empty Space (1968) IMP* a Personal statement of intent by one of best–respected, most influential of
British experimental directors. Book (and Brook) something of a cult; but his theories are important and challenging.
Cibber, Colley An Apology for the Life of Mr Colley Cibber, Comedian (1740)
18th-century dramatist, actor, inferior poet laureate, butt of Pope (in The Dunciad), Cibber in these memoirs discursively and
amiably describes, defines the vigorous theatre of his time. Book contains among other things, a famous description of Thomas
Betterton's performance as Hamlet.
Clurman, Harold The Naked Image: Observations on the Modern Theatre (1966)
One of the founders of Group Theatre, which in the rosy dawn of the New Deal tried to bring community theatre to 1930s New
York, tells of the trials and real achievements that brought to light Clifford Odets, and to bright lights men like Franchot Tone
who finally succumbed, graciously but inevitably, to Hollywood. See McCrindle.
Heilman, Robert E. The Iceman, the Arsonist and the Troubled Agent (1973)
Excellent study of "tragedy and melodrama on the modern stage". Balances O'Neill. Williams and Miller against three
Europeans, Brecht, Frisch and Durrenmatt. Useful scholarly adjunct to Esslin (qv) and Taylor (qv).
Ionesco, Eugene The Bald Prima Donna (The Bald Soprano) (1948)
Surreal parody of drama itself; hilarious surface masks bleak philosophy—"I imagined I had written something like the tragedy
of language", he later wrote of it. Also: Rhinoceros; Walking on Air; The Chairs, etc. See Heilman.
Johnson, Pamela Hansford Six Proust Reconstructions (1958) A bonne bouche: Hansford Johnson has extended and
"improved" Proust in a radio sequence which at once criticizes (affectionately), embellishes and reveals his world: Marcel air-
waved a la mode. See BIOGRAPHY (Painter, Pickering); FICTION/NOVELS (Proust); LITERARY CRITICISM (Beckett)
Jonson, Ben The Alchemist(1610) 0 One of the best plays (and certainly the easiest to begin with) by Jacobean dramatist and
poet second only to Shakespeare. The "quick theatre-stuff" of his plays carries all the "humours" of Jacobean London. Absurd
drama, 17th-century style: like Aristophanes (qv) crossed with a dictionary of antique slang. Also: Volpone; Bartholomew Fair,
etc
Marlowe, Christopher Tamburlaine the Great(1590) * At its best, Marlowe's poetry approaches Shakespeare's; his plays are
like magnificent symphonies of language. But they are loosely structured and often fall into rant and obscurity. Tamburlaine
shows these qualities, all of them, at peak; better seen, perhaps, than read; unforgettable. Also: Dr Faustus; The Jew of Malta,
etc
Masefield, John William Shakespeare (1911) a Good general introduction. Masefield's style is direct as a Roman road;
he never wastes a word. Almost everything one needs to know; no fruitless speculation; well-judged quotations. See Granville-
Barker; Shakespeare; Van Doren; CHILDREN'S BOOKS; LITERARY CRITICISM (Bradley, Johnson, Knight, Stendhal);
POETRY (Shakespeare)
Middleton, Thomas and William Rowley, English, 1580-1627 and ca. 1585-1626.
The Changeling. Rec: Bloom (drama)
Miller, Arthur The Crucible (1953) * Miller is one of finest American tragedians of the century: clear prose, good
characterization, rock-solid theatricality. This play (on witchcraft trials in Salem, Massachusetts in 1692) discusses freedom of
conscience, and develops it so as to draw parallels with the 20th century (the play was produced shortly after the McCarthy
scandal, in the early 1950s). Also: Death of a Salesman; A View from the Bridge, etc. See Heilman.
O'Neill, Eugene The Iceman Cometh (1946) * At his worst, O'Neill is portentous and bombastic; at his best (as here)
he earns the extravagant praise once heaped on him ("greatest genius of American theatre"). In a cheap tavern, craven dreamers
are startled into action by a travelling salesman—in effect a salesman of death. Also: Anna Christie; Mourning Becomes
Electra; Long Day's Journey into Night. See Heilman.
Osborne, John Look Back in Anger (1956) 0 Resolute, over-praised play ("Love it or leave me," said Tynan), whose peevish,
ranting anti-hero set a long trend in snappy nihilism. It now seems dated, pat and over-emphatic. But it has energy and dramatic
power—the main qualities of Osborne's later, increasingly misanthropic output. Also: Luther, The Entertainer, Inadmissible
Evidence
Pinter, Harold No Man's Land (1975) * Paranoid despair expressed in ambiguous, poetic prose: the rhythms of ordinary
speech given elusive, unnerving hardness. Also: The Caretaker, The Homecoming; The Birthday Party, etc. See Esslin;
McCrindle.
Shaw, George Bernard Saint Joan (1924) * Shaw's unsentimental, unfussy drama at its best. Prose has poise and point;
arguments lucid, not too wordy; stage action compelling; portrait of clear-headed young girl (a recurring theme in Shaw's
work) persuasive and warm. Also: Our Theatres in the Nineties (critical writings)
Sheridan, Richard B. The School for Scandal(1777) * One of the most enduring comedies in English: funny dialogue, in
graceful 18th-century prose; razor characterization; fast action. For grace and speed, matched by his other most enduring play,
The Rivals, a generally tighter, less prismatic piece. Also: The Critic, etc
Sophocles King Oedipus (c. 430 BC) 11: One of the rocks on which all later European drama is founded. Formal,
elegant poetry: for grandeur of themes, Sophocles is matched only by Shakespeare (qv); for limpidity of style, by Racine (qv).
His work resists translation: good English versions are by Kitto (Sophocles: Three Tragedies, 1962—plain), and by Roche (The
Oedipus Plays of Sophocles, 1958—fancy). Pound's magnificent The Women of Trachis (1956) is one of the crankiest
translations ever made. Also: Antigone; Electra, etc
Soyinka, Wole Death of the King's Horseman (1972) * The greatest play of the greatest African playwright. Based on a true
story of the jarring conflict between old ways and new, between tribal mores and the imposed ways of the British resident, in
southern Nigeria at the end of World War II. Soyinka has some of the power and eloquence of the Greek tragedians, though he
lacks their poetry. An extraordinary and forceful play.
Taubman, Howard The Making of the American Theatre (1965) fi 0 Lively history of the growth of the theatre in 19th-
century America. For some, first nights in Boston and New York; for others, touring in covered wagons, treading the dusty trail,
bringing theatre like water to thirsty desert land. Great fun.
Vicente, Gil, Portuguese writing in Spanish and Portuguese, ca. 1465-ca. 1536.
Four Plays. Rec: Ward
William Alfred
William Alfred is the Abbott Laurence Lowell Professor of the Humanities at Harvard. A native of New York City, he is a noted
playwright (Hogan's Goat), translator (Modern Library Beowulf) and teacher. Besides his achievements in the classroom, he
continues to produce screenplays and scripts for television and the theater.
These books might prepare their readers for the challenges of the twenty-first century by prompting them to ask questions of
the fictions they indulge themselves in, along these lines:
1. Since changes inevitably alter life and our way of dealing with it, so threatening any fixed order we may aspire to that we
grow desperate or enraged, can no way be found to assess the perils of that desperation and rage by assessing the fictions in
which those feelings are expressed?
2. Does private rage avalanche into international catastrophe?
If that be the case, can no means be found to divert that rage from racist, religious, national or political objects to those
elements in our nature which in the nobly furious words of Conor Cruse O'Brien "make us more eager to die for the good of
mankind than to live and work for it"?
John Dos Passos. Three Soldiers (1921). Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1964. (Pb)
I saw the Lew Ayres—Lewis Wohlheirn movie version of Erich Maria Remarque's All Quiet on the Western Front when I was
eight or nine, and remembering it still at sixteen, took Three Soldiers out of the library. Reading it made me a pacifist.
Evelyn Waugh. Vile Bodies (1930). Boston: Little, Brown, 1977. (Pb)
In the pinched, sad thirties, I became an addict of P. G. Wodehouse through reading his novels serialized in the Saturday
Evening Post, which at a nickel a copy even I could afford. Someone told me Evelyn Waugh was funnier; and I read Vile
Bodies. Funnier the book was; but I was as troubled as amused by such passages as:
"Adam darling, what's the matter?"
"I don't know... Nina, do you ever feel that things can't go on much longer?"
"What do you mean by things—us or everything?" "Everything."
Those, taken together with the book's ending, in 1930, on a battlefield during World War II gave me a bleak pause.
Wodehouse's irrepressibly cheerful Noel Coward fox-trot had turned into Ravel's "La Valse" under Waugh's manic baton.
Thomas Mann. The Magic Mountain (1924). H. T. Lowe-Porter, trans. New York: Random House, 1969. (Pb)
I read Mann's ironic diagnosis of the diseases which brought imperial Europe down in Harry Slochower's unforgettable course
at Brooklyn College. I had just returned, my pacifism even more confirmed, from service in the war in the Pacific. I was
particularly struck by the way Mann built toward the bloody delirium of his last chapter by dramatizing the growing anger of
his characters at private unfulfillment and the fright and disappointment that accompanies the death of an accepted order.
Elizabeth Bowen. The House in Paris (1935). New York: Avon, 1979. (Pb)
Years later, advising a tutorial student on a thesis, I reread The House in Paris; and I saw the anger which Mann had
anatomized in his male characters embodied in a woman. Appalled by the prospect of a stuffy marriage with a man of her own
class, that book's upper-middle-class heroine betrays both her husband-to-be and her best friend by sleeping with her best
friend's fiancé. Waking the next morning in a gray hotel room, she assesses that experience in terms of a failed revolution:
"People must hope so much when they tear streets up and fight at barricades. But, whoever wins, the streets are laid again and
the trams start running again. One hopes too much by destroying things." She must be the first writer who noticed the
dangerous fusion of elated hope with destructiveness.
George Orwell. Coming up for Air (1940). New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1969. (Pb)
I reread Corning up for Air with that same tutorial student when I assigned it to her to widen her sense of the uses of narrative
in that period. In the third chapter of that book, its protagonist, a white-collar worker, looks out of his commuters' train at a
bomber overhead and thinks, with a calmness that seems part relief, that in two years' time such planes will be blasting
everything in sight to kingdom come. I also assigned the letters of Evelyn Waugh from the years preceding and immediately
following the First World War that she might notice the reaction of exasperated envy that irascible seismograph of his culture
had to those returning from the international massacre.
Robert Brustein
Robert Brustein is artistic director of the acclaimed American Repertory Theater company in Cambridge, director of the Loeb
Drama Center and professor of English at Harvard University. As one of the leaden of the American resident theater movement,
he is known for his enormous support of innovative work and his ability to galvanize other creative people. He is theater critic
for the New Republic.
Anton Chekhov. Plays and Letters (1884-1904). New York: W. W. Norton, 1977. (Pb)
The best example—after Shakespeare—of how an artist can express himself truthfully and still retain the full measure of his
humanity.
Lionel Trilling. The Liberal Imagination (1950). New York: Harcourt Brace jovanovich, 1979.
At the same time a great collection of essays on literature and society, and a demonstration of the continuing tension between
liberalism and art.
William Butler Yeats. The Poems of W B. Yeats (1887-1939). Richard Finneran, ed. New York: Macmillan, 1962. (Pb)
The master modern poet, finding language for every human emotion from the pangs of unrequited love to the ache of old age.
Henrik Ibsen. Complete Major Prose and Plays (ca. 1880s). Rolf Fjelde, trans. New York: New American Library, n.d. (Pb)
. Speeches and New Letters (ca. 1880s). Arne Kildal, trans. Brooklyn: Haskell, 1972.
No better record of the adversarial relationship between the artist and the state.
James Joyce. Ulysses (1918-20). New York: Random House, 1976. (Pb)
All of English literature in one book—compressed and mythologized through the language and vision of a unique modern
artist.
Friedrich Nietzsche. Philosophy and Truth (1870s). Daniel Breazeale, ed. and trans. Atlantic Highlands, N.J.: Humanities
Press, 1979.
A revolutionary series of treatises on the transvaluation of all inherited values.
Theatre Through the Ages (1975) by Cesare Molinari. A clear and coherent presentation, with excellent illustrations, that
concentrates on Europe.
Illustrated Encyclopedia of World Theatre (1977) edited by Martin Esslin. A broad introduction edited by one of the most
impressive of modern critical thinkers on the theatre.
Illustrated History of British Theatre (1994) by Simon Trussler. An ambitious and informative new survey of British theatre
from its beginnings to the present day.
Shakespeare's Theatre (1992) by Peter Thomson. The second edition of an excellent and thoroughly readable introduction to
the Elizabethan and early Jacobean theatrical performance.
A Short Introduction to the Ancient Greek Theatre (1991) by Graham Ley. A companion for those particularly interested in
the performance of Greek tragedy and comedy.
The New Comedy of Greece and Rome (1985) by Richard Hunter. An excellent introduction to the forms of Greek and
Roman comedy which anticipate modern social comedy.
The Cambridge Guide to Asian Theatre (1993) by James Brandon. An excellent, short introduction to the immense range of
theatrical performance in Asia by a leading expert.
Indian Theatre: Traditions of Performance (1990) edited by Farley Richmond and others. A thoughtful appreciation, in
informative detail, of traditions which include a strong emphasis on dance as well as drama.
The Cambridge Guide to African and Caribbean Theatre (1994) by M Barham and others A new survey of drama and
theatre practice which offers an unparalleled introduction.
A Dictionary of Theatre Anthropology (1990) by E Barba. This look at intercultural theatre practice and experiment has
fascinating illustrations.
The Director and the Stage (1982) by E Braun. On the art of the director.
British Theatre Design: The Modern Age (1989) by J Goodwin. This has superb illustrations, and is a good starting point for
an interest in this aspect of theatre.
SHAKESPEARE
Derek Parker
One of Dr Johnson's chief regrets at being mortal was the thought of leaving this world for one in which Shakespeare's works
were no longer available. I am on his side. A good edition of the Complete Works is an essential: probably in the celebrated
Arden edition, though there are plenty of handy individual paperbacks of the plays and poems. Shakespeare is quite simply
inexhaustible: and if the time comes when you think you have exhausted him, there is a long line of critics and biographers to
remind you that far from touching bottom, you are still splashing in the shallows. My favourite biography is Samuel
Schoenbaum's wonderful Shakespeare: A Documentary Life, which came out in 1975 and reproduced every contemporary
document remotely connected with the poet.
This is sadly long out of print, but is well worth seeking out; and happily, Professor Schoenbaum has followed it up with a
simpler edition, William Shakespeare: A Compact Documentary Life (1977). As for the rest, we shall never be able to put our
hand on Shakespeare's shoulder, but through the plays, the criticism, the biographies, we can make an effort to clutch at his
sleeve - and sometimes seem to feel it flutter in our grasp, across four centuries.
Shakespeare's writing was a magic circle in which he himself could only tread ... He invented a work which was peculiar to
himself, and not to be compared with the productions of any writer of any nation - in which he had no follower nor second.
SAMUEL TAYLOR COLERIDGE
Shakespeare: A Documentary Life (1975) by Samuel Schoenbaum. Contrary to popular belief, we know a great deal about
Shakespeare's life - perhaps more than about any other Elizabethan except the Queen herself. Schoenbaum gives it to us
straight: no interpretation, no guesses - just the facts.
Going to Shakespeare (1978) by J C Trewin. Trewin saw every notable Shakespearean production between 1920 and 1980;
his comments on the plays are based on performance, and in this book he shows us how they work, illuminating many a scene
by remembering how Laurence Olivier declaimed a particular speech, or how Godfrey Tearle moved on a particular line. For
sheer insight, this beats many a scholarly tome hollow.
Young Shakespeare (1988) and Shakespeare: The Later Years (1992) by Russell Fraser. There are more lives of
Shakespeare in and out of print than the strongest man could shake the largest number of sticks at; these two are among the
most accessible. There is a certain amount of conjecture, but it is sensible conjecture, and Fraser not only presents all the
alternatives, but supports the most likely with good argument - and gives us at the same time some excellent background to the
age.
Shakespeare: Court, Crowd and Playhouse (1993) by Francois Laroque. A charming little book which gives us a vivid
picture of life in Shakespeare's time – with excellent and often unusual illustrations - and a selection of the most important con-
temporary documents.
The Elizabethan World Picture (1943) by E M W Tillyard. One of the difficulties about reading Shakespeare is his age is so
remote to us: his anti-Semitism and vivid chauvinism ring strangely in our ears. Professor Tillyard helps us over all the stiles
with an insight into the Elizabethan world which is dazzlingly interesting as well as illuminating.
The Characters of Shakespeare's Plays (1817; recent editions available) by William Hazlitt. Hazlitt was perhaps the most
sympathetic of all 19th-century critics of Shakespeare. Wonderfully readable, his opinions have dated little - and he is man
enough to know when he is beaten: he wishes he did not have to write about Lear, because 'all that we can say must fall far
short of the subject'.
Shakespeare's Workmanship (1918) by Arthur Quiller-Couch. Here is a critic who, first beaten down by F R Leavis, has
remained stubbornly out of fashion; but there are few writers about Shakespeare's plays in whose company I would rather be.
Quite simply and above all, the king of enthusiasts, he makes you want to read the man.
Prefaces to Shakespeare (1923-47) by Harley Granville Barker. Barker, one of the great Shakespeare directors of all time,
sadly failed to write prefaces to all the plays; but those he did prepare are among the great examples of practical Shakespeare
criticism.
A Notebook on William Shakespeare (1948) by Edith Sitwell. Nobody would now put forward Edith Sitwell as a great critic,
but her devotion to Shakespeare gave her quirky insights and a sense of excitement which raise the short hairs on the back of
the neck.
The best option is, of course, to read about the plays and then see them in performance. However, the best dramas can well bear
reading as well as seeing, and there is beauty in Marlowe, fun in Ben Jonson, darkness and honor in John Webster and Thomas
Middleton which delight and intrigue almost as much on the page as on the boards. If the Elizabethans had an unequalled way
with language, the harsher, more astringent tragedies of the Jacobeans can be as exciting - and in the absence of novels, bring
their period alive with quite extraordinary brilliance.
Great drama is the souvenir of the adventures of a master
among the pieces of his own soul.
GEORGE JEAN NATHAN
Five Pre-Shakespearean Comedies (1934) edited by F S Boas. Among these, Nicholas Udall's Ralph Roister Doister 1553 is
the earliest known English comedy, about the courting of the Widow Custance, and Henry Medwall's Fulgens and Lucrece
1486 the earliest `straight' secular play. They show a distinct debt to the ancient Greek and Roman dramatists, though
thoroughly anglicised.
The Collected Plays (1590-1604; several modem editions) by Christopher Marlowe. The bloodshed, treachery and titanic
ambition of Tamburlaine the Great, the isolated pathos of Edward II, and above all the tragic, ironical dignity and majesty of
Doctor Faustus, make Marlowe's plays pioneering works for their time, and a considerable influence on Shakespeare.
The Collected Plays (1598-1631; several modem editions) by Ben Jonson. `0 rare Ben Jenson!' says the stone over his grave in
Westminster, and if his plays now seem stronger in production than on the page, The Alchemist and Bartholomew Fair repay
reading, bringing the London of the early 1600s vividly alive - swindlers and mountebanks, lawyers and pickpockets, idle
women and busy gossips.
Early English Stages (1959) by Glynne Wickham. To understand fully just how the Elizabethan dramas appeared on the stages
of the time, we need to know about the boy players, methods of staging, the theatrical politics of the time, the rivalries between
the various companies - and how the productions slowly began to take a form we would recognize today.
English Plays and Players (1956) by G B Harrison. A fascinating survey of the 35 years or so which comprised the great
period of Elizabethan drama - that is, from the writing of Marlowe's Tamburlaine in the 1580s to Shakespeare's Hamlet at the
turn of the century, with just a few reputable dramas in the following 15 years. Stage and university, the boy players, the lives
of Jonson, Marlowe, Robert Greene, Essex's rebellion ... all written with vigour and commitment.
The Rise of the Common Player (1962) by M C Bradbrook. It takes a real effort of imagination, now, to believe that a boy
could have played Cleopatra or Lady Macbeth; but reading a good account of the actors of the Elizabethan theatre we begin to
under-stand how it may have been - and how the often clumsy comedy must have been leavened by the jigs and knockabout
farce of the period.
Really excellent dramatists were thin on the ground between the end of the Restoration period and the years of the solid, safe
Victorian theatre - where nevertheless a number of anti-Victorian dramatists beavered away subversively - Wilde, Shaw, Arthur
Pinero, T W Robertson, Henry Arthur Jones managing to entertain but also shock and educate audiences.
We do not go to the theatre like our ancestors to escape from the pressure
of reality, so much as to confirm our experience of it.
CHARLES LAMB
Four English Comedies (1950) edited by J M Morrell. Just four plays give us a bird's-eye view of the English theatre between
1606 (when Ben Jonson's Volpone was first performed at Lincoln's Inn) and 1777, when Richard Brinsley Sheridan's The
School for Scandal delighted audiences at Drury Lane. In between are William Congreve's The Way of the World 1700 and
Oliver Goldsmith's She Stoops to Conquer 1773 - four of the best, wittiest, most delightful plays in the language.
Restoration Tragedy (1930) by Bonamy Dobree. A first-rate survey of the subject, including the work of John Dryden, George
Etherege, Thomas Shadwell, and John Vanbrugh - most of whose plays are brilliant comments on the period and its foibles.
The Plays of Oscar Wilde (1892-95) by Oscar Wilde. If there is any British comedy after She Stoops to Conquer which can
compare with Wilde's The Importance of Being Earnest 1895, it is probably one of Wilde's other plays; his theatrical instincts
were impeccable, his wit coruscating; here are four plays that are as enjoyable to read as to see.
Our Theatre in the Nineties (1932) by George Bernard Shaw. For a general survey of English drama towards the end of the
19th century, turn to Shaw, who remains the most entertaining (if not always the shrewdest) of all theatre critics, even including
the great William Hazlitt. The articles he wrote for the Saturday Review between 1895 and 1898 are quite simply wonderful.
Around Theatres (1953) and More Theatres (1969) by Max Beerbohm. Beerbohm succeeded Shaw as drama critic for the
Saturday Review, and his essays lead us gently into the 20th century with articles on all the major plays produced between
1898 and 1910.
World War I changed the theatre just as it changed everything else; soon came Coward, ready to show the 1920s their own face
in The Vortex 1924, putting drugs on stage for the first time. There was a brief flirtation with poetic drama, led by T S Eliot and
Christopher Fry, with W H Auden and Christopher Isherwood in the wings; Terence Rattigan, with elegant, mannered
comedies, bridged the period between the 1930s and the 1950s, when came the new generation - Samuel Beckett, Harold
Pinter, Arnold Wesker, John Arden followed by Tom Stoppard, Edward Bond, David Storey, David Hare - and the most fruitful
period of English drama for 400 years.
We do not think that a play can be worth acting and not worth reading.
W B YEATS
The Complete Plays of Bernard Shaw (1882-1948; several modern editions) by Bernard Shaw. Here is the Goliath of modern
drama, who produced a body of work that cannot be ignored. Few of his plays failed to rouse audiences to argument, from
Widowers' Houses (and in 1892 a play about a prostitutes' madam and her daughter made a sensation) to The Apple Can 1929,
which ends with America pleading to be allowed to rejoin the Commonwealth. It is difficult to conceive of anyone who would
not find the majority of these plays amusing and stimulating.
The Voysey Inheritance (1905) and The Madras House (1907) by Harley Granville Barker. The former, about a scandal which
destroys a family business, and the latter, a feminist social comedy, show what can be done in the way of skilful workmanship
(Barker started life as an actor) combined with a strong sense of social values. Read, too, Barker's Prefaces to Shakespeare
(1923-47), the best of Victorian Shakespearean criticism.
The Collected Plays of Noel Coward (several editions) by Noel Coward. Two of Coward's plays may be (a dangerous
prophesy) as near immortal as any writer could hope: Hay Fever 1925 and Private Lives 1930. These are comedies such as the
English stage had not seen since Congreve. But recent productions have shown other, less regarded plays - Design for Living
(1933) and even Peace in Our Time (1949) to be well worth revival.
Rosencrantz and Guildenstern are Dead (1967),Jumpers (1972), and Arcadia (1994) by Tom Stoppard. All his plays are
examples of high wit and dramatic ingenuity. These three at least should be read. Elegance is not a quality we immediately
associate with most contemporary playwrights; here it energizes rather than weakens the plays.
The Birthday Party (1958), The Caretaker (1960), and No Man's Land (1965) by Harold Pinter. The Caretaker bears
perhaps a stronger resemblance to traditional drama than any other of his pieces. These lead into the writer's private dream
world; asked what any line of his play `means', the author replies that it means what it says, and we must make what we can of
that; but few people will read his work without at the very least a puzzled fascination, and at best a feeling of being in the
presence of a very considerable dramatist.
Murder in the Cathedral (1935) by T S Eliot. Arguably the best verse drama of our time, though The Family Reunion (1939)
has fine passages; Eliot wrote three other plays, none of which has found a place in the contemporary repertory.
The Lady's Not for Burning (1949) by Christopher Fry. Fry is the only other verse dramatist since 1900 whose work survives
in occasional production; this remains his best play, and still delights through his pleasure in playing with language; but some
of his others - notably A Phoenix Too Frequent (1946) - are better than some critics allow.
Look Back in Anger (1956) by John Osborne. A seminal play which altered the face of English drama by its rage, invective,
emotional conviction, and determination to present on stage the passions of our time. It must be read for that reason, though
recent revivals have proved it irredeemably second-rate as drama. The Entertainer (1957) is a somewhat better play.
Waiting for Godot (1955) by Samuel Beckett. Many a playgoer went to see Waiting for Godot convinced that it was nonsense,
only to emerge - perhaps without 'understanding' the play - convinced that s/he had been in the presence of greatness. It now
seems easier than it did 40 years ago; Happy Days 1962, End Game 1958 and others still present difficulties for the literal-
minded, but cannot, should not, must not be ignored.
The Norman Conquests (1974) by Alan Ayckbourn. The astonishingly prolific Ayckboum has probably brought more
audiences to the edge of hysteria than any dramatist since Coward. His plays must be seen, but many of their qualities come
through on the page - including his amazing ingenuities of construction, and his darkly effective talent for showing us tragedy
through the lens of comedy.
AMERICAN DRAMA
T J Lustig
“There are no dramatic subjects in a country which has witnessed no great political catastrophes and in which love invariably
leads by a straight and easy road to matrimony” - Alexis de Tocqueville, Democracy in America (1835). Right about so
much else, de Tocqueville was signally wrong in this, for the political and emotional problems of 20th-century American
democracy have produced a rich body of dramatic work. The tradition has been a predominantly realist one, though it has often
strained that overstretched word well beyond its breaking point. But within its characteristic concentration on the relation
between the (mainly middle-class) individual and society, American drama has told the story of the nation from the period of
colonial expansion to that of imperial domination. It has dramatized the political in the personal in its treatment of the
individual and the family. And it has staged the personal in the political in its analysis of the American dream and its spiritual
evacuation. Often concerned with property, violence, truth, and the presence of the past, 20th-century American drama has seen
itself both as weapon and as cure.
American drama stages a nation thinking (or not thinking) in front of itself.
MATTHEW ROUDANE
Trifles (1916) by Susan Glaspell. An early one-act play with a poignant and beautifully crafted feminist twist. Glaspell's
treatment of women from their own point of view has not been equalled until the more recent works of Marsha Norman and
Beth Henley.
Desire under the Elms (1924) and Long Day's Journey into Night (1956) by Eugene O'Neill. Precise notations of family
conflict, underwritten by an eerie sense of the presence of the past and the hard American landscape. O'Neill's use of language
and symbol can seem heavy-handed, but these are works of unparalleled dramatic intensity, crucial statements of the central
dynamic forces in American drama.
Waiting for Lefty (1935) by Clifford Odets. With its triumphant final chorus of `Hello America! ... We're stormbirds of the
working class', this is the definitive American agitprop play.
A Streetcar Named Desire (1947) by Tennessee Williams. Unique in its raw intensity, but apparently committed to emotional
sensationalism at the cost of any political or philosophical engagement
Death of a Salesman (1949) and Broken Glass (1993) by Arthur Miller. The most powerful, coherent, and ethically engaged
of American dramatists, Miller has made his work a long attempt to assert the value of connection, of the individual's profound
relation and responsibility to wider communities.
True West (1980) by Sam Shepard. This highly focused treatment of sibling rivalry resonates with American myths.
Fences (1985) by August Wilson. Beginning with family life in the back yard of a black American family, this play goes on to
expose inexorably the historical determinants of 20th-century African-American experience.
Oleanna (1992) by David Mamet. Misunderstood by some audiences of the first production as an attack on political
correctness, Mamet's latest play is in fact a classic liberal study of the ineluctable corruptions of power.
Economics
Watching economists tear at one another's throats, and reflecting on the holes in his own pockets, the layman might be forgiven
for wondering, cynically, just how relevant this subject is to human life. The books in this list (an unpolemical, undogmatic
selection) may go some way to providing an answer, or answers. "You pays your money . .
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Dalton); MEDICINE (Fuchs); PHILOSOPHY (Ortega y Gasset); POLITICS (Schumpeter);
SOCIOLOGY (Weber)
Gamble, A. and Walton P. Capitalism in Crisis: Inflation and the State (1976)
Clear, uncomplicated polemic (with left-wing bias) about what has gone wrong with economic theories and the British
economy.
Glynn, A, and Sutcliffe, R. British Capitalism, Workers and the Profits Squeeze (1972)
A Marxist view of the crisis which has been developing in British industry since the 1960s. Compelling alternative to the
monetarist analyses and nostrums which are our daily fare.
Heilbroner, R. L. The Worldly Philosophers: The Lives, Times and Ideas of the Great Economic Thinkers (1967) a
Exceptionally useful—it replaces reading thousands of pages of impossible learned prose.
Keynes, John Maynard The General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money (1936) f flip
Influential classic: a dialogue by Keynes with other economists and with his own past. Also: The Economic Consequences of
the Peace; Essays in Biography, etc
Marx, Karl Capital (1867) !* Magnificent sweep of excitement, raises profound questions about the workings of
industrial society. See POLITICS; SOCIOLOGY
Myrdal, Gunnar Asian Drama: An Enquiry into the Poverty of Nations (1968)
Enormous study of the economic and social structures of southern Asian countries, demonstrating how the experiences of
developed countries are irrelevant for helping countries such as India escape from the teeming consequences of their own
population growth.
Norris, K. and Vaizey, J. Economics for Everyone (1973) a Makes other introductions redundant; elicits the minimal level of
belief necessary if economics is to be believed at all.
Samuelson, Paul A. Economics: An Introductory Analysis (1948) OOP For those wanting, or needing, a solid basis in formal
economics theory, this is the text book several generations of students have cut their teeth on. Heavy, but authoritative.
Westergaard, J. and Resler, H. Class in a Capitalist Society (1975) Authors' thesis is that economics is not about the balance
of payments but about power: control of institutions and the distribution of wealth and privilege. Analysis is more impressive
than the evidence; the book will be replaced by better ones; until then, it's merely indispensable.
Kenneth Andrews
Kenneth Andrews is the Donald K. David Professor of Business Administration at the Harvard Business School and until
recently was editor and publisher of the Harvard Business Review. His field is business policy and his principal book is The
Concept of Corporate Strategy.
The classics I have identified will be as relevant to the recurring problems of achieving results in organizations and of making
leadership effective that will characterize the twenty-first century as they are to those of the present day. The ideas are timeless;
their power and application are virtually unlimited.
Chester I. Barnard. The Functions of the Executive (1938). Thirtieth anniversary ed. Cambridge: Harvard University Press,
1968. (Pb)
As I said in the introduction to the thirtieth anniversary edition, this is the most thought-provoking book on organization and
management ever written by a practicing executive. The combination of intellect and experience is such that his conceptual
approach to organization and management has not been made obsolete. He applies systematic thought and a generous exposure
to responsibility in explaining the necessity to achieve results through cooperation.
Mary Parker Follett. Dynamic Administration (1940). Henry C. Metcalf and L. Urwick, eds. London: Pitman, 1973.
Follett examines the importance in a democratic society and in business organization of the effort to achieve an integration of
all points of view and to find in conflict a way to a higher-order solution that is more satisfactory to those who participate in it
than would be dominance of their original point of view. Her paper on constructive conflict and the superiority of integration
over domination and of compromise as ways of dealing with it has influenced all the work I have done in trying to understand
purposeful management.
George C. Homans. The Human Group (1950). London: Rout-ledge and Kegan Paul, 1975.
This book was my introduction to the possibility that the human group can be understood as a functioning entity. Here, some of
the consequences of the Western Electric experiments are applied to current understanding of human organization.
William James. Pragmatism (1907). Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1978. (Pb)
Pragmatism is the quintessential American philosophy and an integral part of the intellectual history from which the other
books that I have found influential have emerged. Though denigrated by those who misunderstand the essential nobility of
James's conviction that emotion and action can transform the world and that truth can be found in experience, this book is a
monument to the effort to make ideas influential and transform them into action. That reality consists of human experience
shaped by purpose is a central truth of great importance to leaders of business and other kinds of organizations.
F. J. Roethlisberger and William J. Dickson. Management and the Worker (1934). Cambridge: Harvard University Press,
1946.
This is the definitive account of the Western Electric experiments at the Hawthorne Works which transformed the study of
business administration and, in effect, originated the study of what was once called "human relations" and is now designated
"organization behavior." Perverse interpretation of this research and its finding as exploitation of workers does not obscure its
classic importance in the understanding of human organization.
Abraham Zaleznik. Human Dilemmas of Leadership. New York: Harper & Row, 1966.
This is the central volume in Zaleznik's successful application of psychoanalysis to the study of human behavior and
organizations. It has informed my still partial understanding of problems of power, authority, and dependency, and their
implications for leadership.
Alfred D. Chandler
Alfred Chandler is the Straus Professor of Business History at the Harvard Business School. He is the author of numerous
works, including Strategy and Structure: Chapters in the History of the American Industrial Enterprise (1962) and The Visible
Hand: The Managerial Revolution in Modern Business (1977). For many, he is considered to be the dean of the organizational
school of historians. His forthcoming work, a cross-national study, is tentatively titled Scale and Scope.
Max Weber. The Theory of Social and Economic Organization (1922). A. M. Henderson and Talcott Parsons, trans. New York:
Free Press, 1947. (Pb)
. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology (1946). H. H. Gerth and C. Wright Mills, eds. and trans. New York: Oxford
University Press, 1979. (Pb)
These are the two best translations of the works of Max Weber, one of the world's most influential social scientists. When I
read these as an embryonic historian, they opened up a new world. From a vast array of historical data Weber developed
concepts—bureaucracy, charismatic, idea types and many others—that are still central in analyzing the recent experiences of
modern man.
Ralph Henry Gabriel. The Course of American Democratic Thought (1940). New York: Ronald Press, 1956.
A masterpiece of synthesis, this study reviews changing American attitudes and values from the early nineteenth century to
World War II, by focusing on what Gabriel calls the "American democratic faith." It provides an impressively coherent
overview of the development of ideas of such American writers, philosophers, and political thinkers as Emerson, Thoreau,
Melville, Whitman, Calhoun, Summner, Royce, Henry Adams and others, as the nation transformed itself from a rural, agrarian
westerly-moving entity to an industrial, urban world power.
Stephen K. Bailey. Congress Makes a Law. The Story Behind the Employment Act of 1946 (1950). Westport, Conn.:
Greenwood Press, 1980.
This is still the most illuminating book that I have read on the American legislative process. It begins by reviewing the
economic and political situations and the ideological attitudes and values that led to the gestation of this legislation and then
follows the bill along a torturous course from committees, through the Senate and House and then to the final compromises in
conference committee. Few studies illustrate more clearly and precisely the interactions of ideas and attitudes and of
procedures and traditions, as well as the impact of perceived needs and opportunities and individual personalities, on the
definition of a piece of legislation that helped to reshape the role of government in the American economy.
Thomas C. Cochran. Railroad Leaders, 1845-1890: The Business Mind in Action. Cambridge: Harvard University Press,
1953.
This is one of the finest pieces of economic and social history written in the past generation. It does more than tell a story. It
provides a systematic understanding of the ideas and actions of a discreet and most influential group, the presidents of major
American railroads from 1840 to 1890. By carefully reviewing the working correspondence of sixty senior executives, it
reveals the views of the men who created the nation's first big business on finance, ownership and control, administration,
strategies of growth, technological innovation, labor relations, public opinion and the role of government. There is no better
introduction to the implications of the rise of modern managerial enterprise than this book.
Theodore Roosevelt. The Letters of Theodore Roosevelt. Elting E. Morison, ed. 8 vols. Cambridge: Harvard University Press,
1951-54.
Carefully selected and annotated, these letters are, like those of the railroad presidents, operating documents used to direct and
carry out the multifaceted business of the presidency. There are also letters to family, friends and a wide variety of
acquaintances in prominent positions throughout the world. T. R. was a man of energy, enthusiasm and convictions who wrote
what he meant. So these letters reveal much about the nature of the man and the nature of the presidency. They are particularly
valuable in showing a wide variety of complex matters that an active president like T. R. had to handle in a single day. Again,
like the letters of the railroad presidents, such letters are basic sources of information with which historians must work.
C. Roland Christensen
C Roland Christensen is Harvard's Robert Walmsley University Professor. He is the first member of the Harvard Business
School faculty to receive this honor. At the Business School he is known by peers and students as the father of the case method,
although he attributes the distinction to the ancient Greeks. He is well known for his association with boards of directors as a
member, as a course topic and as a field of research. He has a passionate interest in business policy.
Here are the books—all old, dog-eared, reread and reread, little (no big fat volumes), most committed to memory—of my five-
inch bookshelf. But they miss the greatest influence on this educator—Miss Adams, a seventh-grade teacher in Iowa City,
Iowa. She introduced me to poetry, where the ultimate wisdom —the philosophy of life—is found. The first step in the
development of an anthology was our study of "Miniver Cheevey" by Edwin Arlington Robinson.- It is still exciting fifty-four
years after that original encounter.
Edward H. Carr. What Is History? (1961). New York: Random House, 1967. (Pb)
Carr's little book has a magnificent message—to live we must understand our historical roots. Carr gives us a way of
understanding the past so as to predict the future.
Jean Rostand. Can Man Be Modified? (1956). Jonathan Griffin, trans. New York: Basic Books, 1959.
Rostand, a biologist, views man in a very human way, examines how science is impacting that basic humanness and then teases
us with what he/she will be in future centuries.
Mark Spade [Nigel Balchin]. How to Run a Bassoon Factory, or Business Explained (1934). Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1936.
Spade tickles the mind; with tongue in cheek, he describes business so that one laughs—even roars—at his chosen vocation.
Edwin Way Teale, ed. The Insect World of J. Henri Fabre (1949). New York: Harper & Row, 1981.
Fabre looks at the smallest and lowest—insects—and shows us their great abilities—even wisdom. A constant reminder to look
at the ordinary to see the extraordinary.
William I. Beveridge. The Art of Scientific Investigation (1951). New York: Random House, 1960. (Pb)
For the investigator, this little book is a gold mine of reflection and practical suggestion. He brings the power of scientific
discipline to bear on everyday life.
Adolph A. Berle, Jr. Power Without Property; A New Developtnent in American Political Economy. New York: Harcourt,
Brace, 1959.
The book raises fundamental questions about modern business organization and ownership. It outlines the quiet revolution
which has changed the power bases of our industrial society.
Richard N. Cooper
Richard Cooper is the Boas Professor of International Econom ics at Harvard's Graduate School ofArts and Sciences. From
1963 to 1977, he was professor of economics and provost at Yale University. He served as undersecretary of state for economic
affairs from 1977 to 1981.
The accumulated wisdom of others can give direction to action, provide tools for analysis and thought, and warn of dangers to
a productive, tolerant and humane society. These books help in that.
Arthur M. Schlesinger, Jr. The Vital Center: The Politics of Freedom (1949). London: Deutsch, 1970.
Eric Hoffer. The True Believer: Thoughts on the Nature of Mass Movements (1951). New York: Harper & Row, 1966. (Pb)
Karl R. Popper. The Open Society and Its Enemies (1945). 2 vols. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1966.
Sir John W. Wheeler-Bennet. The Nemesis of Power: The German Army in Politics, 1918-1945 (1953). New York: St.
Martin's, 1964.
These four books impressed on me the danger to civilized society of persons with an intolerance of dissent from their own
agenda for society, and the importance of continued vigilance to keep them from gaining and exercising power. Schlesinger's
book addresses the dangers of political extremism both on the right and on the left; Hoffer describes the psychology of what he
calls a true believer; Popper traces the philosophical history of political authoritarianism since Plato; and Wheeler-Bennett
offers a detailed history of how Adolf Hitler out-maneuvered the senior German Officer Corps in his successful pursuit of
absolute power.
Robert L. Heilbroner. The Great Ascent: The Struggle for Economic Development in Our Time. New York: Harper & Row,
1963.
William H. McNeill. Plagues and Peoples (1976). Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1977. (Pb)
These two books indicate as well as any that history is much more than kings and generals. Famine and disease have played a
much greater role in mankind's misery, and reducing the prevalence of both is a worthy, even noble, vocation.
Hugh Heclo
Hugh Heclo was born in Marion, Ohio, studied and taught at several British universities and received a Ph.D. in political
science from Yale University in 1970. He is now a professor of government at Harvard. A former senior fellow at the
Brookings Institution in Washington, D.C., Professor Heclo is also a part-time tree farmer and author of three award-winning
books in public policy and American politics.
The challenge of the future is always one of trying to make sense of oneself and one's times. Books, even great books, can help
only a little bit by showing how other persons in other times have made that effort. Those forearmed in this way may be
somewhat less foolish and prideful as they write the novels, plays and social-science interpretations of the next century.
James Fenimore Cooper. The Leather-stocking Tales (1823-41). New York: Avon, 1980. (Pb)
A romantic and tragic study of manly character. Beyond their attraction as an adventure tale, these books left me as a teenager
with a troubled awareness of the conflict between American "progress" and the living of an honest life.
Alexis de Tocqueville. Democracy in America (1835-40). G. Laurence, trans. New York: Random House, 1981. (Pb)
This book threw a new light onto things about this country that I had always taken for granted. Then at the end of the Harper &
Row volume, edited by Max Lerner in 1965 or so, one could also read de Tocqueville's notes and earlier materials for what
would become Democracy in America. One obtained a sense of how a work of penetrating insight evolves rather than happens
in a great flash.
G. W. F. Hegel. Philosophy of Right (Grundlinien der Philosophie des Rechts, 1821). T. M. Knox, trans. Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1965.
The Philosophy of Right offered an intoxicating excursion into a self-contained realm of abstract ideas. It seemed to show how
one could penetrate into a deeper reality simply by thinking about ideas, abstractions that moved and unfolded through time. To
realize that Hegel was saying things in German about dialectics that could not be expressed in English gave one a real sense of
intellectual accomplishment.
Karl Marx. Das Kapital (1867). Friedrich Engels, ed. Canton, Ohio: International, 1984. (Pb)
Volume 1 especially was simply stunning as an exercise in comprehensive social-historical analysis. Hegel had been brought
down to earth.
Karl Polanyi. The Great Transformation (1944). Boston: Beacon, 1985. (Pb)
Another instance of comprehensive historical analysis that seemed to turn conventional wisdom upside down (free-market
economics as the true social radicalism) and began my enduring interest in interpreting the modern "welfare state."
Eugene O'Neill. A Long Day's Journey into Night (1940) and A Moon for the Misbegotten (1943). In Final Acts, Judith E.
Barlow, ed. Athens, Ga.: University of Georgia Press,
1985.
Having read his earlier plays, I found these last works expressed many of my own ill-formulated broodings about family life,
personal careers and the meaning of it all. Again, it was Leatherstocking's honest life without the wilderness.
Duncan Kennedy
Duncan Kennedy is a professor of law at the Harvard Law School. He teaches contracts, torts, property, the history of legal
thought and housing law and policy. Two of his works are Legal Education and the Reproduction of Hierarchy (1983) and The
Structure of Blackstone's Commentaries (1979). He is a founding member of the Conference on Critical Legal Studies.
What attracts me to these books may be the effort to come to grips with large, frightening facts of inequality, oppression,
alienation, while at the same time exploring the slippery, self-contradictory nature of the self as it tangles and disentangles itself
in the world of others, without giving up on survival by speculation. collective struggle and self-doubt.
G. W. F. Hegel. The Phenomenology of Mind (Die Phdnomenologie des Geistes, 1807). J. B. Baillie, ed. and trans. New York:
Harper & Row, 1967. (Pb)
An attempt to put everything together before anything was clear, revolutionary and romantic but also a classical integration. I
tried to read it three times with no success, finally made it through with a friend in tiny chunks. More than worth the pain.
Karl Marx. Das Kapital, vol. 1, The Process of Capital Production (1867). Friedrich Engels, ed. Canton, Ohio: International,
1984. (Pb)
After Book 1 (impossibly obscure) it's more like Middlemarch or Balzac than my picture of orthodox Marxism. This is the
book you're not supposed to read and that you know is all wrong before you start. But it's not much about economic
determinism or materialism or state control of everything. Instead it's how the powerful got their power and what they did with
it.
Sigmund Freud. A General Introduction to Psychoanalysis (1909, 2d ed. 1920). New York: Boni & Liveright, 1977. (Pb)
As with Marx, it's not the tight, totalitarian theories the disciples have spun that count here. It's the unconscious, there all the
time but never there until you trick it into sight, the self permanently destabilized.
Marcel Proust. Remembrance of Things Past (1913-27). 3 vols. C. Scott Moncrieff and Terence Kilmartin, trans. New York:
Random House, 1982. (Pb)
The more perfectly you grasp what you and I are like and how we fit in, the more it seems our next and contradictory selves
wait around the corner in a world turned upside down. Again you have to get through a slow opening, toward bliss.
Virginia Woolf. To the Lighthouse (1927). New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1964. (Pb)
This is my favorite book, an intensely loving, utterly critical revelation of marriage and family life, men, women and children.
It gets at the amazingly complex but ephemeral ideas and emotions that are there every second in everyone without ever telling
you anything straight out. •
Jean-Paul Sartre. Critique of Dialectical Reason (1960). New York: Schocken, 1983.
As with the Phenomenology, everything is here, but now after we know we can know nothing in the way Marx and Freud
wanted to know everything. The vindication of Proust and James and Virginia Woolf, also transcendence of what's passive in
their work, without their pure genius.
Jeffrey Sachs
Jeffrey Sachs is a professor of economics at Harvard College and a former junior fellow in Harvard's Society of Fellows. An
adviser to many Latin American governments. Professor Sachs has also been a consultant to the World Bank and the
International Monetary Fund. He is a member of the Brookings Panel of Economists and a contributor to newspapers and
magazines in the United States and Japan.
These studies make clear that economic processes can only be understood in conjunction with politics and other social forces.
The world's economic problems cannot be solved through any simple fix of technical economics, but only through the broadest
understanding of the role of economics in the larger social order.
Max Weber. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism (1904). Talcott Parsons, trans. New York: Scribner's, 1977. (Pb)
In this and related studies (for example, General Economic History) Max Weber brilliantly illuminated the social organization
and belief system that contributed to the rise of modern capitalism.
Fernand Braudel. Civilization and Capitalism, 15th-18th Century (1967, 1982-84). Sian Reynolds, trans. 3 vols. New York:
Harper & Row, 1985, 1986. (Pb)
This is a magnificent history of the material development of modern society. Braudel uses paintings, literature and other
surprising sources in a remarkable evocation of day-to-day life in the formative period of modern society.
John Maynard Keynes. Essays in Persuasion (1931). New York: W. W. Norton, 1963. (Pb)
This is a series of remarkable and pithy essays by the greatest political economist of this century. Keynes comments brilliantly
and with great prescience on the major economic issues of his day. In the process we see the unfolding of the modern science
of macroeconomics.
Joseph A. Schumpeter. Capitalism, Socialism, and Democracy (1942). New York: Harper & Row, 1983. (Pb)
Schumpeter captured the essence of modern economic development with his focus on technological change and the "creative
destruction" that it brings about. Added to this focus are Schumpeter's trenchant insights into political competition in the
industrial democracies and the role of the intellectual in the capitalist order.
John Kenneth Galbraith. The Affluent Society (1958). New York: New American Library, 1978. (Pb)
This is political economy at its polemic best. Galbraith helped to define modern American liberalism with his call for an
enlarged role for the public sector. Worth rereading in a period of shrinking government and widespread budget cutting.
Bruce Scott
Bruce Scott first joined the Harvard Business School as an M.B.A. student in 1954. Since then he has become widely respected
for his international research and course development in national economic strategies. In 1973 he was appointed the first Paul
Whiten Cherington Professor of Business Administration.
These readings should raise a question of the adequacy of the role and direction of current economic theory as it affects
business policy and public policy in the United States and Europe.
Alfred D. Chandler, Jr. Strategy and Structure. Cambridge, Mass.: M.I.T. Press, 1962. (Pb)
. The Visible Hand. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1977. (Pb)
Two prize-winning books showing how senior managers of large corporations broke away from the static notions of
microeconomics to fashion strategies based in part on internalizing market forces rather than remaining dependent upon them.
Chalmers A. Johnson. MITI and the Japanese Miracle: The Growth of Industrial Policy, 1925-1975. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford
University Press, 1982. (Pb)
Miyohei Shinohara. Industrial Growth. Trade and Dynamic Patterns in the Japanese Economy. Tokyo: University of Tokyo
Press, 1982.
Ezra F. Vogel. Japan as Number One: Lessons for America (1979). New York: Harper & Row, 1985. (Pb)
Three views on how and why Japan has become more competitive than any of the older industrial countries. Shinohara
explains Japan's departure from Western economic theory to create a growth-oriented economic strategy. Johnson explains how
it was conceived, by whom, and how it has been implemented. Vogel explains why Japan is not and does not wish to become a
consumer-oriented welfare state.
Thomas S. Kuhn. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (1962). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970. (Pb)
Pierre Wack. "Scenarios: Uncharted Waters Ahead." Harvard Business Review (19 September 1985).
Wack explains the value of scenarios as alternative theories of the case. Kuhn explains revolutionary changes in the sciences as
occurring only when one theory replaces another.
ECONOMICS
Alain Anderton
Modern economics is often said to date from the publication of Adam Smith's book The Wealth of Nations. Adam Smith was
the first writer to describe a market economy as we might recognize it today. Since 1776, economic thought has developed
considerably against a backdrop of ever more complex economies. David Ricardo, an economist working in the early 19th
century, predicted that eventually economies would cease to grow and that workers' wages would settle down at a subsistence
level while landowners and capitalists would reap huge rewards. His prediction led to economics being dubbed `the dismal
science'. We know today that Ricardo's thinking was flawed and that workers in the rich industrialized countries of the world
enjoy a prosperity undreamed of in Ricardo's time. However, economics has always been controversial because it is used by
individuals, businesses, and governments to make decisions. Economic agents all too often look around for an economic theory
that confirms their prejudices rather than accepting that our understanding of how a system as complex as a market economy
works is often imperfect. The ever changing nature of economics and the potential for entering a debate about causes, effects,
and policy implications are just some of the factors that make economics so fascinating.
The theory of economics does not furnish a body of settled conclusions immediately applicable to policy. It is a method rather
than a doctrine, an apparatus of the mind, a technique for thinking, which helps its possessor draw correct conclusions.
JOHN MAYNARD KEYNES
History of Economic Thought (1991) by William J Barber. Like any discipline, economics and its concerns have changed
over time. This book is one of the most read-able and authoritative guides to these changes in economic thought which in turn
have influenced the way governments have run their economies.
An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations (1776; many later editions) by Adam Smith. Adam Smith
is often considered to be the founder of modem-day economics because he was the first writer to outline and appraise the
workings of a free-market economy. The workings of the `invisible hand' of the marketplace, which allocated resources
according to the self-interest of both producers and consumers, led to the promotion of the social good. Limiting competition,
for instance through monopolies, raised prices and led to less being produced. His story of the pin factory, which he used to
illustrate the benefits of the division of labour, is particularly memorable.
Capital (1867-95; many editions) by Karl Marx. This is definitely one of those books to take to your desert island. Widely
bought but rarely read, it is a seminal work which had a profound influence on the 20th century. For those who lack the time or
the patience to read this large tome, some extracts, or The Communist Manifesto (1849), will give the reader the flavour and an
insight into the abstract nature of Marxian analysis but also the very real social problems that Marx attempted to address.
The General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money (1936) by John Maynard Keynes. This book was the starting
point for our modern-day understanding of macroeconomics, the study of how the economy works as a whole. It is very much
a book written by an economist to other economists about the great issue of the day - why could economies stay in deep
depression over a long period of time, and how could governments get economies out of the depression? In it, Keynes argues
that governments have a responsibility to kick-start an economy in deep depression by spending money, and then allowing
private businesses and consumers to take over with more investment expenditure and consumption expenditure as the recovery
proceeds.
Keynes and After (1991) by Michael Stewart. This book, which has been regularly updated over time, provides the lay
person's guide to the Keynesian revolution in economic thinking. Stewart explains Keynes's thinking and sets it in its historical
context. He then considers the monetarist counterattack to Keynesian thought mounted from the late 1960s which rapidly
became a counter-orthodoxy.
The Affluent Society (1958) by J K Galbraith. J K Galbraith has been the great popularizer of left-wing liberal economics in
the USA since the mid-I950s. This, his first seminal work, was an attack on the failure of government to provide a social infra-
structure that matched the growing affluence of private spending. He coined the phrase 'private affluence, public squalor' to
encapsulate his main theme. Galbraith has since written a number of important works, including the highly readable The Great
Depression and The Liberal Hour.
Free to Choose (1980) by Milton Friedman (with A J Schwartz). In the 1950s and 1960s, belief in the importance of state
intervention to correct a market system that was prone to failure became increasingly dominant. The tide was turned by Milton
Friedman, who became a great popularizer of right-wing economics. In Free to Choose, he outlined the benefits of allowing
markets to decide what is to be produced and how it is to be produced. Individuals should be allowed to control their own
destinies, whereas government power and control in the economic sphere should be reduced to its barest minimum. For
Friedman, governments usually made far worse decisions than the individuals whose lives were being affected by those
decisions.
Small Is Beautiful: A Study of Economics as if People Mattered (1973) by E F Schumacher. Traditional economics, whether
of the right or of the left, is not with-out its critics. There are those who are that we need completely new economic structures if
the planet is to survive and human beings are to be allowed to be fully human. This seminal work provided such an alternative
vision. Schumacher argues that we need to go back to small structures in society and that the trend towards the large - the large
firm, large production, global consumption - is self-defeating and unsustainable.
The State We're In (1995) by Will Hutton. A surprise best seller of 1995, this left-wing analysis of the state of the British
economy paints a gloomy picture of today's Britain. It vigorously attacks Thatcherite economic policies and argues the case for
more state intervention both to increase the efficiency of the economy and to reduce growing inequalities.
The Death of Economics (1994) by Paul Ormerod. A very readable critical appraisal of current thinking on economics and
how that thinking has influenced government policy. It is particularly harsh in its judgement on the way mathematics and
statistics have been used within the discipline and tries to suggest a way forward that is more concerned with the dynamics and
institutions of the economy.
BUSINESS
Alain Anderton
The study of business is relatively young. It is also changing so fast that what seems important today is of only historical
interest in the business climate of tomorrow. As John Harvey Smith writes in an introduction to the Penguin edition of Igor
Ansoff's Corporate Strategy: “Despite the fact that the world of business prides itself on its self-analytical and ordered
approach to things, businessmen are no less prone than the next man to fashion and crazes. As the ground of what constitutes
business success is ploughed over again and again `new discoveries' are made, new methodology is produced and new
panaceas for success are recommended, and as eagerly sought.”
Any airport bookshop will contain a wide selection of the latest books from today's fashionable gurus, testament to the
ephemeral nature of the subject. Nevertheless, there are some classics in the field and the very fact that business is so
changeable makes it one of the most compelling and exciting areas for reading today.
The best class of scientific mind is the same as the best class of business mind. The
great desideratum in either case is to know how much evidence is enough to
warrant action. It is as unbusiness-like to want too much evidence before buying
and selling as to be content with too little.
SAMUEL BUTLER
The Principles of Scientific Management (1911) by Frederick W Taylor. A business classic in which the US author analyses
how work can be organized under scientific principles to maximize output per labourer. For Taylor, labourers are motivated
only by money, so they need to be scientifically motivated and controlled by management.
The Practice of Management (1994) by Peter Drucker. A management classic by the father of American business gurus. In
this seminal book, he laid down many of the ideas about how managers should manage by setting objectives which were taken
up and reworked by others, such as Charles Handy and Tom Peters.
The Human Side of Enterprise (1960) by Douglas McGregor. In a counterblast to Frederick Taylor, Douglas McGregor
outlined a complex theory of what motivates workers. For McGregor, pay is just one of many factors that are important in
deter-mining motivation. He placed stress on the positive side of human nature and saw labour as a resource to be released
rather than controlled. McGregor was one of a number of people who helped develop our modem understanding of workplace
motivation.
Strategic Management (1979) by Igor Ansoff. Strategic Management is a heavy-weight classic by an author who has
specialized in writing about how businesses should operate within the business environment in which they find themselves.
Ansoff discusses, for instance, how businesses should decide what to produce, how to sell, what size to be, and how to respond
to competitors.
When Giants Learn to Dance (1992) by Rosabeth Moss Kantor. This is book aimed at those interested in the giants of the
business world - the IBMs, the Fords, and the Shells. Kantor discusses how big can mean cumbersome, bureaucratic, and
inefficient. To remain like this is to die. To survive in today's climate, giant companies need to learn how to be responsive,
nimble, flexible, and efficient.
In Search of Excellence (1982) by Tom Peters and Robert H Waterman. The case-study approach is at the root of business
education. In this seminal work, Peters and Waterman look at a number of American companies which, in their opinion, have
been immensely successful. They then focus on the management of these companies and explore why particular managers and
management cultures stand above the rest.
Competitive Advantage of Nations (1990) by Michael Porter. Some countries have been immensely successful economically.
The economic performance of other countries has been mediocre, and some very poor. Michael Porter explores why this has
been the case, and in particular discusses what it is about businesses and the business environment that has contributed to
nations such as Japan being so successfully competitive.
The Age of Unreason (1989) by Charles Handy. In an information age, structures within businesses and within society will be
far more flexible than before. To survive, organizations will have to be in a continuous process of learning. To create this
environment, workers will be constantly changing their roles. Those employed within organizations will have a number of
temporary briefs. A large number of workers, however, will work on the periphery, accumulating a portfolio of jobs
subcontracted from organizations. Inevitably, the number of workers employed permanently by an organization will diminish.
Education will be a constant feature of the worker's life, and many will choose to work part-time in retirement. Handy predicts
that fewer and fewer workers will have a `job for life'.
Troubleshooter (1991) by John Harvey Jones. The former chair of ICI, famous for his loud ties, is constantly providing a
stream of light, easy-to-read but penetrating books. This book, based on a BBC television series, has John Harvey Jones
reporting on a number of businesses that faced problems. He identifies those problems and suggests solutions. A fun read!
Body and Soul: How to Succeed in Business and Change the World (1992) by Anita Roddick. This is a book for those who
want an alternative perspective on the business world. In this book, Anita Roddick describes how she founded the Body Shop
and discusses the ethics and values - including spirituality - upon which the Body Shop has been built.
Education
Freire, Paulo and Myles Horton, Brazilian and American writing in English, 1921-1997 and 1905-1990.
(See also Freire, Paulo)
We Make the Road by Walking. Rec: Utne
Jeanne S. Chall
Jeanne S. Chall is professor of education and director of the Harvard Reading Laboratory. Her most widely known books
include: Learning to Read: The Great Debate; the Dale-Chall Formula for Predicting Readability; and
Stages of Reading Development. A fellow of the American Psychological Association and a member of the National Academy
of Education, she has served on the board of directors of the National Society for the Study of Education and the International
Reading Association. and has been president of the Reading Hall of Fame. She is regarded as Harvard's "expert on reading."
The first three works influenced directly my choice of career and early research and scholarship. The next two influenced,
broadly. my approach to analysis of issues. And the last two represent more recent influences on my thinking.
Irving Lorge. "Predicting Reading Difficulty of Selections for Children." Elementary English Review, Volume 16 (October
1939), 229-33.
This article was the first I read on readability, and in a real sense it changed my life. Soon after reading it, I decided to go to
graduate school to become an educational psychologist and researcher. The article presented the first easy-to-use readability
formula based on a synthesis and refinement of earlier research and the author's original ideas—and it did it so clearly, simply
and effectively. The ideas and the analysis are still as fresh and compelling today as they were when first written more than
forty years ago.
Edgar Dale. The Higher Literacy: Selections from the Writings of Dr. Edgar Dale. Champaign: University of Illinois Film
Center, 1982.
Edgar Dale's writings on readability, vocabulary and the mass media have also had a strong and lasting influence on me. His
writings have also served as models of clarity and grace.
George K. Zipf. The Psycho-Biology of Language (1935). Cambridge, Mass.: M.I.T. Press, 1965.
I do not recall how I happened to read George K. Zipf s The Psycho-Biology of Language. But I thought of it as a personal
discovery. Based on a different body of theory and evidence than the one with which I was familiar, he documented that in all
languages one could find an inverse relationship between word frequency and word length. This gave me a convincing
explanation as to why readability research had consistently found word length and frequency of usage predictive of difficulty.
Zipf provided the bigger explanation—that the more the words are used, the shorter they become, and the more meanings they
tend to have.
Jean Piaget. Structuralism (1968). Chaninah Maschler, ed. and trans. New York: Basic Books, 1970.
J. B. Carroll. "Developmental Parameters of Reading Comprehension" (1974). In J. T. Guthrie, ed., Cognition, Curricu-
lum, and Comprehension. Newark, Del.: International Reading Association, 1977. (Pb)
I have had an almost lifelong friendship with the works of Jean Piaget. It became more intense when, in the early 1970s, I was
working on a model of reading development and a friend gave me a copy of his Structuralism. This started me on a ten-year
study of the development of reading. Toward the last phases of my work, I was encouraged Further by the model of John
Carroll.
Henry James. The Wings of the Dove (1902). New York: Penguin, 1974. (Pb)
My first introduction to Henry James was through a friend who shared with me a copy of The Americans. From then, until
about a decade ago, I was always reading or rereading some Henry James. What made him so compelling? Perhaps it was his
complexities—of character, incidents and style. I think they offered me an escape from my own work in which I strive for
clarity, simplicity and directness. I have also learned much about the psychology of reading from Henry James. When I first
started reading James, I found his sentences almost impossible. They became quite readable with exposure and practice.
Nathan Glazer
Nathan Glazer is professor of education and social structure at Harvard's Graduate School of Education. His courses focus on
issues in education, ethnicity and American social problems. He is coeditor of The Public Interest and has been on the editorial
staff of Commentary. His most notable works include Ethnic Dilemmas 1964-1982, (1983); Ethnicity: Theory and Experience,
coedited with Daniel Patrick Moynihan (1975); and Beyond the Melting Pot, on which Daniel Patrick Moynihan also
collaborated.
Richard Hofstadter. Academic Freedom in the Age of the College. New York: Columbia University Press, 1955. (Pb)
Walter P. Metzger. Academic Freedom in the Age of the University. New York: Columbia University Press, 1955. (Pb)
These books discuss the kind of issues that are part of the history of freedom in the United States—academic freedom and
rights. They provide a perspective on how we have developed, to the point that in America these issues of freedom are no
longer major problems, for we have for the most part settled them. People have little sense of how the American college and
university came to be, how they developed, how they are organized, and why they play such an important part in American life.
This book will help them, as it did me, to understand them.
Lawrence A. Cremin. American Education. 2 vols. to date. New York: Harper & Row, 1982-. (Pb)
This is a monumental work of scholarship which deals with key aspects of American life—schools, books and news. Cremin's
work explains how we have tried to educate not only in classrooms but in all sorts of other ways. It gives a unique view of
American history.
Donald L. Horowitz. Ethnic Groups in Conflict. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1985.
This is a powerful analysis of ethnic conflict in the developing world, where it is a hindrance to development and where there
is destruction of people and property on a vast scale. It raises serious and grave issues for every country. The book represents
fifteen years of scholarly work and is important reading for an understanding of the problems in the developing world.
E. G. West. Education and the State. 2d ed. London: Institute of Economic Affairs, 1970.
Education and the State is one of those books that formed part of the revival of conservative thinking in various spheres of
public policy. It raises, in a more convincing way than any other work, the questions, Why should the state educate? How
should the state educate? and Should the state have a monopoly on education? West approaches these questions with wonderful
scholarship and elegant analytical skills. I can't imagine anyone coming to contemporary issues of education, such as tuition tax
credits and vouchers, without reading this book. Any person with an open mind will say, "Here are things I never thought of
before."
Francis Keppel
Francis Keppel is a senior lecturer on education at Harvard's Graduate School of Education. He was dean of the Education
School from 1948 to 1962 and U.S. Commissioner of Education from 1962 to 1966. He later served as chairman of the General
Learning Corporation (1966-74) and is now chairman of Appropriate Technology International. His teaching focuses on state
and federal policies affecting education, with special interest in federal programs in compensatory education, student financial
aid and desegregation and educational boards, including the Lincoln Center for the Performing Arts in New York.
These books may help the reader to avoid being surprised, and surprise often leads to bad judgment.
The Bible (Both the King James version and recent translations).
Even apart from matters of personal belief, the Bible is indispensable to an understanding of the history of the West. Without it,
literature and art lose some of their meaning, and the visual arts particularly have been a central part of my life.
Werner W. Jaeger. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture (1934). Gilbert Highet, trans. New York: Oxford University Press,
1965. (Pb)
Jaeger's conclusion that society itself is the major force in educating the young formed my thinking when I started a lifelong
career in education after World War II.
Alexander Hamilton, John Jay, and James Madison. The Federalist [Papers] (1788). Benjamin F. Wright, ed. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press, 1961.
For any citizen of the United States, and particularly one with strong interests in public affairs, The Federalist [Papers] helps to
explain our mixture of optimism for social progress and realism about man's weakness.
Lawrence A. Cremin. American Education. 2 vols. to date. New York: Harper & Row, 1982—. (Pb)
This massive and magisterial account, stretching from colonial to modern times, puts schools and colleges into context. It is for
me a successor to Jaeger, and its annotated bibliography is incomparable.
James B. Conant. Education in a Divided World (1948). New York: Greenwood Press, 1969.
Almost forty years later, Conant's analysis stands up well, and brings back to a devoted admirer a man of remarkable honesty
and moral courage.
Education in most countries today finds itself in the front line of the war between ideologies. A utilitarian view conflicts with
the liberal notion of education for self-fulfilment more fiercely than ever. The introduction of competition and market forces is
resisted by those who hold education as a right which should be equally available to all. Education is variously regarded as a
means to social and political liberation and as a weapon in the international battle for economic hegemony. The books I have
chosen provide an introduction to these conflicts without necessarily offering solutions because one thing at least is clear: the
great education debate will continue.
The Unschooled Mind (1989) by Howard Gardner. Building on his work on multiple intelligences, Gardner argues that
teaching and learning must be adapted to the needs of individual children, who may learn in particular ways.
Teach Your Own (1981) by John Holt. A fierce critic of American schooling advises parents to take control of their children's
education and educate them at home.
School Matters (1988) by Peter Mortimore, Pamela Sammons, Louise Stoll, David Lewis, and Russell Ecob. The research
study which by analysing the progress of children in London primary schools gave the first scientific basis upon which school
improvement might be based.
Closely Observed Children (1980) by Michael Armstrong. A fascinating first-hand account of a progressive primary school
by a determined advocate of child-centred learning, written in the form of a teacher's diary.
Parents and Schools, Customers, Managers or Partners? (1993) edited by Pamela M. A collection of discussion papers on
the growing involvement of parents in education.
Education and the Social Order (1991) by Brian Simon. The final volume of Simon's definitive history of British education
up to and including the Thatcher revolution which has still not run its course. This and the following book look closely at the
impact of radical - or controversial - changes in educational policy of the British government during the 1980s and 1990s.
Take Care Mr Baker! (1988) edited by Julian Haviland. The initiative that brought into the light of day the responses to
Kenneth Baker's Education Reform Bill from public bodies and individuals. It exposes the strengths and weaknesses of the
legislation that still affects British schooling and is still being amended.
Essays
David M. Livingston
David Livingston is a professor of medicine at the Harvard Medical School—molecular biology is his field. He teaches, runs a
laboratory and does active clinical medicine. His special interest is oncko genes, their products and how the latter function. He
wrote an op-ed piece for the New York Times on the irksome vacuous noise broadcast over airplane loudspeakers. Additional
op-ed pieces he writes may follow.
Charles Dickens. A Tale of Two Cities (1859). New York: Bantam, 1981. (Pb)
I remember feeling that I could nearly palpate the passion of the murderous French anti-Royalists and, for the first time,
appreciate the possibility that chronic oppression could break down the barriers which normally block the expression of
uncivilized instincts.
John Steinbeck. In Dubious Battle (orig. Dubious Battle in California, 1936). New York: Penguin, 1979. (Pb)
One's cynical views of what activates the passions of many people need not be all-consuming, for there are "ordinary"
individuals who are not weird, whose daily behavior is based largely on moral principles, and who are, therefore, worth
emulating.
Paul H. DeKruif. Microbe Hunters (1926). New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1966. (Pb)
I didn't decide to become a physician or scientist immediately after finishing this book. However, it provided me with my first
taste of the excitement associated with a scientific hunt.
Ford Madox Ford. The Good Soldier (1915). New York: Random House, 1951. (Pb)
The practiced arts of civility among educated people are an important manifestation of the gentle nature of the human spirit.
However, from this novel I became more aware than ever that they can also be used as cover by those whose morality has been
eroded by passion.
David Halberstam. The Best and the Brightest (1972). New York: Penguin, 1983. (Pb)
This book gave me my clearest appreciation yet for the enormity of the powers held by senior American foreign-policy makers.
It also showed how easily the thin line between responsible and irresponsible use of these powers could be crossed in the
interest of serving narrow logic.
Feminism
Feminist literature dates back to the 18th century, but there have been intervals of quiescence, during which writers devoted
their energies more to the novel and to social reform. The earliest examples of the genre tended to formal rectitude, despite the
vigour of the political argument. More recently, the tone has become personal, at times violently polemical. The American
women's movement has been especially vociferous. However. a comparison of, say, Mary Wollstonecraft with Germaine Greer
suggests that women's grievances remain much the same, as do basic attitudes on both sides of the sexual divide. Natural
history or indoctrination? It remains true that despite the considerable economic and social changes in Western society. the
repression of women has had and continues to have ugly effects all round. We have limited ourselves to books worth reading
for their originality and vigour as well as for their socio-historical importance. We hope that this list may soon be scrapped—
for the battle will have been won at last.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Kitzinger): AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Brittain, Mead): BIOGRAPHY (Tomalin):
HISTORY/AMERICAN (Krantor); MEDICINE (Boston Women's Collective); MYTHOLOGY (Slater); RELIGION (Warner):
SEX (Hite); SOCIOLOGY (Mead)
Brownmiller, Susan Against Our Will: Men, Women and Rape (1975)
Main, chilling argument is that rape is about male-female power politics. Evans, Sara Personal Politics (1979)
Vital for understanding the roots of women's liberation in the USA. Author traces the connections between the civil rights
movement and the New Left in the emergence of an autonomous feminist movement.
Flexner, Eleanor Century of Struggle: The Woman's Rights Movement in the United States (1959)
Excellent historical overview. 1979 revision brings it up to date.
Janeway, Elizabeth Mans World, Woman's Place: A Study in Social Mythology (1971) *
The title says it all. This is one of the best feminist books—measured, eloquent, overwhelming for all of good will.
Mill, John Stuart The Subjection of Women (1869) * Argues strongly that both sexes have lost out because of the political
and legal subjection of women. Stresses mutal support and the importance of a "just" society. Inspiring, influential. See
ECONOMICS; PHILOSOPHY; POLITICS
Norris, Jill and Liddington, Jill One Hand Tied Behind Us (1978) * A study of interconnections between trade unionism,
suffrage and socialism in Lancashire in the late 19th and early 20th centuries. Moving accounts of those radical suffragists'
personal lives and political views—partly gleaned from interviews.
Pomeroy, Sarah B. Goddesses, Whores, Wives and Slaves (1975) Fascinating study of women in classical antiquity. "The
hand that rocks the cradle rules the world"—a comfortable (male) view, definitively examined. Lucid, elegant, shocking.
Ramelson, Marian The Petticoat Rebellion (1967) a Moving general account of various strands in the women's movement
in Britain from the late 18th century to the early 20th century.
Rossi, Alice The Feminist Papers (1973) a Comprehensive anthology of major feminist writings from the late 18th century
to Simone de Beauvoir (qv).
Rowbotham, Sheila Women, Resistance and Revolution (1972) Wide-ranging survey of the roots of inequality from the 17th
century to the present. As the author says, "feminism and Marxism come home to roost". They cohabit somewhat uneasily,
being at once incompatible and in need of each other. Essential for those not convinced of this mutal dependence.
FEMINISM
Gloria Steinem
Feminism, women's liberation, the women's movement, women's rights, woman-ism, and feminisms in the plural - all these and
more are terms to describe the current transformative movement for female equality as human beings. This wave follows the
19th- and early-20th-century wave known as suffrage or female emancipation, in which women succeeded in winning an
identity. Previously they had been chattels with a legal status that provided the model for slavery.
Indeed, there have been successive waves of rebellion in every pan of the world, in public and in private, for the last few
thousand years since patriarchy replaced ways of life in which power seems to have been more balanced.
By now, the feminist argument for equal status for females of all races, classes, ages, ethnicities, abilities, and sexualities has
begun to sound reasonable and to have majority support in public opinion polls, but it is still opposed by forces that range from
religious fundamentalists to multinational companies, from right-wing patriarchs to left-wing nationalists. After all, equal pay
and equal access to land, credit, and inheritance would constitute a massive redistribution of wealth; women's sexual and
reproductive freedom would take away control of the means of reproduction from family, religion, and state; redefining and
revaluing work to include the unpaid or underpaid production and reproduction now done by 'women who don't work', whether
homemakers in overdeveloped countries or food producers in underdeveloped ones, would eliminate the world's largest source
of cheap labour; challenging the division of human nature into 'masculine' and `feminine' would uproot the passive/dominant
paradigm on which race, class, and other hierarchies are based; shifting from religions in which God looks like the ruling class
to spiritualities in which god is present in women and all living things would delegitimize man's domination of women and
nature; and nurturing the full range of human qualities in both males and females would eliminate the violence implicit in
having to prove `masculinity', and transform our ideas about human nature itself.
Whether we are working towards each person's empowerment in ways large or small, we are part of the feminist movement.
Most of these books come from North America and Europe, but many include references to movements on other continents. In
general, each book will lead you to many more.
I myself have never been able to find out precisely what feminism is. I only
know that people call me a feminist whenever I express sentiments that
differentiate me from a doormat.
REBECCA WEST
Beyond Power: On Women, Men, and Morals (1985) by Marilyn French. A well-documented and mind-changing argument
that current power systems are neither inevitable nor natural.
The Great Cosmic Mother: Rediscovering the Religion of the Earth (1987) by Monica Sjoo and Barbara Mor. Starting in
Africa, where human beings first developed - and with the 95% of human history that preceded patriarchy, monotheism, and
nationalism - this fills in some of the knowledge dismissed as `prehistory'.
The Mermaid and the Minotaur: Sexual Arrangements and Human Malaise (1976) by Dorothy Dinnerstein. By exploring
why women have such unequal responsibility for child-rearing - and the far-reaching impact of men raising children as much as
women do - Dinnerstein creates a starting place for changing everything from women's double role to the roots of male
violence.
Feminism: The Essential Historical Writings (1972, 1992, and 1994) and Feminism in Our Time: The Essential Writings,
World War II to the Present (1994) edited with an introduction and commentaries by Miriam Schneir. These are excerpts from
essays, fiction, memoirs, letters, and political theory by major feminist writers, from pre-suffrage through Simone de Beauvoir,
Betty Friedan, Kate Millett, Susan Brownmiller, Audre Lorde, Adrienne Rich, and other modern pioneers (though its
commentary misunderstands Carol Gilligan, Andrea Dworkin, and others). You can browse and see which ones you want to
read in their entirety.
Sisterhood Is Powerful (1970) edited by Robin Morgan; Radical Feminism (1973) edited by Anne Koedt, Ellen Levine, and
Anita Rapone; and This Bridge Called My Back: Writings by Radical Women of Color (1983) edited by Charrie Moraga and
Gloria Anzaldua. Any of these three anthologies will take you from the personal to the political and back again. Consciousness-
raising, rap groups, revolutionary cells: what-ever you want to call this process of learning from each other's lives and sharing
insights, it is made portable here.
Sisterhood Is Global: The International Women's Movement Anthology (1984) edited by Robin Morgan. An unmatched
overview of female history and status in almost every country, from Afghanistan to Zimbabwe, with a modem feminist also
writing a personal essay from each one.
If Women Counted: A New Feminist Economics (1988) by Marilyn Waring. A practical, visionary, international plan for
attributing value to women's unpaid labour and to the environment.
The New Our Bodies Ourselves: A Book by and for Women (revised edition 1995) by the Boston Women's Health Collective.
This premier self-help book of the women's health movement has been updated periodically over more than 20 years, and
translated into most of the world's major languages. (See also Ourselves Growing Older.)
Writing a Woman's Life (1988) by Carolyn Heilbrun. A slender volume full of insight into the current cultural differences
between male and female life patterns that mean many women become ourselves after 50.
Outlaw Culture: Resisting Representations (1994) by Bell Hooks. An astute and passionate black feminist critic's essays on
contemporary culture, from sex and movies to love and freedom.
Trauma and Recovery: The Aftermath of Violence, from Domestic Abuse to Political Terror (1992) by Judith Lewis Herman.
A brilliant analysis of the parallels between the mostly female survivors of child sexual abuse and domestic violence. By
exposing the similar political and spirit-breaking results of trauma, she offers ways of healing.
Staying Alive: Women, Ecology and Development (1988) by Vandana Shiva. Linkage among these mega-issues of our time by
an Indian philosopher of science and activist.
The Anatomy of Freedom: Feminism in Four Dimensions (1982; second edition 1994) by Robin Morgan. How feminism and
the new physics are breaking down hierarchy and creating holographic ways of perceiving reality.
New Feminist Discourses (1992) edited by Isobel Armstrong. A collection of essays that provides contemporary critical
analyses of women's texts from various feminist viewpoints.
Black Women Writers (1985) edited by Mari Evans. This text brings together a range of interviews with African-American
women writers, including excerpts from their poetry and prose.
Horne Girls: A Black Feminist Anthology (1983) edited by Barbara Smith. This is a collection of critical and creative writing
by contemporary African-American women writers, allowing theory, politics, and analysis to be read together.
Black Women Novelists and the Nationalist Aesthetic (1994) by Madhu Dubey. Using black feminist theory, this text reads
writing by authors such as Toni Morrison and Alice Walker to challenge traditional notions of black female identity.
Contemporary African Literature and the Politics of Gender (1994) by Florence Stratton. Studies the influence of
colonialism and race on African literatures, especially those by women.
Francophone African Women Writers (1994) by Irene Assiba D'Almeida. A survey of writing by French-speaking African
women that discusses the issue of silence in women's texts.
Sexual/Textual Politics (1985) by Toril Moi. Ground-breaking critical analysis of women's writing and its relation to sexual
politics.
A Literature of Their Own (1977) by Elaine Showalter. More traditional feminist analyses from a less theoretical perspective.
Lacks the range of attention to differences between women, but remains useful as an introduction to the field.
Fiction
The story. it has been argued, is finally all that men can contrive to leave behind them. their only personal immortality. Their
riches are perishable (unless they become the stuff of museums or vaults), but a man's story is his true legacy, the ghost through
which we see him forever. But man is not only a speaking and a writing animal: he is unique in being a lying animal as well.
His fictions are made of the same stuff as truth and if truth is stranger than fiction, fiction is sometimes truer. Thus though
common sense may assert that the novel is merely a narrative form and that "creative writing" is but entertainment, we have a
persistent feeling that novelists have more to tell us about life than all the psychoanalysts and sociologists. When all has been
said and done, there is one more thing to say and do: write and tell stories, read and recommend and pass them on.
The books recommended here are chosen not only to entertain, but also to give a cross-section—including a fair proportion of
masterworks—of a form of literature in which everyone will have his own taste. Some great books have, no doubt, been
omitted (especially if they are not in English), sometimes because (as in the case of. say. Doeblin's Alexanderplatz) no reliable
translation yet exists. Classics have tended to prevail over contemporary work, not least because it would have been ridiculous
to leave them out. Only a Cretan would claim that all the best novels and short fictions are contained here, and Cretans, as we
all know, are renowned for telling stories.
Doyle, Sir Arthur Conan The Memoirs of Sherlock Holmes (1894) Despite time, competition and the Reichenbach Falls,
Holmes survives as the greatest, most famous detective in literature, an enduring part of popular mythology. Also: The
Adventures of Sherlock Holmes; The Hound of the Baskervilles; His Last Bow, etc
Hammett, Dashiell The Maltese Falcon (1932) t"' Tougher and more uncomprising than Chandler, Hammett's spare,
cynical, unglamorized stories looked hard at violence, crooked police and urban corruption. Also: The Glass Key; The Dain
Curse; Red Harvest-, The Thin Man. See AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Hellman)
Lathen, Emma Murder against the Grain (1967) it Behind the pseudonym lurk two Boston businesswomen who have
made Wall Street synonymous with murder and mayhem. Also: When in Greece; The Longer the Thread; By Hook or by
Crook, etc
Le Carrë, John The Spy Who Came in from the Cold (1963); The Naive and Sentimental Lover (1971)
Le Carre's achievement has been wildly exaggerated, and his work can be repetitive, hermetic and as dull as the routine he so
lovingly dissects. But at his best, he is grippingly good: in The Spy Who Came in from the Cold he created a true mirror of our
distracted times, and in The Naive and Sentimental Lover. he found a warmth, a depth and a dignity his other bleak visions
signally lack.
McBain, Ed Cop Hater (1956) * Versatile, prolific, consistent, McBain has written a string of pacey police procedurals.
His detectives, Steve Carella, Cotton Hawes, Meyer Meyer get regular feature spots, but unusually it is the 87th Precinct itself
that has retained the limelight. Also: The Mugger, Like Love; Give the Boys a Great Big Hand, etc
Macdonald, Ross The Goodbye Look (1969) * Lew Archer started life as a Marlowe imitator, but Macdonald's
exuberant relish for story telling has helped his sleuth acquire a precise personal identity. Also: The Far Side of the Dollar, The
Moving Target; Sleeping Beauty, etc
Simenon, Georges My Friend Maigret (1949) 11, How Simenon managed an output of six short novels a year coupled
with an endless series of amorous conquests is a subject for the record books. Best read in French: English translations (even
those by Baldick, the best) are slapdash and unstylish. Also: Maigret and the Enigmatic Letr, Maigret's Memoirs; Maigret
Meets a Milord, etc. See AUTOBIOGRAPHY
Stout, Rex Fer-de-Lance (1934) it Who weighs one seventh of a ton, is nearly six feet tall, grows orchids, lives in a
brownstone in New York, and is a self-confessed genius? The answer is Nero Wolfe, who with his laconic legman, Archie
Goodwin, forms one of the most entertaining double acts in detective fiction. Also: The League of Frightened Men; The Silent
Speaker, A Family Affair, etc
Wahloo, Per and Sjowall, Maj The Laughing Policeman (1970) Police procedurals, featuring the lugubrious Martin Beck,
take a hard and abrasive look at Swedish society. Gloomily compulsive. Also: The Abominable Man; The Locked Room; Cop
Killer, etc
More people read crime and detection novels than any other form of fiction. It cuts across differences of age, culture, gender,
and class, combining the fascination of crime with the reassurance of order restored, a mystery solved. It began in the 19th
century with the works of Wilkie Collins and Edgar Allan Poe, and soon became a genre with many (very different) forms -
such as the very English `murder in the vicarage' of Agatha Christie, the hardboiled American writing of Hammett and
Chandler, the psychological analysis of Patricia Highsmith. It can be pulp fiction, sophisticated entertainment, and (in the
hands of writers such as Jorge Luis Borges and Umberto Eco) philosophical speculation. One of the best introductions to crime
and detection fiction is Julian Symons's Bloody Murder (1972), a history of the genre. The following list includes
representative works from each of the main genres ('whodunnit', `whydunnit', `howdunnit', `thriller', `spy story', `historical
reconstruction').
The Murder of Roger Ackroyd (1926) by Agatha Christie. The most brilliant thing she ever wrote. A hugely imaginative
woman, today sometimes sadly underrated.
The Hollow Man (1935) by John Dickson Carr. Most implausible plot ever but the most staggeringly ingenious of all his
books. Excellent.
The Glass Key (1931) by Dashiell Hammett. Probably one of the best detective novels ever written. Balance between plot,
characterization, and tension is superb.
Farewell, My Lovely (1940) by Raymond Chandler. Almost everyone would have him on their list. Any book would do. This
is Chandler at his very best.
The Spy Who Came in from the Cold (1963) by John Le Cane. Perhaps the finest and most poignant of all spy stories.
Haunting atmosphere, superb plot.
Malice Aforethought (1931) by Frances Iles. One of the most important crime books ever written. Frances Iles is a
pseudonym of Anthony Berkeley.
The Daughter of Time (1951) by Josephine Tey. Historical crime fiction - was Richard III a murderer? Not an easy read, but
wonderfully worth it.
A Fatal Inversion (1987) by Barbara Vine. Barbara Vine is a pseudonym of Ruth Rendell. This superb psychological thriller
displays her incredible talents to the full.
The Day of the Jackal (1971) by Frederick Forsyth. Probably the best thriller written since World War II. Everyone knows
there will be no assassination, but the ingenuity is breathtaking, and the pace splendidly maintained.
The False Inspector Dew (1982) by Peter Lovesy. Extremely clever, interesting, and so easy to read. Based on the
transatlantic liner route and the Crippen murder story. A very fine present-day writer.
Novels
See CHILDREN'S BOOKS (Tolkien, White, Williamson); HUMOUR (Chevalier, Dennis, Frayn, Jerome, Loos, Petronius,
Queneau, Smith, Tinniswood, Twain, De Vries, Westlake, Wodehouse); MYTHOLOGY (Mitchison): SEX (Cleland, Genet,
Haddon, Laclos, Miller, Nin, Reage, Sade, Southern)
Butler, Samuel The Way of All Flesh (1903) ; Erewhon (1872) Creepy classic of the relationship between a British Victorian
father and his floundering, rationalist son, The Way of All Flesh is a consummate example of the novel-as-revenge. Erewhon is
elegant satire: illness as social crime, crime as illness have unhappily manifold modern reverberations. On father-son theme,
see AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Gosse)
Compton-Burnett, Ivy Mother and Son (1955) P * The hypnotic tone and knotty style of Compton-Burnett's novels are
notorious. Their grave absurdity and regular wit—they are all style, with little action—can seem merely ingenious; but
stringent perceptiveness is at work throughout. The Edwardian English "domus system" never had a more searching obituary.
Also: A God and His Gifts, etc
Defoe, Daniel Robinson Crusoe (1719); A Journal of the Plague Year (1722) 1! Virtues of forthright style are seldom
virtuous in critical circles, but Defoe's capacity for creating suspension of disbelief bypasses aesthetics. Robinson Crusoe is an
early example of the creative use of "news stories"—it was suggested by an actual marooning—just as A Journal of the Plague
Year brilliantly impersonates an eye-witness account.
Dos Passos, John Three Soldiers (1922); Manhattan Transfer(1925); USA (1932-36)
Three Soldiers is a conventional but innovative study of Americans at war in 1917; Manhattan Transfer a montage of 1920s
life; USA an impressive attempt to manage a large, politically committed theme.
Dostoyevsky, Fyodor Notes from the House of the Dead (1861); Crime and Punishment (1866)
Tolstoy's rival (according to the critic George Steiner), journalistic ranter (according to Nabokov, qv), Dostoyevsky's capacity
to dramatize deadly, comic dilemmas of Russian life under the Tsars makes him the master whose Crime and Punishment is the
best introduction. Notes from the House of the Dead—based on Dostoyevsky's life in Tsarist prisons—presages the Gulag.
Also: The Brothers Karamazov; The Idiot, The Devils, etc. See BIOGRAPHY (Zweig)
Eliot, George Middlemarch(1871); Daniel Deronda (1874) Outspokenness in sexual and social matters was never better
combined with literary decorum than in Middlemarch. We know everything about Casaubon and Dorothea's terrible marriage
without ever entering their bedroom; we see Lydgate's early flame doused by his own passion and can infer his shortcomings;
morality without Christian affectations. Daniel Deronda is prolix but acute on Victorian attitudes to the Jewish problem. Also:
Silas Mauler, Adam Bede, etc
Fielding, Henry The History of Tom Jones, a Foundling (1749); Jonathan Wild the Great(1743) P
The History of Tom Jones is long for modern taste: lacking in "development", a gallery of rogues and rips, it demands to be
read at a gallop. Jonathan Wild the Great is a knowing, low-life satire with a notorious criminal as "King". "The prose Homer
of human nature," said Byron of Fielding.
Gordimer, Nadine Guest of Honour (1977); The Late Bourgeois World (1966)
Gordimer's brave attempts to find moral orientations in an apartheid state give her dignity and seriousness, but she lacks
literary grace. Guest of Honouris about a "good" Briton returning to a recently decolonialized land; The Late Bourgeois World
is a love story between black and white in South Africa. Also: Burger's Daughter
Graves, Robert I, Claudius (1934); Claudius the God (1934); Count Belisarius (1938)
Pioneering "autobiographies" of the stammering emperor, at once clean and scabrous. Graves claimed to write fiction to
subsidize his poetry; but Count Belisarius, with its assured use of Byzantine background, deserves more than a pot-boiling
reputation. See AUTOBIOGRAPHY: HISTORY/ANCIENT (Procopius, Suetonius); MYTHOLOGY: POETRY
Hardy, Thomas Far from the Madding Crowd (1874); Tess of the D'Urbervilles (1891); Jude the Obscure (1895)
Hard to deny Hardy classic status, hard to grant it whole-heartedly on account of his clotted style, glum philosophy. Far from
the Madding Crowd earliest, liveliest masterpiece: Bathsheba Everdene is a new woman in an old Wessex setting; Tess of the D
'Urbervilles is full of memorable images, flawed by Hardy's appetite for rigged doom; Jude the Obscures scandalous reception
turned Hardy from fiction to poetry. Also: The Mayor of Casterbridge; Under the Greenwood Tree, etc. See POETRY
Hartley, L. P. The Shrimp and the Anemone (1944, trilogy with The Sixth Heaven, 1946. and Eustace and Hilda, 1947); The
Go-Between (1953)
The Go-Between charts the emotional deadening of an insecure small boy used as a go-between by lovers of different classes
in Edwardian rural England: powerful portrait of the period and of repression. The trilogy concerns a brother and sister from
cradle to maturity in England between-the-wars.
Hemingway, Ernest The Sun also Rises (Fiesta)(1926): A Farewell to Arms (1929); For Whom the Bell Tolls (1940)
Development of character was alien to Hemingway. A Farewell To Armsis the most integrated of his longer works, stained with
lost love and the blood of Caporetto; a tendency to self-ennobling postures deforms both The Sun also Rises and For Whom the
Bell Tolls but their virtues of narrative tautness and sensational pointillism easily justify his place in the modern pantheon. See
BIOGRAPHY (Baker); FICTION/SHORT STORIES
Huxley, Aldous Point Counter Point (1928): Brave New World (1932)
Ostentatiously "libellous", Point Counter Point retains interest as a portrait of 1930s galere (D. H. Lawrence et al). Prurience
and wit are lively and sustaining. Brave New World is an early example of modish dystopianism: the future as awful warning.
Also: Chrome Yellow; Antic Hay; Eyeless in Gaza, etc
Huxley, Aldous, English, 1894-1963.
Antic Hay. Rec: Bloom
Point Counter Point. Rec: Bloom ML Novels
Brave New World. Rec: Bloom Fadiman 3 Fadiman 4 ML Novels NYPL Radcliffe TLS
Collected Essays. Rec: Bloom Fadiman 3
After Many a Summer. Rec: Burgess
Ape and Essence. Rec: Burgess
Island. Rec: Burgess
James, Henry The Portrait of a Lady (1880); The Golden Bowl (1904)
The master of novel-as-art. The Portrait of a I ndy, the most accessible, if long-drawn-out, describes Isabel Archer, an American
heiress, and her fortunes in Europe. The Golden Bowl is a 21 carat, dense, abstruse evocation of sexual guilt and innocence.
Also: The Europeans; The Bostonians; Washington Square, etc. See BIOGRAPHY (Edel, James); DLARIES;
FICTION/SHORT STORIES; LITERARY CRITICISM
Joyce, James Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man (1914); Ulysses (1922)
Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man is a "conventional" narrative of Stephen Dedalus's Dublin adolescence at the turn of the
century, branded by Catholic bigotry; increasingly less "difficult" in the light of its derivatives. Ulysses, once scandalous, now
classic account of one day in the life of Leopold Bloom, a Dublin Jew, doubling for wily Odysseus. Joyce was a master of
pastiche and verbal ingenuity, sometimes committed to protracted (and wearisome) experiment; thus Finnegan's Wake is more
interesting as a text for academic exegesis than for its own sake. See BIOGRAPHY (Ellmann); DIARIES; FICTION/SHORT
STORIES
Kafka, Franz The Trial (1925); The Castle ( I 926); America (1927) 10 The Trialconcerns Josef K's arrest and degradation,
"although he had done nothing wrong"; it is a supreme creation of prognostic and literary imagination. America is a comedy of
the immigrant Kafka never was (he never saw America). The Castle is a superb comic chiller of the search for a spiritual keep.
See DIARIES; FICTION/SHORT STORIES
Lawrence, D. H. Sons and Lovers (1913); The Rainbow (1915); Women in Love (1920)
Lawrence has been less admired since the rise of militant feminism, yet Sons and Lovers, as a particular case (if not
"philosophy"), is unrivalled: Paul Morel's working class youth is thick with sensitive pain and observed life. The Rainbow and
Women in Love form a diptych; two sisters and their married destinies against the background of Nottingham farming and
mining life. See DIARIES; FICTION/SHORT STORIES; HISTORY/EUROPEAN; LITERARY CRITICISM; POETRY;
TRAVEL
McCullers, Carson The Heart is a Lonely Hunter (1940); The Member of the Wedding(1946); The Ballad of the Sad Cafe
(1951)
The "Southern" theme—sexual ingrowth, social decay—repossessed by narrow, self-centred, inventive talent; restraint and
melodrama work together to unnerving effect in studies of loneliness and jealousy.
Malraux, Andre Man's Estate (La Condition Humaine) (1933) Malraux's obsessive wish to live at the centre of history can
seem rhetorical and suspect, but he had a way of being there. Like all writers, he gilded the occasion; but the collapse of the
Chinese Empire, the triumph of Kuomintang and the savage repression of Communist allies in Shanghai in 1927 are all
marvellously realized, sentimental callousness notwithstanding. Also translated as Man's Fate (Macdonald, 1948).
Mann, Thomas The Magic Mountain (1924): Joseph and His Brethren (1933 –43); The Confessions of Felix Krull (1954)
Mann is sometimes said to have been, a la Victor Hugo, "the greatest living novelist—alas". The theme of the artist as
"neurasthenic" haunts his long oeuvre, but brilliant variations are played on it. His thought evolved from Nietzschean to
orthodox liberal, of which The Magic Mountain is the first, towering inkling—life in a sanatorium symbolically standing for
the European predicament. Joseph and His Brethren is a monumental "recovery" of ancient Palestine and Egypt, badged with
ingenious research and psychological slyness; The Confessions of Felix Krull is a marvellous work of old age, unfinished but
sappy with iconoclastic vigour. Also: Buddenbrooks; Dr Faustus; The Holy Sinner, etc. See FICTION/SHORT STORIES
Marquez, Gabriel Garcia One Hundred Years of Solitude (1967) The rich, lusty story of the rise and fall of the Buendia
family in the imaginary town of Macondo, Brazil.
Moravia, Alberto The Woman of Rome (1947) A Moravia's clear style and cocky assurance has made his Rome stand for
the whole Italian imbroglio. The Woman of Rome, full of somewhat literary realism, recounts the degraded but "noble" life of a
prostitute in Fascist times; never as crude as Moravia's later, more hotly sophisticated work. Also: The Conformist
Murdoch, Iris Under the Net (1954); A Severed Head (1961) Under the Net, first novel, contains a memorable made-over
portrait of Wittgenstein. Murdoch is a professional philosopher; her novels are often fables of existential ethics, florid with
imagery and sensuality. A Severed Head is a sexual quadrille, "wish fulfilment" bristling with wit and unnerving observation.
Also: The Bell; The Black Prince, etc
Musil, Robert The Man without Qualities (3 vols. 1930-43) Overlong, but influential and informative study of a Viennese
intellectual just before the Kaiser's war. The hero's attempt to define himself, against the decline of the Hapsburgs, issues in a
definition coterminous with the novel itself—punishment without crime, as it were.
Powell, Anthony Venusberg (1932); From a View to a Death (1933); The Music of Time (1951-1977)
The last is a sequence of twelve novels. Englishmen, often of extremely etiolated temperament, are shown in revealing postures
of upperclass-1920s onwards—embarrassment. The Music of Time is greatly admired for its evocation of wartime England—
and for those in the know, especially spicy. The early novels are sharp with wit, a good aperitif to the main 12-course meal.
Also: What's Become of Waring?
Roth, Philip Goodbye, Columbus (1959); Letting Go (1963); Portnoy's Complaint (1969)
Written by a Gentile, Roth's work would be anti-Semitic; by a Jew, it holds a note of furious affection. Goodbye, Columbus is a
fine novella (published with stories); Letting Go, a long, serious study of graduate life, is possibly Roth's finest book; Portnoy's
Cornplaintis a "confessional"—set-pieces of irresistibly comic anguish by the conscientious masturbator, Portnoy. Also: The
Professor of Desire
Serge, Victor Men in Prison (1931); The Case of Comrade Tulayev (1948)
Serge lived revolution and imprisonment; his novels are etched with authenticity; but despite suffering and disillusionment he
was capable of lyrical and intense flights of generous imagination. The Case of Comrade Tulayev is arguably a truer picture of
Stalinism than either Koestler's (qv) Darkness at Noon or Trotsky's "historical" accounts. Men in Prison arises from Serge's
own experiences in France where he served five years for "terrorism".
Shelley, Mary Frankenstein, or the Modern Prometheus (1818) Unlikely winner of a competition for gothic tales in which
Byron and Shelley dead-heated for the wooden spoon, Mary Shelley's shocker is thrillingly written, full of plausible
itnplausibilities. Pregnant with Freudian clues, the monster's story is a true original among imitations.
Singer, Isaac Bashevis The Family Moskat(1950); The Magician of Lublin (1960); The Slave (1962) 10 Yiddish novelist
of cosmic scope and vision, Singer exhibits "traditional" motifs and psychological acuity, Dickensian detail; The Family
Moskat deals, with Tolstoyan range and certainty, with a ghetto family and its slow disintegration and advance into (1939)
modernity; The Magician of Lublin and The Slave are less "modern" in tone, but are both specific in their Eastern European
setting and "mythic" in timeless morality. The "foreignness" of Singer's world seems opaque at first but soon yields images and
scenes of dramatic clarity and force. See
FICTION/SHORT STORIES
Spark, Muriel Memento Mori (1959); The Prime of Miss Jean Brodie (1961)
Febrile with tart phrases, Spark's work glitters with unnerving, sometimes chilling ironies. Catholic ideology informs satirical
fables. Memento Mori concerns old people seeking to forget—and being reminded of—the inevitable; The Prime of Miss Jean
Brodie famously, if thinly celebrates a sacred monster of a school teacher and her girls in 1930s Edinburgh.
Stendhal The Red and the Black (1830); The Charterhouse of Parma (1839)
Rise and fall of Julien Sorel makes a great novel of ambition in a France open to all talents, including shameless romantic
premeditation. The Charterhouse of Parma has a more splendid hero in Fabrizio del Dongo and though less readable is
luminous with political fireworks and contains a puncturingly "modern" passage describing the Battle of Waterloo. Good
translations: The Red and the Black by Shaw (1953); The Charterhouse of Parma by Blair (1960). See LITERARY
CRITICISM
Sterne, Laurence The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy (1760-67) Sterne, a bucolic vicar, scandalized Dr Johnson.
Goldsmith and others, with Tristram Shandy; modern readers may wonder why. Picaresque; long; idiosyncratic; a maverick to
be enjoyed piecemeal, save by addicts of Irishness or the picaresque. See TRAVEL
Styron, William The Long March (1962); The Confessions of Nat Turner (1967); Sophie's Choice (1968)
The Long March is the shortest and best of Styron's occasional, ponderous work. It describes the conflict between the liberal
and the authoritarian through the image of a training march in which the liberal seeks to prove himself through self-destructive
endurance. The other two novels deal with Big Issues—race and Auschwitz—with a discursive thoroughness that attempts to
rehabilitate the Novel With A Purpose. Blacks resented the one, Jews described the other as "Auschwitz meets Playboy
magazine". Styron is earnest and sexy, and earnestly sexy.
Svevo, Italo As a Man Grows Older (Sertilita)(1898); The Confessions of Zeno (1923)
Wry, self-deprecating satires of provincial life: Zeno's confessions are prompted by a desire to give up smoking. Svevo died in
a road accident in 1928, asking in vain for a smoke. "That really would have been a last cigarette," he said, and died, a
character of his own creation.
Tolstoy, Leo War and Peace (1866); Anna Karenina (1875 -77) 0
Two great novels, one flawed by its scope, the other by its schematic morality, both instinct with genius. Much is said to be lost
in translation; a world remains. Warand Peace is a masterpiece of realism, sparkling with characters and only occasionally
rendered tedious by the philosophical special pleading of which Tolstoy became a compulsive victim. Though Anna Karenina
is unbalanced by the sentimental falseness of the relationship between the Levins (to which Tolstoy's flight from marriage in
old age is a sort of bitter pendant), Anna's beauty and fineness of character, Vronsky's heartless tenderness and the odious,
touching Karenin constitute a triangle for eternity. See BIOGRAPHY (Troyat); LITERARY CRITICISM
Waugh, Evelyn Decline and Fall (1928); A Handful of Dust (1934); Brideshead Revisited (1945); Sword of Honour (3 vols,
1952-55) *
Waugh's pre-war novels are ruthless romps; Sword of Honourattempts more serious socio-political appraisal, but is more
memorable for Ritchie-Hook and the thunderbox than for "mature" passages, though it contains a notable account of cowardice
and collapse in Crete. Brideshead Revisited is a lushly-written encomium on old Catholic British families and Waugh's Oxford
generation, teddy-bears and all.
West, Nathanael Miss Lonelyhearts (1933); The Day of the Locust (1939)
Terse, mordant satires on American life. Miss Lonelyhearts lampoons the bogus sympathy of newspapers for readers' agonies;
The Day of the Locust depicts Hollywood as a sumptuous hell. West matches Fitzgerald for sharpness, beats him for
sophistication.
Wharton, Edith The Custom of the Country (1913); The Age of Innocence (1920)
Put down as a clumsy Henry James (qv), Wharton's uncertain origins stoked her prodigious snobbery, but made her an acute
observer of "old New York" families. The Custom of the Country is a readable, cunningly plotted portrait of a less than ladylike
adventuress, sharply funny; The Age of Innocence looks engagingly back on childhood among grand families in "Edwardian"
New York. Also: The House of Mirth
What are the defining boundaries of English literature? Can we use Milton's assertion to distinguish `literature' from `writing',
suggesting that `literature' contains some essence of the writer, `treasured up on purpose' for the use of posterity? Even if we do
there remains the problem of defining `English'. Is it a matter of location or language? Simply to define English literature as
British literature in English is too arbitrary. Should Northern Irish or all Anglo-Irish writing be included? Is literature writ-ten
in English in Wales or Scotland part of a Wales-wide or Scotland-wide Welsh or Scottish literature regardless of medium? If we
include the work of resident black or Asian writers in English are we denying their distinctiveness or recognizing their
Britishness? What is English? Are dialect or patois poems in English? I would like to include all interesting writing in English
in Britain or Ireland under this heading, but readers will find that many of the books suggested are more conservative.
The Oxford Companion to English Literature (1985) edited by Margaret Drabble. A comprehensive guide to facts and dates,
with good cross- referencing.
The Oxford Literary Guide to the British Isles (1977) edited by Dorothy Eagle and Hilary Carnell. English literature from
the other end: look up Dorchester and find out about its literary connections beyond Thomas Hardy.
The Oxford Book of Literary Anecdotes (1975) edited by James Sutherland. A rich mine of bits and pieces of literary
information and sidelights on literary figures, giving a flavour of literary life in different ages, in different regions, for both
sexes and all classes.
Literary Theory: An Introduction (1983) by Terry Eagleton. Lucid, entertaining, comprehensive, a good way in to the
sophisticated way of talking about literature in the 1990s.
A History of English Literature: Forms and Kinds from the Middle Ages to the Present Day (1987) by Alistair Fowler. The
most accessible of the current one-volume histories: clear and concise but rather conservative in its scope.
The Short Oxford History of English Literature (1994) by Andrew Sanders. This may seem a bit stodgy but it is the history
most aware of the problems of creating a canon of English literature in 1994. The result is a survey generously revisionist
where women's writing is concerned, and offering pointers to the possibilities for multiculturalism in the English literature of
recent decades.
The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations (1953) edited by Angela Partington. With generous samplings of major authors and
titillating glimpses of lesser-known ones, this offers a conspectus of a wide range of writing in English, literary, philosophical,
and historical.
The New Pelican Guide to English Literature: A Guide for Readers (1991) edited by Boris Ford. A compendious and
regularly updated guide that will enable the reader to find more information about almost any aspect of the field desired.
This entry involves problems of both definition and ideology. Down to about 1970 there is no perceived problem. Studies of
the English novel' abound, and a selection is offered in the reading list below. But after this the scope for alternative definitions
widens as Anglo-Irish novels become arguably a separate genre and practitioners of Indian or Caribbean origin reside wholly or
partly in England and produce novels from their own distinctive cultural matrices. At the same time concepts of gender or
racial identity become prominent, and it becomes tendentious to appropriate either feminist or Afro-Caribbean writing to a
genre that is seen in some quarters as a part of Victorian and post-Victorian cultural imperialism, reinforcing gender stereotypes
and imposing white, middle-class, male-centred narrative patterns. So the list also includes a couple of collections of essays
which explore these problems of racial, national, and gender identity, and their relation to narrative fiction, whether or not we
call the result a novel.
`Oh! it is only a novel!' replies the young lady:... `It is only Cecilia, or Camilla or
Belinda' or in short, only some work in which the most thorough knowledge of
human nature, the happiest delineation of its varieties, the liveliest effusions of wit
and humour are conveyed to the world in the best chosen language.
JANE AUSTEN
The Rise of the Novel: Studies in Defoe, Richardson and Fielding (1957) by Ian Watt. The classic study of the origins of the
novel conceived as a product of middle-class economic individualism.
The English Novel: Form and Function (1953) by Dorothy Van Ghent. Contains a mixture of studies in the interpretation of a
wide range of individual works and studies of problems of form.
The Rhetoric of Fiction (1983) by Wayne C Booth. A classic American study dealing with British and other fiction. Here we
see the rise of literary theory: concepts of the meaning of form, the importance of point of view, of reader-theory.
Mothers of the Novel: 100 Good Women Writers before Jane Austen (1986) by Dale Spender. A corrective to Ian Watt and
other less carefully nuanced versions of the great male line of English novelists from Defoe to Dickens and Conrad. Dare a
feminist say that the definition of `good' may seem to need a bit of stretching?
The Modern British Novel (1993) by Malcolm Bradbury. All studies date quickly at the recent end of their period. This very
new and comprehensive book covers the wide range of subgenres and cultural subsets into which the novel tradition may be
seen to have fragmented as well as doing a good job on the `mainstreams'.
The Bloomsbury Guide to English Literature: The Novel: A Guide to the Novel from its Origins to the Present Day (1993)
edited by Andrew Michael Roberts. A work of reference in which authors, genres, and technical terms can alike be checked.
Reading Women: Essays in Feminist Criticism (1986) by Mary Jacobus. This collection has a European and international
focus, indicating this aspect as well as the gender aspect of the shifting focus of literary and especially novelistic criticism in
Britain.
Nation and Narration (1990) edited by H K Bhabha. Essays on various aspects of cultural identity and cultural imperialism,
some more and some less relevant to the particular matter of the British novel, but indicating by its very existence the way in
which the study of the novel has been problematized and politicized in the present decade.
ENGLISH PROSE
Brenda Richardson
The selection, it will be seen, contains no identified writer more recent than Lytton Strachey, though the letters and diaries
come down well into the present century. Where more formal writing is concerned the defining examples do belong in earlier
periods. Nonfictional prose is not one genre but many. There are essays, biographies, history, criticism, topography, humour,
satire, pastoral, some separable, some not or barely so. The examples are chosen partly for style, partly for content, partly to
give a taste of different periods and different contexts. The pleasures_are many and diverse, and virtually impossible to
summarize.
Essays (1597-1625; several recent editions) by Francis Bacon. Like Hamlet they turn out to be full of quotations! They also
provide a good sense of what life was like under Elizabeth I and James I and an illustration of the terse and plain style of
writing.
The Compleat Angler (1653; several recent editions) by Izaak Walton. A favourite of mine, and a lovely example of a very
minor genre, the pastoral idyll in English. Should you wish to cook pike, it can also serve as a recipe book!
Selections from the Tatler and Spectator (1988) edited by Angus Ross. 18th-century fashionable journalism, well selected,
and offering a range of interests to do with both the style and diction and the content.
Addison, Joseph and Richard Steele, English and Irish-English, 1672-1719 and 1672-1729.
Spectator. Rec: Bloom Lubbock
The Natural History and Antiquities of Selborne (1789; several recent editions) by Gilbert White. An evocation of rural life
and an example of scientific and descriptive and yet eminently readable prose.
Reflections on the Revolution in France (1790; several recent editions) by Edmund Burke. An elegiac celebration of
traditional aristocratic society incorporated in vigorous counter-revolutionary propaganda.
The Life of Charlotte Bronte (1857; several recent editions) by Elizabeth Gaskell. The life of a woman by a woman from a
very paternalistic age. It offers social history and detail of the distinctive character of the West Riding of Yorkshire, as well as
chronicling Bronte's struggle to achieve self-expression and self-fulfilment.
Studies in the History of the Renaissance (1873) by Walter Pater. Romantically impressionistic essays in art history which
encouraged subjective responses to beauty.
Eminent Victorians (1918) by Lytton Strachey. Funny, irreverent, often desperately unfair, these studies offer a debunking,
ironic corrective to uncritical treatments of Victorian piety and heroism.
The Englishwoman's Diary: An Anthology (1992) edited by Harriet Blodgett. A wide-ranging sampling of the regional,
domestic, and personal writing which is characteristic of the female writer and fills in the blanks around the public life featured
in the formal essays of London male culture.
The Oxford Book of Letters (1995) edited by Frank and Alice Kermode. An anthology stretching from the 16th to the 20th
century, offering an insight into the life of different periods and the function of the letter in each.
It was during the 18th century that the prose tale underwent the subtle and profound transformation into the novel, for many the
supreme literary form of the modern world. Its origins were modest. Though novels were soon to acquire the social graces of
the drawing room, the earliest were redolent of the tavern, the brothel, and the debtors' prison, their language spiced with the
racy vernacular of pimps, harlots, drunks, thugs, cardsharps, cutthroats, penniless fops, corrupt politicians, and scheming
lawyers. In other words, early novels (strongly influenced by such writers as Cervantes) were essentially picaresques, a form
for which the burgeoning ranks of the urban middle classes had a huge appetite. Young heroes and heroines, beset by seemingly
endless series of farcical trials and tribulations, finally, often by a totally unexpected twist of fate, achieve wealth and
happiness. The following includes a few precursors of the true novel.
Oroonoko (about 1688) by Aphra Behn. A remarkable woman whose eventful life included working as a spy for Charles II, a
spell in a debtors' prison, and a busy career as a translator, dramatist, and novelist - she was probably the first Englishwoman to
earn her living by writing. A long prose romance influenced by continental writers, Oroonoko, with its attack on the slave trade,
anticipates the much later concept of the 'noble savage'.
Robinson Crusoe (1719) by Daniel Defoe. Tradesman turned literary jack of all trades and polemicist who was thrown into
prison several times, Defoe, freely combining fiction and fact, brought a new imaginative scope and vigour to storytelling.
Robinson is his masterpiece, though his vividness of characterization, sure sense of everyday reality, and his narrative drive
make Moll Flanders (1722) and The journal of the Plague Year (1722) highly readable.
Gulliver's Travels (1726) by Jonathan Swift. Not a novel, quite, but a bitter, and at times obscene, satire in prose (the satires of
John Dryden and Alexander Pope had set a very high standard in verse). By curious irony that might well have given its author
a good deal of sardonic pleasure, Gulliver's Travels became a children's classic (parts of it, at least).
Pamela: Or Virtue Rewarded (1740-42) by Samuel Richardson. Generally considered to be the first English novel. Told in a
long, long series of letters, it recounts the seduction of a young woman who, virtuous and true, brings about the moral
transformation of her vile seducer, though both of them die in the process. A successful printer by trade, Richardson had a
shrewd sense of what people wanted: a good story that ended with `an useful moral'. His sensitivity to the psychology of his
characters had a huge impact on the development of the novel, and in his lifetime he was feted throughout Europe: Dr Johnson
as well as the French philosopher Rousseau wept for Pamela.
Tom Jones (1749) by Henry Fielding. A long picaresque romp through 18th-century England, probably the greatest novel of its
age. Fielding detested what he regarded as the prissy and hypocritical morality of Richardson (he wrote a parody called
Shame), and his own novels combine a shrewd intelligence and an earthy frankness about human nature (the character Tom
Jones is far from being a model of snowy- white virtue). His work as a dramatist gave his novels a sureness of structure absent
in many works of the period. Essential reading.
The Expedition of Humphrey Clinker (1771) by Tobias Smollett. An account of a family on their travels through England
and Scotland, told in a series of letters by each member of the family, this is probably Smollett's finest work. Smollett hasn't
Fielding's sense of form, but the countless comic escapades of his vividly drawn characters show him to be ceaselessly
inventive, his satire on human folly relentless, though just a little mellower here than in earlier works.
The Vicar of Wakefield (1766) by Oliver Goldsmith. A vicar and his family fall on hard times: he loses his position and is
finally thrown into debtors' prison, his daughter elopes with a scoundrel. But it all turns out happily in the end. A neglected
work (a little tame perhaps after Fielding and Smollett) which deserves more attention. The German poet Goethe, who dubbed
it a `prose idyll', was deeply moved.
The Life and Opinions of Tristam Shandy (1760) by Laurence Sterne. A unique work, this is one of the strangest books of
the century. To use modern jargon, it 'deconstructs' the novel form, and far more amusingly than many 20th-century attempts. It
has long mock-philosophical authorial asides, blank pages, a few squiggles to illustrate the rambling and inconsequential
narrative, a mixture of styles high and (very) low, including stream-of-consciousness, and a gallery of colourful eccentrics -
like one of its more recent relatives, James Joyce's Ulysses, it is either a sheer delight or an insufferable irritation. Despite its
oddity it was extremely popular in his own day.
The Castle of Otranto (1764) by Horace Walpole. This is another queer fish. Disdaining the `vulgar' realistic novels of his
day, Walpole turned to medieval stories of chivalry and high romance. The result was a surrealistic novel of the supernatural -
statues that bleed, ghosts, a giant helmet that falls from the sky killing a man, murder, rattling chains, and ruined castles. A
rejection of the down-to-earth good sense of much 18th-century fiction, The Castle of Otranto, the first `Gothic novel', is one of
the earliest expressions of Romanticism and the ancestor of the modern horror novel.
There is a tendency on the part of critics of the novel to talk as if Romanticism was something that only happened in poetry, or
abroad. In fact, the 19th-century British novel crucially concerns itself with key issues of Romanticism - the conflict between
the individual striving to be entirely themselves and the community that has rights and in which the individual has to some
extent to live. Often this conflict is posed in terms of a struggle between shadow selves or with a landscape; often also multiple
narrative strands make possible the exploration of more than one point of view, more than one possible way of existing.
Dead, your Majesty. Dead, my lords and gentlemen. Dead, Right Reverends and
Wrong Reverends of every order. Dead, men and women, born with Heavenly
Compassion in your hearts. And dying thus around us every day.
CHARLES DICKENS
Emma (1816) by Jane Austen. Has the poise and elegant malice that we expect of Austen, but is surprisingly perceptive about
the dangers of intelligence and talent. Emma makes mischief and manipulates almost everybody around her; she has a
novelist's instincts and puts them to work in real life.
The Confessions of a Justified Sinner (1824) by James Hogg. Brilliantly originates a whole school of psychological horror
stories. Its hero, persuaded of his elect status as one of the saved, comes to believe he can dispose of everyone in his way and
serve God thereby; is his companion and adviser a delusion, the incognito Russian tsar, or the Prince of Lies?
A Christmas Carol (1843) by Charles Dickens. A moral lecture on charity that escapes mere preachiness because of the
fertility of Dickens' fantastic imagination. It denounces not only miserliness and politics which stifles humanity in the affluent
by denying it to an underclass; in the process, it crystallizes the manners of a particular time as the authentic way of celebrating
Christmas. Mythopoeia is an underrated function of the novel and the tale.
Vanity Fair (1847) by William Makepeace Thackeray. Has a heart of unforgiving flint beneath the flip cynicism and
sentimentality of its surface. Thackeray does not let even his virtuous characters get away with anything - by the time worthy
Dobbin wins the widowed, dim Amelia, he has seen how little she is worth. Becky Sharp starts with our sympathy - she has,
after all, her way to make in a cruel world - but forfeits it by gratuitous acts of petty cruelty.
Wuthering Heights (1847) by Emily Bronte. The most Romantic of great British novels, with its blasted landscapes and
hopeless love. Based as it is on some crudely conceived dualisms like the opposition of calm and storm in the make-up of its
characters, there is considerable subtlety in its execution; the distanced narrative turns up the heat on the emotional material by
pretending to recollect it in tranquillity.
Bleak House (1852-53) by Charles Dickens. Perhaps his most comprehensive denunciation of a society in which the letter of
the law is allowed to kill the spirit. The Chancery case of Jarndyce and Jarndyce becomes indistinguishable from the London
fog; spontaneous combustion, smallpox, madness, and murder strike indiscriminately and the orphan Esther, the illiterate
crossing sweeper Jo, and the snobbish Lady Deadlock have more to do with each other than we can imagine.
The Ring and the Book (1869) by Robert Browning. A great poem now most usefully read as if a novel; verse is its means of
expression, rather than its soul. A classic Roman murder case is retold time after time from different viewpoints, becoming a
meditation on truth and how truth is used within a society, and a touchstone for our perception of the characters who discuss it.
Daniel Deronda (1876) by George Eliot. Demonstrates that the 19th-century novel could be about ideas as well as plots and
emotional extremes; the critic F R Leavis disapproved of the subplots about Zionism and music and wanted to edit it down to
the story of Gwendolen Harlech, which demonstrates how little F R Leavis understood about story.
The Mayor of Casterbridge (1886) by Thomas Hardy. Reminds us usefully that the England of the 19th century started off as
a rural economy, but that things changed ... Turned sober after selling his wife at a fair, Henchard becomes a model of Victorian
energy, but secrets will out, and the assistant he fostered becomes his rival. Hardy at his best combined a sense of society as a
whole with the most complete tragic sense of the century.
The Master of Ballantrae (1889) by Robert Louis Stevenson. Uses the last British civil war, the Jacobite rebellion of 1745,
and its conflicts of loyalty to dramatize the clash of the two sorts of man. Observed by a narrator alienated from both, two
brothers struggle for estate, wife, and ascendancy; often underrated as a children's adventure story, Stevenson's best book is
endlessly inventive and emotionally subtle.
The Secret Agent (1907) by Joseph Conrad. Conrad brought a European sophisticadon about motive and the political cast of
mind to the British novel. This tale about the domesticity of the suburbs, the idiot games of high politics, and the tragedy of the
mundane was a farsighted view of how the century was going to work. at also characterizes, perhaps, the 20th-century British
novel is a sense of the weirdness of life which derives from Dickens and makes for real quirkiness; if the British novel of the
second half of the century is for the most part distinctly minor, it is because there are in it so many goodish writers who wrote
strange books.
The Good Soldier (1915) by Ford Madox Ford. This is, as the book's opening tells us, the saddest story ever told, largely
because its quite trivial story of adultery, deceit, suicide, and madness is made to stand for a whole dying world of middle-class
security. What seemed sensible arrangements had bad faith at the roots and destroyed everyone - the narrator gradually !cams
all that had been kept from him: Ford finished the book, and then went off to the war that the book never mentions, directly.
Mrs Dalloway (1925) by Virginia Woolf. Woolf despised Joyce's work for its grubby realism, but successfully appropriated the
stream of consciousness in several of her books. Clarissa Dalloway is a social parasite, but she has a set of tasks to get through
in a day and becomes admirable for doing them in spite of the endless distractions of her thoughts and senses. This is a slight
book in many ways, but achieves grandeur through its sense of human solidarity.
Brighton Rock (1938) by Graham Greene. Greene's decision to divide his work into serious novels and `entertainments' cost
us, for the most part, a sense of him as a whole writer. This novel of gangsterism and damnation combines a nasty wit with a
real sense of the complexity of quite ordinary lives; it is one of the best of thrillers because it is perhaps the best novel about
criminals and their power struggles. Nemesis comes in the shape of a barmaid with a grievance and the worst horror of all is a
short-play record.
Brideshead Revisited (1945) by Evelyn Waugh. This great, rich, purple convolvulus of a book was Waugh's reactionary
farewell to the sweetness of life as he believed it to have been lived by a Catholic aristocracy he turned into myth as he worked.
It is one of the great novels of regret partly because it is so clearly set in the imagination; it is also full of great comic moments
and brilliant observation of a social climbing that was part of the artificial paradise that Waugh thought was dying.
Anglo-Saxon Attitudes (1956) by Angus Wilson. If tragedy is the nonfulfilment of promise, then this is one of the best and
most pregnant tragic works of the century; Wilson's sense of Englishness is quietly unhappy, and full of chickens coming home
to roost. A complicated affair of intellectual fraud and misunderstanding comes back to haunt Gerald and triggers every booby
trap his bad faith has created.
The Fountain Overflows (1956) by Rebecca West. It is perhaps the sheer difficulty of her personality, and her longevity, that
has led to the underrating of West as anovelist. This novel of an Edwardian childhood, the only completed volume of a trilogy,
is one of the best descriptions of a child's fierce loyalties and incomplete under-standing of the world; the heroine's personally
unreliable gallant crusader of a father is a subtly conceived feminist comment on politics as Boys' Game still worth playing.
The Wide Sargasso Sea (1966) by Jean Rhys. Jean Rhys's early novels dealt with her rackety life and affairs with Ford Madox
Ford and others with a slightly masochistic wit and sense of the randomness of life that makes them starkly depressing. Even
more bracingly bleak, paradoxically, because of the richness of its prose is this late book, the story of a mad wife in Charlotte
Bronte's lane Eyre; Rhys made Woman as Victim the subject of great prose poetry.
When My Girl Comes Home (1961) and The Camberwell Beauty (1974) by V S Pritchett; both in Collected Stories (1982-
83). The novella is a form often left out of the accounting and Pritchett, probably the greatest short story writer in the language
his century, wrote two great novellas and no novels of real importance. These two tales show us private worlds and the way
that privacy skews a sense of the real world or of ordinary morality; they are at the same time quietly nightmarish and
hysterically funny.
The Infernal Desire Machines of Doctor Hoffman (1972) by Angela Carter. There had to be a great British surreal novel and
the only odd thing about it is that it took until the 1970s. Carter's journey from rationality to a dream landscape and betrayals
that leave ambiguities in the mouth is perhaps the most satisfactory fore-shadowing of our ambivalence to their legacy.
Ulysses (1922) by James Joyce. Much prosecuted, much damned, much discussed, this is a novel about a day in the life of
three Dubliners in 1905. The battery of technical devices - stream of consciousness, parody, abstracted musicalized dialogue -
are not there to replace realism, but to enhance it; even the underlying and determining structure, the analogies between each
episode and a book of the Odyssey, is a creation of limits in which the representation of the real can be pressurized. It is the
most universal and the most particular of novels; it lets you know a time and a place and some people better than almost any
other. And it includes within it a great meditation on mortality - proscribed and atheist, nonetheless Joyce is a Catholic writer.
At Swim-Two-Birds (1939) by Flann O'Brien. One of the other great 20th-century novels by an Irishman, this combines a
sense of shabby-genteel debauchery with end-less recursions into a world of cowboy novellas, heroic myths, and doggerel
about stout_ There are few books as funny - but the underlying sense of sadness comes out time and time again in the bleak
side stories. A joke is a tragedy that happened to someone else.
Daniel Aaron
Daniel Aaron is the Victor S. Thomas Professor of English and American Literature and Language Emeritus at Harvard
University and has recently edited The Inman Diary. He is also president of the Library of America, dedicated to preserving the
works of American writers. Professor Aaron has had a lifelong interest in encouraging reading.
Most of us read promiscuously. Our response to a particular book depends a good deal on when we intersect with it and under
what circumstances. In my own case, the books I was required to read usually meant less to me than those whose titles I came
across in the pages of other writers or accidentally discovered on my own. Some of the books that deeply engaged me during
my adolescence were "trash" to my mentors. It seems too pompous to say that any of the following books played "an important
role" in my life. They were important to me for personal reasons.
Edmund Wilson. Axel's Castle: A Study in the Imaginative Literature of 1870-1930 (1931). New York: W. W. Norton, 1984.
(Pb) This book was very liberating. It was my first extended exposure to the symbolist movement and drew me to Yeats's later
poetry, to Joyce's Ulysses. to Gertrude Stein's Three Lives, and of course to Wilson's collected reviews and essays. Eventually I
read everything he wrote, and I still regard him as America's foremost modern man of letters.
James Gibbons Huneker. Egoists, a Book of Supermen (1909). New York: AMS Press, 1975.
. Iconoclasts. a Book of Dramatists (1905). Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1969.
. Ivory, Apes and Peacocks (1915). Philadelphia: Richard West, 1973.
. Unicorns (1917). New York: AMS Press, 1976.
I came across Huneker's essays in 1929. By that time he was considered a relic of the fin de siècle and was hardly referred to,
but to me he was a revelation. He introduced me at a susceptible age to the "poisoned honey" of the continent, to his "soul-
wreckers." Thanks to him, I found Nietzsche, Huysmans, Strindberg, Baudelaire, Flaubert. He was more enthusiastic than
critical, but I read him at the right time.
Stendhal [Marie Henri Beyle]. The Red and the Black (1830). Lloyd C. Parks, trans. New York: New American Library, 1970.
(Pb)
I suppose this is my favorite novel along with Anna Karenina. I've read it more times than any other novel for reasons never
exactly clear to me except that I take undiminished delight in its wit, audacity and stylistic brilliance and its psychological
insights. To me, at least, the novel has the perfect plot.
John Kenneth Galbraith is the Paul M. Walburg Professor of Economics Emeritus. Galbraith has enjoyed a celebrated life of
teaching, public service, writing and thinking. President Truman awarded him the Medal of Freedom. He served as President
Kennedy's ambassador to India from 1961 to 1963. A former editor of Fortune magazine. he has written many books including
The Affluent Society, The New Industrial State and The Age of Uncertainty. His friends say he can frequently be found striding
the streets of Cambridge, on his way to the pool.
I do not urge economics: others will do that. Instead I urge the enjoyments and enlightenment to which the well-seasoned
economist and citizen of the future are entitled and which have brought both pleasure and reward to me in the past.
Anthony Trollope.
Barchester Towers (1857). New York: Penguin, 1983. (Pb)
The Last Chronicles of Barset (1867). New York: Penguin, 1981. (Pb)
The Warden (1855). New York: Penguin, 1984. (Pb)
Evelyn Waugh.
Decline and Fall (1928). Boston: Little, Brown, 1977. (Pb)
Scoop (1938). Boston: Little, Brown, 1977. (Pb)
W. Somerset Maugham.
Of Human Bondage (1915). New York: Penguin, 1978. (Pb)
Christmas Holiday (1939). New York: Penguin, 1977. (Pb)
Ring Lardner. Gullible's Travels (1917). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1965.
Ernest Hemingway. A Farewell to Arms (1929). New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1982. (Pb)
Norman Mailer. The Naked and the Dead (1948). New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1980. (Pb)
Richard J. Herrenstein
R. J. Herrenstein is the Edgar Pierce Professor of Psychology at Harvard University, where he has primarily done research on
human and animal motivational and learning processes. His books include Psychology, I.Q. in the Meritocracy and Crime and
Human Nature.
These books were important to me—at a particular time and a particular point in my life. They may not be suitable for other
times or other people.
Leo Tolstoy. War and Peace (1865-69). Louise Maude and Aylmer Maude, trans. George Gibian, ed. New York: W. W. Norton,
1966.
First read when I was about seventeen. Probably the first "great book" I truly enjoyed. It shaped certain views about history.
Charles Darwin. The Origin of Species (1859). New York: Penguin, 1982. (Pb)
Important for the obvious reason, plus my own fascination with the way it dealt with the subject of instinct.
John Steinbeck. The Grapes of Wrath (1939). New York: Penguin, 1976. (Pb)
I doubt that this would have the impact now that it did when I read it in the 1940s sometime, but it filled me then with a sense
of outrage over social and economic injustice.
Franz Kafka. The Castle (1926). Willa Muir and Edwin Muir, trans. New York: Random House, 1974. (Pb)
. The Trial (1937). Willa Muir and Edwin Muir, trans. New York: Penguin, 1953. (Pb)
. Amerika (1938). Edwin Muir, trans. New York: New Directions, 1946. (Pb)
These, too, have lost their punch for me, but at the time I read them, they captured the lunacy and futility of individuals
struggling with bureaucracies.
Winston S. Churchill. The Second World War (1948-53). 6 vols. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1983,
This account—especially the early volumes—counteracted to some extent Tolstoy's view of history.
John B. Bury. The Idea of Progress: An Inquiry into Its Origin and Growth (1920). Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press, 1982.
Edmund Wilson. To the Finland Station (1940). New York: Farrar, Straus & Giroux, 1972. (Pb)
Wonderful books that tell a good story, and that set a standard for writing on intellectual history.
Matina Homer
Matina Horner has been president of Radcliffe College since 1972. Prior to assuming that position, she taught in Harvard's
Department of Psychology and Social Relations. In addition to her leadership responsibilities as a college president, she
teaches as an associate professor. One of her continuing research interests is the psychology of women.
This is a very tough question—to consider books that have shaped my thinking. I guess the first would have to be the collected
works of Emily Dickinson, which I began to read in junior high school.
Emily Dickinson. The Complete Poems of Emily Dickinson (mid-nineteenth century). Thomas H. Johnson, ed. Boston: Little,
Brown, 1960.
It was the complete poems of Emily Dickinson that made a difference, rather than any one poem, except perhaps for the one
that begins "I dwell in possibility." The idea of focusing on possibilities is important to me and I often return to the poem to
make this and other points.
Pearl S. Buck. The Good Earth (1931). New York: Washington Square Press, 1983. (Pb)
During a recent trip to China, I was reminded of another book from my younger days that also made a lasting impression on
me, Pearl Buck's The Good Earth, It had a very strong impact on me then which has persisted. Its powerful presentation of
some basic cultural differences was a valuable way to be introduced to the importance of seeing and respecting different
cultures and values, of accepting cultural differences and of acknowledging the value of other perspectives. Now, back from
China, I am tempted to reread it.
Sojourner [Olive Gilbert] Truth. Narrative of Sojourner Truth (1878). Salem, N.1-I.: Ayer, 1968.
Later on, Sojourner Truth's autobiography also made a lasting impression on me. I first read it during the 1960s—as we were
beginning to think about women's roles in new ways and feminist views and ideas were being publicly debated. My thinking on
these issues began within the supportive environment of a college where expectations for and about women were very high.
Sojourner Truth's compelling phrase, "and ain't I a woman," which she used after each description of an activity she did that
challenged basic assumptions about women's strength and skills, powerfully captured for me the kind of change being sought
in expectations about women, then and now.
Sigmund Freud. The Interpretation of Dreams (1900). New York: Avon, 1980. (Pb)
Edward C. Tolman. Purposive Behavior in Animals and Man (1967). New York: Irvington, 1967.
Professionally, Freud's collected works, especially his Interpretation of Dreams, the first of his works that I read, and Tolman's
Purposive Behavior in Animals and Man, were very important to the development of my thinking. Both challenged previous
assumptions about human and animal motivation and behavior. Freud's depiction of the role of unconscious instincts and
impulses in human behavior and Tolman's convincing examples of the ability of animals to learn "what leads to what" and thus
to "think" were critical not only to my thinking but to the history of psychology.
Dr. Seuss [Theodor Seuss Geisel]. The Sneetches, and Other Stories. New York: Random House, 1961.
I can't resist including Dr. Seuss's Sneetches, that wonderful children's book that powerfully shows the foolishness of our basic
need or tendency to divide ourselves into "we" and "they" and our inability to grasp our fundamental interdependence. Not
only have I enjoyed reading it to my children but I have used it in college classes to make some key points.
Elizabeth McKinsey
Elizabeth McKinsey is both an associate professor of English and American literature at Harvard and the director of the Mary
Ingraham Bunting Institute at Radcliffe College. She is the author of The Western Experiment: New England
Transcendentalists in the Ohio Valley and Niagara Falls: Icon of the American Sublime.
Central to American literature, all these books enrich our understanding of our cultural and psychic heritage—our myths,
assumptions, preoccupations and conflicts. By broadening our historic imagination and sympathy, they can help us face
squarely the issues of human and political relations—between the sexes, among racial and ethnic groups, and among nations —
that will continue to be critical as we move into the twenty-first century.
Perry Miller, ed. Margaret Fuller: American Romantic. A Selection from Her Writing and Correspondence (1963). Gloucester,
Mass.: Peter Smith, Pubs., 1969.
When I first read Margaret Fuller (transcendentalist; friend of Emerson, Thoreau, and Hawthorne: one of this country's first and
most accomplished literary critics) in college, I kept coming back to her. It took several years to realize why: a brilliant,
powerful, passionate, sensitive person, she embodied the split between intellect and femininity that I had been socialized to
feel. As a powerful expressive spirit, her works provide both a window on nineteenth-century American culture and a mirror of
our own attitudes toward gender, society and achievement.
Herman Melville. Moby Dick (1851). Berkeley: University of California Press, 1983. (Pb)
Unquestionably the "biggest" book in American literature, Moby Dick wrestles with all the huge metaphysical questions—
religious, epistemological, ontological, aesthetic—at the same time that it depicts in minute detail the U.S. whaling industry
and through it examines questions of democracy and leadership. All its layers of meaning cohere in Melville's powerfully
written masterpiece.
Mark Twain. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884). New York: Harper & Row, 1984. (Pb)
When Hemingway contended that all modern literature began with Huck Finn, he was thinking of its vernacular language, its
antiromantic realism and episodic structure. The language is wonderful—and funny—and very evocative historically. Perhaps I
especially like this one because I'm from Missouri.
William Faulkner. Absalom! Absalom! (1936). New York: Random House, 1972. (Pb)
Faulkner is arguably our greatest American writer, and this is his magnum opus. The saga of Sutpen and his family, and
Quentin Compson's attempt to come to terms with it, embody all the tensions in Southern and indeed American history—race,
sex, regionalism, the individual and community, etc.—as well as basic epistemological questions. A powerful, epic work.
Eudora Welty. Thirteen Stories. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1965. (Pb)
These perfect gems evoke a particular Southern rural culture—the "sense of place" that Welty has said is so important to her
work—at the same time that they reveal mythic, universal human themes and longings. Welty's mastery of language,
storytelling, power and form is infused with an extraordinary warmth and humor. Here is a shrewd and realistic but affirmative
vision.
Zora Neale Hurston. Their Eyes Were Watching God (1937). Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1978.
Janice's self-knowledge, tenacity and humor, as well as her story, make her one of the more memorable characters in American
fiction. A window on a very particular time and place and social segment of American culture—the rural black South in the
1920s and 1930s—Their Eyes is also beautifully written. In its zest for life and love and its iconoclasm it is an earlier version
of (and direct source for) Alice Walker's The Color Purple.
American literature really emerged from the sheer novelty of the New World. The wonders of landscape, the vast tracts of the
continent, the ancient settlements, civilizations, and myths that were mistakenly thought of as `Indian', the mythological
expectations that were then brought over the Atlantic by settlers from Europe, and the new lives and experiences they
encountered - all these combined to make the narratives told on the continent very different from those elsewhere. Then, in the
20th century, America became a world emblem of the spirit of modernity itself, and this too became part of the great American
myth. American writing became dominant, American writers became world-famous, and American stories and narratives
became pan of the experience of people right across the globe. Though the phrase 'American literature' generally applies to the
writings of the USA, it could and should, in these multicultural times, fairly include the `other' American literatures. That
means Canadian and Latin American literature, Native American literature, and African-American literature. Here is a list of
some of the most useful, informative, and classic general studies.
Two bodies of modern literature seem to me to come to the real verge: the Russian
and the American ... The furtherest frenzies of French modernism or futurism have
not yet reached the pitch of extreme consciousness that Poe, Melville, Hawthorne,
Whitman reached. The Europeans were all trying to be extreme. The great
Americans I mentioned just were it.
D H LAWRENCE
The Literature of the United States (1954) by Marcus Cunliffe. A straightforward and excellently told narrative history for
the general reader, with a strong sense of the historical importance of American experience and culture, written for Penguin
books by a leading British historian and critic.
The Continuity of American Poetry (1961) by Roy Harvey. Pearce Outstanding analysis of the development of American
verse from the Puritan poets through to the era of Wallace Stevens, Ezra Pound, and the `Beat' movement.
Frontier: American Literature and the American West (1965) by Edwin Fussell. A powerful study reminding us how
central the American West was to the formation of the classic American literary imagination.
Modern Latin American Literature (1973) by D P Gallagher. A fine general survey of literature in Latin America, with
special emphasis on the writers of the 20th century, when Latin American writing was seen to be of world importance.
A Homemade World: The American Modernist Writers (1975) by Hugh Kenner. A lively and idiosyncratic portrait of the
power of the Modern movement in American literature, including the work of Gertrude Stein, Pound, Stevens, Faulkner, and
Hemingway, by an enthusiastic and deeply informed American critic.
Harvard Guide to Contemporary American Writing (1979) edited by Daniel Hoffman. Essays by leading critics on
American literature from the end of World War II to the end of the 1970s, showing the wide variety of trends and movements in
fiction, poetry, and drama.
The Cambridge Handbook of American Literature (1986) by Jack Salzman. An invaluable reference work on American
literature, with detailed and informative entries.
Columbia Literary History of the United States (1988) edited by Emory Elliott. A collection of modem and up-to-date
essays by many expert contributors, following the history of American literature from the prehistoric cave narratives to the
literary trends and movements of the present.
Literature in America: An Illustrated History (1989) by Peter Conn. A lively and learned history of American literature from
early days to the present, told in narrative form, with good social background and plentiful illustrations.
From Puritanism to Postmodernism: A History of American Literature (1991) by Richard Ruland and Malcolm Bradbury.
An up-to-date narrative history, in Penguin paperback, of American literature from the 17th century to the immediate present,
co-written by an American and a British critic. Including detailed study of many major texts, it shows the ways American
literature has always been seen as distinctively `modem', and also sees it in the context of world literature.
Though the novel started off late in America (the Puritans disapproved of it), it began to flourish after the American
Revolution, and became one of the most powerful forms of American narrative. To this day its nature seems shaped by its early
subject matter: the encounter with nature, the wilderness, and the vast scale of the American continent; the meeting of cultures
and races; the ever-shifting nature of society and civilization; the Gothic strangeness of American experience. In the 19th
century, writers like James Fenimore Cooper, Edgar Allan Poe, Herman Melville, and Nathaniel Hawthorne established the
distinctive flavour of American fiction. Henry James, Mark Twain, Stephen Crane, Theodore Dreiser, and Edith Wharton
followed. By the 20th century, the American novel was to enter a major period, and play a dominant part in the future of
fiction, under the influence of Ernest Hemingway, William Faulkner, John Dos Passos, and many more. Today, among the
novelists who have won the Nobel Prize for Literature, the dominant number are Americans, and include Saul Bellow and Toni
Morrison. These are some of the basic studies dealing with the history and development of American fiction.
Between the novel and America there are peculiar and intimate connections.
A new literary form and a new society, their beginnings coincide with the
beginnings of the modern era and, indeed, help to define it. We are living not
only in the Age of America but also in the Age of the Novel, at a moment
when the literature of a country without a first-rate epic or a memorable verse
tragedy has become the model of half the world.
LESLIE FIEDLER
The American Novel and Its Tradition (1957) by Richard Chase. This is a classic study, establishing the difference between
the traditions of the European 'novel' and the American `romance', and giving some excellent readings of major authors from
Cooper through to Faulkner.
Love and Death in the American Novel (1960) by Leslie Fiedler. Brilliant, very thorough study of the rise and development of
the novel in North America, from its beginnings after the Revolution through to the period after World War H. It distils the
distinctive themes and `Gothic' qualities that made it so different from European writing.
On Native Grounds: A Study of American Prose Literature from 1890 to the Present (1942) by Alfred Kazin. This is
another classic (and very influential) study, a little dated now, looking at the development of the realistic and social aspects of
American fiction and its treatment of American life `on native grounds'.
Radical Innocence: Studies in the Contemporary American Novel (1971) by Ihab Hassan. An important, analytical
interpretation of the development of American fiction after World War II, emphasizing its concern with innocence and
extremity, and its sense of experiment. By a noted critic.
City of Words: American Fiction 1935-1970 (1971) by Tony Tanner. A wonderful study of the experiments, in form and
language, of American fiction in one of its most exciting and innovative periods, by a British critic who has been a major
interpreter of American literature.
In Search of Our Mothers' Gardens (1983) by Alice Walker. This strongly personal book - by the author of The Color Purple
- emphasizes and explores her double inheritance, black and female, as a novelist, and shows the importance of both traditions
to the contemporary American novel.
American Fiction, 1865-1940 (1987) by Brian Lee. A fine general survey of the overall development of American fiction by a
British critic, writing with a strong sense of the social developments taking place at the time.
Columbia History of the American Novel (1991) edited by Emory Elliott. A thorough, large-scale historical study of
American fiction from the beginnings to the present by various experts with a contemporary standpoint.
Oddfobs: Essays and Criticism (1992) by John Updike. Not all these highly read-able essays - 160 of them, by a major writer
who is also a warm and wonderful critic - are about American fiction. But the many that are illuminate it with a vivid humanity
and understanding.
The Modern American Novel (1995) by Malcolm Bradbury. An extended survey of the American novel from the time of
Henry James, Mark Twain, and William Dean Howells through to the immediate present, covering the many movements and
trends - including modernism, postmodernism, `dirty realism', and black and feminist fiction. Extensive bibliography.
Nineteenth-century American fiction followed a very different course from that of the novel in Europe at the same time. The
wonder of American nature, the drama of exploring and settling the great continent, and the fascination of recent American
history took its writers into new and original materials. And then, between 1861 and 1865, came the Civil War, which
threatened to break up the Union. American fought American in a period of national agony, changing the nature of American
culture. After 1865, the USA set out on a period of massive modernization - partly helped by the industrialization the war had
required. Its railroads spanned the continent, its cities rose high, and immigration multiplied. By the end of the century America
was no longer a `virgin land' but a great modem industrial power. American fiction changed to respond to these new conditions:
romance and stories of history and nature gave way to a new spirit of reportage and literary naturalism. This is the story that
lies behind some of the great American novels of the 19th century; here are my ten favourites - five from each half of America's
divided century.
The Prairie (1827) by James Fenimore Cooper. Cooper was the first real novelist of the American wilderness, and in The
Prairie he takes his famous hero of the five novels of the Leatherstocking saga, Natty Bumppo, to the flat prairies west of the
Mississippi River. He's now an old man, and America is quickly expanding west, away from the New York frontier where
Leatherstocking started his adventures. Again he meets Indians, and makes his final peace with nature. A classic work of the
American imagination.
The Narrative of Arthur Gordon Pym of Nantucket (1837) by Edgar Allan Poe. This is Poe's one novel (most of his work
was in short story and poetry), and shows his famous, Gothic extremity of imagination. It's about a shipboard mutiny which
ends in a formidable journey to the Antarctic, and the blank whiteness of experience, and is written with all Poe's sense of
poetry - and horror.
The Scarlet Letter (1850) by Nathaniel Hawthorne. Set in Puritan Boston in the 1650s, this is the story of a woman, Hester
Prynne, who affronts the `iron law' of church and state by committing adultery with a minister. She is forced to wear a badge of
shame, the scarlet letter A, but insists on the `natural' law of her actions. Hawthorne called the novel a `romance', meaning not
just that it is a story of adulterous love but of the conflict between the claims of fact and imagination.
Moby Dick, or The Whale (1851) by Herman Melville. Melville said he wrote this book `in the name of the devil', and it is a
classic tragedy, the story of the obsessed Captain Ahab, who, sailing on the whaler Pequod, determines to avenge himself
against the 'diabolic' white whale that has injured him. The book, filled with learning and parody, is a vivid. moving seaborne
adventure, but also a profound work of modern experiment.
Uncle Tom's Cabin (1852) by Harriet Beecher Stowe. For the 19th century, this was America's most famous novel, a world
best seller. Abraham Lincoln once suggested it started the Civil War. Sentimentally written, it still remains nonetheless a
remarkable portrait of slave experience, portraying the cruelties and sufferings inflicted on the black slaves on the Southern
plantations, and their basic humanity.
The Portrait of a Lady (1881) by Henry James. It's hard to have a preference among the novels of James; not only do his
novels mark the refinement of the modem art of fiction, but they change and develop decade by decade, through to the great
last works of the early 20th century. But this is his fast great novel, displaying his mature art. And the story of Isabel Archer,
the strong, free, young American girl come to her 'wondrous' Europe to encounter experience, and finding it grimly in her
unhappy marriage to Gilbert Osmond, is one of the most remarkable character portrayals James ever achieved.
The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884) by Mark Twain. This was the book with which, Ernest Hemingway said, all
American literature began. And if James is the novelist of modern fictional artistry, Twain was the novelist of the modem
vernacular voice. Huck Finn, the poor boy from Hannibal, Mississippi, who sets out on a raft down a great river with his black
friend, Nigger Jim, each of them looking for freedom, tells his own story, with childish truth, innocence, and clarity. Like the
river, the book seemed to take charge of Twain as he wrote it, producing his most profound as well as vivid novel.
The Red Badge of Courage (1895) by Stephen Crane. This shoe novel about a young man, Henry Fleming, as he goes into
battle during the American Civil War, was a tour de force. Crane was too young to have known the Civil War; he said he
imagined it from the football field. at makes the book so remarkable is that it is a portrait of instantaneous consciousness. We
are not concerned with why the war is fought, or how Henry got there, just with every moment of experience in the line or in
flight from it. Henry wants to win his red badge of courage, and in the end he does so, in one of the great stories of initiation.
McTeague, A Story of San Francisco (1899) by Frank Norris. Later filmed as Greed, Norris's remarkable story of an
untrained, brutish San Francisco dentist who lives for his beer and his concertina until he falls in love with Trina, the greedy
Swiss girl whom he finally murders, is a classic work of naturalism and the bete humaine, the human animal. Norris brilliantly,
and fatalistically, captures the urban atmosphere of San Francisco and its ordinary lives, and contrasts it with the life in nature
and the desert beyond.
Sister Carrie (1900) by Theodore Dreiser. By the end of the 19th century, America was becoming an urban society, and the
typical `shock-city' was Chicago, which had turned from village to second city in 50 years, its skyscrapers, stockyards and
department stores typifying modem America. Carrie Meeber, the poor girl who goes to Chicago and becomes rich by any
means to hand, shocked the first readers, just as Dreiser's method - naturalism again - dismayed them by its apparent lack of
morality. But Dreiser, a writer from German immigrant stock, brought raw new America to the page, and told its story
unsparingly.
How does one in the novel (the novel which is a work of an and not a disguised
piece of sociology) persuade the American reader to identify that which is basic in
man beyond all differences of class, race, wealth, or formal education?
RALPH ELLISON
The Custom of the Country (1913) by Edith Wharton. Wharton was very much a social novelist, who lived much of her life
in Paris. Her novels possess a vigorous irony about the collapse of social relations, and none is more ironic than this. The
`custom' in question is the American habit of social self-advancement through divorce. The book's heroine, Undine Spragg, is
essentially an opportunist who uses sexuality for advantage, and both succeeds and morally fails in the end.
The Great Gatsby (1925) by F Scott Fitzgerald. Not all Fitzgerald's books are care-fully written, but The Great Gatsby is the
masterpiece, a classic modern American novel. Jay Gatz, the poor boy who becomes rich and is known as the `great Gatsby',
still retains an American innocence amid the glitter, corruption and waste of the 1920s. His love for Daisy Buchanan leads to
disaster, but it remains a version of the American dream - carefully observed by the narrator Nick Carraway.
The Sound and the Fury (1929) by William Faulkner. Faulkner is the great novelist of the American South, and with this
book he broke loose from the form of historical fiction to try a complex experiment with history, time, and language. The book
contains four stories and several time-schemes; part of the story is indeed a tale of sound and fury, told by an `idiot'. The book's
theme is the stained, incestuous, corrupted world of the American South, and the agony of its modem survivors. Hard to read,
it's worth it, as a work of cunning modernism.
A Farewell to Arms (1929) by Ernest Hemingway. Hemingway had been wounded on the Italian front in World War I, and this
story of Lt Frederic Henry, who is similarly wounded while serving with the Italian forces, and falls in love with the English
nurse, Catherine Barkley, who looks after him, has a strong autobiographical quality. But this is a classic tragedy of wartime
experience. Henry leaves the war to make a 'separate peace', and tries to create a life of his own with Catherine. But she dies in
childbirth, and the sense of a universal modern tragedy pervades the book, told in Hemingway's tight, tough, economical style.
Invisible Man (1952) by Ralph Ellison. One of the founding novels of African-American fiction, this work about a black man
rendered invisible by his colour in the chaos and white exclusiveness of American life is a story of mental and then actual
revolt. It's a serious exploration of the moral price that is paid when identity is revoked, and hence a work of great existential
power.
Lolita (1955) by Vladimir Nabokov. Nabokov was an emigre for most of his life, displaced from Russia by the Bolshevik
Revolution. This is his one true American novel, the story of another emigre, Humbert Humbert, whose sexual taste is for
'nymphets', young girls on the cusp of puberty. The erotic aspects of the book made it sensational at the time; but it is
fundamentally a myth about the supposedly `experienced' European observing the supposedly 'innocent' America, and finding
the tables constantly turned: an ironic love affair with America and with the English language, which in Nabokov's hands turns
into a formidable instrument.
Catch-22 (1961) by Joseph Heller. If A Farewell to Arms was the decisive war novel to emerge from World War I, Catch-22
was the book that captured for its generation the ironic and bitter implications of World War II. Set among flyers on the Italian
front, it's an epic of extreme absurdity. The military machine is a system of illogical orders; so is the disaster that is being
created for humanity. A work of black humour, a g eat modern comic classic, the novel also evidently applied to Heller's
contemporary America, as it developed ever more absurd systems of human management and new forms of Cold War fever.
V (1963) by Thomas Pynchon. Perhaps the ultimate work of what became known at the time as `postmodern fiction' or
`metafiction', V is the wonderfully elaborate story of a quest into history conducted in a time of late modem chaos, where no
order falls into place and information is in excess of human comprehension. Herbert Stencil is engaged in a quest for a
mysterious figure, V, who seems to have some significant role in the making of modem history, though her story dissolves each
time it's approached. Meantime a contemporary figure, Benny Profane, is seen attempting to surf the mod-em chaos. A work of
dense historical research as well as technical cunning, it's no easy read, but is of undoubted importance.
Herzog (1964) by Saul Bellow. Bellow, a Jewish-American writer, has been the con-science and consciousness of much in
American fiction after World War II, as was acknowledged when he won the Nobel prize in 1976. Moses Herzog, a `suffering
joker', is an intellectual who attempts to come to terms with the heritage of romantic expectation in modem life, addressing
letters to the illustrious dead of modem thought; at the same time he has great trouble in living one. As in other Bellow novels,
it's the mixture of high intellectual energy with superb social observation of life in modem Chicago and New York that makes
this a work of formidable wit and power.
Beloved (1987) by Toni Morrison. By another Nobel prizewinner, the African-American author of Song of Solomon 1977 and
Tar Baby 1981. Beloved is about an escaped former slave who has killed her baby girl in the age of slavery, to protect it from
being returned to the plantation, and then is haunted by its ghost in the time of freedom after the Civil War. A powerful and
poetic myth, written in a lyrical prose, it is a work both of haunting realism and strange fantasy, revealing the current strength
of African-American fiction.
While American poetry and prose have been acknowledged and celebrated as arguably the most innovative and experimental of
all Western cultures (the mod-ern novel begins with Henry James, while modern poetry derives its impetus from Ezra Pound),
American nonfiction has tended to remain in the shadow of these more glamorous colleagues. To leave it thus is to lose out on
a remarkable body of donatively energetic writing. Founded by a declaration of opposition to British colonial rule, the
American nation has found in the voices of its essayists a persistent polemical strain which maintains the world as open to
debate: founded on invention, the nation has held true to a discourse of change where constructivity and alterability are the key
notes. Openness, a resistance to closure, a constant interrogation of the seeming given of things - these are the hallmarks of a
tradition of writing from the 18th century onwards which refuses settlement and finish of all kinds and which testifies to
existence itself, both national and personal, as a process of becoming, never merely the stasis of being.
Existing likes and powers are to be treated as possibilities, as starting points, that
are absolutely necessary for any healthy development. But development involves a
point towards which as well as one from which; it involves constant movement in
a given direction. Then when the point that is for the time being the goal and end
is reached, it is in its turn but the starting-point for further reconstruction.
JOHN DEWEY
The Adams-Jefferson Letters (1959) edited by Lester J Cappon. A marvellously wide-ranging discussion of politics, culture,
and science between two of the leading formers of the early republic. As Ezra Pound acknowledged in the 20th century,
`nothing surpasses the evidence that CIVILISATION WAS in America, than the series of letters exchanged between Thomas
Jefferson and John Adams'.
Selected Writings of Emerson (1981) edited by Donald McQuade. Ralph Waldo Emerson was the major American thinker of
the 19th century whose essays on just about everything not only had a profound influence upon contemporaries such as Henry
David Thoreau and Walt Whitman, but also remained a vital imaginative resource for the cultural activities of the 20th century,
ranging from the architect Frank Lloyd Wright to the poetry of the Beat Generation.
Abraham Lincoln, Speeches and Letters (1993) edited by Peter Parish. Unlike the prose of Jefferson or Adams, coloured and
structured by great learning, that of Lincoln is relatively untutored and stands as a wonderful example of the kind of voice
always applauded in America - straight, simple, uncluttered, and direct.
The Gentle Art of Making Enemies (1890) by James McNeill Whistler. Witty, iconoclastic, and abrasive, Whistler here
inaugurates Modernism in painting and diagnoses the responsibilities and fate of an in a commercial and philistine age.
The Education of Henry Adams (1973) by Henry Adams. First published privately in 1906, and subtitled A Study of
Twentieth-Century Multiplicity, this remarkable cojoining of genres (part history, part autobiography, and taking as its models
the Confessions of St Augustine and Jean-Jacques Rousseau) attempts to work through the crisis of preparing for life in the
new century•.
The Theory of the Leisure Class (1970) by Thorstein Veblen. Written at the turn of the century, Veblen's brilliant analysis of
America's new bourgeoisie presents an encyclopedia of the signs whereby status Was to be measured, most notably through the
tokens of what he called `conspicuous consumption'.
Look at Me Now and Here I Am - Writings and Lectures 1911-45 (1967) by Gertrude Stein. `Why don't you read the way I
write?' was a question posed by this most radical of modern linguistic experimenters, and her efforts to teach new freshness and
new ways of reading are more appropriately found in this diverse collection on diverse subjects than in the more familiar
single-lensed projects such as The Making of Americans (1906-08) and The Autobiography of Alice B Toklas (1932).
Guide to Kulchur (1938) by Ezra Pound. Analogous to the project of his epic poem The Cantos, Pound's `Guide' offers an
inflammatory curriculum for civilization at midcentury: eccentric, wise, foolish, and eclectic, his Baedeker to cultural mores
achieves the true pedagogical aim of annoyance into action.
Advertisements for Myself (1961) by Norman Mailer. How to be hip while not writing the Great American Novel.
The Electric Kool-Aid Acid Test (1968) by Tom Wolfe. How to be cool while attempting to go further.
The rubric `Third World literature' immediately ushers in a range of difficulties. To designate the field already involves a range
of political questions around the term `Third World'. Other alternatives are `postcolonial' or `black'. To write an introduction to
this vast field is necessarily limiting and will involve a biased and individual choice. I include here texts that allow for insights
into major preoccupations of the `field' (such as colonialism, nationalism, racial identities, feminist issues, and independence).
The texts chosen have great literary and imaginative value, and can be seen as classics.
He had done nothing shameful, it was the way they had forced him to live, forced all of them to live, which was shameful.
Their intrigues and hatreds and vengeful acquisitiveness had forced even simple virtues into tokens of exchange and barter.
ABDULRAZAK GURNAH
Things Fall Apart (1958) by Chinua Achebe. A classic of African literatures, depicting the advent of colonialism on a Nigerian
Ibo community. Its analysis of the transforming and traumatizing effects of colonialism, as well as its moving portrayal of
family relationships, honour, love, and death, make it an enduring and often witty novel.
Petals of Blood (1977) by Ngugi wa Thiong'o. A novel from independent Kenya, again depicting the transformation of a
community. Its weaving together of lives, narratives, and histories into a geography of modem African sensibility make it an
illuminating and unforgettable novel.
Our Sister Killjoy (1977) by Ama Ata Aidoo. A novel which beautifully satirizes Joseph Conrad's Heart of Darkness. Set in
Ghana and Europe, the novel blends narrative with poetry, confronting the choices available to African women, and dealing
with histories of racism and oppression.
Idu (1970) by Flora Nwapa. A novel set in Ghana and centred on the life of one woman. The narrative is about love, fertility,
communal life, and joy.
A Bend in the River (1979) by V S Naipaul. This novel is set in postcolonial central Africa (Zaire), written by an Indo-
Caribbean author, and narrated by an East Indian African. A fascinating evocation of Conrad's Heart of Darkness, revealing the
complexities of racial and national identity, the constant insurgence of history, and the problems of cultural dialogue.
Love in the Time of Cholera (1985) by Gabriel Garcia Marquez. A novel set in Latin America using magic realist techniques.
It engages with the powers of time, memory, love, and pain and uses language as a poetic tool. Translated from Spanish.
The Arrivants (1973) by Edward Kamau Brathwaite. Set in Afitica, the Caribbean, Europe, and the USA, this trilogy of poetic
volumes traces a modem understanding of black migrant identities. Written by a Barbadian poet, this collection of powerfully
connected poems covers an imagining of black consciousness and histories to create a poem of the diaspora.
Song of Lawino (1966) and Song of Ocol (1967) by Okot p'Bitek. Written by a Ugandan poet, these two long poems represent
a dialogue between a traditional African woman and a man with modern, western tastes. Brilliantly witty and metaphoric
poetry, pitting the values of traditional and modern Africa against each other, with female anger winning the day.
Season of Migration to the North (1969) by Tayeb Salih. Translated from the Arabic, this novel, set in Sudan, Cairo, and
England, presents a humorous, traumatic, and complex illustration of inter-racial sexual desire, exploring the psychopathology
of colonialism and migration.
Nervous Conditions (1988) by Tsitsi Dangarembga. This novel, set in Zimbabwe, discusses the effects of language loss, exile,
and cultural dislocation on the body and psyche of a young African woman.
Science Fiction
Pohl, F. and Kornbluth, C. M. The Space Merchants (1953) The authors were exercised about how consumers are
manipulated by conglomerates. In this novel, Venus is being carved up by advertising agents. Madison Avenue lives—out
there! Also: Slave Ship; Drunkard's Walk; Gateway (all by Pohl)
Stapledon, Olaf Last and First Men (1930) * Stapledon had vast ideas; this account of the human species swings through
millennia as though they were skittles. Also: Sirius: Odd John; Star Maker. etc
Fred R. Whipple
Fred R. Whipple arrived at Harvard in 1931 "with his bright and shining Ph.D. and a position of observer at the observatory."
In the ensuing fifty-five years, he has brought more than distinction to Harvard's astronomy reputation. He was responsible for
the Smithsonian astrophysical observatory's coming to Harvard. The Collected Contribution of Fred R. Whipple (2 vols.)
describes much of his work. The Phillips Professor of Astronomy Emeritus, he retired from teaching in the late 1970s and
continues research and prolific writing. He will spend much of 1986 observing Halley's Comet from Paris, Moscow and West
Germany.
When I think of books that have influenced me, I can only think of those books I selected so eagerly from the library in Red
Oak, Iowa as a very young man. I was a very independent only child. I read much more than other children—I read much more
than my parents, who spent most of their lives working very hard, too tired to read.
Alexandre Dumas. The Count of Monte Cristo (1844-45). New York: Bantam. 1981. (Pb)
. The Three Musketeers (1844). New York: Penguin, 1982. (Pb)
Sir H. Rider Haggard. She (1887). New York: Airmont, n.d. (Pb)
The first books I picked out of the library were fairy tales in all the different colors. I remember the Thousand and One Nights
—the expurgated version for a nice Presbyterian boy. After reading everything that amused me. I moved on to Greek legends. I
considered them mediocre, second-rate fairy tales. It wasn't until college that I realized that Greek legends had a value far
beyond fairy tales.
My next pursuit was science fiction—which continued for years. I read by author, not title. All of H. G. Wells, Edgar Allan
Poe, Sir H. Rider Haggard. Everyone should remember She. Science-fiction magazines allowed me to live in another world
with visual circumstances so different from mine. Hugh Germsbach's Electrical Experimenter and, later, Amazing Stories
were particular favorite magazines. So was my friend Isaac Asimov's science fiction.
I perfected my French with amusing French novels. The Count of Monte Cristo and The Three Musketeers stick in my mind.
My parents' only suggestion to this reading were Zane Grey and Edgar A. Guest. I think I must have read them all. I found
Mark Twain on my own and know I read all of his wonderful work.
SCIENCE FICTION
Brian Aldiss
Since the days of Jules Verne and H G Wells, whose books have been translated into most of the languages on Earth, science
fiction has been perennially popular. Its zenith of popularity may have been reached in the 1960s and early 1970s, when
investigation of alternative lifestyles was at its height. As the blithe 19th-century belief in Progress with a capital P has
dwindled, so sections of science fiction have appeared to merge at least temporarily with fantasy, essentially a more
conservative mode of fiction. This shift can be seen in movies, computer games, and similar, as well as in the written word. An
invaluable reference work to the entire field is The Encyclopedia of Science Fiction (1979, revised 1993) edited by John Clute
and Peter Nicholls.
Almost any novel set in the future is classifiable as science fiction. Tomorrow is the
plimsoll line between science fiction and the ordinary novel.
MARTIN SEYMOUR-SMITH
The Foundation Trilogy (1951-53) by Isaac Asimov. Despite wafer-thin characterization, this trilogy remains the most
enduring of the popular SF works. Its theory of `psychohistory', worked out against a panorama of a long galactic future,
remains compelling. Later `Foundation' novels have less to recommend them.
The Drowned World (1962) by J G Ballard. This was the first of Ballard's apocalyptic novels, depicting London under flood,
and a hero who finds disaster not unwelcome, in an elegant holistic prose. Published in the early 1960s, when London was
under the flood of New Wave SF, The Drowned World established Ballard as a major stylist, and contained many themes to
which he was later to revert.
Blood Music (1985) by Greg Bear. A startling example of hard SF by a writer who rose to eminence in the mid-1980s. His
central character creates microchip computers from biological material and, in smuggling them from the laboratory in his body,
creates conditions in which the new intelligences overwhelm the world. A strongly poetic legend.
Mission of Gravity (1954) by Hal Clement. This wonderful story, dating from the 1950s, is archetypal SF, set on a radically
strange world. Human explorers, landing on the planet Mesklin, must cooperate with the local centipede-like inhabitants to
effect a rescue. Mesklin is a heavy-gravity world with a rapid rotation. Physical details well worked out, characters engaging,
scenery compulsive.
Martian Time-Slip (1964) by Philip K Dick. Dick is a kind of model Californian SF writer, into the 1960s drug culture,
mentally strange, dying fairly young. Martian Time-Slip, set on a desolate world occupied by the United Nations, contains
anguishing flaws of consciousness involving several characters, including an autistic boy. As in many of Dick's excellently
eccentric novels, the real and unreal are confused.
Neuromancer (1984) by William Gibson. When this book appeared Gibson was hailed as the apostle of cyberpunk. Fast action
accounts in part for its wide popularity, and for the young computer generation it was irresistible; all longed to negotiate
Gibson's grey, nonphysical cyberspace, despite its perils. Grim but amusing.
Mythago Wood (1981) by Robert Holdstock. This remarkable novel, together with its sequel, Lavondyss, forms a unique saga
of great beauty and darkness, poised between fantasy and SF. A rich prose style informs a tale of an ancient English wood
wherein archetypes or 'mythagoes' exist, acting out primordial roles upon those who venture into their thickets. That rare thing:
new subject matter, highly metaphorical and - as the well-wrought prose reveals - deeply felt.
Frankenstein, or The Modern Prometheus (1818) by Mary Shelley. This pro-found novel has been badly treated as mere
horror by the movie industry. It is a penetrating study of pained human relationships, transfused by wonder and melancholy.
Written by a young woman still in her teens, it is the first novel to employ the theme of man usurping nature by scientific
means, and thus may be regarded as the first - and in many ways most famous - SF novel.
Star Maker (1937) by Olaf Stapledon. Of all SF novels, this is the grandest and most austere. A human soul ventures out into
the galaxy and eventually meets the Supreme Being, conjuror of universes. Philosophical in intent - Stapledon was a
philosopher - Star Maker is full of poetry and wonder. Its sheer scale outclasses even Stapledon's earlier and better known Last
and First Men
The Time Machine (1895) by H G Wells. `The Great General of Dreamland', as Wells styled himself, wrote many famous
scientific romances, but none more grand and enduring than this, his first. The time traveller ventures into a near future, the
world of Eloi and Morlocks, and then into the distant future, where the Sun has cooled and Earth is empty of all life.
Evolutionary; and astronomical theories fuel a mood which is mainly of tender regret.
HORROR
Roz Kaveney
The great precursors of the modern horror genre are mythopoeic novels of the 19th century, whose principal direct influence on
culture was to be through Hollywood. There is a sense in which Boris Karloff's Monster or Bela Lugosi's Dracula are far more
the thing conceived than any passage in Mary Shelley's Frankenstein or Bram Stoker's Dracula ever manages quite to be. The
genre horror fiction that came to fruition in the last two decades deals in the first place with sheer sensation and surprise; the
best honor also deals, usually, in human emotion, not least, but not only, because we have been made to care who gets eaten.
Horror fiction speaks to our condition, which is a worrying statement about the state we are in; there has been a tendency to
underrate good writing in the genre as a way of avoiding noticing that that writing tells us some uncomfortable truths about
ourselves.
Every body is a book of blood. Wherever you open us, we're red. CLNE BARKER
The Collected Ghost Stories of M R James (1931) by Montague Rhodes James. A Warning to the Curious, the tide of one of
the earlier collections of these tales, might serve as a useful summary for all of them; James specialized in the antiquarian back
story that lends authority to his horrors. Later genre horror learned from him the art of explanation, which is not the same thing
as explaining away.
The Outsiders and Others (1939) by H P Lovecraft. Lovecraft is a special case, a recluse obsessed with maggoty theories of
racial degeneration and class hatred, who created, most =seriously, an elaborate mythos of sinister gods and other beings to
whom humanity were no more than prey. The intermittent awfulness of his overwriting should not blind us to the sheer passion
of his best work and its sense of the abysses of deep time that surround our fragile lives; Jorge Luis Borges admired him.
The Shining (1977) by Stephen King. King's sense of the small-town life and perpetual empathy with children are the light
side of what has made him the richest horror writer in history; his empathy with men on the brink of madness, led by their own
faults and a little supernatural prompting, into acts unforgivable even by themselves is what makes him, at his best, remarkable.
The Shining has perhaps the best of these damned-viewpoint characters and, in the Overlook Hotel, one of the most concretely
imagined Bad Places in fiction.
The Land of Laughs (1980) by Jonathan Carroll. Carroil's gloomy tales of prayers answered in ways not dreamed of find their
most typical example in his first ingenious book. at could be more innocent than the desire to write a biography of one's
favourite children's author? The odd metamorphosis of the dead writer's fellow towns-people into the phantasmagoric creatures
he based on them is surely just an illusion, not a cause for concern? And so it goes, on to hell through good intentions, to
perhaps the best last-line logical plot twist in modern fiction.
The Arabian Nightmare (1983) by Robert Irwin. There are few good, and many bad, books about dreams and dreamers, and
Irwin's endless chamber of mirrored horrors is one of the very best. An expert on The Thousand and One Nights and author of
the best study of it in English, he takes medieval Cairo and turns it into a hell of repetition from which his protagonist is trying
to awake; he also, in passing, makes some elegant comments on the myth of Orientalism and the bad faith in which the West
has dreamed it.
The Books of Blood (1984-85) by Clive Barker. These six slim volumes of short stories kick started a whole approach to the
job of tenor and disgust; they finished for ever the convention that you don't show the monster or the blood, but rely on delicate
suggestions. Barker's strong visual sense dictated that fiction was a stepping stone from his paintings to his films and his novels
have been disappointing; the imagery of the body and its vulnerability to distortion and destruction which pervades these books
haunts the mind like a stain.
Hawksmoor (1985) by Peter Ackroyd. Biographer and novelist Ackroyd wrote by far his best novel under the joint influence
of James and Lovecraft, as well as of the poems of Ian Sinclair and various strange theories about the occult geography of
London. An architect and occultist of the early 18th century creates towers and crypts which write the script for murders in the
late 20th century; the investigating detective comes to feel merely a puppet. This is one of the most atmospheric of books about
London's near East End, a gloomily splendid recreation of a real place as a malign geography.
Koko (1988) by Peter Straub. A cultural obsession with serial killers and child abuse and Vietnam found one of its headier
results in this dreamlike thriller from Straub, author of several of the most poetic of horror and ghost novels, but here perhaps
at his best. The honor here is partly the horror of atrocity, but partly too an almost Calvinist sense of consequences - those to
whom evil is done, do things in return that it is almost impossible to imagine.
The Stress of Her Regard (1989) by Tim Powers. Powers is obsessed with fantasies of history, with explanations; here we
learn why the Romantic poets were obsessed with mountains and vampires and why Keats and Shelley died young. His doctor
hero, on the run after his wife dies horribly on their wedding night, finds out more than he wishes to know and suffers for his
knowledge; his sister-in-law nemesis is dragged into madness and self mutilation and out the other side. This is an inventive
book full of the shabbiness in which the horrid manifests itself.
Use of Weapons (1990) by Ian M Banks. Banks, in his pseudonymous space-operatic mode, managed to combine a technical
tour de force of narrative structure, a galaxy-spanning tale of intrigue and mayhem, and perhaps one of the grimmest studies of
brutality and guilt in recent fiction. Some books are genre honor by endless playing with its tropes; this belongs to a list
because it works so insidiously to the awful revelation at the heart of darkness.
Lost Souls (1992) by Poppy Z Brite. The absence of women from this list partly reflects the boys in the dark obsessions of the
genre, partly the extent to which women writers tended to be off at a tangent to genre horror, writing Gothic romances in which
vampires were the ultimately good, or the ultimately dangerous, version of male sexuality. For Brite, whose interest in male
subjects is so all consuming as to leave women out of her books almost altogether, vampires are cool and hip and deadly, and a
threat to her nice young male lovers in peril; this is tosh, in a sense, but tosh with a generational sensibility that makes it a key
text of 1990s subcultures.
FANTASY
Roz Kaveney
Strictly speaking, of course, fantasy is a term that includes both horror and science fiction in that both are ultimately non-
realistic genres whose refusal of more than surface mimesis is a conscious choice. There is a large body of work, most of it
overtly generic, which falls into neither category; much of it is set in a medieval-cum-archaiccum-Oriental Fantasyland with
diction to match; some of it is set in our own time and place into which incursions are made from Outside. Some of it deals
with cures for the world's pain, or the reconciliation of the mundane and faerie, or with ultimate apocalypses of good versus
evil - but some of it is just about people making their way in trying circumstances. As with other genre literature, any list has to
include forgotten works from the mainstream that only the genre has kept alive and works which only devotees have read, to
the loss of the average reader.
Fairy stories may invent monsters that fly the air or dwell in the deep, but at least
they do not try to escape from heaven or the sea.
J R R TOLx1EN
Jurgen (1919) by James Branch Cabell. This almost forgotten satire on human aspiration was, in its time, both frighteningly
hip and the subject of a major obscenity trial. Its mild bawdy has not dated well, but its sense of the absurd and its touches of
the wildly romantic have lasted better. Jurgen, poet turns pawnbroker, searches for his lost youth, and the women of his ideals
and finds neither Elysium, Hell, nor the Heaven of his grandmother remotely to his satisfaction.
Lud-in-the-Mist (1926) by Hope Mirrlees. A small bourgeois town which has sat comprehensively on its dark history of mad
dukes and wild rebellion find that what goes out one door will come in at another; the world of faerie finds that intervention in
human affairs has its consequences in the bringing of human law. This neglected, warm, humane book is perhaps still the best
fantasy of fmding balance.
The Lord of the Rings (1954-55) by J R R Tolkien. The one genre fantasy that most people have actually read, this created
most of the preconceptions that dominate readers and writers of fantasy. To read it again, forget all that has followed on from it,
and think of it as a book about Tolkien's experiences in World War I or about the needs for limits as a creator of ethical context;
it is a book of real invention, high romance, grimness, wit, and charm, and what more needs be said for anything?
The Swords of Lankhmar (1968) by Fritz Leiber. There was always a pulp genre of capers and mayhem in Fantasyland, much
of which can be forgotten. Leiber's template series about the sensitive barbarian hunk Fafhrd and the streetwise vain urchin
Gray Mouser ran for decades, and brought wit and sophistication and irony to the whole enterprise. One of its culminations was
this novel of conspiracy, urban depravity, and sword-wielding rats, which demonstrated that Leiber could not only write action
adventure, he could also write sexually charged farce.
A Wizard of Earthsea (1968) by Ursula K LeGuin. This first of the trilogy, later expanded into a quartet, which made LeGuin
a children's cult as well as the writer of SF and fantasy for people who don't usually like that sort of thing, is still one of the
most intellectually satisfying of explorations of magic. Ged, apprenticed as a wizard, tests limits and nearly destroys himself
and those around him; this is a book about the getting of wisdom, and, appropriately, is itself wise.
Peace (1975) by Gene Wolfe. An early novel by the trickster writer of The Book of the New Sun, this is complicatedly not
what it seems. An old man muses on mortality and his family history and on stories, none of which ever quite manages to reach
completion ... This is a novel, but it is also a riddle to which there are no wholly satisfactory answers; it is a book which
stretches form and comprehension to breaking point without ever raising its voice or doing anything radical with prose.
Little, Big (1981) by John Crowley. This and two other novels by Crowley are the only genre fantasies to make it into Harold
Bloom's Canon. Little, Big, a novel where even the comma in the title is important, takes the sleeper under the hill, the
conditions imposed on a lover, the animal adviser, the quest for a lost love, and the place that is bigger than it seems, and mixes
them into a story of change and transfiguration, where what seemed twee becomes almost unbearably moving with a change of
perspective.
The Anubis Gates (1983) by Tim Powers .Brendan Doyle, a widower and Coleridge expert, this he knows about the Regency
London in which he is marooned. He knows only rumours, though, about the body- jumping werewolf, the Egyptian
magicians, and the malignant clown, and vivisectionist Horrabin ... Powers is remorselessly inventive here, but Doyle's
predicament, and those of the lives he touches, is emotionally real even when the events surrounding it are at their most bizarre.
Rats and Gargoyles (1990) by Mary Gentle. A city where anything is possible, particularly the nastier things; a city sustained
by the imagination of its gods, yet constantly undermined by memories of its past incarnations - Mary Gentle took ideas from
Gnosticism and elsewhere in the mystical tradition and made of them an adventure playground. Swashbuckling and
metaphysics go oddly well together here - and a problem is solved according to the rules in whose language it has been set.
Waking the Moon (1994) by Elizabeth Hand. We almost think we know where we are here, as crabbed old patriarchal
conspirators use magic to blast out of life a feminist archaeologist and a young disciple takes up her work ... Restoring the rule
of the Goddess is not a task without its own moral implications, though, and this vividly peopled book turns a lot of cliches on
their head as its central characters find themselves rejecting the human consequences of things to which in abstract they might
assent. Fantasy is never allegory, at its best, but it is often a device for representing, in heightened phantasmagorical form,
genuine moral choices.
ROMANTIC FICTION
Marina Oliver
Almost any novel that contains a strong love story and has a happy or optimistic ending can be described as a romantic novel.
That encompasses a lot, from Jane Austen to the Brontes, the present-day short genre romance, through historical settings
including fictionalized biographies and rip-roaring adventure, the popular family sagas, Aga sagas, glitz, modem problem
novels, and literary prizewinners. Serious critical analysis is meagre, and what there is tends to be American. The
TwentietCentury Romance and Historical Writers (third edition 1994) is the most comprehensive reference book for details of
writers, lists of their books, and a critical view of each author's work.
Advances (1992) by Anita Burgh. This is a wickedly funny look at the world of publishing, by a writer with the ability to carry
along her readers by the sheer power of her storytelling, whether set in the present day or past times.
The Lymond Series (1961-75) by Dorothy Dunnett. Six huge books with an attractive hero and an unlikely heroine, set against
a masterly, vast panorama of 16th-century Europe. These books are full of detailed knowledge, totally absorbing, intense, and
brilliant.
The Unknown Ajax (1959) by Georgette Heyer. The Regency novel was `invented' by Georgette Heyer, and the deliciously
frothy, eminently easy-to-read style conceals formidable research and superb technical skill. This title has a serious theme of
smuggling, combined with wit, humour, and deep emotion.
A Better World than This (1986) by Marie Joseph. The heroine is searching for a dream, away from the tedium of a
Lancashire mill to. This heartwarming novel won the Major Award of the Romantic Novelists' Association in 1987.
The Suffolk Trilogy (1959-62) by Norah Lofts. Set, like many of her novels, in East Anglia, these books feature one house
through several centuries. She can convey time and place impeccably, and her characters are intensely real.
The Chatelaine (1981) by Claire Lorrimer. A family novel, set in the 1900s, it is a powerful story of a girl's early love,
disillusionment, and final triumph over adversity. It is superbly plotted and compelling.
Mango Walk (1981) by Rhona Martin. She won the first Georgette Heyer Prize with Gallows Wedding, a historical novel, but
this is set in the 20th century, equally uncompromising and powerful, the story of an unlikely love that endures despite almost
unbearable pressures.
Csardas (1975) by Diane Pearson. Both editor and author, Pearson is president of the Romantic Novelists' Association. She
achieved immense acclaim with this epic story of Hungary during half a century of travail.
Nine Coaches Waiting (1958) by Mary Stewart. This book can be called a Gothic novel or a suspense novel, but is above all a
compelling story involving hard decisions and firm values.
The Native Air (1990) by Sarah Woodhouse. The author can take unlikely characters and charm her readers into utter
fascination. This is the last in a trilogy set around 1800, where love eventually triumphs. The writing is delightful, almost fey,
but conveys with a sure touch the sometimes bleak realities of Norfolk life.
Short Stories
See HUMOUR (Daudet, Lardner, O'Brien, Runyon): MUSIC (Wagner); MYTHOLOGY (Feldman. Gantz, Hatto, Malory,
Sandars, Thomas); SEX (Boccaccio, Nefzawi)
Isherwood, Christopher Goodbye to Berlin (1939) * Herr Issyvoo in his best "I am a camera" phase: decay of a civilization
(Germany under the Nazis) in the form of seemingly casual sketches of Berlin life. Also: All the Conspirators: Mr Norris
Changes Trains, etc. See DRAMA (Auden)
Lowry, Malcolm Hear Us O Lord from Heaven Thy Dwelling Place (1961)
Lowry's gift was for loading every rift with ore, or at least tequila; this posthumously published collection contains two stories
— Through the Panama and The Forest Path to the Spring. See FICTION/NOVELS
Lu Xun (Lu Hsün), Chinese, 1881-1936.
Diary of a Madman and Other Stories. Rec: Meaningful
Collected Short Stories. Rec: Fadiman 4 MW Asian Ward
Mann, Thomas Death in Venice ( 1911) 1' Masterly novella of a civilized artist at the end of his genteel tether. Also:
Stories of a Lifetime. See FICTION/NOVELS
Poe, Edgar Allan Tales of the Grotesque and Macabre (1840) Twenty-five tales include The Fall of the House of Usher,
William Wilson, Ligeia, Berenice and Manuscript Found in a Bottle. Also: The Narrative of ArthurGordon Pym of Nantucket;
Poems; Eureka, etc. See FICTION/CRIME
Runyon, Damon Guys and Dolls (1932) it Runyon perfected the use of a certain kind of invented slang in these stories
about New York hoods, their mommas and their molls. His stories seem slight and forgettable, but aren't. Also: Take It Easy;
My Wife Ethel; Runyon d la Carte. See HUMOUR
Saki The Best of Saki (1976) it H. H. Munro called himself "Saki" after a South African monkey characterized by a long bushy
tail, delicacy and silence. His stories send up everything in sight. Bushy tales? Also: The Unbearable Bassington
Stein, Gertrude Three Lives (1908) 9 In Melanctha, about a black woman, Stein showed for the first (and last?) time
just how well she could write fiction. Her prose rhythms admirably follow the movements of Melanctha's mind. After this,
Stein concentrated on the movement of her own mind—and turned into Old Mother Hubbard.
Stevenson, Robert Louis The Strange Case of Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde (1886)
Stevenson's wife Fanny read this tale in draft and complained that he had sensationalized a good allegory. Stevenson enraged,
stormed out; then he returned, said she was right and set to work to produce this classic story of split personality. See
CHILDREN'S BOOKS
Turgenev, Ivan Sergeyevich A Sportsman's Sketches (1852) Sketches of 19th-century Russian peasant life characterized by
what V. S. Pritchett called "their simple feeling and transparency". Also: The House of Gentlefolk; On the Eve; Virgin Soil, etc
Twain, Mark The Celebrated Jumping Frog of Calaveras County and Other Sketches (1865)
Interesting mostly for the way it foreshadows Twain's superb use of the vernacular in The Adventures of Tom Sa wyerand The
Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Title piece, based on an old Californian folk tale, still has charm. See FICTION/NOVELS;
HISTORY/AMERICAN; HUMOUR; TRAVEL
D. Quinn Mills is the .principal faculty member at the • Harvard Business School keeping the study of labor relations alive. The
impact of economic and managerial systems on people has been his continuing professional interest. He is noted for
maintaining a strong emphasis on the general management aspects of people relationships, tying case research and discussion
to the problems of operating-line executives, and avoiding the functional perspectives and responsibilities of personnel
managers.
A member of the Harvard Business School faculty since 1976, he is the author of ten books and was appointed the Albert J.
Weatherhead Professor of Business Administration in 1978.
Winston S. Churchill. The Second World War, Volume I: The Gathering Storm (1948). Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1983.
I was twelve years old and living in Houston, Texas when an aunt gave me a copy of the first volume of Winston Churchill's
six-volume history of the Second World War, entitled The Gathering Storm. I read the book and found it fascinating. It opened
to me the wide world of nonfiction literature. It permitted me to learn about great events as they were viewed by participants,
including authors like Churchill who possessed insightful and powerful personalities. Reading Churchill also gave me a respect
for our language and for rhetoric—cadences, the crashing thunder of strong words, the rhythmic sequence of sentences. In a
short time I had read the remaining five volumes of the series and went on to histories composed by other authors.
William Faulkner. Intruder in the Dust (1948). New York: Random House, 1967. (Pb)
. The Sound and the Fury (1929). New York: Random House, 1967. (Pb)
During high school I lived in Memphis, Tennessee. Perhaps because I had moved to Memphis and found the attitudes and
opinions of my classmates somewhat different from my own, I began to read in search of explanations of what it meant to be a
person from the deep South in the United States. William Faulkner's writings revealed to me the complexity of the Southern
tradition—of guilt, revenge and repentance. The most powerful of the books was The Sound and the Fury, but the line I most
remember came from a less well-known novel entitled Intruder in the Dust. "Some things you must always be unable to bear,"
Faulkner wrote; "injustice, prejudice, and despair ... not for kudos and not for cash, just refuse to bear them."
Another Southern writer taught me a lesson I've benefited from enormously over my lifetime, a lesson about tolerance.
"Nothing human disgusts me," wrote Tennessee Williams in Night of the Iguana, "unless it is unkind or violent."
William James. The Varieties of Religious Experience (1902). New York: Penguin, 1982. (Pb)
College was for me as for many young people a time of questioning and doubts. I had been raised in a Protestant church but
during college became profoundly uncertain about the significance of religious faith. Was religion a positive or a negative
influence in mankind's experience?
At this time I happened upon William James's The Varieties of Religious Experience. From James's book I learned how
hazardous it is to generalize about something as complex as religion. This insight reopened to me the search for a religious
faith with which I was comfortable. But James also helped me to avoid easy generalizations and conclusions in other complex
areas of human life.
The Bible.
Dietrich Bonhoeffer. The Cost of Discipleship (1948). R. H. Fuller, trans. Magnolia, Mass.: Peter Smith, 1983.
In the years since I have read widely in Eastern religious works, and in the writings of the ancient Western world. Marcus
Aurelius particularly impressed me. I recall one of his observations about self-restraint: "be careful that you do not feel toward
the inhuman as they feel toward men." I also read extensively in the mainstream of Christian writings. I was particularly
influenced by Dietrich Bonhoeffer's The Cost of Discipleship, since the author later gave his life in the struggle within
Germany against the Hitler regime.
I have also nibbled at the Bible continually for many years, especially enjoying comparing different translations. The Bible
remains the central form of transmission of the Western heritage, and is the foundation of our moral standards—to my mind far
more important than laws. The biblical text that returns most often to my mind is from the Book of Micah: "He has showed
you, oh man, what is good—and what does the Lord require of you but to do justice, to love mercy and to walk humbly with
your God?" I have over many years rendered many decisions in arbitration hearings, and these words have never been far from
my thoughts as I pondered what decision to make.
Milovan Djilas. The New Class: An Analysis of the Communist System (1957). San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1982.
George Orwell. 1984 (1949). New York: Signet, 1984. (Pb)
In graduate school I studied economics and political science. There is implicit, and sometimes explicit for that matter, criticism
of our economic and political systems in much that is written in those disciplines. Two books that definitely shaped my
perspective were Milovan Djilas's study of Stalinist communism, The New Class, and George Orwell's 1984. The two books
constituted a vision of a totalitarian hell, created in this century by people who spoke publicly of their commitment to the
improvement of human life. These books helped me to preserve a deep appreciation for our own society, without, I hope,
causing me intentionally to ignore its limitations. In particular, I recognized again the value of individual human freedom
which Western society affords its members.
Isaac Bashevis Singer. Stories for Children. New York: Farrar, Straus, & Giroux, 1984.
Years later I became a parent. One of the greatest joys parenting offers is to try to see the world as children see it. I_ read the
classics of children's literature, and enjoyed them more than I did the first time. Also I discovered Isaac Bashevis Singer's
Stories for Children. It was helpful to me in my own writing to see that simplicity of theme and treatment could contain great
depth of understanding of the human character and of human institutions. In particular I was influenced by Singer's comment at
the end of Stories that today the only serious literature is that written for children. Popular adult literature is lost in
sensationalism and the effort to shock.
Margaret Murie and Olaus Murie. Wapiti Wilderness: The Life of Olaus and Margaret Murie in Jackson Hole, Wyoming
(1966). Jackson Hole, Wyo.: Teton Bookshop, n.d. (Pb)
Now in middle age, I think about what things are of great value in life, and what I should try to experience in the time left to
me. I am more aware than ever before of the natural richness of this continent. Recently I have been much impressed by the
account that Margaret and Olaus Murie left of their years working for the Forest Service in the Tetons (Wapiti Wilderness).
Olaus was a founder of the Wilderness Society, which today attempts to preserve what remains of the American wilderness
from unreasonable development. Partly under the influence of their book I am putting aside more of my time for trips into the
natural wilderness. This is also, I think, an important spiritual dimension in life.
Martha Minow
Martha Minow is a professor of law at Harvard Law School. A former law clerk to Justice Thurgood Marshall, Professor
Minow is also a member of the faculty of the Doing Justice Program at Brandeis University and a member of the board of
directors of the American Bar Foundation. Her primary interests and her best-known courses are "Children and the Law" and
"Family Law."
I asked myself, what books on my shelf are so worn from rereading—or missing from the shelf altogether because I keep
insisting that someone else read them? The list is too long, but here are some that come immediately to mind.
Robert M. Cover. Justice Accused: Antislavery and the Judicial Process (1975). New Haven: Yale University Press, 1984.
(Pb)
It asks, why did judges who opposed slavery nonetheless enforce the laws governing slavery before the Civil War? Its answers
move through debates about whether law is natural or socially constructed, through biography and analyses of the interplay
between personality and social role, into psychology and the persistent human desire to avoid personal choice and
responsibility, and through the power of language in expressing and shaping what people think is possible.
Isaac Bashevis Singer. In My Father's Court (1966). New York: Fawcett, 1979. (Pb)
A memoir of the author's childhood days in the home where his father, as rabbi, heard disputes and struggled for resolutions
amid the daily lives of his community in Warsaw. The disputes become windows into the virtues and vices of individuals, the
traumas solved by arbitrary rules, and the traumas created by them.
Adrienne Rich. The Dream of a Common Language: Poems. New York: W. W. Norton, 1978. (Pb)
A collection of poems that explore the difficulties of speaking about women's experiences and, in so doing, create the
possibility of saying things that haven't before been said.
Hester Eisenstein and Alice Jardine, eds. The Future of Difference (1980). New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press,
1985. (Pb)
A collection of essays that connects the contemporary women's movement with scholarly work. In these connections,
breathtaking precision in analysis and careful explosions of disciplinary boundaries appear and reappear. The sustained offering
of insights uses and at the same time challenges psychoanalytic thought about the formation of the self and gender identity,
epistemological debates over the impossibility of objectivity, and current inquiries into literary analysis and political theory.
Andre Lorde's essay, "Poetry Is Not a Luxury," shows so powerfully how there are only new ways of making old ideas, and yet
the future of our words, and ourselves, depends on our "need to dream, to move our spirits most deeply and directly and
through promise."
Ludwig Wittgenstein. Philosophische Untersuchungen (Philosophical Investigations, 1953). G. E. Anscome, trans. Frankfurt:
Suhrkamp, 1967.
How amazing to find out that a philosopher could have a voice, a playful, personal voice; that reading philosophy could feel
like a fun and puzzling conversation; and that things look differently after reading? listening? arguing? with this book.
Norton Juster. The Phantom Tollbooth. New York: Epstein & Carroll, 1961. (Pb)
A children's book about the meaning of life, it takes puns seriously so that language and experience both become fresh, and it
reminds us that we might well be able to do things that people say could never be done.
Sarah Lawrence Lightfoot. Worlds Apart: Relationships Between Families and Schools. New York: Basic Books, 1978. (Pb)
Subtle, vivid depictions of the lives of children, teachers and families that mutually implicate each other even through their
separations, boundaries and conflicts. The book gently incorporates insights from social theory while exposing the workings of
power, cultural and racial differences, and personal hopes and pain. It makes possible knowledge about what we don't see by
exposing what others don't see about us in the gaps between classrooms and homes, and, indeed, the gaps between all the
places we may dwell.
Avis C. Vidal
Avis Vidal is an associate professor of city and regional planning at Harvard's John F. Kennedy School of Government and
specializes in urban economic development, housing and urban policy. Her current research focuses on the effectiveness of
public–private partnerships formed to promote urban development by supporting the activities of community-based
organizations.
J. D. Salinger. Franny and Zooey: Two Novellas (1961). New York: Bantam, 1969. (Pb)
Buddy's letter to Zooey is the best and most enduring reminder I have had of the importance of discovering the things that
really matter to you, and then doing them with zest because that's the way they deserve to be done.
Chaim Potok. My Name Is Asher Lev (1972). New York: Fawcett, 1978. (Pb)
A powerful exploration of the clarity of purpose that a natural gift or calling makes possible, and of the anguish that comes
with being forced to choose between two highly valued claims on one's identity.
Anthony Lewis. Gideon's Trumpet. New York: Random House, 1964. (Pb)
Bob Woodward and Scott Armstrong. The Brethren (1979). New York: Avon, 1980. (Pb)
Two very different accounts of the wonder and power of the law and the people who make it work—when it works.
Chaim Potok. The Book of Lights. New York: Fawcett, 1981. (Pb)
A book that illustrates the potential power of religious and cultural tradition in helping one come to terms with the inescapable
presence of death and evil.
From the start, cinema established itself as not just another medium, but as one of the great popular art forms, as wide-ranging
as literature, music or painting themselves. Like those arts, it contains masterpieces and rubbish, timeless works and ephemera
—and a huge range of good-quality journeyman work, popular entertainment which can, at its best, transcend its own modest
aspirations. Nowadays, thanks to television showings, films (of all qualities) are accessible as never before, and there is a wide
popular knowledge of film styles and techniques; television has not, however, resulted (as was predicted) in the death of
creativity, but in a remarkable upsurge of new styles, new talents, new excellence. This list avoids the more arcane areas of film
criticism (addicts writing in code for addicts) and also the more fleeting of fan-journalism. We have chosen good serious guides
to the medium and to the industry, and biographies, studies and reminiscences of some of the most enjoyable (not to say
enjoyably literate) practitioners of film.
See AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Chaplin): BIOGRAPHY (Mailer); DRAMA (McCrindle); HUMOUR (Allen)
Armes, Roy A Critical History of the British Cinema (1978) 10 Detailed and informative, if at times rather conventional and
opinionated. Avoids chauvinism; covers important ground.
Barnouw, Erik Documentary: A History of Nonfiction Film (1974) 9 Standard work for students, fans and creators of
documentary films. Historycum-theory-cum-criticism adds up to an extremely useful compendium. Bawden, Liz-Anne (ed)
The Oxford Companion to Film (1976) 10 * Authoritative entries, alphabetically arranged, on every aspect of film from "AA
certificate" to "Zvoboda, Andre". Articles on national styles particularly good (Italy and Japan outstanding). Not as jolly or
personal as Halliwell (qv), but far more reliable.
Bayer, William The Great Movies (1973) &if Thoughtful critical assessments of sixty films which in Bayer's view represent
the medium at its best and most characteristic. Covers "trash masterpieces" (eg Gone with the Wind; Singin' in the Rain) as
well as films with grander pretensions (La Grande Illusion; Citizen Kane).
Burch, Noel To a Distant Observer(1939) 91/ Japanese film: outstanding study of a "national cinema". Emphasis is on
"formal" differences with Western cinema, but shows a strong sense of the political and cultural history that determined these
differences. Also: Theory of Film Practice
Eisenstein, Sergei The Film Sense (1942) 011_, Chiefly important for theories behind Eisenstein's own films—long section
on Alexander Nevsky—but has profound implications for cinema as a whole. Also: Film Form. See Montagu; Septon.
Leyda, Jay Kino: A History of the Russian and Soviet Film (1960) Pi' Excellent, comprehensive record of the troubled history
of cinema in the Soviet Union. Essential background reading to Eisenstein (qv); the story continues in Liehm (qv).
Liehm, A. J. and M. The Most Important Art: East European Cinema after 1945(1977) 9J'
The only account of the—often Orwellian—mechanisms of film industries in the Sovietist east. Also: The Milos Forman
Stories (1976)
Mellen, Joan Big Bad Wolves: Masculinity in the American Film (1977) 0
Serious—but hugely entertaining—study of the Hollywood myth-machine at work on great romantic male stars, and on the
sometimes limp reality behind the macho mask. A model of how to make a movie book: it's well researched, well written, and
beautifully salts gossip with objective criticism.
Milne, Tom (ed) Godard on Godard (1972) 9 Collection of French director Jean Luc Godard's important reviews and articles
from the 1950s and 1960s.
Montagu, Ivor With Eisenstein in Hollywood (1963) Montagu—film-maker, zoologist, world class table-tennis player, self-
publicizing raconteur—accompanied Eisenstein and his Soviet colleagues during their often comically disastrous sojourn in
Hollywood. A self-regarding, funny book: Ninotchka, in a way, starts here. See Eisenstein; Septon.
Pye, M. and Myles, L. The Movie Generation: How the Film Generation Took Over Hollywood (1979)
The coup d'etatwhen young men with beards and passion for movies moved in on Hollywood. But for how long will Coppola
(Apocalypse Now), Spielberg (Jaws), Lucas (Star Wars) et alresist becoming their own establishment? Watch for sequels:
coming soon.
Rotha, P. and Griffith, R. The Film Till Now (1930) 0 An early classic of film scholarship; still worth reading. Regularly
updated. Also: Documentary Film (Rotha)
Taylor, Robert Lewis W. C. Fields: His Follies and Fortunes (1950) Funny book about a funny man. Should be taken with a
ton of salt and read in conjunction with W. C. Fields by Himself(qv).
Walker, Alexander The Shattered Silents (1978) & Blow-by-blow account of the coming of talkies, 1926-29. Exemplary
use of first-hand sources; a mine of information and a lively read. Also: Rudolph Valentino; Double Takes; Notes and
Afterthoughts on the Movies
Wesimore, F. and Davidson, M. The Westmores of Hollywood(1976) Who works quietly and unobtrusively behind every
Hollywood scene, sees everything, hears everything, says nothing—till now? The makeup man. There have been seven
Westmores (father and six sons), each heading the makeup department of a major studio. And what tales they have to tell!
Delicious gossip—and the makeup details are fascinating too.
CINEMA
Stanley Kauffmann
Film books in the English language were relatively scarce until around 1960 when the so-called Film Generation burst forth. To
accommodate this phenomenon, publishers began pouring out books. That generation's energy has decreased some-what as
serious consideration of film became less of a novelty and assumed a place in our lives more or less like that accorded older
arts. With that settling-down, publication of film books has also declined. The great wave of the 1960s and 1970s produced
predictably many inferior books, some of them catchpenny even in their arty pretentiousness, but some valuable works
appeared. Now that the very idea of a film literature is established, we can anticipate a steady flow of books - biographies,
histories, and criticism, which will always include the theoretical vogue of the moment. Since the cultivated person no longer
ignores the treasury of film that is part of our artistic legacy, such a person can increase his or her appreciation of that treasury
by judicious reading. Here are some primary suggestions.
On the screen man is no longer the focus of the drama, but will become eventually the centre of the universe.
Ai rn E BAZ1N
What is Cinema? (1967) by Andre Bazin and others. Exceptional perception and exceptional commitment to the artistic and
spiritual possibilities of film.
Bergman on Bergman (1973) by Stig Bjorkman, Torsten Manus, and Jonas Sima. Three Swedish film critics interview Ingmar
Bergman on his entire career to date. The result is more than a director's biography, it is the summation of a life in an.
Notes on Cinematography (1977) by Robert Bresson. A great director's wisdom, enlightening and, quite often, thrilling.
Film Form and Film Sense (1957) by Sergei Eisenstein. These two books, here in one volume, are cornerstone works in any
serious study of the subject.
The Movies as Medium (1970) edited by Lewis Jacobs. A highly useful conspectus of practical and aesthetic problems.
The Film Encyclopedia (1994) by Ephraim Katz. By far the best one-volume job. Imperfect, like all one-volume encyclopedias
on any subject, but still inexhaustibly useful.
American Film Criticism: From the Beginnings to Citizen Kane (1972) edited by Stanley Kauffmann and Bruce Henstell.
Reviews of significant American and foreign films at the time of their first appearance in the USA. A chronicle and a
commentary.
The Phantom Empire (1993) by Geoffrey O'Brien. A poetic exploration of our conscious and unconscious, our waking lives
and our dreams, after the first 100 years of film's existence.
Film History: An Introduction (1994) by Kristin Thompson and David Bordwell. The best one-volume world history. See my
comments on Katz.
Stage to Screen (1949) by A Nicholas Vardac. A vivid account of the growth of the cinematic impulse through the 19th-century
popular theatre until the flowering of the film itself.
Food and Drink
The literature of food and drink is extensive, often excellent, and notable for its relaxed, unflurried tone: the rhythms of the
kitchen, the maturing pace of the cellar, blended in prose. This list includes technical manuals, historical and sociological
monographs, works of philosophy and even ethics—but all of them (perhaps because their subject is of universal interest,
universal experience) have an openhanded accessibility not present in the specialist literature of other subjects. Food and drink
may be complex matters; but they are also, these books tell us, first and foremost fun. Censors beware! Even Plato approved of
the "drinking-bout" as a social lubricant.
See HOME (Grieve)
Brillat-Sayarin, Jean-Anthelme de The Physiology of Taste (1826) World-famous dissertation on gastronomy by non-
practising cook. Mouthwatering entertainment. Good translation by M. F. K. Fisher (qv).
Carrier, Robert Great Dishes of the World (1963) .1/ Cooking as show-biz. Carrier's sensuous delight in food is the book's
main charm. Also: The Robert Carrier Cookbook; Cooking for You; Entertaining
Chang, Kwang-Chih (ed) Food in Chinese Cultures: Anthropological and Historical Perspectives(1 977) 9
Scholarly, academic survey of one of the world's greatest cuisines. A long way from the barbecued spare ribs or the bland chop-
suey of the West See ARCHAEOLOGY
David, Elizabeth French Provincial Cooking (1960) a Perhaps the most influential cookery book published in Britain since
World War II. Careful historical reference enlivened by anecdote and literary references and strengthened by clear personal
experience. Fine clear recipes, though timings and liquid contents are sometimes idiosyncratic. Also: Italian Food; English
Bread and Yeast Cookery; Summer Cooking, etc
Davidson, Alan Mediterranean Seafood (1972) 1$ a lir Catalogue of all edible Mediterranean fish, illustrated and
described with alternative names in up to eight languages. Splendid recipes. Also: North Atlantic Seafood
Guerard, Michel Cuisine Minceur(1976) 0 * Top French chef is overweight; grated carrot makes him cry; so he evolves a
method of cooking which rejects fat and carbohydrates but embraces the discipline and style of haute cuisine. Result: a
fashionable classic, neither economical nor austere. Also: Cuisine Gourmande
Montague, Prosper (ed) Larousse Gastronomique (1938) (Ia * 5 Outstanding alphabetical encyclopaedia of world food, drink
and everything to do with the kitchen, kitchen-garden or dining-room.
Rombauer, I. S. and Becker, M. R. The Joy of Cooking (1931) One of the best-selling cookery books of all time, and
deservedly so. Organized by general categories of food preparation, with basic advice followed by specific recipes—mostly
good. Excellent for the beginner but also of value to experienced cooks as well, who appreciate its no-nonsense approach. If
you buy only one book, this should be it.
Simon, Andre L. The Noble Grapes and the Great Wines of France (1960) _I
One of the first "coffee-table" wine books, and also first to stress the importance of grape varieties. Also: Bottlescrew Days;
Table of Content, Dictionary of Gastronomy, etc
Geography is a definitive and descriptive discipline, with procedures as precise and objective as those of any other science, and
a specialist literature to match. But it is also, in its critical and speculative form, of crucial relevance to our whole view of the
world around us—a wide subject, shading into anthropology, history, politics and sociology. This aspect (concern for our world
and what we make of it) is of urgent interest today—and this list, therefore, includes books on the "new" geography as well as
those reflecting the older, more segmented scientific discipline.
See ARCHITECTURE (Clifton-Taylor, Giedion, Le Corbusier, Gropius, Mumford, Newman, Venturi); MATHEMATICS
(Moore, R., Pough); NATURAL HISTORY (Dorst, Huth, Sears); OCCULT (Jenkins); SOCIOLOGY (Raban, Willmott)
Abrams, C. Man's Struggle for Shelter in an Urbanizing World (1964) Searching examination of housing problems in the
Third World; pulls no punches.
Arvill, R. Man and Environment: Crisis and the Strategy of Choice (1967) 9 I'
Berry. B. J. L. The Human Consequences of Urbanization (1973) Global survey, highlighting the contrast in experience
between Western and Third Worlds. See ARCHITECTURE (Mumford)
Cole, J. P. A Geography of World Affairs (1979) Oa World "political geography" showing the distributional aspects of man's
political activity and the constraints of location and environment.
Davies, W. K. D. The Conceptual Revolution in Geography (1972) a Excellent essays on new directions in geography.
Guttman, Jean Megalopolis: The Urbanized Northeastern Seaboard of the United States (1961)
Classic study helped to popularize a new word as well as a new idea—that it was, or shortly would be, but one city all the way
from Portland, Maine, to Newport News, Virginia. See Tunnard.
Hartshorne, Richard Perspective on the Nature of Geography (1959) Concise and readable account of the classical
idiographic and regional approach (temporarily?) set aside by contemporary ideas. Highly recommended.
Jacobs, Jane The Death and Life of Great American Cities (1961) Non-statistical, common-sense approach to urban problems
and planning; the author believes that living in cities should be fun—and can be again, given the right approach. See Morgan;
ARCHITECTURE (Banham)
James, E. Preston All Possible Worlds: A History of Geographical Ideas (1972) P Jordan, Terry The European Culture Area
(1973)
Systematic approach to the human geography of Western Europe; emphasis on demographic, economic and cultural elements.
Morgan, Elaine Falling Apart: The Rise and Decline of Urban Civilization (1976)
English equivalent of Jacobs (qv); but more entertaining and of wider scope.
Sauer, Carl O. Agricultural Origins and Dispersals: The Domestication of Animals and Foodstuffs (1.952)
Lively, challenging book, worldwide in scope, on the overlap of geology with anthropology, history and archaeology.
Scientific American Cities: Their Origin, Growth and Human Impact (1973)
Succinct essays on city origins, health, transport, squatting, etc.
Thomas, W. L. (ed) Man's Role in Changing the Face of the Earth (1956)
Essays on the interaction of culture and environment. Book covers immense historical and regional field. See Hoskins.
GEOGRAPHY
Simon Ross
Geography is all around us, whether it be the built world of cities, motorways, and industry or the natural world of deserts,
beaches, and tropical forests. With the recent growth of the environmental movement and concerns about global poverty and
famine, natural disasters and climate change, geography has become much more issue-based than it used to be, although it still
retains the important qualities of inquisitiveness, sensitivity, and sheer wonder and excitement which are at the heart of
geographical study. The Earth is a fascinating, diverse, yet very vulnerable and fragile place and only through the careful
understanding and management of its peoples and resources will it retain its character and support the generations to come.
This is the very essence of geography and it therefore comes as no surprise that the subject has witnessed a tremendous boom
in popularity and status in both school and university.
My journey around the world gave me a sense of global scale, of the size and
variety of this great planet, and of the relation of one country and one culture to
another which few people experience and many ought to.
MICHAEL PALIN
The Gaia Atlas of Planet Management (1985; new edition 1994) by Norman Myers. There are many atlases and reference
books on the market today but there are few that are as informative and lavishly illustrated as this. It is intelligent and thought-
provoking and there are many excellent thematic maps and colour photographs. It is divided into several sections including the
land, the oceans, the elements, evolution, and civilization. I strongly recommend this book for all those with an interest and
concern for the issues affecting the future of our planet.
Around the World in 80 Days (1989) by Michael Palin. An extremely readable, amusing, and, in places, poignant account of
the author's attempt to follow in the foot-steps of Phileas Fogg. Superbly illustrated and divided into bite-size pieces, it makes
an excellent escapist's bedtime read for dark winter nights.
Quest for Adventure (1981) by Chris Bonington. This wonderful book, dedicated to some of the world's greatest adventurers,
is superbly written and well illustrated. It trans-ports the reader into territories that the ordinary person can only dream about
and sets the imagination racing. Among the adventures described are the Kon-Tiki voyage, the flight of Apollo 11, the scaling
of Mount Everest, and the crossing of Antarctica.
Maps and Map-Makers (1987) by R V Tooley. Maps have always been at the heart of geography and they are also extremely
collectable antiques, being attractive to look at and holding their value well. This book forms an excellent introduction to maps
and the cartographers that painstakingly produced them and it will probably whet the appetite for seeking out some originals in
second-hand bookshops.
How to Shit in the Woods (1989) by Kathleen Meyer, This is an extremely amusing paperback which will bring a wry smile to
all those who have been camping or back-packing in the bush. There is, however, a serious side to this American book: `No
longer can we drink even a drop [of mountain water] before purifying it without running the risk of getting sick.'
Restless Earth (1972) by Nigel Calder. This book represented something of a land-mark in being one of the fast general
readers (it accompanied a television series) to examine the role of the newly forming concept of plate tectonics in accounting
for the major physical features of the Earth's surface. It is superbly illustrated and is still highly regarded today.
Human Geography: Evolution or Revolution? (1975) by Michael Chisholm. In the 1960s and 1970s there were a number of
important developments and innovations in the nature of geography and Professor Michael Chisholm attempted to make some
sense of the changes. `The primary purpose in writing is to convey an account of the direction and purpose of recent changes in
human geography as conceived by some-one fairly close to the scene.' Chisholm's book is a fascinating read for it traces the
history of the subject to the mid-1970s and attempts to look ahead into what was then regarded as a very uncertain future.
Discovering Landscape (1985) by Andrew Goudie and Rita Gardner. This book aims to 'discover and try to explain some of
the most appealing features of the natural landscape'. It is a splendid book for all those with an inquisitive mind who want to
know a bit more about the history and geology of well-known British sites such as Helvellyn, Lulworth Cove, and Cheddar
Gorge.
Disasters (1980) by John Whittow. This fascinating book looks at the causes and effects of the major natural hazards such as
earthquakes, landslides, and floods, writ-ten by a very well-respected author. It contains some amazing and often chilling eye-
witness accounts.
Geology and Scenery in England and Wales (1971) by A E Trueman. For those with an interest in the geological
development of particular landscapes in England and Wales such as the West Country moors, the Cotswolds, or the Lake
District, this is a must for it is both informative and highly readable.
Inside the Third World (1979) by Paul Harrison. This powerful and thought-provoking book is highly recommended for all
those who have an interest in the Third World. As a freelance journalist Paul Harrison travelled extensively, particularly in
Africa, and this book describes his many experiences in the general field of development. It contains some marvellous and
often highly moving descriptive passages of landscapes and people.
History
History is an important branch of belles lettres, offering a writer the combined attractions of freedom of interpretation and a
supposedly factual armature. When the balance between these elements is right, the results for the reader can be thrilling and
compelling—for by taking in the parcelled past we take in something of ourselves as well. History cannot teach us prescriptive
lessons about action, since each conjunction of character and circumstance is unique; its function is rather a moral one, offering
us a mirror in which to see ourselves. To do this, we need a clear presentation of the facts combined with a critical overview
which takes account of the writer's and reader's present as well as of the delineated past. The books in this list (a necessarily
brief selection with no attempt at chronological completeness) have been chosen for just these qualities—and because, in many
cases, they offer the pleasures of wit and style as well.
American History
There are two notable characteristics of these books—perhaps they reflect characteristics of the American nation at large. The
first is an urgent, philosophical, ideological approach to the creation of a just society; the second is a powerful antithesis
between town and country, with its corollary, a species of romantic nostalgia for rural innocence.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Agee); ARCHAEOLOGY (Hume); AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Adams, Franklin. Grant, Malcolm X,
Miller): BIOGRAPHY (Flexner, Freeman, Parkman, Sandburg, Van Doren, Wall); DIARIES (Lincoln); FEMINISM (Flexner);
HISTORY/ASIAN (Fitzgerald); POLITICS (Acheson. Piven. Woodward. B.. Woodward, C. Vann): SOCIOLOGY (Lewis,
Lynd, Riesman)
Aaron, Daniel Men of Good Hope: A Story of American Progressives (1950)
Graceful biographical essays on assorted radicals, reformers and utopians (Henry George, Thorstein Veblen, Teddy Roosevelt,
etc) by a literary historian with no discernible axe to erind. Also: Writers on the Left: Episodes in American Literary
Communism; The Unwritten War: American Writers and the Civil War
Adams, Henry History of the United States during the Administrations of Thomas Jefferson and James Madison (4 vols, 1889-
91)
Comparable in every respect to Macaulay's great Whig history of England in the later 17th century, this is possibly the best
single work by an American historian. Its vast scope is too much for many people; the fascinating first six chapters of volume I
are separately collected in The United States in 1800. Also: The Degradation of the Democratic Dogma. See
AUTOBIOGRAPHY; HISTORY/BRITISH (Macaulay); RELIGION
Beard. C., M. and W. The Beards' New Basic History of the United States (1960) it a Beards'-eye view of North
American history, from the arrival of the Norsemen in the 11th century to the launching of the first US spy satellite in 1960.
Quick-moving, sometimes glib (and a settlers' view: indigenous Americans systematically ignored); but a useful general
perspective of the flow of events.
Berger, Raoul Impeachment: The Constitutional Problems (1973) To many observers, the events culminating in the
impeachment of Richard M. Nixon are some of the most crucial in American post-war constitutional history. This book (date of
publication uncannily apt) is a judicious examination of the historical and legal issues. Also: Executive Privilege: A
Constitutional Myth
Bridenbaugh, Carl The Beginnings of the American People: Vexed and Troubled Englishmen. 1590- 1642(1968)
Brilliant portraits of life in late Tudor and Stuart England, with emphasis on the reasons—economic, religious, political—why
emigration to North America became a powerfully attractive prospect. Also: Mitre and Sceptre, etc
Brown, Dee Bury My Heart at Wounded Knee (1971) * The near-annihilation of the American Indian. A shaming
book: white behaviour depicted as almost uniformly dark. Also: Hear That Lonesome Whistle Blow
Commager, Henry Steele Britain through American Eyes (1974) i * Acerbic anthology of American reactions to the mother
country from 1778 to 1948. What an arrogant, stuffy lot the British were! Also: The American Mind
Fredrickson, George M. The Black Image in the White Mind (1971) White attitudes—callous, condescending, sometimes
philanthropic, occasionally admirable—to black Americans, 1814-1917. Written in excellent clean prose. See Genovese;
Jordan.
Genovese, Eugene Roll, Jordan, Roll: The World the Slaves Made (1975) 1$
Huge, imaginative study not of what was done for or to slaves but of their own efforts to preserve sanity and dignity, and of
slaveowners who were not always monsters. Also: The World the Slaveholders Made. See Fredrickson; Jordan.
Higham, John Strangers in the Land: Patterns of American Nativism, 1860- 1925 (1955)
Dispassionate analysis of the resentments and misgivings of native-born Americans in the face of large-scale immigration.
Josephy, Alvin M., Jr. The Indian Heritage of America (1968) * 1 f Comprehensive survey of the Indian cultures of North and
South America; brief, savage final chapters on the arrival of the whites. Essential background to Brown (qv). See
MYTHOLOGY (Burland)
Kammen, Michael People of Paradox: An Inquiry Concerning the Origins of American Civilization (1972) * f Kammen, a
colonial historian, argues that from the outset the Americans were confronted with dual systems of authority and belief—those
of the Old World and the New. He carries the theme toward our own time, maintaining that Americans have become addicted to
dualisms. Witty, resourceful and provocative. Also: A Rope of Sand: The Colonial Agents, British Politics and the American
Revolution; A Season of Youth: The American Revolution and the Historical Imagination
Kolko, Gabriel Main Currents in Modern American History (1976) 9* Occasionally doctrinaire, but very good on class,
economic structure and foreign policy since about 1870. Also: The Triumph of Conservatism. 1900-1916; Railroads and
Regulation, 1877-1916
Kraditor, Aileen S. The Ideas of the Women's Suffrage Movement, 1890- 1920(1965)
Also: Up from the Pedestal: Selected Writings in the History of American Feminism. See FEMINISM (Flexner)
Miller, Perry The New England Mind: From Colony to Province (1953) 0 9*
Miller did as much as anyone to rescue Puritanism from the caricatures of Mencken and others. A historian of ideas, he
revealed the power and profundity of Puritan theology—and in this book, the retreat of the Church (up to about 1730) in the
face of New England secularism. Also: The New England Mind: The Seventeenth Century; Errand into the Wilderness: The
Life of the Mind in America, from the Revolution to the Civil War, etc
Morgan, Edmund S. The Puritan Dilemma: The Story of John Winthrop (1958)
Economical, vivid biography of the Suffolk gentleman-lawyer and Puritan churchman who sailed for the New World in 1630 to
become the first Governor of the Massachusetts Bay colony. Also: The Stamp Act Crisis; The Puritan Family Morison, S. E.
Oxford History of the American People (1965) Controversial, idiosyncratic, fascinating history of America by the dean of New
England historians. One of the two or three best single-volume histories—much more fun than Beard's (qv) for example. See
BIOGRAPHY; TRAVEL
Peterson, Merrill The Jefferson Image in the American Mind (1960) This book traces the ups and downs of the great man's
reputation since his death in 1826.
Schlesinger, Arthur M., Jr. The Imperial Presidency (1973) 9 Tends to blame Republican incumbents for creating the
"runaway" presidency, and to be kinder to Democrats. Yet abundantly documented, lucid and incisive. Also: The Age of
Jackson; The Age of Roosevelt; Robert Kennedy and His Times
Smith, Henry Nash Virgin Land: The American West as Symbol and Myth (1950) *
Still one of the best attempts to portray America, and the West in particular, as a state of mind or set of ideas (a passage to
India, a desert, a land for farmers, a back-drop for dime-novel heroics). Excellent use of imaginative literature. See Slotkin;
Turner.
Bernard Bailyn, whose historical work centers on the history of the colonies, the American Revolution and the Anglo-
American world in the preindustrial era, is the Adams University Professor at Harvard University and director of the Charles
Warren Center for Studies in American History. He has written extensively in his field and was awarded the Pulitzer Prize in
1968 for The Ideological Origin of the American Revolution. He has taught at Harvard since 1949.
David Thomson. Woodbrook (1974). New York: Irish Book Center, 1981. (Pb)
A profoundly moving memoir of a young English historian's love affair with Ireland and with his young Irish tutee. It is a
perfect merging of personal experience and historical awareness, beautifully written. It explains the Anglo-Irish tragedy better
than any book I know, and shows history to be a living force.
Thomas Mann. Doctor Faustus: The Life of the German Composer, Adrian Leverkahn, as Told by a Friend (1947).
H. T. Lowe-Porter, trans. New York: Random House, 1971.
A brilliant commentary, in fictional form, on German culture—its great achievements and deadly disease. Beyond all the
learning and speculation in the book, it is wonderfully inventive, simply as fiction.
Ernest Jones. The Life and Work of Sigmund Freud (1953-57). 3 vols. New York: Basic Books, 1961. (Pb)
I read this as something of a morality tale of the heroic achievements of one of the most creative minds in the history of
Western culture. It is told as a triumph of sheer genius and creativity over all sorts of adversity. And it happens to be true.
William Faulkner. Absalom! Absalom! (1936). New York: Random House, 1972. (Pb)
This dark, multigenerational saga of Southern life, woven in an elaborate narrative structure, swept me along by its wildly
imaginative storytelling. And then I discovered that there are real historical models for most of the major figures, especially the
mysterious Colonel Sutpen. It is soaring fiction and weirdly perceptive history at the same time.
William Trevor. The Stories of William Trevor. New York: Penguin, 1983. (Pb)
These are the best contemporary short stories I know: deadly bullets, all of them, piercing some sensitive area of common
experience.
Virginia Woolf. The Letters of Virginia Woolf. Nigel Nicolson, ed. 6 vols. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 197580.
The sheer verbal skill in these dashed-off letters is superb —and they are marvelously perceptive and penetrating. So are her
Diaries.
Alan Brinkley
Alan Brinkley is the Dunwalke Associate Professor of American History at Harvard, specializing in twentieth-century
American history. His attention focuses on the Depression, the Neu) Deal, and the American South, His work Voices of Protest:
Huey Long, Father Coughlin, and the Great Depression won the American Book Award in 1982. He will soon publish The
Transformation of New Deal Liberalism.
William Faulkner. Absalom! Absalom! (1936). New York: Random House, 1972. (Pb)
When I try to think of books that have given me particular pleasure and that have affected me in particularly important ways, I
think first of William Faulkner's Absalom! Absalom! (1936), which I have always considered one of the greatest of all
American novels, a work I've read and reread with constantly increasing admiration. Long before I became a historian, I loved
this book for its remarkable depth and complexity and its enormous passion and excitement. Eventually, however, I came to see
in this novel some compelling justifications for my own interest in the past. It succeeds better than any work I know in
revealing how history can operate as a living force in the lives of men and women.
Robert Penn Warren. All the King's Men (1946). New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1982.
For many of the same reasons, I'm greatly attached to Robert Penn Warren's All the King's Men. It's a novel principally
concerned with individuals and their pasts; and it too reveals how history defines (and often burdens) us in dealing with the
present. But it's also a novel about politics, and few works of literature convey as clearly the elemental forces that politics can
at times unleash.
Mark Twain. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884). New York: Harper & Row, 1984. (Pb)
For somewhat different reasons, I think of Huckleberry Finn, the greatest of Twain's works and in my opinion the greatest
American literary achievement of its, and perhaps any, era. Huckleberry Finn reveals more about nineteenth-century America
than any work I know. And yet it also displays a moral sensibility that resonates clearly with the values and beliefs of our own
era.
Richard Hofstadter. The Age of Reform; From Bryan to F.D.R. New York: Knopf, 1955.
Richard Hofstadter's The Age of Reform is a work with which I for the most part profoundly disagree. But it has also always
been a model to me of literate, bold, and imaginative historical inquiry. It's a reminder to professional historians of how
scholarship can move beyond the narrow, specialized bounds we impose on ourselves and make itself of interest and
importance to a larger world.
Graham Swift. Waterland: A Novel (1983). New York: Simon & Schuster, 1984.
Among very recent works, I'm particularly fond of Waterland, a novel by a young English writer named Graham Swift. Like
Absalom! Absalom! and All the King's Men, Waterland is not only a "story," but a "history," an exploration of how families
struggle with the burdens of their own pasts. It's also a wonderfully entertaining and absorbing mystery of great sophistication
and complexity.
John R. Stilgoe
Author of Common Landscape of America, 1580 to 1845, Metropolitan Corridor: Railroads and the American Scene and a
forthcoming book on American suburbs, John R. Stilgoe teaches the analysis of landscapes at Harvard's Graduate School of
Design. He farms as an avocation.
These five books introduce five scales of space—from the Mediterranean basin to an obscure New England farm—and offer a
feast of perceptual biases and techniques: whatever the challenges of the next century, the delight that so often accompanies
disciplined scrutiny of the physical environment will continue to hearten alert travelers and readers, and perhaps make the
challenges less daunting.
Fernand Braudel. The Mediterranean and the Mediterranean World in the Age of Philip II (1949). Sian Reynolds, trans. New
York: Harper & Row, 1976. (Pb)
One of the few genuinely masterful works of modern geographical-historical writing, Braudel's fourteen-hundred-page
Mediterranean defines a region ecologically (from the southern limits of the date palm to the northern limits of the olive tree)
and culturally (from the Arab east and south to the Catholic north and west), demonstrating in intricate detail the complex and
fragile interaction of physical environment and human effort in one moment of time past. No recent work better displays the
sumptuous richness of meanings implicit in the word region.
Henry James. The American Scene (1907). Leon Edel, ed. Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1968. (Pb)
Written after a self-imposed absence of some two decades, The American Scene is James's nonfiction account of stupendous
change in the landscape and life of the eastern United States, change best designated as "modernization" perhaps, but certainly
change that no participant—and no foreign visitor—perceived so crisply. James left an essentially agricultural nation and
returned to one urban, industrialized, and ensnared in mechanized haste; high-speed trains, rural trolley cars and motorcars had
changed forever the traveler's perception of landscape, foreshortening distances, twisting angles of vision and blurring detail,
making the whole visual environment a sort of scene.
Timothy Dwight. Travels in New England and New-York (1821-22). 4 vols.. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1969.
At the close of the eighteenth century, the president of Yale College began riding horseback (and later by chaise) through the
northeastern part of the new Republic. His Travels details not only thousands of landscape constituents—everything from the
texture of soil to the shape of bridges to the color of meetinghouses—along his winding routes, but interprets the landscape
emerging from wilderness as the emblem of distinctly American virtues—order, simplicity, individualism, self-reliance. His
volumes offer a glimpse of slow, self-paced, methodical wandering and a wealth of insight into the cultural baggage any
observer of landscape and customs brings to a region, and particularly to his own.
Henry David Thoreau. Cape Cod (1865). New York: Thomas Y. Crowell, 1972. (Pb)
As Thoreau walked the edge of the land, he found real wilderness, a spray-soaked zone of eroding sand, shipwreck, packs of
wild dogs, sharks and people inured to assaults by wind, tide and surf, a zone that disconcerted the lover of Concord woodlots
and fields. Cape Cod grapples with the concept of the margin, the amorphous zone neither wholly landscape nor wholly sea.
There Thoreau encountered the edge of fear, the awesome recognition that tiny Cape Cod thrusts into an alien element, an
element so powerful that it shapes not only Cape Cod landscape, but Cape Cod life, Cape Cod unmasks the Thoreau disguised
in Walden, reveals the incredible fragility of a small land continuously besieged, and rams home the terrible intimacy of the
walker exploring alien space.
Donald Hall. String Too Short to Be Saved (1961). Boston: David R. Godine, 1979. (Pb)
A New Hampshire hill farm in the Depression and the early years of World War II forms the setting for autobiographical
memory. But more than memory suffuses this brilliant book. Hall inquires deeply into the love of a farmer for his farm and its
neighborhood, the love for individual rocks and blueberry plantings, for old cellar holes and hay fields, for neighbors as
individuals; and he scrutinizes the survival of nineteenth-century (and earlier) agricultural techniques and attitudes into the
twentieth century. On the slopes of Ragged Mountain endure an earlier landscape and an earlier way of living almost wholly
isolated from the world-shaking events far off in cities, in Europe, in the Pacific. Stewardship. simplicity, forbearance,
compassion—such are the virtues manifested in the fields and buildings city folk scorn as scrubby, rundown, or old-fashioned
as their automobiles race past.
The Worlds of Christopher Columbus W.D. and C.R. Phillips Small Earth
Columbus F. Fernandez-Armesto Small Earth
The Invention of America E. O'Gorman Small Earth
The Columbian Exchange A.W. Crosby Small Earth
Ancient History
The predominance of Greek and especially Roman topics reflects, perhaps, a consistent Western preoccupation with cultural
and social origins. But there are good representative books on the other principal ancient civilizations too.
See ARCHAEOLOGY (Chadwick, Clark, Cottrell, Hume. Mackendrick); ARCHITECTURE (Boethius, Lawrence, Vitruvius);
AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Caesar); BIOGRAPHY (Plutarch); DIARIES (Cicero, Pliny, Seneca); FEMINISM (Pomeroy); FOOD
(Apicius): HISTORY/ASIAN (Barham, Eberhard, Hall. Hambly); HISTORY/LATIN AMERICAN (Katz); LITERARY
CRITICISM (High-et); MATHEMATICS (Lindsay); MYTHOLOGY (Harrison, Kirk); POLITICS (Aristotle, Plato); TRAVEL
(Pausanias)
Heyden, A. A. M. and Scullard, H. II. Atlas of the Ancient World (1955) a*J
Not just maps, but hundreds of splendid photographs and a well-written, informative text. Introduces classical history and
culture as well as geography.
Mellersh, H. E. L. Chronology of the Ancient World (1976) Magnificently simple: chronology of events from 10,000 BC to
AD 799. Covers every available area of civilization; endlessly fascinating cross-parallels.
Rostovtzeff, M. The Social and Economic History of the Hellenistic World (1941)
Planned originally as a "short survey", this monumental work is the classic treatment of one of the most important periods of
Greek history. Also: Social and Economic History of the Roman Empire
Thucydides History of the Peloponnesian War (5th century BC) Thucydides' work (perhaps the first-ever "scientific history")
is idiosyncratic in its selection and treatment of material, and in style. Fascinating chiefly for intelligent discussion of some of
the philosophical problems thrown up by history: the purpose of historiography itself, the sources of political power, the
problems of empire, and the reasons for decline and defeat. Good translation: Crawley.
Franklin Ford
Franklin Ford is Harvard's McLean Professor of Ancient and Modern History, respected for his work in modern French and
German history. His research interest in the history of murder and tyrannicide culminated in the recent book Political Murder.
He is a former dean of the Faculty of Arts and Sciences.
My selection, as you will see, is highly personal. They are all favorites of mine, in part because each of them has helped me to
think in the present, about the past, with some hope of making more sense of the rest of the time continuum: the part that still
stretches ahead.
A fuller understanding of humanity, including its gropings and errors, but also its achievements and flashes of greatness, is
what I take to be one of the historian's primary goals. It must also be a goal of anyone who thinks seriously about dangers and
opportunities, some of which are already urgent realities while others require imagination to discern even as serious
possibilities. My choice of works that seem "historical" in the best, because extended, sense will no doubt surprise some
readers; but so may the contents of the works themselves, when seen in that light.
Garrett Mattingly. The Armada (1959). Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1984. (Pb)
Mark Twain. The Comic Mark Twain Reader. Charles Neider, ed. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1977.
George Otto Trevelyan. The Early History of Charles James Fox (1880). New York: AMS Press, 1971.
Max Weber. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology (1946). H. H. Gerth and C. Wright Mills, eds. and trans. New York:
Oxford University Press, 1979. (Pb)
Anatole France. The Gods Will Have Blood (Les dieux ont soy) (1912). Frederick Davies, trans. New York: Penguin, 1979.
(Pb)
Karl Polanyi. The Great Transformation (1944). Boston: Beacon, 1985.
Michael Shaara. The Killer Angels (1974). New York: Ballantine, 1975. (Pb)
Sybille Bedford. A Legacy (1956). New York: Echo Press, 1976. (Pb)
Felix Gilbert. Machiavelli and Guicciardini (1965). New York: W. W. Norton, 1984. (Pb)
T. H. White. The Once and Future King (1958). New York: Putnam, 1958.
Thucydides. History of the Peloponnesian War (ca. 431-404 B.C.). Richard Livingstone, ed. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1960. (Pb)
Robert Nisbet. Prejudices: A Philosophical Dictionary (1982). Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1983.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE
Graham Ley
Classical literature now commands greater attention than ever before, with good-quality translations of a large number of
ancient authors prompting a wide readership to explore the origins of a European tradition. Recent approaches to epic, drama,
lyric poetry, the novel, and the prose genres of historiography and rhetoric have drawn on developments in contemporary
literary criticism and theory, and have tended to integrate social with purely formal considerations. Partly as a result of this
expansion in interest, it is now easier to find accessible works on individual authors than the kind of broad introduction that
was popular a generation or so ago. But most translations now include an up-to-date introduction and some useful suggestions
for further, critical reading.
A poet is a light, winged, holy creature, and cannot compose until he is possessed
and out of his mind, and his reason is no longer in him; no man can
compose or prophesy so long as he has his reason.
PLATO ION
The Cambridge History of Classical Literature (1983) edited by E J Kenney and. W V Clauseh. A series of introductions by
literary specialists to the full range of Greek and Latin literature in antiquity. Available in sections devoted to particular genres
and subjects.
The Oxford History of the Classical World (1988) edited by John Boardman. An illustrated compendium of introductions to
ancient literature, an, history, and culture by specialist authors, with each chapter carrying suggestions for further reading.
The Pelican History of Greek Literature (1985) by Peter Levi. A good general introduction by a Greek scholar who is also a
poet.
A Short History of Greek Literature (1985) by Jacqueline de Romilly. A translation of an introduction by one of the most
sensitive critics of Greek tragedy.
Ancient Greek Literature (1981) edited by Kenneth Dover. A selection of helpful introductions to major genres and authors.
Roman Literature and Society (1980) by Robert Ogilvie. A good, contextual introduction for the student or general reader.
The Latin Love Poets from Catullus to Ovid (1980) by R Lyne. An outstanding study of a major tradition in Latin poetry of
the later republic and early principate.
Virgil (1986) by Jasper Griffin. An accessible introduction to the leading national and ideological poet of the Augustan era.
The series of translations in Penguin Classics offers many of the ancient authors in separate volumes. Two anthologies of
translated selections, Greek Literature (1977) and Latin Literature (1979), both prepared by Michael Grant, may be helpful in
providing an impression of the range available.
Asian, African and Middle Eastern History
Many areas of the world are sparsely represented on library shelves—West Africa and Australasia, for example, offer few
satisfactory comprehensive histories. Other areas, especially in the Third World, are evolving so quickly that modern histories
are obsolete before they even reach the shelves. The books suggested here, therefore, are a very broad sweep: without claims to
comprehensive or final coverage, they make at least a start.
See AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Gandhi); BIOGRAPHY (Howarth); DIARIES (Stanley); ECONOMICS (Myrdal); POLITICS
(Cabral, Hinton); RELIGION (Guillaume); TRAVEL (Kingsley, Lawrence, T. E., Maclean, Polo, Ronay, Roy)
Ajayi, J. F. Ade A Thousand Years of West African History (1966) MI Serious, dependable synoptic history of Africa; important
and eye-opening. Allen, Charles (ed) Plain Tales from the Raj (1975) fi a * Book originated in a series of radio interviews
with fifty surviving administrators of colonial India. Extraordinary detail of extraordinary daily lives: coping with high collars,
rigid etiquette, recalcitrant natives, the Edwardian British at their dotty, pragmatic best.
Anene, J. C. and Brown, G. (eds) Africa in the 19th and 20th Centuries (1966)
Collection of research findings and other scholarly writings; bitty and unsystematic; but individual papers are illuminating,
authoritative. See Ajayi; Thompson.
Basham, A. L. The Wonder That Was India (1954) it a* Catchpenny title; magnificent book. Fat (600 pages),
comprehensive, badged in every sentence with the author's zest for his subject. Covers the ancient history of India from 3000
BC to the coming of Muslims in AD 1565. Particularly strong on culture and social life. Usefully read in connection with
Nehru (qv).
Beasley, W. G. The Modern History of Japan (1963) 0 Excellent volume in recommended Asia-Africa series. Traces Japanese
affairs from its opening to the West in the mid 19th century to the amazing first fruits of the economic boom after World War II.
Annotated bibliography particularly useful. Also: Great Britain and the Opening of Japan. See Bergamini.
Irving, Clive Crossroads of Civilization (1979) a ./ Journalistic survey of Persian history from earliest times to 1939.
Continuing, blood-soaked saga of modern Iran starts here. See HISTORY/ANCIENT (Huart)
Nehru, Jawaharlal The Discovery of India (1951) * Passionate, partisan, personal; "history" of India written "in Ahmadnagar
Fort prison during the five months April to September 1944". History as advertising copy: the nation pulses with life before
your eyes. Those who prefer a more objective view—and those whom Nehru excites to read further—are referred to Basham
(qv).
Sadler, A. H. L. A Short History of Japan (1963) a Earliest times to 1951; the flow of events is charted with brisk clarity.
Usefully read in conjunction with Beasley (qv).
Stanley, R. and Neame, A. (eds) The Exploration Diaries of H. M. Stanley (1961) 4*f
Suyin, Han The Morning Deluge (1972): The Wind in the Tower (1976)
Massive two-volume biography of Mao; subtitle (Mao Tse Tung and the Chinese Revolution, 1893 - 1975) tells all. See Snow.
Wilson, M. and Thompson, L. (eds) The Oxford History of South Africa (2 vols, 1969-71) P
Exhaustive account, particularly good on indigenous cultures. Donnish objectivity is a welcome corrective to the partisan
approach of many writers on this subject.
This collection of texts problematizes and engages with the category of `Third World' writing, allowing for an informed critical
focus. The texts vary from a direct analysis of a range of Third World literatures to a more theoretical or political discussion of
prevalent themes, issues, histories. The texts examine debates around language, history, gender, often exploring how issues of
self-determination and independence affect the analyses of literary criticism.
Myth, Literature and the African World (1976) by Wole Soyinka. This text interrogates the definition, both of African
literature and of Africa, engaging directly with a range of literary texts from Africa and contextualizing their meanings and
aesthetic value within a conception of Africa as a distinct mythic and philosophical whole.
Decolonising the Mind (1986) by Ngugi wa Thiong'o. This text presents a polemic against colonial domination and the
prevalence of colonial languages in African literatures. A major touchstone for political readings of African literatures.
The Empire Writes Back (1989) by Ashcroft, Griffiths, and Tiffin. This text defines the field of `Third World literature' as
`postcolonial', and presents a survey of the major issues and complexities which currently dominate literary critical analysis in
this area.
The Wretched of the Earth (1961; translated 1963) by Frantz Fanon. This French text is rightly called an enduring classic.
Dealing with the effects of colonialism on the identity and economics of the Third World, Fanon's argument insists on the
relevance of political resistance to literature and its criticism.
African Literature and African Critics (1988) by Rand Bishop. This text discusses a history of African literary criticism,
dealing with contested issues of cultural appropriation, linguistic determination, and literary value.
Chinua Achebe (1990) by C L Inns. This careful analysis of Achebe's novels and their significance usefully contextualizes his
work and provides thorough readings of the narratives.
Reading the African Novel (1987) by Simon Gikandi. A very useful reading of African literatures, both anglophone and
francophone, with close analysis, comparative work, and insightful argument.
Manichean Aesthetics (1983) by Abdul R Janmohamed. A well-argued and interesting polemic on the theory and analysis of
African literatures, examining a range of African literatures and literatures about Africa.
Motherlands (1991) edited by Nasta Susheila. A collection of essays on women's writing from the Caribbean, Africa, and S
Asia.
Colonial Discourse and Post-Colonial Theory (1993) edited by Patrick Williams and Laura Chrismas. This collection of
critical essays designates the field as `post-colonial'. The introduction addresses the politics of this designation, and the text
provides a very useful collection of major essays.
Resistance and Caribbean Literature (1980) by Selwyn R Cudjoe. A critical survey of Caribbean novels, drawing from the
English-, French-, and Spanish-speaking traditions in the Caribbean.
British History
Books about breeding and taste, not least in royal circles, stud this list—and tell us, some will say, something of the British
character itself. There is marked insularity too: often, it seems, the British went out into the world only to conquer, to govern or
to disapprove.
See ARCHAEOLOGY (Frere); ART (Conrad); AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Bamford. Brittain, Graves, Hervey, Macmillan):
BIOGRAPHY (Cecil, Donaldson, Longford, Nicolson, WoodhamSmith); DIARIES (Carlyle, Chesterfield, Evelyn. Greville,
Montagu, Pepys): FEMINISM (Hiley, Norris): HISTORY/AMERICAN (Bridenbaugh); POLITICS (Bagehot, Clarke,
Cowling); SOCIOLOGY (Chesney, Reeves, Roberts): TRAVEL (London)
Bacon, Francis Essays (1597) 0 Pungent observations on his own changing world, on man and society, on politics, ambition,
marriage, youth and age, education: all the major issues which concern Bacon as much as they do us.
Cruickshanks, Eveline Political Untouchables: The Tories and the '45 (1979)
The author tackles the subject of England at the time of the 1745 Jacobite rebellion with aplomb, makes full use of the French
archive material without which the story makes no sense. For specialists, essential; for those interested in the politics of
rebellion, fascinating.
Dillon. M. and Chadwick, N. The Celtic Realms (1967) DTI
Useful study of pre-Norman British society, essential for understanding the independent cultures of Ireland, Scotland and
Wales, as well as the Celtic underlay of later English culture. Particularly good on religion, literature and art. The History of
Civilization series (from which this comes) is patchy; this volume is excellent.
Elton, G. R. Studies in Tudor and Stuart Politics and Government (2 vols, 1974)
Important collection of articles, mainly on the government of Tudor England, by an influential British historian. Also: The
Tudor Constitution, etc
Ensor, R. C. K. England, 1870– 1914(1936) 10 By far the best of the volumes on modern history in the Oxford History of
England series. Detailed, accurate, sensible.
Fitzgibbon, Constantine Red Hand: The Ulster Colony (1971) Good historical survey of the relations between Ireland and
(particularly) England from the time of Elizabeth Ito the troubled end of the 1960s. Clear-eyed, dismaying read. Also: Out of
the Lion's Paw: Ireland Wins Her Freedom. See Woodham-Smith.
Longford, Elizabeth Victoria R. L (1964) A Easy to read, well researched biography, in a different class to Lytton Strachey's
Queen Victoria, which is for those who are looking for imaginative literature, not history. See BIOGRAPHY
Mattingly, Garrett The Defeat of the Spanish Armada (1959) a Absorbing account based entirely on contemporary record;
more exciting than any fiction. Also: Catherine of Aragon; Renaissance Diplomacy
Neale, J. E. Queen Elizabeth (1934) A _1 Brilliant mingling of scholarship with humane and compassionate understanding of a
woman in high politics. Its only weakness is the somewhat pervasive view that the queen could do no wrong. Also: The
Elizabethan House of Cornrnons; Elizabeth I and Her Parliaments. See Read: Rowse.
Plumb, J. H. The First Four Georges (1956) *1/ Plumb was the first scholar to stress the complexity of George I; here he
surveys the following three Georges with a similarly unjaundiced eye. Compulsive. Also: Sir Robert Walpole; The Growth of
Political Stability, 1675 – 1725; Chatham, etc. See Hibbert.
Power, Eileen The Wool Trade in English Medieval History (1941) Unlikely-sounding subject; but fascinating and of far more
than parochial interest. Economic history at its elegant best.
Read, Conyers Mr Secretary Walsingham and the Policy of Queen Elizabeth (1925)
M., jor study of Elizabethan foreign policy and elucidation of the intelligence system built up and operated by the spiritual
ancestor of MI5 and the CIA. Also: Mr Secretary Cecil and Queen Elizabeth; Lord Burghley and Queen Elizabeth. See Neale;
Rowse.
Thompson, E. P. The Making of the English Working Class (1963) Superb book by one of this century's leading British
historians. Also: Protest and Survive (crucial polemic on need for disarmament). See BIOGRAPHY
Braudel, Fernand The Mediterranean and the Mediterranean World in the Age of Philip 11(1973) *
Dextrously interweaves public with private affairs; makes more sense out of the tangled events of this turbulent time than
might have been thought possible.
Cantor, Norman F. Medieval History (1963) a ✓ Accessible, authoritative study of Europe in the 2nd-15th centuries.
Particularly good on Church and State; Carolingian section outstanding.
Hale, J., Highfield, R. and Smalley, B. (eds) Europe in the Late Middle Ages (1970)
Runchnan, Steven A History of the Crusades (3 vols. 1951 -54) * One of the best, most thrilling historical books of the
20th century, engrossing for specialists, accessible for all. Also: The Sicilian Vespers; The Fall of Constantinople; The Last
Byzantine Renaissance
Thompson, David Europe since Napoleon (1957) 1$ Fat (800 pages), comprehensive, smoothly written. Weaker on culture
than on politics and military history; notably good on 19th-century colonialism.
Walter Jackson Bate is the Kingsley Porter University Professor at Harvard and a distinguished scholar of eighteenth- and
nineteenth-century English literature. Among his many books are From Classic to Romantic (1946). The Burden of the Past
(1969) and two biographies, John Keats (1964) and Samuel Johnson (1977), each of which won the Pulitzer Prize for
biography.
Great books are the most valuable means of deepening us as "experiencing natures"; and it is only as experiencing natures that
we can prepare for new challenges.
Benjamin P. Thomas. Abraham Lincoln (1952). New York: Knopf, 1974. (Pb)
The most succinct of the many biographies of one of humanity's greatest heroes.
James Boswell. The Life of Samuel Johnson (1791). New York: Random House, 1964. (Pb)
The most fascinating of all biographies, and one of universal appeal because its subject shared so deeply almost every aspect of
the experience we all share.
Werner W. Jaeger. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture (1934). Gilbert Highet, trans. New York: Oxford University Press,
1965. (Pb)
A profound study of what permitted a small people to create the basis of Western culture.
Alfred North Whitehead. Science and the Modern World (1925). New York: Free Press, 1967. (Pb)
Unrivaled in showing what, from the ancient world to the twentieth century, permitted and encouraged the giant adventures of
the mind that have formed our world.
William Shakespeare. Shakespeare: Complete Works (1592-1611). Alfred Harbage, ed. Baltimore: Penguin, 1969.
The most searching example in literature of the interplay of human action presented in language no other writer has equaled.
Stanley Hoffmann
Stanley Hoffmann is a professor of government and the C. Douglas Dillon Professor of the Civilization of France at Harvard
University. Professor Hoffmann has been teaching and writing both about international affairs and about France for thirty
years. Educated in France, he came to Harvard as a teacher in 1955.
All of these books (1) deal with the most fundamental choices—often tragic—individuals are called upon to make, particularly
as citizens, and (2) are works of art and not merely of instruction.
Jean-Jacques Rousseau. Social Contract (1762). Maurice Cranston, trans. New York: Penguin, 1968. (Pb)
The most powerful attempt to reconcile freedom and authority, self-fulfillment and community. It fails, I think—but what an
impressive and instructive failure.
Leo Tolstoy. War and Peace (1865-69). Louise Maude and Aylmer Maude, trans. George Gibian, ed. New York: W. W. Norton,
1966.
The greatest novel ever written and the most probing attempt to show the effects of war on a diverse group of individuals.
Jean-Baptiste Racine. Andromaque (1667). John Cairncross, trans. New York: Penguin, 1976. (Pb)
Love, revenge, lust, motherhood and the aftermath of the Trojan War, in the perfect poetic mix of passion and formality that is
Racine's genius.
Roger Martin du Gard. Les Thibault (1922-40). New York: Larousse, n.d. (Pb)
Even longer than, albeit not as rich as War and Peace, this is another fresco about individuals and war (the First World War) and
a humane, wise, compassionate and deeply pessimistic study of lives.
Charles de Gaulle. The Complete War Memoirs of Charles de Gaulle (1954-59). J. Griffin and R. Howard, trans. New York:
Simon & Schuster, 1964.
The epic story of France's fall and liberation, written by the chief actor in the drama, a leader of genius who was also a
magnificent writer.
Raymond Aron. Peace and War: A Theory of International Relations (1962). Richard Howard and Annette Baker Fox, trans.
Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1966.
The most comprehensive study of international politics, which tells us both about the limits and about the possibilities of
empirical theory and explores the dilemma of ethical action in world affairs.
John V. Kelleher
John Kelleher is about to retire as professor of Irish studies at Harvard University. where he is acting chairman of the Celtic
Department. His connection with Harvard began in 1940 as a member of the Society of Fellows—in his words, "to paraphrase
an old joke: the first in the field and the first to leave it.-
I wrote sketches for recommended readings several times, but they were in lame prose and besides I was put off by the
realization that it wasn't particular books but individual authors that had significantly influenced me. I hope the resulting
compromises may be of use.
James Joyce. Ulysses (1918-20). New York: Random House, 1976. (Pb)
For years I wondered why the book continued to appeal despite the steadily rising barrier of interpretation that surrounds it.
Finally it dawned on me that Ulysses is about the only upbeat masterpiece of this century—and immensely funny too. In its
own artfully tangled way it records the heartening adventures of people of quiet courage.
John Millington Synge. The Playboy of the Western World (1907). New York: Barnes & Noble, 1968.
I think Synge was the greatest of all modern Irish writers. His work is all of a piece, rammed with vitality, and, for all of
Synge's own iron reserve, it has extraordinary emotional range. In this play he also shows that he is a wonderful comic writer
—probably the more so for his basic sense of tragedy.
Eoin MacNeill. Celtic Ireland (1921). Dublin: University Press of Ireland, 1981.
Again one title to indicate my debt to a man's entire work. MacNeill would be happy to know that much of what he wrote is
now outdated. He was that rare type, a great innovative scholar quite without vanity. Almost alone he transformed the study of
early Irish history from apology or polemic to true historiography, and did that happily.
Maria Edgeworth. Castle Rackrent (1800). New York: Oxford University Press, 1982. (Pb)
An extraordinarily seminal work by a woman of genius. It is not only the first true Irish novel, but the first regional novel,
immensely admired in its day and imitated everywhere. Raised in England, brought to Ireland as a young girl, she somehow
learned more about Ireland, present and past, than I am sure she was aware of knowing. The result is a work of vivid realism.
William Butler Yeats. The Poems of W B. Yeats (1887-1939). Richard Finneran, ed. New York: Macmillan, 1962. (Pb)
I cite the latest and most complete edition. Yeats parlayed the damnedest combination of natural gifts, spasmodic learning,
native shrewdness, indomitable dedication, some willful half-beliefs, and a few deep insights—parlayed these into memorable,
powerful poetry. Useful poetry, too, that sticks to the ribs.
These books catalogue the (continuing) collisions between the Old World and the New, and, less obviously, the progress of one
of the last and bloodiest confrontations between Christianity and ordered pagan civilization. The ideological conflicts of the
wider world are galvanized by technological overkill; but they yield nothing in violent dogma, dogmatic violence, to the death-
throes of the old.
See ARCHAEOLOGY (Deuel); BIOGRAPHY (Madariaga, Morison); MEDICINE (McNeill): MYTHOLOGY (Burland);
SOCIOLOGY (Lewis): TRAVEL (Chadwick)
Gerbi, Antonello The Dispute of the New World: The History of a Polemic, 1750- 1900 (1973) p
Masterpiece of intellectual history traces in witty, learned style the origins and development of the great debate on the alleged
inferiority of both man and environment in the Americas.
Hennaing, J. Red Gold: The Conquest of the Brazilian Indians, 1500 - 1800(1976)
Well-researched, readable corrective to Freyre's (qv) somewhat roseate view of Brazilian racial integration; powerful case
study of this central, if grim, theme in Latin American history. Also: The Conquest of the Incas
Katz, Friederich The Ancient American Civilizations (1972) ita-1 Stimulating analysis of pre-Columbian civilizations,
particularly good on social and economic structures (less so on art and literature); usefully points the way to further reading.
Also: a major study of Pancho Villa and the Mexican Revolution, in preparation and should be worth waiting for.
Lynch, John The Spanish American Revolutions, 1808 –26 (1973) Good general study of the independence movements which
liberated Latin America from Spanish colonial rule, concentrates on Argentina, Venezuela, Colombia and Mexico. Also: Spain
under the Habsburgs
Meyer, Jean A. The Cristero Rebellion: The Mexican People between Church and State, 1926-29(1976) Pa./
A brilliant account by French historian of the "alternative" Mexican Revolution, focusing on the Catholic peasant revolt of the
1920s but illuminating wider aspects of religion and politics in modern Mexico. Also: The A merican Revolution, 1910-40
Wachtel, Nathan The Vision of the Vanquished: The Spanish Conquest of Peru through Indian Eyes, 1530-1570(1976)
Poignant contrast to Prescott's (qv) account; draws on Indian sources to give Indian perspective.
A convincing, definitive synthesis of world history remains to be written. For future master-masons, these books may offer
guidelines; for the rest of us, interested visitors to the quarry. they are intriguing, rough-hewn blocks announcing a potential
they cannot yet fulfil.
Barraclough, Geoffrey The Times Atlas of World History (1978) v * Geographical, historical, cultural and military
information clearly and concisely displayed. Essential reference book, and a model of its kind. See HISTORY/EUROPEAN
Durant, Will The Story of Civilization (1935) &RI Multi-volume one-man's view of human history and achievement. Durant's
style is lucid and elegant. His judgements can seem selective and glib; but this remains a monumental work, at once stimulating
and unique.
Grenville, J. A. S. A World History, 1900– 1945 (1979) 09 Wide-ranging, authoritative study by a leading scholar. Also: Lord
Salisbury and Foreign Policy; Europe Reshaped, 1848 -1878
Ernest R. May
Ernest May is a Texan, educated in California, who has been a professor of history at Harvard since the 1950s. A former dean
of Harvard College, he is currently the Charles Warren Professor of History and teaches at the Kennedy School of Government.
He is author, coauthor and editor of works on the history of the United States, modern international relations and the uses of
history for decision nicking.
My choices offer the reader the opportunity to extend his own range of experience five hundred years back and across a variety
of political systems.
William H. Prescott. History of the Conquest of Mexico (1839). Abridgment, Gardiner C. Harvey, ed. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1966. (Pb)
Prescott's account of Cortez' expedition is the first history I read that held me as much in thrall as any novel. He made me see
that almost incredible adventure.
Harold G. Nicolson. Peacemaking 1919 (1933). New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1965.
Part reminiscence, part history, part spleen, part analysis, this is the best case study of an international conference ever written
in English. It still helps me understand better how outcomes in negotiation can be affected by factors of personality,
temperament, age, comparative fatigue, staging, and the like, which do not necessarily surface in documentary records.
Paul F. Lazarsfeld and Elihu Katz. Personal Influence: The Part Played by People in the Flow of Mass Communications
(1955). New York: Free Press, 1964. (Pb)
This pioneering study of the ways "opinion leaders" shape public opinion was to me enormously enlightening. No other book
has helped me so much to understand democratic processes.
Richard E. Neustadt. Alliance Politics. New York: Columbia University Press, 1970. (Pb)
For my mind, this study of the Suez and "Skybolt" crises of 1956 and 1962 plays counterpoint to Eckart Kehr's. It explores the
ways court and organizational politics influence outcomes consciously (and conscientiously) designed to be "nonpolitical."
Bernard Bailyn. The Ideological Origins of the American Revolution (1965). Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1967. (Pb)
This book argues compellingly that Americans and Englishmen of the 1770s saw issues differently in part because they had
different histories in their heads. They read differently the lessons of the English seventeenth-century revolution which was
their common heritage, and they respected different authorities and traditions. As so graphically developed by Bailyn, the
example of the American Revolution has helped to keep in my own mind—I hope—awareness not only of the varieties of
perception possible among seemingly similar individuals but also of what a German philosopher labeled (with uncharacteris-
tic elegance) the Gleichzeitigkeit der Ungleichzeitigkeiten—the contemporaneous existence of things noncontemporaneous.
Richard Pipes
Richard Pipes is the Frank B. Baird, Jr. Professor of History at Harvard and has been a member of the Harvard faculty since
1950. From 1981 to 1982, Professor Pipes was director of Eastern European and Soviet affairs on the National Security
Council. His many works include: Survival Is Not Enough (1984): U.S.-Soviet Relations in the Era of Détente (1981): and
Formation of the Soviet Union (1954).
I did not provide a list of the most important books but only of those which have had a strong personal influence on me. They
may do nothing for others.
Friedrich Nietzsche. The Basic Writings of Nietzsche (1872-95). Walter Kaufman, ed. and trans. New York: Modern Library,
1968.
The first author to make a great impression on me was Friedrich Nietzsche, whom I "discovered" at the age of fifteen. I
devoured all he wrote (in the original German). He suited well my adolescent sense of rebellion. Once I reached seventeen I
found him less and less palatable, and I have not been able to read him since.
Rainer Maria Rilke. Selected Poetry of Rainer Maria Rilke (1897-1923). Stephen Mitchell, ed. New York: Random House,
1982.
The poetry of Rainer Maria Rilke I first read at the age of nineteen or twenty. Its profound lyricism, its serenity have affected
me more than any other poetry and do so to this day.
Francois P. Guizot. The History of Civilization in Europe (1828). William Hazlitt, trans. Darby, Penn.: Arden Library, 1983.
I discovered this book while I was a soldier and it showed me that history can be a form of philosophy and literature. It
persuaded me to become a professional historian.
Michel de Montaigne. Selections from the Essays (1595). Donald M. Frame, ed. and trans. Arlington Heights, III.: Harlan
Davidson, 1973. (Pb)
I tried to read the Essays (in the Florio translation) at the age of twenty-five but it bored me. Then I read it again at the age of
forty-seven and found it the wisest book ever written. I never fail to be impressed and influenced by Montaigne's outlook.
Sir Max Beerbohm. Works and More (1930). St. Clair Shores, Mich.: Scholarly Press, 1969.
Max Beerbohm has had a much smaller influence on me and yet I love reading him: his quiet elegance, detachment, serenity
appeal to me greatly, as does his exquisite humor. I first read him when I was fifty or so.
Thomas C. Schelling
Thomas Schelling is the Lucius N. Littauer Professor of Political Economy at Harvard's John F Kennedy School of
Government and a professor in the Department of Economics. He is the author of numerous works including The Strategy of
Conflict (1961), Arms and Influence (1966), Micromotives and Macrobehavior (1978), and Choice and Consequence (1984).
In addition to teaching at Harvard since 1958, he is director of Harvard's Institute for the Study of Smoking Behavior and
Policy, which fulfills his research interest in addictive and habitual behaviors and other issues in self-management. His other
research interests include national security and climate changes.
These books give readers a taste of the best in natural science, social science, classical and modern history and literary style.
Charles Darwin. The Origin of Species (1859). New York: Penguin, 1982. (Pb)
I have had a fascination with evolutionary biology, provoked by such beautiful books as George Gaylord Simpson's This View
of Life, but had never picked up a copy of Darwin's original work until ten years ago. I have rarely had such pleasure and
excitement in reading a sustained piece of scientific reasoning and presentation of evidence. It is technically accessible to any
intelligent reader. It is a genuinely participatory experience.
Thucydides. History of the Peloponnesian War (ca. 431-404 B.C.). Richard Livingstone, ed. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1960.
I knew that classical Greece produced people at least as smart as people anywhere today, but until I read this I had no idea how
modern they were in their thinking. Nothing written in this century can touch Thucydides (or the people he quotes) for subtlety
of political and diplomatic discourse and strategy. I like Rex Warner's translation in the Penguin edition, but some readers may
need large print. If you like it go on to Herodotus and Xenophon.
Erving Goffman. Interaction Ritual: Essays in Face-to-Face Behavior (1967). New York: Pantheon, 1982. (Pb)
I was hooked on Goffman from the time I read "On Face Work," the first essay in this collection. If you like this try "Stigma,"
"Forms of Talk," and "Asylums." He looks at the same people we look at doing the same things we see them doing, and he sees
things we can't see without his help. He once pointed out to me that a woman can be naked with her husband without
embarrassment, naked with her sister without embarrassment, but not naked without embarrassment in the presence of both.
Laurence Sterne. Tristram Shandy (1759-67). New York: Oxford University Press, 1983. (Pb)
I bought a copy in 1943 because it fit in my pocket and I was vaguely aware that it was a classic. I read it for an hour on a
streetcar and was captivated by the story, the style and the purported author. It is an endlessly digressive autobiography that
begins with his conception and barely gets up to his birth. Sterne writes a lovely, leisurely sentence that can wind on for three
hundred words and you never lose your way or have to look back.
John Keegan. The Face of Battle (1976). New York: Penguin, 1983. (Pb)
I have a book on baseball that says fear is the fundamental factor in hitting, and hitting with the bat is the fundamental act of
baseball. For John Keegan, a distinguished military historian, fear is the fundamental factor in exposing oneself to enemy
weapons, and exposing oneself is the fundamental act of corn-bat, as he vividly describes, at the level of the individual soldier,
the battles of Agincourt, Waterloo and the Somme. A superbly thoughtful history of military combat.
Lloyd Weinreb
Lloyd Weinreb has been a professor of law at the Harvard Law School since 1965. His specialties are criminal law and legal
philosophy. In addition to his textbook, Leading Constitutional Cases on Criminal Justice, he has published Denial of Justice
and Law of Criminal Investigation.
Homer. The Iliad (ca. 800 B.C.). Robert Fitzgerald, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975. (Pb)
The great epic, full of the grandeur and pain of the human condition.
Sophocles. The Three Theban Plays: Antigone, Oedipus the King, and Oedipus at Colon us (ca. 441-401 B.c.). New York:
Penguin, 1984. (Pb)
The unlimited tragic vision. The meaning of human freedom is laid bare.
William Shakespeare. King Lear (1605). New York: Penguin, 1984. (Pb)
Everyone must choose which of Shakespeare's plays is closest to him. In this end, I return most often to Lear. The Tempest is a
close second.
Michel de Montaigne. Selections from the Essays (1595). Donald M. Frame, ed. and trans. Arlington Heights, Harlan
Davidson, 1973. (Pb)
Montaigne is a wise, compassionate friend to accompany one throughout life, ready to converse about every important subject,
whatever one's mood.
HISTORY: INTRODUCTION
John Stewart
The study of the past is something that has fascinated human societies from at least the time of the ancient Greeks and Romans,
and before this in certain eastern cultures. This does not mean, however, that those who study the human past in a scholarly
way, that is professional historians, can necessarily agree on the usefulness or otherwise of such a pursuit. For some, history
can provide a guide, albeit an imprecise one, to an understanding of the present and, more problematically, the future. Others
see this as an unrealistic or pretentious claim for history, arguing instead that its virtues lie in such matters as evaluating
evidence and in beginning to understand the complexities of human existence. The latter group tend to be `conservative' in their
historical practice, and are unhappy about any alliances between history and other disciplines such as sociology. Such debates
go to the heart of what we mean by `history', and the books listed below provide an introduction to these debates from a
number of different standpoints.
Not to know what took place before you were born is to remain for ever a child.
MARCUS TULLIUS CICERO
History and Social Theory (1992) by Peter Burke. This work argues for a closer relationship between history and the social
sciences, and for the use of appropriate'theory' in historical study. A number of case studies are also provided suggesting how
such a relationship might work in practice. Burke is a distinguished historian in this field, and his arguments therefore come
right from the heart of the debate.
What is History? (1961) by E H Carr. A controversial figure, Carr claimed a 'scientific' basis to historical study, while
acknowledging, in a famous phrase, that history was an `unending dialogue between past and present'. Of particular concern to
his critics, however, was his definition of historical `facts'. Although difficult to defend nowadays as a whole, this work was
significant not least in provoking other historians to try and describe and analyse exactly what it was they did when
undertaking research and writing.
The Practice of History (1967) by Geoffrey Elton. The late Geoffrey Elton was one of the most articulate exponents of the
more `traditional' approach to history. In this work he reveals, clearly and lucidly, the kind of painstaking procedures a historian
has to go through in order to produce a useful piece of historical research. Elton also makes clear his scepticism about any
predictive or `scientific' qualities which might, mistakenly, be attributed to history. In part, this work is a response to Carr.
Return to Essentials (1991) by Geoffrey Elton. In a sense, the title says it all. Elton attacks those who would distort history by
seeking to force historical evidence into pre-determined theoretical patterns. Instead, Elton seeks to emphasize the traditional
historical practices of which he himself was such an admirable exponent. This book is worth reading alongside Marwick, Tosh,
and, especially, Burke.
What Is History Today? (1988) edited by Juliet Gardiner. This is a collection of essays on the different branches of history -
political history, economic history, and so on - by experts in the various fields. Clearly written and with a useful introduction,
this work brings out both the diversity of historical study and the range of opinions about its value.
The Nature of History (1989) Arthur Marwick. Writing in a witty and provocative style, Marwick seeks to show the 'necessity
of history', by which he means the need for societies to study and attempt to understand the past in order to be able to make
sense of present-day society. The book also deals with such topics as the development of historical studies and the problematic
nature of primary sources.
Introduction to History (1986) by the Open University. Designed for an Open University distance-learning course, and
written by Arthur Marwick, this is one of the best places for any newcomer interested in the nature of historical study to start.
Marwick carefully takes readers through various meanings of the word `history', and again argues the case for the necessity of
society's understanding its historical origins. There are a number of video recordings also associated with this course which, if
access can be gained to them, further illustrate the points being made.
The Pursuit of History (1991) by John Tosh. Like Marwick, Tosh sees a necessity for historical study. His work is particularly
useful in alerting readers to some of the main types of historical study, and to recent developments such as the use of
quantitative methods.
The birth of Egyptology is usually dated to Jean Francois Champollion's decipherment of the Egyptian hieroglyphic script in
1822. Egyptologists are concerned with every aspect of the civilization of ancient Egypt; not just with those topics, such as
pyramids and mummies, that have caught the popular imagination. Egypt is important in the history of humanity as the first
large state to be ruled by a central government. The `pharaonic' culture created in the late 4th millennium BC lasted for over
3,000 years and produced some of the world's most impressive art and architecture. In spite of the huge quantity of surviving
remains, and frequent new discoveries, many aspects of life in ancient Egypt remain mysterious.
Ancient Egypt: A Cultural Atlas (1980) by John Baines and Jaromir Malek. A reliable introduction to ancient Egyptian
history and culture. It includes a guide to all the main ancient sites with many excellent maps and plans.
Ancient Egypt: The Land and Its Legacy (1988) by T G H James. A journey through Egypt describing the surviving towns,
temples, and tombs. A beautifully illustrated book that combines impeccable scholarship with sensitivity to the atmosphere of
ancient sites.
Ancient Egypt: Anatomy of a Civilization (1989) by Barry J Kemp. A thought-provoking study of the political, social, and
economic life of the ancient Egyptians written by a leading archaeologist.
Conceptions of God in Ancient Egypt (1982) by Erik Hornung (translated by John Baines). A challenging book for anyone
seriously interested in understanding the complex world of ancient Egyptian religion.
Building in Egypt: Pharaonic Stone Masonry (1991) by Dieter Arnold. A detailed, technical book that answers every
conceivable question about how the pyramids, and all the other great monuments, were built.
Egyptian Painting and Relief (1986) by Gay Robins. An essential, brief guide to understanding and enjoying Egyptian
paintings and sculptured reliefs. It explains the materials, methods, and unique conventions of ancient Egyptian art.
Egyptian Hieroglyphs (1987) by W V Davies. The best short introduction to the languages and scripts of ancient Egypt.
Ancient Egyptian Literature volumes 1-3 (1973, 1976, 1980) by Miriam Lichtheim. These books allow the ancient Egyptians to
speak for themselves. They include translations of stories, love poems, royal inscriptions, and passages from the famous Book
of the Dead
Akhenaten, King of Egypt (1988) by Cyril Aldred. A comprehensive study of a ruler who has been called `the first individual
in history'. It explores the religious reforms of the `heretic pharaoh' and his wife Nefertiti, and the troubled history of the
controversial Amarna period.
The Complete Tutankhamun (1990) by Nicholas Reeves. A full, and magnificently illustrated, account of the reign of the boy
pharaoh Tutankhamen, and of the astounding contents of his tomb.
There is an abundance of general histories of both Greece and Rome, which vary from the lavishly illustrated to detailed
studies of the available archaeological and literary evidence about events and personalities. I have included in this list primarily
books that provide a reliable overview of extensive periods, and that incorporate in an accessible form the results of continuing
scholarship. The Greek and Roman historians, of whom the most important for general study are Herodotus and Thucydides
(for classical Greece) and Livy and Tacitus (for republican Rome and the early Roman Empire), have been translated in the
Penguin Classics series. Also fascinating, for their suggestive portraits of individuals, are the biographies written by Plutarch
(of Greek and Roman military and political leaders) and by Suetonius (of the early Roman emperors).
The Routledge Atlas of Classical History (1971; revised edition 1994) by Michael Grant. A graphic presentation of the major
historical events and eras.
The Historians of Greece and Rome (1969) by S Usher. An informative and accessible introduction to the major ancient
writers themselves.
The Fontana History of the Ancient World (1976 onwards) by various authors. A comprehensive and accessible multivolume
account by specialists, which pays attention to social and cultural history as well as to economics, military affairs, and politics.
The volumes are: Early Greece by O Murray, Democracy and Classical Greece by J Davies, The Hellenistic World by F
Wallbank, Early Rome and the Etruscans by R Ogilvie, The Roman Republic by M Crawford, The Roman Empire by C Wells,
The Later Roman Empire by A Cameron.
The Early Greeks (1976) by R J Hopper. A clear and interesting survey of Greek history from the Minoan period to the
emergence of the classical Greek city-state.
The Greek World 479-323 BC (1983) by Simon Hornblower. Probably the best short survey of a crucial period in Greek
history, which saw the rise and decline of classical Athens.
The Miracle That Was Macedonia (1991) by N Hammond. A recent account of the growth and apogee of Macedonian power
under Philip and his son Alexander the Great by a leading historian.
Alexander to Actium: The Historical Evolution of the Hellenistic Age (1990) by Peter Green. A detailed picture of the
changing historical and cultural relations in the Mediterranean in the period of the gradual decline of Greek power, and of the
growth of Rome.
A History of the Roman World 753-144 BC (1980) by H Scullard. A continually revised, authoritative history of the first six
centuries of the Roman republic.
The Roman Revolution (1939) by Ronald Syme. The classic study of the transformation of the Roman republic into a
principate under Augustus.
For up-to-date studies of the Roman Empire, in its earlier and later periods, I should recommend the books by Wells and
Cameron in the Fontana series.
Three other books deal with areas that may be of particular interest to readers: The Roman Invasion of Britain (1980) by
Graham Webster;
Greeks, Romans and Barbarians (1988) by Barry Cunliffe; The Ancient Economy (1984) by M Finley.
The civilizations that once flourished in the Middle East have been uncovered gradually during the past 150 years. Their
numerous and varied writings on stone and clay are still being excavated and are mostly deciphered, so that we can reconstruct
very ancient life and literature in astonishing detail. Sumerians, Babylonians, Assyrians, Hittites, Canaanites, Elamites, and
Persians are all linked together by their use of cuneiform (wedge-shaped) writing, by trade and empire, and by splendid cities.
They made extraordinary progress in are, architecture, astronomy, and technology, and we are only just beginning to appreciate
the true extent of their achievements.
Ancient Iraq (1980) by George Roux. A beautifully constructed account which introduces Mesopotamian history and culture
to the nonspecialist.
The Greatness That Was Babylon: A Survey of the Ancient Civilization of the Tigris-Euphrates Valley (1988) by Harry W F
Saggs. An excellent overview showing clearly why this civilization ranks among the foremost in world history.
Mesopotamia (1991) by Julian Reade. A brief, elegant account containing brilliant illustrations taken mainly from the superb
collections in the British Museum.
Cultural Atlas of Mesopotamia and the Ancient Near East (1990) by Michael Roof. This fine book gives an overview of the
whole subject, beginning with the remarkable prehistoric cultures. It is lavishly illustrated throughout the text.
Ancient Near Eastern Art (1995) by Dominique Collon. If you ever got the impression that the Egyptians and Greeks
invented fine architecture or freestanding statues, carving in very hard stone or narrative sculpture with lifelike scenes to take
your breath away, read this and think again.
Myths from Mesopotamia (1991) by Stephanie Dailey. Even earlier than the Iliad, the Odyssey and the Mahabharata, the
ancient Mesopotamians were writing epics and myths that still have power to compel modern man. These translations are
eminently readable, and show how scholars have pieced together the oldest stories in the world.
Early Mesopotamia: Society and Economy at the Dawn of History (1992) by J Nicholas Postgate. An original and fascinating
book which combines archaeology and texts to give new insights into the development of ancient civilization. Beautifully
illustrated too.
From the Omens of Babylon: Astrology and Ancient Mesopotamia (1994) by Michael Baigent_ This remarkable book, by a
nonspecialist who has taken great care with the scholarly material to write an account that is highly readable, is the envy of
specialists. It shows that Chaldaean astrologers did not become famous worldwide without good cause, and how their learning
contributed to humanism in the Renaissance.
The Hittites (1990) by Oliver R Gurney. This remains one of the best books to describe the ancient Indo-European people of
Anatolia who took over much of the learning of Mesopotamia and helped to transmit it to Hebrews and Greeks.
The Bible and Recent Archaeology (1987) by P Roger and S Moorey. An extensive revision of Kathleen Kenyon's book of
1978. It relates with great clarity and fine photographs how the tricky linkage between archaeology and the Bible continues to
excite furious debate.
Since World War II, medieval historians have pioneered alternatives to the traditional, event-based study of history. Today,
most medievalists attempt either to present a snapshot recreation of medieval culture as a whole - intellectual, economic, and
material - from as wide as possible a selection of its surviving records, or to trace long-term changes in the ideas, economic
trends, technology, demography, and even environment of the medieval world. The following selection offers an introduction to
both traditional and new medieval history.
These may seem small things ... but taken together they build up a complicated sense of the past, which must always be made
up of small things vividly perceived.
R W SOUTHERN
The Oxford Illustrated History of Medieval Europe (1992) edited by George Holmes. A superbly illustrated, modern,
thematic introduction which combines both traditional and new approaches.
Cambridge Medieval History 8 volumes (1923-36) by various authors. A multi-volume series offering the most authoritative
traditional account of the Middle Ages.
Feudal Society (1965) by Marc Bloch. A ground-breaking analysis by an extraordinary historian and Resistance hero that
helped to create the new approach to history.
The Making of the Middle Ages (1953) by R W Southern. The best short introduction to the medieval world, transcending the
division between traditional and new history, by possibly the greatest British medievalist of all.
The World of Late Antiquity (1971) by Peter Brown. An outstanding short, illustrated introduction to the early medieval
period, from AD 200 to about 800, packed with thematic insights.
The Three Orders: Feudal Society Imagined (1978) by Georges Duby. The most influential book by the most celebrated
modern French medievalist, tracing the emergence, importance, and disappearance of a concept fundamental to medieval social
thought.
Reason and Society in the Middle Ages (1978) by Alexander Murray. An exploration of all aspects of the interaction between
the mental and real worlds of medieval Europe.
Medieval Monasticism (1984) by C H Lawrence. A straightforward factual introduction to one of the most complex and
important features of medieval culture, and one of the most alien to modem readers.
Medieval Civilization (1988) by Jacques Le Goff. A unique combination of narrative history with an analysis of time and
space, material culture, Christian society, and mentalities, sensibilities, and attitudes in medieval Europe.
THE RENAISSANCE
Martyn Rady
The Renaissance is commonly considered to extend from the 14th to the 16th century. The Renaissance was a cultural
movement which sought to restore the forms of classical Roman and Greek civilization which had been lost during the period
of the Middle Ages. This restoration involved not only an, architecture, and sculpture, but also a renewal of interest in Latin
and Greek texts, poetry, and drama. The Renaissance had its place of birth in Italy, in particular in the courts of the north Italian
princes who acted as patrons of the arts. Italy was also the home of the earliest humanists, so called because of their interest in
`human letters' (hierae hurnaniores): poetry, literature, and history. The humanists edited classical works, the original texts of
which had been corrupted during the Middle Ages, and sought to perfect the Latin and Greek languages used in their own day.
The Renaissance spread out from its Italian birthplace during the 15th century and affected an, architecture, and literature
across most of Europe.
Cultural Atlas of the Renaissance (1993) by C F Black and others. A very well-illustrated volume which covers the principal
trends of the period.
The Art of the Renaissance (1963) by Peter Murray and Linda Murray. Another well-illustrated book which concentrates
primarily on developments in an and architecture in Italy.
The Italian Renaissance in its Historical Background (1961) by Denys Hay. The author investigates not only the values and
meaning of the Renaissance in Italy but also its political background and subsequent dissemination north of the Alps.
The Renaissance in National Context (1992) edited by Roy Porter and Mikulas Teich. Although the volume includes several
chapters on the Renaissance in Italy, the bulk of the work is devoted to the Renaissance in northern Europe. It thus provides a
valuable counterweight to the `Italianocentric' approach of most books on the Renaissance.
The Impact of Humanism on Western Europe (1990) by Anthony Goodman and Angus MacKay. Provides a thorough
survey of the humanist 'programme' and includes discussion of the relations between humanism and the Reformation, court
patronage, and magic.
Renaissance Europe 1480-1520 (1971) by J R Hale. Provides valuable and entertaining social, religious, economic, and
cultural background.
Lives of the Painters, Sculptors and Architects (1550; several translations) by Giorgio Vasari. Vasari records the biographies of
the leading Italian artists from Cimabue and Giotto in the late 13th century to Leonardo and Michelangelo in his own day.
The Prince (1513) by Niccolo Machiavelli. By separating politics and government from theology and ethics, The Prince may
be considered one of the first works of political science.
PROTESTANT REFORMATION
Martyn Rady
The Protestant Reformation began as a reaction to the theology and practices of the Catholic church. It is frequently considered
to have commenced in 1517 when the German monk Martin Luther launched a public attack on the Catholic practice of selling
indulgences, which were documents absolving the purchaser from sin. Luther's protest and his desire to `purify' and reform the
church won him immediate and wide-spread support in Germany. The success of Protestantism in Germany owed much,
however, to the backing of the princes who protected Luther and established churches of their own independent of the pope.
The movement of religious protest and renewal begun by Luther was given clarity and coherence by the Swiss reformer John
Calvin, who composed his seminal theological text The Institutes of the Christian Religion in Geneva during the 1530s. By the
middle years of the 16th century, Germany, Scandinavia, England, Scotland, the Low Countries, and large parts of France and
central and eastern Europe had been won over to the Protestant Reformation. The reaction of the Catholic church (known as the
Counter-Reformation) was to define its theology more closely, to eliminate abuses, and to urge the persecution of Protestants.
All the strength, all the weakness of the German character was
reflected and magnified in his [Luther's] passionate temperament, its
tenderness and violence, its coarseness in vituperation and old-fashioned
Biblical piety ... its conviviality and asceticism, its homely common sense and
morbid self-scrutiny, its paroxysms of contrition and heady self confidence.
H A L FIsR
Reformation Europe 1517-1559 (1963) by G R Elton. Provides a thorough historical account of the origins and early
development of the Reformation in Europe.
Reformation and Society (1966) by A G Dickens. A well-illustrated text which covers the principal themes of the period. The
author explains the popular appeal of the Reformation with reference to the social conditions of the period and the role of the
printing press in the dissemination of ideas.
Luther: His Life and Work (1963) by Gerhard Ritter. A leading German scholar explains not only the life and theology but
also the popular appeal of Martin Luther.
Martin Luther: Selections from his Writings (1961) edited by John Dillenberger. Luther's writings still retain, even in
translation, a strong and emotive power.
John Calvin (1975) by T H L Parker. An introduction to Calvin's life and work which explains his theology in simple and
straightforward terms.
Popular Culture and Popular Movements in Reformation Germany (1987) by R W Scribner. A collection of essays which
analyse the progress and impact of the Reformation from the point of view of popular belief, hierarchy, and social
anthropology.
The Catholic Reformation (1971) by Pierre Janelle. A Catholic scholar traces the history of the Catholic or Counter-
Reformation and discerns its origins in a movement for reform within the Catholic church which actually predates
Protestantism.
The Dutch Revolt (1977) by Geoffrey Parker. From the middle of the 16th century onwards, the conflict between
Protestantism and the revived Catholicism of the Counter-Reformation led to military contests in Germany, France, and the
Low Countries. This book traces the history of the most violent of these confrontations.
The transformation of Europe between the Reformation and the 20th century is impossible to contain in one list. The period is
characterized by the growth of powerful nation-states, whose antagonism had bloody consequences. It is also the age when
capitalism came of age, and was too often unrestrained by notions of the common good. The democratic liberties championed
during the French Revolution were not to be matched by economic and social liberties until this century.
And which is the first of these rights? That of existence. The first
social law is, therefore, that which assures every member of society of
the means of existence; all other laws are subordinate to it.
MAXIMILIEN ROBESPIERRE
The Perspective of the World (1979) by F Braudel. The third volume of this monumental work deals with the 15th to 18th
centuries, and is no means confined to Europe. A masterpiece, it sets the scene for the economic and global setting of the rise of
modern Europe.
The Thirty Years' War (1987) by Geoffrey Parker. Well illustrated, especially with maps, this gives an account of a conflict
which still can claim to herald the beginning of a new phase in European politics. After 1648, wars are fought for secular rather
than religious reasons.
The Embarrassment of Riches: An Interpretation of Dutch Culture in the Golden Age (1987) by Simon Schama. A
breathtaking essay on an and representation in the first affluent culture of modem Europe.
Origins of the French Revolution (1980) by William Doyle. Recognized as the best introduction to the epoch of liberty,
fraternity, and equality.
Spain: 1808-1975 (1982) by Raymond Can. More wide-ranging than it appears. Liberalism was invented in early-19th-century
Spain, and this account is an excellent introduction to efforts, in vain in Spain's case, to face the challenge of modernization.
The Russian Empire 1801-1917 (1967) by H Seton-Watson. A classic account of Russia's expansion of influence both in the
Balkans and, territorially, into Asia. Its readability and authority make it a classic.
The Habsburg Empire, 1790-1918 (1969) by C A Macartney This period is examined in detail, though the poignancy of the
Dual Monarchy is nowhere more vividly brought alive than in the novels of Joseph Roth.
Selected Writings of Karl Marx (1977) edited by David McLellan. This makes the works of the father of communism
accessible. After all, Harold Wilson claimed he could never get beyond the first page of Das Kapital. A close study of Marx's
own works reveals a more humane and sympathetic figure than the pronouncements of latter followers might suggest.
20TH-CENTURY EUROPE
M R D Foot
By the beginning of this century, Europe was the world's dominating continent; by the end of it, it had been displaced by North
America, of which the predominance in turn was under threat from east Asia. Two European civil wars each spread into a
world war, in 1914-18 and 1939-45, with catastrophic effects within Europe and out-side it. From World War II, the part-
European colossus of the USSR emerged strengthened, till its own internal contradictions destroyed it later in the century. At
the western end of the continent, the French and the Germans, long opposed as enemies, formed the core of a European
common market of which the principal aim was to prevent any more major European civil wars. Minor national differences can
still make fierce trouble, as the current crisis in Bosnia shows: the catastrophe of 1914 began at Sarajevo, and it is unclear
whether more such catastrophes can ever be stopped. At least European powers no longer own many colonies.
Other regions' claims to displace Europe in the centre of our world picture are impressive. Africa, despised and disordered,
boasts antiquity of human settlement; Asia encloses mature civilizations; North America is commercial by its economic might,
South America by its rapid development; the Pacific rim by economic promise and achievement alike. All this competition has
shrunk
Europe's share of the map but has also forced Europeans into an increased dependence on each other and an enhanced
European solidarity. They can no longer afford the internecine squabbles of the era of European world hegemony.
FELIPE FERNANDEZ-ARMESTO
Millenium (1995) by Felipe Fernandez-Armesto. Explains how Europe secured its temporary predominance over the other
continents; it ranges far back in history - so much the better.
The Rise and Fall of Great Powers (1988) by Paul Kennedy. Also goes back, though only half as far as Fernandez-Armesto,
before the 20th century; more diplomatic and less cultural in its coverage.
Europe 1880-1945 (1967) by John Roberts. An unusually lucid account of the diplomatic and political wrangles that attended
the turn of the century and the two world wars.
The Myriad Faces of War (1986) by Trevor Wilson. Outstanding among the shelves-full of books that cover the Great War of
1914-18, which brought down four European empires and precipitated two revolutions in Russia.
A History of the Modern World (1983) by Paul Johnson. Begins with Lenin's revolution in Russia, and runs on into the early
1980s: Europe in these years cannot be considered in isolation from the rest of the world.
Lenin: Life and Legacy (1994) by Dmitri Volkogonov. Turns three generations of belief and misbelief upside down: a
masterpiece of revisionist history.
The Oxford Companion to the Second World War (1995) edited by I C B Dear. Presents current scholarship on its formative
subject.
The Age of Terrorism (1987) by Walter Laqueur. May well make its readers' hair stand on end: perils remain around us.
The Century of Warfare (1995) by Charles Messenger. Not confined to Europe, this is nevertheless Eurocentric.
THE HOLOCAUST
David Cesarani
The Holocaust was the first and only time that a state set out to annihilate every man, woman, and child of a designated group,
wherever they lived, and however long it took. No other genocide has approached the intensity of the genocide against the
Jews. Yet Nazi racial thinking had terrible consequences for other groups, too. There are varying explanations of why it
happened, and why the Jews and the free world responded as they did. These are issues that haunt us today since genocide is
clearly not a thing of the past. The Holocaust also lives on in the experiences of the survivors and has become a subject for
artists, filmmakers, and novelists.
I could understand the desire to dissect history, the strong urge to close in
on the past and the forces shaping it; nothing is more natural. No question is
more important for our generation which is the generation of Auschwitz,
or of Hiroshima, tomorrow's Hiroshima. The future frightens us, the past fills
us with shame: and these two feelings, like those two events, are closely linked,
like cause to effect. It is Auschwitz that will produce Hiroshima, and if
the human race should perish by the nuclear bomb, this will be the punishment
for Auschwitz, where, in the ashes, the hope of man was extinguished.
ELIE WIESEL
The Racial State - Germany, 1939-1945 (1991) by Michael Burleigh and Wolfgang Wipperman. A superb dissection of Nazi
racial policy and practice, revealing how Jews, black people, Gypsies, gays, as well as other German men, women, and youth,
were all adversely affected by Nazi race-thinking.
The Holocaust. The Fate of European Jewry (1990) by Leni Yahil. The most comprehensive one-volume account. Rich in
detail, yet easy to read.
The Holocaust in History (1989) by Michael Marcus. A concise work that effortlessly blends an outline of the Holocaust with
a discussion of how the study of the subject has evolved, including accounts of the main controversies.
Atlas of the Holocaust (1988) by Martin Gilbert. A valuable work of reference which, like his epic chronicle The Holocaust
(1987), draws on survivor testimony to give a shocking blow-by-blow record of the catastrophe.
The Terrible Secret (1982) by Walter Laqueur. A precise and damning examination of how much the free world knew about
the `final solution' and how politicians, the press, and public opinion responded to the news.
The War Against the Jews (1975) by Lucy Dawidowicz. Although the account of Nazi policy is dated, this classic short
history sympathetically explained Jewish responses for the first time and has hardly been bettered.
Anatomy of the Auschwitz Death Camp (1994) edited by Yisrael Gutman and Michael Berenbaum. The latest scholarship
gathered together to unravel the complex history of the largest concentration camp and killing centre which has come to
symbolize the Holocaust.
Out of the Whirlwind - A Reader of Holocaust Literature (1976) edited by Albert Friedlander. A fine collection of stories,
extracts from novels, memoirs, and poetry by survivors that takes us as close as possible to the `heart of darkness'. It includes
extracts from the writing of Primo Levi and Elie Wiesel.
One by One by One. Facing the Holocaust (1990) by Judith Miller. For the survivors the Holocaust did not end in 1945: it
echoed on in their lives, touching their children, too. Every country involved in World War H had to confront its role in the
`final solution', a much delayed and painful process that is explored in perceptive essays on six different countries.
FRANCE
M R D Foot
France emerged gradually from the wreck of Charlemagne's empire. It was threatened by the Viking dukes of Normandy, who
became lungs of England, and at one stage of the Hundred Years' War owned about half of France's present territory, but were
expelled by force of arms. Another threat came from the dukes of Burgundy, with whom the French crown eventually secured a
marriage alliance. Religious wars in the 16th century were succeeded by a strong monarchy, run in turn by Cardinal Richelieu,
Jules Mazarin, and Jean-Baptiste Colbert; which, late in the 18th century, ran out of cash. Revolution followed; so did terror;
resolved by Napoleon Bonaparte's empire, which died of military overextension in 1814-15. The 19th century saw seven
different regimes in France; for the last quarter of it, the Third Republic was relatively stable, as industrial development began.
An immense historical literature, most of it in French.
The Earliest Times (1927) by F Funck-Brentano (translated by E F Buckley). Provides an old-fashioned medievalist's guide.
The Middle Ages (1922) by F Funck-Brentano (translated by E O'Neill). Does the same.
France, Mediaeval and Modern (1918) by Arthur Hassell. Also has an old-fashioned ring today.
The Ancien Regime and the Revolution (1856, several recent translations) by Alexis de Tocqueville. Though much older, has
a much more modem ring - the author fore-saw the growth and the perils of democracy - and is still well worth reading.
France (1898) by J E C Bodley. Long the standard work. Begins at the revolution of 1789.
France (1969) by Douglas Johnson. A much more modem treatment, but also deals mainly with events since 1789.
Marcel Proust (1959) by George D Painter. Though it runs over from the 19th century to the next, this is one of the best of
biographies, and gives a splendidly complete picture of the society of its day.
The Development of Modern France 1874-1959 (1940; revised edition 1967) by D W Brogan_ Remains much the best
account of its subject; affectionate, sometimes wayward, always interesting.
Grandeur and Misery of Victory (1930) by Georges Clemenceau. Covers the virtual dictatorship that saved France from
Germany in 1917-18.
De Gaulle (1992) by Jean Lacouture. In two volumes, a life of France's saviour in the following world war.
GERMANY
Bob Moore
The study of 19th-century German history really began to flourish in the 1970s and 1980s when historians began to look for the
origins of the country's turbulence in the 20th century. The amount of literature is enormous and the choices inevitably highly
selective, but the following do represent a cross-section of the best standard works in the period and its leading personalities.
German History 1770-1866 (1989) by James Sheehan. On the history of Germany before unification, one cannot do better
than this book which surveys the development of the Germanic states through the final years of the Holy Roman Empire and
through the Napoleonic period into the 19th century, charting both the successes and the failures. Essential if one is to
understand the federal nature of the post-1871 German Empire and the role of Prussia within it.
A History of Germany 1815-1985 (1987) by William Carr; Germany 1866-1945 (1981) by Gordon Craig. Overlapping or
adjoining the previous book are two other survey histories. Both have long timespans and have their own particular strengths.
Again, one of these two should be considered essential reading.
Origins of the Wars of German Unification (1991) by William Can. Provides a comprehensive account of the political and
military circumstances which brought the German Empire into being. It includes all the debates, including the role of Otto von
Bismarck and the fiendishly complex Schleswig-Holstein question which so bedevilled statesmen of the period.
Imperial Germany 1871-1914: Economy, Society, Culture and Politics (1994) by Volker Berghahn. This is exactly what the
title suggests, namely an all-embracing survey of the `Second Empire'.
Bismarck: The White Revolutionary (1990) by Lothar Gall. No reading list on 19th-century Germany would be complete
without a biography of its leading statesman, Otto von Bismarck. There are many available, but the outstanding one of the
present era is undoubtedly Gall's. Similarly one cannot ignore the Emperor Wilhelm II. As one of the key figures in late-19th-
century Germany, both his life and times demand attention. The following two titles are recommended: The Kaiser and His
Times (1964) by Michael Balfour, and The Kaiser and his Court (1994) by John Rohl.
The Peculiarities of German History (1984) by David Blackbourn and Geoff Eley. This gives a more detailed insight into the
debates on late-19th-century German history and beyond.
ITALY
Glyn Redworth
The geographical or cultural idea of Italy has existed since classical times, but it was only at the end of the 19th century that
Italy became a political reality as well. Italian history is a series of invasions and betrayals, and it is perhaps little wonder that
Italy gave birth to Machiavellianism.
Italy and her Invaders ten volumes (I880s) by T Hodgkin. This work has not been superseded as an enthralling account of the
various barbarian invasions which followed the decline of Rome.
History of the Popes (1886-89; translated 1891) by Ludwig Pastor. Another 19th-century masterpiece. Not easy to find, but a
good library will be able to help. This work cannot fail to be readable owing to the colourful lives of many of the Roman
pontiffs.
Kingdom of the Sun (1970) by John Julius Norwich. A lovingly penned account of some of Italy's less well-known invaders,
the Normans, whose empire based on Sicily was one of the most fascinating of medieval societies.
The Prince (1513; translation by G BW1 1970) by Niccolo Machiavelli. Available in Penguin, as well as many other editions.
His Discourses (1531) on Roman history are possibly even more shocking to the 20th-century moralist, but it is worth
remembering that Machiavelli himself was a remarkably unconventional civil servant who was chastised by his superiors for
being long-winded.
The Bourbons of Naples (1956) by Harold Acton. A fascinating account of one of Europe's most hedonistic dynasties.
Italy in the Age of the Risorgimento 1790-1870 (1983) by Harry Hearder. Deals with the period in which Italian nationalism
led to the creation of a united and independent state.
Mussolini (1981) by Denis Mack Smith. A well-written life of II Duce by Britain's leading historian of modern Italy.
A Political History of Italy: The Post-War Years (1983) by N Kogan. Bravely tackles the almost impossible.
A Russian principality, with its capital in Kiev, reached during the early Middle Ages from the Baltic Sea almost to the Black
Sea. Kievan Russia was destroyed. how-ever, by the Mongol-Tatars in the 13th century. In the 15th century, petty princelings
from Moscow (Muscovy) began to extend their power across northern and central Russia, defeating other Russian princes and
eventually overcoming the Mongol-Tatars themselves. Ivan III (1462-1505) is commonly considered the fast ruler of Muscovy
to have assumed the title of tsar, or emperor. During the 16th and 17th centuries, the tsardom of Muscovy extended its territory
across Siberia and into the Ukraine. It was not until Peter the Great (1682-1725), however, that Muscovite Russia became a
European power. Peter not only engaged in substantial military and diplomatic activity across Europe but sought to reform the
Russian state to make it akin to the states of western Europe. Although Peter built a new, Western looking capital in St
Petersburg and obliged the nobles to shave their beards and dress in European fashions, he did not abolish the institution of
serfdom. Nor did he establish any representative organs which might limit the autocratic powers of the tsar. Despite its major
role in the defeat of Napoleon, Russia remained until the end of the 19th century economically backward and with a despotic
system of government.
I have begun to sense what Russian writers have long revealed: that
this is a place where the human spirit is made to struggle, thereby
becoming fuller as well as more repressed.
GEORGE FEIFER
A History of Russia (1993) by Nicholas V Riasanovsky. A comprehensive account of Russian history which includes chapters
on Russian culture, economy, and society.
Russia under the Old Regime (1974) by Richard Pipes. A thematic treatment of Russian history which seeks to explain the
origins of Russian autocracy, serfdom, and economic backwardness.
The Russian Chronicles: A Thousand Years that Changed the World (1990) edited by Tessa Clark; more than 30
contributors. A survey of Russian history from the earliest times which is supported by extracts from contemporary documents
and by illustrations.
Medieval Russia: A Source Book, 850-1700 (1991) by Basil Dmytryshyn. Provides useful extracts from Russian law codes
and chronicles as well as descriptions given by contemporary visitors.
Prince A M Kurbsky's History of Ivan IV (1965) edited by J L I Fennell. A con-temporary account of the life of Ivan IV
(1533-84), reputedly the most brutal and ruthless of the tsars of Muscovy.
Peter the Great: His Life and World (1981) by Robert K Massie. A vivid and comprehensive biography by a leading popular
historian.
The Cossacks (1969) by Philip Longworth. A history of the Cossacks of the steppeland and of the Ukraine, whose freebooting
way of life fell victim to Russian expansion in the 17th and 18th centuries.
Journey for Our Time: The Journals of the Marquis de Custine (1953) by P P Kohler A French account of a journey to
Russia in 1839 with some very telling observations on the nature of the Russian state and society.
The two countries that now make up the Iberian peninsula have experienced a turbulent history, at time overlapping and
intertwining, at others completely separate. The physical diversity of the peninsula has contributed to a many-stranded history,
and its geographical location in Europe has led to an almost unique intermingling of cultures from Europe itself, Africa, and the
Mediterranean. From the time of the first settlers arriving from N France in the early Stone Age, the peninsula has been
exposed to the influence of a whole host of different peoples, from the Greeks and Romans to the Visigoths and the Moors,
each leaving behind a distinct legacy.
In particular the Moorish conquest and subsequent Reconquista left an indelible imprint upon the whole peninsula. Both
countries have experienced imperial grandeur followed by rapid decline, both have laboured under long-lasting dictatorships in
the 20th century, and both have had to undergo the traumatic transition to democracy. The imperial past of the two countries
has meant that they have been a shaping force in the histories of five continents: Africa, North and South America, Asia, and, of
course, Europe. There is little doubt that the subject of Portuguese history has been relatively neglected in terms of English-
language books and this is reflected in the book list.
A dry, barren, impoverished land. A peninsula separated from the continent of Europe by the mountain barrier of the Pyrenees -
isolated and remote. A country divided within itself, broken by a high central table-land that stretches
from the Pyrenees to the southern coast. No natural centre, no easy
routes. Fragmented, disparate, a complex of different races, languages,
and civilizations - this was, and is, Spain.
J H ELL1oTT
For a century and a half, from the mid-15th to the late 16th century,
Portugal was the supreme power across the oceans of the earth. Its wealth,
from its dominions and monopolies across the globe, was dazzling, the
grandiose effect of the grandest of causes: discovery.
MARION KAPLAN
The Quest for El Cid (1989) by Richard Fletcher. An illuminating study of the 11th-century nobleman and soldier-genius. It
provides an essential background to Moorish Spain and paints a vivid picture of Spain at this time.
Islamic Spain 1250-1500 (1992) by L P Harvey. A richly detailed account of this pivotal period in Spain's history from the fall
of Seville to the Reconquista. It covers matters political, social, diplomatic, and cultural. Scholarly and comprehensive.
Spain 1469-1714: A Society of Conflict (1991) by Henry Kamen. An extremely thorough and up-to-date survey of Spanish
history between these dates. It deals with the rise and fall of the imperial greatness of Spain. Kamen highlights the problems
and tensions within Spanish society, and manages to create a fully integrated picture of all aspects of Spain at this time.
Imperial Spain: 1469-1714 (1990) by J H Elliott. The standard work on the Spanish Golden Age. It is elegantly written,
highly readable, and is characterized by thorough research throughout.
Philip II (1995 3rd revised edition) by Geoffrey Parker. Entertaining, accurate, and revealing portrait of the most powerful man
of his age, based upon Philip's personal papers and memoranda. Philip is brought to life in this compelling biography.
The Golden Age of Spain (1971) by Antonio Dominguez Ortiz. Interesting back-ground on the literature, the arts, religion,
economy, and society as well as the politics of Golden Age Spain.
The Spanish Armada (1988) by Colin Martin and Geoffrey Parker. A fascinating and impressive book vividly recreating the
story behind the Armada. It makes use of the latest research and lays some of the old myths to rest. Well illustrated and a
thoroughly good read.
The Portuguese Seaborne Empire (1991) by C R Boxer. An entertaining account of the deeds of the pioneers of maritime
expansion, and the missionaries, soldiers, colonists, and merchants involved in the whole enterprise. Alternatively, A World mi
the Move: The Portuguese in
Africa, Asia and America 1415-1808 by A J R Russell-Wood provides an equally fascinating study of the first and one of the
greatest colonial empires.
A Concise History of Portugal (1993) by David Birmingham. Highly accessible and true to its title - concise; running through
Portuguese history up to the 1990s. Includes sections on Brazilian wealth, the wine trade, ties with England, and membership
of the European Community, as well as the more obvious political history of topics such as the era of the liberal monarchy and
the Antonio Salazar dictatorship.
They Went to Portugal Too (1990) by Rose Macaulay. An enduring account of Portugal as it once was; it deals with British
travellers to Portugal, combining some excellent stories and entertaining anecdotes interwoven with the history of the country.
The history of the Low Countries has not generally been well served by books in the English language. For many years, there
was no great publishing tradition among Dutch academics and even when books did start to appear, publishers seldom saw the
need to produce English editions. As a result, many of the key texts listed here have been written by 'foreigners', with English
and North American authors leading the way. Another distortion has been the immense interest in the Golden Age of the 17th
century and the relative neglect of more recent periods. Obtaining a balance does mean that some of the cited works have been
available for a long time, but this does not detract from their importance or readability.
I know some Persons of good sense and even of Quality that have no
clearer notion of `em tho' they are next door to us, than they have
of the Mandarins in China; and what u worse, think themselves no
more obliged to know the one than the other ...
BERNARD MANDMI.LE
The Dutch Republic: Its Rise, Greatness and Fall 1477-1806 (1995) by Jonathan Israel. A volume from the Oxford History
of Early Modern Europe. A comprehensive history which incorporates the latest scholarship but with a lightness of touch. An
ideal, if not essential, starting point.
Rise of the Dutch Republic (1856) by John Lothrop Motley. A great book, not so much for the analysis which has been
undermined by subsequent scholarship, but for its descriptions. His account of the siege of Leiden is a real classic. No recent
edition but its early popularity means that copies can still be found in libraries and second-hand bookshops.
The Dutch Revolt (1979) by Geoffrey Parker. Just to set the record straight. The best recent scholarship on this colourful and
turbulent period.
The Embarrassment of Riches: An Interpretation of Dutch Culture in the Golden Age (1988) by Simon Schama. How does
one begin to provide reading on the Golden Age? Schama has his own inimitable style and a particular way of examining his
subject which is always entertaining and often thought-provoking.
Culture and Society in the Dutch Republic During the 17th Century (1974) by J L Price. A more straightforward analysis
of the period but a work which has stood the test of time.
Daily Life in Rembrandt's Holland (1962) by Paul Zumthor. Delivers some solid detail on everyday Dutch society in the
Golden Age.
Plain Lives in a Golden Age (1990) by Adriaan van Duersen. A more recent work covering some of the same ground, and
widely recommended by specialist historians and art historians of the period.
The Dutch Seaborne Empire (1965) by C R Boxer. A series of essays on maritime expansion, which was an essential element
in the history of the Dutch republic.
The Low Countries 1780-1940 (1978) by E H Kossman. By far the best example of a common approach used by many Dutch
and Flemish historians of the 19th and 20th centuries to combine the history of both the Netherlands and Belgium.
The Politics of Accommodation: Pluralism and Democracy in the Netherlands (1968) by Paul R Waibel. A work of political
science, but one which provides an under-standing of how contemporary Dutch politics and society are organized.
Literature of the Low Countries: A Short History of Dutch Literature in the Netherlands and Belgium (1971) by Reinder P
Meijer. Perhaps the only general survey on Dutch and Flemish literature.
East-Central Europe is the term frequently used nowadays to refer to the lands lying between Germany and the historic Russian
(later Soviet) frontier. It thus includes modem Poland, the Czech Republic, Slovakia, Hungary, Romania, and the Balkans.
East-Central Europe is mainly Slavonic-speaking, but it also has large pockets of German, Hungarian, Romanian, and Albanian
speakers, as well as Jews and Gypsies (Roma). Although during the Middle Ages, the territory of East-Central Europe included
a number of independent kingdoms, it was dominated from the 14th century onwards by the empires. The Ottoman Turkish
empire occupied the Balkans, while modern-day Hungary, the Czech Republic, Slovakia, Croatia, and parts of Romania and
Serbia were ruled by the Austrian Habsburgs.
At the end of the 18th century, the independent Polish state was partitioned between Prussia, Russia, and Habsburg Austria.
During the 19th century, the peoples of East-Central Europe were strongly affected by the ideology of nationalism and sought
to establish their own independent nation-states. Nationalism led to several abortive uprisings in the region, most notably in
1848. Several independent states were established in the Balkans during the late 19th century, but the rule of empires persisted
in most of East-Central Europe until the end of World War I.
Historical Atlas of East Central Europe (1993) by Paul Robert Magocsi. Contains not only maps and tables but brief
explanations of the principal historical developments in the region.
East Central Europe in the Middle Ages (1994) by Jean Sedlar. A thorough, thematically arranged survey of the region
during the medieval period.
A History of the Habsburg Empire 1273-1700 (1994) by Jean Berenger. Traces the origins and growth of the Austrian
Habsburg monarchy in East-Central Europe.
Eastern Europe, 1740-1985: Feudalism to Communism (1986) by Robin Okey. A valuable and comprehensive introduction
to the more recent history of the region.
The Fall of the House of Habsburg (1963) by Edward Crankshaw. Traces the history of the Habsburg monarchy in the 19th
century with particular reference to the fortune and fate of the ruling dynasty.
Hungary: A Short History (1962) by C A Macartney. A thorough account of Hungarian history from the earliest times.
Czechoslovakia at the Crossroads of European History (1990) by Jaroslav Krejci. Written before the split-up of
Czechoslovakia, this remains the first substantial English-language history of the country to be written since World War II.
God's Playground: A History of Poland (1981) by Norman Davies. A masterful and entertaining account of Polish history.
Arranged chronologically, the volumes are divided by the late-18th-century partition.
History of the Balkans: Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries (1983) by Barbara Jelavich. Despite its title, this work
provides substantial historical material on the medieval and early modern periods. The bulk of the text is devoted to the wars of
national liberation fought against the Ottoman Turks in the 19th century.
Danube (1989) by Claudio Magris. A travelogue which by its historical and cultural references yields a mine of observations
and insights into the region.
A History of the Gypsies of Eastern Europe and Russia (1995) by David Crowe. Provides the first detailed history of one of
East-Central Europe's largest and most neglected minorities.
The Everyman Companion to East European Literature (1993) by R B Pynsent and S I Kanikova. Gives biographies of
East-Central European authors, and guides to the major literary trends in the region.
The Bridge on the Drina (1959) by No Andric. A historical novel about a bridge in Bosnia, set between the 15th and the 20th
centuries.
The three lists on early British history (Celtic, Roman, and Anglo-Saxon to Norman) cover a period approximately from the 7th
century BC until the 12th century AD. Nevertheless they cannot be entirely chronological. Celtic languages and an survived the
Iron Age and Celtic culture reached its apogee in Ireland, Scotland, and Wales in the early Middle Ages. Although the
traditional date for the end of Roman Britain is around AD 410, the provincial population can still be recognized, especially in
western England, long afterwards, and besides traces of political continuity the Christian church seems to have had some
Romano-British roots. The Normans - Vikings who had been settled in northern France for little more than a century - failed to
extirpate the distinctive language and an of the Anglo-Saxons. The books selected here are ones I have found exciting to read
and consult or, in two cases, to write. If there is a bias it is towards the cultural aspects (art, language, and literature) which
define the `souls' of these heterogeneous peoples.
Although people speaking Celtic languages had probably been present in Britain at least from the beginning of the 1st
millennium BC, it is only with the arrival of the La Tene art style in the 5th century with its characteristic and familiar S-
scrolls, and with brief notices by Romans and Greeks from the 1st century BC onwards, especially Julius Caesar, Tacitus, and
Dio Cassius, that they can be said to enter the light of history. Caesar shows us that Britain was fragmented into tribes often at
war with one another and the position had not changed a century later. Nevertheless, despite their bloodthirsty ways and a
religion which included human sacrifice, the abstract art of British smiths had reached a high level of virtuosity and beginnings
had been made in introducing a monetary economy and in founding oppida, the precursors of Roman cities, at such places as
Camulodunum (Colchester), Verulamium (by modem St Albans), and Calleva (Silchester).
All the Bretons dye their bodies with woad, which produces a blue colour, and this gives them a more terrifying appearance in
battle. They wear their hair long, and shave the whole of their bodies except the head and the upper lip.
JULIUS CAESAR
Iron Age Communities in Britain (1974) by Barry Cunliffe. This is the standard work on the subject, especially good on
settlement and the economy.
Iron Age Britain (1995) by Barry Cunliffe. A more concise and accessible version of Professor Cunliffe's views, even better
illustrated.
The Celtic World (1995) edited by Miranda J Green. This is a massive compendium by numerous authors discussing all
aspects of the Celts, but very properly with an insular bias. It is, perhaps, an encyclopedia for library use rather than for the
general book buyer but it will be consulted with profit for years ahead.
Exploring the World of the Celts (1993) by Simon James. Although the production is sometimes irritatingly trendy, this is the
best general book on the Celts in all their aspects in Britain and beyond.
The Pagan Celts (1986) by Anne Ross. Dr Ross is a passionate enthusiast for all things Celtic, with a wide knowledge of later
insular literature. Her wide learning is very apparent in this book, originally published in 1970 with the more accurate title of
Everyday Life of the Pagan Celts.
Pagan Celtic Ireland. The Enigma of the Irish Iron Age (1994) by Barry Raftery. Although `Irish' and `Celtic' sometimes
seem to be the same thing today, La Tene culture was evidently an imported phenomenon, confined to the northern half of the
island. Whatever the language of Ireland previously, culture and for the most part the population shows strong continuity from
the Bronze Age past. This is a very important book showing that invasion is not necessary for cultural change.
The Druids (1968) by Stuart Piggott. Here is the classic study of the well-known priestly caste and its place in Iron Age
society, together with the story of the reinvention of the Druids by romantics and mystics in much more recent times.
Celtic Art from Its Beginnings to the Book of Kells (1989) by Ruth Megaw and Vincent Megaw. This is the best book on
Celtic art in general, including insular art. It is superbly illustrated.
`The Work of Angels': Masterpieces of Celtic Metalwork 6th-9th Centuries AD (1989) edited by Susan Youngs. This is the
catalogue of one of a series of exhibitions which really brought the past alive. No better proof is needed than this one that the
greatest achievements of the Celts lay in post-Roman times. Included are works of art produced by the Picts of Scotland,
Britons in western England and Wales, and of course Irish artists.
The Roman Conquest of Britain (1993) by Graham Webster. This is a classic trilogy to compare, for example, with that by
Steven Runciman on the Crusades. Dr Webster explores through archaeology and historical sources the epic clash between
Celts and Romans. It comprises revised editions of The Roman Invasion of Britain 1980, Rome against Carataeus 1981, and
Boudica 1978.
ROMAN BRITAIN
Martin Henig
The Roman period begins with the invasion of four legions of the Roman army at the behest of the emperor Claudius, but quite
quickly the leaders of native society were led to see the benefits of being incorporated into an empire which was generous in
granting citizenship and political rights and encouraged the amenities of civilized life, including baths and banquets. With the
exception of a serious outbreak of revolt among the Iceni tribe led by their ferocious queen Boudicca, aimed as much against
other Britons as the Romans themselves, there was little trouble except in the frontier regions. Archaeology has revealed the
prosperity of town and country, the flourishing of the arts, and a vibrant intermixture of Roman and native religion. In the 2nd
century and beyond, virtually everyone thought of him- or herself as a Roman. When, from a combination of external
circumstances, the Roman Empire disintegrated in the early 5th century, the Britons were one of the fragments that considered
themselves heirs to the empire.
The Oxford Illustrated History of Roman Britain (1993) by Peter Salway. This is the revised and illustrated edition of a
book first published in 1981. This is the fullest and most readable overview of the subject, with many photographs in black and
white and colour, although regrettably these lack scales.
Roman Britain (1995) by Martin Millett. Dr Millett is less concerned with the traditional version of Roman Britain centred on
the doings of the army and more interested in the more subtle processes of cultural change. The book is both thoughtful and
accessible.
Agricola (AD 97) by Cornelius Tacitus (translated 1970 as The Agricola and the Germania). One of the great classics of Latin
literature. Tacitus' encomium on his father-in-law offers a near-contemporary account of one of Roman Britain's most
influential governors.
Hadrian's Wall (1987) by David J Breeze and Brian Dobson. This is a lively account of Britain's most famous Roman
monument. It deals with life on the Wall as well as military topics and should be in the luggage of any visitor.
The Towns of Roman Britain (1974) by John Wacher. Towns were the most characteristic institutions of the Roman Empire.
This book has proved its worth over the years by bringing together all the evidence from place names, topography, inscriptions,
and archaeology.
The People of Roman Britain (1988) by Anthony Birley. By means of a skilled use of inscriptions and other written sources,
Professor Birley introduces us haltingly and fleetingly to the actual inhabitants of the province. This book gives a surprising
insight into social history.
Religion in Roman Britain (1995) by Martin Henig. In this book I have tried to show that Roman tolerance towards and
encouragement of religion was a profound agent of cultural change. Religion reflects both popular beliefs and profound faiths,
some of which struck root in Britain.
Christianity in Roman Britain to AD 500 (1981) by Charles Thomas. In this very important work Charles Thomas assembles
the evidence for Christianity in the province and makes an unassailable case for continuity into the so-called Dark Ages.
The Art of Roman Britain (1995) by Martin Henig. Until recently most scholars were content to disparage or at least ignore
the an of Roman Britain. I have attempted to show that it has the same dynamism and originality as Celtic and Anglo-Saxon an
and that it is one of the best indicators of the pagan, literary culture of the 4th-century British gentry.
The Age of Arthur (1973) by John Morris. Ever since it was published this book has been controversial. The story he tells is
of the resistance of the Britons to the barbarians which crystallized around 'Arthur', and kept alive something of the spirit of
Rome.
The coming of the English was not a single organized act. Groups of settlers from NW Europe (Netherlands to south
Scandinavia) arrived in the 5th century, generally settling in deserted lands but sometimes involved in conflict with Britons or
other Saxon groups_ While large parts of western Britain, including Cumbria, Wales, and Cornwall, remained British-speaking,
culturally England became Anglo-Saxon; however, the church may have kept Latin alive and it was certainly augmented (if not
reintroduced) with the Augustinian mission of AD 597. Thereafter the Anglo-Saxons became highly cultivated, themselves
sending missionaries to convert the heathen. In the late Saxon period there were constant problems of Viking raiding, conquest,
and settlement.
In some respects the Norman Conquest of 1066 may be regarded as the final act of this drama. However, despite the ruthless
suppression of English political freedom, which was made possible through the Norman military and fiscal regimes,
Englishness continued to be apparent in art and ultimately the English language would supplant Norman French.
When we compare the present life of man with that of which we have no
knowledge, it seems to me like the swift flight of a lone sparrow through the hall ...
This sparrow flies swiftly in through one door, and out through another.
BEDE
Civitas to Kingdom: British Political Continuity 300-800 (1994) by K R Dark. Like John Morris's book, this deals with the
Roman inheritance of western Britain and shows the extent to which the Britons of the early Middle Ages were legatees of
Rome.
The Origins of Anglo-Saxon Kingdoms (1989) edited by Steven Bassett. Diverse essays by different authors showing that not
all kingdoms had the same origin, and showing the part played by indigenous elements as well as the Germanic newcomers.
A History of the English Church and People (731; 1955) by Bede (revised 1990 as The Ecclesiastical History of the English
People). Bede, born about AD 673, less than a century after the mission of St Augustine, demonstrates how quickly the Anglo-
Saxons became civilized. This is a warm and moving account of politics and religious conversion by a great and highly
readable historian.
The Making of England. Anglo-Saxon Art and Culture AD 600-900 (1991) edited by Leslie Webster and Janet Backhouse.
Here, in a catalogue to a British Museum exhibition, is all the visual evidence for Bede's world and beyond, down to the reign
of Alfred. There are excellent introductory essays.
The Golden Age of Anglo-Saxon Art 966-1066 (1984) by Janet Backhouse, D H Turner, and Leslie Webster. Although the late
Saxon period was troubled, its cultural achievements, partly the legacy of King Alfred, were stupendous. This is another very
important offering from the British Museum.
Anglo-Saxon Art: A New Perspective (1982) by C R Dodwell. This book looks at what the Anglo-Saxons achieved in its
European context. It is one of those books that make one marvel at how those barbarian settlers in 5th-century Britain became
(like the Irish) standard-bearers of culture, expressed in the most refined art.
The Anglo-Saxons (1982) by James Campbell, Eric John, and Patrick Wormald. This is a fine, illustrated general study of the
Anglo-Saxons written by three of the leading authorities on the subject.
Alfred the Great. Asser's Lsfe and Other Contemporary Sources (1983) by Simon Keynes and Michael Lapidge. This is a
collection of texts, the most important of which is Asser's Life of Alfred. Here is the story of a king who is unique in being
called `Great' because his subjects loved him, because he fought off military catastrophe rather than because he undertook vast
conquests, and because he educated his countrymen. Very Anglo-Saxon.
Viking Age England (1991) by Julian D Richards. A concise and well-written account of the Northmen who harried and
invaded but also settled and traded in England. Recent excavation notably at York has very much brought them to life.
William the Conqueror (1964) by David C Douglas. This is the classic account of the Conqueror, a great warrior and
administrator who changed the face of England.
English Romanesque Art 1066-1200 (1984) by George Zamecki, Janet Holt, and Tristram Holland. This is the catalogue of an
exhibition held at the Hayward Gallery, London, and still the most succinct account of the Norman artistic achievement.
Introductory essays include one on architecture by Richard Gem, a worthy summary of one of the most obvious Norman
contributions to the face of England.
The major questions in conventional British medieval history remain similar today to those which exercised 19th-century
medievalists: whether the Saxon invasion of Britain was peaceful or violent, whether the Norman conquest introduced a new
social order, whether the loss of the Angevin territories in France was a blessing or a disaster, how far the Hundred Years' War
isolated England from the culture of late medieval Europe, how far the Scots, Irish, and Welsh managed to preserve their
distinct identities. Progress, however, has been great, both from the cross-fertilization of history and archaeology and from the
impact of new historical methods.
English Historical Documents volumes 1-5 (1953-75) edited by David C Douglas et al. A monumental, accessible and always
fascinating collection of the major (and some minor) primary sources.
The Anglo-Saxons (1982) by James Campbell. A sumptuously illustrated introduction to all aspects of Anglo-Saxon England,
filled with new ideas and insights.
The Norman Empire (1976) by John Le Patourel. The magisterial culmination of the career of the greatest modern authority
on the world of the Normans.
From Memory to Written Record (1979) by M T Clanchy. An analysis of the development of literacy and a literate mentality
which demonstrates that the most exciting new approaches to medieval history are not necessarily French.
Henry II (1973) by W L Warren. An outstanding biography of one of the most important medieval kings of England.
An Age of Ambition (1970) by F R H DuBoulay. An excellent thematic approach to later medieval England.
Domination and Conquest: The Experience of Ireland, Scotland and Wales 1100-1300 (1990) by Rees Davies. A good
starting point for the history of the non-English kingdoms of medieval Britain.
TUDOR AND EARLY STUART ENGLAND
Glyn Redworth
England from the accession of the Tudors in 1485 to the early 17th century witnessed remarkable changes. Not only was unity
in religion broken with the Reformation, but with the doubling of population in the space of 100 years, the stresses and strains
of early modem society grew increasingly evident.
Political disharmony went hand in hand with ideological diversity. The turbulence of the age is reflected in the writing of
history. Older books stress the power of the state, especially over the spread of Protestantism, but more recent `revisionist' work
has stressed the importance of grass-roots movements.
England Under the Tudors (1974) by Geoffrey Elton. This classic textbook first appeared in the 1950s and portrays a Tudor
state which is effectively ruled by, in the main, exceptionally strong monarchs.
Tudor England (1990) by John Guy. Incorporates the latest research and gives a greater insight into the mechanics of Tudor
government.
Peace, Print, and Protestantism (1977) by C S L Davies. A wonderfully succinct account of English history from the Wars of
the Roses to the mid-16th century, which reveals how early Tudor history is best studied with an understanding of the Middle
Ages.
The Crisis of Parliaments (1971) by Conrad Russell. Also takes a less than usual overview of the period, and tackles
developments in English life from the Reformation to the Civil War.
Bosworth Field and the Wars of the Roses (1966) by A L Rowse. A thoroughly well-written account of how, by fair means
and foul, the Tudors seized the English throne.
The English Reformations (1993) by C A Haigh. A so-called revisionist account of the Reformation not as an event but as a
series of processes. This work encapsulates the new consensus.
The Court of Henry VIII (1985) by David Starkey. A well-illustrated and vividly written account of the behind-the-scenes
history of the king's reign. By emphasizing faction and not policy, Starkey brings alive the cut and thrust of the age.
Thomas More (1985) by Richard Marius. A highly controversial account of the martyr's life. Seeing him as much as sinner as
saint, this is one of the more engaging of psychobiographies.
The Causes of the English Civil War (1990) by Conrad Russell. A forensic account of early Stuart history, where this son of
the philosopher Bertrand Russell dissects what we mean by causes.
England's great civil war of the mid-17th century continues to divide modem historians just as much as it did contemporary
observers. Did it have long-term causes, or was it really the result of Charles's political incompetence? Even the Marxist
interpretations of the 1960s were foreshadowed by 17th-century writers, some of whom felt that the transference of land and
power to the gentry after the Dissolution of the Monasteries left the crown at the mercy of its enemies. In the past 20 years,
revisionists have eschewed deep-seated reasons for the conflict, but in recent years a return to old-fashioned `telling the story'
has reasserted the notion of constitutional conflict between the crown and Parliament.
Having by our late labours and hazards made it appear to the world at how high a cost we value our just freedom, and God
having so far owned our caused as to deliver the enemies thereof into our hands, we do hold ourselves bound in mutual duty to
each other to take the best care we can for the future, to avoid both the danger of returning into a slavish condition and the
disagreable remedy of war.
THE AGREEMENT OF THE PEOPLE, 1647
History of England from the Accession of James 1 to the Outbreak of the Civil War (1880s) by S R Gardiner. These ten
volumes remain the best (and best-written) account of the lead-up to the Civil War. Gardiner's stock rises and falls, but
successive generations of historians can never quite escape from his shadow. Not easy to find, but a good library will be able to
help.
The Fall of the British Monarchies 1637-1642 (1991) by Conrad Russell. A bold attempt to use narrative detail to explain the
Civil War partly as a short-term failure but also to show how difficult it was for Charles I to rule together an Anglican England,
a Presbyterian Scotland, and a largely Catholic Ireland.
The Reign of King Pyre (1941) by J A Hexter. Remains a powerful account of one of Charles I's most brilliant opponents.
Despite its age, it reveals the complexities of the age.
Charles I and the Popish Plot (1983) by Caroline Hibbard. Details not only the fears of antipopery in England, but also
Charles's somewhat naive attempts to have a diplomatic rapprochement with Rome.
Oliver Cromwell (1991) by B Coward. The most fair-minded and unsensational account of a character who still arouses much
controversy.
The Rise of the New Model Army (1979) by Mark Kishlansky. This is the new military history at its best, explaining how
military studies cannot be divorced from a wider understanding of politics and society.
The English Bible and the Seventeenth Century Revolution (1994) by Christopher Hill. A subtle study of the role of
ideology by the greatest Marxist historian of the 1960s.
The Menial World of Stuart Women (1987) by Sara Heller Mendelson. Though not strictly speaking on the Civil War, this
does help us understand how, in any time of historical crisis, women come to the fore in society.
Charles I on Horseback (1972) by Roy Strong. A fascinating account of the image of a king.
Divine Right and Democracy (1986) edited by D Wooton. A comprehensive selection of writings, ranging from James I's views
on kingship to the radical thoughts of the interregnum.
The period after the return of Charles lI to the accession of Queen Victoria in 1837 saw England finally transformed from a
rural monarchy to an industrialized democracy. The foundations were laid for the Industrial Revolution as well as for a
worldwide empire overseas. A new national identity was painstakingly, and not wholly successfully, created as the notion of
Britishness' evolved.
In every party there are two sorts of men, the Rigid and the Supple. The
Rigel are an intractable race of mortals, who act upon principle. These are
persons of a stubborn, unpliant morality. The Supple, who pay their homage
to places, are as ready to change their conduct as their fashion.
ABRIDGED FROM THE TATTLER, 1710
Court and Country 1658-1714 (1978) by J R Jones. An excellent introduction to the politics and culture of the age.
The Restoration (1987) by Ron Hutton. A highly intelligent account of the return of the House of Stuart.
Queen Anne (1984) by Edward Gregg. Deals with a much neglected monarch, in whose reign the relative decline of the
monarchy is particularly apparent.
George L Elector and King (1978) by Ragnhild Hatton. Probes how a Hanoverian monarch came to occupy the British throne
and how his distance from the minutiae of English politics was a fillip to the growth of parliamentary government.
Jacobitism and the English People (1989) by P K Monod. Analyses the role of those who never quite came to terms with the
Glorious Revolution and also casts much light on Scotland's absorption into the British kingdom.
English Politics and the American Revolution (1976) by John Derry. Deals with the loss of the American colonies and the
divisions in England which precipitated it.
The Transformation of England (1979) by Peter Mathias. Remains the best introduction into the problems behind the notion
of an industrial revolution.
A Polite and Commercial Society (1989) by P Langford. This has become almost an instant classic, as he deals with the social
transformation of England.
Selections from the Tatler and the Spectator (1982) edited by A Ross. The liveliness of journalistic commentary in its first,
golden, age is apparent on every page of these short extracts from the two leading journals of the 18th century.
Nineteenth-century British history has something of a `bad' reputation, partly because too much of the work achieved by
historians has concentrated on the political aspects of the period. As a result they have succeeded in producing rather dry and
complex accounts. That the 19th century holds considerable interest is clear in the continued popularity of its great writers -
Charles Dickens, Anthony Trollope, Thomas Hardy - and good history can only further this. The books that follow are intended
to represent this, providing readable coverage of all facets of a remarkable century of innovation and change.
The history of the Victorian Age will never be written: we know too
much about it. For ignorance is the first requisite of the historian -
ignorance, which simplifies and clarifies, which selects and omits, with
a placed perfection unattainable by the highest art.
LYTTON STRACHEY
British History 181.-1906 (1991) by N McCord. Another superb work from the exemplary Short Oxford History of the
Modern World series. The frequent use of headings and subheadings makes the narrative very easy to follow and absorb;
couple this with a comprehensive bibliography and useful appendices and one gets the ideal introduction to 19th-century
British history.
The Age of Improvement 1783-1867 (1959) by Asa Briggs. Standing the test of time, this seminal work is still `total history'
at its most accessible. Starting from the premise that the Industrial Revolution initiated an age of progress, Professor Briggs
writes in what can only be described as an optimistic style, touching on fields as diverse as science and literature to produce a
comprehensive overview of the period.
The Crisis of Imperialism 1865-1915 (1974) by Richard T Shannon. A lucid rendering of a period full of imperial
confrontations and complicated diplomacy, helped by a very useful chronology and biographical notes on the major figures in
foreign affairs. In spanning the centuries Shannon is able to show the failure of those involved to adapt their strategies to the
changing situation, thus turning the great game of imperialism into one with consequences as catastrophic as World War I.
Aristocracy and People 1815-65 (1979) by Norman Gash. A very readable account of British political history, going beyond
the major characters to produce a fascinating insight into the working of a political system. Particularly strong on the author's
specialities in this period, notably popular unrest and Robert Peel.
Portrait of an Age: Victorian England (1953) by G M Young. When a historical work begins with `A boy bom in 1810 ...'
one knows that one is in for a treat and Young does not disappoint. Written from an insider's point of view, it charts the rapid
developments in all spheres of life during the Victorian era, creating in the reader's mind a mental picture which only the
greatest of writers can produce.
The Origins of Modern British Society I780-1880 (1969) by Harold Perkin. Thoroughly researched and convincingly argued,
this is an engaging approach to social history and its bearings on political events. Stating that an industrial revolution initiated a
concomitant social one, Perkin expounds the theory that just as technology is one step ahead of industry, so was society ahead
of political action in the 19th century.
Gladstone 1809-74 (1986) by H C G Matthew .Towering like a leviathan over the second half of the century, Gladstone
provided in his copious diaries rich pickings for the biographer. The merit of Matthew's account is his ability to make a
complex man understandable without ever divorcing him from his age.
The Making of Victorian England (1962) by G Kitson Clark. Distilled from a course of lectures, this series of essays retains
the rhetorical flair that made Kitson Clark such a sought-after speaker. At times overscholarly, this is still a stimulating book,
although not one to be tackled without some knowledge of the period.
Historians faced with assessing Britain in the 20th century are liable to be over-come by the wealth of evidence they have to
work with and the plethora of approaches open to them. It is undoubtedly a challenge but one well worth con-fronting, offering
insight into the current state of Britain and even welcoming prediction. Working so close to one's own time does carry the
pitfall of partiality, but in the recommended reading that follows, the emphasis is very much on history and not on current
affairs. It is too early to draw up a definitive list of topics that have shaped Britain in this all too unstable century, but attention
should be directed away from the `high' areas of parliamentary politics towards the growing power of society.
Great Britain has lost an empire and has not yet found a role.
DEAN ACHESON
Empire, Welfare, Europe: English History 1906-1992 (1993) by T 0 Lloyd. A well-structured book covering the
predominant historical themes in chronological order. Ideal as an introduction, with a comprehensive bibliography and a very
useful set of factual appendices.
English History 1914-1945 (1976) by A J P Taylor. Taylor's outstanding answer to his critics' accusations of `popularism', a
book to be savoured rather than dismissed. The erudition shines through without ever obscuring a fascinating story of rapid
political change, told in Taylor's always readable style.
The People's Peace: British History 1945-1990 (1992) by K 0 Morgan. A rare example of recent events being treated as
historical occurrences rather than current affairs. Morgan's objectivity never wavers, producing a lucid and entertaining account
of Britain after World War II.
The Development of the British Economy 1914-1980 (1993) by Sidney Pollard. A book which makes economics
understandable without recourse to complicated theories. Very strong on economic data, at times distractingly so, it charts the
relative decline of Britain's economy in all too vivid detail.
Churchill: A Life (1991) by Martin Gilbert. To produce a multivolume biography of Churchill was a labour of love; to mm it
into a comprehensive single edition must rank as a magisterial work of revision. This elegant account throws light both on
Britain's most eminent politician of the century and on the overseas affairs in which he made his reputation.
British Society since 1945 (1982) by Arthur Marwick. A stimulating analysis of Britain's fluctuating social structure, charting
the erosion of social class in the face of economic segregation.
The Eclipse of a Great Power: Modern Britain 1870-1975 (1983) by Keith Robbins. An excellent account of the demise of
the British Empire and the various positions Britain adopted in an attempt to keep its place on the world stage. Major
involvements are described in clear terminology, making the interests of Britain clear at all times.
State and Society: British Political and Social History 1870-1992 (1994) by Martin Pugh. An interesting work which places
the main streams of political and social thought into a chronological framework. A sense of Britai 's inexorable decline
pervades the book, leading to assertions which can best be described as debatable.
USA: FROM THE 17TH CENTURY TO THE CIVIL WAR
Peter Martland
Understanding American history before the dawn of the modem era is fraught with difficulties. The colonial period (between
1607 and 1776) can be seen as a chronicle of settlement, expansion, and exploitation of the eastern hinterland of what became
the USA. Against a background of social and economic development, the great cities of colonial America - Williamsburg,
Philadelphia, and New York - were created, as were the institutions, like the slave trade, that dominated and eventually
consumed the southern USA. Cutting across these developments were political moves - based on an ideology of reason and
enlightenment - that led eventually to independence in 1776. The enduring interest in the Revolution, the founding fathers, and
the first formative decades of the Union continues to inspire historians to research and produce books of both scholarly and
general appeal. Those listed below reflect a tiny proportion of the most interesting, readable, and enjoyable.
We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal,
that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable rights, that
among these are life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness.
THOMAS JEFFERSON (DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE 1776)
Colonial British America (1984) edited by J Greene and J Pole. A comprehensive set of essays covering both the issues and
the contrasting approaches to them. The editors' introduction and conclusion gives the work a structure often lacking in
collections of essays, while a useful index provides summaries of the major texts cited.
Red, White and Black: The Peoples of Early America (1974) by Gary B Nash. An outstanding work in the field of
indigenous culture which has so dominated American history in the last few decades. As the title suggests, this book deals with
issues concerning Native Americans, settlers, and blacks and their all too antagonistic relations without ever resorting to
generalizations or dogma.
The Economy of Colonial America (1980) by Edwin J Perkins. By comparing the English and American economies, Perkins
is able to provide arresting angles on economic development which would be lacking from a more orthodox history of the
economy.
America at 1750 (1971) by Richard Hofstadter. Limiting oneself to a fixed date can often be disastrous in historical analysis
but Hofstadter carries it off with aplomb, catching the American Zeitgeist through a heady mix of primary sources and
anecdotal evidence.
Entertaining Satan: Witchcraft and the Culture of Early New England (1982) by J Demos. Combining biographical,
psychological, sociological, and historical approaches, this work weaves an inescapable spell, the lure of speculation having
been avoided through concentrated original research.
The Urban Crucible (1979) by Gary B Nash. Good history is often achieved through novel approaches. This is certainly true
in this book. For Nash, by eschewing the agricultural base of early America and concentrating on the significant growth in the
mercantile sector, brilliantly succeeds in presenting detailed argument without losing the reader's attention. At times overtly
Marxist in interpretation, it is nevertheless a work which demands at the very least recognition and partial acceptance from Al
quarters.
The Glorious Cause (1982) by Robert Middlekauff. A superb narrative of the complicated events which together form one of
the most fascinating areas of American historical research: the Revolution. The extraordinary detail within this book never
impinges on the story being told, this asset most apparent in Middlekauff's descriptions of the military encounters.
An Economic Interpretation of the Constitution of the United States (1913) by Charles Beard. This timeless seminal work
emphasizes the weight given by the founding fathers to economic interests as forces in politics and in the formation of laws and
constitutions.
The Era of Good Feelings (1963) by George Dangerfield. Covering the period from Thomas Jefferson to Andrew Jackson,
this is a very well-written account, highlighting the change in both policies and personalities that occurred between their
presidencies.
Liberty and Slavery: Southern Politics to 1860 (1983) by W J Cooper. Concentrating on the area of `high' politics in the
Southern states, Cooper's account conveys the sense of an enclosed world, a feeling that is instrumental to understanding the
Civil War.
Journey to America (1833; 1959) by Alexis de Tocqueville. This celebrated early 19th century account of American political
and social institutions has successfully weathered the passage of time. It is as relevant to our understanding the America of
today as it is to understanding the times in which it was set.
In the 80 years between the outbreak of the US Civil War in 1861 and the attack on Pearl Harbor in 1941 (which brought the
USA into World War II), the nature of the country underwent a fundamental transformation, changing it from a predominantly
rural society with an economy based largely on agriculture, into a mainly urban society underpinned by what had by 1941
become the world's most powerful manufacturing and financial base. These dramatic changes were set against the back-ground
of the Civil War and its aftermath, the opening up of the West and the influx of more than 25 million European immigrants
seeking a better life. In an attempt to under-stand this extraordinary period of dynamic change, historians have over the years
produced a wide array of books aimed at both the academic and general reader. The list below provides merely a small sample
of recent and classic texts of this time.
The Origins of America's Civil War (1981) by Bruce Collins. Although designed primarily as a guide for students, this is an
instructive work, covering both events and issues in a concise style which never strays into patronizing the general reader. As
well as very helpful biographical notes and chronologies, it also sports a comprehensive reading list.
Battle Cry of Freedom: The Era of the Civil War (1988) by J M McPherson. This is an example of that rare kind of history
which transports one back to the age it is describing, so vivid is the picture which McPherson paints. It is `total' history at its
best, covering numerous fields and achieving an almost seamless mix of popular and scholarly style.
Why The South Lost the Civil War (1986) by Richard E Beringer, Herman Hathaway, Archer Jones, and William N Still.
This work demonstrates the relationship between military success, morale, and will and the weakness of Confederate national-
ism when undermined by battlefield defeat.
The Age of Reform (1955) by Richard Hofstadter. This Pulitzer-prizewinning account covers the period from 1880 to 1940
and it makes compulsive reading. Hofstadter's premise is that the prominent political ideology during this half-century of
dramatic change remained a constant one of conservative individualism, a bold statement but one that puts a new perspective
on much of American policy.
Invisible Immigrants (1972) by Charlotte Erickson. The act of emigration led many ordinary working people to record their
actions and attitudes. Charlotte Erickson's meticulous - though highly accessible - scholarship reveals a host of insights into the
greatest movement of people the world has ever seen.
The United States Since 1865 (1960) by John A Krout. This standard college text has inspired two generations of students to
know and understand their country. Structured as a survey of the period between the end of the Civil War and the end of World
War II, this work is highly readable by either students or the general reader.
Theodore Roosevelt: Culture, Diplomacy and Expansion (1985) by Richard H Collins. In this book Collins attempts to re-
evaluate the presidency of America's first larger-than-life imperial president: Theodore Roosevelt. Specifically, the creation of
an American empire to reposition the USA internationally. Collins also chronicles Roosevelt's domestic legacy, from the
creation of the National Park Service to trust-busting.
The Origins of the Second World War: American Foreign Policy and World Politics 1917-f1 (1975) by Arnold A Offner. A
brave book which confronts the widely held view that American foreign policy was isolationist and self-interested. Through a
close analysis of America's relationship with the other world powers, it shows that even the prewar world was a close-knit one
in which America was unable to stand as alone as perhaps it would have liked or tried to make it seem.
The Great Depression: America, 1929-41 (1985) by R S McElvaine. The strength of this work is its appreciation of the
effects that abstract economic concepts have on the lives of all those who work for a living. It manages to transfer figures into
feelings and provides a sobering read without ever straying into wild accusation.
It seems almost as if the USA, during the past 60 years, has been on a fast-moving roller coaster. It began with the triumph of
World War II, continued through an age of boundless self-confidence which collapsed in the agonies of the fight for civil rights,
political assassinations, the searing trauma of the war in Vietnam, the political scandal of Watergate and the politics of Ronald
Reagan and beyond. To encapsulate this period of dramatic events and other equally rapid changes in American society is
enough to tax the skills of even the greatest of historians. Below are some of the best and most readable works of this period.
As a bibliography it is designed primarily to stimulate the reader into looking anew at the nation which more than any other
defines the society we live in today.
Ask not what your country can do for you - ask what
you can do for your country.
JOHN F KENNEDY
In the Shadow of FDR: From Harry Truman to Ronald Reagan (1983) by William E Leuchtenburg. Although he died in
1945, the legacy Franklin Delano Roosevelt left behind has dominated the American political landscape. In this highly readable
book, William Leuchtenburg assesses and analyses that legacy in terms of Roosevelt's successors.
Since 1900: A History of the United States in Our Times (1959) by Oscar Theodore Barch Jr and Nelson Manfred Blake. By
describing America's political, economic, social, diplomatic, and military history, this narrative succeeds in explaining the
American experience of the first six decades of the 20th century.
The Rise and Fall of the New Deal Order America 1930-1980 (1991) edited by Steve Fraser and Gary Gersthe. In the wake
of Ronald Reagan's watershed triumph in 1980, Fraser and Gersthe intended this work as an historical autopsy. In fact they
attempt to identify and account for two generations of political thought and activity in the USA. However, in the end, the focus
of the work has to be the decline and fall of the New Deal order.
A History of Our Time: Readings in Post War America (1983) edited by William H Chafe and Harvard Sitkoff. Arguing that
contemporary America arose as a result ofchanges that have taken place since the beginning of World War II, the contributors
of this scholarly work chronicle and interpret various aspects of modern American history. The themes evaluated include the
sources of the Cold War, McCarthyism, the civil-rights movement, and the politics of the 1960s and 1970s.
The Unfinished Journey: America since World War II (1986) by William H Chafe. Set against the background of the
_USA's emergence as the world superpower at the end of World War II, Chafe's book charts in a highly distinctive manner the
radical changes in American society after 1945, the Cold War, the movement towards civil rights, and the agony of Vietnam.
American High: The Year of Confidence: 1945-1960 (1986) by William L O'Neill. By using the novel - though controversial
- device of juxtapositioning US national policy with social developments between 1945 and 1960, O'Neill succeeds in
reinterpreting American history and placing it in a fresh perspective.
The Struggle for Black Equality: 1954-1980 (1980) by Harvard Sitkoff. This book is concerned with one of the most
significant developments in American history: the struggle for racial equality and justice waged between 1954 and 1980. A
highly read-able narrative, placing as it does the civil-rights movement into a clear perspective. An excellent bibliographical
essay at the end of the book provides a helpful jumping-off point for further reading.
AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND
David Lowe and Ruth Brown
Histories of Australia and New Zealand after the white settlement have in common the themes of British peoples exploring,
landing, carrying out ever-expanding economic activity, and developing political systems, and all this with consequences for
the respective indigenous populations. For a short time late in the 19th century, when New Zealanders took part in discussions
leading to the federation of Australia's separate states, it seemed that their destinies would be more closely entwined, but New
Zealand did not, in the end, join. In the 20th century the two countries have had very different experiences of immigration, of
indigene-white relations, and relations with other states within the Asica-Pacific region.
How funny it'll seem to come out among the people that walk with
their heads downwards! The Antipathies, I think ... Please, Ma'am,
is this New Zealand or Australia?
LEWIS CARROLL
Pastiche I: Reflections on Nineteenth-Century Australia (1994) edited by Penny Russell and Richard White. An excellent
collection of essays on early Aboriginal-colonial, social, cultural, political, and economic history of Australia, which also
delves deep into the whole exercise of constructing histories of this period.
A Land Half Won (1980) by Geoffrey Blainey. A classic and influential account of the expansion and (imitations of Australain
capitalist endeavour, especially in the 19th century.
The Australian Colonists: An Exploration of Social History 1788-1870 (1974) by K S Inglis. A very good, readable survey
of Australian social history in the 19th century, charting the development of the colonies and the changes to white Australian
society after its convict origins.
The Australian Legend (1958) by Russel Ward. The classic and much debated account of the bush-worker inspired
egalitarianism and mateship in Australian society, the legacy of which remains today.
The Oxford History of Australia volume 2 1770-1860: Possessions (1992) by Jan Kocumbas. The first volume in the Oxford
series after white settlement is a good introduction to a thematic but integrated account of Australia's convicts' and colonizers'
founding years and directions of expansion.
The Oxford History of Australia volume 3 1860-1900: Glad, Confident Morning (1992) by Beverly Kingston. Kingston
sees the second half of the century as one of the most creative periods for the building of Australian institutions and beliefs.
Her chapters on beliefs and the nature of politics are especially good.
Frontier: Aborigines, Settlers and Land (1981) by Henry Reynolds. A pioneering attempt to reconstruct the Aboriginal
perspective of Aboriginal-European contact. Reynolds has also written on other dimensions of this contact, and is the most
influential historian in this field.
Old New Zealand (1863) by F E Manning. A personal account by a timber trader who lived among the Maoris in the early
days of white settlement, who wrote with an affection for the time and the people with whom he lived.
The Long White Cloud (1898) by W P Reeves. A highly readable account by a prominent politician and historian who wrote
with classical 19th-century Whiggish optimism. New Zealand is proclaimed to be God's Own Country and a working man's
paradise.
The New Zealand Wars and the Victorian Interpretation of Racial Conflict (1986) by James Belich. In lively style, Belich
dismantles the Victorian conviction that Britain always won its battles against `savages' in the Maori wars. He shows that only
overwhelming numbers enabled the British to defeat the tactically superior Maoris.
A Nation at Last? The Changing Character of Australian Nationalism 1888-1988 (1988) by S Alomes. A readable romp
through the meanings and experiments of Australian nationalists who, for most of this century, had to contend with the
formidable norm of the independent Australian Briton'. Alomes finds, perhaps harshly, that much so-called nationalism left a
lot to be desired, or was stifled by Australian imperial cronies.
Australia in Peace and War (1991) by T B Millar. A very digestible history of Australia's overseas relations, including
involvement in both world wars, Korea, and Vietnam. The balance is even, if mildly conservative, and this book serves as an
excel-lent introduction for those wishing to explore further in this field.
A Nation for a Continent (1977) by Russel Ward. Three-quarters of 20th-century Australia through the eyes of a nationalist
historian, concerned especially with politics and economics.
Immigration (1991) by James Jupp. The best introduction to one of the greatest themes in 20th-century Australia's history.
This is a well-rounded account, not avoiding the `white Australia' policy nor other hard questions that immigration has posed,
but convincingly optimistic about the consequences of immigration for Australia.
After Mabo: Interpreting Indigenous Traditions (1993) by Tim Rowse. A very important interpretation of the consequences
of the Australian High Court's recent ruling on the validity of Aboriginal legal title to areas of land. Aboriginality, politics, land,
and even sovereignty are discussed.
The Oxford History of Australia volume 4 1901-1942: The Succeeding Age (1986) by S Macintyre. One of the best
volumes in the Oxford history series. Macintyre is especially strong on social and economic themes between federation and the
early years of World War IT.
The Oxford History of Australia volume 5 1942-1988: The Middle Way (1990) by G Bolton. The final instalment in the
Oxford series is very good on expansion and prosperity after World War H, and on the periodization of modem Australian
history.
The End of Certainty: The Story of the 1980s (1992) by Paul Kelly. An account of how Australia's certainties, such as a huge
social welfare net, a `white' immigration policy, protection for local industry, and high fixed wages, were dismantled during the
political-economic revolution of the 1980s. Kelly's `certainty' that the new deregulated direction is the only path for the future
is also challenging.
The Bone People (1984) by Keri Hulme. Winner of the Booker Prize in 1986, and probably the most famous New Zealand
novel. It is a rich mixture of colloquial and mandarin styles, of unreal magic and harrowing violence, but most of all it is
imbued with Maori spirituality.
To the Is-Land (1982) by Janet Frame. The first of a three-part autobiography, this is an evocative and often very funny
account of growing up in New Zealand between the world wars, capturing especially the school fare of Romantic poetry and
empire worship in that period.
HISTORY OF AFRICA
David M Anderson
Since its birth as an academic subject in the early 1960s, the field of African history has blazed pioneering trails in historical
method and inquiry. New sources are constantly being found, unearthed in archaeological excavations, collected as oral
literature and histories, and recovered from libraries and archives, which deepen our knowledge of the African past and raise
yet new questions to be answered. The scope and variety of research and writing is simply breathtaking, as many of the
following titles indicate.
The heroism of African history is to be found not in the deeds of kings but in the struggles of ordinary people against the forces
of nature and the cruelty of men.
JOHN ILIFFE
History of Africa (1989) by Kevin Shillington. A very readable general introduction to the African past. A good starting point.
African Civilisations: Precolonial Cities and States in Tropical Africa (1987) by Graham Connah. A lucid synthesis of the
many complex societies of precolonial Africa, with plenty of illustrations and good maps.
Paths in the Rainforest (1993) by Jan Vansina. A classic work from one of the founding fathers of the academic study of
African history, which reconstructs the history of political traditions across the vastness of equatorial Africa.
The African Poor: A History (1987) by John Iliffe. This wonderfully engaging book spans medieval to modem Africa to argue
that the nature of poverty has been gradually changing as demographic patterns adjust the balance between land and labour.
Way of Death (1989) by Joseph C Miller. The best account of the Atlantic slave trade, richly textured and beautifully written.
It deals with the history of the trade from Angola.
How Europe Underdeveloped Africa (1972) by Walter Rodney. This polemical account of European economic pillage
remains essential to any discussion of the impact of colonialism.
The Making of Contemporary Africa (1984) by Bill Freund. A succinct history of Africa since 1800, thematically organized
to emphasize the social changes brought about by colonialism.
Magomero: Portrait of an African Village (1987) by Landeg White. A microhistory of the village where David Livingstone
set up the ill-fated mission to central Africa, this beautifully crafted book brings the experience of Africans to life.
The Scramble for Africa (1991) by Thomas Pakenham. This big, stylishly written book provides a colourful account of the
European conquest of Africa at the end of the 19th century.
Studies in the Economic and Social History of the Witwatersrand 1886-1914 (1982) by Charles van Onselen. Essays on the
astonishingly rapid transformations thatshook the Witwatersrand after the discovery of gold. The author is South Africa's
leading historian.
20TH-CENTURY AFRICA
David M Anderson
There is hardly a country in Africa that has not been beset by immense civil traumas of one kind or another in the final quarter
of the 20th century. Among Africans themselves, and in the writings of those in the Western world, it is not surprising that the
search for the causes and the cures of these crises should dominate all else. But alongside the image of modern Africa as a
continent of famine, war, and suffering are other images too: images of rich cultural diversity, of artistic creativity, of
innovation, of astonishing endurance, and of personal and collective dignity.
Africa (1995) edited by Phyllis Martin and Dan O'Meara. These essays offer an excel-lent introduction to the history and
contemporary society of the African continent.
The Invention of Africa (1989) by V Y Mudimbe. Africa's best-known philosopher here discusses the multiple layers that
form the foundation of contemporary African society. A thoughtful, erudite, and at times very surprising book.
In My Father's House: Africa in the Philosophy of Culture (1992) by K Antony Appian. Another study which ranges widely
through Africa's historical experience and sociological heritage to present an interpretation of the distinctiveness of African
culture.
Siaya (1989) by Atieno Odhiambo and David W Cohen. This highly original book takes cameos of life in a rural district of
western Kenya to reflect upon the wider sociology, politics, and culture of modem Africa.
The State in Africa: The Politics of the Belly (translated 1993) by jean-Francois Bayart. Originally published in French, this
brilliant and challenging work analyses the dynamics of political culture in modern Africa.
Africa in Crisis: The Causes and Cures of Environmental Bankruptcy (1985) by Lloyd Timberlake. Hard-hitting populist
polemic, published by the pressure group Earthscan, advocating a wholesale reappraisal of economic and environmental
policies in Africa.
More People, Less Erosion: Environmental Recovery in Kenya (1994) by Mary Tiffen, Michael Mortimore, and Francis
Gichuki. An important book which presents significant evidence of innovation in African agriculture to counter the pervasive
view of decay and productive decline.
Conservation in Africa: People, Policies, Practice (1987) edited by David Anderson and Richard Grove. These essays,
mostly written by social scientists, deal with aspects of the conflicts between the conservation of wildlife and habitat and
economic development.
The Anti-Politics Machine (1990) by James Ferguson. This influential and very readable critique of the development process
takes projects in Lesotho as its focus.
Twentieth-Century South Africa (1995) by William Beinart. The best available account of modem South Africa, telling the
story of segregation, apartheid, and liberation struggle up to the elections of 1994.
When we speak of the history of the Middle East, we are almost certainly speaking of the history of Islam, which emerged in
Arabia in the 7th century AD and rapidly expanded through military-political conquest and conversion for the next two
centuries. It is easy to see Islamic history in the form of a tree, which grew from a single stem and then branched out into the
separate histories of the states that emerged as central authority in the Islamic empire weakened, particularly in Turkey and
Iran. Although it is a common error nowadays to speak of Islam as a single thing, like `Christendom', because of its huge
cultural variety, the Islamic tradition and its history give a unity to the Middle East, north and Saharan Africa, Central Asia, and
parts of the Indian subcontinent. To understand the Islamic religion, it is important to have a familiarity with its early history,
and its early political and doctrinal splits.
Muhammad (1971) by Maxime Rodinson. Stimulating work by a French Marxist on the Prophet's life and the founding of the
original Islamic state.
The Venture of Islam: Conscience and History in a World Civilization three volumes (The Classical Age of Islam, The
Expansion of Islam in the Middle Period, The Gunpowder Empire and Modern Times) by Marshall G S Hodgson. A penetrative
and detailed interpretive history of Islamic civilization, from the time of Muhammad to the Ottoman era.
A History of Medieval Islam (1965) by J J Saunders. Gives a good sweep of the development of Islamic civilization covering
the time of the Prophet, the `rightly guided Caliphs' who succeeded him, the empires of the Umayyad and Abbasid caliphs, the
Fatimid anticaliphate, the Seljuk Turks, the Crusades, and the Mongol invasions, which culminated in the Muslim defeat in the
sack of Baghdad in 1258.
The Crusades through Arab Eyes (1984) by in Maalouf. One of Lebanon's best living writers compiled this account from
contemporary Arabic sources.
The Assassins: A Radical Sect in Islam (1967) by Bernard Lewis. The best avail-able book on Hassan Sabah, the `Old Man of
the Mountain', and his faction of the Ismaili sect.
The Ottoman Centuries (1977) by Lord Kinross. A good one-volume history of the Ottoman Empire.
Mystical Dimensions of Islam (1975) by Annemarie Schimmel. The best single-volume account of Sufism, the mystical
tradition of Islam.
A History of Islamic Philosophy (1983) by Majid Fakhry. A detailed historical survey which discusses the legalism,
rationalism, and mysticism of Islamic thought.
An Anthology of Islamic Literature: From the Rise of Islam to Modern Times (1964) edited by James Kritzeck. An
anthology representing a wide range of literary traditions.
Following the collapse and carving up of the Ottoman Empire after World War I, and the abolition of the caliphate - the symbol
of Muslim unity - by Mustafa Kemal Atatiirk, the Arab world was left destabilized. British and French suzerainty between the
World Wars was replaced by Cold War rivalry, with the USA supporting Israel and the USSR the Arab nations. Ethnic conflict
flared between Arabs and Israelis in 1948119 after Israel's foundation as a state in Palestine, and erupted again in 1967 (the Six
Days War) and 1973 (the Yom Kippur War). The economic power of Arab states was demonstrated in the world-wide oil crisis
precipitated after the 1973 war, and Pan-Arabism and Islamic fundamentalism were touted as genuine Arab alter-natives to the
Western-style national structures created after World War I. However, the Iran-Iraq War in the 1980's and the contribution of
most Arab nations to the defeat of Saddam Hussein in the Gulf War of 1990-91 demonstrated these ideas' limited practical
usefulness. Whether the 1993 PLO-Israeli peace agreement demonstrated a new realism remains to be seen.
The Near East Since the First World War (1991) by M E Yapp. Clear narrative account focussing on individual national
histories and their relation to the international and economic dimensions.
The Longman Companion to the Middle East Since 1914 (1987) by Ritchie Overdale. Short introduction to the major topics
and a comprehensive reference section dealing with economic and social statistics, religion, and politics. In-depth guide to
further reading.
Politics in the Middle East (1992) by Elie Kedourie. Analysis of the different ideological bases of Middle Eastern attitudes.
A Peace to End All Peace: Creating the Modern Middle East, 1914-22 (1989) by David Fromkin. Account of the creation of
the modern states system after World War I.
Into the Labyrinth: The US and the Middle East 1945-1992 (1995) by H W Brands. Examines the role played by US
interest in oil, antipathy towards the USSR, and support for Zionism in influencing events in the Middle East.
The Gulf Conflict 1990-91 (1993) by Lawrence Freedman and Efraim Karsh. Definitive account of the Gulf War, covering its
origins, course, aftermath, and implications.
Visions and Marriages: The Middle East in a New Era (1995) by John Roberts. Discusses the prospects for peace following
the 1993 Israeli-PLO peace agreement; also looks at individual nations with assessments of the wider ideological and economic
situation.
The Israel-Arab Reader: A Documentary History of the Middle East Conflict (1985) edited by Walter Laquer and Barry
Rubin. Gathers together all the principal documents of the Israeli-Arab conflict, in the framework of a clear and concise
narrative.
INDIAN HISTORY
Burjor Avari
The earliest records of Indian history date back to the Indus Valley culture, about 5000 BC to 1500 BC. India's oldest religion,
Hinduism, originated during that period; but the finest of the Hindu religious literature dates after 1500 BC. A glorious and
enriching Hindu-Buddhist Jain civilization flourished in India between about 500 BC and AD 1000, and it exercised a major
cultural and intellectual influence upon its immediate and distant neighbours. Islamic influences became more marked after AD
1000, and Islamic political power reached its apogee under the great Moguls between 1526 and 1707. The British followed the
Moguls and, through the instrument of their Raj, Western civilization impacted upon India. The modern republics of India,
Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal are therefore heirs to a long and brilliant Asian civilization.
Not by wars and conquest has India influenced the outside world, but in the
subtler and deeper realms of imagination and thought.
PERCNAL SPEAR
The Penguin History of India (1990) by Romila Thapar and Percival Spear. These two short volumes are a useful
introduction for the beginner. Elegantly written by two of the greatest historians of India in the 20th century, they provide a
concise narrative of the entire span of Indian history.
The Wonder That Was India (1954; 1985) by A L Basham. A book that should be compulsory reading for all who are
obsessed with the superiority of European culture. With the help of a rich array of sources, the author explores the social,
cultural, andintellectual history of pre-Islamic India and provides evidence of the depth and width of Indian cultural influence
in the world at that time.
The Arts of India (1981) edited by Basil Gray. A comprehensive survey of the art styles of India, covering sculptures, temples,
and paintings from the earliest period of the Indus Valley culture to the late 20th century. The book examines the richness of the
native tradition and the skill with which foreign influences are blended in that tradition.
Al-Hind: The making of the Indo-Islamic World volume 1 (1990) by Andre Wink. Examines the first encounter of Islam
with India. This fascinating first volume looks at the four centuries between the 7th and the 11th centuries, the period before
the rise of Islamic military and political power in India but during which the commercial and cultural connections were already
beginning to draw India into the Islamic sphere of influence.
The Great Moghuls (1971) by Bamber Gascoigne. A sensitive study of the first six rulers of India's premier Muslim dynasty,
their pride and vanity, wealth and pomp, wisdom and justice, but, above all, their sophisticated culture and horrendous cruel-
ties. Anyone planning a tour of Mogul Indian sites will be well advised to read this book. There is also a TV series in six parts.
The Raj: India and the British 1600-I947 (1990) edited by C A Bayly. Contains valuable essays on a variety of social,
cultural, and intellectual themes that highlight the British presence in India. More than 500 illustrations of paintings,
photographs, furnishings, textiles, and artefacts further help to deepen our understanding of the British connection over nearly
350 years.
The Splendours of the Raj: British Architecture in India 1660 to 1947 (1985) by Philip Davies. The remarkable
architectural achievement of British India, in the shape of monuments and buildings, bridges and railway stations, military
headquarters and hill stations, gateways and gravestones, is brought to life in this book. The vision and motivation, style and
design, functions and usage, which guided the architects and builders are explained, with the help of numerous original
photographs.
Hobson fobson: a glossary of colloquial Anglo-Indian words and phrases and of kindred terms, etymological, historical,
geographical and discursive (1886) by Henry Yule and A C Burnell. Republished 1994 with a brilliant historical perspective by
Nirad Chaudhuri, the highly iconoclastic Indian writer of modern times. This volume of 1,000 pages is a mine of information
on how words of Indian and Oriental origin crept into English and how English words acquired new meanings in the Indian
context.
Divide and it (1964) by Penderel Moon. A first-hand description, by a member of the imperial Indian civil service, of the tragic
catastrophe that engulfed millions of people when British India was partitioned in 1947. A book to be read if we are to
understand the background of hostility between India and Pakistan.
Gandhi: The Traditional Roots of Charisma (1983) by Susanne Rudolph and Lloyd Rudolph. There is a vast literature on the
life and works of Mahatma Gandhi, the most influential Indian leader of this century. This slim but thought- provoking volume
argues that through the force of his ideas on courage, self-control, sacrifice, and morality Gandhi not only bequeathed to his
people a sense of worth about themselves but also helped to modernize them.
20TH-CENTURY INDIA
Mark Tully
India is the home of one of world's oldest civilizations, a civilization which still survives. It is the cradle of an ancient family of
religions. It has produced some of the greatest religious thinkers of all times, from the Buddha to Mahatma Gandhi. Its thought
is regarded by many scholars as deeper than European religion and philosophy. India has always been an important trading
centre. It has never been isolated, and has shoum a remarkable ability to absorb the thought of other parts of the world with-out
surrendering its own originality. It has been conquered but its civilization has never been overcome. It is one of the few
countries to emerge from colonization a stable democracy. With their education to freedom of speech and of thought, their
achievements in science and technology, their skills as traders, and their new- found freedom from bureaucratic socialism,
Indians are set to make their nation one of the great economic powers of the 21st century.
India has, more fully than any civilization on earth, past or present, explored, embodied the highest, the most all-embracing
realization of our human scope.
KATHLEEN RAINS
The Wonder That Was India (1954; many editions) by A L Basham. Still the best introduction to the foundations of Indian
civilization.
The Hindu View of We (1927; many editions) by Radhakrishnan. A concise and readable summary of the religion which is so
difficult to understand for those brought up in the tradition of Semitic religions.
The Ramayana (1982) and The Mahabharata (1978) by R K Narayan. Easily accessible retellings of the two great Hindu
epics.
Indian Muslims (1985) by M Mujeeb. A scholarly book on one of the world's largest Muslim communities and its interaction
with Indian thought.
The Men Who Ruled India (1985) by Philip Mason. A sympathetic history of British rule in India by a Briton who served in
the Indian civil service.
The Penguin History of India (1990) by Romila Thapar and Percival Spear. A concise history.
Jawaharlal Nehru (1975 onwards) by Sarvepalli Gopal. A biography in three volumes. Essential for understanding the conflict
that dominated the independence movement between the Indian thought of Mahatma Gandhi and Nehru's Western ideologies.
Essential also for understanding why Nehru's dream of an India modernized by European thought, political structures, and
technology failed.
Raag Darbari (1992) by Shrilal Shukla. A satirical novel written originally in Hindi, about the rural Hindi heartland and the
flaws in the political and administrative systems of independent India as they work in practice. Cynical but with the ring of
truth.
Stories about the Partition of India three volmnes (1994) edited by Bhalla Alok. This anthology of writing by Indian and
Pakistani authors looks at the event which still affects the politics of S Asia and the lives of millions of citizens nearly 50 years
after it took place.
Gandhi, Prisoner of Hope (1989) by Judith M Brown. A scholarly biography of one of the outstanding figures of the 20th
century. A useful compendium of Gandhi's thoughts on many subjects is The Mind of Mahatma Gandhi (1967), compiled and
edited by R K Prabhu and U R Rao.
CHINA
L B Lewis
European fascination with China began in the 13th century, when the Venetian Marco Polo visited the Far East. Interest is even
more intense today as we watch the developments of the world's most populous country - what will happen as China's
octogenarian leadership dies off, and when Hong Kong is returned to Chinese control in 1997? As a huge land with one of the
oldest continuous cultures in the world, China has much to see and much to understand. Reading Chinese history can become a
numbing procession of dates and dynastic changes, and the political and social chronology of the last 100 years is as complex
as that of any preceding period. Fortunately, it is much better documented. Recent events such as the Cultural Revolution
(1966-76) and the massacre of Chinese students in Tiananmen Square, Beijing, in 1989 provoke heated opinions which colour
most of the contemporary writing about China. Less controversial, Chinese art and literature (chiefly poetry), both dating back
more than 2,000 years, have attracted many Western admirers. Because of the differences between Chinese and European
languages, translation is particularly difficult. The words may be rendered more or less faithfu11y, but the distinctive style of
an author or a genre is often lost, and the economy of expression built into the Chinese language tends to make prose sound
simplified, like children's literature. Poetry may be more rewarding for the reader in translation.
Mao, the emperor, fitted one of the patterns of Chinese history: the leader of a
nationwide peasant uprising who swept away a rotten dynasty and became a
we new emperor exercising absolute authority. ,.. He enabled the Chinese
to feel great and superior again, by blinding them to the world outside.
JUl~'G CHANG
Riding the Iron Rooster: By Train Through China (1988) by Paul Theroux. There are two types of writing about travel in
China: the first cannot praise enough, and the second cannot damn enough. If one travels alone by train in the midst of ordinary
Chinese - as did the author - one is less insulated from sources of complaint than the pampered package tourist. Theroux
complains a great deal without giving the impression of hating every minute. He travelled for a whole year, over tens of thou-
sands of kilometres, when China was in a period of particularly rapid and baffling transition - when mobile phones, discos, and
other trappings of Western commercial culture were just beginning to flood the country. He had the advantage of having made
a previous trip, in 1980, against which to measure change. This comparison blends with his superb general knowledge of
Chinese culture and history in a dryly funny, unsentimental, unsparing narrative, letting readers share the experience of seeing
China with an exceptionally observant and amusing guide.
Ancestors (1988) by Frank Ching. For the Chinese, there is nothing more important than family - not merely the relatives alive
in the present, but also the history of those who lived long in the past. Chinese-American journalist Frank Ching, whose family
fled China when he was five, experienced profound isolation growing up away from his native land and unacquainted with a
large family he had only heard about. In August 1973, as an adult, he entered China in search of his roots. Aided by priceless
family documents, he soon found the grave of his clan's founder, the famous Song dynasty poet Qin Guan, who had lived 34
generations earlier. The story follows the Qin family through 1,000 years of Chinese history and tells the life stories of more
than a dozen of its major figures of different generations.
Chinese Encounters (1979) by Arthur Miller, photographs by Inge Morath. The Pulitzer prizewinning American playwright
and his wife visited China in 1978, when the country was just beginning to open up to the West. In addition to taking official
guided tours, they were able to meet and talk quite freely with Chinese writers, actors, and artists. Thus they were among the
first to publish the bitter feelings of educated Chinese about the years of repression under Mao Zedong's communist regime
(culminating in the Cultural Revolution of 1966-76 and its wide-scale persecutions), and their hopes for the future. The text is a
stately and sympathetic accompaniment to the photographs, many of them protracts in black and white, which are intimate and
moving.
Dragon Lady (1992) by Sterling Seagraves. The Dowager Empress Ci Xi was long believed in the West to have been the real
power behind the Chinese throne at the end of the last century. She died in 1908, leaving her two-year-old nephew P'u-i, the
last Chinese emperor, in the hands of his weak regent father and a powerful clique of advisers. Within three years the empire
was overthrown and a republic established. Ci Xi has commonly been portrayed as lewd, corrupt, and ruthless, to the extent of
murdering P'u-i's predecessor, her adopted son; she was said to have bankrupted the Chinese navy to build herself a marble
pleasure boat, at a time when the navy desperately needed funds to fight the encroaching Western powers and internal rebels.
Sterling Seagraves presents a very credible and entertaining case in Ci M's defence - including the motives of various parties
for slandering her - while giving a clear account of the power struggles in the disintegrating 2,000-year-old empire that led to
civil war.
Red Star over China (1937; revised edition 1968) by Edgar Snow. The classic con-temporary account of the progress of the
Chinese revolution by an `old China hand' who personally knew many of its leading figures: Mao Zedong, Zhou Enlai, General
Zhu De. In the aftermath of the Tiananmen Square massacre of 1989, it is easy to dismiss the Chinese communist regime as
merely bloodthirsty and totalitarian. To understand the faith placed by the Chinese people in the Party - and the extent of the
betrayal at Tiananmen - it is necessary to know something about how the communists came to be in power, and the hope they
offered in the early part of this century, when starvation, extortion by landlords, and terror at the hands of bandits were the
daily lot of China's ordinary people.
Wild Swans (1991) by Jung Chang. The best-selling story of three generations of Chinese women, encompassing all the
upheavals of the 20th century, from the chaotic early days of the new Chinese republic, through civil war and the long years of
Mao Zedong's rule, to economic reform and the Tiananmen Square tragedy. The author was the first mainland Chinese to be
awarded a doctorate at a British university.
Plum Blossom: Poems of Li Qingzhao (1980) translated by James Cryer. Li Qcngzhao (1084-c. 1150) was China's greatest
woman poet and belonged to one of the oldest literary traditions in the world. Her speciality was a form based on old songs,
retaining therhyme, tone, and line length but adding new words. Most classical Chinese poetry was inspired by nature; Li
Qingzhao's poems are also filled with images from the natural world, but she was one of the few poets who wrote what is
clearly love poetry. The delicacy and vividness of her work is captured in this translation. A glossary explains some of the
literary allusions that occur throughout the poems and are unfamiliar to Western readers.
The Private Life of Chairman Mao (1994) by Li Zhisui. As personal physician to the chairman of China's Communist Party
for several decades, Dr Li Zhisui was closer to Mao Zedong than almost anyone else. He knew not only the Great Leader at the
centre of a volatile personality cult, whose portrait decorated millions of Chinese homes from 1950 to 1976; he was also
intimately acquainted with Mao's physical and emotional make-up, his strengths and weaknesses - and the illnesses that these
factors exposed him to. It is to be expected that Li's position - the modem equivalent of court physician to an absolute monarch
- was an uncomfortable one, and that this book could not be written until the cult of Mao worship was truly disbanded.
JAPAN
Toshio Watanabe
Japan is a fascinating but not an enigmatic country. The easiest way to get to know modem Japan is to find a Japanese and
build up a friendly relationship involving the family. In order to get more general or specific information on Japan there are
excel-lent encyclopedias on Japan, such as the Cambridge
Encyclopedia of Japan (1993) edited by R Bowring and P Kornicki, which also has an annotated list of further reading. The
following list is a personal one which aims to stimulate the reader.
Zen in the Art of Archery (1953) by Eugen Herrigel. The best introduction to what satori, the enlightenment', in Zen means. It
has been criticized as hopelessly romantic, but he tries to be concise and avoids the usual abundance of florid adjectives
employed by Western writers. For further exploration of Zen, Daisetsu Suzuki and Alan Watts are the best guides.
Unbeaten Tracks in Japan (1880; 1984) by Isabella Bird. This book tells the story of an incredible journey to northern Japan
by an Englishwoman. It also shows Japan on the verge of modernization and gives a vivid insight into the lack of material
comfort in the Japanese hinterland which was eventually overcome in the 20th century.
Barefoot Gen (1987) and Barefoot Gen: The Day After (1988) by Keiji Nakazawa. Anybody concerned with nuclear
weapons should read this graphic novel depicting how the life of a very lively boy, Gen, is affected by the Hiroshima atom
bomb. The scenes depicted are appalling and not for the squeamish, but it is also an intensely humane story. Anybody still in
doubt should read the novel Black Rain by Masuji Ibuse.
A Japanese Mirror: Heroes and Villains of Japanese Culture (1984) by Ian Buruma. There are (too) many Western books
trying to explain contemporary Japanese culture, but this one is stimulating, brilliant, and most readable. This is a must for
anybody going to Japan.
Japan, Inc.: An Introduction toJapanese Economy (1988) by Shoaro Ishinomori. A graphic novel full of intrigues and even
love stories, but it gently gives information relating to complex economic jargon and explains specific economic situations.
Business people should find this book interesting. It represents an establishment view of Japan.
Underground in Japan (1992) by Ray Ventura. This is a real-life story of a Filipino illegal immigrant worker in Yokohama. It
shows the darker side of Japan, but is not a negative book. I particularly recommend this book to Japanese readers.
Kitchen (1993) by Banana Yoshimoto. Among the most accessible of the contemporary writers in Japan. As in the film
Tampopo, food and sexuality are intimately related in this novella. Those interested in the `modem classics' should read any
available works by Yasunari Kawabata, Yukio Mishima, Jun'ichiro Tanizaki., Kobo Abe, Shusaku Endo, or Kenzaburo Oe.
Points and Lines (1970) by Seicho Matsumoto. Japan has a flourishing crime and detective-story industry, though
unfortunately only a very few are translated into English. Perhaps the most senior figure is Seicho Matsumoto, who combines a
meticulous plot with social critique.
The last 30 years have witnessed remarkable breaktroughs in our understanding of the origins and accomplishments of pre-
Columbian civilizations in the Americas. The great riverine networks of the tropical forest lowlands are now known to have
fostered the beginnings of agriculture, settled village life, and ceramic an as early as the 4th millennium BC. Archaeologists, art
historians, epigraphists, anethnohistorians have combined to make inroads into the interpretation of Classic Maya and other
Central American writing systems, documenting fierce dynastic rivalries and the rise and fall of city-states. In South America,
independent cultures evolved successful adaptations to the harsh Andean environment, culminating in the Inca empire with its
distinctive calendar, cosmology, and agricultural know-how from which we still have much to learn today.
There I saw the things brought to the Emperor from the new land of gold ...
and I have never seen anything in my whole life that has cheered my
heart as much as these objects. In them I found wonderful artistic work
and admired the subtle genius of the men from these strange lands.
ALBRECHT DURER, EXAMINING THE OBJECTS SENT BY HERN.4N CORTES FROM
MEXICO TO HOLY ROMAN EMPEROR CHARLES V
General:
The Ancient Americas: Art from Sacred Landscapes (1992) edited by Richard F Townsend. A fascinating and beautifully
illustrated collection of essays ranging from the southwestern USA to Bolivia, addressing the ways in which pre-Columbian art
mediates between man and nature.
Central America:
The Gods and Symbols of Ancient Mexico and the Maya (1993) by Mary Miller and Karl Taube. The beginner's ABC guide
to the Mesoamerican pantheon. This illustrated dictionary is packed full of up-to-date information and makes it easy to cross-
reference subjects and themes.
The Blood of Kings: Dynasty and Ritual in Maya Art (1986) by Linda Schele and Mary Ellen Miller. Documents the
breakthroughs made by Mayan epigraphers in interpreting the significance of ritual bloodletting performed to celebrate
dynastic accession. Not for the faint-hearted!
Maya Cosmos: Three Thousand Years on the Shaman's Path (1993) by David Friedel, Linda Schele, and Joy Parker. An
exuberant synthesis of new thinking on many aspects of Maya cosmology and creation myths.
Scribes, Warriors and Kings: The City of Copan and the Ancient Maya (1991) by William L Fash. Summarizes recent
archaeological work at the site of one of the most powerful Classic Maya cities.
Teotihuacan: City of the Gods (1993) edited by Kathleen Berrin and Esther Pasztory. A well-illustrated, scholarly but
readable introduction to the singular nature of this great highland metropolis - one of the six largest cities in the world in its
hey-day during the early centuries AD.
South America:
The Incas and Their Ancestors (1992) by Michael E Moseley. The best recent introductory survey of the Andean cultures of
Peru for the general reader.
Chan and the Origins of Andean Civilization (1992) by Richard L Burger. A meticulous study of Chavin culture, the first
widespread art style in the Andes, focusing on one of the principal cult centres - Chavin de Huant:ar.
Ceramics of Ancient Peru (1992) by Christopher B Donnan. An attractive and accessible visual guide to the vibrant pottery
styles and technology of the best-known Andean cultures.
Inca Civilization in Cuzco (1990) by R Tom Zuidema. A demanding but rewarding concise guide to fundamental aspects of
Inca social organization.
The Tiwanaku: Portrait of an Andean Civilization (1993) by an L Kolata. An overview of the capital and ceremonial centre
lying at the heart of the pre-Inca Tiwanaku Empire, spectacularly located at an altitude of 3,600 m/12,000 ft on the Bolivian
Altiplano.
The `discovery' and conquest of the New World by Spain and Portugal, followed by the destruction of the great pre-Columbian
civilizations of the Aztecs and the Incas, has attracted a considerable amount of scholarship. There is a good deal of literature
also on the administration of the two empires and the attempts at `enlightened' reform at the end of the 18th century, as well as
on the nature of the various independence movements. Above all, in recent years The Cambridge History of Latin America
(1984), volumes 1 and 2 edited by Leslie Bethell, offers unrivalled coverage of such topics as the Spanish and Portuguese
conquests of Latin America, the effect of con-quest upon Indian society, Africans in Spanish-American colonial society,
economic organizations, political organization, the church, population, intellectual and cultural life.
I and my companions suffer from a disease of the heart
that can be cured only by gold.
HERNAN CORTES
The European Discovery of America (1971,1974) two volumes by Samuel Elliot Morrison. Contains enormous detail on the
early voyages of discovery, ships, crews, methods of navigation, and life at sea. The work is thoroughly researched by a naval
authority.
The Spanish Conquistadores (1963) by F A Kirkpatrick. Provides an excellent overall view of the conquest of Spanish
America.
The Vision of the Vanquished (1976) by Nathan Wachtal. A brilliant polemical account which analyses the ideological impact
of the conquest of Peru and the destruction of Inca society by the Spaniards.
Early Latin America: A History of Colonial Spanish America and Brazil (1983) by James Lockhart and Stuart B Schwartz.
An excellent outline account which concentrates on social factors and ethnic relations in the New World.
The Spanish Empire in America (1947) by C H Haring. Remains an invaluable survey of governmental institutions in
Spanish America.
The Colonial Background of Modern Brazil (1967) by Caio Prado Jr. A fascinating survey by a distinguished Marxist
historian.
Masters and Slaves: A Study in the Development of Brazilian Civilization (1956) by Gilberto Freyre. A classic work which
looks at the multiracial origins of Brazilian society and the role of slavery.
The Independence of Latin America (1987) edited by Leslie Bethell. Analyses the breakdown and overthrow of Spanish and
Portuguese colonial rule during the first quarter of the 19th century. There are individual chapters on the origins of Spanish
American independence, the independence of Mexico and Central America, the independence of Brazil and international
politics and Latin American independence.
The Spanish-American Revolutions, 1808-26 (1973) by John Lynch. Remains the best outline survey of the various phases of
the independence movement in Spanish America.
There is an extensive literature on the history of the subcontinent since its independence from Spain and Portugal during the
early 19th century. Above all readers are referred to the invaluable multivolume Cambridge History of Latin America (1984)
edited by Leslie Bethell. These volumes contain many excellent essays by specialist scholars. The series has now been reissued
in paperback form with volumes on specific countries. The region has acquired great fame for its revolutionary upheavals,
military strongmen, and repressive regimes. US involvement in the subcontinent, particularly since the end of the 19th century,
has also left a bitter legacy of anti-Americanism in many countries, not least in Central America and Cuba.
Modern Latin America (1992) by Thomas E Smith and Peter E Skidmore. A comprehensive and tidily written volume, strong
on interpretation, aimed mainly at the American undergraduate market.
Dependency and Development in Latin America (1969; translated 1979) by Fernando Henrique Cardoso and Enzo Faletto.
The classic formulation of dependency analysis which has dominated much of the writing on the subcontinent in recent times.
Spanish America after Independence c. 1820-c 1870 (1987) edited by Leslie Bethell. Offers general surveys on economy,
society, politics and ideology in Spanish America during the half-century after independence, followed by a series of case
studies on individual countries.
Latin America: Economy and Society, 1870-1930 (1989) edited by Leslie Bethell. Outlines the Golden Age of export-led
growth during the period 1870-1914, the arrival of the Great Depression in 1929, population growth, the rise of mass
immigration, especially in Argentina and Brazil, the impact of capitalist penetration in the countryside, urbanization, the
evolution of political and social ideas, and the role of the Catholic church.
Brazil: Empire and Republic, 1822-1930 (1989) edited by Leslie Bethell. Includes five chapters on the economic, social and
political history of Brazil from independence in 1822 down to the revolution of 1930. The persistence of slavery until the end
of the 1880s receives ample treatment.
Argentina Since Independence (1993) edited by Leslie Bethell. Deals with the economic, social, and political history of that
country in the period since independence from Spain. Peronismo and the Falklands War of 1982 are well covered.
Mexico Since Independence (1991) edited by Leslie Bethell. Contains six chapters on the economic, social, and political
history of the country, including works on the Porfiriato (1867-1910), the Mexican revolution (1910-20) and the rise and fall of
Cardenismo (1930-46).
Chile Since Independence (1993) edited by Leslie Bethell. Offers four chapters covering the economic, social, and political
history of Chile after 1830. The Allende regime (1970-73) and the military dictatorship of General Pinochet which followed are
nicely set in context.
Central America Since Independence (1991) edited by Leslie Bethell. Provides general chapters on the region covering the
periods 1821-70, 1870-1930, and 1930 to present, followed by chapters on each of the five Central American republics -
Guatemala, El Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica.
Cuba: A Short History (1993) edited by Leslie Bethell. Outlines the history of the island since the mid-18th century. It deals
with the persistence of slavery until the end of the 1880s, independence from Spain after the Spanish-American War of 1898,
the growing political and economic dependency of Cuba on the USA, the corrupt Batista regime, and the impact of the
Castroite revolution of 1959.
Home and Garden
Many animals, many insects. make beautiful homes; but there is no evidence that any man derive aesthetic pleasure as well as
practical benefit from home-making, however fine. Despite Bacon's remark "Homes are built to be lived in, not to be looked
at" man is a voracious observer—we smile or shudder at other people's homes as well as at our own; we envy, we aspire, we
imitate. The books on this list, therefore, as well as giving practical advice, offer basking pleasure too: whether they prescribe
or reflect, their subject is comfort, and their tone (almost unique in the lists in this book) is uniformly relaxed and positive.
See ARCHITECTURE (Clifton-Taylor, Lancaster); FOOD (Beeton, Conran, Tannahill)
Bray, Lys de The Wild Garden (1978) a*.f Illustrated guide to weeds, of immense interest. After all, a weed is only a plant in
the wrong place at the wrong time—acceptability has as much to do with fashion as anything else.
Editors of Apartment Life Magazine The Apartment Book (1979) Useful, helpful information about creating a living space to
suit your lifestyle and your purse, presented with hundreds of photographs, illustrations and step-by-step instructions.
Hay, R. and Beckett, K. A. (eds) Reader's Digest Encyclopedia of Garden Plants and Flowers (1964)
Hay, R., McQuown, F. R. and Beckett, G. and K. The Dictionary of Indoor Plants in Colour (1974)
Johnson, Hugh The Principles of Gardening (1979) a * Described as "the science, practice and history of the gardener's art", a
superb book in every way. Also: The International Book of Trees, etc. See FOOD
Kron, J. and Slezin, S. High-Tech: The Industrial Style and Sourcebook for the Home (1978)
American best seller introduces the concept of high-tech interior design, using industrial products to domestic ends, tells where
to get materials and how to use them to the required effect—visual as well as practical.
Reader's Digest Book of Sewing (1978) 0 *.., 528 pages of advice, information and guidance on all aspects of home sewing
and dressmaking.
Reader's Digest Practical Guide to Home Landscaping (1972) *..4'* Beautiful, useful, topically organized volume on every
kind of landscaping in every kind of climate and circumstance—from narrow city backyards to expansive suburban acres, from
the bleak north-east (US) to the desert southwest. An essential source.
Robinson, Julian The Penguin Book of Sewing(1973) a Good basic reference book for the not-too-creative. Subjects range
from toys and tailoring to upholstery; anyone with the least practical bent will find it invaluable.
Royal Horticultural Society The Vegetable Garden Displayed (1941) Yale
Useful and popular easy guide to growingvegetables in Britain; regularly updated. Also: The Fruit Garden Displayed;
Dictionary of Gardening Salisbury, E. J. The Living Garden (1935)
The background biology of gardening humanely examined by a Director of Kew Gardens, London.
Sunset Magazine New Western Garden Book (1979) a _Pot Although intended for Californian gardeners, this is such a good
reference book with so much useful background information that it is well worth using, with due allowance for the different
climate, anywhere farther east.
These are all funny books: classics whose funniness has weathered time, more recent books whose excellence seems set to
override topicality. Not a long list; but a merry one.
See ART (Adburgham); ARCHITECTURE (Lancaster); DRAMA (Aristophanes, Coward, Travers, Wilde);
FICTION/NOVELS (Amis, Beerbohm. Firbank, Gogol, Higek, Heller, Jarrell, Peacock, Rabelais, Waugh); FICTION/SHORT
STORIES (Runyon, Saki); FILM (Fields, Mast): HISTORY/BRITISH (George); MEDIA (Fisher); MUSIC (Hoffnung); SEX
(Southern); SOCIOLOGY (Rourke); TRAVEL (Wilson)
Allen, Woody Without Feathers (1972) * Allen's saturnine wit works marvellously on the page, uncluttered by the physical
slapstick which weakens some of his early films. Many of these pieces are from the New Yorker, the book also contains two
plays (Death and God), characteristically neat and sharp. Also: Getting Even
Green, Michael The Art of Coarse Acting (1964) _I Documentary study of the problems and triumphs of Thespian life,
subtitled How to Wreck an Amateur Dramatic Society. The book causes strong men to break up on public transport: a painful
read. Also: The Art of Coarse Rugby, etc
Grossmith, G. and W. The Diary of a Nobody (1892) * Fictional diary of humourless, aspiring Pooter, clerk in would-
be-genteel Victorian London. The disasters and humiliations of everyday life (bootscraper; red bath; son Lupin's romance with
Daisy Mutlar) all risen above with sublime unsinkable dignity.
Morton, J. B. The Best of Beachcomber (1974) *tit, Morton was one of the best-ever British parodists, one of the few daily
journalists whose pieces look better between hard covers. The naming of names, Mr Justice Cocklecarrot and red-bearded
dwarves start here.
Schulz, Charles Snoopy and It Was a Dark and Stormy Night (1971) One of the many cartoon collections about the lovable
beagle Snoopy, Charlie Brown and other friends.
Thurber, James My World and Welcome to It (1942)• In The Secret Life of Walter Mitty, Thurber's typical henpecked hero
daydreams as he dances attendance on his wife, finally refusing a blindfold to face a firing squad. "Erect and motionless, proud
and disdainful, Walter Mitty, the undefeated, inscrutable to the last." Thurber is timeless, uniquely lateral—prose poems of the
indignity of man. Also: My Life and Hard Times; Men, Women and Dogs, etc
Wodehouse, P. G. The Inimitable Jeeves (1924) * Whether you enter his world with Jeeves, Psmith, Mulliner or the Earl
of Blandings, the self-styled Performing Flea of English letters will charm and delight. Also: Leave It to Psmith; Summer
Lightning, etc
Literary critics fulfil two main offices: those of commentator and guide. In the first place, they tell us what we have just read,
and what it meant: in the second, they tell us what we ought to read, and why. At his best (and it is for their excellence that
books are listed here) the literary critic has a brave, prescriptive and dynamic role to play, both in our reading of literature and
(often) in its writing. By explaining the recipe, he may just enhance our enjoyment of the dish.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Dodds, Street); BIOGRAPHY (Bate, Coleridge, Edel, Green, Johnson, Nabokov, Starkie, Troyat);
DRAMA (Artaud, Braun, Brook, Esslin, Grotowski, Masefield, Roberts, Van Doren, Williams); FEMINISM (Millet); FILM
(Mast): HISTORY/AMERICAN (Wilson)
Adler, Mortimer J. and Charles Van Doren, American, 1902-2001 and 1926- .
How to Read a Book. Rec: Fadiman 3
Dryden, John Of Dramatic Poesy and Other Critical Essays (c. 1668) OP
"The father of English criticism" (according to Johnson) offers here the first sustained critical writing in English, continually
illuminated by Dryden's own humane and fluent art. See POETRY
Keats, John Letters of John Keats (1816-20) Ilia* Teems with creative critical excitement; ranges from specific to speculative;
has a magnanimity which can engage with Shakespeare, Milton and Wordsworth, and a comedy of perception shot through
with the tragedy of Keats's life. One of the greatest letter-writers in English. Best edition by Robert Gittings (1970). See
BIOGRAPHY (Bate, Gittings); POETRY
Lawrence, D. H. Selected Literary Criticism (1955) i 9 Raised crucial questions, particularly about great American writers and
the state of the novel. Least cloistered, most directly engaged, of critics, particularly in his principled hostility to academia, to
philosophizing, to professionalizing. Also: Studies in Classic American Literature. See DIARIES: FICTION/NOVELS;
FICTION/SHORT STORIES; HISTORY/EUROPEAN ; POETRY; TRAVEL
Leavis, F. R. Re valuation(1936) 9 * *
Sub-titled Tradition and Development in English Poetry, a magnificent piece of cartography, indebted to Eliot's (qv) pioneering
work but not slavish to him—or to anyone. Argues with lucidity and passion for a particular view of the clarifies and strengths
of English poetry. Also: The Common Pursuit; The Great Tradition Macaulay, T. B. Critical and Historical Essays (1843)
Often reprinted—although not so often now as formerly—essays by the great critic-historian who reviewed some of the great
books when they first came out (eg Boswell's Life of Johnson). See HISTORY/BRITISH
Orwell, George The Collected Essays, Journalism and Letters of George Orwell, 1920 – 50 (1968) A*
Orwell never separates literature from life; responds to everything, from comic postcards to Tolstoy, from Swift to Dickens.
Empson called him, with affectionate gruffness, "the eagle-eye with the flat feet". See FICTION/NOVELS;
HISTORY/BRITISH ; POLITICS
ENGLISH LANGUAGE
David Crystal
The unprecedented growth in the English language since the 1960s presents authors with a new agenda, if they are to provide a
balanced account of the subject.
With over a thousand million people using English to native or near-native levels of fluency, distributed throughout the world,
the traditional accounts of the language - focusing just on Britain or on America - are no longer persuasive. Alongside the
books dealing with traditional topics of interest, therefore - pronunciation, spelling, grammar, and vocabulary - there is
increasing attention being paid to the diversity of uses which can be encountered within the English-speaking communities
around the world, and to the speed at which the language is changing as it spreads. Each region presents fresh trends and
norms. And even within one country, there is unprecedented variety and change, especially in relation to the media and
electronic communication. How we cope with this diversity, so that we can preserve standards of mutual intelligibility without
losing our local identity, in both spoken and written English, is one of the more intriguing questions which many authors are
now attempting to answer.
Words will not lie down. Even if we left them alone, they would not, for
vocabulary grows, changes, and dies without anyone being in charge. There is no
Minister for the Lexicon, and in countries which do have an Academy with
responsibility for the language, vocabulary rules with a bland disregard for the
pronouncements of academics, politicians, and pedants. It is the most anarchic
area of language. But we do not leave words alone. We do not even let them rest
in peace. There are linguistic resurrectionists, who try to revive words that have
been dead for centuries - such as the Anglo-Saxon enthusiasts. There are
reincarnationists, who recall the previous existence of a word, and let it influence
their lives. There are revolutionaries, who are trying to change the lexical world
today, and even that is too late. There are resuscitators, who assail the letter-
columns of publications with pleas to preserve past usage; redeemers, who believe
that all words can be saved; and retributionists, who believe that, for some words,
hanging's too good for A few, well-intentioned souls think that the
government should legalize lexical euthanasia.
DAVID CRYSTAL
English in Use (1990) by Randolph Quirk and Gabriele Stein. This is the book which replaces The Use of English, Quirk's
introductory account of English variety and style that motivated students of the language over 25 years. The new book provides
some-what greater depth in its approach to contemporary issues of structure and usage.
The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language (1995) by David Crystal. A full-colour, illustrated guide to the
history, structure, and range of uses of the language, with particular reference to the regional variety of English around the
world.
Words in Time: A Social History of the English Vocabulary (1988) by Geoffrey Hughes. An account of the way words have
changed their meaning in association with the changes which have taken place in society, in such fields as economics,
journalism, politics, and advertising. Detailed word-histories are provided, using the files of the Oxford English Dictionary.
Rhetoric: The Wit of Persuasion (1989) by Walter Nash. A book which shows that this ancient and most respected of subjects
has just as much relevance today as it had to Classical authors. Rhetoric is seen as a framework for argument and as a
technique for presenting point of view, important as much for the study of everyday conversation as for the study of literature.
The Dialects of England (1990) by Peter Trudgill. An account of the history and geography of the chief regional dialects of
England, including their pronunciation as well as their grammar and vocabulary. Lots of local examples are presented in a
friendly transcription.
The Oxford Guide to Word Games (1984) by Tony Augarde. An account of the extraordinary things that people do to English
(and other languages) when they begin to play with it. The many topics include anagrams, crosswords, alphabet games, tongue-
twisters, puns, consequences, and spoonerisms.
LINGUISTICS
Frederick J Newmeyer
Linguistics is a field that bridges the humanities, the natural sciences, and the social I !sciences. Studies of metrical patterning
in Old English verse, of the physics of speech sounds, and of turn-taking conventions in conversation all fall within its domain.
Today, the dominant - and most productive - orientation of the field focuses on the cognitive aspects of language; that is, on the
properties of linguistic representations in the mind and on the degree to which these properties point to an innately specified
language faculty.
There are several reasons why language has been and will continue to be of
particular significance for the study of human nature. One is that language
appears to be a true species property, unique to the human species in its essentials
and a common part of our shared biological endowment. Furthermore, language
enters in a crucial way into thought, action, and social relations. Finally, language
is relatively accessible to study. In this respect the topic is quite different from others
that we would hope to address: problem solving, artistic creativity, and other
aspects of human life and activity.
NOAM CHOMSKY
The Language Instinct: How the Mind Creates Language (1994) by Steven Pinker. A brilliantly elegant and readable book
that introduces the concerns and results of modem linguistics to the lay reader. This should be everybody's introduction to the
field.
Patterns in the Mind: Language and Human Nature (1994) by Ray Jackendoff. Another good introduction to linguistics,
this one focusing especially on the relationship between the language faculty and other cognitive faculties.
The Chomsky Update: Linguistics and Politics (1990) by Raphael Salkie. The next best thing to reading Chomsky himself-
the latter a task not for the faint of heart. Chomsky's approach to language is explained in clear detail as well as, for those who
are interested, how his linguistic theories relate to his radical politics.
Language and Problems of Knowledge: The Managua Lectures (1988) by Noam Chomsky. This is probably Chomsky's
most accessible recent book. It records his lectures on the fundamentals of linguistic theory to students and teachers in
Nicaragua. The transcription of the discussion session at the end is especially useful.
The Politics of Linguistics (1986) by Frederick J Newmeyer. A nontechnical history of the past two centuries of linguistic
theorizing. Special attention is given to the ways in which the social context has influenced the directions that the field has
taken.
The Linguistics Wars (1993) by Randy Allen Harris. A rollicking account of the debates among theoretical linguists in the
1970s over the analysis of the interaction of form and meaning. A little technical in places, but it gives one a feel for how
linguists go about the formal analysis of language.
Language and Society: An Introduction to Sociolinguistics (1994) by Suzanne Romaine. A very readable introduction to
those aspects of language study that fall under the social sciences.
Endangered Languages (1991) edited by R H Robins and E M Uhlenbeck. The sad account of the threat of extinction to more
than half of the languages in the world. The contributors spell out in detail both the human and the scientific cost of minority
languages giving way to socially dominant ones.
You Just Don't Understand: Women and Men in Conversation (1990) by Deborah Tannen. On how and why men and
women have difficulty communicating with each other. Lots of references to more technical work in the subfield of
conversation analysis.
Language (1921) by Edward Sapir. The fact that this book is still in print after three quarters of a century testifies to its
timelessness. Written by one of the greatest linguist-anthropologists of history, this was the first introduction to the scientific
study of language for several generations of scholars. Fun to read as well.
AMERICAN ENGLISH
Bill Bryson
If you park a car, fly off the handle, stay put, paint the town red or even keep a stiff upper lip, you are using an Americanism.
America has played a more vital and central role in the growth and development of the English language in the last three
centuries than most people, inside or outside America, realize. Because it is such a neglected and finite topic, not all of the
following are expressly about American words, but all shed considerable light on American speech and culture.
The American was good natured, generous, hospitable and sociable, and he reversed
the whole history of language to make the term stranger one of welcome.
HENRY STEELS COMMAGER
The American Language: An Inquiry into the Development of English in the United States (1989) by H L Mencken. This is
the classic and still definitive work. Originally issued in three volumes, it has been condensed into a single volume with the
addition of much new and updated material, but Mencken's crusty and endearingly irascible tone still shines through.
The Barnhart Dictionary of Etymology (1988) by Robert K Bamhart. First of a series of a surprisingly fascinating and
browsable books on new words and where they come from.
The Americans: The Colonial Experience, The Americans: The Democratic Experience, The Americans: The National
Experience (1974) by Daniel Boorstin. Outstanding and accessible social history of the USA, full of interesting sidelights on
the stories behind American inventions and the words they spawned.
The American Mind: An Interpretation of American Thought and Character Since the 1880s (1950) by Henry Steele
Commager. Only indirectly pertaining to American speech, this is none the less an essential work for anyone wishing to
understand the American character.
Our Own Words (1974) by Mary Helen Dohan. An engaging and always readable survey of the development of American
speech over three centuries.
Democratic Eloquence: The Fight over Popular Speech in Nineteenth Century America (1990) by Kenneth Cmiel. Earnest but
comprehensive look at American speech during a century that saw the USA go from being an agrarian nation on the periphery
of world affairs to an economic and military colossus.
Mathematics, Science and Technology
This list gathers together books on a vast area of human experience normally splintered into a dozen exclusive, specialist
disciplines. Specialist volumes, in technical language, have been excluded (as they have from music. say, or from literary
criticism). The books chosen introduce and discuss their subjects, often at considerable depth, in terms accessible to everyone
—it is, after all, possible to appreciate and benefit from the study of radio astronomy (or fugues, or Russian literature) without
needing expertise in physics (or counterpoint, or Russian grammar). Above all, they offer a synthesis, they link the various
aspects of man's study of his world to each other, and to his whole perception of himself. They are passionate and absorbed,
exactly because science is a species of empirical philosophy. The subject is man the measurer, and the messenger himself is a
central part of the report he brings.
See AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Hahn): BIOGRAPHY (Rolt); MEDIA (Berry, Steinberg); MEDICINE (Gray, Thomas);
PSYCHOLOGY (Luria); RELIGION (Barbour)
Calvin, Melvin Chemical Evolution (1969) P How life may have arisen on earth through ordinary chemical processes. Able
summary of key research to time of publication.
Clark, Ronald W. The Scientific Breakthrough ( 1974) 9 The "breakthrough" is not simply E= mc2(or any particular topic), so
much as the breakthrough along the entire frontier of knowledge. For readers with at least some scientific background, though
not aimed at specialists. Also: Einstein: The Life and Times
Gordon, J. E. Structures, or Why Things Don't Fall Down (1978) a..1 Written in plain language, takes the mystery out of an
aspect of technology which affects the lives of everyone. Subjects range from buildings to balloons, even into physiology.
Georges Ifrah , The Universal History of Numbers, From Prehistory to the Invention of the Computer, 2000, 633 pages
$16 (rec: cooltools)
Kasner, E. and Newman, J. Mathematics and the Imagination (1940) What is a googolplex? What is a klein bottle? These and
hundreds of other aspects of mathematics are described in over 300 pages of easy text and clear diagrams. Puzzles; some
history; optical illusions; speculation and fantasy. Education without tears.
Larkin, S. and Bernbaum, L. (eds) The Penguin Book of the Physical World (1976)
Good short encyclopaedia covers natural phenomena and also landmarks of man's technological and scientific progress.
Notably clear style: for children (and adults) who want to know what heat is, how atoms are split, why an engine works as it
does, etc. Also: The Penguin Book of the Natural World
Pough, Frederick H. A Field Guide to Rocks and Minerals (1953) P Excellent handbook, regularly updated, ideal for the
professional and amateur geologist alike. The technical descriptions and illustrations are a model of their kind.
Whitehead, Alfred North and Bertrand Russell, English, 1861-1947 and 1872-1970.
(See also Whitehead, Alfred North and Russell, Bertrand)
Principia Mathematica. Rec: ML Nonfiction
Ziman, John The Force of Knowledge (1976) $ a The author is a professor of physics, but his book is more
philosophical than physical. He paints the history of physics delightfully, and shows how indebted we are to the great thinkers.
Same subject as Koestler (qv), but usefully viewed here from the scientist's "side".
Nicolaas Bloembergen
Nicolaas Bloembergen is professor of physics in the Applied Sciences Division and Harvard's Gerhard Gade University
Professor. He was born and educated in the Netherlands and joined the Harvard faculty in 1949. In 1981, Professor
Bloembergen received the Nobel Prize in Physics.
Albert Einstein and Leopold Infeld. Physik als Abenteuer der Erkenntnis (The Evolution of Physics, 1938). Simon &
Schuster, 1967. (Pb)
This book I read at the age of eighteen. It convinced me that the study of physics poses some of the most challenging questions
to the human mind. I have not been disappointed in pursuing physics as a lifetime career. The book was published at the same
time in the English language with the less informative title The Evolution of Physics.
Philip Morrison, Phylis Morrison, Charles Eames, and Ray Eames. Powers of Ten. New York: W. H. Freeman, 1982.
Nowadays, there are many excellent books introducing the high school and college student to the human quest in science and
technology. If I had been born fifty years later, I am sure this charmingly illustrated book would have alerted my mind to the
challenges of science. This book is the first in the series of the Scientific American Library. Many of these volumes could be
recommended.
Erich Maria Remarque. All Quiet on the Western Front (1928). New York: Fawcett Book Group, 1979. (Pb)
In the 1930s this book opened my eyes to the senselessness of trench warfare in World War I, and the accompanying
degradation of the human spirit. The same theme can, of course, be found in many other more recent books, including Norman
Mailer's The Naked and the Dead, based on episodes from World War II. It is a sad commentary on the human condition, that
each generation produces books of this nature.
William Bossert
William Bossert is an esteemed population biologist with current research interests in computer applications in medicine, the
management of marine fisheries and evolutionary biology. He is the David B. Arnold Professor of Science at Harvard and was
formerly a junior fellow in the Society of Fellows. Former students and his peers praise his pioneering efforts on behalf of
Harvard students to bring the University into the computer age. He is also consistently described as an excellent teacher.
Albert G. Ingalls, ed. Amateur Telescope Making (1926). 3 vols. New York: Munn, 1945.
Shikubu Murasaki. The Tale of Genji (ca. A.D. 1000). Edward G. Seidensticker, trans. New York: Random House, 1985. (Pb)
An illness kept me in bed and away from school most of one year when I was very young. I read voraciously, since I could do
little else. My diet included all of the classics in English literature from Shakespeare to Damon Runyon. The result of this
overdose was not entirely positive. I have read very little fiction since then, except for a few works forced on me by their
popularity in dinner conversation or required during my undergraduate education. Most everything in these two categories
proved very unsatisfying, with a few exceptions such as The Lord of the Rings in the former category and one remarkable work
in the latter. That work was The Tale of Genji by Lady Murasaki, which I read in the fine translation by Arthur Waley. Despite
its age, nearly a thousand years, this work is as fresh as a well-written novella from Brazilian television. I had always longed
for the day that I would have sufficient fluency in a foreign language to be able to think in that language. The Tale of Genji
achieved something greater than that for me. It lead me to fantasize in a foreign culture. After reading the book I daydreamed
of piercing through the court intrigue and scheming to glimpse at the harem that Lady Murasaki so vividly portrayed. Because
of it I can never feel distant from another culture despite superficial barriers of language, custom and manner.
Most of the nonfiction I read now is of a technical nature and not likely of interest to a general audience. I would like to
mention, however, a regular reading experience that is important to me and should be more widely read in this country. That is
the monthly journal Scientific American. The journal contains articles on every branch of science, with special concern for the
latest developments in molecular biology and particle physics. Since its beginning over a hundred years ago, Scientific
American has kept its readers abreast of the latest science in articles prepared in a first-rate tutorial style. The publishers have
always been concerned to make the societal implications of scientific developments clear to the reader. For example, the
regular articles on military technology since World War II have been the best available information on that subject. The
question of the accessibility of Scientific American articles to a general audience has been debated. I concede that if a new
reader to the journal attacked a recent article on grand unification theories in modern physics without the preparation of reading
previous articles on this subject in the journal in recent years, not much would be learned. If the general question of
accessibility of Scientific American, however, is correctly answered in the negative then I am very disappointed in the
intellectual state of our society. There are few societal decisions that I would willingly trust to leaders who could not read
Scientific American.
Finally, I must add that I am very fond of the Amateur Telescope Making handbook in three volumes, which was spawned in
the pages of Scientific American. I don't believe that there is any group of hobbyists as fond of talking and writing about their
hobby as amateur telescope-makers. The prose of these volumes, which is often Victorian in style, conveys a sense of the
importance of this hobby in the lives of the authors that is quite seductive. If anyone is looking for a hobby I recommend that
they read these volumes, and they will, as did I. start grinding pieces of glass together.
Paul M. Doty
Paul M. Doty is Mallinckrodt Professor of Biochemistry. In addition to his work on nucleic acids and gene structure, Mr. Doty
has had a long-time interest in arms control, science policy and international affairs. Director emeritus of the Center for Science
and International Affairs, he has been a presidential adviser on arms control. He was an early participant in the Pugwash
Conferences on World and Scientific Affairs, which first brought U.S. and Soviet scientists together informally to discuss the
problems of arms control.
Molecular biology:
Erwin Schrodinger. What Is Life? (1946). New York: Cambridge University Press, 1967.
James D. Watson. The Double Helix (1968). New York: New American Library, 1969. (Pb)
Bruce Alberts et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell. New York: Garland, 1983.
In a very slim volume Schroedinger, a theoretical physicist, focused with remarkable foresight on what the genetic material had
to be like. Watson describes his discovery with Crick and Wilkins of the detailed structure of the genetic material, DNA, by
recounting his view of it as it occurred in his early twenties. Alberts and five other authors, including Watson, put together an
integrated, detailed picture of the molecular basis of life that has flowed from the discovery of the structure of DNA.
Herbert F. York. Race to Oblivion. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1970.
Andrei D. Sakharov. Progress, Coexistence, and Intellectual Freedom (1968). New York: W. W. Norton, 1970.
Hedrick Smith. The Russians (1976). New York: New York Times, 1983.
Strobe Talbott. Endgame: The Inside Story of SALT II. New York: Harper & Row, 1979.
In a small volume York captures the insider's view of the way the nuclear arms race developed and reached the "ultimate
absurdity" with which we now grapple. Sakharov at an early stage analyzes the dangers inherent in the race and the basis for
hopeful outcome. By presenting so clearly the nature of the Russian system Smith shows the difficulties that the two very
different societies of the East and the West face in resolving the dilemma they have created. Talbott dissects a major act in this
unfolding drama in a way that mirrors the complex interactions of politics and technology so as to convey the essence of the
challenge to maintain the chain of human continuity and achievement.
Reaction to challenge:
Leo Tolstoy. War and Peace (1865-69). Louise Maude and Aylmer Maude, trans. George Gibian, ed. New York: W. W. Norton,
1966.
Winston S. Churchill. The Second World War (1948-53). 6 vols. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1983.
Michael Collins. Carrying the Fire: An Astronaut's Journeys. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1974.
In quite different ways each book displays on a broad canvas three great human adventures. To share in these even vicariously
from the safety of an armchair nevertheless enlarges the spirit and the sense of belonging to a tough, resourceful and
courageous species.
Howard Hiatt
Howard Hiatt is the former dean of Harvard's School of Public Health and now a professor of medicine at the Harvard Medical
School. Earlier in his career he worked on the molecular biology of cancer and was the Department of Medicine chairman at
Boston's Beth Israel Hospital. As a professor he now spends his teaching time trying to bring together in the training of
physicians some of the public-health issues he worked on while at the School of Public Health.
It is misleading to suggest that the books I mention are crucial—they made a difference. If they had been read at a different
time in life they likely would have had a correspondingly different effect.
Paul H. DeKruif. Microbe Hunters (1926). New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1966. (Pb)
I read this early in high school, and it whetted my appetite for medicine and science. In retrospect, it is an outrageously
romanticized description of important distinguished scientists, written in a familiar style for young and impressionable high-
school students. For me it was an important book in my decision to go into medicine as well as in my considering research
within medicine.
Hans Zinsser. Rats, Lice and History: The Biography of Bacillus (1935). New York: Little, 1984. (Pb)
I read this the summer before college. By then I had settled on a career in medicine. It reinforced my interest in a career in
science. It portrayed in a more scholarly fashion the attraction of medical research. More importantly, it made clear that one
could combine a deep commitment to medicine and science with a continuing interest in arts, in literature. I was an English
major, bound for medical school. That was not too common then, nor is it now.
Gerald Holton
Gerald Holton is the Mallinckrodt Professor of Physics and a professor of the history of science. He has enlivened physics
classes at Harvard for forty years. In addition to his well-deserved reputation as a physicist, he is known for his interest and
work in arms control and Soviet-American relations. Among his works are Thematic Origins of Scientific Thought (1973), The
Scientific Imagination (1978), and The Advancement of Science and Its Burdens (1986).
Homer. The Iliad (ca. 800 B.C.). Robert Fitzgerald, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975. (Pb)
As for many schoolboys in the classical Gymnasium in Vienna—and I can mention here only books from those early years—
this was for me the most terrible and unforgettable encounter. It foretold what writing can be at its best, and mankind at its
worst. After our forced marches through Caesar's wars, the Nibelungenlied, Xenophon's Anabasis, the Eddas, and post-
Versailles diatribes in our history courses, it became clear that a chief purpose of education was the preparation for war. History
would be written by unthinking ate and thumos, with rarely a moment of rational drawing back, as when Achilles, facing
Agamemnon, is made by Athena to sheathe his sword at the last moment.
Mark Twain. The Adventures of Tom Sawyer (1876). Berkeley: University of California Press, 1983. (Pb)
Even in German, this and large parts of Huckleberry Finn were indestructible, and I read them avidly, as if they showed the
way to an escape hatch into an innocent world. A curious view of America emerged from reading Twain, James Fenimore
Cooper (Franz Schubert's wish, as he was dying, was for one of his volumes), Karl May's stories of trappers and Indians, and
practically all of Zane Grey (during a bout with diphtheria).
Of course there were also the American films with those magnetic heroes, Clark Gable, Paul Robeson, James Stewart... .
William Shakespeare. Romeo and Juliet (1595). T. J. Spencer, ed. New York: Penguin, 1981. (Pb)
Finally learning English as the last language at sixteen, I came upon a minor production of Romeo and Juliet, and have never
forgotten the thrill of being transfixed by the poetry of the English language. Perhaps having to recite lines learned by heart
from Goethe, Schiller, Heine and MOrike had spoiled those for me. Let's put volumes of poetry on our children's shelves!
Ernst Mach. The Science of Mechanics (1883). T. J. McCormack. trans. 6th ed. LaSalle, Ill.: Open Court, 1960. (Pb)
Here at last was a book that carefully examined scientific concepts, their historical origins, and their philosophical
underpinnings, often showing that these foundations were badly in need of improvement. So science was not closed after all.
Like so many who had been made to believe in textbook science, and in Immanuel Kant's "Thing in Itself," I found here the
antidote. I did not know then that Einstein would echo the memory of thousands when he wrote that Mach's "incorruptible
skepticism and independence" exerted a profound influence on him as a student.
An encyclopedia.
A big, illustrated, honest, multi-volume encyclopedia. Father kept it in his office, but of course that did nothing to stop me from
reading and rereading it, almost volume by volume. So that was how the world was made, what was in it, and how things might
work! These "truths" seemed even more fantastic than the inventions of Wilhelm Busch, Grimm's Tales, and all the treasured
adventure stories of Defoe, Jules Verne and Sven Hedin.
Howard Raiffa
Howard Raiffa has a joint appointment to Harvard's John F. Kennedy School of Government and the Harvard Business School,
where he is the Frank P. Ramsey Professor of Managerial Economics. He is the first director of the International Institute for
Applied Systems Analysis in Vienna. He has a worldwide reputation as an applied mathematician, statistician, game theorist,
decision analyst and negotiation analyst.
My thesis is that some rather straightforward, simple, systematic, nonesoteric analysis of complex decisions can make a net
positive difference in society. These books collectively contribute to this noble quest.
Kenneth J. Arrow. Social Choice and Individual Values (1951). New Haven: Yale University Press, 1970. (Pb)
This book profoundly influenced my research agenda. In controversial arenas where one has to choose an alternative and there
are conflicting principles of fairness or of rationality, it is helpful to articulate desiderata of a "good" solution and to investigate
the compatibility and implications of these desiderata (or axioms). Arrow was a pathfinder and deserved his Nobel Prize for
this work.
John G. Kemeny et al. Introduction to Finite Mathematics (1957). Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1974.
One of the earliest books written by mathematicians to expose social scientists to the power and beauty of mathematical
thinking in a truly accessible way.
John Von Neumann and Oskar Morgenstern. Theory of Games and Economic Behavior (1944). Princeton: Princeton
University Press, 1980. (Pb)
A mathematical tour de force. The first really profound mathematical treatise written about a subject at the crossroads of
economics, sociology and psychology.
Thomas C. Schelling. The Strategy of Conflict. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1960. (Pb)
One of the first books to exploit game-theoretic thinking, but it breaks away from the overly rigid structures of formal game
theory. Profound and insightful ... and a delight to read.
Robert Schlaifer. Analysis of Decision Under Uncertainty (1965). Huntington, N.Y.: Krieger, 1978,
A first-rate pedagogical contribution that uses exclusively case analysis for instructional purposes. The book is written in a
heavy style that does not appeal to students, but subsequent authors have written follow-on versions that make the subject
matter more enjoyable. The Schlaifer book was the pioneering effort in the teaching of quantitative techniques by the case
method.
David Lax and James Schenius. The Manager as Negotiator. New York: Free Press, 1986.
Though written by mathematically oriented authors, this book should be readily accessible to managers. It should be required
reading for students in public policy and business.
Myron B. Fiering
Myron Fiering is the Gordon McKay Professor of Engineering and Applied Mathematics at Harvard University. A "survivor of
the New York public school system," Professor Fiering has taught water resources and decision theory in the Division of
Applied Sciences since 1961. He has part-time appointments at the Harvard Medical School and the School of Public Health to
continue his research in the fluid mechanics problems associated with burn treatment and his interest in water-borne disease.
He occasionally builds model trains.
I listed books that have been most useful in forming my views and biases—in providing the special set of filters through which
I view the world. They are neither the most useful professional texts nor the books I have enjoyed the most.
John Von Neumann and Oskar Morgenstern. Theory of Games and Economic Behavior (1944). Princeton: Princeton
University Press, 1980. (Pb)
Theory of Gaines and Economic Behavior taught me always to analyze situations, confficts, negotiations—whateverwithin a
probabilistic framework. A classic, it survives today because of its insights into the ways people perceive and respond to risk,
and it has profoundly influenced my personal and professional lives.
Percy W. Bridgman. Reflections of a Physicist (1950). Bernard I. Cohen, ed. Salem, N.H.: Ayer, 1980.
Richard Von Mises. Probability, Statistics, and Truth (1928). Hilda Geiringer, trans. New York: Dover, 1981.
Reflections of a Physicist and Probability. Statistics, and Truth had much the same effect as von Neumann's work—they shaped
a lifelong viewpoint not by inculcation of formulas but by gentle nudging.
Anne Frank. Anne Frank: The Diary of a Young Girl (1947). New York: Doubleday, 1967. (Pb)
Thucydides. History of the Peloponnesian War (ca. 431-404 B.C.). Richard Livingstone, ed. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1960. (Pb)
The Diary of Anne Frank helped to teach me who I am and whence I come; Thucydides' History of the Peloponnesian War
helped to teach me who we all are and whence we all come, as well as that history need not be dull.
Mark Twain. The Adventures of Tom Sawyer (1876). Berkeley: University of California Press, 1983. (Pb)
Elizabeth Barrett Browning. Sonnets from the Portuguese (1850). New York: Crown, 1977.
Twain's Tom Sawyer and Browning's Sonnets are simply too beautiful for words other than their own; they taught me how
fragile are the great works of the mind of man—the Pieta, the Mona Lisa, the Moonlight Sonata, even a great university under
siege.
Erskine Caldwell. God's Little Acre (1933). New York: New American Library, n.d. (Pb)
D. H. Lawrence. Lady Chatterley's Lover (1928). Lawrence Durrell, ed. New York: Bantam, 1983.
Finally, to an adolescent growing through a tightly constrained world, Erskine Caldwell's God's Little Acre and Lawrence's
Lady Chatterley's Lover, my first erotic books, gave the first hints of the joys of love and supplemented street talk as the main
source of information to satisfy my growing curiosity about feeling, loving and sharing.
C. Peter Timmer
C. Peter Timmer is the John D. Black Professor of Agriculture and Business at the Harvard Business School and has an
appointment in the Department of Economics. In addition, he is a faculty fellow at the Harvard Institute for International
Development. He grew up on a farm near Tipp City, Ohio, which his family still operates. An interest in food systems, he
writes, combines his agricultural background with his training as an economist; the major applications are in food policy for
developing countries. Food Policy Analysis is his best-known book.
All of these books deal directly or indirectly with the dynamics of complex systems and the message that intuitive
understanding will provide a richer guide to the future than formal economic models.
Alexander Gerschenkron. Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1962.
Important for its understanding of the way governments respond to the challenge of underdevelopment as presented by more
developed neighbors and political rivals. Shows clearly that "market forces" were not the driving mechanism in the
development of the latecomers to industrial modernization and provides a powerful sense of the dynamics of economic change
which cannot be captured in simple economic-growth models.
Albert O. Hirschman. Development Projects Observed. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1967. (Pb)
Develops the principle of the "hiding hand,- which argues that the difficulties of actually implementing a complex project are
"hidden" from the designers, who then overlook them. But in compensation, the creativity of project managers is often greater
than designers anticipated, so many projects are successful because the two effects offset each other. The book provides, above
all, a sobering picture of the limits of planning and the power of learning by doing.
Yujiro Hayami and Vernon W. Ruttan. Agricultural Development: An International Perspective (1971). Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins University Press, 1985. (Pb)
Without a doubt the most influential and comprehensive analysis of agricultural development. The model of "induced
innovation" removes technological change from the "manna from heaven" category and places it firmly in the hands of
societies and market forces. Because technological change is the primary force driving economic development, an
understanding of its origins and impact is crucial indeed to our efforts to speed the process in the poorer countries.
Edward O. Wilson
Edward Wilson is the Frank B. Baird, Jr. Professor of Science at Harvard and curator of entomology at the university's Museum
of Comparative Zoology. One of the nation's leading biologists, Professor Wilson received the Pulitzer Prize for nonfiction in
1979 for his work entitled On Human Nature. One of the most entrenched biological predispositions Wilson finds among
human beings is biophilia—the love for other forms of life such as plants and animals—which is also the title of his most
recent book (Biophilia, 1984).
I was an adolescent, from fifteen to eighteen years of age, when I encountered the books that were to have the most profound
and lasting influence on my life. Thereafter I read thousands of books, many of equal or superior quality, and put most to good
use; but I have to confess that individually they have had a steadily declining effect on my world view, style and ambition.
Hence I can only offer you works that might, either literally or as examples of a genre, influence a certain kind of young person
to take up a career as a biologist and naturalist. More I cannot promise.
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle. Lost World (1912). New York: Random House, 1959.
Even as a small child I dreamed of going on faraway expeditions to collect insects and other animals. This book set my
imagination on fire, and I was thereafter a nesiophile, a lover of islands, the concrete symbols of new worlds awaiting
exploration. The compulsion was one of the mental factors that led me in later years to develop (with Robert H. MacArthur) the
theory of island biogeography, which has become an influential part of ecology.
Trofim D. Lysenko. Heredity and Its Variability (1943). Moscow: Foreign Languages, 1954.
Although I was later to see Lysenkoism for what it was, false in conception, political in aim, and very nearly the death of
Soviet genetics, I was enchanted by this little book when I encountered it at the age of sixteen. It appealed to my mood of
rebelliousness. It seemed to me that Lysenko was offering a radical and effective challenge to conventional science, and that
even the callow and inexperienced might have a chance to proceed directly to new realms of discovery.
Sinclair Lewis. Arrowsmith (1925). New York: New American Library, 1982. (Pb)
The perfect young man's book: a vision of a pure life devoted to the search for scientific truth, above money grubbing and
hypocrisy. How I longed to be like Arrowsmith, to find my mentor in a real Gottlieb. The feeling was intensified when I
discovered Jack London's Martin Eden shortly afterward.
Erwin Schrodinger. What Is Life? (1946). New York: Cambridge University Press, 1967.
This taut little book, which I encountered as a college freshman, invited biologists to think of life in more purely physical
terms. SchrOdinger was right of course, as witness the rise of molecular biology soon afterward. For me his arguments
suggested delicious mysteries and great challenges. (Later, I was especially pleased when a reviewer likened my own book
Genes, Mind, and Culture, published with C. J. Lumsden in 1981, to What Is Life? saying that it offered a comparable
challenge from biology to the social sciences.)
Ernst Mayr. Systematics and the Origin of Species from the Viewpoint of a Zoologist (1942). New York: Columbia University
Press, 1982. (Pb)
By defining the biological species in strong, vital language and connecting the process of species formation to genetics, Mayr
opened a large part of natural history to a more scientific form of analysis. This is an example of a very heuristic work, which
invited young scientists to join an exciting quest in field research. More than forty years after its publication, I am still wholly
involved in this effort.
Marcus Aurelius. Meditations (ca. A.D. 160). G. M. A. Grube, ed. and trans. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1984. (Pb)
I hope that I have not missed the editors' purpose entirely by listing books that affected one rather rebellious adolescent in the
1940s, but I was quite surprised myself when I came up with this list after careful reflection. Let me make partial amends by
citing the work that I pull off the shelf most often, and gives me the greatest pleasure, now that I am in my fifties: Meditations,
by Marcus Aurelius. For this work reflects the point to which I have come, in company with such a magnificent spirit who
"bears in mind that all that is rational is akin, and that it is in man's nature to care for all men, and that we should not embrace
the opinion of all, but of those alone who live in conscious agreement with Nature."
The History of Science in the Eighteenth Century "R. Spangenburg, D. Moser" Harnessing Nature
Antoine Lavoisier A. Donovan Harnessing Nature
The Enlightenment of Joseph Priestley R.E. Schofield Harnessing Nature
In 1704 John Harris, a mathematician and cleric, published his Lexicon Technicum, a Universal Dictionary of Arts and
Sciences, the first comprehensive technical dictionary to be published in Britain. Since then the need for such works has grown
enormously. The literature of science has become so vast, and sometimes so technical and unfamiliar, that general readers and
experts alike frequently need to consult a reference work of some kind. While each individual science will have its own corpus
of detailed reference works, there is also a large class of works covering the whole of science, some of the more important
of which are listed below.
McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of Science and Technology (1994) edited by Sybil P Parker. 20 volumes with 7,500
alphabetically sequenced entries and 50,000 cross-references, McGraw-Hill is the most comprehensive work available.
Profusely illustrated, it contains both long technical articles and many shorter, more accessible entries.
Chambers Science and Technology Dictionary (1988) edited by Peter M B Walker. A widely available 1,300-page single
volume. Chambers can be recommended for its comprehensiveness. It also contains a number of useful tables.
Penguin Dictionary of Science (1993) by E B Uvaroa and Alan Isaacs. Although less comprehensive than the Chambers
dictionary, the Penguin text is easier for the nonscientist.
Dictionary of the History of Science (1983) by W F Bynum, E J Browne and Roy Porter. Contains more than 700 entries
explaining the origins, meaning, and significance of many of the main ideas of science and medicine.
Companion to the History of Modern Science (1989) by R C Olby, G N Cantor. J R Christie and M J S Hodge. An extensive
and authoritative survey consisting of 67 essays covering the period 1500-1900. Also discussed are a number of related themes
including science and literature, marginal science, science and war, and science and imperialism.
Dictionary of Scientific Biography (1975) edited by Charles C McGraw-Gillispie. 13 volumes, published by Simon and
Schuster. The most comprehensive and authoritative dictionary available, though it is only likely to be found in large libraries.
Because it excludes living scientists, it is now in need of a major revision.
Biographical Encyclopedia of Scientists (1994) by J Daintith, S Mitchell, E Toothill and D Gjertsen. More accessible and up
to date than the Simon and Schuster, this is also the most comprehensive of the currently available dictionaries of scientific
biography. It contains accounts of the life and work of over 2,000 scientists from the earliest times to the winners of the 1993
Nobel prizes.
Breakthroughs: A Chronology of Great Achievements in Science and Mathematics (1985) by Claire L Parkinson. The
work lists on a year-by-year basis many of the major breakthroughs in science from antiquity until recent times.
GENERAL TEXTS
Derek Gjertsen
Science has come to exercise such a profound influence over modern society that its presence can be felt in almost every area
of life. One effect of this has been the production of an enormous number of popular works attempting to present science to the
general reader. And few in this field have improved upon the mature work of Isaac Asimov. Today there is scarcely an aspect of
science, however recondite and technical it might be, that cannot be approached through some popular introduction. At the
same time, scholars from what were previously thought to be unrelated fields such as sociology and literature have realized that
their own work is incomplete without some understanding of science and its history.
Some 80 or 90 per cent of all scientists that have ever been, are alive now.
DEREK DE Sow PRICE
Great Scientific Experiments (1981) by Rom Harre. Harre describes with great lucidity and with numerous illustrations `20
experiments that changed the world'. The experiments discussed include J J Thomson's discovery of the electron, Louis
Pasteur's work on artificial vaccines, and Stephen Hales's demonstration that sap circulates in plants.
Science Good, Bad and Bogus (1983) by Martin Gardner. A superb and entertaining defence of science against the attacks and
claims of pseudoscientists. The collection includes essays on Uri Geller, the psychic surgery of Arigo, the biorhythms of Fliess,
and the claim that quantum theory can justify belief in ESP.
The Two Cultures and a Second Look (1993) by C P Snow. In 1959 C P Snow first argued that many highly educated people
had as much familiarity with the Tibetan language as with some of the basic principles of science. His critique of mod-em
education and society, and his argument that the `two cultures' - the arts and the sciences- need to be brought together, are srill
relevant.
The Sociology of Science (1973) by Robert Merton. Recent times have seen the creation of the discipline of the sociology of
science. The modem founding father of the discipline in Robert Merton, whose writings in this collection of his more important
papers show a wit, style, imagination, and judgement rarely found in his followers.
Asimov's Guide to Science (1973) by Isaac Asimov. Dealing with both the physical and the biological sciences, and the basic
principles of science as well as the results of the latest researches, Asimov writes with a lucidity and enthusiasm few have ever
equalled.
Science and Change 1500-1700 (1972) by Hugh Keamey; Science and Social Change 1700-1900 by Colin Russell. These two
works, though written about different periods and in different styles, show how developments in science have produced
changes not only in such obvious fields as warfare and navigation, but in the structures of society itself and in the ways in
which we see the world around us and our place within it.
Darwin's Plots (1983) by Gillian Beer. Beer was one of the first scholars to show how much the imaginative literature of a
period can be deeply influenced by the science of the day. The work of George Eliot and Thomas Hardy in particular, she
argues, pursue explicitly Darwinian themes.
The Art of the Soluble (1967) by Peter Medawar. A collection of essays in which Medawar argues that if politics is the art of
the possible, then science is the art of the soluble. The collection also contains Medawar's ruthless destruction of the theories of
Teilhard de Chardin.
Popper (1973) by Brian Magee. A brief and clear introductory account of the work of Karl Popper, one of the most influential
philosophers of science.
Little Science, Big Science (1963) by Derek de Solla Price. A pioneering and entertaining attempt to show how the growth,
value, and productivity of science can be objectively measured.
HISTORY OF SCIENCE
Derek Gjertsen
In the past historians have tended to see in science an uninterrupted advance to ever more and deeper truths about ever more
aspects of nature. In the process, it was thought, poverty, disease, and superstition would simply disappear from the face of the
Earth. But it is only too apparent that superstition, disease, and poverty are as entrenched as ever, while many previously
lauded scientific truths have turned out to be simple errors. Consequently, contemporary historians of science are more
concerned with understanding how science changes - what factors, for example, have influenced the acceptance and rejection
of particular theories. They are further concerned to understand the supposed uniqueness of the scientific revolution and why
this crucial process seems to have occurred in the West alone.
New systems of nature were but new fashions, which would vary in every age; and even those who pretended to demonstrate
them from mathematical principles would flourish but a short time, and be out of vogue when that was determined.
JONATHAN SWIFT
The Rise of Scientific Europe 1500-1800 (1991) by David Goodman and Colin A Russell. This richly illustrated text is
probably the best single-volume general work for the period in question. It is of particular interest in dealing with science in
such so-called `fringe' areas as Sweden and the Iberian peninsula, countries usually ignored in most earlier histories of science.
The Cambridge Illustrated History of the World's Science (1983) by Colin Ronan. A more comprehensive work that the
Goodman and Russell text, Ronan's history covers the period from the origin of science in antiquity to recent times. Most
unusually, it also has separate chapters on Chinese science, Arabian science, and Indian science.
The Revolution in Science 1500-1750 (1983) by A Rupert Hall. Historians have long tried to understand the nature and origin
of the apparently unique scientific revolution. Hall provides a classic survey of the problem and explores the extent to which
the revolution can be derived from the structure of European society. He concludes that no particular reason can be singled out
since `every feature of European civilization was a contributing factor'.
The Classics of Science (1984) by Derek Gjertsen. The work deals with 12 classic scientific texts ranging in time from the
Elements of Euclid to Darwin's Origin of Species. The contents of the 12 works are analysed and described, placed in their
historical context and their subsequent publishing history recounted.
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (1962) by T S Kuhn. One of the most important and influential work on the history
and philosophy of science published this century. Kuhn's book argued that science alternated between periods of `normal'
science, when scientists work within the confines of a particular paradigm, and `revolutionary' periods, when the old paradigm
is overthrown and replaced by a new model.
Science and Religion (1991) by John Hedley Brooke. An authoritative discussion of the interaction between science and
religion from Galileo to the 1980s. Brooke shows that the boundaries between religion and science have frequently shifted and
that past attempts to see nothing but conflict in their relationship are merely partisan.
The Fontana History of Science. The following four volumes on this ongoing series had been published by 1995: Chemistry
(1992) by William Brock; The Environmental Sciences (1992) by Peter Bowler; Technology (1994) by Donald Cardwell;
Astronomy and Cosmology (1994) by John North. Further volumes on mathematics, physics, biology, and medicine wi11
appear in due course. The volumes published so far, while incorporating the results of much recent scholarly research, have
remained admirably readable.
Augustine to Galileo: Science in the Middle Ages (1952) by A C Crombie. Crombie's work is still the most easily available
and accessible account of medieval science. It covers the period from the 5th to the 17th century and is most notable for
displaying long-ignored continuities between medieval and 17th-century science.
The Shorter Science and Civilisation of China (1978- ) by Colin Ronan. Four volumes, covering mathematics, astronomy,
physics, and engineering have already appeared of this abridgement of Joseph Needham's Science and Civilisation in China. It
provides in a readable form an account of the development of science in China and argues that science was not the exclusive
invention of Western scholars.
MATHEMATICS: INTRODUCTION
Ian Stewart
The big problem with school mathematics, apart from the way it puts most people off the subject for life, is that it gives the
impression that there are no problems left to solve. Real mathematics is far broader, and more vigorous, than most of us ever
imagine. The difficulty is to make contact with genuine mathematics without getting submerged in technical details. All these
books manage to achieve just that.
The Mathematical Experience (1981) by Philip J Davis and Reuben Hersh. Best-selling book about what it is like to be a
mathematician, for people who aren't.
3.1416 and All That (1985) by Philip J Davis and William G Chinn. A witty collection of short, simple items on all aspects of
mathematics.
Mathematics, the Science of Patterns (1994) by Keith Devlin. Highly illustrated, in the Scientific American Library series.
Gives an overview that is strong on both ancient and recent history.
For All Practical Purposes (1994) edited by Solomon Garfunkel. The book of a US TV series that brought real mathematics to
the people. Highly illustrated and very up to date.
Mathematics, a Human Endeavour (1994) by Harold R Jacobs. Subtitled `A book for those who think they don't like the
subject', it has sold over a million copies because it is.
Invitation to Mathematics (1992) by Konrad Jacobs. Based on a course called `Mathematics for Philosophers' at Erlanger-
Nuremberg University: it assumes no more than high-school mathematics.
e, The Story of a Number (1994) by Eli Maor. The only book I know whose hero is a number other than pi - and a fascinating
historical tour through large chunks of the mathematical scenery.
Innumeracy (1988) by John Allen Paulos. The surprise New York Times best seller that sharpens your mathematical grip on
the everyday world.
The Most Beautiful Mathematical Formulas (1992) by Lionel Salem, Frederic Testard, and Coralie Salem. Tackles formula-
aversion head on by making formulas the focus of the story: accessible, strewn with cartoons.
Concepts of Modern Mathematics (1975, 1995) by Ian Stewart. I wrote this 20 years ago when `modern mathematics' was
just coming into schools: it's just been reissued.
NUMBERS
Ian Stewart
The most fundamental concept in mathematics is number. Ignore logicians and philosophers who try to tell you otherwise and
start waffling about sets and propositions - numbers are where it all started. And numbers lead on to higher things, among them
combinatorics (sophisticated counting) and algebra (general properties of numbers and other numberlike entities). All are
represented here, but good old-fashioned numbers are in the majority.
A History of Mathematics (1968) by Carl B Boyer. An extremely well-written account of the history of mathematical thought,
offering many insights into numbers.
Descartes' Dream (1986) by Philip J Davis and Reuben Hersh. How numbers behind the scenes rule our world, and whether
that is a Good Thing.
A First Course in Abstract Algebra (1989) by John B Fraleigh. Algebra from the modern abstract viewpoint, for those who
want to know what's involved.
Concrete Mathematics (1994) by Ronald L Graham, Donald E Knuth, and Oren Patashnik. Combinatorics - the art of
counting - from the viewpoint of computer science. Worth reading for the students' marginal notes alone.
Number (1991) by John McLeish. An often idiosyncratic but highly readable account of the origins and developments of the
number concept.
Beyond Numeracy (1991) by John Allen Paulos. How numbers feed into more general mathematical ideas, presented as a
series of quick bites at a variety of simple topics.
Elementary Number Theory (1988) by Kenneth H Rosen. An undergraduate-level text that can be read by anybody interested
in the deeper properties of numbers.
Galois Theory (1989) by Ian Stewart. Galois was a colourful character who proved that the equation of the fifth degree cannot
be solved and was killed in a duel over a woman. Read it for its history and the pictures.
Galois' Theory of Algebraic Equations (1988) byJean-Pierre Tignol. An accessible discussion of what led up to Galois' epic
work on equations of the fifth degree and higher.
The Penguin Dictionary of Curious and Interesting Numbers (1986) by David Wells. Arranged in numerical order from -1
to Graham's Number; a collection of curious facts about every interesting number in existence - and also the first uninteresting
one.
GEOMETRY
Ian Stewart
Once upon a time geometry was easy, because there was only one of it - the one laid down in great logical detail by Euclid.
Then we began to discover alternatives - spherical geometry, non-Euclidean geometry, finite geometries ... even topology, a
mod-em arrival that focuses on concepts such as `inside' or `knotted' that remain unchanged when a shape is stretched, bent, or
twisted. at do all these disparate geometries have in common? The visual element, humanity's most powerful mental tool.
Mad Mathesis alone was unconfined /Too mad for mere material chains to birul, / Now to pure space lifts her ecstatic stare,
/Now running round the circle, finds it square.
ALEXANDER POPE
Introduction to Geometry (1969) by H S M Coxeter. An elegant survey of virtually every area of geometry. Demanding, but
worth it.
A Budget of Trisections (1987) by Underwood Dudley. Why angles cannot be trisected with ruler and compasses, and
hundreds of attempts to do it despite that. After all, what do mathematicians know about it?
Ideas of Space (1989) by Jeremy Gray. Historical introduction to Euclidean, non- Euclidean, and relativistic models for the
shape of the universe.
Euclidean and Non-Euclidean Geometries (1993) by Martin Jay Greenberg. There are more geometries than we usually
imagine, and parallel Lines need not behave the way we usually think.
Geometry in Nature (1993) by Vagn Lundsgaard Hansen. How geometry sheds light on form in the natural world.
Knot Theory (1993) by Charles Livingston. An excellent introduction to a major area of topology, the geometry of continuous
transformations. How to prove that a knot can't be untied.
Poetry of the Universe (1995) by Robert Osserman. The contribution of mathematics to our understanding of the shape of the
universe and the physics that goes with it, from Flat Earth to Big Bang.
Fearful Symmetry: Is God a Geometer? (1992) by Ian Stewart and Martin Golubitsky. How the geometrical concept of
symmetry is deeply involved in the creation of nature's patterns.
The Shape of Space (1985) by Jeffrey R Weeks. Exotic geometries stimulated by speculations about the nature of space and
time.
FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS
Ian Stewart
Numbers are fundamental to the historical development of mathematics and to the way human beings learn it and think about
it. But you can dig down underneath the number concept and turn up ideas upon which it logically rests. The ideas include the
notion of a set, and the various disciplines of mathematical logic. These books cover a variety of topics in the philosophy and
foundations of mathematics.
And new Philosophy calls all in doubt, / The Element of fire is quite
put out, / The Sun is lost, and th'earth, and no mans wit / Can well
direct him, where to looke for it.
JOHN DONNE
Founders of Modern Mathematics (1982) by F Gareth Ashurst. Historical account of where modern mathematics came from,
and who did it.
Algorithmic Information Theory (1987) by Gregory J Chaitin. What do we really mean by `random'? One of the great
original minds of recent decades provides some surprising answers.
What Is Mathematical Logic (1990) by J N Crossley, C J Ash, C J Brickhill, J C Stillwell, and N H Williams. Technical,
readable, and brief account of the basic ideas of mathematical logic and foundations.
Logic and Information (1991) by Keith Devlin. What mathematical logic can tell us
about intelligence, knowledge, and the communication of information.
Abraham Robinson (1995) by Joseph Warren Dauben. Extensive biography of one of the founders of modern mathematical
logic.
Berkeley's Philosophy of Mathematics (1993) by Douglas M Jesseph. History of one of the great controversialists in the
foundations of mathematics, and why he was worried about them.
The Nature of Mathematical Knowledge (1984) by Philip Kitcher. Philosophical analysis of the meaning and significance of
mathematics, and the development of its own internal view of what it's all about.
Mathematics and the Search for Knowledge (1985) by Morri Kline. at has mathematical thinking done for humanity, and
how has it changed our view of what it means to `know' something?
Introduction to Mathematical Logic (1964) by Elliott Mendelson. This one is technical; but it's a brilliant description of the
nuts and bolts of logic and set theory which to my mind has never been bettered.
Sets, an Introduction (1990) by Michael D Potter. Undergraduate textbook providing an unusually accessible introduction to
the foundational concepts of set theory. Don't be put off by the apparent level of difficulty.
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
Ian Stewart
Today's mathematics is general and abstract, littered with curious ideas invented for their own sakes. Yet it pays its way
through applications that range across the whole spectrum of science, and into the humanities, business and medicine ... No
corner of human culture is untouched by mathematics. These books mostly describe new and exciting applications of new and
exciting mathematics, but a few of the more orthodox applications are represented too.
One factor that has remained constant throughout all the twists and turns of the history of physical science is the decisive
importance of mathematical imagination.
FREEMAN DYSON
Fractals Everywhere (1993) by Michael F Barnsley. The intricacies of fractals, a new and beautiful type of geometrical
object, and their uses in image compression.
Reality Rules (1992) by John L Casti. How to build mathematical models of the world, solve them, and gain insight into how
the universe works.
Symmetry in Chaos (1992) by Michael Field and Martin Golubitsky. Glorious technicolour picturebook of some novel
applications of exotic mathematics. Order and chaos combined in a nutshell.
Let Newton Be! (1988) edited by, John Fauvel, Raymond Flood, Michael Shortland, and Robin Wilson. Multi-author volume
on the life, works, and influences of Isaac Newton.
Introduction to Physical Mathematics (1985) by P G Harper and D L Weaire. Basic mathematical concepts that prove useful
in physics, with plenty of physical motivation.
Complexity (1992) by Roger Lewin. The recent creation of the mathematics of complex adaptive systems, and its implications
for evolution, history, economics, and the kitchen sink ...
Fractals, Chaos, Power Laws (1991) by Manfred Schroeder. Some of nature's deepest symmetries are related to changes of
scale. This simple insight leads to beautiful and powerful new mathematical theories.
Games of Life (1993) by Karl Sigmund. Applications of mathematics to the games that living creatures play in order to
survive, reproduce, and evolve.
Nature's Numbers (1995) by Ian Stewart. The role of mathematics in understanding the world. In the widely praised Science
Masters series.
The Geometry of Biological Time (1990) by A T Winfree. How a visual approach to dynamics sheds light on the biological
world.
FRONTIERS OF MATHEMATICS
Ian Stewart
How can you do research on mathematics? Haven't all the numbers been discovered? Well, no, but that's not really the point.
Research mathematics is no more about studying bigger numbers than biology is about making a bigger elephant. It's what you
do with the numbers that matters. These books will open your eyes to the enormous breadth, variety, and vigour of mathematics
on the front line.
The Collapse of Chaos (1993) by Jack Cohen and Ian Stewart. at is the relation between simplicity and complexity in science?
The new mathematics of complexity theory, intermingled with biology, physics, and evolution.
Mathematics: The New Golden Age (1988) by Keith Devlin. When was the Golden Age of mathematics? Now!
Mathematics and the Unexpected (1988) by Ivar Ekeland. An elegant little book about modem theories of change and their
connections with chance and prediction.
Bridges to Infinity (1984) by Michael Guillen. A friendly, formula-free trip through the human side of mathematical research.
Fuzzy Thinking (1993) by Bart Kosko. How to think precisely about vagueness. If there were a Society of Fuzzy Logicians
you would be able to be a 37% member, paying 37% fees and receiving 37% benefits.
Understanding the Infinite (1994) by Shaughan Lavine. The best discussion I know of the philosophy of mathematical
theories of the infte. Tough going in places, but worth the effort.
The Mathematical Tourist (1988) by Ivars Peterson. An extremely readable survey of a variety of areas of frontier research in
the mathematical sciences.
Islands of Truth (1990) by Ivars Peterson. Sequel to The Mathematical Tourist. More of the same, as you'd expect.
Does God Play Dice? (1989) by Ian Stewart. Best-selling introduction to chaos theory which cuts out the he and explains the
mathematics.
The Problems of Mathematics (1992) by Ian Stewart. A sweeping survey of today's mathematical frontiers, originally aimed
at undergraduates. Soon to be reincarnated as From Here to Infinity, aimed at everybody.
PHYSICS: INTRODUCTION
Brian Pippard
Until the last years of the 19th century, the principal aim of physics was to find the basic rules governing the movement of
bodies, and to use them in solving a wide variety of problems, including the practical problems of engineering. Isaac Newton's
laws of motion and his discovery of universal gravitation form the heart of this venture, and were followed after a century by
the exact description of electric and magnetic processes which culminated in James Clerk Maxwell's linking of light to
electromagnetic waves.
The resulting, very nearly consistent, picture of the general behaviour of matter (as distinct from chemistry and other studies of
particular forms) is now known as classical physics. It was found to be seriously incomplete with the discovery, between 1895
and 1900, of X-rays, radioactivity, the electron, and the quantum; in 1905 Albert Einstein formulated the relativity principle.
From those remarkable ten years has sprung the whole of modem physics, which in no way relegates classical physics to the
scrapheap, but delineates its limits of applicability. To grasp the ideas of modem physics and its vast range, from the human
scale downwards to atoms and their constituents, and upwards to the very bounds of the cosmos, one must first appreciate how
classical physicists discovered what they knew and how they made sense of it.
Although mathematics is the most powerful and convenient language with which to develop the logical consequences of the
fundamental laws, one does not need mathematical facility to obtain a good feeling for how success has been achieved.
Physics for the Inquiring Mind (1960) by E M Rogers. An introduction to the general ideas of physics, with much historical
detail, aimed at the nonspecialist reader by an outstanding and innovating teacher; copious line drawings by the author.
The Laws of Nature (1955) by R E Peierls. Similar to the above but on a smaller scale, and with more emphasis on relativity
and particle physics.
The Character of Physical Law (1965) by R P Feynman. Based on a television series by a great physicist and brilliant
expositor. Concentrates on basic concepts such as conservation, symmetry, the concept of time, and probability in quantum
physics.
From Falling Bodies to Radio Waves (1984) by E Segre. A historically based account of classical physics through the
achievements of such as Galileo, Isaac Newton, Michael Faraday, Rudolf Clausius, James Clerk Maxwell, and Josiah Gibbs.
The transition from classical to modem physics:
The Evolution of Physics (1938) by Albert Einstein and L Infeld. The greatest of modem physicists describes the
developments he pioneered - relativity and quantum physics - as the outcome of earlier achievements.
Order, Chaos, Order (1994) by P Stehle. A largely nontechnical account, with more detailed appendices, of the complex early
years of the 20th century during which the perceived weaknesses of classical physics were resolved through the invention of
quantum mechanics.
Thermal physics:
The Refrigerator and the Universe (1993) by M and I F Goldstein. Energy and entropy in physics, chemistry•, and
cosmology (including the greenhouse effect).
The Quest for Absolute Zero: Meaning of Low Temperature Physics (1977) by K Mendelssohn. A nonmathematical
account of how very low temperatures are produced, and the phenomena, such as superconductivity and superfluidity, that
occur at these extreme conditions.
The Cambridge Guide to the Material World (1985) by R Cotterill. An extraordinarily wide and copiously illustrated survey
of the varieties of matter from fundamental panicles to the constituents of plants and animals, taking in crystals, Liquids,
glasses, polymers, and many others.
The Making of the Atomic Bomb (1986) by R Rhodes. A very full account of the physics, technology, and organization
involved in one of the greatest of all industrial ventures, and its appalling outcome.
It is hard to make a choice, but the following deserve serious consideration for their breadth of coverage:
Energy and Empire (1989) by C Smith and M N Wise on William Thomson Kelvin; Rutherford (1983) by D Wilson;
Subtle Is the Lord (1982) by A Pais on Einstein; Niels Bohr's Times (1991) by A Pais;
Uncertainty (1992) by D C Cassidy on Werner Heisenberg;
The Life of Isaac Newton (1993) by R Westfall. A shorter version of his magisterial Never at Rest (1980).
PARTICLE PHYSICS
Christine Sutton
Particle physics is the study of the basic building blocks of matter and the forces that l act upon them. Over the past 50 years
research in this field has shown that the matter we observe is built from only a few elementary particles called quarks and
leptons, and that only four fundamental forces operate on these particles to yield the great diversity of the universe. More
recently, discovering how these particles and forces evolved in the very early universe has forged intimate links between
particle physics, cosmology, and astrophysics, and yielded a remarkable synthesis of ideas.
We now know that in the maelstrom of high density and temperature that existed in the early moments of the universe, only the
most primordial objects could exist; any transient combinations, such as pmtons, let alone molecules, would decompose more
quickly than a butterfly in the core of a volcano. It is for this reason that the search for what is elementary
underlies both particle physics and the cosmology of the early universe.
LEON LEDERMAN AND DAVID SCHRAMM
The Discovery of Subatomic Particles (1983) by Steven Weinberg. An intriguing discussion of the early history of particle
physics. It covers in particular the discoveries of the electron and the atomic nucleus by introducing a number of basic physical
principles and emphasizing how they underlie our ability to `see' within the atom.
Quarks: The Stuff of Matter (1984) by Harald Fritsch. A straightforward account of the peculiar world of quarks and the
strong force that binds them together, never to let them appear alone.
The Cosmic Onion: Quarks and the Nature of the Universe (1983) by Frank Close. A first guide to particle physics by a
gifted and inspirational lecturer, who presented the Royal Institution's Christmas lectures 1993-94. The many illustrations
include photographs, diagrams, and the author's own cartoon quarks.
The Particle Explosion (1987) by Frank Close, Michael Marten, and Christine Sutton. A highly illustrated, loosely historical
account describing the different particles and how they were discovered. At the same time it reveals how the field has
developed with advances in experimental techniques for making particles and tracking them down.
The Forces of Nature (1986) by Paul Davies. A valuable companion to any of the books that are mainly about quarks,
'building blocks' of matter, thus concentrates on the 'mortar'. It provides an introduction to how modem deals with forces at a
quantum level.
Particles and Forces: At the Heart of the Matter (1990) edited by Richard Carrigan and Peter Trower. A collection of articles
from Scientific American, mainly from the 1980s, which brings particle physics into the 1990s. All are good, some are classics.
From Quarks to the Cosmos: Tools of Discovery (1989) by Leon Lederman and David Schramm. An experimental particle
physicist and a theoretical astrophysicist team up to show how the physics of the very small has become inextricably linked
with our understanding of the universe on cosmic scales. Well illustrated. The emphasis is on what we know through
experiment.
Dreams of a Final Theory (1993) by Steven Weinberg. The most eloquent of particle physicists, and a Nobel prizewinner,
presents the case for research in particle physics, and in particular the ill-fated Superconducting Supercollider. That this was
later cancelled does nothing to detract from the unfolding arguments, but adds poignancy to a tale well told.
The Particle Garden (1994) by Gordon Kane. A fascinating, up-to-date introduction to particle physics, which also presents a
personal view of the field as it heads towards the 21st century. It places the present state of understanding in better context than
many other books and articles.
Quantum physics give an atom's-eye view of the world; relativity theory makes the link between space and time, gravity and
motion. Both theories are 20th-century deve opments and both have revolutionized physics. The books listed here reveal some
of the peculiarities that these days dominate the working life of a physicist.
No Ordinary Genius (1994) edited by Christopher Sykes. An amply illustrated tribute to Richard Feynman, Nobel
prizewinner and pioneer in the understanding of quantum mechanics, who died in 1988.
Genius: Richard Feynman and Modern Physics (1992) by James Gleick. Full-scale biography of the attractive and brilliant
Richard Feynman.
The Quantum Self (1990) by Danah Zohar. An encouraging book which attempts to make the Is between our understanding of
atomic behaviour and our understanding of ourselves.
The Quantum Society (1994) by Danah Zohar and Ian Marshall. This sequel to The Quantum Self carries the argument
further, making links between the quantum idea and a new and better society.
Schrodinger's Kittens (1995) by John Gribbin. The well-known science writer takes a look at the behaviour of light, and
searches for quantum and relativistic interpretations.
Einstein for Beginners (1993) by Joseph Schwartz and Michael McGuinness. A cartoon treatment of the great physicist and
his ideas which no one can fully understand. This book will at least get you started, and relatively painlessly.
Relativity for the Layman (1969) by James A Coleman. One of the great classics of popular science, in spite of the sexist title.
Written with a sure economy of words, this is a book of great clarity and elegance.
Einstein's Universe (1979) by Nigel Calder. A full account of the history of relativity theory and its implications for the way
we understand the universe. Included is enough material about Einstein for the reader to get an idea of what the man was like.
CHEMISTRY: GENERAL
Julian Rowe
Getting familiar with what chemistry is all about is more important now, at the end of a century, than at the beginning, when
this science was comparatively primitive. Now we need to know why the ozone layer is under chemical attack, why book and
magazine printers now choose to use water-based inks, and what the analysis on every packet of food means. Increasingly, the
boundaries between different scientific disciplines are blurred: the subtle mixture of chemistry and physics that underlies the
manufacture of the microchip means that we are dealing with physics, chemistry, and electronics simultaneously. These books
provide a firm basis for pursuing such questions further.
The more we know, the more we feel our ignorance; the more we feel how much
remains unknown; and in philosophy, the sentiment of the Macedonian hero can
never apply - there are always new worlds to conquer.
HUMPHRY DAVY
A Short History of Chemistry (1937) by J R Parton. A prolific author of text-books on chemistry and author of a multivolume
history. This is a clear and authoritative account of the history of chemistry. It draws on many original sources and although it
starts with alchemy and ends with radioactivity and the transmutation of the elements, this excellent and concise book
concentrates on the foundation of modem chemistry and the great scientists who lead the way.
Asimov on Chemistry (1975) by Isaac Asimov. In 17 wide-ranging essays this experienced science popularizer effectively
covers the entire field of chemistry in an accessible manner. Everything from the chemistry of the planet Earth, inorganic,
organic, and nuclear chemistry are entertainingly treated, and there is an essay on the Nobel prizewinners at the end.
The Nature of the Chemical Bond (1940) by Linus Pauling. A double Nobel prizewinner_ A classic, perhaps ambitiously
included in a general reading list, but showing how real advances in understanding are made as a result of modem chemical
research.
The Chemical History of the Candle (1861) by Michael Faraday. Often acknowledged as one of the greatest scientists of all
time, during the Christmas holiday (1860-61) Michael Faraday gave a series of talks on physics and chemistry to an audience
of young people in London. He engaged their imagination and made them feel the challenges and delights of science. The
Chemical History of a Candle is clearly one of the best and covers the chemistry of combustion in an original and astonishingly
comprehensive way. These talks became an institution and have been given ever since by distinguished scientists over the
Christmas period at the Royal Institution, London.
Success in Chemistry (1982) by Jean Macqueen, series editor. One of the brilliant Success Studybooks - really aimed at pre A-
level students, but giving an excellent basic, nontrivial coverage of the subject.
The Penguin Dictionary of Chemistry (1990) by D W A Sharp. Useful, updated compendium of definitions of chemical
terms. Not just examination fodder.
The Alchemists (1976) by F Sherwood Taylor. The author is a former director of the Science Museum, London. No reading list
on chemistry would be complete without a look at the alchemists. Widely misunderstood, much of their pioneering work under-
lay the astonishing expansion of chemistry from the 17th century onwards.
The Dorling Kindersley Science Encyclopedia (1994) by Heather Couper and Nigel Henbest (consultants). Covers many
topics in chemistry and applied chemistry-in a highly illustrated and informative way.
Inorganic chemistry is probably what most people regard as chemistry - memories of school laboratories, smells, flashes, and
bangs. The laboratory scenes beloved by movie directors that show an antiquated distillation apparatus, smoke and bubbling,
coloured solutions belong rightly to popular mythology. This reading list should redress the balance.
The Consumer's Good Chemical Guide (1994) by John Emsley. A good guide, thoroughly dippable - just what its title
implies.
Structure and Change - An Introduction to Chemical Reactions (1981) by R A Richardson, A C Blizzard, and D Humphreys. A
high-school text that successfully blends a factual and theoretical approach to chemistry. It succeeds in giving an appreciation
of the vital role of chemistry in the world.
Usborne Introduction to Chemistry (1983) by Jane Chisolm and Mary Johnson. A highly illustrated and simple introduction
to chemistry that covers an amazing amount of ground.
Chemistry in the Service of Man (1925) by Alexander Findlay. A wonderful text from what now seems like a bygone era.
Nonetheless it is a substantial introduction to chemistry, very readable, and the chapter on radioactivity and atomic structure,
written in the prenuclear age, is particularly absorbing.
Men and Molecules (1960) by Carl R Theiler. What chemistry is and what it does. The author takes the reader through the
transformation of first ideas into reality - the building up of mighty industries and the production of astonishing new materials.
The reader grows familiar with chemical formulae and their strange names in this well-illustrated book which has a very good
glossary.
BIOCHEMISTRY
Julian Rowe
To understand what the life sciences are about, some biochemistry is a necessary requirement. Modern biology has travelled a
great distance from the observational stance of the naturalist, without, it is necessary to say, in any way invalidating it. The
route was certainly via biochemistry. To understand genetics, to understand the molecular sciences or molecular basis of life,
start with biochemistry. This list is in part informative, in part a march of progress.
When you cannot measure it, when you cannot express it in numbers,
your knowledge is of a meagre and unsatisfactory kind.
WILLLgM THOMSON KELVIN
A Guide-Book to Biochemistry (1959) by Kenneth Harrison. Many standard books on biochemistry are very thick, 500-1,000
pages. This excellent book is a deliberate exception and provides a good guide that is brief and to the point.
The Physical Basis of Life (1951) by J D Bernal. Based on a prescient lecture delivered to the Physical Society, this
speculative survey discussed the conditions under which life may have emerged from an inorganic world - biochemistry in
action.
Readings in Molecular Biology by W B Gratzer. Selected from Nature by W B Gratzer, these short essays in journalism were
aimed at the working scientist and chart the progress of the then emergent branch of science - molecular biology.
Principles of Biochemistry (1993) by A L Lehninger. A comprehensive American undergraduate text, written with masterly
clarity. The author properly declares that biochemistry is now the lingua franca of the life sciences, and no one consulting this
introductory text should be the poorer for having done so.
Dynamic Aspects of Biochemistry (1967) by E Baldwin. A book that first high-lighted the fact that biochemistry is an
interesting and a quite different discipline from chemistry. Many thousands of undergraduates must have cut their novice teeth
on this particular book and were probably grateful.
APPLIED CHEMISTRY
Julian Rowe
There are few products around us at home or at work that do not owe their existence to the ever more sophisticated application
of chemistry. From prescribed drugs to paints, better petrol or food analysis, crime detection or perfume - all have at base an
understanding of chemistry. These books are selective, but they cover the ground. The general reference works noted in this
section are also, of course, equally useful for any inquiry into a subdivision of chemistry.
They leave such things alone and busy themselves with their fires and learning the
steps of alchemy, which are distillation, solution, putrefaction, extraction,
calcination, reverberation, sublimation, fixation, separation, reduction,
coagulation, tinction, and the like.
PARACELSUS
The Life Savers (1961) by Richie Calder. The cover blurb says: the enthralling story of today's revolution in medicine - the
discovery and development of the life-saving drugs'.
Butter Side Up or The Delights of Science (1978) by Magnus Pyke. Reviewed by the Evening Standard: `An opencast mine
of unexpected information that can be understood even by someone who cannot tell a Bunsen burner from a laser beam.'
Chemistry: The Conquest of Materials (1957) by Kenneth Hutton. A good account, by a teacher and author, of the scope of
modem chemistry, telling a clear story from the elements to modem drugs. On the way fuels, modem materials such as plastics,
pesticides, and explosives are dealt with at a usefully informed level.
Metals in the Service of Man (1972) by W Alexander and A Street. How metals are obtained and worked and the part they
play in modem life. An ideal introduction for the general reader.
Plastics in the Service of Man (1956) by E A Cousins and V E Yarsley. A description of the structure. manufacture, properties
and the contemporary use of plastics.
Science and Technology (1993) by Open University Press. A good work of reference which covers just what its ride implies
and includes applied chemistry. Well illustrated and up to date, it is a good volume for browsing.
The following encyclopedias provide sound, accessible articles on a wide range of chemistry topics:
Junior Britannica Surprisingly readable articles on any aspect of science chemistry and applications thereof covered
adequately.
The World Book Covers the ground more than adequately.
ASTRONOMY: COSMOLOGY
John Gribbin
Where do we come from? Cosmology deals with the big questions, the origin and evolution of the entire universe, and its
ultimate fate. This means that it also deals with our own origins, giving the subject the same fascination for many people as
religion or philosophy. And yet, cosmology is one of the youngest sciences. Until the 1920s, no astronomer seriously doubted
that the universe was eternal and unchanging. That cosy assumption was overturned by the discovery of universal expansion,
leading to the idea of a definite origin in the Big Bang, some 15 billion years ago. Today, cosmologists are even prepared to
tackle the question of what happened before the Big Bang. The books mentioned below will give you the opportunity to peer
over their shoulders at this work in progress, and to see how these ultimate questions are being tackled, even if the ultimate
answers are not yet in.
The Anthropic Cosmological Principle (1986) by John Barrow and Frank Tipler. An exhaustive overview of the cosmos and
humankind's place in it, daunting in parts but quite readable if you skip the technical stuff.
Afterglow of Creation (1993) by Marcus Chown. The best book about the `cosmic background radiation' that fills all of space
and is a remnant of the Big Bang itself.
The Creation of the Universe (1952) by George Gamow. Fascinating (if slightly dated) `horse's mouth' account from one of
the pioneers of the Big Bang theory.
In Search of the Big Bang (1986) by John Gribbin. Historical account of the development of cosmology in the 20th century,
from the expanding universe to the theory of inflation.
The Stuff of the Universe (1990) by John Gribbin and Marlin Rees. The Astronomer Royal, Martin Rees, joins forces with
science writer John Gribbin to describe the `dark matter' that makes up 99% of the universe.
Lonely Hearts of the Cosmos (1991) by Dennis Overbye. The story of the quest for the secret of the origin of the universe,
told in terms of the personalities involved. Gives a real flavour of how cosmologists work and think.
Time Machines (1993) by Paul Nahin. Goes beyond the black hole, mixing science fiction and science fact to discuss the
extraordinary implication of Albert Einstein's general theory of relativity, that time travel may not be impossible.
Was Einstein Right? (1986) by Clifford Will. The answer, of course, is yes. The most accessible guide to Einstein's theories
for the nonscientist.
HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY
Derek Gjertsen
More than most exact sciences, astronomy lends itself to historical treatment. For one thing, along with mathematics, it was the
first science to establish itself in antiquity and therefore has a longer and more fully documented history than most other
sciences. Furthermore, the records of ancient astronomers contain data still valuable to the astronomers of today. But also, as
much of modern astronomy changes so rapidly with books becoming out of date within a decade, the only way to estimate the
value of any theory or observation is to see it within some kind of historical context. Consequently it is no accident that almost
every work on modern cosmology, popular or scholarly, will begin with the structure of the universe pro-posed by Copernicus
in the 16th century and lead via Galileo, Johannes Kepler, and Isaac Newton to the Big Bang.
People give ear to an upstart astrologer who strove to show that the Earth revolves,
not the heavens. This fool wishes us to reverse the entire science of astronomy; but
sacred scripture commanded the Sun to stand still, and not the Earth.
MARTIN LUTHER ON COPERNICUS
Astronomy and Cosmology (1994) by John North. A new, authoritative, and read-able history (part of the excellent Fontana
History of Science series), this book covers astronomy from prehistory to Stephen Hawking.
The Sleepwalkers (1960) by Arthur Koestler. Mainly an account of how Copernicus, Kepler and Galileo battled to show that it
was the Sun and not the Earth that lay at the centre of the universe. Despite bias against Galileo and some inept theorizing,
Koestler's work remains - at the narrative and biographical level - an extraordinarily exciting book.
In Search of Ancient Astronomies (1979) edited by E C Krupp. An account of the astronomical knowledge, techniques, and
monuments of neolithic Europe, North and Meso-America, and Egypt.
Megaliths, Myths and Men: An Introduction to Astro Archaeology (1976) by Peter Lancaster Brown. A critical and expert
survey of the supposed astronomical background of Stonehenge, the Pyramids, and several other ancient remains. Lancaster
Brown manages to dispose of some of the more outlandish claims commonly made about ancient astronomy.
The Expanding Universe 1900-31 (1982) by Robert Smith. A scholarly but read-able account of the theoretical arguments and
observational evidence that enabled such astronomers as Edwin Hubble to conclude that the universe is expanding. The same
period and argument is covered in the more popular and lavishly illustrated Man Discovers the Galaxies (1976) by R
Berendzen, R Hart, and Daniel Seeley.
The Great Copernicus Chase and Other Adventures in Astronomical History (1992) by Owen Gingerich. An engrossing
collection of 36 short essays ranging from 'Egyptian Sky Magic' to 'The Great Comet of 1965'.
The Astronomical Scrapbook (1984) by John Ashbrook. A fascinating collection of 91 short articles, mainly gleaned from the
more curious byways of the history of astronomy, which originally appeared in the popular magazine Sky and Telescope.
History of the Telescope (1955) by Henry King. The standard history of the telescope from the earliest times to the 1950s.
The Story of Jodrell Bank (1968) by Bernard Lovell. The story of Lovell's attempts to design, finance, and build a huge
steerable parabolic radio telescope. Against all the odds, it was opened in 1957. More detail about the various telescopes built
by Lovell can be found in The Jodrell Bank Telescopes (1985).
Halley and the Comet (1985) by Peter Lancaster Brown. Probably the best of the many popular works written to
commemorate the return of Halley's comet in 1986. It contains historical, biographical, and astronomical material.
A History of Japanese Astronomy (1969) by Shigeru Nakayama. There are, of course, non-Western astronomical traditions.
Nakayama provides a sound account of the development of astronomy in Japan. A comparable account for China can be found
in The Shorter Science and Civilisation in China (1978-94) by Colin Ronan.
Until the 1960s, books on the Solar System could do little more than describe such grosser features of the planets as their size,
mass, and distance from Earth. But with the launch of the Orbiter, Apollo, Mariner, Voyager, and other planetary probes,
astronomers could at last speak significantly about the geology, meteorology and history of the planets. They also had access to
many stunning colour photographs of planetary surfaces and such remarkable phenomena as the rings of Saturn. As a result,
cur-rent books on the Solar System are much more plentiful, detailed, and colourful than those produced only a few years
before.
It is most beautiful and pleasing to look upon the lunar body distant from us by about 60 terrestrial diameters as if it were
distant by only two of these measures. Anyone will then understand that the Moon is by no means endowed with a smooth and
polished surface but is rough and uneven crowded everywhere with deep chasms and convolutions.
GAIILEO GALILEI IN 1610 ON FIRST SEEING
THE MOON THROUGH A TELESCOPE.
Orbiting the Sun: Planets and Satellites of the Solar System (1981) by Fred Whipple. A comprehensive account of the solar
system incorporating satellite data and photos from the various Viking missions. Patrick Moore's New Guide to the Planets
(1993) covers much the same ground at a less technical level.
Guide to the Sun (1992) by Kenneth Phillips. Though somewhat technical in pans, this book provides a readable account of
the chromosphere, photosphere, corona, and interior of the Sun, and how best it can be observed.
Times Atlas of the Moon (1969) by H A Lewis. A detailed 110-page map of the Moon. Less detailed and with more general
information about the Moon - its origin, orbit etc - is Patrick Moore's The Moon (1985).
Comets: Readings from Scientific American (1981) edited by John C Brandt. A collection of authoritative articles covering
such topics as the tails, spin, and nature of comets. A simpler account can be found in Guide to Comets (1977) by Patrick
Moore.
Solar System: Readings from Scientific American (1975) by W H Freeman. A useful and readable collection of articles on
the Solar System including individual papers on the planets, their origin, and interplanetary fields.
The Discovery of Neptune (1979) by Morton Grosser. A fascinating account of the discovery in 1846 of the existence of a
previously unknown planet.
Nemesis (1988) by Richard Muller. The exciting story of the search by astrophysicists in the 1980s for the `killer star' Nemesis.
Nemesis is thought to be orbiting the Sun and - as it approaches the Earth every 26 million years - causing such catastrophes as
the extinction of the dinosaurs.
We Are Not Alone (1970) by Walter Sullivan. A sensible but interesting discussion of whether or not life exists on worlds
outside our Solar System.
Until relatively recent times the only books on stars were concerned with the mythic origin of their names. Nothing more was
known about stars than that they were numerous, twinkled, and were very far away. In the 19th century things changed
radically when it was shown that detailed knowledge of a star's composition, temperature, density, and much more besides
could be derived by analysing the light it emitted. The Milky Way was still, however, assumed to represent the whole of
creation, and it was not until the 1920s that it became apparent that a profusion of other galaxies could be found beyond the
Milky Way. They have been studied intensively ever since.
I was contemplating the stars in a clear sky when I noticed a new and
unusual star shining almost directly above my head where there had never been
any star in that place in the shy. Unable to accept the evidence of my eyes 1
called upon my servants and a passing peasant to verify my observations.
TYCHO BRAHE ON THE SUPERNOVA OBSERVED IN 1572
The Milky Way (1973) by S L Jaki. A historical account of the growth of our knowledge of the Milky Way from the
speculations of Aristotle to the observations in the 1920s of Edwin Hubble.
The Guide to the Galaxy (1994) by Nigel Henbest and Heather Couper. A lavishly illustrated, popular but detailed work on
the Milky Way. It has chapters on the discovery of the Milky Way, its geography, its centre, and the Perseus, Orion, and
Sagittarius arms.
Supernovae (1985) by Paul Murdin and Lesley Murdin. The Murdins begin their popular work with descriptions of the
supernovae of 1066, 1572, and 1604 and go on to show how supernovae are related to pulsars, black holes, neutron stars, and
the creation of the elements. End in Fire (1990) by Paul Murdin describes the discovery in 1990 of SN1987A, the first
supernova to be visible to the unaided eye since 1604. Murdin traces the development of the supernova and shows its
connection to theory.
Frontiers in Astronomy: Readings from Scientific American (1970) edited by Owen Gingerich; The Universe of Galaxies:
Readings from Scientific American (1984) edited by Paul W Hodge. The two works are valuable collections of articles on such
topics as quasars, dark matter, the Milky Way, the red shift, and exploding galaxies.
The X-Ray Universe (1985) by Wallace Tucker and Riccardo Giacconi. X-ray stars were first observed in 1962. The authors
describe the discovery and the resulting research which led to the launch of the two X-ray telescopes UHURU in 1970 and
EINSTEIN in 1978 and the results gathered.
Observing the Universe (1984) by Nigel Henbest. A collection of short articles from New Scientist dealing with research into
X-ray astronomy, ultraviolet astronomy, the gamma ray sky, cosmic rays, the infrared sky, and optical and radio astronomy.
The Cosmic Perspective (1990) by M Zeilik and J Gauttard. A major 800-page-plus single-volume textbook dealing with the
evolution of the stars and the galaxies. Although technical in pans, much of the text remains within the competence of the
general reader.
Star Names: Their Lore and Meaning (1899; republished 1995) by Richard Allen. A standard and comprehensive survey of
the meaning of star names in English, Greek, Arabic, and other languages.
AMATEUR ASTRONOMY
Patrick Moore
Many books on astronomy have been published in recent years. Many of them are specialized; in my list I have included only
books which give a general picture - and which do not include complex mathematical formulas. You may note that some of my
choices appeared in 1990 or 1991, but I have selected them because of their excellence and because the material in them has
not become outdated.
Heavenly Bodies: Beginner's Guide to Astronomy (1995) by Iain Nicolson. A simple outline, based on the recent BBC
television series of the same name.
The Natural History of the Universe (1994) by C A Ronan. A well- written, beautifully illustrated general survey of modern
astronomy; it has been widely acclaimed.
Concise Dictionary of Astronomy (1991) by Jacqueline Mitton. A very clear, well organized `A to Z', which includes a
tremendous amount of information and is very easy to digest.
Images of the Universe (1991) edited by Carol Stott. Mainly an observer's book; each chapter is written by an expert in his
particular field. Most of the authors are closely linked with the British Astronomical Association.
The Hidden Universe (1991) by Roger Tayler. A very clear account of some of the problems of modern cosmology - problems
which are no nearer solution in 1995 than they were in 1991!
PRACTICAL ASTRONOMY
Derek Gjertsen
Astronomy is probably the only exact science in which amateurs can play a significant role and operate, just like their
professional colleagues, in their own scaled-down observatories with their own, much smaller telescopes. To this end they need
a large number of practical aids, ranging from catalogues and dictionaries to books on how to make and use a telescope. The
first published star catalogue, compiled by Ptolemy in about 150 AD, listed 1,022 stars in 48 constellations. In contrast, the
Bonn Catalogue compiled by Friedrich Argelander in 1863 listed 324,198 stars from the northern hemisphere alone.
Exploring the Night Sky with Binoculars (1986) by Patrick Moore. A book for beginners. After offering advice on choosing
binoculars, Moore writes about the planets, comets, and the Moon. Half the book is devoted to charts of the constellations.
Astronomy with a Small Telescope (1985) by James Muirden. Introductory chapters describe the various telescopes and their
mounting and are followed by advice on how to observe the Sun, Moon, planets, meterorites, comets, constellations, and
galaxies. There is also a chapter on photography.
Telescope Making for Beginners (1974) by Roy Worrill. For those prepared to make their own telescope Worrill offers a
simple guide. More detailed advice and information can be found in Handbook for Telescope Making (1962) by M E Howard.
Norton's 2000 (1989) by Arthur Philip Norton. Norton 's Atlas first appeared in 1910: the latest edition (18th) is calculated for
the year 2000. A similar approach can be found in the Cambridge Star Atlas 2000 (1991) by Will Trion.
Sundials (1969) by Frank Cooper. A standard work giving instruction on how to construct horizontal, vertical, polar, and
equatorial sundials.
Both the Penguin Dictionary of Astronomy (1993) by Jacqueline Milton and the Macmillan Dictionary of Astronomy
(1988) by Valerie Illingworth are excellent concise guides for the amateur.
Dictionary of Space (1986) by Malcolm Plant. An essential aid for those who can-not remember whether Apollo 7 went to
Mars or the Moon or which rocket first landed on Venus.
The Guinness Book of Astronomy (1992) by Patrick Moore. A familiar and informative guide to the Solar System and the
stars with a 90-page star catalogue, and brief sections on the history of astronomy.
Astronomy has always been an abstract and speculative science as well as a practical and precise discipline. The first signs of
specialized astronomical skills become apparent in the lengths of the year and the month. This was no simple matter and it was
not until the 16th century, for example, that a reasonably reliable calendar was introduced into Europe. The data compiled in
this way could be and from early times was used by astrologers to forecast horoscopes. Practical and technical skills were
needed to navigate successfully over the oceans and, eventually, to guide missiles and planes through the skies. For this reason
astronomy was one of the first sciences to receive substantial government support and under the broad umbrella of the `space
race' has continued to receive huge financial assistance.
The Calendar was so out of joint that Caesar placed between the months of
November and December two intercalary months of 67 days, having already
intercalated 23 days in February, which gave 445 days to that year.
CENSORINUS ON 46 BC, THE SO-CALLED YEAR OF CONFUSION
The Haven Finding Art. A History of Navigation from Odysseus to Captain Cook (1971) by E G R Taylor. An account of how
sailors have navigated first by wind rose and stars, then by compass and chart, next by instruments and tables, and finally, with
the introduction of the chronometer in the 18th century, with the full accuracy provided by being able to find a precise
longitude.
From Sails to Satellites (1992) by J E D Williams. Covering with less historical detail but with more illustrations much of
Taylor's ground, Williams also extends the story to recent times to include the use of radio and radar in navigation.
Greenwich Time and the Discovery of Longitude (1980) by Derek Howse. The first part of the book deals with the discovery
of longitude and the role of Greenwich Observatory in the solution. Howse also relates how Greenwich came to be accepted as
the prime meridian and the role of Greenwich time in the world.
The Voyaging Stars (1978) by David Lewis. An account of how throughout Oceania islanders in traditional canoes navigate
from one small island to an equally small but distant island.
Time and the Calendars (1975) by W M O'Neil. Details are provided of the Egyptian, Roman, Babylonian, Indian, Chinese,
and Meso-American calendars and the extent to which they rely upon astronomical investigation.
Gregorian Reform of the Calendar (1983) edited by M Hoskins and 0 Pedersen. A full and fascinating account of the
historical and astronomical problems of introducing the Gregorian calendar into Europe.
A History of Western Astrology (1987) by Jim Tester. A detailed and scholarly history of Western astrology from the 5th
century BC to the 17th century.
Astrology: Science or Superstition (1984) by H J Eysenck and K B Nais; The Truth about Astrology (1984) by Michel
Gauquelin. Two works in which the traditional claims of astrology are tested against a variety of empirical evidence.
Geology is a very wide subject. It contains so many subdisciplines - such as mineralogy, petrology, geophysics, geochemistry,
palaeontology, sedimentology - that it is almost impossible to produce a list that covers them all. The following, however,
should give the interested reader a good start.
These rocks, these bones, these fossil ferns and shells, / Shall yet be touched
with beauty, and reveal / The secrets of the book of earth to man.
ALFRED NOYES
Rocks, Minerals and Fossils of the World (1990) by Chris Pellant. It is normally not a good idea to base mineral
identification on photographs - the diagnostic properties do not show. However, the photographs in this book are particularly
good.
The Practical Geologist (1992) by Dougal Dixon. A useful coverage of the various aspects of geology and the techniques used
to study them.
The Cambridge Encyclopedia of Earth Sciences (1982) edited by David G Smith. Rather academic treatment of all the
physical earth sciences (of which geology is a part), but well illustrated.
The Principles of Physical Geology (1965) by Arthur Holmes. The standard university textbook that deals principally with
landscape formation.
Earth and Life Through Time (1986) by Steven M Stanley. The whole panoply of Earth's history, with the different types of
rocks formed at different times, and the different animals and plants found preserved in them.
Understanding the Earth (1992) by G A Brown and others. The updated version of the Open University's textbook on earth
science, bringing the original 1972 classic completely up to date.
PALAEONTOLOGY
Brian Rosen
Palaeontology, the study of fossil remains of former life, lurks benignly in its quiet backwater - surely, little to do with the real
world. Children reel off the tongue-twisting names of dinosaurs as though they were playground friends, though no one has
ever seen a live one. Anybody can go out at weekends fossil-hunting, and they don't have to be professional palaeontologists to
make discoveries. Appearances, however, are misleading. Every so often, the subject rears up and bares its intellectual teeth. It
had a critical role in giving us the very concept of geological time, and hence the great age of the Earth, ideas that were
shocking in their time and later became vital in dating the past and discovering natural resources. Palaeontology is dragged
from its lair and into the witness box for the perennial battle between creationists and evolutionists, and has startled the world
with the awe-inspiring notion that large slices of life on our planet are wiped out almost instantly in mass extinction events,
some say on a regular basis every 26 million years in response to Earth collisions by extraterrestrial bodies. Palaeontology gave
us `deep time', `macroevolution', and Jurassic Park, and is, quite simply, the only direct evidence we have for over 3,000
million years of life on our planet before we humans arrived here ourselves. And if you want to know what global change has
in store for us, and for the rest of life, ask the palaeontologists, for much of the future has already been written in the past. at is
this science that contemplates strange and beautiful organic objects found in the rocks, and yet can shake the Earth by studying
them?
Before the Deluge (1968; translated 1970) by Herbert Wendt. The history of palaeontology, its issues and its personalities, rich
in narrative and with a balanced international perspective.
The Meaning of Fossils (1972) by Martin Rudwick. Widely regarded as the standard scholarly reference to the historical
scientific issues and intellectual questions posed by palaeontology.
The Message of Fossils (1991; translated 1993) by Pascal Tassy. An easy-going essay focused on the interface between
palaeontology and evolution, which includes its more recent controversies.
Fossils (1960) by H H Swinnerton. A notable contribution to the classic New Naturalist series, this inevitably has a very
homely British bias. No matter - the range of fossil-bearing rocks in Britain is a good enough sample of the fossil record, which
Swinnerton sets out with charm, enjoyment, and enthusiasm.
Earth and Life Through Time (1986) by S M Stanley. Earth and life and the meaning of nearly everything. This is the
American college solution to everything you wanted to know about fossils, evolution, and geology. Don't worry about the self-
assessment questions unless you are a student - this book is here on its encyclopedic merit.
History of Life (radically expanded edition 1990) by Richard Cowen. A delightfully individual and good-humoured account,
complete with arcane limericks and other incidental entertainment, which highlight the science without distracting from it.
Good on invertebrates.
The Book of Life (1993) edited by Stephen Jay Gould. The thinking person's palaeontological coffee-table book (and why not?
See Gould's panegyric on the significance of coffee tables and their books). First-class illustrations and chapters by an
impressive cast list of other distinguished specialists with emphasis on vertebrates, including humans.
The Natural History Museum Book of Dinosaurs (1995) by Angela Milner. No book list in this subject can be without
something on dinosaurs. This is an up-to-date look at their biology - what we can deduce about their lifestyles from modem
research and new finds - together with the history and practice of dinosaur studies, from bones in the rock to a restoration of the
whole animal.
The Nemesis Affair. A Story of the Death of Dinosaurs and Ways of Science (1986) by David Raup. Treats extinction
generally, ad discusses controversial collisions between extraterrestrial bodies and Earth, between organisms and their physical
world, and between scientists and mass culture.
Wonderful Life (1989) by Stephen Jay Gould. Gould is palaeontology's most virtuoso narrator and interpreter. Here he brings
to life in epic style the famously mysterious, and miraculously preserved, animals of the Burgess Shale, and the personalities
who have studied them, using them as the raw material for expounding his ideas about the significance of chance.
Fossils: The Key to the Past (1991) by Richard Fortey. Bringing fossils to life and applying this knowledge to geology and
biology. An effortless browse through all the branches of the subject, introducing all the main fossil organisms at the same
time.
When it comes to volcanoes the reading public is not well served by books at a popular level. Beware, particularly, of the block
diagram showing a cone of a volcano cut in half, fed by a red thread of liquid cutting through the rocks below, exiting through
side vents as well as the main crater. There never was a volcano like that, and the oversimplification is misleading. That said,
however, the following are probably the best books available.
It is useful to be assured that the heavings of the earth are not the work of
angry deities. These phenomena have causes of their own.
LUCIUS ANNUS SENECA
The Natural History Museum's Earth Galleries (formerly the Geological Museum) produce a series of booklets covering a
range of earth sciences. All are published by Her Majesty's Stationery Office.
Earthquakes (1983) by Susanna van Rose. Describes the various phenomena associated with an earthquake, covers the known
causes, and gives some case histories.
The Story of the Earth (1981) by F W Dunning and others. Gives an overview of the concept of plate tectonics and shows
how volcanoes and earthquakes fit into the grand scheme.
Dorling Kindersley Eyewitness Guides: Volcano (1992) by Susanna van Rose. An elegantly illustrated book with
photographs and artwork showing all sorts of phenomena associated with volcanic activity.
The Dorling Kindersley Science Encyclopaedia (1993) edited by Heather Couper and Nigel Henbest. Has good sections on
earthquakes and volcanoes.
Mountains of Fire: The Nature of Volcanoes (1991) by R W and B B Decker. A well-illustrated introduction to volcanoes,
their rock types, and their effects.
Natural Disasters: Volcanoes (1991) by Jacqueline Dineen. A good, simple book, but beware the block diagrams!
METEOROLOGY
Chris Pellant
The swirling, circulating atmospheric systems that control the Earth's daily weather and seasonal climate are driven by the
principles of physics, especially those relating to how fluids heat up, cool down, and move. Meteorology is concerned with
understanding these processes and the events they cause, and because of man's dependence on his atmospheric surroundings,
the prediction of changes in weather and climate is a very important part of the science. Today, possibly as much as at any time
in the past, the atmosphere is changing and being changed. Temperatures are rising, new gases are appearing and established
ones are changing in quantity; circulation is being altered. The effects of these, often man-induced, changes is a new area to tax
the skills of meteorologists.
The Restless Atmosphere (1953-67; various reprints) by F Kenneth Hare. A very readable account this, covering physics and
related science in easily understood language. The section on the depressions of middle latitudes even hints at the effects these
cyclonic air masses have on the humans who continually suffer from them, by reference to `cyclonic man'.
Climate and the British Scene (1975) by Gordon Manley. Originally one of the now collectable Collins New Naturalist series,
this classic account opens with a fascinating history of meteorological recording and, after detailed coverage of the climate of
Britain, finishes with the impact of weather and climate on man.
Atmosphere, Weather and Climate (1992) by Roger G Barry and Richard J Chorley. A heavyweight volume for the dedicated
reader. Everything is here from the gas content of the sky to the causes of climatic change.
The Weather Book (1982) by Ralph Hardy, Peter Wright, John Gribbin, and John Kirtgton. A book to fascinate anyone with
an interest in meteorology. Packed with colour pictures and amazing facts.
The Weather Machine (1974) by Nigel Calder. A very readable account of meteorological phenomena and events, by an
expert in putting science into everyday language.
Ice Age Earth (1992) by Alastair Dawson. A detailed account of the meteorological and geological evidence for the changes in
the climate during the ice age. at we know about the current changes in the world's climate is in great measure reliant on what
we know about past climatic change. The Ice Age changes in climate were not man-made. Today, in addition to man's
interference with the climate, there are still many natural causes of global warming and cooling.
BIOLOGY: INTRODUCTION
Stephen Webster
The job of biology is to look at life: where it came from, how it works, and what it is made of. Yet, surprisingly, even biologists
find it hard to define what is meant by `life'. An elephant, of course, is a living thing, but what about a virus, or a length of
DNA? Or a glucose molecule? The books below show how broad a subject biology has become in its attempt to make scientific
sense of the living world.
Tyger.! Tygerl burning bright / In the forests of the night, / What immortal
hand or eye / Could frame thy fearful symmetry?
WILLIAM BLAKE
Pedigree: Words from Nature (1973) by Stephen Potter and Laurens Sargent. A wonderful collection of revelations about the
origins of the names we give to plants and animals. From where, for example, does the porcupine get its name? And did you
know that the collective noun for the starling is a murmuration?
The Double Helix (1968) by James D Watson. A terrific read about arguably the greatest scientific breakthrough of our age -
the discovery of the structure of DNA by the two young Cambridge scholars James Watson and Francis Crick. If you think that
scientists are remote and cold, this book will quickly change your mind.
Life on Earth (1979) by David Attenborough. One of the best-written introductions to the variety of life on Earth - and
beautifully illustrated too. Based on his award-winning TV series of the same name. Attenborough takes you through the whole
`story of evolution', beginning with the primeval soup and ending up with us.
The Panda's Thumb (1980) by Stephen Jay Gould. A collection of essays by a master science writer able to breathe life into
facts both general and particular. Here, Gould reflects on the evolution of the panda, investigates Charles Darwin, and wonders
whether `dinosaurs were dumb'. Fine bedtime reading.
What Is Life? (1944) by Erwin Schrodinger. This is one of the great science classics of the 20th century, elegantly written by
an eminent physicist. His theoretical approach to the question of life involved an analysis of how genes must work, an analysis
that set the agenda for the new study of molecular biology.
Why Big Fierce Animals Are Rare (1980) by Paul Colinvaux. A good introduction to the science of ecology. Each chapter
looks at a feature of the complex and fascinating set of relations that exist between plant animals and environment. If you want
to read about how animals and plants get on with their normal day-to-day life, undisturbed by people and pollution, this book
would be a good start.
CELLULAR BIOLOGY
Stephen Webster
All living things are made of cells - you could almost call cells the atoms of life. Yet these tiny things are themselves
immeasurably complicated and the subject of constant research. Inside the cell lie the genes and an intricate series of
mechanisms for making proteins and other substances. The books below show that cells are fundamental to biology - yet are
still only partially understood.
Let's begin this way, then: there is a cell, and this cell is a unicellular
organism, and this unicellular organism is me, and I know it, and
I'm pleased about it. Nothing special so far.
ITALO CALVINO
The Chemistry of Life (1991) by Steven Rose. This is an up-to-date and authoritative survey of the chemical goings-on inside
a cell. Rose is a professor at the Open University and here makes a technical subject pretty approachable.
Immunology (1991) edited by Paul William. Authoritative papers from the Scientific American, covering the fascinating
science of immunology. Difficult in parts but a wonderful book for conveying how clever cells can be.
The Science of Aids: Readings from Scientific American (1989) .by various authors. More papers from Scientific American,
this time on how the HIV virus mounts an attack on the cellular immune system.
The Doctrine of DNA (1991) by Richard Lewontin. Lectures originally given on Canadian radio. A sustained attack on the
idea that DNA controls people - or even cells.
The Red Queen Hypothesis (1993) by Matt Ridley. Highly readable account of the way the genes inside our cells have
organized life in favour of sex.
Cell Biology (1986) edited by Barry King. Different contributors give their account of some of the most interesting aspects of
cell biology, including evolution, motility, and protein synthesis.
Time and the Hunter (1967) by halo Calvin. Short stories inspired by science. Several of the stories spring from the wonders
of cell division, and have their own kind of truth.
The Growth of Biological Thought (1982) by Ernst Mayr. Included in this great book is a fascinating account of the 19th-
century delvings by biologists interested in the mysterious world of the cell.
DNA
Stephen Webster
It is easy to think that with so much talk about genes, the question of how DNA works must be resolved by now. Not true. We
may know the genetic code and the positions of some genes, but precisely how they work remains a riddle. Furthermore, as the
books below show, there is no agreement about the extent of the power genes have in the daily life of an organism.
I, ________, being a natural born human being, do hereby forever copyright my unique genetic code, however it may be
scientifically determined, described or otherwise empirically expressed ...
PT OF A `CERTIFICATE' OFFERED BY THE US
CONCEPTUAL ARTIST LARRY MILLER
Perilous Knowledge (1993) by Tom Wilkie. Useful account of the Human Genome Project - the mapping and decoding of
each and every one of our genes. Wilkie is a science journalist and so well placed to understand and express public concerns
over the moral consequences of molecular biology.
Blueprints (1989) by Maitland A Edey and Donald C Johanson. A brilliantly written and exciting account that shows just how
much has been achieved by the geneticists. The history of science made vivid.
Not in Our Genes (1984) by Steven Rose, on Kamin, and Richard Lewontin. Political as well as biological, these essays are an
argument against the so-called reductionist ideas that suggest genes are in charge.
The Language of the Genes (1993) by Steve Jones. Entertaining yet restrained, the celebrated geneticist gives a reliable
account of what we do and don't know about our genes.
The DNA Mystique (1995) by Dorothy Nelkin and M Susan Lindee. Two American authors give fascinating insights into the
way the gene has invaded popular culture, turning up in comics, pop songs, and soap commercials.
The Science and Politics of IQ (1974) by Leon Kamin. More than 20 years old, this is a passionate and compelling study of
the dubious idea that intelligence is determined by genetics.
The Mismeasure of Man (1981) by Stephen Jay Gould. The Harvard scientist and science writer turns his skills to examining
the history of attempts to link intelligence to genetics.
EVOLUTION
Richard Dawkins
All living creatures, though superficially diverse, are cousins of each other and all give the illusion of being superbly designed
for the purpose of continuing the genetic instructions that built them. Darwin's theory of evolution by natural selection is the
unifying theory of life and it explains everything that we know about living things, their diversity, and their appearance of
design. With the addition of Mendelian genetics, Darwinism became neo-Darwinism. Neo-Darwinism today goes from strength
to strength, and it is itself still in a rapidly evolving phase, as many of the following books show.
Let me lay my cards on the table. If I were to give an award for the
single best idea anyone has ever had, I'd give it to Darwin, ahead of
Newton and Einstein and everyone the. In a single stroke, the idea of
evolution by natural selection unifies the realm of life, meaning and purpose
with the realm of space and time, cause and effect, mechanism and physical
law. But it is not just a wonderful scientific idea. It is a dangerous idea.
DANIEL DENNETT
The Origin of Species (1859) by Charles Darwin. Easier to read than many people imagine. In addition to the brilliant theory
itself, Darwin has astonishingly wise and far-sighted things to say about a great variety of related topics, from ecology to
biogeography. The only thing he got badly wrong (along with all his contemporaries except Mendel) was genetics.
The Theory of Evolution (1958) by John Maynard Smith. Clear, authoritative, and readable account of the modem neo-
Darwinian theory.
Adaptation and Natural Selection (1966) by George C Williams. A seminal work which succeeds in combining inspiration
with tough-minded correction of error. The book has exerted an increasing influence in the decades since it was written, and
Williams is now respected as perhaps the dominant figure among American Darwinians.
Darwinism Defended (1982) by Michael Ruse. Darwinism hardly needs defending, but this worthwhile book includes a rip-
roaring attack on creationism.
The Blind Watchmaker (1986) by Richard Dawkins. Argues that Darwinian natural selection is the only known theory that
could, in principle, explain adaptive complexity.
The Problems of Evolution (1986) by Mark Ridley. Witty and cultivated essays on particular topics of controversy, or of
lively discussion, in the field of evolution.
The Ant and the Peacock (1991) by Helena Cronin. A beautifully written account of two important evolutionary topics,
altruism and sexual selection, tracing them from their origins in the writings of Darwin and Alfred Russel Wallace to the
sophisticated theories of modem times.
The Cambridge Encyclopedia of Human Evolution (1992) edited by Steve Jones. Edited by a team led by Steve Jones, the
well-known geneticist. A comprehensive and up-to-date survey of all aspects of human evolution, with some fascinating
information.
The Origin of Humankind (1994) by Richard Leakey. A brief and readable personal view of human fossils by today's leading
authority on them.
Darwin's Dangerous Idea (1995) by Daniel Dennett. The penetrating view of a philosopher with a deep understanding of
modem Darwinism, showing the importance of Darwinism for all aspects of human thought. Filled with fascinating and
original insights.
HUMAN EVOLUTION
Chris Stringer
Interest in our origins was a human characteristic long before the biblical version in the Book of Genesis was written. New
evidence from fossils and archaeology show that the 5-million-year history of human evolution was not a simple ladder of
inevitable progress, but a complex bush of radiating lineages, with ours as the sole survivor.
Links (1988) by John Reader. A very readable introduction to the history of fossil discoveries and the personalities involved.
Lucy: The Beginnings of Humankind (1981) by Don Johanson and Matt Edey. A very popularly written insider's view of
palaeoanthropology.
Human Evolution: An Illustrated Guide (1993) by Roger Lewin. An excellent general review of the topic.
The Cambridge Encyclopaedia of Human Evolution (1992) edited by Steve Jones, Robert Martin, and David Pilbeam. Good
general coverage of primates, fossils, archaeology, and recent human variation.
Encyclopaedia of Human Evolution and Prehistory (1988) edited by Ian Tattersall and others. An alphabetically arranged
in-depth coverage of palaeoanthropology, although not so strong on the behavioural side.
The Origin of Modern Humans (1993) by Roger Lewin. An up-to-date review of this controversial topic.
In Search of the Neanderthals (1993) by Chris Stringer and Clive Gamble. All aspects of these fascinating extinct people are
covered here by Chris Stringer and an archaeologist coauthor.
REPRODUCTION
Peter Tallack
All living things can generate new individuals of the same species. But sex is not absolutely necessary. With asexual
reproduction, individuals are derived from one parent - by division or budding, for instance - and no special reproductive
structures are involved. But although simple and direct, this method produces offspring that are genetically identical to the
parent. Sexual reproduction, on the other hand, involves specialized reproductive cells of two parents - typically male and
female - that fuse to produce a new individual with a different genetic make-up. This mode of reproduction apparently has
great advantages, as most complex plants and animals have adopted it. Even many bacteria and other organisms that normally
reproduce asexually engage in occasional bouts of sexual reproduction. But just why sex evolved and what benefits it brings
are two of the biggest unsolved problems in biology. And with the advent of new medical technologies, we are now faced with
the difficult question of deciding when it is right to interfere with our own reproductive futures.
Reproductive biology is a fast-moving field, and most books on the subject rapidly become out of date. Those listed below look
set to stand the test of time.
Reproduction (1977) by Jack Cohen. A standard, well-illustrated introduction that collects together information on all aspects
of biological reproduction.
Reproduction in Mammals (1982) edited by C R Austin and R V Short. A scholarly, comprehensive, and authoritative
reference series justly famous for its clear and interesting presentation of up-to-date data and theory. Early volumes cover germ
cells and fertilization, hormones in reproduction, embryonic and fetal development, reproductive patterns, and the manipulation
of reproduction.
Peacemaking Among Primates (1989) by Frans de Waal. The author draws on detailed observations by himself and other
leading experts to describe primate reproductive behaviour in captivity and in the wild. A stimulating tale of relationships,
rivalries, and reconciliations.
Sperm Wars (1996) by Robin Baker. Since the 1970s, biologists have been fascinated by the biological and evolutionary
implications of sperm from different males competing for fertilization of the egg in the female reproductive tract. This is the
first popular book on the phenomenon in humans. It summarizes an immense amount of information, all carefully documented.
Iconoclastic and provocative.
The Triumph of the Embryo (1991) by Lewis Wolpert. A limpid and engaging account of embryology and development - the
coordinated process leading from a fertilized egg to an adult that is itself capable of becoming a parent.
The Red Queen Hypothesis (1993) by Matt Ridley. A wide-ranging and erudite examination of the scientific debates over the
hows and whys of sex and the unending evolutionary battle between males and females that results once it gets going. Up to
date, provocative, and stylish.
Life Cycles (1993) by John Tyler Bonner. Art evolutionary biologist who has devoted his life to the study of slime moulds.
Writing with clarity and humour, he sets reproduction in the context of the life cycle - a linkage of evolution, development, and
the complex activities of adult organisms. Filled with wonderful insights and interesting examples.
The Pill (1995) by Bernard Asbell. The development of the oral contraceptive pill and its liberating impact on the lives of
millions of women is a remarkable tale of scientific discovery, fortuitous discovery, dogged persistence, and moral dilemmas
over reproductive choices. The story is told in this riveting book, a skilful combination of history, biography, science, and
public policy.
The Human Body Shop (1993) by Andrew Kimbrell. The author reviews the technological and commercial controls of human
reproduction, arguing that our current legal and technical framework is inadequate to deal with advances in biotechnology.
A Question of We (1984) by Mary Warnock. The author is a British philosopher who has had enormous influence on the issue
of what it is permissible to do with embryos. Intended for a broad general readership, this is a clear and balanced report of a
committee she chaired that looked into human fertilization, embryology, and the ethics of assisted reproduction.
But other [seed] fell into good ground, and brought forth fruit,
some an hundredfold, some sixtyfold, some thirtyfold.
THE BIBLE, MATTHEW 13:8
Ontogeny and Phylogeny (1977) by Stephen Jay Gould. This account of the 19th-century idea of recapitulation - that
individual development mirrors evolutionary development - is a fascinating piece of research into the history of biology.
When Did I Begin? (1988) by Norman D Ford. In-depth analysis of an important ethical problem: when, exactly, does a
human embryo become an individual?
The Triumph of the Embryo (1991) by Lewis Wolpert. A straightforward and informative account of the development of the
vertebrate embryo. This is Wolpert's own research field, and he writes with verve.
How the Leopard Changed Its Spots (1994) by Brian Goodwin. As an outspoken critic of those biological models that see
the gene as all-powerful, Goodwin here presents his own ideas about the nature of development.
Richard Owen: Victorian Naturalist (1994) by Nicholaas Rupke. A contemporary of Charles Darwin and an opponent of the
theory of natural selection, Owen is more or less forgotten today. This biography gives sympathetic treatment to Owen's
`romantic' views of biological change.
On Growth and Form (1917) by D'Arcy Thompson. This scientific classic lays out in fabulous detail the different forms we
see in living things - and attempts a theory of unification.
The Engineer in the Garden (1993) by Colin "fudge. Sometimes disturbing account of how animals and plants may grow up
to be different - thanks to genetic engineering.
Aside from medicine proper, interest is growing today in the historical, cultural, and social dimensions of medicine. These are
the aspects dealt with in the books I have chosen, which set out to explain why we have the medicine we have.
They look at such central issues as the way medicine relates to other features of a culture, such as science and technology,
religion and mythology, and the question of whether modem medicine really serves the interests of patients or the medical
profession.
A Short History of Medicine (1968) by Erwin H Ackerknecht. Probably the best short history, it provides an ideal
introduction to the subject.
Limits to Medicine: The Expropriation of Health (1977) by Ivan Illich. A stimulating book that argues that modem medicine
serves the profession and not the patient.
The Role of Medicine: Dream, Mirage or Nemesis? (1979) by T McKeown. A thoughtful book, it questions how far
medicine is really responsible for today's revolution in health.
The Body in Question (1978) by Jonathan Miller. A fascinating exploration of the functioning of our bodies and our
experience of them. The book is based on a popular television series.
The Illustrated History of Medicine (1992) by Jean-Charles Sournia. Superbly illustrated, this book is particularly strong on
its coverage of contemporary medicine.
The Western Medical Tradition: 800 BC to AD 1800 (1995) by Lawrence Conrad, Michael Neve, Vivian Nutton, and Roy
Porter. An up-to-date scholarly survey.
Companion Encyclopedia of the History of Medicine (1993) by W F Bynum and Roy Porter. The most up-to-date work of
reference dealing with the history of all the world's medical cultures.
Medicine may be a science but, though it may be a truism to say so, it is primarily about people - the personalities of the
doctors who practice it and the patients who seek their attention. This humanistic side of medicine is a source of end-less
fascination. More than any other profession, medicine provides opportunities for a vast range of talents from those content with
the humdrum life of everyday general practice to the white-coated scientist in his laboratory, from the missionary doctor to the
sophisticated teaching-hospital specialist. Few leave a permanent record of their lives, so medical biographies and
autobiographies are a particularly useful means of understanding the real nature of medical life. They are complemented by two
collections of medical anecdotes from the British Medical journal and the Lancet which focus on the particularity of medicine,
its idiosyncrasy and humour.
Talking Sense (1972) by Richard Asher. This series of essays by the late Dr Asher exemplifies better than anything else I know
the humane common sense that is the hallmark of good medical practice. It contains such gems as the Seven Sins of Medicine
(obscurity, cruelty, bad manners, overspecialization, love of the rare, common stupidity, and sloth), the Dangers of Going to
Bed and the first description of Miinchhausen's syndrome.
Soundings (1992) edited by Ruth Holland. The best of contemporary medical writing are the contributions by a series of eight
doctors and journalists to be found at the back of the British Medical journal each week. This is a collection of their mini-
essays, 800 words each, covering every aspect of modern medical practice.
The Lancet: In England Now (1989) For many years, but regrettably no longer, the Lancet ran a column, In England Now,
consisting of anonymous anecdotes sent in by readers describing the idiosyncratic, perverse, and unusual events of everyday
medical practice.
Weary, the Life of Sir Edward Dunlop (1994) by Sue Ebury. The most sustained instance of the dedication and ingenuity of
doctors was exhibited by those working on the Burma-Thailand railway during World War H. Of these the most remarkable
was Edward Weary' Dunlop. By his example, `he held this body of men from moral decay in bitter circumstances which they
could only meet with emotion rather than reason'.
A Doctor's Life (1989) by David Selboum. These are the diaries covering the years 1960-63 of Hugh Selboum, consultant
physician, edited by his son. They provide a fascinating insight into the everyday life of a busy provincial doctor with three
grid references to the political and cultural events of the time.
Churchill's Doctor: A Biography of Lord Moran (1992) by Richard Lovell. Moran is most famous for being Churchill's
doctor who was much criticized for the inclusion in his autobiography of the details of the great man's illnesses. This biography
places Moran's achievements in a wider context as well as illustrating the son of wide-ranging intelligence with which leaders
of the profession guided and shaped the emergence of the National Health Service.
The Fibre Man, the Life Story of Dr Denis Burkitt (1985) by Brian Kellock. Burkitt is best known for his espousal of the
role of dietary fibre in preventing disease but his most remarkable achievement was the discovery of the cause of Burkitt's
lymphoma we working as a physician in Uganda and the introduction of effective treatment. This biography illustrates the at
scope offered by medicine for the enterprising doctor in the years after World War R.
Pain: The Gift Nobody Wants (1993) by Paul Brand and Philip Yancey. Paul Brand is an inspirational orthopaedic surgeon
who was the first person to understand the cause of leprosy's characteristic disfigurement and developed both methods for its
prevention and surgical repair. His subsequent research into the mechanisms of pain transformed medical approach to this
serious problem.
Some Lives! A GP's East End (1991) by David Widgery. David Widgery was a general practitioner in London's East End for
20 years and this is a highly personal account of one man's fight against the medical and social consequences of prolonged
unemployment, homelessness, and poverty.
MEDICAL RESEARCH
lames Le Fanu
Research is central to the intellectual life of medicine and the application of the scientific method has repaid enormous rewards.
There are regrettably few good descriptions of the practice of medical research but the examples noted here give a flavour of
what is involved. The story of the world's first test-tube baby emphasizes the reality of the frustrations and false avenues that
can so frequently hinder the resolution of an apparently quite straightforward problem. The saga of self-experimentation
catches the fanaticism and urgency which lies behind the onward march of medical progress.
So the substance and the ways of the living are broken down,
and from the bits and pieces tomes are gathered in encyclopaedic
summary; what is known of a cell, or part of a cell, may fill a volume.
EDRED CORNER
The Youngest Science: Notes of a Medicine Watcher (1984) by Lewis Thomas. Lewis Thomas's medical career saw the
beginning of the transformation of medicine into a science-based discipline throughout the 1950s and 1960s. This book
captures the enormous excitement of these thrilling decades.
A Matter of Life: The Sensational Story of the World's First Test Tube Baby (1981) by Robert Edwards and Patrick
Steptoe. This is much more than the description of a heartening medical success story as it describes in fascinating detail the
enormous frustrations encountered when developing pioneering techniques and the tenacious force of character which is
necessary to see them through.
Who Goes First: The Story of Self-Experimentation in Medicine (1988) by Lawrence K Altman. This is the remarkable
story of many medical self-experimenters who deliberately acted as human guinea pigs in the furtherance of their research. Its
main theme might be characterized as obsessionalism - the determination of those involved in medical research to get at the
truth no matter what the cost.
The Encyclopaedia of Medical Ignorance (1984) by R Duncan and M Weston-Smith. As its title suggests, this fascinating
volume describes not what is known but rather what is not known. This is interesting not only in itself but as a useful antidote
to the claims of omniscience of the medical profession, particularly the belief that medicine has all the answers. Rather,
medicine's great achievement has been the application of technological solutions to diseases whose causes for the most part
remain unknown.
The two great projects of modern medicine have been the prevention and treatment of disease. The achievements of prevention
stretch from the great sanitary reforms of the 19th century to the elimination by vaccination of life-threatening infectious
diseases. By contrast, a completely different intellectual approach, mostly empirical and technical, has produced a cornucopia
of new drugs and operations for the chronic degenerative diseases which are not amenable to prevention but rather a necessary
consequence of the marked general increase in life expectancy. Though apparently complementary, in fact the philosophies of
prevention and treatment have been in constant conflict over the last 50 years. Many diseases, it is argued, are caused by an
unhealthy lifestyle and so resources should be directed towards preventing rather than curing them. Contrariwise the claims of
the preventability of such diseases, it is alleged, are based on faulty science and a desire to medicalize all aspects of society.
This conflict of perception lies at the heart of understanding the role of medicine in contemporary society and the diversity of
the arguments are well presented in the following books.
Limits to Medicine, Medical Nemesis - the Expropriation of Health (1976) by Ivan Illich. This was much the most
influential book in encouraging the steady disillusionment with technologically based medicine that occurred from the 1970s
onwards. Illich focused on the adverse features of medicalization - the robbing of personal autonomy, medicine's inhumanity,
and the high price patients paid in terms of medical complications. (There is an interesting reply to Illich by David Horrobin
called Medical Hubris - A Reply to Ivan Illich 1977).
The Role of Medicine (1979) by Thomas McKeown. McKeown was very influential in the 1960s by challenging the belief
that medicine could take the credit for improvements in life expectancy and disease control which he claimed were almost
entirely attributable to social factors such as improvements in the standard of living, better housing and nutrition. It formed the
basis for the rise of what has been called the `new public health', an idea, particularly favoured by the government, that
prevention is bet-ter than cure and that resources are better spent on such things as health education and health promotion than
on curative medicine.
The Death of Human Medicine (1994) by Peter Skrabanek. Skrabanek's position is almost directly opposed to that of
McKeown. He contrasts the traditional human medicine with doctors caring for individual patients who seek their aid, with the
false pretensions of prevention - what he calls `healthism' - the propagation of health promotion, screening to encourage
ordinary people into adopting a `healthy' lifestyle.
Preventionitis: the Exaggerated Claims of Health Promotion (1994) edited by James Le Fanu. This collection of essays has
a similar position to that of Skrabanek and focuses in particular on the weaknesses in the scientific evidence concerning the
preventability of disease.
Philosophical Medical Ethics (1986) by Raanan Gillon. This is the best general introduction to medical ethics from a British
perspective and covers all the main issues concerning autonomy, paternalism, and justice in the practice of medicine.
Life's Dominion: An Argument about Abortion and Euthanasia (1993) by Ronald Dworkins. This is a masterful elucidation
of the arguments around the two most important ethical issues of abortion and euthanasia. Dworkins writes so well and
seductively that even those totally opposed to these practices might almost be convinced.
PSYCHIATRY
Anthony Clare
Psychiatry is the branch of medicine that applies knowledge from the biological and social sciences, including genetics,
pharmacology, physiology, psychology, and epidemiology, to the care and treatment of patients suffering from disorders of
mental activity and behaviour. Psychiatry's emergence in the 18th century as a separate speciality coincided with the splitting
of medicine into an increasingly triumphalist biological science and a geographically isolated, stigmatized, and neglected
psychological domain. Over the past two decades, the growing interest in and understanding of brain function has resulted in
an explosion of interest in the biological basis of many psychiatric disorders and a growing reintegration of psychological and
physical approaches to health and disease.
The Discovery of the Unconscious (1970) by Henri Ellenberger. A brilliant account of the historical development of the study
of mind and the birth, evolution, and vicissitudes of dynamic psychiatry and psychotherapy. It includes a detailed assessment of
the dynamic systems associated with the names of Pierre Janet, Alfred Adler, Sigmund Freud, and C G Jung, and traces the
origins of modem dynamic psychotherapy back to the healing practices of primitive peoples, to the role of the shaman and the
practices of exorcism, magnetism, and hypnotism.
General Psychopathology (1946) by Karl Jaspers. This book, the first edition of which appeared in 1913, the seventh and last
in 1959, is a monumental examination of psychopathology which comprises the study of causal connections and general laws
underpinning mental events and so-called empathetic understanding involving empirical experiment and free existential
achievement.
The Foundations of Psychoanalysis (1984) by Adolf Grunbaum. This constitutes the most intellectually formidable and
devastating critique of the claims and achievements of psychoanalysis. The need to provide adequate supportive evidence for
psychoanalytical principles before their application to other fields is underscored but the book itself reveals just how far
psychoanalytical theories outstrip the scientific evidence available to support them.
Darkness Visible (1991) by William Styron. An intimate personal account by a gifted writer of his tortured descent to the edge
of self-destruction into what he terms the `inexplicable agony' of severe depression.
Psychiatry in Dissent (1980) by Anthony W Clare. A nontechnical account of the major controversial issues in modern
psychiatry - including the nature of mental illness, the concept of schizophrenia, compulsory treatment, and ECT - placed
within the context of psychiatry as it is currently practised.
Manic-Depressive Illness (1990) by Frederick K Goodwin and Kay Redfield Jamison. A substantial analysis of the nature and
extent of manic depression, its cyclical course, and contemporary treatment. Vividly portrays the complexity of this particular
form of psychiatric disorder and the intermingling roles of biology, personality, and environment in its genesis, impact, and
outcome.
Schizophrenia and Related Syndromes (1994) by P J McKenna. A lucid account of the most baffling psychiatric disorder
comprehensible to lay and professional reader alike.
The Faber Book of Madness (1991) edited by Roy Porter. A diverting and informative anthology on the subject of madness,
including a rich selection of the writings of those who have themselves suffered serious mental instability.
The Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry (1989) edited by Michael Gelder, Dennis Gath, and Richard Mayou. The most
comprehensive yet manageable textbook of psychiatry currently available.
PSYCHOANALYSIS
Anthony Storr
Freud ranks with Charles Darwin and Karl Marx as one of the three pioneers who most altered man's vision of himself in the
20th century. Darwin demonstrated man's kinship with other animals, Marx postulated that history was governed by economic
forces over which the majority of human beings have no direct influence. Freud laid siege to Victorian notions of rationality,
and claimed that men were much more governed by unconscious forces and emotional drives than they were by reason.
Although Freud's psychoanalytic theories have been sharply criticized in recent years, psychoanalysis has had such a powerful
influence on our thinking about ourselves that it cannot simply be dismissed because it does not fulfil the criteria of science.
Even if every idea that Freud put forward could be proved wrong, we should still be greatly in his debt.
Freud: A Life for Our Time (1988) by Peter Gay. The best and most recent biography of Freud by an American historian who
is also trained in psychoanalysis.
The Unconscious before Freud (1962) by Lancelot Law Whyte. An irreplaceable account of how the idea of unconscious
mental function and events gradually developed over several centuries to culminate in Freudian theory.
The Psychoanalytic Movement (1985) by Ernest Gellner. A witty, irreverent account of how psychoanalysis developed from
being a theory of neurosis in a widespread movement which conquered the Western world.
Anxiety and Neurosis (1968) by Charles Rycroft. A penetrating account of how the psychoanalytic method can be used to treat
neurotic symptoms, which relates psychoanalytic theory to biological principles.
Freud and His Followers (1975) by Paul Roazen. Based on interviews with some 70 people who had known Freud personally,
this is a readable, scholarly, sometimes scandalous account of the history of psychoanalysis.
Freud (1989) by Anthony Storr. A brief account of Freud's life and thought which may be found useful as an introductory text.
Freud: Biologist of the Mind (1979) by Frank J Sulloway. An outstanding contribution to Freudian studies which is still
indispensable reading for anyone interested in psychoanalysis and its founder.
PSYCHOLOGY
Hans Eysenck
Psychology is the scientific study of human (and animal) behaviour. It has its classics, of course, but for nonprofessional
readers general overviews of recent research are probably to be preferred - science constantly advances, and the latest research,
and the most recent theories, build on what was done before and advance it further. For most readers interest will probably
centre, not so much on purely technical issues, but on topics relevant to the human condition. Psychology has made important
contributions to our understanding of crime, neurosis, personality, intelligence, and many other important topics; it has also
pioneered methods of curing neuroses, rehabilitating criminals, and generally improving the quality of life. There has in recent
years been a recognition that human beings are bisocial animals, and hence the old-fashioned disregard of genetics and biology
in general has given way to a more inclusive theory taking into account both social and biological factors.
Everything that exists exists in some quantity, and can therefore be measured. E L THOl~rrnlKE
Conditional Reflexes (1927) by I P Pavlov. Pavlov's book is a classic, and worth reading in spite of its age. Many people have
built on this secure foundation, and any-one wanting to see how a science of behaviour is possible can do no better than read
this monumental contribution. The experiments are mainly done on dogs, but the general principles have been found to apply
equally to humans.
Personality and Individual Differences: A Natural Science Approach (1985) by H J Eysenck and M Eysenck. Personality is
of central importance in modern psychology, and many important advances have been made in the experimental study of
personality and in the social importance of these advances. This book gives a brief overview of where we are now.
Handbook of Effective Psychotherapy (1993) by T R Giles. In the last 12 years or so behaviour therapy, based on the
principles of conditioning and learning, has been shown to be much more effective in curing neurotic disorders than the
psychotherapies based on Freudian speculations. This book discusses methods and evidence in detail.
Biological Approaches to the Study of Human Intelligence (1993) by P A Vernon. The study of intelligence has been
transformed in recent years by successful attempts to look at the brain processes underlying cognitive functioning, and the
psychophysiological differences between high- and low-IQ people. This book gives a good summary of what has been
achieved.
The Psychopathology of Crime (1993) by A Raine. Raine has summarized a great deal of recent work demonstrating that high
criminality (and antisocial behaviour generally) has a strong genetic basis, so that we can identify the hormonal influences and
the neural transmitters mediating these effects. These findings have important consequences for our thinking about crime.
Biological Psychology (1994) by F J McGuigan. McGuigan explains the biological basis underlying our emotions, memory,
learning, social behaviour, and so on. It is a successful attempt to show the close links between psychology and biology, and to
get beyond the simplistic, purely social approach hitherto prevalent.
Perspectives on Bias in Mental Testing (1984) by C R Reynolds and R Brown. Reynolds and Brown deal in detail with the
problems raised by bias in mental testing, and in particular the arguments about the influence (if any) of race in this connection.
They give an unprejudiced account of the problem, and tell the reader what factual knowledge is available.
Nature and Nurture in Psychology (1993) by R Plomin and G McCleam. Plomin and McClearn give a detailed account of the
present status of the age-old nature-nurture controversy, covering the personality and intelligence, attitudes and other topics.
This is an easy-to- read but very up-to-date account written by leading experts.
Life for an animal has its simple priorities, feeding and reproduction being just two. However, actually finding out how an
animal lives, and where, is an often uncomfortable experience requiring patience and diligence. Any of the books below might
inspire you to go out into the wild and take a look for yourself.
Sing a song of sixpence / A pocket full of rye, / Four and twenty blackbirds, /
Baked in a pie; / When the pie was opened, / The birds began to sing; /
Was not that a dainty dish / To set before the king?
TRADITIONAL NURSERY RHYME
We of the Bee (1901) by Maurice Maeterlink. A beautiful account of one man's study of the bees in his care. The author is
almost poetic in his descriptions of the efforts of the bees, working to look after hive and queen. Still an apicultural classic.
The Goshawk (1951) by T S White. A gripping account, suitable for younger readers too, of the author's attempt to train a
hawk. The story shows how profound can be the relationship between animal and owner. One of the best books on the an of
falconry ever written.
Life at the Edge (1989) edited by James Gould and Carol Grant Gould. This book is a series of articles from Scientific
American and is a detailed scientific account of how animals live in even the strangest and fiercest places - in the Antarctic or
inside volcanoes, for example. Quite technical and challenging but with a little effort this book makes an excellent read.
The Formation of Vegetable Mould, through the Action of Worms, with Observation on Their Habits (1881; new edition
1985) by Charles Darwin. As an old man Darwin chose the common earthworm as the final object of his curiosity, and wrote
this splendid book on its habits and its intelligence.
Last Animals at the Zoo (1991) by Colin Tudge. An inquiry into the places most of us must visit if we want to see elephants
ad rhinos, lions and tigers. An interesting and thought-provoking description of how, through captive-breeding programmes,
zoos can assist endangered species.
Primate Visions (1992) by Donna Haraway. A detailed survey of the nature of primate research, looking especially at how
issues of gender and race have influenced the scientists' work.
Every living thing is descended from marine life. Indeed, we carry the
ancient sea inside us, for the isotonic composition of the blood of
vertebrates on land bears an unmistakable resemblance to seawater ...
Eu.Iorr A NORSE
The Open Sea - Its Natural History, Part I. The World of the Plankton (1972) by Alister Hardy. This is a classic text,
wonderfully written, which will serve as a good introduction to the open sea and the intriguing creatures that live in it. Slightly
dated now but nevertheless a fascinating account.
Deep-Sea Biology - A Natural History of Organisms at the Deep-Sea Floor (1992) by J D Gage and P A Tyler. The deep sea
is one of the largest ecosystems, covering some 50% of the planet. This scholarly work introduces the reader to how
oceanographers study the animals and their ecology in this alien world, where the temperature is only just above freezing and
the pressure reaches several tonnes per square centimetre.
Global Marine Biological Diversity (1993) edited by Elliott A Norse. It is often forgotten that the sea represents one of the
most diverse systems on the planet. This book explains the problems facing, conserving, and sustaining biodiversity in the
marine environment. It provides a readable account of the current debate about biodiversity and how and why we should try to
sustain it.
Reader's Digest Book of the Great Barrier Reef (1984). The Great Barrier Reef is without doubt one of the great natural
phenomena of the world. But even more amazing are the plants and animals that live on, in, and around this coral wonderland.
The book beautifully illustrates the vast diversity of life to be found.
The Greenpeace Book of Coral Reefs (1992) by Sue Wells and Nick Hanna. The main thrust of this book is explaining the
coral ecosystem and the complex cycles of life that are increasingly under threat by human activities.
Oceans - A Mitchell Beazley World Conservation Atlas (1991) edited by Danny Elder and John Pernatta. This atlas gives
useful background to conservation problems in the marine environment.
Water Baby (1992) by Victoria A Kaharl. This is a fascinating account of the building and development of the research
submersible Alvin. It is one of a handful of vehicles that take scientists down into the depths to glimpse this alien realm. Alvin
has been the platform from which researchers have made many startling discoveries. It is the oceanographic equivalent of the
space shuttle.
Sharks in Question - The Smithsonian Institution Answer Book (1989) by Victor G Springer and Joy P Gold. No book list
on marine life would be complete without something on sharks. Our fascination with this group of top marine predators is
mirrored by the format of the book, which is based on the most frequently asked questions. The book is a mine of useful
information.
Guardians of the Whales - The Quest to Study Whales in the Wild (1992) by Bruce Obee and Graeme Ellis. Much of what
we know about the behaviour and ecology of whales comes from dedicated bands of scientists studying whales from boats - a
kind of professional whale-watching. This beautifully photographed book recounts the people and the methods they use to
study whales in the NE Pacific.
There are numerous field guides to help those interested in marine life identify the plants and animals they encounter on shores
and while diving. Collins, Hamlyn ,and the Marine Conservation Society produce general guides to marine life and fish for
Europe and further afield. The Audubon Society and Peterson guides cover the North American coasts.
The Hutchinson University Library series provided a range of books about various groups of marine animal and although
these are aimed at students they contain a wealth of biological detail. Examples of volumes in the series are: Marine Mammals,
Annelids, Molluscs, Sponges.
FISHES
Darrell J Siebert
Ichthyology is the study of fishes, in all their aspects. This includes trying to figure out the evolutionary relationships among
them (their history) and attempting to understand their ecology (how they live). The history of fishes provides insight into
panevolutionary theories of how life and Earth have evolved together. Fish ecology will be the key to the sustainable
development of an important food source worldwide. Fishes also give great pleasure to many people as pets. A well thought-
out and maintained aquarium is a beautiful sight. The diversity of modem fishes is bewildering. If there is among vertebrates a
biodiversity crisis of species it is the fishes: perhaps only half of all living fishes are known. They deserve better.
Fishes are a necessary part of our environment. During the past couple of decades millions of people have come to realize that
our planet is in danger and have dedicated their energies to protecting and improving the world we live in. I am reminded of a
dialogue in an old Pogo comic strip which starts when one of the characters says that `everyone is talking about it'. `I'm not
talking about it.' `You're not everyone."No, but without me, no one is everyone.' This is the way it is with our environment:
nothing in it is really expendable.
C LAVETT SMTTH
Fish of the World: A Collection of 19th-Century Paintings (1990) by Hiroshi Aramata. A beautifully compiled work of the
amazing artwork of illustrators from the 19th century.
Dr Axelrod's Atlas of Freshwater Aquarium Fishes (1985) by Herbert R Axelrod, Warren E Burgess, Neal Pronek, and Jerry
G Walls. A huge work of colour photographs for which there is as yet no substitute. Arranged by region of the world with
information on husbandry.
Fishes: Expedition Field Techniques (1993; 2nd edition 1995) by Brian W Coad. An excellent introduction to ichtyhological
fieldwork, for the amateur and professional alike.
The Fishes of Tennessee (1993) by David A Envier and Wayne C Starness. As good an example of an American `state' book as
there is, lavishly illustrated with colour photographs, some of which show the amazing world of fish colours.
The Rise of Fishes: 500 Million Years of Evolution (1995) by John A Long. A surprising introduction to fossil vertebrates
(fishes). An academic work but so well illustrated it will be of interest in the popular literature.
Fishes of the World (1976; 3rd edition 1994) by Joseph S Nelson. The only real introduction into the realm of fish
classification. Now in its 3rd edition, it has improved with time.
Encyclopedia of Fishes (1994) edited by John R Paxton and William N Eschmeyer. Arranged systematically, this is the best of
the compendia written for the layman.
Fish Watching: An Outdoor Guide to Freshwater Fishes (1994) by C Lovett Smith. A delightful introduction to fish
watching in nature, by a dedicated fish watcher. You can learn to do it yourself from this book.
Sharks in Question (1989) by Victor G Springer and Joy P Gold. Simply the best, most informative shark book on the market.
The Aquarist's Encyclopaedia (1983) by Gunther Sterba. One of the hobbyist volumes, but filled with biological information.
Trout (1991) edited by Judith Stoltz and Judith Snell. A wonderful, well-illustrated compilation of information on the world's
most important freshwater game fishes.
Fishes of the World: An Illustrated Dictionary (1975) by Alwyne Wheeler. A dictionary of fishes and fish terms. Most of
what you want to know can be found here.
INSECTS
Paul Eggleton
The study of insects is known as entomology, and covers a very broad range of disciplines from behaviour to molecular
biology. Insect biology is one of the most important areas of biology, and one of the least well-known, given that of the 5
million probable insect species perhaps only 1 million have been formally described. Of those 1 million, perhaps 100,000 have
their biologies known in any detail, and at the present rate of habitat destruction, many species will go extinct before anything
at all is discovered about them. The enormous number of insect species has recently led entomologists to become concerned
with insect biodiversity as an area of research in itself, and especially with insect conservation and the effect of human
disturbance on insect diversity.
I feel like an old warhorse at the sound of the trumpet when I read about the capturing of rare beetles ... It really makes me long
to begin collecting again.
CHARLES DARWIN
Bugs in the System: Insects and Their impact on Human Affairs (1995) by May R Berenbaum. A simple and readable
introduction to insects, their classification, biology, and effects on people. It gives a good overview of the extraordinary
diversity of the insect world.
Life on a Little-Known Planet (1993) by Howard Ensign Evans. Covers similar ground to the first book, but might be
considered either more poetic or more pretentious, according to taste. Throughout, however, the author's love of his subject
shines through.
A Field Guide to the Insects of Britain and Northern Europe (1982) by Michael Chinery. An excellent introduction to the
natural history of British insects, with identification keys and good illustrations.
Insects of Australia (1991) edited by the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization. In contrast to the
Chinery book, this deals in detail with a tropical fauna which is much richer and more varied than the European one. It also has
useful chapters on insect systematics, morphology, and biogeography.
Insect Conservation Biology (1994) by M J Samways. A good introductory book dealing with the problems and principles of
insect conservation, a topic that has been neglected compared with the conservation biology of larger vertebrate animals.
The Ants (1990) by B Holidobler and E 0 Wilson. A Pulitzer prizewinning book dealing with a group of animals with one of
the most complex and interesting social systems of any organism. A unique contribution to biology. The same authors' Journey
to the Ants (1994) is shorter and more accessible, intended for the general reader.
Insect Phylogeny (1981) by W Hennig. Although out of date and in places difficult to read, this still remains a seminal work
by the great German entomologist Willi Hennig. It was one of the first works to apply the principles of cladistics to estimating
evolutionary relationships between organisms, and many of its conclusions are still accepted today.
Imm's General Textbook of Entomology (1957; 10th edition 1977) volume 2 by O W Richards and R G Davies. An excellent
textbook introduction to insect diversity, dealing with each group in detail. A good primer for those interested in the whole
range of insect forms.
The Insects: Structure and Function (1982) by R F Chapman. A textbook that emphasizes a functional approach to the study
of insects. Readable and highly informative.
BIRDS
Robert Prys-Jones
Birds fascinate people. Colourful, vocal, and accessible, they provide an avenue through which we can begin to obtain
understanding of the selective forces moulding the living world to which we belong. Partly as a result, the breadth of
knowledge available on birds is unrivalled for other animal groups. This knowledge, combined with the affection with which
most are held, has placed birds at the forefront of efforts by conservation organizations worldwide to maintain natural
environments in the face of overwhelming and ever accelerating human-induced change. Birds thus demand our attention, not
only for the amazing creatures they are, but also for the role they can play as a shield for the great unknown world that is
vanishing around us.
The pleasure of studying birds and the pleasure of finding out new things can be combined at small cost in money, though more
in time, by anyone so inclined.
DAVID LACK
The Life of the Robin (1943) by David Lack. A classic, highly readable account of the life of a bird species, written by one of
the century's pre-eminent ornithologists.
Finches (1972) by Ian Newton. Written with enthusiasm from great personal experience, this is a model of how to write a
comparative account of the behaviour and ecology of a bird family.
The Web of Adaptation (1976) by David Snow. A strangely little-known but compellingly readable account of the behaviour
of fruit-eating birds in the American tropics.
The Age of Birds (1980) by Alan Feduccia. The evolutionary history of birds is a topic of great current research, but this
remains the best introduction to the subject.
Bird Migration (1983) by Chris Mead. A wide-ranging, well-illustrated overview of a subject that holds a particular
fascination for many bird-watchers.
Save the Birds (1987) by Anthony Diamond. Produced in a number of languages and national editions, this book provides
authoritative and beautifully illustrated insight into the problems that endanger a depressingly large number of bird species
worldwide.
The Cambridge Encyclopedia of Ornithology (1991) edited by Michael Brooke and Tim Birkhead. Undoubtedly the place to
begin pursuing an interest in almost any aspect of ornithology. Well arranged and illustrated, and clearly written by an
impressive team of contributors.
Dunnock Behaviour and Social Evolution (1992) by Nicholas Davies. Fifty years on from Lack's Life of the Robin, this is a
brilliantly written account of the insights that arise from combining detailed fieldwork on a species with modern evolutionary
theory.
Handbook of the Birds of the World (1992, continuing) edited by Josep del Hoyo, Andrew Elliott, and Jordi Sargatal. With
two of a proposed 12 volumes now published, it is impossible to praise this work too highly. Immensely ambitious and
astonishingly illustrated, it combines exceptionally readable family-level reviews with brief but comprehensive species
accounts and distribution maps for every bird species.
The Beak of the Finch (1994) by Jonathan Weiner. Written by a journalist, this books succeeds well in conveying the
fascination inherent in the profoundly important, long-term studies by Peter Grant and his co-workers into the action of natural
selection on Galapagos finch populations.
ANIMAL BEHAVIOUR
Peter Tallack
In order to survive and reproduce successfully, animals have evolved clever ways of finding food, shelter, and mates, avoiding
predators, caring for their young, and so on. Ethology - the study of animal behaviour - views animals as machines with
fascinating mechanics, as organisms with complex life histories, and as the end products of natural selection that have evolved
from ancestors who themselves lived and behaved and were successful in producing offspring.
The subject ranges from microscopic investigations of genetic mechanisms and nervous systems, through experimental work of
the behaviour of whole organisms, to long-term studies on groups of animals in forests, fields, and oceans. There are four
underlying questions of animal behaviour - what are the mechanisms that control it? why or how are they useful? how did they
develop? what is their evolutionary history? - and a vast array of splendid books that attempt to provide answers.
We are survival machines - robot vehicles blindly programmed
to preserve the selfish molecules known as genes. This is a truth
that still fills me with astonishment.
RICHARD DAWKINS
The Oxford Companion to Animal Behaviour (1981) edited by David McFarland. A standard handbook that anyone
interested in animals can enjoy. Contains more than 200 articles, each written by a specialist, on a wide range of topics.
King Solomon's Ring (1952) by Konrad Lorenz. A gripping introduction to mod-em animal behaviour by one of its founders,
an advocate of the view that most animal behaviour is genetically fixed or innate. Full of original insights and a pleasure to
read.
The Study of Instinct (1951) by Niko Tinbergen. A systematic discussion of the beginning of ethology written with brilliant
clarity by the pioneer of the biological study of animal behaviour under natural or near-natural conditions. Important and
influential.
The Dance Language and Orientation of Bees (1967) by Karl von Frisch. A definitive account of von Frisch's marvellous
observations and experiments on the waggle dance and other forms of honeybee communication behaviour. The culmination of
more than 50 years of research, this is a genuine classic.
In the Shadow of Man (1983) by Jane Goodall. Goodall's work with the chimpanzees of Gombe is one of the great scientific
achievements of the 20th century. Her detailed revelations of their behaviour first appeared in this lyrical book, written with
sympathy and understanding.
Sociobiology (1975) by Edward 0 Wilson. This groundbreaking study of the biological basis of all social behaviour on social
animals was the subject of much controversy when it first appeared, principally because of the final chapter focusing on
humans. Authoritative, encyclopedic, and readable.
The Selfish Gene (1976) by Richard Dawkins. The author's first book and still his most famous. An engrossing look at
evolution and behaviour from a gene's-eye perspective, expounded with clarity, wit, and verve. Forceful and persuasive.
How Monkeys See the World (1990) by Dorothy L Cheney and Robert M Seyfarth. The authors describe their superb study of
signalling in vervet monkeys. The enthralling ideas and lucid presentation combine to make this the best exploration so far of
what goes on inside the mind of another species.
The Red Queen (1993) by Matt Ridley. A brilliant look at the evolution of sex and its implications for behaviour, providing a
rich collection of insights into the private lives of a whole host of creatures.
The Tangled Wing (1982) by Melvin Konner. A poetic and masterly survey of the biological constraints on human nature,
including what animal behaviour can and cannot tell us about ourselves.
ANIMAL RIGHTS
Andrew Linzey
The moral status of animals has emerged as a new field of study in its own right. In the area of philosophy alone, within the last
20 years contemporary moral philosophers have written more on the topic of human responsibility to other animals than their
predecessors had written during the previous 2,000 years. In fact, ethical concern for animals is not new. Although Western
culture has generally accorded animals a low status, almost every thinker from Pythagoras to Schweitzer has at least considered
the question of duties to animals. at is new is a major shift in ethical sensitivity. The old idea that animals are simply resources,
machines, tools, things here for our use, is slowly but surely giving way to another perception that sentient beings have value in
themselves, inherent dignity, and rights. This revolution of sensibility has been facilitated by a number of pioneering works in
the field of ethics, philosophy, and religion. Listed here are some of the major works that have been significant during the
modern period.
The time is coming, however, when people will be astonished that mankind needed so
long a time to learn to regard thoughtless injury to life as incompatible with ethics.
ALBERT SCHWEITZER
Civilization and Ethics (1923) by Albert Schweitzer. Although Schweitzer was not the first to embrace the humane treatment
of animals, his doctrine of `reverence for life' has been widely influential. Civilization and Ethics is the second volume of his
wide-ranging critique of Western philosophy. According to Schweitzer, reverence for life is the `basic principle of the moral'.
`It is good to maintain and encourage life; it is bad to destroy life or to obstruct it.' Although Schweitzerian doctrine - in its
original form at least - has few followers today, it is difficult not to be impressed by the sheer profundity of this thought.
Readable and very challenging.
Animal Rights (1976) by Andrew Linzey. This slim volume effectively heralded the modem animal rights movement. It argues
that sentiency (the ability to experience pain and suffering) rather than `personhood', `soulfulness', or `rationality' should be the
criterion for rights; and examines our current use of animals as food, for science, and for sport. Criticizes the Judaeo-Christian
tradition for its theological insensitivity to animals. Limey's later works, Christianity and the Rights of Animals 1987 and
Animal Theology 1994, develop his theological critique of Western religious attitudes.
Animal Liberation (1976) by Peter Singer. Following on the heels of Animal Rights, Singer's work is a philosophical defence
of the sentiency criterion for moral consider-ability. If a being suffers, there can be no good reason why that suffering should
not be taken into consideration. Argues that many contemporary practices are `speciesist'; that is, the result of an arbitrary and
unjustifiable prejudice against animals. Hugely popular and readable book, still in print.
The Moral Status of Animals (1977) by Stephen R L Clark. Another heavyweight philosophical defence of animals. It argues
that the humanitarian tradition against cruelty within Western culture should compel us to rethink our attitudes to animals and
become vegetarians. Not an easy read but frill of challenging insights.
Man and the Natural World: Changing Attitudes in England 1500-1800 (1983) by Keith Thomas. Consummately
impressive history of the origins of modern sensibility to animals. Charts with great skill the movement of ideas from medieval
views of human supremacy to the emergence of Victorian philanthropy. Especially good on the religious aspects and the role
of theology for and against animal welfare. Thomas is a celebrated historian and a very fine writer.
The Case for Animal Rights (1983) by Tom Regan. Yet another heavyweight philosophical book. Argues that all animals are
`subjects of a life' and have intrinsic value, and therefore rights. Maintains that only a theory of rights can do justice to our
moral obligations to animals. A significant philosophical contribution, nicely textured writing, but no easy read.
The Unheeded Cry: Animal Consciousness, Animal Pain and Science (1989) by Bernard E Rollin. Rollin is one of the few
animal-rights theorists equally versed in physiology, philosophy, and bioethics. This is a powerful critique of the view that
animals do not have a mental life and cannot suffer, especially critical of experimental scientists who work with animals. Rollin
developed the world's first course in veterinary ethics and animal rights at Colorado State University.
Political Theory and Animal Rights (1990) edited by P A B Clarke and Andrew Limey. A major anthology comprising 60
extracts from political theorists, philosophers, and theologians including Plato, Aristotle, Augustine, Thomas Aquinas, Rene
Descartes, David Hume, John Locke, George Berkeley, Thomas Hobbes, Jean-Jacques Rousseau, Gottfried Leibniz,
Montaigne, Richard Hooker, Karl Marx, Albert Schweitzer, and Bertrand Russell. The anthology shows how various concerns
about animals form part of a long historical tradition and details the major shifts of thinking about the status of animals.
Indispensable to understanding the emergence of the modem animal-rights movement.
Created from the Animals: The Moral Implications of Darwinism (1991) by James Rachels. A powerful defence of Darwin,
arguing that, correctly understood, Darwinism provides a strong theoretical basis for animal rights. Maintains that Darwin, in
holding that humans are `created from the animals', laid the foundations for a new inclusivist ethic. Chapter 5 on `Morality
without the idea that humans are special' is provocative and challenging. Written in an accessible style with wit and elegance.
The Heretic's Feast: A History of Vegetarianism (1993) by Colin Spencer. The first major history of vegetarianism from
early humanoids to the ethical vegetarianism of the 1990s. Spencer's conclusion echoes the words of Henry Beston: `We need
another and wiser and perhaps a more mystical concept of animals ... They are not brethren; they are not underlings; they are
other nations caught with ourselves in the net of life and time, fellow prisoners of the splendour and travail of the earth.' A
fascinating volume, remarkable for its breadth and lucidity.
PLANTS: INTRODUCTION
Sandra Knapp and Bob Press
Plants are the basis for all life on Earth. Their ability to convert the Sun's energy into a usable form places them at the base of
the pyramid of life. Plants range from simple to highly complex organisms and occupy a bewildering variety of niches in the
natural world. They can be parasites, carnivores, mimics, and are often equal partners with animals in intricate associations.
The science of botany comprises the study of plants, their diversity of form and function, their distribution, and their uses.
I indulged the fancy once upon a time that a botanist was one who
distinguished plants by sight: but I observe that, unless scent, taste and
touch come in and that very obviously, a botanist is of no account.
CARL VON LINNE
The Compleat Naturalist (1971) by Wilfred Blunt is a lively and beautifully illustrated biography of the world's most
influential botanist, Carl von Linne (otherwise known as Carolus Linnaeus). In the 18th century he devised not only the first
adequate system for classifying plants - the then notorious sexual system - but also the binomial system of Latin plant names
which remains the universal currency among botanists.
The Life of Plants (1964; revised 1981) by E J H Corner is a successful solution to the problem of writing a `small book about
plants in toto' and an enthusiastic counter to previous `thoroughly dull and dully thorough' works on the subject.
The Plant Book (1990) by David Mabberly follows in the footsteps of classic works by J C Willis, A Cronquist, and others. It
is as complete a reference to the vascular plants as it is possible to have, with entries for evey currently accepted family and
genus. Brief text gives information on interrelationships, morphological characteristics, distributions, numbers of species, and
uses.
Plant Taxonomy (1990) by Tod Stuessy is a heavyweight text by one of the most authoritative taxonomists around. Slightly
daunting but comprehensive and thought-provoking.
Biology of Plants (5th edition 1992) by Peter Raven, Ray Evert, and Susan Eichorn. As well as explaining form and function,
the authors address the themes of heredity, evolutionary relationships, and ecology, providing a rounded picture of plant
biology.
The New Royal Horticultural Society Dictionary of Gardening (1992) edited by A Huxley is a comprehensive work
covering most plants ever cultivated. It is liberally sprinkled with explanations of gardening terms and techniques as well as
describing numerous cultivars, hybrids, and cultivated plants of both wild and purely garden origin.
The Plant Finder (1994-95 edition) published by the Hardy Plant Society is the ultimate plant catalogue, listing 55,000
different plants and where to obtain them in the UK. This is where to find those little-known species you have always wanted
to cultivate.
The Private Life of Plants (1995) by David Attenborough is an eminently readable and lavishly illustrated account of different
aspects of the lives of plants, from dispersal, growth, and nutrition to plant-animal interactions and survival strategies. Based
on his television series for the BBC.
Ayensu, Edward S. and Robert A. DeFilipps, Ghanaian-American and American, 1935- and 1939-.
Endangered and Threatened Plants of the United States. Rec: LAT
PLANT VARIETIES
Sandra Knapp and Bob Press
There are in excess of 250,000 species of vascular plants alone in the world and species new to science are discovered and
described almost daily, especially from tropical regions where the biodiversity is still nowhere near being adequately
quantified. Gardeners and horticulturalists have added enormously to this natural variety by producing cultivars of purely
garden origin. The limits and defining characteristics of taxa are constantly under review, changing with the increase in our
understanding of the plants involved. Two common methods of getting to grips with this wealth of life are taxonomy and
floristics. Taxonomy is the describing, naming, and classifying of organisms - in this case plants. Floristics focuses on the
whole flora of a geographical region.
Locality often makes plants a little different, but it has never changed one species into another, not even in the brain of any
sane botanist.
CARL. VON LINK$
Carnivorous Plants (1979) by Adrian Slack is still probably the best book describing a fascinatingly macabre and diverse
group of plants which are linked by their unique method of supplementary nutrition.
Palms (1982) by Alec Blombery and Tony Rodd. A good example of a study of a single group of plants, this book deals with
the cultivation, care, and economic importance of palms as well as describing the world's species.
A World of Ferns (1991) by Josephine Camus, Clive Jermy, and Barry Thomas is a general introduction to the subject of
ferns, organized by habitat. The beautiful photographs show the diversity of the group.
Crucifers of Great Britain and Ireland (1991) by Tim Rich. Number six in a series of seven BSBI Handbooks by various
authors, pitched at the more committed botanist. The series covers difficult and taxonomically challenging groups of plants in
the British Isles flora, including sedges, umbellifers, docks, willows, and roses. All are written and illustrated to the highest
standards.
Field Guide to the Trees of Britain and Europe (1992) by Bob Press is typical of the New Holland Field Guides. The books
in this series, by various authors, epitomize the most common style of photographic guides to identifying plants, and reflect the
increasing tendency to include all species in Europe rather than a limited selection of them.
Guide to Flowering Plant Families (1994) by Wendy Zomlefer is a synoptic treatment of the flowering-plant families that
occur in the USA. Despite this apparent geographical limitation, it is useful almost anywhere and has the added bonus of lucid,
easily assimilated sections on modern taxonomic methods, cladistics in taxonomy, and botanical terminology.
Living things are complex and a first step in their study is to know how and why they are constructed as they are. Structure and
function are indivisible; to study one without the other is to understand only half the story. The basic principles of different
functions are similar throughout the plant kingdom but the means by which they may be achieved and, therefore, the range and
type of structures required, are much more varied. Habitat, too, is highly influential on plant structure. Plants occur in a wide
range of habitats, from boiling springs to ice-bound tundra and from sea beds to mountaintops; their structural diversity is
equally broad. Within this diversity of form there are also examples of superficial similarity between unrelated groups of
plants; for example, the cactuses of North and Central America and succulent Euphorbias from the deserts of the Old World.
Different organs may be modified to meet the same environmental demands, and homology, the principle of comparing like
with like, is especially important when dealing with morphological features of plants where a 'leaf may be a true leaf, a leaf
stalk, a stipule, or a stem, and a `bulb' may derive from a root, a stem, a leaf base, or a bud.
A biologist, regardless of his specialty, cannot afford to lose sight of the whole
organism if his goal is the understanding of the organic world.
KATHERINE ESAU
Anatomy of Flowering Plants: An Introduction to Structure and Development (1987) by Paula Rudall is a concise but
comprehensive description of plant anatomy and its pre-eminent role in plant taxonomy. Stunningly illustrated.
Plant Form. An Illustrated Gude to Flowering Plant Morphology (1991) by Adrian Bell is a rapid-reference guide to the
architecture and construction of plants, giving concise explanations of the derivation and interpretation of morphological
features. Suitable for users of varying abilities.
Bark: The Formation, Characteristics and Uses of Bark Around the World (1993) by Ghillean and Anne Prance. Bark is
one of the defming tissues of woody plants_ This work uses photographs to explain its variety of form, function, and use
worldwide.
Plants are the producers of our planet. They are the organisms that absorb the Sun's light and manufacture the food on which
animals depend. The waste product of that process we also need rather a lot: oxygen. As these books show, plants are every bit
as fascinating and important as animals.
The thirsty earth sucks up the rain, / And drinks, and gapes for drink again. / The plants suck in the earth, and are / With
constant drinking fresh and fair.
ABRAHAM COWI.EY
The Fate of the Forest (1989) by Susanna Hecht and Alexander Cockburn. A measured account of the destruction of the
Amazonian tropical rainforest. Filled with interesting details on the flora of Amazonia.
The Pollination of Plants (1973) by Michael Proctor and Peter Yeo. A rich source of information on the many and varied ways
plants have found of getting pollen from one to another.
The Private Life of Plants (1994) by David Attenborough. Beautifully illustrated account of the lifestyles of plants, combined
with detailed text and the traditional Attenborough enthusiasm.
The Day of the Triffids (1951) by John Wyndham. Fiction, but still a compelling story of the worst nightmare - the day the
plants turned against mankind. Quite a lot of interesting botanical detail too.
A Passion for Plants (1995) by Clive Langmead. The subject of the book is as much Ghillean Prance as it is plants. For Prance
is director of Kew Gardens and is a man in love - with things botanical. Essential reading for someone who thinks plants are
dull.
Mushrooms (1990) by Roger Phillips. Strictly speaking, mushrooms are fungi, not plants, but we eat them and tread on them
as though they were plants. This book will open up a completely new world for you - and help you distinguish between the safe
and the dangerous.
Vegetables (1995) by Roger Phillips and Martin Rix. A survey of the edibles we normally see in the greengrocery or down at
the allotment, plus some oddities. Fascinating, scientific, and well illustrated.
Agriculture played no part in the earliest human societies but once the first plant domestications took place, crops became a
major factor in shaping our civilization. In its broadest sense, modern agriculture encompasses such aspects as gene
manipulation and conservation of wild progenitors as well as the more prosaic planting, growing, and harvesting of crops.
Medicinal usage of plants almost certainly dates from man's earliest history. Initially there was probably little or no difference
between plants as healthful foods and plants as curatives in the crudest sense. When these roles diverged, medicinal use
gradually became entwined with folklore, mysticism, and other philosophical accoutrements, often to the point of entirely
obscuring the original purpose of the plant. Synthetic drugs and chemicals have largely replaced herbal reme-
dies in the industrialized world, but extracts derived from plants maintain an important role in modern medicine and for many
peoples traditional drugs remain their only available source of treatment. The renewed interest in natural plant extracts is a
reminder that, once upon a time, we were all similarly reliant on herbs and herbal lore.
Nightshades, the Paradoxical Plants (1969) by Charles Heiser successfully uses a `let's tell' style to convey the importance of
an intriguing group of medicinal plants.
Medical Botany - Plants Affecting Man's Health (1977) by Walter Lewis and Memory Elvin-Lewis. A reference work with
the information organized both by plant and by the conditions treated. The coverage is worldwide and the data easily
accessible.
Seed to Civilization (1981) by Charles Heiser covers the origins and evolution of agriculture in a readable style by focusing on
the major food species.
The New Age Herbalist (1988) by Richard Mabey is an up-to-date herbal in the European tradition. Mabey uses modem
interpretation and relevant medical research to explain and justify the use of traditional remedies.
Field Guide to the Crops of Britain and Europe (1989) by G de Rougemont is a useful tool for identifying the numerous
crop plants grown in the region.
Plants and People (1990) by Anna Lewington is a book of the uses of plants by people for agriculture and medicine. Beautiful
coffee-table style disguises a highly authoritative work.
Earthly Goods (1994) by Christopher Joyce tackles the complex relationships between medicinal plant hunters, local peoples,
conservationists, and pharmaceutical companies, as well as emotive issues including `ownership' of biodiversity. The book is
leavened with descriptions of eccentric scientists, the author's navels, and examples of useful plants.
A Dictionary of Folklore (1995) by Roy Vickery is a source of information on plants in folklore and ethnobotany in the British
Isles, including superstitions and customs, legends, folk medicine, and other uses. Unusually for the subject matter, Vickery
emphasizes present-day practices and beliefs (those current during 1975-94) as well as dealing with older traditions.
ENVIRONMENT: BIODIVERSITY
Nigel Dudley
Biodiversity, or biological diversity, refers to the richness and variety of life, measured by the number of species of plants and
animals, their genetic variety, and the ways they interact in ecosystems. Ten years ago `biodiversity' did not even appear in
dictionaries, yet in 1992 it received international attention through agreement of the Convention on Biological Diversity at the
Earth Summit in Rio de Janeiro. The concept marks an increasing sophistication in our understanding of ecology. Plants and
animals need a working ecosystem. Variety within a species may be as important, from an evolutionary standpoint, as several
different species. Preservation of nothing but a relic population may not be much better than complete extinction. Yet at the
moment, biodiversity is disappearing faster than at any time in the Earth's history, due to habitat destruction, overexploitation
and pollution.
Biodiversity already commands an impressive library of books. The titles listed below help show how the idea is developing,
give a range of viewpoints about the importance of biodiversity, and outline some options for management of biodiversity in
the future.
Ecosystems are not only more complex than we think, but more
complex than we can think.
FRANK EGLER
The Sinking Ark (1979) by Norman Myers. Argues that we face a massive loss of species, particularly through tropical
deforestation, and that conservation efforts are manifestly failing to counter this trend. In this book he also puts the practical
case for preserving species, in terms of their use as genetic resources for foodstuffs, medicines, and so on; a theme which he
has continued to developed in a number of further titles, including The Primary Source.
Gaia: A New Look at Life on Earth (1979) by James Lovelock. Proposes the still heretical theory that the planet itself is,
biologically speaking, a self-regulating mechanism. Whether you agree with Lovelock or not, he presents a sober and well-
argued case, and his book helped focus attention on the role that different components play in the ecology of the planet, thus
paving the way for discussion on biodiversity.
Biodiversity (1988) edited by Edward 0 Wilson. The first book to crystallize the debate about biodiversity, which also brought
the word itself to public attention. A fascinating array of articles, papers, and even poems about biological diversity around the
world. Still the best single introduction to the subject. See also The Diversity of Life by Wilson himself for a readable
introduction to the subject.
Conserving the World's Biological Diversity (1990) by Jeffrey A McNeely, Kenton R Miller, Walter V Reid, Russell A
Mittermeir, and Timothy B Werner. The most comprehensive attempt so far to set an agenda for international conservation of
biodiversity. Much of the thinking was later incorporated into proposals for the Convention on Biological Diversity.
The Threatened Gene: Food, Politics and the Loss of Genetic Diversity (1990) by Cary Fowler and Pat Mooney.
Biodiversity loss does not only affect natural systems; during the 20th century we have lost hundreds of traditional crop strains
and livestock breeds. This meticulously researched and readable book looks at what has happened, how genetic diversity has
been lost in food production, and why it matters.
Biodiversity: Social and Ecological Consequences (1992) by Vandana Shiva. Proposes that biodiversity conservation has to
be tackled by first addressing problems of intensive farming and North-South relations. It is one of a series of books by a noted
Indian scientist and feminist; her Staying Alive looks at women's issues in more detail.
Global Biodiversity: The Status of the Earth's Living Resources (1992) edited by Brian Groombridge. A massive review of
biodiversity around the world, looking at the status of key ecosystems, the human uses of plants and animals, rates of change in
natural systems, and so on.
Saving Nature's Legacy (1994) by Reed F Noss and Allen Y Cooperrider. Guidelines on practical biodiversiry conservation at
a landscape level.
ECOLOGY
Nigel Dudley
Ecology has become one of the fastest-growing scientific disciplines of the latter 20th century, and the serious student can refer
to a seemingly endless stream of textbooks, monographs, journals, and conference proceedings. The following list has a more
modest aim: to introduce some basic and accessible books for the general reader that will outline some of the key ideas for the
nonspecialist. As such, it includes two historical titles from people who started to focus attention on issues of ecology, and
looks at some accessible modem interpretations.
I wish to speak a word for Nature, for absolute freedom and wildness, as contrasted with a freedom and culture merely civil - to
regard man as an inhabitant, or a pan and parcel of Nature, rather than a member of society.
HENRY THOREAU
The Natural History of Selborne (1789; several recent editions) by Gilbert White. Why should a series of letters about natural
history, written by an obscure parson living near the English South Downs, become a perennial bestseller? Perhaps because
White was one of the first to seek the interrelationships in nature, and to look beyond simple classification of biology. Still
fascinating, even if White did make a few mistakes, perhaps most famously that swallows and martins overwintered by
hibernating in burrows rather than by migrating.
The Portable Thoreau (1980) edited by Carl Bode. An excellent introduction to one of the best nature writers of all time,
including the complete text of Walden (1854), Thoreau's account of living in a remote house in the Maine woods and of the
surrounding nature, along with selections from his journals, The Maine Woods, A Week on the Concord and Merrimack Rivers,
and other works.
History of the Countryside (1990) by Oliver Rackham. For much of the world, ecology is now intimately tied up with human
history, and with the changes that farming, forestry, industry, and migration patterns have made on the landscape. Rackham's
book, which concentrates particularly on England, shows how ecology and history can be matched to explain the current
landscape and ecology. Fascinating and provocative.
Ecology (1990) by M Begon, J L Harper, and C R Townsend. One of the more read-able of a series of textbooks on ecology,
looking at relationships within populations and communities.
Ecological Imperialism (1993) by Alfred W Crosby. Looks at the biological expansion of Europe over 1,000 years, with
particular emphasis on the colonial period, and argues that displacement of native peoples by Europeans in most temperate
regions was driven as much by ecology as by military conquest. Interesting for its perspectives linking ecology with historical
movements.
Global Marine Biological Diversity (1993) edited by Elliott A Norse. Looks at the ecology of marine systems and at steps to
address current problems facing the world's seas and oceans.
The Private Life of Plants (1995) by David Attenborough. A stimulating introduction to plants and the way that they function,
by one of the world's best-known natural-history filmmakers and writers. Important because plant ecology is so often ignored
by anyone but the professional academics. Attenborough has written many fascinating books; watch out also for Life on Earth,
which starts from a more general ecological perspective.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROBLEMS
Nigel Dudley
Environmental awareness did not suddenly emerge, fully fledged, some time during the 1980s. A concern about environmental
impact of human society can be traced back for hundreds of years and, for example, the first pamphlet on air pollution,
Fumifugion: or the smoake of London dissipated, was published by John Evelyn in London in 1666. Since then, ideas have
developed gradually, and have been refined and some-times revised as our understanding of the environment has become more
sophisticated. The list below gives some of the milestone publications of the `modern' environmental movement. A few of the
earlier titles may now sometimes seem a little simplistic, or their ideas have been so incorporated into mainstream thinking that
they hardly seem radical any more. All of them have played important roles in shaping, and often changing, people's thinking
about our relationship to the planet.
Pollution has a long history. The creation of wastes has been one of the distinguishing characteristics of every human society.
CLIVE PONTING
Silent Spring (1962) by Rachel Carson. Probably the one book that, more than any other, kick-started today's environmental
movement. Rachel Carson was a marine biologist, who drafted this passionate expose about the impact of pesticides on the
environment when she was already seriously ill. The book caused a furore and Carson spent her last months being bitterly
attacked by industry representatives. She helped change the outlook of a generation. Beautifully written and cogently argued,
still fresh after 35 years.
Small Is Beautiful (1973) by E P Schumacher. The title of the book, which delighted or infuriated readers during a period
when technology and transnational business practices were increasingly being challenged, was actually suggested by the
publisher. The essays give a theoretical background to such developments as intermediate technology. The best, such as
`Buddhist economics', remain pertinent and readable today.
The Limits to Growth (1975) by Donella L and Dennis L Meadows, Jorgen Randers, and William W Behrens III. An early
and influential attempt to map the likely impacts of resource depletion using computer modelling. Coming immediately after
the 1973 oil crisis, the book helped create new attitudes towards nonrenewable resources. The predictions have proved to be
overly pessimistic in terms of time scale, although the central argument remains valid, and the team produced a new analysis,
Beyond the Limits, almost 20 years later.
How the Other Half Dies - The Real Reasons for World Hunger (1976) by Susan George. It is commonly argued that
`overpopulation' is the greatest threat facing the human race, and the major cause of hunger and famine. Susan George
elegantly and comprehensively demolishes these claims, showing that access to food has more to do with the priorities of
international agribusiness and the ways that development aid is used and abused.
Soft Energy Paths: Towards a Durable Peace (1977) by Amory Lovins. At a time when solar and wind power were regarded
as little more than utopian dreams, Lovins turned the argument around and boldly claimed that, using established technologies,
renewable sources will supply all our energy in the future. Part research paper and part polemic, it provided much of the
inspiration for current developments of wind farms, solar villages and small-scale hydropower projects. `Soft energy' became
synonymous with post-oil energy sources.
The Nuclear Barons (1981) by Peter Pringle and James Spiegelman. The other half of the energy debate: a detailed and
readable analysis of the rise of nuclear power, from early weapons-testing through to then current debates about energy. Written
in advance of the major US nuclear accident at Harrisburg and the disaster at Chernobyl in the Ukraine, the book sounds
prophetic warnings about the dangers of nuclear energy and remains the best one-volume history of the first 40 years of nuclear
development.
In the Rainforest (1984) by Catherine Caufield. Repeated opinion surveys show that tropical deforestation is the single
environmental issue that causes the most concern around the world. This book, written by an American journalist, is the
account of a personal investigation into causes and effects of tropical forest loss that covered Africa, Asia, and Latin America.
Brundtland Report: Our Common Future (1987) by World Commission on Environment and Development, chaired by Gro
Harlem Brundtland. The most comprehensive official international attempt to define `sustainable development' and to
harmonize the needs of people and environment, coordinated by the then prime minister of Norway. Like most such efforts at
consensus, it contains contradictions and compromises. Important because of its influence on many governmental and United
Nations initiatives.
The Green History of the World (1991) by Clive Ponting. A history of the world from an environmental standpoint, packed
with information but also presenting a sustained argument about the links between ecology and human activities, and linking in
the influence of religious thought and political philosophy. An excellent one-volume introduction.
How Much is Enough? (1992) by an Thein Durning. Addressing the issue that will increasingly dominate the debate about the
environment in the next few years; how the rapidly increasing levels of consumption - of raw materials, energy and other
resources - by the rich fifth of the population can be reconciled with the needs of the environment and of the poorer human
majority.
CONSERVATION
Peter Tallack
Round the globe, biological communities that took millions of years to develop are being devastated by human action. at is bad
for biological diversity will almost certainly be bad for the human population, because we too are dependent on the natural
environment. Conservation biology is the scientific discipline born of this crisis. Its aim is to study and prevent the loss of
biological diversity: specifically, the extinction of species, the loss of genetic variation, and the destruction of biological
communities. It brings together people and knowledge from many different fields.
When the last individual of a race of living things breathes no more, another
heaven and another earth must pass before such a one can be again.
Wrr mivt BEEBE
The Diversity of Life (1992) by Edward 0 Wilson. An outstanding overview of the biodiversity crisis, as well as basic
concepts such as evolutionary change, extinction, and speciation, written for the general public. The all-encompassing range,
the compelling case for conservation, and the delightful natural history are virtues enough to recommend this book.
Why Big Fierce Animals Are Rare (1980) by Paul Colinvaux. An excellent read-able guide to how the living world works.
The Theory of Island Biogeography (1967) by Robert MacArthur and Edward 0 Wilson. This seminal text presents and
explores the relationship between the number of species on an island and its size, distance from the mainland, and
biogeographical history. The book has stimulated more research in conservation than any other work and remains controversial.
Nature's Keepers (1995) by Stephen Budiansky. An environmental journalist explains in simple terms the new science of
mathematical ecology, which is providing tools for effective environmental management by revealing how ecosystems really
work and interact.
Reflections of Eden (1995) by Birute M F Galdikas. A pioneering primatologist and world leader in conservation tells the
enthralling story of her 25-year study of the orangutans of the Borneo rainforests. A powerful advertisement for the
preservation of these great apes and their habitat.
The Last Panda (1992) by George D Schaller. A fascinating account of the author's efforts to study and save the giant panda.
He successfully mixes natural history with the politics of conservation: the expose of the countless cover-ups and fatal mistakes
of zoos, governments, and international wildlife groups makes for gripping and often depressing reading.
Last Chance to See (1990) by Douglas Adams and Mark Carwardine. Adams, author of The Hitchhiker's Guide to the Galaxy,
teams up with a zoologist in this lively but poignant tour of the imminent threat of extinction facing many well-known species.
Gerald Durrell's Army (1992) by Edward Whitley. Gerald Durrell - the world's most intrepid animal collector, who died in
1995 - was also the 'commander of an army of local people trained to save their own wildlife. This is a first--hand globetrotting
account of their trials and tribulations.
Noah's Choice (1995) by Charles C Mann and Mark L Plummer. Explores the politics of endangered species with some good
reporting on what goes on inside he US Fish and Wildlife Service.
Last Animals at the Zoo (1991) by Colin Tudge. A look behind the scenes at the difficulties and successes of captive breeding.
The author convincingly argues that zoos are now an essential part of modem conservation strategy.
Biological anthropology arose out of physical anthropology, which involved measuring and comparing, on the one hand, living
peoples worldwide and, on the other hand, the fossilized bones of early humans or their even earlier ancestors. The study of
this prehistory is also called palaeoanthropology. The aspects to study about living humans mushroomed with the increase in
biochemical and molecular science, to include genetics, protein analysis, nutrition, parasites, diseases, and all aspects of human
physiology and biochemistry. Anthropology means the science of humans, but the subject matter is usually concentrated on
humans in groups.
Interest in the evolution, past and ongoing, of human biology is central to the subject. So a closely related discipline is the
study of our closest relatives, the monkeys and apes. Although humans are clearly biological organisms like other animals, they
are distinctive because of the extent of their thought processes and social organization. Whereas some biological
anthropologists are specialists in genetics, biochemistry, nutrition, and so on, the contribution of others is much more generalist
as they integrate social processes into their perception of biological outcomes. Biological anthropology is a subject for
everyone with or without background education in biology, for it is only human to be interested in ourselves.
The extent of human variability is enormous, so large that no two individuals who have ever lived or will ever live can ever be
exactly the same. The fundamental causes for this variability lie in ... the genes inherited from our parents, and the infinity of
environments which act upon and within individuals from conception to death.
G AINSWORTH HARRISON
Introduction to Physical Anthropology (6th edition 1994) by R Jurmain and H Nelson. An excellent first reader for the layman
or new student.
Human Biology: an introduction to human evolution, variation, growth and ecology (3rd edition 1988) by G A Harrison, J
M Tanner, D R Pilbeam, and P T Baker. More difficult, but probably the central textbook for the discipline.
Human Variation, Races, Types and Ethnic Groups (3rd edition 1992) by Stephen Molnar. Intermediate between the above
two books; gives useful insight into that politically sensitive topic commonly known as `race'.
Human Populations: Diversity and Adaptation (1995) edited by A J Boyce and V Reynolds. A very recent collection of
research papers on a wide spectrum of biological anthropological topics, collated in honour of the retirement of Professor G A
Harrison, who for over a generation has been a central figure in the discipline.
Humankind Emerging (1976) by B G Campbell. Now rather dated but a well-illustrated book for those who like a Time-Life
approach to understanding human evolution.
The Book of Man, the Quest to Discover Our Genetic Heritage (1994) by W F Bodmer and R McKie. A clear and simple
book with an emphasis on the understanding of genetics for understanding ourselves.
The Language of the Genes, Biology, History and the Evolutionary Future (1993) by Steve Jones. A fascinating and
painless way into understanding genetics by the Reith lecturer.
Human Biology and Ecology (1977) by A Damon was written for the layman or first-year student and despite its date gives
useful insight.
SOCIAL ANTHROPOLOGY
Chris Holdsworth
Who are we? The answer to this question, more than any other, inspires anthropology. We are all fundamentally alike, yet we
live in an amazing diversity of cultures. By participating in and observing everyday life in other cultures, anthropologists hope
to obtain an understanding of how others experience life.
At the heart of anthropology is ethnography: a written description of the culture of another society and an account of the
anthropologist's experience within that culture. It is through the comparative study of other cultures that anthropologists hope
to understand who we are. But anthropology is a discipline in turmoil. It consists of a multiplicity of theoretical approaches and
areas of concern, is a uniquely Western development, and the ethnography is now recognized as essentially autobiographical. In
recent years this has led many anthropologists to question the validity of their methods, epistemology, and some of their most
basic concepts such as culture, society, the self, rationality, and human nature.
Argonauts of the Western Pacific (1922) by Bronislaw Malinowski. A classic account of the interrelationship between magic
and the ceremonial exchange of valuables in the South Seas by one of the founders of modern anthropology. Malinowski's
methodological introduction established the standard for future anthropological fieldwork.
Return to Laughter (1954) by Elenore Smith Bowen (pseudonym of Laura Bohannan). A vivid and moving description of life
and death in a Nigerian village as it copes with a smallpox epidemic. The book was one of the first to provide an introspective
account of the fieldwork experience.
Witchcraft, Magic and Oracles among the Azande (1937; abridged edition 1976) by Edward Evans-Pritchard. A description
of Azande beliefs about witchcraft, magic, and sorcery. Evans-Pritchard's theoretical insights about the nature of human
rationality have been very influential, the book being quoted as much by philosophers as anthropologists.
Yanomamo: The Fierce People (1968) by Napoleon Chagnon. A compelling study of the well-known Amazonian be, whose
traditional violent way of life is now under threat from deforestation and the activities of gold miners. Chagnon argues that
their social organization is a dynamic process controlling their chronic warfare.
The Interpretation of Culture (1973) by Clifford Geertz. A collection of essays by America's leading anthropologist
examining the concept of culture, its role in society, and how it should be studied.
Anthropology and Anthropologists: The Modern British School (1973) by Adam Kuper. Anthropology is perhaps best
understood through its history. Kuper's well-written account of the theories and characters involved in the development of
British social anthropology is the best there is.
Orientalism (1978) by Edward Said. A controversial critique of the West's interpretation of `the Orient that questions some of
our most basic assumptions about ourselves as Westerners.
Time and the Other: How Anthropology Makes its Object (1983) by Johannes Fabian. A fascinating discussion of how
anthropology uses time to define the relation ship between the self and the other.
The Gender of the Gift (1988) by Marilyn Strathem. A spirited critique of cross-cultural comparisons that examines initiation
rites and ceremonial exchange in a Melanesian society where male-female relations are based on gift exchange.
Companion Encyclopedia of Anthropology: Humanity, Culture and Society (1994) edited by Tim Ingold. Consisting of 38
essays on a diversity of topics, it is a comprehensive and readable overview of current thinking in the subject.
ARCHAEOLOGY: INTRODUCTION
Paul Bahn
Archaeology is the study of the human past - from the earliest tools to yesterday's garbage - through its material remains. It
developed over the course of centuries from a natural curiosity about the past into antiquarianism and eventually the unique
blend of science and art that characterizes archaeology today. It covers a vast array of topics, from the Stone Age to recent
times, and encompasses many specialities, such as Egyptology and underwater archaeology. Although it is associated in most
people's minds with excavation, this is in fact only one of the many ways that information can be obtained about the past; and
archaeology now calls on specialists from many other subjects, and especially from the sciences, to extract an ever increasing
range of evidence in order to team more about, to understand, and to explain the form and behaviour of past societies.
Archaeology from the Earth (1954) by Mortimer Wheeler. A classic text by one of modem archaeology's greatest pioneers
and practitioners.
The Archaeologist's Handbook (1986) by Jane McIntosh. A useful and readable survey of how we know what we know about
the past.
Past Worlds: The Times Atlas of Archaeology (1988) edited by Chris Scare. A major encyclopedic survey of past cultures by
a battery of specialists.
Archaeology: Theories, Methods and Practice (1991) by Colin Renfrew and Paul B. A leading textbook that explains, with
examples from all over the world, how archaeologists obtain the evidence to answer the wide range of questions that interest
them.
The Collins Dictionary of Archaeology (1992) edited by Paul B. The most up-to-date reference book offering definitions of
sites, cultures, artefacts, technical and theoretical terms.
Understanding Archaeological Excavation (1993) by Philip Barker. The best available introduction to archaeology's
traditional methods of extracting information from the ground.
Time Detectives (1995) by Brian Fagan. A collection of essays comprising a wide variety of case studies that show how
archaeology uses modem science to obtain information about the past.
The Cambridge Illustrated History of Archaeology (1995) edited by Paul Bahn. A fully illustrated survey of archaeology's
history, from its beginnings to the present, in all parts of the world.
The Story of Archaeology (1995) by Paul B. A beautifully illustrated collection of 100 spreads - `archaeology's greatest
discoveries' - that display the subject's tremendous range.
INDUSTRIAL ARCHAEOLOGY
Anthony Burton
This is a new subject: the term `industrial archaeology' appeared in print for the first time in 1955. It can be loosely defined as
the recordings and investigation of the remains of industrial buildings and structures. At first, the work was largely limited to
the period of the Industrial Revolution and that was generally taken as being centred on the vast range of developments that
took place in Great Britain in the 18th and early 19th centuries. A feature of the early years was that much of the investigation
was left to amateurs doing work on local cities. Over the years the subject (and its literature) has developed, so that it has
become worldwide and extended to cover the recording and, where appropriate, conservation of industrial sites from any
period. There has also been a movement to place the sites in their human and social as well as a technological context.
The Functional Tradition (1958) by J M Richards. A seminal work that showed industrial buildings were worthy of study, and
through Eric de Mare's superb photographs disclosed they could even be beautiful.
Industrial Archaeology (1972) by Arthur Raistrick. One of the first, and one of the best, attempts to show how the subject
could be treated in a logical and scholarly fashion.
Remains of a Revolution (1974) by Anthony Burton. A study of the classic period of the British Industrial Revolution, which
combines a study of the physical remains with their human history.
Industrial Archaeology (1975) by Neil Cossons. A standard work which deals systematically with the different branches of
the subject, and an ideal starting point for beginners.
Industrial Archaeology (1976) by Theodore Anton Sanck. This is an introduction to American industrial history, based on a
detailed look at a number of key sites.
Monuments of Industry (1986) by Geoffrey D Hay and Geoffrey P Stell. Although it is limited to Scotland, it is a model of
how sites should be recorded in words, photographs, and drawings.
Civil Engineering 1839-1889 (1991) by Mike Chrimes. One of the few books to look at engineering structures on a worldwide
basis.
TECHNOLOGY: INTRODUCTION
Trevor I Williams
Today, technology is generally regarded as the application of science for practical purposes, but it must be remembered that
many technologies - such as the smelting and working of metals and the processing and weaving of fibres - were well
developed before science as it is now understood existed at all. Others, such as plastics, have emerged almost within living
memory. The term `technology' (as the German technologie) was coined in 1777 by Johann Beckmann of Gottingen.
The most important and urgent problems of the technology of today are no
longer the satisfaction of the primary needs or archetypal wishes, but the
reparation of the evils and damages wrought by the technology of yesteryear.
DENNIS GABOR
A History of Technology: The Twentieth Century c. 1900 - 1950 volumes 6 and 7 (1978) edited by Charles Singer, E J
Holmyard, A R Hall, and Trevor I Williams. This is the recognized comprehensive work on the history of technology, from the
dawn of civilization to the mid-20th century. It deals primarily with the Middle East, Egypt, Europe, and North America.
Science and Civilisation in China (1954) edited by Joseph Needham. This multi-volume work, internationally acclaimed -
commenced in 1954 and still appearing - complements the above with its penetrating and largely original study of the history
of technology in China, relating this to the Middle East and Europe. This is available in an abridged form: The Shorter Science
and Civilisation in China (1978-97; continuing) by Colin A Ronan.
An Encyclopaedia of the History of Technology (1990) edited by Ian McNeil. A team of 20 acknowledged experts cover the
history of technology from the Stone Age to the Space Age.
Oxford Illustrated Encyclopedia of Invention and Technology (1992) edited by Monty Finniston. One of eight volumes of
the comprehensive Oxford Illustrated Encyclopedia.
Chambers Science and Technology Dictionary (1988) edited by P Walker. The latest version of Chambers Technical
Dictionary, which first appeared some 50 years ago. A comprehensive and reliable guide to many thousands of technical terms.
The Power of the Machine (1992) by R A Buchanan. Reviews the social implications of technological revolution, worldwide,
and finds it to be very uneven.
The Materials Revolution (1988) edited by T Forester. A collection of reprinted articles from a variety of sources, intended for
the general reader.
The Uses of Life: A History of Biotechnology (1993) by R Bud. Although biotechnology has been practised for millennia - as
in brewing - it has become an important industrial force only in comparatively recent years. This book is the first authoritative
review of its history.
MATERIALS
Trevor I Williams
The term `material' covers a range of substances from which things can be made. While some fall into broad categories - such
as metals and plastics - others have little in common except their utility. Such, for example, are ceramics and glass, wood and
leather, all used from the dawn of civilization but now appearing in increasingly sophisticated forms.
Today, plastics generally denote some kind of synthetic material - such as polythene or nylon - but it must be remembered that
similar materials abound in nature and have long been in common use. Such, for example, are rubber and shellac. The first
important artificial product to be developed commercially was celluloid (originally Parkesine), a form of cellulose nitrite
plasticized with camphor, invented by Alexander Parkes in 1865.
Metals have played so important a role in the history of civilization that they have been used to designate whole epochs. The
Stone Age was followed by the Bronze Age, the Iron Age, and - since roughly the mid-19th century - the Steel Age. For the
greater part of human history no more than eight metals were in common use - gold, silver, copper, iron, lead, zinc, tin, and
mercury. Platinum was introduced in the early 19th century and only more recently have aluminium, magnesium, and titanium
been used in substantial quantities. Others, such as tungsten, vanadium, chromium, molybdenum, and nickel are used in
relatively small quantities for special purposes such as making alloys or electroplating.
Artifice and Artifacts: 100 Essays in Materials Science (1992) by Robert W C. A compilation of articles written over a span
of 25 years by an acknowledged expert in the field.
Engineering Materials: An Introduction to their Properties and Application (1980) by M F Ashby and D R H Jones. A
guide to the choice of materials for particular purposes.
Advancing Materials Research (1987) by Peter A Psaras and A Dale Langford. A review of recent progress in materials-
science research.
Physical Metallurgy (1974; 3rd revised edition 1993) edited by Robert W Cahn and Peter Haasen. Generally rated the most
authoritative and up-to-date book in this field.
Metals in the Service of Man (1972) by William Alexander and Arthur Street. A short, reliable guide for the general reader.
A Hundred Years of Metallurgy (1963) by W H Dennis. A good general account of developments in metallurgy from roughly
the middle of the 19th century.
Metals, Ceramics, and Polymers (1974) by 0 Wyatt and D Dew-Hughes. A comprehensive review of three major fields,
effectively linking engineering and science.
Pioneers in Polymer Science (1989) edited by Raymond B Seymour. Basically a biographical study, but contains much
background information.
The First Century of Plastics (1963) by M Kaufman. A comprehensive review, published under the imprint of the Plastics
Institute.
NONRENEWABLE ENERGY
Alan Williams
The majority of the country's energy, with one or two exceptions, is produced by fossil fuels or a combination of fossil and
biofuels. This is reflected in a considerable number of publications directed towards combustion but, because of the importance
of the subject, these are generally specialized books in science and engineering. Most general energy books are preoccupied
with the fact that fossil fuels are finite and consequently look very much to the future and to alternative energy sources such as
renewable energy suppliers or, indeed, nuclear energy.
The meek shall inherit the earth, but not the mineral rights.
PAUL GETTY
The Energy Question (1992) by Gerald Foley. This is a well-known book which deals with systems and resources - including
coal, petroleum, natural gas, and the tar sands and oil shales. It also deals with energy flows and storage, which is a necessary
pan of combustion in a world where climate warming and pollution are pre-eminent in one source. The last pan deals with the
future, including energy forecasting and conservation.
Energy Around the World: An Introduction to Energy Studies. Global Resources, Needs, Utilization (1984) by J C McVeigh.
This book covers such sources as petroleum, natural gas, hydro power, and biomass, and then moves into future energy
sources. Again, this is a very general book. The major energy sources, such as coal and petroleum, are treated at approximately
the same level as solar energy, geothermal energy, and so on.
Energy (1984) by Joseph Priest. A good general coverage of energy and just enough on combustion.
Energy and the Atmosphere: A Physical-Chemical Approach (1986) by Ian M Campbell. An interesting analysis of
atmospheric pollution, including a useful introduction to combustion.
An Introduction to Combustion (1993) by Warren C Strahle. A detailed scientific analysis of all aspects of combustion. Not
for the beginner.
Combustion and Pollution Control in Heating Systems (1994) by V I Hanby. An interesting book detailing the principle of
combustion and pollution control in the context of heating systems.
Combustion of Liquid Fuel Sprays (1990) by Alan Williams. A good coverage of liquid-fuel sprays and, more importantly,
the key aspects of combustion pollution control applicable to almost any fuel.
Coal: Resources, Properties, Utilization, Pollution (1995) edited by Orhan Kural. A useful contemporary survey of all
aspects of coal.
Fire: Technology, Symbolism, Ecology, Science, Hazard (1993) by Hazel Rossotti. Combustion can have adverse
consequences and fire is a classic case. Well illustrated.
Dictionary of Energy Technology (1979) by Alan Gilpin and Alan Williams. A last resort if the words are unfamiliar.
RENEWABLE ENERGY
Mary Cobbett
The natural world has many complex processes for maintaining its own survival. If we want to survive into the future - and
have a relatively smooth ride - our best bet lies with understanding and working with those natural processes, rather than trying
to `conquer' nature. Technologies that support rather than harm the environment exist in the form of obtaining power from
wind, the sun, and rain. Utilizing methods of environment-conscious building and sewage systems and generally being aware
of the conservation of energy that we use every day are all positive ways of assisting the Earth in coping with the pressures we
lay upon it. Through a combination of cost-effective energy-efficient improvements and low-impact renewable energy;
technologies it may be possible to cut the use of fossil fuels by half. In many pans of the world fossil fuels have never been a
viable option, whereas the abundance of sun and wind in some areas are infinite resources waiting to be tapped.
It's only when we put our energies into what we're for, rather than
what we're against, that we can really change things.
PAUL ALLEN
Energy Without End (1991) by Michael Flood. Shows how the UK can start to meet the challenge of switching to less
polluting, renewable energy resources. Positive and comprehensive, recommended reading for anyone concerned about the
future of energy use and the environment.
The Future of Energy Use (1994) by Robert Hill and others. Introduction to the uses of different kinds of energy and their
social and environmental impacts through-out the world.
Power Surge (1994) by Christopher Flavin, and Nicholas Lenssen. The world is being pushed towards more efficient,
decentralized, and cleaner energy systems, and this clearly outlines the massive changes ahead in transport, the home, and
society.
The Solar Electric House (1993) by Steven Strong. This will tell you everything you need to know to decide whether
photovoltaics are for you, including system options and economics; how to determine your electricity requirements; stand-
alone and interactive systems; designing a solar house; and descriptions of all key components.
Real Goods Solar Living Resource Book (8th edition 1994) by John Schaeffer. A guide to all aspects of solar, wind, water,
and other sustainable resources: solar panels, water pumps, batteries, and so on. Chapters on home safety, ecology, food
growing, and how to make a living that doesn't compromise your values. It has become the bible of the US alternative-energy
world. Despite being aimed at the US market, it is also a treasure trove for UK readers.
Windfarm Location and Environmental Impact (1988) by Alexi Clarke. Increasingly becoming a very topical subject, this is an
important assessment of a hitherto relatively unexplored field. Also looks at other siting constraints such as conflicting land
uses, public attitudes, and planning permission.
Wind Power for Home and Business (1993) by Paul Gipe. A comprehensive reference book covering all aspects of modem
wind-energy machines - the new wind machines are efficient, powerful, and inexpensive in the long run. Contains lists of
manufacturers, test centres, and so on in many countries, including the UK, the USA, and continental Europe.
Micro Hydro Design Manual (1993) by Adam Harvey and Andy Brown. Examines every stage of planning and installation of
a small-scale system. Worked examples with illustrations and notes to help with all the practical aspects of the project, with
detailed sections on turbines, governing, drive systems, electrical power, and maintenance.
Micro-Hydro Electric Power (1986) by Ray Holland. Concise, reliable introduction to the technology of small-scale water
power.
Micro-Hydro Power (1991) by Peter Fraenkel and others. Essential for those involved in designing, implementing, or
operating microhydropower schemes in developed and developing countries. Covers civil works, economics, turbines,
electrical power, and more.
APPROPRIATE TECHNOLOGY
Colin Garden
Technology usually implies engineering and machinery but these are only part of what has become known as appropriate
technology or AT. Advocates of appropriate technology aim to provide solutions to the problems resulting from poverty and
mass unemployment in developing countries and they are concerned as much with the social appropriateness of the
technologies they use as they are with techniques. They aim to benefit all members of a community, not just the well-educated
and the wealthy, and to support, rather than replace, local strategies. As the books listed will show, AT is about a self-help,
community-based approach to development and making the most economical use of available resources and skills.
If that which has been shaped by technology, and continues to be so shaped, looks
sick, it might be wise to have a look at technology itself. If technology is felt to be
becoming more and more inhuman, we might do well to consider whether it is
possible to have something better - a technology with a human face.
E F SCHUMACHER
Small Is Beautiful: A Study of Economics as if People Mattered (1973) by E F Schumacher. Introduces the concepts of
`intermediate' and `appropriate' technology. Schumacher argues that the pursuit of profit and unlimited economic growth will
not provide solutions to the problems of the modern world.
The AT Reader: Theory and Practice in Appropriate Technology (1985) by Marilyn Carr. The standard introduction to AT.
Explains the origins of the idea and demonstrates its application in a wide range of contexts.
Appropriate Technology: Technology with a Human Face (1978) by P Dunn. Written by an engineer; covers the actual
practice of appropriate technology in a clear, simple style.
The Third World Tomorrow (1980) by Paul Harrison. First-hand reports on projects in Africa, Asia, and Latin America.
Shows how the concepts of appropriate technology, people's participation, self help, and small-scale enterprise are put into
practice.
The Economies of Small: Appropriate Technology in a Changing World (1990) by Raphael Kaplinsky. A study of the
economics of AT. Gives a good overview of the development of the AT movement and its concern with environmental, social,
and economic issues. Moves from case studies of AT in developing countries to considering the relevance of an AT approach in
industrially advanced countries.
Tinker, Tiller, Technical Change: Technologies from the People (1990) edited by Matthew Gamser, Helen Appleton, and
Nicola Carter. Emphasizes the need for `experts' to recognize local innovation when offering technical assistance to poor
communities. Seventeen case studies of locally developed technologies.
The Critical Villager (1993) by Eric Dudley. A look at the cultural aspect of appropriate technology. The author argues that, if
technical aid is to be effective, development workers must give due consideration to local culture and conditions.
HISTORY OF COMPUTING
Doron Swade
The electronic digital computer has emerged as one of the most significant features of late-20th-century technology. The word
`computer' is now universally associated with electronic digital devices of which the desktop personal computer is perhaps the
most common example. But as recently as the 1950s computers were not machines but people who performed calculations.
Some of the finest minds of past centuries have attempted to build calculating devices to relieve humans from the tedium and
difficulty of calculation. An account of these attempts and the development of machines for arithmetic calculation into the
versatile modern electronic computer is a rich and fascinating tale. The following selection captures the major features of the
history and prehistory of computing from the different standpoints of a variety of authors.
Computing before Computers (1990) edited by William. Aspray An authoritative compilation of book chapters covering the
prehistory of computing by five leading computer historians. An accessible account of calculating devices from mechanical
contrivances starting with the abacus and ending with the early electronic calculating machines of the 1950s.
Passages from the Life of a Philosopher (1864) by Charles Babbage. Less about computing than about the views and
recollections of the so-called first pioneer of computing. A highly readable and delightfully mischievous book,
autobiographical in nature, by the beleaguered, controversial designer of vast mechanical calculating engines in the 19th
century.
Irascible Genius: A We of Charles Babbage, Inventor (1964) by Maboth Moseley. Energetic biography of Charles Babbage.
Provides a vivid portrait of Babbage's life and his ultimately doomed efforts to construct mechanical calculating machines.
Charles Babbage and his Calculating Machines (1991) by Doron Swade. Short, nontechnical, and well-illustrated book
written to accompany the Babbage bicentennial exhibition at the Science Museum, London.
Bit by Bit: An Illustrated History of Computers (1985) by Stan Augarten. Arguably the best single-volume history of
computing, starting with the earliest mechanical devices and ending with the early days of the personal-computer revolution.
The Dream Machine: Exploring the Computer Age (1991) by Jon Palfreman and Doron Swade. Popular account of
computing written to accompany a BBC TV series. History and prehistory is used as a context for the modem computer,
especially the personal computer and its emerging multifunctional role.
A Computer Perspective: Background to the Computer Age (1990) by Charles Eames and Ray Eames. Superbly illustrated
time-line history of computing. Essentially a captioned visual history starting with the electromechanical census devices of the
1890s and ending with the electronic devices of the 1940s.
Early British Computers: The Story of Vintage Computers and the People That Built Them (1980) by Simon Lavington. A
short, invaluable account of British pioneering developments in electronic computing during the crucial three decades from the
1930s to the 1950s.
The Origins of Digital Computing (1982) by Brian Randell. Seminal collection of original historic papers in the history of
computing from the mechanical devices of the 19th century to the electronic machines of the 1940s. Some material is
inevitably technical. An essential reference source.
COMPUTING
Jack Schofield
In one sense, computing is just part of the electronics industry. The boom in computers has been produced by the availability of
low-cost integrated circuits - silicon chips - which powered earlier booms in pocket calculators, video-games consoles, and
other consumer products. (That's why it's called Silicon Valley, not Computer Valley.) In another sense, computing is special
because a computer is a tool for processing information. No one finds it threatening that binoculars and telescopes allow us to
see further, or that wheeled and winged vehicles enable us to travel faster. However, the idea that computer `brains' can store
more data and process it faster and more accurately produces all sorts of phobias. But computers are not mysterious. They are
machines, designed by men and manufactured for profit. Understanding the process and its context will help remove any such
fears. That's important, because computing is one of today's biggest industries, and the one on which many of our futures
depend.
Microchip: The Story of a Revolution and the Men who Made It (1985) by T R Reid. The power of the chip industry is
based on one big idea, the Monolithic Idea that you could combine different kinds of components on an integrated circuit. In
the late 1950s, this idea came separately to two men, Robert Noyce and Jack Kilby. Its application launched the Information
Revolution.
The Soul of a New Machine (1982) by Tracy Kidder. A novelistic account of how a new we of computer came together out of
the efforts of hardware designers and software writers. If Kidder had been lucky, the machine would have been a huge success.
As it wasn't, the story now has little historical interest, though it's still the only computer book to have won its author a Pulitzer
Prize.
Father, Son & Co: My Life at IBM and Beyond (1990) by Thomas J Watson Jr and Peter Petre. IBM is by far the world's
largest computer company, and dominated the business for 25 years from 1964. Tom Watson Jr, son of the company's founder,
was the man most responsible.
Innovating for Failure: Government Policy and the Early British Computer Industry (1989) by John Hendry. In the 1940s and
1950s, the British computer industry was at least level with the Americans and miles ahead of the Japanese. at went wrong?
Computer Lib (1987) by Ted Nelson. Nelson understood the microcomputer industry and self-published a book about it in
1974 - which is impressive when you remember the microcomputer wasn't even invented until 1975. At the time it was a
mixture of handbook and religious tract for the freaks and hackers who got the industry rolling. It's still a cult classic.
West of Eden: The End of Innocence at Apple Computer (1989) by Frank Rose. One of the ideas that drives the computer
industry is that a couple of young hackers can start a company in their garage and develop it into a multibillion dollar
international corporation. The two Steves, Jobs and Wosniak, did that at Apple, before losing control of their company ...
Gates (1993) by Stephen Manes and Paul Andrews. In 20 years, Bill Gates went from college dropout to the world's richest
individual: according to Fortune magazine, his personal net worth is about $12.9 billion. The success of Microsoft, Gates's
company, was bound up with the huge success of the personal computer, particularly the IBM PC-compatible, for which
Microsoft supplies most software.
The Cuckoo's Egg (1990) by Clifford Stoll. at starts as an attempt to account for a few cents turns into a hunt for a mystery
hacker and then into international espionage. It sounds like a techno-thriller but it's nothing more than the truth. The book thus
provides more insight into the world of hacking than the many more sensationalized accounts.
Virtual Reality (1988) by Howard Rheingold. A pioneering account of the origins of cyberspace, and where it might take us.
Mind Children: The Future of Robot and Human Intelligence (1988) by Hans Moravec. Moravec, a leading roboticist, thinks
that we may be moving from the biological to the postbiological world, and that our true children may not be flesh and blood
but self-replicating machines.
CYBERSPACE
Wendy M Grossman
Cyberspace is one of the hot topics these days. Most of the books on the market that talk about it are geared towards telling
people how to get on-line and what to do when they get there. Those books are useful, but they're not much fun to read, and
they're not much use as an introduction for people who don't want to go on-line themselves but just want to know what's
happening out there. The books on this list are geared towards the latter type of reader.
Surfing on the Internet (1995) by J C Herz. The ultimate travel guide to cyberspace, whether you want to go there or not. Hen
samples Al sorts of different Internet offerings and reports back with a lot of humour.
The Media Lab (1987) by Stewart Brand. The Media Lab at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology was set up in 1985 to
bring together artists and computer scientists to invent the future of technology. Brand's reporting on the many projects and
thinkers at the lab introduces many of the concepts behind today's new developments.
Cyberia: Life in the Trenches of Hyperspace (1994) by Douglas Rushkoff. The youth culture of today: acid-house rock,
virtual reality, on-line communities, and cyberpunks.
Virtual Reality: Through the New Looking Glass (1993) by Ken Pimentel and Kevin Teixeira. An introduction to the
technology behind virtual reality and what can be done with it.
Great Mambo Chicken and the Transhuman Condition: Science Slightly Over the Edge (1990) by Ed Regis. Not
specifically about cyberspace, but in its entertaining Tom Wolfe style recounting of the further reaches of science it wanders
into the related areas of artificial intelligence and artificial life.
The Hacker Crackdown (1992) by Bruce Sterling. Sterling is best known as a science-fiction writer, but a series of raids in
the US inspired him to write this non-fiction book to explore the extension of law and civil liberties to what he and many others
like to call the Electronic Frontier.
The Cuckoo's Egg (1989) by Clifford Stoll. The more we depend on computer net-works, the more vital it is that they have
adequate security. This is the story of an astronomer turned computer-security specialist who set out to solve the small
accounting problem of a $0.75 discrepancy and wound up helping to trap an international hacker.
Neuromancer (1984) by William Gibson. This science-fiction novel, Gibson's first, is the book that invented the word
`cyberspace'. The story of a data thief and the development of artificial intelligence inside a computer matrix, this book is
somewhat difficult to read; it launched a new type of science fiction, known as `cyberpunk'.
PARANORMAL
Wendy M Grossman
Every year a great tidal wave of books is published that defies everything we know about science on subjects like UFOs,
psychics, faith healing, ghosts, alternative medical treatments, spontaneous human combustion, creationism, astrology, and
even angels. If that weren't bad enough, more books promote pseudoscientific myths that have little basis in fact. The books
below attempt to redress the balance and go a long way to show that truth, in many cases, really is stranger than fiction.
Innumeracy: Mathematical Illiteracy and Its Consequences (1988) by John Allen Paulos. One reason pseudoscience and
paranormal claims seem so convincing is that most people are so innumerate they can't evaluate their likelihood. Paulos shows
you how.
Psychic Investigator (1991) by James Randi. Randi turns his experience of 35 years' worth of paranormal investigation to
explaining psychic phenomena like dowsing, psychometry, and spiritualism. Based on a 1990 television series.
Science: Good, Bad, and Bogus (1981) by Martin Gardner. Martin Gardner was for many years the mathematical-games
columnist for Scientific American; his second passion is debunking improbable claims and bad science.
Sorry, You've Been Duped! (1986) by Melvin Harris. A historian ferrets out the truth behind well-known mysteries such as the
Amityville honor and the Bloxham tapes.
The Mask of Nostradamus (1990) by James Randi. This sceptical biography of the world's most famous prophet unearths
some of the background to his most often quoted prophecies.
The Prevalence of Nonsense (1967) by Ashley Montagu and Edward Darling. An enjoyable and authoritative debunking of
myths and common fallacies.
Pseudoscience and the Paranormal: A Critical Examination of the Evidence (1988) by Terence Hines. A lively and
thoroughly researched introduction to all areas of pseudoscience, in which category Hines includes psychoanalysis.
The Mismeasure of Woman (1992) by Carol Tavris. A brilliant re-analysis of many of the most prevalent myths about
women, many of them due to bad science. Subtitled Why women are not the other sex, the inferior sex, or the opposite sex'.
The Mismeasure of Man (1981) by Stephen Jay Gould. Intelligence testing pervades our education systems and thinking.
Gould investigates the shameful history of intelligence research and its abuse.
High Weirdness by Mail (1988) by Ivan Stang. A book that proves there's nothing so weird that you can't find people who
believe it. A directory of the world's most bizarre mailing lists, with samples of their output.
Media
The products of the media, apparently ephemeral, in fact lodge themselves in the mind. They are. in part, what everybody
knows: they help significantly to form popular consciousness, popular knowledge and belief. Even ten. twenty years later we
can clearly remember, in detail, radio sequences, television images, newspaper cartoons and commentaries. Books, too, are
talismans, though of a slightly different kind. As our punchdrunk century staggers on, they seem to promise reliable solidity;
they are a doorway to the certainties and apparently clearer visions of the past and a guarantee, in the present, that someone
else is with us (an expert, an authoritative voice), that we are not alone. The books on this list discuss the ethics of media
communication, its methods and its power. They concern us all—for we are all listeners, viewers, readers, the validating figures
in the communicative act.
See DIARIES (Fitzgerald); POLITICS (Woodward. B.)
Bailey, Herbert Smith The Art and Science of Book Publishing (1971) it
Excellent American book on the why and how of publishing.
Evans, Harold Pictures on a Page (1978) it Ill* One of a remarkable series of manuals on newspaper production and design,
but of general relevance because of its discussion of the effect of design on meaning. Presentation of news—or manipulation?
The argument begins here. Fascinating commentary on some of the most famous news photographs of the century.
Fisher, John Funny Way to be a Hero (1973) *Iv Marvellous evocations of British radio comedians of the last 50
years, the last great flowering of the music-hall tradition. Routines and gags lovingly reconstructed, but criticism is sharp as
well. Also: Call Them Irreplaceable (on international stars of the century)
King, Cecil The Cecil King Diary, 1965 -1974 (2 vols, 1972-75) *Ite British press baron (he controlled four of the major
national tabloids) walks like a cat amid contemporary great affairs, reflects cattily on personalities and issues. Endearing as the
memoirs of an influential crank; enduring as a picture of the interrelation between politics and the popular press. Should be
read with the memoirs of his (equally forthright) editor-in-chief, Hugh Cudlipp: Publish and Be Damned, and with Richard
Boston: The Press We Deserve.
Merrill, J. C., Bryan, C. R. and Alisky, M. Foreign Press: A Survey of the World's Journalism (1970)
Excellent concise survey of the newspaper publishing industry all over the world. Some knowledge of the American press is
assumed, but the book is so valuable that this should not deter serious students.
Peterson, Theodore Magazines in the Twentieth Century (1964) Scholarly survey not only of many noted magazines per se
but also of the social scene that saw their birth. Sober, but important and useful.
Owners' manuals for laymen on body and mind vary in tone from arcane to simplistic. from the mysterious to the plumber's
guide. The prime qualities of the books on this list are authority, accessibility, and a feeling (elusive to some medical writers,
and to some surgeons and doctors too) that humanity is common to the owner of the body and to the mechanic who maintains
it.
See BIOGRAPHY (Jones, Pickering, Woodham-Smith); DIARIES (Hall); MATHEMATICS (Bernard); PSYCHOLOGY
(Burton); SEX (Breecher. Kinsey. Masters, Peel); SOCIOLOGY (Goff-man, Jacoby)
Boston Women's Health Collective Our Bodies, Ourselves (1972) * Clever, helpful health-guide. Describes symptoms and
treatments in straightforward style; aimed principally at women, but helpful to men. Particularly lucid on childbirth and on
sexuality. Unfrightening: a good book to have in a household with young teenagers.
Dubos, Rene Mirage of Health: Utopias, Progress and Biological Change (1959)
Discusses the social, cultural and environmental factors that have guided humanity's search for health. Lively, sometimes
shocking, look at past and future, makes the point that perfect health and happiness are an unhealthy illusion; unhappily, they
are outside the realm of possibility.
Fuchs, V. R. Who Shall Live? Health, Economics and Social Choice (1975) **
Economist's view of the overwhelming problems facing the American system of health services. Equal access to medical care
does not exist; heredity, environment, money and personal lifestyles influence the quality of care citizens receive. Challenging;
readable; ends with specific recommendations for change.
McNeill, William H. Plagues and Peoples (1977) * Eye-opening account of the importance of disease in explaining many
puzzling events in human history—the conquest of the Aztecs by smallpox not Spaniards, the decline of the Roman Empire
explained by measles.
Smith, Anthony The Body (1968) * Clear, comprehensive: "your body made easy". Smith makes statistics come to life. Also:
The Human Pedigree; Blind White Fish in Persia
Trevor-Roper, Patrick The World through Blunted Sight (1970) This "inquiry into the influence of defective vision on art and
character", by a leading London opthalmologist, is beautifully written and handsomely illustrated. The author's selection of
great artists is discriminating and his language is non-technical.
Veut, Ilza (trans) Huang Ti Nei Ching Suwen (c. 2600 BC)
The Yellow Emperor's Classic of Internal Medicine is the origin of both the concepts of yin and yang and of the science of
acupuncture. Its elegance and imagery make reading it a pleasure: no risk of pins and needles here. Veut's translation is clear
and readable.
S. James Adelstein
S. James Adelstein prepared himself for his career by studying science at M.I.T. and medicine at Harvard. His profession has
developed both educational pursuits, with clinical research in nuclear medicine and scientific research in radiation biophysics.
He has been a member of the Harvard Medical Faculty since 1960 in the Departments of Anatomy, Medicine and Radiology.
Currently, he serves as dean of Academic Programs.
Despite doubters, reading has been a good way to prepare for the last five centuries.
Claude Bernard. An Introduction to the Study of Experimental Medicine (1865). H. C. Greene, trans. New York: Dover, 1957.
(Pb)
For the general reader it marks a watershed in the intellectual history of medicine from an empirical, somewhat mystical
vocation to a profession based on scientific reality and experimentally verifiable phenomena. Personally it provided me with
the conviction, on historical grounds, that medicine is an exciting field for scientific inquiry.
Hans Zinsser. As I Remember Him: The Biography of R. S. Boston: Little, Brown, 1940.
Most embryonic physicians are caught up in the crusades against infectious disease at one time or another (Sinclair Lewis must
have known it when he wrote Arrowsrnith). What a delight to have a sprightly and irreverent biography that deals not only with
an important life in bacteriology and epidemiology but with a broader academic world as well. When I entered Harvard
Medical School, I thought all professors would have the wit of Dr. Zinsser; some did not.
J. Robert Oppenheimer. Science and the Common Understanding. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1954.
The discoveries and applications of physical science have had a profound effect on thought and action in the twentieth century,
but those of us not educated in modern physics have had to rely on others to convey the essence of this intellectual revolution.
Oppenheimer does it very well in this series of Reith Lectures given in 1953: to his explanation he adds considerable
philosophic reflection, of the kind that has made him one of the more enigmatic scientists of our time. A year after these
lectures were published, I temporarily broke off the study of medicine to learn more physics.
Norbert Wiener. The Human Use of Human Beings: Cybernetics and Society (1950). New York: Avon, 1967.
Computers and robotics are now so commonplace that we think of them as standard household and factory items. Along with
technical developments that made them possible there developed a profound theory on information and control. This book is a
milestone in the documentation and translation of that theory for the educated but nonspecialized reader. Professor Wiener was
my instructor in one undergraduate course on mathematics. He made me understand something about mathematical insight: his
book is insightful too.
Eve Curie. Madame Curie (1937). Vincent Sheean, trans. New York: Doubleday, Doran, 1938.
A true scientific heroine. Mme. Curie's struggles, tragedies and triumphs are well known. Her daughter, Eve. tells the story with
sensitivity and the proper attention to detail. From this book I learned much about scientific tutelage, the promise of
radioactivity in the service of medicine and the struggle of women for equality and recognition.
Howard Frazier
For over twenty-five years, Howard Frazier has educated and enthused medical students at the Harvard Medical School. His
subjects include internal medicine and nephrology. In addition, he pursues research issues in personal health care as the director
of the Institute for Health Research at the Harvard School of Public Health. His personal health-care routine includes canoeing
and camping.
Books both reflect and influence how I look at the world; for that reason I have considered a group of books from early in my
life—the decade from age twelve to age twenty-two, when I think I was more open than I am now. I have organized my
comments without going back to these books and astonishing myself with my poor memory. To modify Cromwell: "What you
have is a portrait of me, painted with warts and all." The decade includes my transition from sheltered suburban Chicago, to
enrollment at the University of Chicago at age sixteen, to the South Pacific as an enlisted man in World War II.
Fyodor Dostoevsky. The Brothers Karamazov (1915). Andrew MacAndrew, trans. New York: Bantam, 1981. (Pb)
The Brothers Karamazov was my introduction to rationality gone mad. The Grand Inquisitor and Ivan were characters of a
rational age and were "rational" men. They set my idea of freedom on its head. I remember being impressed with the cleverness
of the Grand Inquisitor's questions, with such plausible arguments for social control. And then, having been led along the
argument to the advantages of not being free, how repugnant I found the conclusion. The Grand Inquisitor led me down to a
stream from which I couldn't drink. But the conclusions I couldn't accept introduced me to the notion that books were
something more than engrossing plots. Thinking sometimes was uncomfortable.
Percy W. Bridgman. The Logic of Modern Physics (1927), New York: AMS Press, 1980.
Bridgman's Logic of Modern Physics whacked me over the head and knocked out many of my preconceptions about science.
Bridgman makes the point that established, codified science depends on well-defined concepts like mass, time and length. But
at its edge, science has concepts that are fuzzy and unreliable, and that to avoid ambiguity and make progress at frontiers,
science must make use of operational definitions. It was my first exposure to the process of science: the gummy, artistic
business of inspired hunches that it really is. He made me more critical of the science I was reading about, more willing to ask
questions for which there weren't any pat answers. The notion that Bridgman's physics—the queen of the empirical sciences—
proceeded by fits and starts, fumbling, making mistakes, backing up, was a very liberating one when I became a laboratory
scientist.
Morris Edmund Speare, ed. The Pocket Book of Verse (1940). New York: Pocket, 1940.
For an enlisted man, The Pocket Book of Verse ideally suited a life that was full of distractions and interruptions. It exposed
me, in small doses, to language. It opened up the power of words other than expletives. It went beyond mere direction to the
discipline of making language express something exactly. It was The Pocket Book that led me to Shakespeare and the Bible, to
language that was lovely, carefully crafted, condensed, precise, masterful.
Henry David Thoreau. Walden (1854). New York: Penguin, 1983. (Pb)
Walden I read later, as I observed my contemporaries rising to what I saw as wealth. It has been important to me. Its message
was to simplify my life, to resist the attractiveness of the dominant cultural objective of pursuing goods, to resist a narrow
definition of fortune. It gave me the courage to do other things and to accept the consequences. The first time, 1 read Walden
against a background of a zillion other books. The second time, I was older, an academic running around with a stethoscope in
my pocket, part of the pack. Now I occasionally urge it on others with the hope it will help to reduce the distractions in their
lives, that it will convince them their lives won't end if they don't own it all.
Emanuel A. Friedman
Emanuel Friedman is Professor of Obstetrics and Gynecology at the Harvard Medical School and a practicing physician at
Beth Israel Hospital in Boston, Massachusetts. Professor Friedman "rose from humble beginnings," he writes, "in the
depression of the 1930s as the son of an impoverished Brooklyn rabbi who sanctioned spirit over ritual, learning for its own
sake, and every man's essential role in providing for his less fortunate neighbor."
Nil sine inagno labore: This erstwhile motto of Brooklyn College, my alma mater, admonishes that we should try to optimize
our natural gifts for personal achievement as well as for the greater good of mankind by applying ourselves with full effort and
enthusiasm.
John F. Fulton. Harvey Cushing: A Biography (1946). Salem, N.H.: Ayer, 1980.
A convincing biography of one of the fathers of modern medical and surgical precepts who strove for perfection in all he did;
his success illustrated the merits of combining focused perseverance with eclectic interests, an example for us all to try to
emulate.
Victor Hugo. Les Miserables (1862). New York: Penguin, 1982. (Pb)
While this thrilling story gripped me in my formative years with its suspense and adventure, it served to convince me that a
worthy cause merited the struggle, win or lose and regardless of the odds.
Charles Darwin. The Origin of Species (1859). New York: Penguin, 1982. (Pb)
Reading this, I first began to appreciate that great visions could be derived from fresh perceptions and perspectives about
commonplace and properly detailed observations.
Charles Dickens. David Copperfield (1850). New York: Advent, 1983. (Pb)
No other book read in my youth gave me the kind of keen insights into the plight of mankind; the pathos of Dickensian London
first awakened my social conscience and the idealistic need to contribute and share.
William Strunk, Jr. and E. B. White. The Elements of Style (1959). New York: Macmillan, 1979. (Pb)
This fabled little guide has served me for decades as an unfailing template for clear communication in both writing and speech,
emphasizing the importance of simplicity and directness.
Stephen J. Gould
Stephen J. Gould is a paleontologist and educator. For seventeen years he has taught geology, biology and the history of
science at Harvard, now as the Alexander Agassiz Professor of Zoology. His popular books and monthly column, "This View of
Life" in Natural History magazine have drawn a new generation to science.
As a kid growing up in New York City, I played stickball and poker instead of doing a lot of reading. I wasn't a nonreader —I
read at an average age and an average rate. The passion for reading came later in college.
Charles Darwin. The Origin of Species (1859). New York: Penguin, 1982. (Pb)
George G. Simpson. The Meaning of Evolution (1949). New Haven: Yale University Press, 1967. (Pb)
Joe Di Maggio. Lucky to Be a Yankee (1946). New York: Grosset & Dunlop, 1951.
George Eliot. Daniel Deronda (1876). New York: New American Library, 1979. (Pb)
Colin McArdle
Colin McArdle is an assistant professor of radiology at the Harvard Medical School and practices medicine at Beth Israel
Hospital in Boston. He was educated in Britain and maintains that he "came over for a year and stayed." He writes that his
education was in no way superior but his accent seems to help in this country.
There is a distinct danger that with every year devoted to the medical profession, a doctor will become less and less literate.
Charles Dickens. Bleak House (1853). New York: Bantam, 1983. (Pb)
I was forced to read this book at the age of fourteen and have never read another Dickens novel since. This is a warning to
overzealous teachers. Fortunately, I was not forced to read Austen or Eliot at this time.
Thomas Pynchon. The Crying of Lot 49 (1966). New York: Bantam, 1968. (Pb)
I was encouraged to read this book by a somewhat pedantic English scholar. It was, he attested, a significant work, a
masterpiece. I struggled through a mishmash of pretentious symbolism and concluded that it was a load of nonsense. It was the
literary equivalent of the emperor's new clothes. At that point, I experienced a great sense of freedom, for previously I had
stood in awe and silence before all those incomprehensible books and films that seemed to flourish in the 1960s and beyond.
Now I was liberated.
P.S. Included in this group are Godard, Resnais, Fowles and many others.
P. G. Wodehouse. Leave It to Psmith (1923). New York: Random House, 1975, (Pb)
The first of many Wodehouse books I read. The earliest books are his best. His somewhat wry and incongruous descriptions are
continuously amusing. I have consciously tried to adapt his techniques to the lectures I give. I am not as successful as he but I
get the occasional laugh.
George Eliot. Middlemarch (1871-72). New York: Bantam, 1985. (Pb)
A magnificent monumental novel—the greatest in the English language. I remember the reluctance with which I put the book
down and the apprehension I felt as I picked it up again as I anticipated some further disaster befalling one of my favored
characters. It may not have altered my life but it certainly enriched it.
George Eliot. The Mill on the Floss (1860). New York: Penguin, 1980. (Pb)
Actually it was a dead heat between this book, the Radiology Journal and Sports Illustrated. The radiology journals I read
because I need to know what is happening in my chosen profession. They consist of usually rather dull treatises which can be
loosely divided into fiction, nonfiction and loosely based on fact. Occasionally, something really exciting appears. A
knowledge of Sports Illustrated allows one to communicate endlessly with other males (except Harvard professors). It is
regarded as trash by most women. The Mill on the Floss gets the nod because of the first book describing Maggie Tulliver's
childhood. Pure magic.
Jane Austen. Pride and Prejudice (1813). Tony Tanner, ed. New York: Penguin, 1972. (Pb)
Any book I have read over seven times must have had some influence, though I am at a loss to think how exactly this has
occurred. It is the most perfectly written book in the English language that I know and Elizabeth Bennet the most perfect
woman against whom all others pale.
Music
Of all the arts, music is one of the most elusive of description. Its "product" is intangible; our response is personal and
sensuous; objectivity (for example, analysis) can hinder as much as enhance our pleasure. All this makes music a challenge for
writers: to express the inexpressible, define the indefinable, distil an essence, is to make the blueprint for a butterfly. Prose-
poetic ramblings have been excluded from this list: the few "aesthetics" books left are outstanding for objective sense, and for
the insight they offer into the creative process. Other, easier areas (history, memoirs, analysis) offer wider choice, and our
selection is based on the interest of a subject, the excellence of its treatment, or usually (and happily) on both.
See AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Shostakovich); DIARIES (Anderson, Wagner); MATHEMATICS (Hofstadter)
Cross, M. and Ewen, D. The Milton Cross Encyclopedia of the Great Composers and their Music (1969)
Programme notes on most of the greatest works of classical music. Handy; readable; stimulating. See Tovey.
Greenfield, Edward (ed) The Penguin Stereo Record Guide (annual) Reviews, alphabetically by composer, of available stereo
recordings. Rosettes indicate quality. Invaluable for record collectors—and engrossing for other music-lovers too.
Harman, A., Metiers, W. and Milner, A. Man and His Music (1969) Good, standard history of music, accessible to the layman
but with sound scholarly pretensions. See Mellers; Robertson.
Hindley, Geoffrey (ed) Larousse Encyclopaedia of Music (1971.) * Superb. Magnificent pictures; well-researched, readable,
thorough text (one volume, too). Steak meal where many encyclopaedias offer only soup.
Hoffnung, Gerard The Hoffnung Symphony Orchestra (1955) Inspired, zany cartoons. If music was never like this, it's
music's loss. Also: The Maestro; The Hoffnung Companion to Music
Hutchings, Arthur The Invention and Composition of Music (1958) P Textbook of harmony, counterpoint and other
compositional techniques. For beginners, one of the clearest and best.
Logan, N. and Woffinden, B. (eds) The Illustrated New Musical Express Encyclopaedia of Rock (1976) fJ a ..1/
Useful collection of rock data. Thoroughly researched information on rock artists; subjective assessment of their work;
informative and entertaining. Updated annually.
Rauchhaupt, Ursula von (ed) The Symphony (1972) * Coffee-table book (size and weight of the average coffee-table).
Pictures superb; text precise and meaty.
Robertson, A. and Stevens, D. (eds) The Pelican History of Music (3 vols. 1962-68) a
Short books with necessarily compressed judgements, and the usual shortcomings of an over-general approach. Covers earliest
times to 1920 in 600 pages.
White, Eric W. Stravinsky: The Composer and His Works (1966) 0* -f Admirable clarity; exhaustive thoroughness; elegant,
clear style. Superb. Also: Benjamin Britten: His Life and Operas. See Stravinsky.
CLASSICAL MUSIC
The 18th-century musician was taught to see the whole of musical history
as a hill rising gently and undulatingly out of the darkness, with the
music of his own time standing on the sunlit summit: the modern
musician is encouraged to view it as a rather alarming slope, studded like
Easter Island with titanic heads, far larger than life. And he may even
have an uneasy suspicion that the slope is a downward one.
THURSTON DART
A Dictionary of Early Music (1981) by Jerome Roche and Elizabeth Roche. Thumbnail information on all the main
composers, repertories, instruments and concepts in music down to the time of Monteverdi. This is an excellent and
authoritative summary.
Western Plainchant: A Handbook (1993) by David Hiley. A comprehensive orientation to the state of research on the
melodies of the Catholic church, a repertory that formed the basic musical training of all composers before the Reformation
and continued to have a massive impact on composers until the 19th century.
Music in Medieval Europe (1989) by Jeremy Yudkin. Takes the story up to about 1400 with clear and engaging explanations
and copious musical examples.
Studies in Medieval and Renaissance Music (1950) by Manfred F Bukofzer. This remains one of the most gripping books for
the general reader who wants a glimpse at how a musical historian goes to work on early materials. Mainly concerned with the
15th century.
The Rise of European Music, 1380-1500 (1993) by Reinhard Strohm. An extended panoramic view of how these central
years are seen today, bursting with original and controversial insights.
Music in the Renaissance (1976) by Howard Mayer Brown. An elegant bird's-eye summary of music from 1420 to 1600, with
its focus on the main composers and their work.
Music in the Seventeenth Century (1987) by Lorenzo Bianconi. Perhaps the clearest and most incisive recent survey of
music in the years from the beginnings of opera to the time of Corelli.
The Interpretation of Music (1954) by Thurston Dart .Though old and occasion-ally eccentric, this is a glitteringly brilliant
introduction to the performer's problem in music down to the Baroque era.
Authenticity in Early Music (1988) edited by Nicholas Kenyon. Essays that explore the problems of historical performance as
seen today. After its publication nobody dared use the word `authenticity' again, and performers were much more cautious in
their claims of historical correctness.
Early Recordings and Musical Style (1992) by Robert Philip. By exploring the earliest recorded performances, Philip draws
attention to the many aesthetic changes within the last century, to musical styles that would not now be acceptable in any
circumstances, and to how difficult it would be to reconstruct the sounds of the early 20th century if no recordings had
survived. It is a solemn lesson to those attempting to recover the sounds of the 18th century and earlier.
BAROQUE MUSIC
David Maw
The word `baroque' comes from the Portuguese barroco for a pearl of irregular or bulbous shape. It found its way into critical
writing during the middle part of the 18th century, when it was used with a pejorative connotation; thus 'A baroque music is
that in which the harmony is confused, charged with modulations and dissonances, the melody is harsh and little natural, the
intonation difficult, and the movement constrained' (Jean Jacques Rousseau, Dictionnaire de musique). In modem times, the
word has been used to refer to music of the period 1600-1750, irrespective of its ornateness or frowardness; what the general
characteristics of the style are is still an open question. During the period, important developments were made in opera and
instrumental music (the virtuosity attained in violin and keyboard repertories being noteworthy); and elaborate theories were
formulated about the conveyance of the affections through music.
Music hath two ends, first to please the sense, and that is done by the pure
dulcor of harmony ... and secondly to move the affections or excite passion. And that is done with measures of time joined
with the former. And it must be granted that pure impulse artificially acted and continued hath great power to excite men to act
but not to think ... The melody is only to add to the diversion.
ROGER NORTH
Music in the Baroque Era (1947) by Manfred Bukofzer. Though now old, this stately tome is still the best account of the
developments in musical style during the period.
Source Readings in Music History: The Baroque Era (1950) selected and annotated by Oliver Strunk. A selection of
passages from contemporary writers is here presented in excellent translations. The topics covered are: the stile
rappresentativo, musical practice, operatic rivalries and criticism, and developments in musical theory.
Monteverdi (1962) by Denis Arnold. This is a vivaciously written account of the composer's life and work. Denis Arnold was
the foremost scholar of 16th- and 17th-century Venetian music, and in this book he used his extensive knowledge to good effect
in explaining Monteverdi's pivotal position between Renaissance and Baroque styles.
The Purcell Companion (1995) edited by Michael Burden. An excellent collection of essays concerning many different
aspects of the composer and his music, published to coincide with the tercentenary of his death.
Couperin (1982) by David Turley. A brief and intelligent study of the most eminent composer of the French Baroque.
Vivaldi (1978) by Michael Talbot. Vivaldi deserves to be better known for pieces other than the Four Seasons: Michael Talbot's
book explains why.
Rameau (1968) by Cuthbert Girdlestone. This is the classic work on one of the most characteristic and controversial musicians
working in 18th-century France. In addition to his major contributions to musical theory, Rameau was a composer of
considerable accomplishment.
Scarlatti (1953) by Ralph Kirkpatrick. This elegantly written book covers every aspect of Scarlatti's life and work and also
contains much interesting information about the performance of his 555 keyboard sonatas.
Handel (1994) by Donald Burrows. Handel's was a varied life, often very much at the heart of society. Donald Burrows
presents a balanced picture of the man, his context and work, righting the lopsided impressions that have arisen.
Bach (1983) by Malcolm Boyd. This is a remarkable book, conveying a considerable breadth and depth of insight within
relatively few pages. Of course, the subject matter warrants nothing less.
CLASSICAL MUSIC
David Maw
There is more general acceptance for the notion of a classical style in music - being that of Haydn, Mozart, and Beethoven,
according to Rosen's contention - than for a classical period. In so far as the latter has any validity, then it is to designate the
years 1750-1820; but really the phenomenon is more localized than a simple temporal segment would suggest. The style is
characterized by the formal conventions of the `sonata principle', which are the stock in trade of sonatas, symphonies,
concertos, string quartets, and operatic set pieces; these being the genres principally cultivated. The term `classical' is justified
both by the universality of these formal characteristics, and on account of the balance that they effect between the various
elements of music; it has nothing at all to do with a recrudescence of antique values.
The Classical Style (1976) by Charles Rosen. The definitive exposition of this subject.
Source Readings in Music History: The Classic Era (1950) selected and annotated by Oliver Strunk. An anthology of
passages from contemporary writers concerning changes in musical practice, operatic rivalry and criticism, and the musical life
of Europe.
The String Quartet (1983) by Paul Griffiths. The string quartet was one of the most significant developments of the 18th
century. Paul Griffiths tells its story right up to the present day, cunningly structuring his book in the form of the music.
The Piano: A History (1976) by Cyril Ehrlich. The invention and development of the piano had a more significant impact
upon the nature of musical thought than did any other technological innovations before the production of sound by electronic
means. Cyril Ehrlich is one of the most eminent socioeconomic historians of music, and his book a classic.
C P E Bach Studies (1988) edited by Stephen L Clark. J S Bach's second son was one of the most unusual and influential of
the composers who effected the transition between Baroque and classical modes of musical thought. This collection of essays
(some rather technical) affords insights into many areas of a composer who merits greater attention.
Haydn, his Life and Music (1988) by H C Robbins Landon and David Wyn Jones. This is an excellent survey of a long and
productive life with much relevant back-ground material on the composer's artistic and cultural surroundings.
The Mozart Companion (1956) edited by H C Robbins Landon and Donald Mitchell. For a composer as multifaceted and oft
written about as Mozart, the best introduction is a collection of essays by various authors. The full range of his output is
covered here by writers as distinguished as Friedrich Blume, Arthur Hutchings, Hans Keller, and the editors themselves.
Beethoven (1985) by Denis Matthews. The author maintains an admirable distance on the life and the work, where these are
elsewhere so often mythologized; but he conveys also the enthusiasm and awe that so monumental a subject requires.
Schubert (1987) by John Reed. This is a good introduction to a composer who was caught between Classicism and
Romanticism but properly belonged to neither.
ROMANTIC MUSIC
David Maw
The word Romantik entered the common currency of the German language after its use by E T A Hoffman in an essay on
Beethoven's instrumental music, written in 1813. This owes more to Hoffman than to Beethoven, and it would be wrong to
con-fuse the novel forms of Beethoven's later music, impelled by a complete fidelity to his material, with the formal vagaries of
subsequent music, where expressive caprice was the guiding light. Romanticism can be dated, then, from around 1820; many
of its traits lingered on well into the 20th century. While music was generally regarded in the 19th century as the highest art
form, it frequently looked to literature and the fine arts for inspiration: symphonic poems, songs without words, nocturnes,
evocations, fantasies, rhapsodies, and countless other pieces of a fanciful inclination were among the most experimental and
typical genres cultivated. Yet, even where the form was ostensibly abstract - in symphonies, concertos, and sonatas - there was
a strong suggestion that it was being narrated by the material, rather than emerging inexorably from it.
It is the art of music which most completely realizes this artistic ideal,
this perfect identification of matter and form. In its consummate moments,
the end is not distinct from the means, the form from the matter, the
subject from the expression; they inhere in and completely saturate
each other; and to it, therefore, to the condition of its perfect moments,
all the arts may be supposed constantly to tend and aspire.
WALTER PATER
Romantic Music (1984) by Leon Plantings. A highly readable introduction to the ideas and styles of music in the 19th century.
Source Readings in Music History, the Romantic Era (1950) selected and annotated by Oliver Strunk. This is an invaluable
collection of excerptions presenting the literary background to romanticism and the writings of composer-critics of the period
(Carl von Weber, Hector Berlioz, Robert Schumann, Franz Liszt, and Richard Waver).
The Memoirs of Hector Berlioz (1969) translated and edited by David Cairns. Berlioz was no less significant as a literary
figure than as a musical one. His memoirs are a compelling read, telling of his upbringing and education, literary and musical
passions, amorous adventures, travels, life as a critic, and progress towards compositional success. David Cairn's translation is
excellent.
Berlioz (1982) by Hugh Macdonald. A considered appraisal of the man and his music by the most eminent scholar of the
subject.
The Cambridge Companion to Chopin (1992) edited by Jim Samson. It is a paradox that Chopin's music should be so
classical in technique, given its highly romantic sound. This excellent collection of essays helps to explain why this is so,
setting the music in the context of its influences, borrowed and bequeathed. One or two of the essays may be slightly too
technical for the general reader; but most are quite approachable.
Schumann and his World (1994) edited by R Larry Todd. Many minds come together here to consider the enigmatic work,
elusive personality, and turbid milieu of one of the 19th century's most characteristic composers.
Liszt (1990) by Derek Watson. Liszt's flamboyant personality and the legends that accrued around it have for a long time
hindered evaluation of the compositional legacy. Derek Watson's excellent study rectifies this with a clear-sighted account of an
oeuvre that is often masterly and frequently innovative.
The Wagner Compendium, a Guide to Wagner's Life and Music (1992) edited by Barry Millington. To encompass Wagner
in a single volume is an impossibility; I suspect that Barry Millington's compendium comes as close to achieving this
unfeasible task as can be reached.
Brahms (1990) by Malcolm Macdonald. Brahms rued his having been born `too late'; the figure of Beethoven was a blessing
and a bane to him. Malcolm Macdonald's is a careful study of a scrupulous and complicated artist.
Tchaikovsky (1973) by Edward Garden. No account of Tchaikovsky could satisfactorily separate the life and the work; so
Edward Garden integrated the two in a very sensitive evaluation.
20TH-CENTURY MUSIC
Paul Griffiths
Two themes stand out in the history of Western music in the 20th century: change and accumulation. Instances of the first
include, in the early part of the century, Schoenberg's break with tonal harmony and Stravinsky's renewal of rhythmic pulse;
and the growing power of electronic technology, particularly since the World War II, has altered how music is composed,
performed, and heard. at Western classical music has simultaneously accumulated has been a deeper awareness not only of its
own past but of traditions outside itself, including especially the many musical cultures of Asia. Western composers in 1900
were working within a tradition that was essendally Germanic and that extended back no more than 150 years or so. Their
colleagues now survey many centuries, and the world.
You cannot tell where music is going any more than you can tell
where people are going. Each time creates its own needs.
IGOR STRAVINSKY
Modern Music: A Concise History (1994) by Paul Griffiths. A general introduction to the modern age in Western music, from
Claude Debussy to the present. The next step would be to move to the following three volumes, which divide up the period,
and which need some acquaintance with musical notation.
Music in Transition (1977) by Jim Samson. A study of the first two decades of the century, and in particular of the breakdown
of tonal harmony, as it occurred in the music of Arnold Schoenberg, Alexander Sabin, and others.
Music Since the First World War (1977) by Arnold Whittall. This is an excellent, companionable read; Whittall shows wide
sympathies in considering how composers dealt with broadening musical possibilities.
Modern Music and After (1995) by Paul Griffiths. This book works from the detonation of radical change that came in the
late 1940s Gohn Cage, Pierre Boulez, electronic music) to the exuberant confusion of music in the 1990s.
Stravinsky in Pictures and Documents (1978) by Vera Stravinsky and Robert Craft. From the time of The Firebird (1910) to
his death (1971), Stravinsky was the dominant musical force by virtue of his influence and prestige, not to mention the variety
and brilliance of his achievement. This compendium is full of tang, colour and insight, despite its other, quite un-Stravinskian,
quality of disorder.
The Music of Stravinsky (1988) by Stephen Walsh. For a more consistent view of Stravinsky's output - and also a lively one -
this is the best choice. The author has been working on a major biography of the composer.
Schoenberg (1975) by Charles Rosen. There should be more books like this: a concise introduction, steered, by the author's
intelligence, between reverence and scepticism, and requiring from the reader nothing but curiosity.
Silence (1961) by John Cage. A classic collection of essays by the man who persuaded us that music is not an art, still less a
means of communication, but an attitude of mind, a way of being attuned, even to silence.
JAZZ
Miles Kington
A year or two back I did a book for HarperCollins called The jazz Anthology which, if I did again now, I'd call A Jazz
Anthology, but I wouldn't change a lot else; it's still quite a good sampler. In the introduction I see I wrote that most writing on
jazz is not very good (including almost all the novels and poetry ever written on the subject) and I stick to that now. The best of
it tends to be anecdotal, like the best conversation of jazz musicians, which explains this selection. The best musical history of
jazz is not yet finished - Gunther Schuller has written the first two volumes and has got up to about 1940.
Most of the people who have any respect for jazz in this country
are those who can make a buck out of it.
BILLIE HOLIDAY
We Called It Music (1992) by Eddie Condon. Condon embraced jazz, the guitar, and the bottle during the Prohibition years.
He wasn't a great guitarist but he was a wonderful storyteller and this is the most funny, colourful, prejudiced account of jazz
between the wars ever written. Sample phrase: `I arrived at the club in a perfect state of equilibrium - half man, half whisky.'
Raise Up Off Me (1979) by Hampton Hawes. Miles Davis's autobiography is commonly thought to be the toughest, frankest
book by a modern black musician about drugs, racism, Charlie Parker, and so on. It isn't, though it's good. This is.
The McJazz Manuscripts (1979) by Sandy Brown. Sandy Brown was a wonderful Scots clarinettist who learned to play at the
sort of Edinburgh clubs where Sean Connery learned to be a teenage bouncer. He later became a genius of an acoustic architect
and a damned good writer; this book contains all the writings he left behind, including an unfinished autobiography.
Close Enough for Jazz (1983) by Mike Zwerin. Zwerin played trombone with Miles Davis in 1949 and never played with
anyone as good again, but he did become the resident jazz writer on the International Herald Tribune (in Paris), where he still
is, and, in my opinion, is the best jazz writer alive today. This is his odd, freewheeling life story, which takes in everything
from playing on tours in Russia to inheriting a steel company he didn't want. (He has also translated a book by the wonderful
French writer Boris Vim and written a sombre history of jazz under the Nazis.)
Jazz Anecdotes (1993) edited by Bill Crow. The best collection of (genuine) jazz anecdotes ever printed. Bill Crow is a
musician himself (very good bass player) and knows how to get, and tell, a story from other players.
Mama Said There'd Be Days Like This (1991) by Val Wilmer. Val Wilmer is the complete opposite of the jazz stereotype.
Typically, a jazz person is American, black, male, and heterosexual. Wilmer is English, white, female, and lesbian. She is also
one of the best photographers and writers ever to fall in love with jazz, and has got closer inside black culture than most white
people ever get.
POP MUSIC
Charles Shaar Murray
Pop provides one of the broadest cultural umbrellas which the 20th century has to offer: sheltering beneath it can be found such
wildly dissimilar flora and fauna as Bing Crosby and Howlin' Wolf, Gracie Fields and Madonna, Barry Manilow and Ice-. T,
the Bay City Rollers and the Butthole Surfers. By the same token, pop books come in a bewildering variety of flavours and
weights, as well as shapes and sizes. They range from potboiling biographies to train spotter's guides; from addled memoirs to
academic tracts; from dryly fact-packed laundry listings to airily free-flying theory; from solemn social and cultural history to
scabrously bawdy anecdote; from the most impenetrably parochial of subcultures to the most all-encompassingly ubiquitous
manifestations of the international mass market. Pop means an infinite number of things to an infinite number of people, and
the sheer diversity of the field has been well served by its equally diverse chroniclers.
Rock and roll is the most brutal, ugly, vicious form of expression - sly,
lewd, in plain fact, dirty ... rancid-smelling, aphrodisiac ... the
martial music of every delinquent on the face of the earth.
Fxalvx SINATxA
The Faber Book of Pop (1995) by Hanif Kureishi and Jon Savage. With an 800-page celebration of precisely that diversity
covering the full half-century and drawing on contributions from (among hundreds of others) Malcolm X, Angela Carter,
Hunter S Thompson, Greil Marcus, Nik Cohn, Iggy Pop, Andy Warhol, Lester Bangs, Colin Machines, and Paul Johnson,
Kureishi and Savage cater for every conceivable taste and interest, delivering as sumptuous a smorgasbord of pop-culch text
bites as anyone has ever served up between a single pair of covers.
AwopBopALooBop ALopBamBoom: Pop from the Beginning (1969) by Nik Cohn. Inaccurate, opinionated, shamelessly
unfair, and unashamedly biased, this is the best and most influential book about pop music ever written by an Englishman.
Barbecuing every sacred cow he could and - he was the first pop critic to damn the Beatles' Sgt Pepper's Lonely Hearts Club
Band as the emperor's psychedelic new clothes - Cohn wrote this book as a funeral oration for the corpse of pop at the end of
the 1960s, a time when the Flash McTra., aesthetic he adored had been seemingly subsumed beneath a welter of solemnity and
pretension. This eulogy for superpop is the most relentlessly quotable pop book ever written: Cohn's coining of the term
`boring old fart' is almost the least of his achievements.
Mystery Train (1975) by Greil Marcus. Modem rock criticism starts here. Marcus was unravelling the subtexts of pop before
most of his peers even knew what a subtext was, and these essays - on Robert Johnson, Sly Stone, Randy Newman, Elvis
Presley, and the Band - address the expression, in popular music, of the classic themes of American literature, providing both
cross-disciplinary continuity and a signpost towards new ways of listening.
Hellfire: The Jerry Lee Lewis Story (1982) by Nick Tosches. The most audacious, imaginative, and unorthodox rock
biography ever written: an intoxicating, magic-realist account of the life and times of a white 1950s rocker more radical and
challenging than Presley could ever have dreamed of being, who straddled the implicit contradictions of who he was and what
he did until they tore him apart.
Revolution in the Head: The Beatles' Music and the Sixties (1995) by Ian MacDonald. A virtuoso example of just how
scholarly pop criticism can get, and also of how spectacularly this approach can pay off when it's done properly. MacDonald -
the author, incidentally, of a rather good book about Shostakovich - analyses each and every Beatles song in order of recording
and in doing so Links the band's rise and fall with that of the Sixties Dream.
Psychotic Reactions and Carburettor Dung (1988) by Lester Bangs. The late Lester Bangs took the 1960s notion of `new
journalism' as far as anyone who ever wrote about popular music: he was pop's Tom Wolfe, Hunter Thompson, and Norman
Mailer all stuffed into the same battered black leather jacket. This collection of a decade and a half's demented scribblings - on
Kraftwerk, John Coltrane, the Clash, Elvis Presley, and his personal hero and bete noir, Lou Reed - is the most highly charged
and deeply committed writing about pop available anywhere. For Bangs the music he wrote about was a matter of life and
death, and it shows. Includes his famous essay James Taylor - Marked for Death.
The History of the Blues (1995) by Francis Davis. A huge story, intelligently told; Davis succeeds in his gargantuan task not
least because he knows what to leave out. Witty, perceptive, compassionate, and incisive, this self-proclaimed 'pop critic's
history of the blues' is the finest single-volume introduction to pop's primal root music that any general reader could desire.
The Death of Rhythm and Blues (1988) by Nelson George. Whites - specifically, white males - have traditionally enjoyed a
near monopoly on the analysis of popular music, even though the bulk of the music worth writing about has been black. Here
Nelson George, the doyen of African-American pop commentators, redresses the balance (partially, anyway) and tells you what
the white boys can't: that the great black music upon which modern notions of pop is founded thrived under segregation and
lost much of its impetus and identity in the wake of the civil-rights movement, and that white patronage of the music and its
makers has proved a far from unmixed blessing.
The Ice Opinion (1994) by Ice-T and Heidi Siegmund. Rap is the most word-intensive form of pop since the mid-1960s
heyday of Bob Dylan (whose `Subterranean Homesick Blues' is itself one of rap's ancestor records), and therefore it's not
surprising that rap's most prominent standard-bearer has a lot to say for himself, albeit with the aid of a ghostwriter. The
chapters on race relations and the social origins of gang culture are fascinating and the chapters on sex rather less so, but the
material on his famous conflict with Time Warner over his `Cop Killer' song provides a unique account of a classic music-biz
confrontation between a street hustler with a story to tell and a megacorporation with assets to protect.
The Sex Revolts (1995) by Simon Reynolds and Joy Press. The best and most ambitious of the current crop of books dealing
with pop's gender agenda, this transcends the narrow confines of the women-in-rock debate to examine what pop's treatment of
sexuality is actually telling us. Sometimes irritatingly rock-centric (black music scarcely gets a look in), it's nevertheless
challenging, well argued, and innovative.
DANCE
Susanne Lahusen
Recent dance literature has expanded far beyond biography and technical manuals. Writers have looked at dance from all
imaginable angles: dance as a form of communication, dance in its social, political, and cultural contexts, dance in education
and therapy. The books here chosen range from general histories of both Western and non-Western traditions in stage and social
drama, to biographical accounts and inspirational texts for the teacher and participant.
The History of Dance (1981) by Mary Clarke and Clement Crisp. A comprehensive history, covering more than 2,000 years
and crossing many cultural boundaries, that illustrates how dance has always played an important role in every society.
Ballet and Modern Dance (1988) by Susan Au. A concise and lucid text, vividly describing the great performers and
performances of the past, as well as exploring today's Western theatre dance.
Time and the Dancing Image (1988) by Deborah Jowitt. A fascinating account of how European and American theatrical
dance has evolved in its social and cultural settings during the last two centuries.
Let's Dance: Social, Ballroom and Folk Dancing (1978) by Peter Buckman. Amusing anecdotes, lively descriptions, a useful
glossary - a superbly illustrated compendium of social, ballroom and folk dancing.
Rhythm in Joy: Classical Indian Dance Traditions (1987) by Leela Samson. An introduction to the variety and richness of
five of India's classical dance forms.
The Black Tradition in American Dance (1989) by Richard Long. A beautifully illustrated book which looks at the African-
American contribution to social and theatre dance from the early minstrels to the Dance Theatre of Harlem.
The World of Diaghilev (1971) by John Percival. A book on the great impresario who had become the focal point for many
leading artists of the early 20th century.
Martha, the Life and Work of Martha Graham (1991) by Agnes De Milk. Probably the most interesting of the numerous
biographies of the famous modem dancer and choreographer, and an insider's view of the American modem-dance scene.
In Touch with Dance (1993) by Marion Gough. A stimulating book encouraging teachers to make the dance lesson a dynamic
and highly creative experience for young people.
A major step in the evolution of rational from instinctive man is the development of myth, a "story- which enables him to give
formal shape to his experience of the inexplicable and thus, if not to control it, at least to contain it within a framework of
experience, of rationality, of precedent. Indeed, by altering and delimiting its myths, a society develops its relationship with the
world beyond its reasoning. For the modern reader, myth thus offers a series of parables for his own experience, case studies as
it were of the human mind grappling with religious, moral and ethical dilemmas. The study of myths is, at the objective level, a
kind of philosophical anthropology; at a subjective level, it shades into philosophy itself. Thus the stories (often engrossing and
delightful in themselves, not the least of their attractions) are charged with self-renewing relevance (compare Freud's use of
Oedipus), with an urgency of meaning which both informs and universalizes their local particularity. The books on this list
gather (and sometimes interpret) myths from many areas of the world; taken together, they give a picture of the developing
consciousness of man at large.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Dodds, Malinowski); CHILDREN'S BOOKS (Anderson, Kingsley, Lang, Lines, Perrault); DRAMA
(Aeschylus, Euripides); FICTION/SHORT STORIES (Grimm); HISTORY/AMERICAN (Slotkin); POETRY (Homer);
REFERENCE (Opie); RELIGION (Bible); SEX (Duffy)
Clark, Anne Beast and Bawdy (1975) fi -if A lovely witty book on mythological beasts from the Middle Ages: dragons,
hippogriffs, unicorns, hairy hippopotami, and "men whose heads do grow beneath their shoulders". What a Rabelaisian crew
they were!
Traditional, Hungarian.
Folktales of Hungary. Rec: Ward
Gardner, John (trans) The Complete Works of the Gawain Poet (1965) "Sir Gawain and the Green Knight," "The Pearl" and
other minor works of the poet known only as "the Gawain poet," in a fine modern translation. Geoffrey of Monmouth History
of the Kings of Britain(c. 1130) Geoffrey purports to give an account of "the kings who dwelt in Britain before the incarnation
of Christ" and especially of "Arthur and the many others who succeeded him after the incarnation". He was an unscrupulous
liar and forger, but his accounts of the early myths of England, from its colonization by Brutus through Lear to Arthur, are
charming and seminal. See Gardner; Malory; CHILDREN'S BOOKS (White)
Gray, John Near Eastern Mythology (1969) 0 Useful illustrated survey. Avoids interpretation and is thin on quotation, but the
facts are excellently covered. See Hooke.
Harrison, Jane Prolegomena to the Study of Greek Religion (1903) 2* Now something of a curiosity, a great Cambridge
scholar's imaginative reading of neglected data of pre-Olympian Greek religion and myth gave rise to a new approach, less
pious and more generous, to the whole field of ancient studies. Also: Thetnis. See Kerenyi; Kirk; ANTHROPOLOGY (Dodds)
Kirk, G. S. Myth: Its Meaning and Functions in Ancient and Other Cultures ( 1970) LO P
Critical examination of the theories of Levi-Strauss (qv) in particular; though coloured by his views, an important and useful
book for readers wishing to understand the anthropological sources of the myths of the ancient Near East and Greece. Also:
The Nature of Greek Myths. See Harrison; Hooke; Slater; ANTHROPOLOGY (Dodds); PHILOSOPHY
Mitchison, Naomi The Corn King and the Spring Queen (1931)
An extraordinary novel about a ritual king and queen from the outer reaches of the Black Sea area who journey to Rome in the
era of the Gracchi and become caught up in the "real" (as opposed to "mythical") events of Roman history.
MYTHOLOGY
Roy Willis
Although competing theories of myth abound, no single explanation has yet received unanimous scientific endorsement.
Probably most of the theories have some truth in them, and the suggested readings represent some of the more significant
recent attempts at solving the mystery of why ancient mythical tales continue to fascinate the modem mind.
The Inner Reaches of Outer Space (1988) by Joseph Campbell. The best-known modern exponent of the meaning of myth
argues for the relevance of mythology to the predicament of present-day humankind.
The Sacred Narrative: Readings in the Theory of Myth (1984) edited by Alan Dundes. Wide-ranging survey of theories of
myth by experts from different scholarly fields.
The Golden Bough (1890-1915) by James George Frazer. There are several abridged editions of the classic study by the late-
Victorian scholar of the widely occur-ring theme of the Dying King and his ritual sacrifice.
The Myth of the Eternal Return (1949) by Mircea Eliade. This persuasive study sees myths as windows to an underlying
sacred and spiritual reality.
Psychological Reflections (1953) by Carl Jung. A master of psychoanalysis explains the heroes and heroines of myth as
embodiments of 'archetypes', or permanent under-lying features of the human mind.
Myth and Meaning (1979) by Claude Levi-Strauss. A lucid summary of this famous French anthropologist's view of myth as
embodying the basic processes of human thought.
Magic, Science and Religion (1948) by Bronislaw Malinowski. Influential account of primitive myths as `charters' for
existing social orders, written by the founding father of modem anthropology.
MYTHOLOGIES
Roy Willis
The 20th century has seen a growing scholarly and popular respect for the wisdom enshrined in the many and varied
mythological traditions belonging to the human heritage worldwide. Some of these, like the brilliant mythologies of the eastern
Mediterranean, sprang from civilizations long extinct; while others, including those studied by anthropologists working with
tribal cultures in Africa, Australia, and the Americas, remain local sources of inspiration and guidance to this day. The
following works exemplify something of the rich variety available.
African Mythology (1963) by Geoffrey Parrinder. Readable, well-illustrated introduction to the main mythical themes of black
Africa.
Classical Hindu Mythology (1978) by Comelia Dimmitt and J A B van Buitenen. A selection of texts from one of the richest
mythical traditions in the world.
Art and Myth in Ancient Greece (1991) by T H Carpenter. Draws on ancient Greek an to add new meaning to some of the
central stories of the classical tradition.
Kingdoms of Jade, Kingdoms of Gold (1991) by Brian Fagan. Lively presentation of mythical themes from the complex
civilizations of pre-Columbian Central America.
Polynesian Mythology (1965) by George Grey. Ancient myths from the island peoples of the Pacific.
Celtic Mythology (1970) by Proinsias MacCana. The vivid mythical imagination of the ancient Celts is brought to life in this
scholarly and readable collection.
Gods and Myths in Northern Europe (1964) by Hilda Davidson. The mythical tales of the Nordic peoples, replete with the
doings and epic conflicts of gods, goddesses, and monsters.
Middle Eastern Mythology (1963) by S H Hooke. An authoritative account of the mythical themes that arose in the great
civilizations of the ancient Middle East.
Natural History
The science of life has always had wide general appeal. On the one hand it offers the observer examples of miraculous
engineering, self-generating and evolving mechanisms of the rarest ingenuity and beauty. On the other, because it concerns the
mysterious life-force itself, it leads to elaborate and intriguing philosophical speculation: far more than rocks or stars, the
existence of animate nature raises questions about creation, evolution and the meaning of consciousness which each new theory
or discovery, from the evolution of species to genetics, seems to open up to wider speculation rather than to answer.
Observation and speculation are kept in balance in the books on this list—and they also offer passion, a sense of wonder, and
not least the satisfying beauty of the subject matter: nowadays photography is as much a medium for the natural scientist as the
written word.
See ARCHAEOLOGY (Ucko): AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Gosse); GEOGRAPHY (Carson); HOME (Bray, Grieve);
MATHEMATICS (Bronowski, Calvin. Thompson, Watson); MEDICINE (Thomas): RELIGION (Teilhard de Chardin);
TRAVEL (Muir)
Desmond, Adrian J. The Hot-blooded Dinosaurs (1975) A Were the dinosaurs cold-blooded, pea-brained lizards—or hot-
blooded protomammals? Revolutionary, influential and enjoyable study of a major new turn in palaeontology.
Elton, Charles Animal Ecology (1927) 09 On first appearance a pioneering work for zoology, then dominated by the
study of anatomy. Explains why animals live where they do and describes their strategies for survival. Also: The Pattern of
Animal Comm unities; The Ecology of Invasions by Animals and Plants
Gray, Sir James Animal Locomotion (1968) f Enlarged version of author's earlier How Animals Move; an elegant
combination of physics and biology, in lucid, non-specialist terms.
Hoelldobler, Bert and Edward O. Wilson, German and American, 1936- and 1929-.
(See also Wilson, Edward O.)
The Ants. Rec: ML Nonfiction
Holden, Edith The Country Diary of an Edwardian Lady (1977) i .1 Remarkable illustrated diary of Edith Holden, written in
1906 but not published until the 1970s. Like her 18th-century predecessor White (qv), she records the natural history of the
seasons with eyes and ears alert to every change. Hubbard, C. E. Grasses (1968)
Beautifully illustrated catalogue; limited in scope to Europe, but a model of its kind.
Hudson, W. H. Birds in Town and Village (1919) P South-American-born poet-naturalist arrived in England in 1860 and
revelled in all he saw around him. Book contains a bitter-sweet essay berating fashionable women for wearing bird feathers.
Sensitive; unsentimental; fascinating. Also: Birds and Man; The Naturalist in La Plata. See AUTOBIOGRAPHY
Huth, Hans Nature and the American: Three Centuries of Changing Attitudes (1957) 41:
Pioneer history of the conservation movement in America, highlighting the link between natural history and natural resources.
Mountfort, S. Wild Paradise: The Story of the Coto Donana Expeditions (1958)
Portrait of the unspoilt wilderness of southern Spain and its varied wildlife. Vivid descriptions of migratory wildfowl.
Are we alone? Whatever we may think of the underlying premises of this study, these books offer serious and intellectually
responsible examinations of the "evidence". Treading delicately on the borderline between objective and subjective, fact and
fiction, rarely letting "I wish it were" shade into "It must be so", they may not give definitive answers; but certainly (whether
you regard the subject as an examination of actual phenomena or as a bypath of the human mind at its most darkly and
fantastically ingenious) they leave the right questions posed, and poised.
See HISTORY/EUROPEAN (Cohn); MATHEMATICS (Lindsay); RELIGION (Hick)
Bennett, Ernest Apparitions and Haunted Houses (1939)
Classic study of the evidence for all kindsof ghosts and hauntings, plausibly authenticated.
LeShan, Lawrence The Medium. the Mystic and the Physicist (1966) a*
LeShan is a scientist who began as a sceptic, but slowly became convinced of the reality of "paranormal phenomena"—and that
they are related to the "underlying reality"• glimpsed by mystics. Outstanding, especially if approached with scepticism.
Prince, Walter Franklin (ed) Noted Witnesses for Psychic Occurrences (1928) a*
Absorbing anthology of strange occurrences: ghosts, out-of-the-body experiences, premonitory dreams, telepathy and so on.
The point of the title is that all the "witnesses" were "respected figures"—writers, politicians, lawyers, etc—a fact assumed to
lend weight to what they claimed.
Stevenson, Ian The Evidence for Survival from Claimed Memories of Former Incarnations (1961)
Valuable study, treated as scientific inquiry rather than speculation and theory.
Steiger, Brad (ed) Project Blue Book: The Top Secret UFO Findings Revealed (1976)
Project Blue Book—the official reports assembled by the US Air Force up to 1969, when the project was discontinued.
Steiger's book is a good account; repeats many of the "best" stories.
Summers, Montague The History of Witchcraft and Demonology (1926) The "Reverend" Summers writes as a totally
convinced believer in the reality of witches and powers of evil—demons, etc. Also: The Vampire; The Werewolf, The
Geography of Witchcraft
Wilson, Colin The Occult (1971) Oa* Comprehensive summary of the whole field, from extra-sensory perception and second-
sight to vampires and the Kabbalah. Also: Mysteries
"Witchcraft, Oracles and Magic among the Azande" E.E. Evans-Pritchard Witchcraft
Witchcraft G. Parrinder Witchcraft
The World of the Witches J.C. Baroja Witchcraft
What other subject ever aroused such passion in its devotees or such impatience among outsiders? "Why do you only talk of
virtue?" someone asked Socrates (who proceeded, philosophically, to explain). Certain philosophers have themselves become
so impatient with philosophical pretentiousness that they have advocated closing down the talking shop. But the philosophical
standard—the attempt to argue honourably and reasonably—affects nearly all intellectual and aesthetic disciplines. It proposes
an ideal for the conduct of all kinds of disputes; it asks us to be honest with ourselves; it refuses to go away. Mere words?
"Words are loaded pistols," said Brice–Parrain. The picker and chooser of philosophical texts intrudes in a field where every
corner claims that every other is swarming with impostors and trespassers. No single point of view has been allowed to prevail
in this list: there are no definitive answers, but at least the questioning can be begun.
See DIARIES (Kierkegaard, Seneca, Teilhard de Chardin); ECONOMICS (Heilbroner. Robinson): MATHEMATICS (Koestler,
Ziman); POLITICS (Mannheim, Niebuhr. Rowls): RELIGION (Buber, Pascal, Teilhard de Chardin. Tillich); SOCIOLOGY
(Bottomore, Marcuse)
Gilson, Etienne The Christian Philosophy of St Thomas Aquinas (1924) Sympathetic critique by a leading Thomist. No
modern philosopher writes with more grace than Gilson. But compare Henri-Georges Egouttier: Cuisses Blanches, Ides Noires
(1980). See Aquinas; ART
Horkheimer, Max, and Theodor Adorno, German-American writing in German, 1895-1973 and 1903-1969.
Dialectic of Enlightenment. Rec: Counterpunch Trans TLS
Kirk, G. S. and Raven, J. E. The Pre-Socratic Philosophers (1957) 0 P In the beginning were Parmenides, Heraclitus and a
host of other honourable names who appear on the roll-call of the First Philosophers—names already venerated (or vilified) by
the time of Socrates and Plato. Invaluable collection of the earliest Greek philosophical fragments, with full commentary. See
MYTHOLOGY
Merleau-Ponty, Maurice The Phenomenology of Perception (1945) P Here is a philosopher who talks about "body image".
Very French and very sensuous. For the layman his preface gives a valuable short account of what he understands by
"phenomenology". Also: Signs; Sense and Nonsense; The Structure of Behaviour, etc.
Maimonides, Jew in Islamic Spain and Egypt writing in Arabic and Hebrew, 1135-1204.
Guide for the Perplexed. Rec: Seymour-Smith Ward
Popper, Karl Conjectures and Refutations (1963) !P A bigger, better introduction to Popper's important and influential
philosophy of science than The Logic of Scientific Discovery. Bryan Magee's Popper (1973) and Popper's own Unended
Quest(1974) are also good sources of guidance. Also: Objective Knowledge. See POLITICS (Plato)
Quine, Willard van Orman From a Logical Point of View (1953) p * Quine's name constantly recurs in current mainstream
analytic philosophy. His controversial tenets are summed up in this selection of essays. Also: Word and Object, Methods of
Logic; The Ways of Paradox and Other Essays, etc
Wittgenstein, Ludwig Philosophical Investigations (1953)kil*ro A series of observations, loosely collected into numbered
paragraphs and short sections, in which the older Wittgenstein wrestles with his younger self of the Tractatus—and with the
philosophical proclivities of generations of thinkers. Not so much a work, more a working out; less a handbook of thought than
a model of how to think. Also: Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus; The Blue and Brown Books; On Certainty, etc
Harvey Mansfield has been a professor of government at Harvard University for twenty-six years. His research area is political
philosophy. His writings flow from Burke, to Machiavelli, to The Spirit of Liberalism. He is working on a study of executive
power.
These five books reflect the central importance of politics in my life. Or else, one could say, they reflect the central importance
of politics, recognized or not, in anyone's life. Whatever draws us away from politics—play, artistry, poetry, thought—at the
same time draws on politics to supply the conditions of peace and harmony that such detachment requires.
Plato. The Republic (370-360 B.c.). James Adam, ed. 2 vols. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1963.
This problem of attachment-detachment in politics is shown best and most beautifully in Plato's Republic, where the human
condition is put in the image of prisoners in a cave. The cave is our politics, and the prisoners' chains represent enthrallment to
the delusions by which we live. We can, some of us, some of the time, escape from them, but we always have to come back to
them.
Aristotle. Nicomachean Ethics (ca. 350 B.C.). New York: Oxford University Press, 1980. (Pb)
Aristotle's Nicomachean Ethics is the first book on moral virtue and still the best. Not a book on theories of morality, it
describes the actual virtues of the moral person. Read today, it seems strangely familiar—we expect it to be obsolete and
irrelevant, but do not find it so.
Niccolo Machiavelli. The Prince (1513). Peter E. Bondanella and Mark Musa, trans. New York: Oxford University Press,
1984.
Machiavelli's Prince gives the clarion call that began the modern age. It tells us to take as our standard the way things actually
are done, not the way we wish or profess them to be done. The Prince is the greatest book ever written on politics, when
politics is understood as devoted solely to winning over an opponent.
Leo Strauss. Natural Right and History (1950). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1965. (Pb)
Leo Strauss's Natural Right and History makes the cause for reading these old books seriously—as if they might be true. He
shows that the two grand obstacles to doing so, our beliefs in science and in history, lead us to the necessity that we recover
philosophy in its original sense.
Alexander I. Solzhenitsyn. The Gulag Archipelago, 1918-1956 (1973). Thomas P. Whitney, trans. New York: Harper & Row,
1985. (Pb)
Alexander Solzhenitsyn's Gulag Archipelago is the most powerful book of our time. Its accusation against the Soviet Union
will outlast that regime and will dog it until its dying days. Its message of freedom sounds the call of honor and sacrifice that
attends any notable effort on behalf of freedom, and that is largely missing in the peace-loving West today.
Robert Nozick
Robert Nozick is the author of Anarchy, State and Utopia (1974), which received a National Book Award, and Philosophical
Explanations (1981), which received the Ralph Waldo Emerson Award of Phi Beta Kappa. He has recently been considering
"the best things in life" in preparation for a book of the same name. This third book "examines what's important about life:
happiness, the self, sexuality, love, intellectual creativity and wisdom." Previously chairman of the Harvard University
Philosophy Department, he is now the Arthur Kingsley Porter Professor of Philosophy at Harvard.
The earliest very powerful impact of the printed word that I can remember was from the classic comics I read as a child. How I
dwelled on Moby Dick, The Last of the Mohicans, Les Miserables, The Hunchback of Notre Dame, and The Adventures of
Robin Hood! If the dialogue and descriptive prose were skimpy, this was more than made up for by the narrative force and the
vivid pictures.
John Stuart Mill. On Liberty (1854). Elizabeth Rappaport, ed. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1978. (Pb)
To judge by the number of times I recall quoting it in high school, Mill's On Liberty impressed me greatly; it combined a
position I found congenial, the careful marshaling of reasons and also great rhetorical force—hence the ease of quoting.
Plato. The Republic (370-360 B.C.). James Adam, ed. 2 vols. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1963.
I didn't fully recognize it at the time, I think, but Plato's Republic (along with some early dialogues), which I read as a
freshman in Columbia's humanities course, presented me not only with a flurry of ideas and a way of investigating them and
thinking them through but also with a figure, Socrates, vividly portrayed, who embodied these ideas and lived this inquiry. The
issues and the figure have stayed with me.
R. Duncan Luce and Howard Raiffa. Games and Decisions: Introduction and Critical Survey. New York: John Wiley, 1957.
Sometime late in college I stumbled across R. Duncan Luce and Howard Raiffa's Games and Decisions, a lucid and
conceptually sophisticated presentation of utility theory and game theory. Its fitting of complicated aspects of human behavior
into abstract mathematical structure intrigued me—and by a roundabout route I returned to this subject in doing a doctoral
dissertation on decision theory.
Friedrich August von Hayek. Individualism and Economic Order. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1948.
Ludwig Von Mises. Socialism (orig. Die Gemeinwirtschaft, 1922). J. Kahane, trans. Indianapolis: Liberty-Classics, 1981. (Pb)
Friedrich August von Hayek. The Constitution of Liberty (1960). Chicago: Regnery, 1972.
While in graduate school I encountered the writings of Friedrich Hayek and Ludwig Von Mises, which shook me out of my
then socialist beliefs. There was Hayek's book of essays, Individualism and Economic Order, and Mises's wide-ranging and
unsettling Socialism, which showed me I had not thought through any details—economic, social or cultural—of how socialism
would work. One of their arguments in particular, about the impossibility of rational economic calculation under socialism,
dumbfounded me. Whether or not the argument was ultimately judged to be correct, it was amazing, something I never would
have thought of in a million years. Soon afterward I read Hayek's then recently published and magisterial Constitution of
Liberty, which impressed me with the depth of its thinking about society.
William Shakespeare. Shakespeare: Complete Works (15921611). Alfred Harbage, ed. New York: Penguin, 1969.
The works I have listed affected, in different ways, my first book, a book of political philosophy. Since then my own thinking
has not centered on the political or social realm. However, it is harder for me to pick out individual works since then that have
had large impact. Perhaps the greater the weight of intellectual baggage we acquire as we grow older, the harder it is for one
new thing to move us. But I cannot close without saying that back then and since then, there has been, always, presenting the
world complete and not merely from one partial intense perspective, Shakespeare.
Joe Nye is a professor of government at Harvard's John F. Kennedy School of Government and director of the Harvard Center
for Science and International Affairs, Professor Nye graduated from Princeton, was a Rhodes Scholar at Oxford, and wrote his
Harvard Ph.D. thesis in East Africa. His latest book is Nuclear Ethics (1986).
In a world of sovereign states and nuclear weapons, it is too dangerous to think one can know all the answers, but it is essential
to be clear about the key questions and one's values. These books have helped me with both. They are listed chronologically.
Leo Tolstoy. War and Peace (1865-69). Louise Maude and Aylmer Maude, trans. George Gibian, ed. New York: W. W. Norton,
1966.
Tolstoy introduced me to the complexity of history; to the enormous gap between what humans intend and what transpires; and
to the importance of being clear about one's own core values. And what a good read!
Joseph A. Schumpeter. Capitalism, Socialism, and Democracy (1942). New York: Harper & Row, 1983. (Pb)
Schumpeter's celebration of the achievements of capitalism, and particularly the role of the entrepreneur and "creative
destruction," is combined with a paradoxical prognosis of capitalism "killing itself by its successes." I wrote my undergraduate
thesis about the question of whether that conclusion followed from his premise. I am still not sure that it does. This great book
sets a great puzzle.
Alfred J. Ayer. Language, Truth and Logic (1936). New York: Dover, 1952. (Pb)
While I would no longer subscribe to such a simple positivist epistemology, the experience of studying "Oxford philosophy"
left me with a lifelong skeptical approach to tangled questions. Before trying to cut tall trees, start by clearing away the
obstructing underbrush. Ayer set a high standard.
Hans J. Morgenthau. Politics Among Nations: The Struggle for Power and Peace (1948). 5th ed. New York: Knopf, 1978.
A flawed book can have a great influence on one's life. This "Realist" text dominated the field when I began graduate study of
international politics. It was too good to dismiss, but something was missing. My book (with Robert Keohane), Power and
Interdependence, was in part a product of this wrestling match with Morgenthau. I am grateful for the great provocation.
Elenore Smith Bowen [Laura Bohannan]. Return to Laughter (1954). New York: Doubleday, 1964.
This sensitive fictionalized account of an anthropologist's coming to terms with cultural relativism helped me to understand
why I could admire so much of life in Uganda when I lived there in the early 1960s, yet still refuse to accept certain things I
felt to be wrong.
David J. Duncan. The River Why (1983). New York: Bantam, 1984. (Pb)
Long after I knew that I am often happiest when waist deep in a rushing river casting flies to rising trout, I read this book on an
Alaskan float trip. Its droll portrayal of the fine line between fishing and philosophy allowed me both to laugh at myself and to
feel justified in continuing as I would in any case. One can love books for many reasons.
Orlando Patterson
Orlando Patterson was born in Jamaica. He was educated and has taught at the University of the West Indies and the London
School of Economics before he came to Harvard in 1969. He is the author of three books on historical and comparative
sociology and of three novels. He is presently completing a work on the historical sociology of freedom.
These works are as important for the way they approach their subjects as for the subjects they treat. By illuminating past and
present in wholly new ways, they teach us how to understand the future when it becomes the present.
Immanuel Kant. Groundwork on the Metaphysics of Morals (orig. Moral Law, 1797). H. J. Paton, trans. New York: Harper &
Row, n.d. (Pb)
This is the greatest work of philosophy. Through it Kant became my intellectual father-figure. When I first read it as an
undergraduate I was awed, but not scared by its great themes and insights. Under the forbidding Teutonic surface I soon
discovered a very human, deeply compassionate presence. The Groundwork was my path to the serious study of philosophy. It
taught me intellectual discipline and provided me with an inexhaustible philosophical foundation for any later thinking.
It has bvo windows: one looks out on the Enlightenment and all that's best in modern culture, the other looks back at ancient
cultures and their greatest achievement, stoicism. The connections are not immediately obvious. Discovering them has been
one of the abiding pleasures of my intellectual growth.
Albert Camus. The Myth of Sisyphus (1942). Justin O'Brien, trans. New York: Random House, 1959. (Pb)
There are books such as the Groundwork which one grows with, and there are books one grows out of. Camus's The Myth of
Sisyphus was one such work for me. I first came across it in high school, did not understand it, but was deeply drawn to it. I
read it repeatedly through college. It is the perfect work for a young, searching mind concerned with the problems of identity
and the meaning of existence. Absurdity and exile were just the themes I needed to explore as I came to terms with a
decolonizing society (Jamaica) similar to the one in which Camus grew up (Algeria). Camus taught me intellectual nimbleness,
the serious art of playing with ideas. And I learned confidence from him. When, finally, I came to understand him fully, I came
to see not only that he was wrong but that I could think more creatively about the ideas to which he had introduced me. These
ideas inspired my first novel, The Children of Sisyphus (1964).
Karl R. Popper. The Open Society and Its Enemies (1945). Volume 1. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1966.
This great work was an eye-opener for me. It completely overturned my conventional views on ancient society and thought,
especially that of Plato. It made me realize how it is possible for a whole tradition of scholarship to distort systematically the
interpretation of a period. This work taught me the importance of interpreting the past and the classics for oneself.
Eric E. Williams. Capitalism and Slavery: The Caribbean (1944). New York: Andre Deutsch. 1964. (Pb)
This masterful historical work showed me how a powerful mind can turn long-cherished views of history upside down. It was
also important for all West Indian intellectuals growing up in the 1950s and 1960s—history as a political force. The work
taught me two things: the importance of slavery in the rise of the modern West and the courage to take on big ideas and great
themes.
Karl Marx. Economic and Philosophical Manuscripts of 1844 (1844). Dirk J. Struik, ed., Martin Milligan, trans. New York:
International, 1964. (Pb)
This work, along with the Preface to the Critique of Political Economy, restored my respect for Marx after a long love affair
with, and ultimate rejection of, Das Kapital during my early years of graduate school at the London School of Economics. This
is the early, humanistic side of Marx. A profound critique of the central human problem of capitalism—alienation. From this
work I could move back to Hegel and forward to Weber, Laski and other modern thinkers in the development of my own
sociological thought.
David Riesman, with Reuel Denny and Nathan Glazer. The Lonely Crowd (1950). New Haven: Yale University Press,
1973. (Pb)
One of the greatest works of modern interpretive sociology. This is the work that finally turned me on to sociology. It does for
the interpretation of modern American society what Alexis de Tocqueville did for the first part of the nineteenth century. Like
the latter's work, it transcends the deeper period to which it is addressed. The work brought me a deeper understanding of
American society and a lasting fascination with it. More important, it became my model of informed macrosociological
analysis; the interpretive sociological imagination at its best.
Willard V. Quine
Willard Quine has retired from his teaching career at Harvard University, where he is the Edgar Pierce Professor of Philosophy
Emeritus. His distinguished work as a mathematical logician and philosopher of language continues. Retirement allows him to
produce such forthcoming works as Bits and Pieces (Harvard University Press). He is the subject of a volume in the "Library of
Living Philosophers" series. Best known for writing Mathematical Logic and Word and Object, his autobiography, Time of My
Life, was published in 1985.
Bertrand Russell. Introduction to Mathematical Philosophy (1919). New York: Simon & Schuster, 1971. (Pb)
Introduction to Mathematical Philosophy was my introduction to the rigors of modern logic and the mysteries of infinite
numbers. It brought new clarity to familiar old mathematical concepts as well, by reducing them to pure logic and set theory.
The charms of the subject matter and of Russell's writing combined to launch me on a career of mathematical philosophy.
Alfred North Whitehead and Bertrand Russell. Principia mathematica (1910-12). 3 vols. New York: Cambridge University
Press, 1962. (Pb)
Written mostly in mathematical symbols, these volumes provided the solid fare for which Russell's book above had whetted my
appetite. Here the derivation of classical mathematics from logic and set theory is carried through in strict formal detail.
Sir Arthur S. Eddington. The Nature of the Physical World (1928). Folcroft, Penn.: Folcroft Library Editions, 1935.
This was perhaps the most memorable of several books of popular science that both fired and helped to gratify my curiosity
about the basis, bounds and inner workings of physical reality.
Bertrand Russell. Our Knowledge of the External World (1914). 2d ed. Atlantic Highlands, N.J.: Humanities Press, 1972.
The two philosophical interests noted above—the logicomathematical and the physical—are here brought into contact. A
program is sketched for deriving our knowledge of nature from our sensory evidence with the help of modern logical
techniques.
Rudolf Carnap. Der logische Aufbau der Welt (1928). Hamburg: Meiner, 1974.
The program that Russell had thus sketched is here undertaken in earnest and explicit technical detail, bristling with logical
symbols. It is a work of admirable vision and ingenuity,
Walter W. Skeat, ed. An Etymological Dictionary of the English Language (1879). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1924.
The foregoing six books sparked and nourished interrelated interests that took on professional proportions. But this book has
been the faithful support for fifty-seven years of another and independent interest that I somehow acquired in my late teens: a
consuming interest in the origins of words.
Sketch for…the Progress of the Human Mind Marquis de Condorcet Morality of Human Nature
On Human Nature E.O. Wilson Morality of Human Nature
After Virtue A. MacIntyre Morality of Human Nature
There is no agreed definition of philosophy. The question `What is philosophy?' is itself a philosophical question. However,
broadly speaking, philosophy is the systematic analysis of our concepts of - and the construction of theories about the nature of
- mind, reality, language, logic, the self, free will, perception, causation, science, God, morality, rationality, time, space, and so
on. Philosophy includes logic (the study of valid ference), epistemology (the theory of knowledge), and metaphysics (the study
of the nature of existence), as well as ethics, aesthetics, political theory, the philosophy of science, and the philosophy of
religion. General readers can begin the study of philosophy either with books about the history of philosophy or with books
about certain topics within philosophy. They should then move on without delay to reading some of the works of the great
philosophers.
Philosophy Made Simple (1993) by Richard H Popkin and Avrum Stroll. Revised edition of a readable and very useful
introduction to philosophy with chapters on ethics, political philosophy, metaphysics, philosophy of religion, the theory of
knowledge, logic, and contemporary philosophy. Each chapter contains critical summaries of the theories of the great
philosophers. Highly recommended for the beginner.
A Dictionary of Philosophy (1990) by G Vesey and P Foulkes. A valuable dictionary of philosophical terms and theories. The
major topic entries and the entries on individual philosophers can be read as an introduction to philosophy for the general
reader.
Modern Philosophy: An Introduction and Survey (1994) by Roger Scruton. A remarkably wide-ranging survey of
contemporary developments in both European and Anglo-Saxon philosophy. Readable and stimulating, but some chapters are
quite technical.
Body, Mind and Death (1964) edited by Anthony Flew. A fascinating anthology of readings on the question `What is
consciousness?' Contains extracts from the works of Plato, Aristotle, Thomas Aquinas, Thomas Hobbes, Rene Descartes,
Benedict Spinoza, Gottfried Leibniz, John Locke, David Hume, and many others.
Free Will (1972) by D J O'Connor. The best introduction to this classic philosophical problem. Examines a selection of
arguments for and against the view that some human actions are freely chosen. Short and lucid.
A Short History of Ethics: A History of Moral Philosophy from the Homeric Age to the Twentieth Century (1966) by
Alasdair Maclntyre. An early work by arguably the most original of contemporary moral philosophers. Here, he argues that
moral concepts cannot be understood apart from their history. A challenging historical survey, covering many thinkers not
usually regarded as moral philosophers.
The Problems of Philosophy (1912) by Bertrand Russell. A short, classic introduction to philosophical analysis by one of this
century's great philosophers. Topics covered include the nature and existence of matter, appearance and reality, and the value of
philosophy.
Philosophy and the Meaning of Life (1971) by Karl Britton. Written for the general reader concerned about philosophical
questions such as `Why does the universe exist?' and `Why do I exist?'. The author asks what these questions mean, what could
count as answers, and what methods can be used to find answers. Highly recommended for the beginner.
A History of Western Philosophy (1946) by Bertrand Russell. An entertaining history of philosophy in one volume. Weak on
the medieval period and occasionally rather misleading, it nevertheless provides a useful historical survey for the beginner.
ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY
Paul Rowntree
Ancient philosophy covers a period of a thousand years - from about 650 BC to about AD 350. It helps to divide ancient
philosophy into three subsidiary periods.
1. Pre-Socratic philosophy covers those speculative cosmologists (such as Democritus and Pythagoras) who flourished in the
period c. 650-c. 450 BC.
2. Classical Greek philosophy begins with Socrates (469-399 BC), covers Plato (c. 428-347 BC), and ends with Aristotle (384-
322 BC).
3. Hellenistic philosophy covers the period from the death of Aristotle until the fall of the Roman Empire, and it includes
Plotinus and the neo-Platonists, Epicurus, and the Stoics. The Hellenistic philosophers were influenced by Greek culture, but
often lived outside Greece.
The history of Western philosophy is, after all, no more than a series of footnotes to Plato's philosophy.
A N WHITEHEAD
Before and After Socrates (1932) by F M Cornford. A classic account of the pre-Socratics, Plato and Aristotle. Short and very
readable.
The Last Days of Socrates (4th century BC) by Plato (translated 1993 by Hugh Tredennick and Harold Tarrant). A collection
of four of Plato's works in which he displayed the methods and teaching of Socrates. Contains the Apology (Socrates's speech
at his trial) and the Phaedo (Plato's account of Socrates last conversation). Readable and short. Newcomers to Plato are
recommended to start here.
The Republic (4th century BC) by Plato (translated 1974 by Desmond Lee). Plato's philosophical and literary masterpiece in
which he expounds his most important theories. Books VI and VII and particularly interesting. A fluent and elegant translation.
The Nicomachean Ethics (4th century BC) by Aristotle (translated 1976 by J A K Thomson, revised by Hugh Tredennick, and
introduced by Jonathan Barnes). Aristotle's Ethics is one of the most influential books in history, and a standard text in moral
philosophy. Addresses the issue of how to live well, and is important as much for its analytical methods as for its conclusions.
A book that will repay a lifetime's study. A readable translation.
Aristotle (1982) by Jonathan Barnes. A short, elegant, and comprehensive introduction to Aristotle for the general reader by a
leading philosopher and classical scholar.
The Neo-Platonists (1991) translated by John Gregory. A useful anthology mainly devoted to Plotinus, but containing pieces
by Porphyry, Iambilichus, and Proclus.
Meditations (2nd century AD) by Marcus Aurelius (translated 1964 by Maxwell Staniforth). A classic statement of the stoic
philosophy of life by a famous Roman emperor. A very influential and inspiring work by a sensitive and humble mind. Short
and readable.
Hellenistic Philosophy (1974) by A A Long. An excellent survey and general appraisal. The best introduction to the subject.
Scholarly but still suitable for the general reader.
MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY IN EUROPE
Paul Rowntree
Historians will always dispute when the Middle Ages began and ended. The Renaissance and the Middle Ages overlapped; and
much of the medieval philosophical outlook survived into the late 17th century and even later. For philosophical purposes, the
Middle Ages can be divided into:
1. The early Middle Ages (5th-11th centuries), beginning with St Augustine of Hippo (AD 354-430) and Boethius (AD 480-
524) and ending with St Anselm (1033-1109).
2. The high Middle Ages (12th-13th centuries) in which scholastics such as St Thomas Aquinas (c. 1225-1274) flourished.
3. The later Middle Ages (14th-15th centuries) in which the greatest philosopher was probably William of Occam (c. 1285-
1349). Undoubtedly, Aquinas has been the most influential of all medieval philosophers.
Examine carefully what has been said, and if possible, reconcile faith and reason.
ANICIUS MANILUS SEVERINUS BOETHIUS
A History of Medieval Philosophy (1972) by F C Copleston. An interesting and useful survey of the entire period, including
medieval Islamic and Jewish philosophy. The author draws attention to the similarities between particular medieval
philosophers and philosophers of later periods. Contains good bibliographies.
Medieval Thought: St Augustine to Ockham (1958) by Gordon Leff. A brisk, brilliant, and brief introduction by an historian.
Contains plenty of short quotations from the works of the medieval philosophers.
Renaissance Thought: The Classic, Scholastic and Humanist Strains (1961) by Paul 0 Kristeller. A short, brilliant account
of philosophy in the transitional period of the 15th and 16th centuries. Suitable for the beginner and the expert alike.
The Confessions of St Augustine (4th century) translated 1961 by R S Pine-Coffin. St Augustine's spiritual autobiography.
Contains some notable philosophical reflections on the nature of time in Book XI, and communicates his highly influential out-
look as well. A readable translation of a masterpiece.
The Consolation of Philosophy (524 AD) by Anicius Manilus Severinus Boethius (translated 1969 by V E Watts). A very
beautiful and influential work in verse and prose, written while the author awaited execution. Boethius was a Christian
philosopher who drew extensively on Plato, Aristotle, and the Stoics. He and St Augustine shaped medieval philosophy.
Contains his famous definitions of eternity and of Providence, which were adopted by Aquinas. A masterpiece.
The Prayers and Meditations of St Anselm (11th century) translated 1973 by Sister Benedicta Ward. Mainly devotional, but
the book contains the Prologion in which appears Anselm's brilliant version of the ontological argument for the existence of
God. The ontological argument fascinates philosophers, and it has generated a vast literature.
Summa Theologicae by St Thomas Aquinas: A Concise Translation (1989) edited by Timothy McDermott. The most readable
translation of selections from Aquinas's great synthesis of St Augustine and Aristotle. Omits the conventions of medieval
debate used in the original in favour of the modem format of continuous paragraphs. Therefore, to appreciate Aquinas's
methods and style, it should be read in conjunction with another anthology of his writings.
Aquinas (1955) by F C Copleston. Good introduction for those who have no previous knowledge of this great but difficult
philosopher.
The Five Ways (1969) by Anthony Kenny. A lucid philosophical analysis of Aquinas's five proofs of the existence of God by a
former Roman Catholic priest turned agnostic Oxford philosopher. Quite technical in places, but very rewarding.
A History of Political Thought: The Middle Ages (1965) by Walter Ullman. Valuable historical introduction to medieval
political philosophy. Traces the emergence of the concepts of sovereignty, parliament, citizenship, the vile of law, and the state.
PHILOSOPHY IN 17TH-CENTURY EUROPE
Paul Rowntree
Philosophy in the 17th century was emerging from its subjection to theology; and the physical sciences began to separate from
philosophy. Increasingly, the God of medieval philosophy was no longer seen as the guarantee and foundarion of all
knowledge. Accordingly, some of the leading philosophers sought a foundation for knowledge in mathematical reasoning,
while others sought a foundation for knowledge in the experience of the senses and the inductive reasoning of the physical
senses. The former are known as rationalists - Rene Descartes (1596-1650), Benedict Spinoza (1632-1677), and Gottfried
Leibniz (1646-1716). The latter are known as empiricists - Francis Bacon (1561-1626), John Locke (1632-1704), and
(arguably) Thomas Hobbes (1588-1679). Empiricism became the dominant trend in the next century, and it remains an
important trend to this day.
As regards any subject we propose to investigate, we must inquire not what other
people have thought, or what we ourselves conjecture, but what we can clearly and
manifestly perceive by intuition or deduce with certainty. For there is no other way
of acquiring knowledge.
RENE DESCARTES
Descartes: Philosophical Writings (1954) selected and translated by EIizabeth Anscombe and P T Geach. One of several very
useful selections of the most important works. Includes The Meditations - one of the most readable (though deceptively simple)
philosophical classics.
Descartes: The Project of Pure Enquiry (1978) by Bernard Williams. Probably the best commentary by a leading modem
philosopher. Quite a difficult book in places, but it repays the effort.
Ethics (1677) by Benedict Spinoza (translated by A Boyle and revised by G H R Parkinson 1993). The best of the easily
accessible translations. Fascinating, remarkable, and beautiful. This most impressive work of speculative metaphysics is
modelled on Euclid's geometrical demonstrations. Read Spinoza's prefaces and notes before attempting the work as a whole.
Demanding but highly recommended.
Spinoza (1988) by Stuart Hampshire. Revised edition of the best of the basic introductions. Covers not only the monistic
metaphysics but the political philosophy and biblical criticism as well. Lucid and concise.
Leibniz: Philosophical Writings (1973) edited by G H R Parkinson and translated by Mary Morris and G H R Parkinson. The
best selection of Leibniz's shorter works. Includes the very concise and readable Monadology.
Leibniz (1954) by Ruth L Saw. Good introduction, which pieces together Leibniz's doctrines in metaphysics and formal logic.
Avoids undue technicalities and is useful for anyone new to Leibniz.
An Essay Concerning Human Understanding (1690) by John Locke (edited by A S Pringle-Pattison 1924). One of several
editions of this long but important work. Begin by reading only selected passages on substance, personal identity, and the
distinction between primary and secondary qualities. Locke's conception of substance as a completely featureless substratum is
important.
John Locke (1952) by D J O'Connor. Covers Locke's highly influential political philosophy as well as his metaphysics and
epistemology. A very readable introduction.
Leviathan (1651) by Thomas Hobbes (edited by M Oakeshott 1946). One of many editions of Hobbes's masterpiece, written in
his magnificently pithy style. Commentators still argue about this most important work of political theory. Was I-Iobbes an
authoritarian pessimist and atheist, or not?
Hobbes (1956) by R S Peters. A good introduction to a remarkably original, important, and rather neglected philosopher - the
first great philosopher to write in English. Considers Hobbes's achievement as a whole, and not just the Leviathan. Very
helpful.
The Seventeenth-Century Background (1953) by Basil Willey. A masterly exercise in the history of ideas by a professor of
English literature. Very readable and highly recommended.
PHILOSOPHY IN 18TH-CENTURY EUROPE
Paul Rowntree
In 18th-century philosophy, the dominant trend in metaphysics and epistemology was empiricism, while the dominant trend in
political philosophy was liberal individual-ism. The Irish philosopher and bishop George Berkeley (1685-1753) devised a form
of empiricism now known as subjective idealism. The Scottish philosopher David Hume (1711-1774) arrived at generally
sceptical views about reason, causation, the self, and religion. The German philosopher Immanuel Kant (1724-1804), claiming
that He had woken him from his `dogmatic slumbers', developed a synthesis of British empiricism and continental rationalism
known as critical philosophy. In France, Jean-Jacques Rousseau (1712-1778) argued for direct rather than representative
democracy. In England, Jeremy Bentham (1748-1832), the founder of utilitarianism, held that the essence of morality was `the
greatest happiness of the greatest number'.
Principles of Human Knowledge/Three Dialogues (1710-1734) by George Berkeley (edited by Roger Woolhouse 1988). For
Berkeley, the existence of objects depends on their being perceived: objects have continuous existence only because God
perceives them all the time. May sound bizarre, but highly influential. The Three Dialogues are short and entertaining.
Berkeley (1953) by Geoffrey J Warnock. An excellent account of Berkeley's philosophy. Explains very clearly how Berkeley
came to such extraordinary conclusions as a result of rejecting, in the name of common sense, Locke's conception of substance
as a featureless substratum.
Fifteen Sermons (1914) by Bishop Joseph Butler (edited by W R Matthews). Great, if underestimated, work of moral
philosophy. Butler, the leading conscience theorist, holds that conscience governs and limits both our benevolence and our
selfishness. Subtle in content, solemn in tone. Highly recommended.
Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion (1779) by David Hume (edited by Martin Bell 1990). Of all Hume's philosophical
works, this is the shortest and most accessible to the general reader. A work by a master of English prose. Never a dull moment.
A masterpiece.
Hume (1980) by Alfred J Ayer. A short and stylish account of the main themes in Hume's philosophy by a modern empiricist.
Tends to assume that Hume's philosophical intentions are not in dispute, but nevertheless very valuable.
Prolegomena to any Future Metaphysics (1783) by Immanuel Kant (translated by P G Lucas 1953). The shortest and most
accessible of the main works of one of the greatest and most difficult philosophers. Dense and technical, so read a general
commentary on Kant first.
The Philosophy of Kant (1968) by John Kemp. Kant is probably the most influential philosopher in the post-Enlightenment
period. This is a classic account of Kant's critical philosophy. Lucid, short, and readable.
Kant's Moral Philosophy (1970) by Harry B Acton. An excellent and very short account of Kant's ethics and the categorical
imperative. Essential preparation for reading Kant's influential moral philosophy.
Utilitarianism: For and Against (1975) by J J C Smart and Bernard Williams. Two essays on utilitarian ethics. J J C Smart
refines Bentham's classical utilitarianism. Bernard Williams opposes this view. A good introduction to the ethics that influences
so much social policy. Highly recommended.
The Social Contract: Essays by Locke, Hume, and Rousseau (1946) introduced by Ernest Barker. Brings together three
great works of political philosophy - Locke's Second Treatise on Government, Hume's Of the Original Contract, and
Rousseau's Social Contract. A very valuable volume for anyone interested in contractarianism in political theory. Rousseau's
work has been variously interpreted as a blueprint for totalitarian-ism and a defence of individual liberty. It is more important
as a source of ideas than as a system of philosophical arguments.
19TH-CENTURY PHILOSOPHY
Robert C Solomon
The 19th century displayed a remarkably rich and exciting explosion of philosophical energy and talent, perhaps even
comparable to the generation that gave birth to Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle. The scale of the revolution set off in philosophy
by Immanuel Kant was comparable, by Kant's own estimation, to the Copernican revolution that ended the Middle Ages.
Following Kant were some of the most imaginative philosophers of modern times, including G W F Hegel and Arthur
Schopenhauer as well as the philosophers he inspired in opposition to him, notably Soren Kierkegaard, Karl Marx, and
Friedrich Nietzsche. Unfortunately, the 19th century on the European continent was not known for the clarity of its writing
style, an unfortunate aspect of the Kantian inheritance. (One might compare the writing of John Stuart Mill and William James,
their English and American contemporaries.) Hegel and Schopenhauer quite consciously employed a formidable Kansan
jargon, although Schopenhauer's cutting wit often shines through. Kierkegaard used this same jargon ironically to mock Hegel.
The later part of the century - which Virginia Woolf described as the passing of a dark cloud - showed a few signs of clearing.
Although Marx's later economic writings are indeed difficult, his earlier philosophical writings are quite bold and accessible.
Nietzsche's writing is among the best one can find in German, although his style is misleadingly facile, often hyperbolic and
intentionally polemical. Easy (if sometimes offensive) to read, he is a master of subtlety and irony. My choice of books,
accordingly, is confined to original texts (and collections of texts) that, nevertheless, are approachable by the intelligent general
reader. More difficult texts are merely suggested.
It is not difficult to see that ours is a birth-time and a period of transition to a new era. Spirit has broken with the world it has
hitherto inhabited and imagined, ... Spirit is never at rest but always engaged in moving forward. But just as the first breath
drawn by a child after its long, quiet nourishment breaks the gradualness of merely quantitative growth, ... so likewise the
Spirit in its formation matures slowly and quietly into its new shape, dissolving bit by bit the structure of its previous world.
G W F HEGEL
Reason in History (1820s; 1953), The Philosophy of Right (1821; translated 1967), and The Phenomenology of Spirit
(1807; translated 1977) by G W F Hegel. The first is actually the introduction to a series of lectures Hegel delivered to his
students in Berlin. Although it is difficult, what clearly emerges is an optimistic vision of a rational, progressive view of
history, in which individual freedom emerges from `the slaughter bench of history' but whose significance is to be found not in
individuals (even the `greatest' individuals) but in the development of spiritual consciousness as a whole. The Phenomenology
of Spirit is an earlier, much more detailed and ambitious work, in which Hegel develops the concept of an emerging world-
spirit. at is not unimportant that he wrote the book just as Napoleon was reaching the full extent of his European conquests,
including the western German states.) The reading is enormously difficult, but I encourage courageous readers to ascertain the
general movement - or `dialectic' - of the text. The most famous (and readable) sections: on `Master and Slave' (in part B) and
his discussion of Antigone and the conflict between divine law and civil society (in part C).
Parerga and Paralipomena (1851; translated 1974) and The World as Will and Idea (1818; translated 1948-50) by Arthur
Schopenhauer. Although Schopenhauer certainly earned his self-styled reputation as the most `pessimistic' of all modern
philosophers, he is arguably one of the wittiest and most humorous of all modern philosophers as well. Despite the morbid
message ('life is meaningless'), reading Schopenhauer is almost always an unexpected pleasure.
Journals (1839; translated from Danish by A Dru 1938), Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846; translated by D Swenson
and W Lowrie 1944), Either/Or (1843; translated by D Swenson, W Lowrie, and H Johnston 1954) by Soren Kierkegaard.
Kierkegaard was fundamentally a religious writer and the first `existentialist' (often misunderstood as a purely atheist
movement). He defended the personal, passionate existence and commitments of the individual (for example, against Hegel's
global notion of world-spirit) and defended a view of Christianity - 'becoming a Christian' - which was first of all a passionate
personal commitment, a `leap of faith'.
Early Writings (1843-4; translated and edited by Thomas Bottomore 1963) by Karl Marx; The Communist Manifesto (1848;
edited by A Taylor 1967) by Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels. Karl Marx is best known as the economist and polemicist who
inspired worldwide revolutions. He is less well known for his humanistic and philosophical writings.
The Gay Science (1881-82; translated by W Kaufmann 1974), Beyond Good and Evil (1886; translated by W Kaufmann
1966), The Viking Portable Nietzsche (translated and edited by W Kaufmann 1954), Thus Spake Zarathustra (1883-85),
and Twilight of the Idols (1889; translated 1954) by Friedrich Nietzsche. Nietzsche died in 1900, in many ways bringing to an
end the philosophical idealism of the 19th century and anticipating the moral confusion and violence of the 20th. He rejected
glib notions of `objectivity', especially in philosophy. He was, above all, a moralist, who (in the name of `immorality')
attempted to reinvent a morality of nobility in place of what he perceived as the `decadent' and decaying values of the Judaeo-
Christian tradition.
20TH-CENTURY PHILOSOPHY
Richard Rorty
In the early decades of this century, philosophers thought a lot about the impact of Charles Darwin's theory of evolution on
traditional conceptions of man's place in the universe. Bergson, James, and Dewey all tried to rearrange old philosophical
notions so as to make room for evolutionary thought. Later on, philosophy split down the middle into the `analytic' and the
`continental' schools. The analysts (Ayer, Danto, Dennett, Rawls) are mostly anglophone. They think of philosophy as
argumentative problem-solving. The `continentals' (Heidegger, Foucault, Jacques Derrida) typically view philosophy as
reflection on our contemporary historical situation. These two philosophical schools rarely interact, but both have produced
first-rate books. By now, they have so little in common that the use of the term `philosophy' for both tells one little more than
that both kinds of philosophers trace some of their concern back to Plato, Aristotle, David Hume, and Immanuel Kant.
Introduction to Metaphysics (1903) by Henri Bergson. A short, lucid presentation of Bergson's central idea: that ultimate
reality is an evolutionary flux, and that material objects and minds are merely abstractions from that flux.
Pragmatism (1907) by William James. Argues that true ideas are ideas that get us what we want, that the search for truth is
therefore part of the pursuit of happiness, and that the human mind is an organ for coping with reality rather than copying it.
Reconstruction in Philosophy (1920) by John Dewey. Debunks the idea that philosophy gives you an understanding of the
true nature of reality, or mind, or anything else. Dewey's alternative conception of philosophy is illustrated by the quotation
above.
Language, Truth and Logic (1936) by A J Ayer. A brilliantly clear and persuasive presentation of logical empiricism, the
doctrine that all knowledge of the world is a matter of predicting the occurrence of sense experiences.
Connections to the World: The Basic Concepts of Philosophy (1989) by Arthur C Danto. An introduction to philosophy by
one of the leading contemporary analytic philosophers. Presupposes no previous acquaintance with the subject.
Political Liberalism (1993) by John Rawls. A defence of the institutions of the liberal democracies, arguing that they do not
need metaphysical or religious foundations, but only the informed consent of citizens to procedures for resolving conflicts.
Darwin's Dangerous Idea: Evolution and the Meanings of Life (1995) by Daniel Dennett. A brilliant defence of the claim
that the entire history of the universe, from the Big Bang to the primeval slime, and from there to us, can be explained as the
chance product of the movements of matter.
Basic Writings of Martin Heidegger (1993) edited by D F Krell. A good sampling from the writings of the most original of
20th-century philosophers. Heidegger was a Nazi, and is often denounced as an irrationalist obscurantist. But his influence has
been enormous.
A Foucault Reader (1984) edited by Paul Rabinow. A selection from the work of Michel Foucault, a brilliant historian of ideas
and political radical. His books have almost replaced Marx's as manuals for leftist intellectuals.
A Derrida Reader: Between the Blinds (1991) edited by Peggy Kamuf. Selections from the voluminous works of the most
original French thinker of his day, the inventor of `deconstruction' and a philosopher who tries to bring Heidegger together with
Sigmund Freud.
Poetry
Making lists of recommended poets is a subjective exercise. Poetry is of the senses before it is of the mind; to state a preference
for this poem or that is to utter autobiography, not criticism. We have included poets of many ages and languages (though all
are available in good English translations)—though this feature of the list is perhaps more real than apparent. A good poem
often stands outside its locality and time, and speaks directly, now, at the moment of reading, of shared perception of human
experience. This quality of timelessness was our main criterion, whether of individual poets or of the many "one-poem- writers
listed in anthologies.
See LITERARY CRITICISM (Arnold, Brooks, Crane, Gardner, Horace, Jarrell, Pope, Shelley); MUSIC (Fischer-Dieskau);
MYTHOLOGY (Ovid); SEX (Ovid)
Various Authors writing in Arabic, Persian, Turkish, etc., Arabic, Persian, Turkish, etc., 7th-18th C.
Anthology of Islamic Literature, From the Rise of Islam to Modern Times. Rec: Ward
Ben Ezra, Moses ben Jacob, Jew in Islamic Spain writing in Hebrew, ca. 1055-1138.
Selected Poems. Rec: Ward
Browning, Robert Men and Women (1855) it A few poems (like The Grammarian 's Funeral) put Browning high among 19th-
century poets; although much of his work is mid-Victorian rubbish, startling, regular outbursts of genuine poetry make it
worthwhile. Also: Dramatic Lyrics; Dramatic Romances. See DIARIES
Empson, William Poems (1935) P Witty, difficult poems, full of dead-pan jokes and intellectual fireworks. See
LITERARY CRITICISM
Guillaume de Lorris and Jean de Meun, French, ca. 1212-ca. 1237 and ca. 1237-ca. 1305.
Le Roman de la Rose (Romance of the Rose). Rec: Ward
The Roman de la Rose is a late medieval French poem styled as an allegorical dream vision. (wiki)
Ha-Levi, Judah, Jew in Islamic Spain writing in Hebrew, ca. 1075-after 1140.
Selected Poems. Rec: Ward
Hamburger, Michael (ed) German Poetry. 1910– 1975 (1977) Bilingual anthology, with good introduction and notes, gives a
first-class impression of the period it covers, fairly reflects the diversity of 20th-century German writing.
Herbert, George The Temple (1633) * Whatever was best in the English temperament and in the Church of England
between the times of Elizabeth I and Cromwell is present in these strong and lovable poems.
Herrick, Robert Hesperides (1648) et Herrick celebrates the fragility of life and love, and with the lightest of touches.
His poems are notable for their rhythmic beauty and for their skilfully-worked grace. Also: Noble Numbers or Pious Pieces
Jay, Peter (ed) The Greek Anthology (1973)* Translations by divers excellent hands of the great age—between the 7th century
BC and the 6th century AD—of Greek Mediterranean culture; short, witty, touching and erotic; a scintillating world.
Jennings, Elizabeth (ed) Anthology of Modern Verse, 1940-60(1961) Jennings is herself a good though uneven poet. Her
anthology is marvellous; her taste sharp but generous.
Moore, G. and Beier, U. (eds) Modern Poetry from Africa (1970) Fascinating guide to one of the growth areas of literature in
European languages.
Various Authors writing in Spanish and Portuguese, Spanish and Portuguese, 19th-20th C.
Penguin Book of Latin American Verse. Rec: Ward
Various Authors, Africans writing in various languages, Africans (various languages), 20th C.
Poems of Black Africa. Rec: Ward
Sitwell, Edith (ed) The Atlantic Book of British and American Poetry (1959)
Magnificent anthology of the whole of English poetry. Sitwell had a sharp ear and a fine critical sense; her selection is full,
generous, exciting. See AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Sitwell, 0.)
Spenser, Edmund The Shephearde's Calendar(1579) * The odes of Spenser are the most successfully inventive metrical
system in English. Indispensable. Also: The Faerie Queene, etc
Tao Qian (T'ao Ch'ien; also known as Tao Yuanming), Chinese, 365-427.
Poems. Rec: MW Asian Ward
Thomas, Dylan Collected Poems (1952) it Intense visions (especially of provincial Wales) and exuberant language make
him easy to like or denounce; but he is serious, and, in about a dozen poems, a great poet. See DIARIES
Dante Della-Terza is the Irving Babbitt Professor of Comparative Literature at Harvard University. Professor Della-Terza was
born in southern Italy, in a town destroyed by the earthquake of 1980. He studied in Pisa, Zurich and Paris and moved to the
United States in 1959. He taught at UCLA from 1959 to 1963 and joined the Harvard faculty in 1963. Professor Della-Terza is
currently writing about the disappearance of his home town in the earthquake of 1980 and the collective wound it caused.
Readers will identify in the books only the truths they have been able to conquer or preserve by their own efforts. Books say
better on our behalf what life teaches us. They are in a sense ourselves.
Dante Alighieri. The Divine Comedy (ca. 1307-21). New York: Penguin, 1984. (Pb)
I started reading the poem when I was in high school. Our teachers would ask us to memorize entire cantos. In a sense it was a
felicitous coaction since Dante's journey became a part of myself. The lines I learned came to my rescue in time of perplexities
by giving me a sense of direction, a certitude.
Giovanni Boccaccio. The Decameron (ca. 1348). New York: New American Library, 1982. (Pb)
After the first gloomy pages of the book the reader reaches a landscape of rejuvenation, rebirth and revival. A spark of hope
defeats darkness; the world becomes alive again with its doubts and certitudes, its tricks and heroisms, its comic fears and
noble behaviors. It teaches the reader how loving and lovable the world can become.
Ludovico Ariosto. Orlando Furioso (1532). New York: Oxford University Press, 1983. (Pb)
There is a way to escape relativity through evasive attitudes of selfishness, there is a way to absolve in our dreams the deep
sense of our life. Dream becomes a metaphor for life. Ariosto tells with grace and irony a truth about ourselves which is far
stronger than the historical setting that produces it. He has been able to fill poetic dreams with experience and wisdom, hope
and determination.
Michel de Montaigne. Selections from the Essays (1595). Donald M. Frame, ed. and trans. Arlington Heights, Ill.: Harlan
Davidson, 1973. (Pb)
When besieged by endless traps man learns how to grasp values, how to outline intellectual and moral commitments which
represent a frontier of self-preservation. Seldom has a book been written with such literary skill and such implacable lucidity.
Giovanni Battista Vico. Autobiography (1725-28). M. Fisch and T. G. Bergin, trans. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press,
1963. (Pb)
One learns by reading it how a man deprived of skills that could help him to become prominent in a competitive society can
bravely construct an image of the self in which all the deep thoughts, all the world's dreams, are mirrored.
Jeroslav Hasek. The Good Soldier Svejk and His Fortunes in War (1922). Cecil Parrott, trans. Cambridge, Mass.: Robert
Bentley, 1980.
It is perhaps not a very great book. It gives me, however, a sense of comic relief when I am confronted with the arrogance of
the powerful. I owe Hasek many good laughs in gloomy times. I am grateful for it.
Albert Lord
Albert Lord is the Arthur Kingsley Porter Professor of Slavic and Comparative Literature, Emeritus and honorary curator of the
Milman Parry Collection in the Harvard College Library. Though no longer a classroom teacher, he continues to research and
contribute to his field. He devotes much of his time now to the study of Yugoslavian epic song.
I do not claim originality, only truth, in the first two, and possibly the third, but I expect I am unique in the fourth.
William Shakespeare. Shakespeare: Complete Works (1592-1611). Alfred Hasbage, ed. Baltimore: Penguin, 1969.
When I was in high school I read several of Shakespeare's plays and was required to memorize many lines from them. Passages
from Hamlet, Macbeth, Julius Caesar The Merchant of Venice, and As You Like It have stayed with me through the years, and
together with the Bible have formed the backbone of my literary sensibilities. I audited Kittredge's last class in Shakespeare
and added several passages from Othello to my repertory at that time. In my early teaching in the humanities I taught as well
some of the history plays.
Homer. The Iliad (ca. 800 B.C.). Robert Fitzgerald, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975. (Pb)
. The Odyssey (ca. 800 B.c.). Robert Fitzgerald, trans. Franklin Center, Penn.: Franklin Library, 1976.
The Writings of Milman Parry.
If the first book, the Bible, belonged to my family period and the second came from high-school days, both lasting on into adult
life, the third stems from my college years at Harvard in the early 1930s. It was here that my fascination for the Homeric
poems began, and no books have had a more profound effect on my life than they. They have been at the heart of most of my
scholarly activity. They are associated with the name of my primary teacher in Homer and oral-traditional literature, Mil-man
Parry, and his writings have their place here together with the Iliad and the Odyssey.
The Epic of Gilgamesh (seventh century B.c.). R. Campbell Thompson, ed. New York: AMS Press, 1981.
This holds true of the next book, the Epic of Gilgamesh, with its account of acceptance of mortality and its ultimate emphasis
on the life of achievement and of family values. It, too, in my experience is also important as representative of several works
from the ancient Near East, such as Enuma Elish and the Baal epic. These works are basically mythic and as such deal with
fundamental problems of life. And with them, I seem to have returned to the place of my beginning.
Helen Vendler
Helen Vendler is a professor of English at Harvard as well as poetry critic of The New Yorker. She is the author of books on
Yeats, Stevens, Herbert and Keats as well as essays on modern American poetry, collected in Part of Nature, Part of Us. She is
the editor of The Harvard Book of Contemporary American Poets.
The stuff of poetry, the life of the affections, the speculations of the mind and the contradictions of existence, are as alive in
Homer as in us, for readers and writers alike. The patterning of language—present in every culture—seems likely to be with us
'til the end of time.
The poets who have "had a significant influence on thinking and life" for me might not be the right ones for anyone else. In
poetry, affinities are strong and personal links of temperament and disposition. I think others should find for themselves, by
skimming through anthologies, poets who will mean to them what Yeats, Stevens, Herbert, and Keats have meant to me. For
one reader, it will be Whitman, for another, Marvell, for another, Dickinson. As Dickinson said, "The soul selects her own
Society—Then—shuts the Door."
AMERICAN POETRY
Oliver Harris
All American poetry comes from one book by Walt Whitman called Leaves of Grass 1855. With this extraordinary, exuberant
epic, America - the poem - found its first true poet; or rather, it was Whitman who answered the nation's call for an independent
cultural voice. His work was made to match America in scale, energy, democracy, above all in its unlimited sense of possibility,
both material and mystical, sensual and spiritual. His legacy has been twofold. On the one hand, national history betrayed his
bright vision; from the Civil War onwards, the grand rhetoric of America and often the grim reality of it have moved ever
further apart. On the other hand, rebuffed in his own day, considered too `American' to be `poetic', Whitman's time did
eventually come, a century late: Richard Gray's American Poetry of the Twentieth Century (1990) has an entry three times
longer for Whitman than for any other poet. Modernist American poetry, directed by the expatriates Ezra Pound and T S Eliot,
and by the `home-made' William Carlos Williams, did its 'carving' on, as well as with, language. Poetry demanded new, more
active, more demanding, roles from its readers - and this tended to build on the experimentalism of Whitman, at the expense of
his populism.
But is the revolutionary idea of America that has most inspired its poetry to inspire its people. When the 'Beat' poet Allen
Ginsberg writes `America, I'm putting my queer shoulder to the wheel', or the black feminist poet Nikki Giovanni writes 'i wish
i knew how it would feel / to be free', you are listening to the poetic voice of America.
I make a pact with you, Walt Whitman - I have detested you long enough ... It
was you that broke the new wood, Now is a time for carving.
EZRA POUND
Leaves of Grass (1855) by Walt Whitman. Includes his great Song of Myself, a unique work which shouts, whispers, sings,
rants, and absolutely insists on being alive.
The Complete Poems (1955) by Emily Dickinson. All but unpublished in her own lifetime, her poetry is remarkable for its
consistent brevity and density. Utterly idiosyncratic, darkly witty.
The Weary Blues (1926) by Langston Hughes. Best of the 1920s Harlem Renaissance poets, perhaps the first to make poetry
sing with a black voice.
Collected Poems (1963) by T S Eliot. Brilliant, yet hard to enjoy, especially given the too great influence of his heavily
allusive poetic style and his conservative criticism.
Collected Poems (1954) by Wallace Stevens. Lyrical, philosophical poetry, at times exquisitely simple, at others obscure,
always wrestling with the imagination.
Howl and Other Poems (1960) by Allen Ginsberg. Very uneven as a poet is credo the opposite of Eliot's craftsmanship), but
always valuable for his provoking, radical energies.
POETRY ANTHOLOGIES
Anthony Thwaite
Some people affect to despise anthologies of poetry; but for readers just starting out they are a good way of sampling and
sniffing and tasting. The first anthology I bought was Arthur Quiller-Couch's Oxford Book of English Verse. I was 15 and had
just begun to read poems voluntarily, and to try to write them. Quiller-Couch published this book in 1900; and then in 1939,
just before World War II, revised it. It was the revised edition I bought in 1945. The preface was weirdly old-fashioned (`it
were profane to misdoubt the Nine as having forsaken these so long favoured islands'), and so were some of Quiller-Couch's
choices; but the book still has a lot of undisputedly good things in it. However, I don't think I'd recommend it today. I list below
a few anthologies I do recommend.
The New Oxford Book of English Verse (1972) edited by Helen Gardner. This is a full, wide ranging, reliable collection,
from medieval anonymous songs to Dylan Thomas.
Six Centuries of Verse (1984) by Anthony Thwaite. This is a mixture of anthology and comment, historical and critical, which
I put together as a companion to a Thames Television series I was asked to write. It can be read without any knowledge of the
television programmes, and tries to be a sort of guided tour of poetry in English from Chaucer to Philip Larkin and Ted
Hughes, including some Americans, from Poe to Robert Lowell and Sylvia Plath.
The Rattle Bag (1982) edited by Seamus Heaney and Ted Hughes. Intended for `young people', this is a deliberate mix of old
and new poems, arbitrary and jumbled, much as the title suggests. It `is also for those who may feel they have missed their first
chance with poetry and are ready to give it - and themselves - a second chance'.
The Oxford Book of Comic Verse (1994) edited by John Gross. I think this is the best and funniest of the many anthologies of
`comic' (or sometimes `light') verse, particularly brilliant on the 19th and 20th centuries, in which John Gross has found some
little-known gems.
Poets of the English Language (1952) edited by W H Auden and Norman Holmes Pearson. If you ever see a second-hand set of
this five-volume collection, snap it up. This is a majestic full-scale gathering, from Langland to Yeats, much the best overall
anthology. I wish it was still in print.
As for anthologies of contemporary poetry, I don't think there is a single wholly satisfactory one. But it wouldn't be expensive
to buy three Penguins (Contemporary Verse, edited by Kenneth Allott; British Poetry Since 1945, edited by Edward Lucie-
Smith; Contemporary British Poetry, edited by Blake Morrison and Andrew Motion), and then throw in a Bloodaxe
paperback, The New Poetry (1993). These four benveen them pretty well cover the ground.
INDIVIDUAL POETS
Anthony Thwaite
My choice of 12 individual poets is personal without (I hope) being completely eccentric. People who read these lists will
make their own discoveries in the anthologies I've recommended. I have omitted the great quartet (Chaucer, Shakespeare,
Milton, Wordsworth), because I take it for granted that anyone who wants to read poems will have to tackle them some time.
The editions I list are big ones, but all these poets are mostly easily available in a variety of selections as well.
The Poet takes note of nothing that he cannot feel emotionally. My opinion is that
a poet should express the emotion of all the ages and the thought of his own. To
find beauty in ugliness is the province of the poet.
THOMAS HARDY
John Donne (1592-1631): The Complete English Poems (1982) edited by A J Smith Dramatic, immediate, sometimes difficult,
Donne is full of ingenious arguments, whether he is writing about seducing a woman or about God, and he grabs your attention
from the start with his opening words: `Busy old fool, unruly Sun', 'Death, be not proud', ‘What if this present were the world's
last night?'
George Herbert (1593-1633): English Poems (1990) edited by C A Patrides. All the poems he wrote in his maturity, towards
the end of his short life, are religious, specifically Christian. But one doesn't need to share his faith to find Herbert beautifully
convincing in his plain strengths, his ability to think aloud with subtlety and delicacy.
John Wilmot, Earl of Rochester (1647-1680): The Complete Works (1994) edited by Frank H Ellis. This `wicked' aristocrat
was not only one of the most notorious libertines at Charles II's court but a passionate and witty writer of lyrics and satires. I
don't recommend Rochester to those easily shocked.
George Gordon, Lord Byron (1788-1824): The Poems (1963) edited by G Pocock, revised by V de Sola Pinto. I much prefer
the Byron of such poems as Don Juan and Beppo to the high Romantic of Childe Harold's Ptilgrimage: in other words, the
cynical, exuberant, sardonic, mocking, and self-mocking poet. He was as famous for his life as for his works, and it's amazing
how much of both he crowded into his 36 years.
Robert Browning (1812-1889): The Poems (1982) edited by J Pettigrew and T J Collins. The ones to begin with are the
dramatic monologues, such as those in Men and Women, which are like strangely self-contained incidents from lost plays.
Poems like `My Last Duchess' are as gripping as any short story, and at the same time a speaking likeness from the past come
to life.
Alfred Tennyson (1809-1892): The Poems (1989) edited by Christopher Ricks. There's so much variety in Tennyson that it's
hard to know where to begin: the greatest extended elegy in English, In Memoriam; wonderfully musical lyrics (Tears, idle
tears'); brooding monologues; epic Arthurian stuff; and those jaunty poems in Lincolnshire dialect.
Emily Dickinson (1830-1886): The Complete Poems (1976) edited by Thomas H Johnson. The greatest woman poet writing in
English, and in my opinion the greatest American writer. She had no success in her lifetime, but the thousands of tiny poems
she left behind in a box in her New England home include some of the most extraordinary riddling masterpieces about death
and immortality and eternity. The best of them take the top off your head.
Thomas Hardy (1840-1928): Complete Poems (1995) edited by James Gibson. Though he earned his living as a novelist, and
wrote some great novels, Hardy the poet is the writer I prefer. Often a storyteller in his verse, he was also someone who could
catch a moment of truth, of vision, of regret, of lost love, preserving for ever some chilling revelation or one of `life's little
ironies'.
A E Housman (1859-1936): Collected Poems (1939) edited by John Carter. He published only two slim volumes in his
lifetime, and the whole of this collected volume isn't a large one. On the face of it, his poems are simple and repetitive - love is
fleeting, lovers fickle, youth decays into age, death is final. What makes them utterly memorable is their seductive, instantly
recognizable music: `Tell me not here, it needs not saying', `The troubles of our proud and angry dust', `In valleys green and
still'.
T S Eliot (1888-1965): Complete Poems and Plays (1969) by T S Eliot. Eliot was the first 'modern' poet who really caught my
attention, soon after I read that Quiller-Couch anthology (in which he does not appear). And it was The Waste Land that did it. I
don't think that at 16 I understood anything about it - but it seemed to me the most intoxicating thing I had ever read. After 50
years, I can talk fairly learnedly about it; but what remains is the excitement, and indeed the memorable mystery.
W H Auden (1907-1973): Collected Poems (1976, revised edition 1994) edited by Edward Mendelson.. Auden was the great
virtuoso of our century, capable of writing every kind of poem from the intricate intellectual argument to the popular song
('Stop all the clocks, cut off the telephone'). I admire that variety, and his energy, restlessness, verbal and rhythmical skills.
Reading Auden often makes you want to write a poem yourself, because (you think for a wild moment) you can do it too.
Philip Larkin (1922-1985): Collected Poems (1988) edited by A Thwaite. I became besotted with Larkin from the moment I
first properly read him in 1955. Sad, observant, exact, funny, most of his poems work themselves into your memory as if,
somehow, they had always been there - something that is seldom true of most poems at most times.
Politics
Books on "the art of the possible' are prospective or retrospective: programmatically confident about the future, scathing (or,
less often, apologetic) about the past. Meanwhile, the present remains the meeting-point, the inhabited no-man's-land between
philosophy and history, an enclave of contingent circumstance and compromise in which the layman, unfortified by the
professional politician's theory or casuistry, actually has to live. Once or twice in human history (Periclean Athens? Medician
Florence? Founding-fathers' America?) everything seemed (to some, at least) to come momentarily and thrillingly right: theory
fitted circumstance and mood, no-man's land flowered into utopia, and the citizen was served, not ruled. by politics. Why that
happened, and whether it could happen again is in part the subject of this list.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Epstein); ART (Morison); AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Franklin, Kropotkin, Macmillan, Malcom X);
DIARIES (Crossman, Lincoln, Wilson); ECONOMICS (Friedman, Galbraith, Gamble, Glynn, Harrison, Kidron, Marx);
FEMINISM (Evans, Rowbotham, Norris); GEOGRAPHY (Cole); HISTORY/ AMERICAN (Bailyn, Berger, George,
Halberstam, Schlesinger); HISTORY/ANCIENT (Sallust, Thucydides); HISTORY/BRITISH (More, Tawney):
HISTORY/LATIN AMERICAN (Freyre); MEDIA (King); PHILOSOPHY (Hobbes, Mill. Ortega y Gasset); RELIGION
(Hebblethwaite, Struve); SEX (Reich); SOCIOLOGY (Anderson, Bottomore, Marcuse. Wallerstein, Weber)
Hamilton, Alexander, James Madison, and John Jay, American, 1757-1804; 1745-1829; 1751-1836.
The Federalist Papers. (See also American State Papers) Rec: Adler Aquinas Colcc91 (Selections) Fadiman 3 Fadiman 4
GBWW Good Reading SJC (Selections)
Machiavelli, Niccolo The Prince (1514) ! Handbook for enlightening despots stands as a classic analysis of the relationship
between means and ends.
Marx, K. and Engels, F. The Communist Manifesto (1848) !* 12,000 words, the liveliest and most influential in all their
voluminous writings. though Marx's witty 18th Brumaire of Louis Napoleon runs it close. Also: German Ideology; The
Condition of the Working Class in England, etc. See ECONOMICS; SOCIOLOGY (Bottomore. Marx)
Niebuhr, Reinhold Moral and Immoral Society (1932) r Seminal work of political philosophy, influential on many
present-day European politicians and political movements. Niebuhr (a religious philosopher) analyses moral stances of
individuals and groups, and holds that ethical standards appropriate to individuals are not necessarily appropriate to groups.
Also: The Nature and Destiny of Man; Children of Light and Children of Darkness; An Interpretation of Christian Ethics
Oakeshott, Michael Rationalism in Politics and Other Essays (1962) Subtle, elegant essays by one of the outstanding British
conservative political thinkers of the century. Also: Experience and Its Modes; On Human Conduct
Piven, F. F. and Cloward, R. A. Poor People's Movements: Why They Succeed, How They Fail (1977)
A study of four movements in the US to delimit the possibilities of power for the poor in representative democracy.
Challenging conclusion is that success comes through mass defiance rather than formal organization. Also: Regulating the Poor
The Open Society and its Enemies K.R. Popper Historical Dialectic
Marx: Selected Writings D. McLellan Historical Dialectic
Karl Marx F. Wheen Historical Dialectic
Trotsky, Leon The History of the Russian Revolution (1932 -33) The revolution described and interpreted by one of its major
participants. Partisan but never bigoted; patchy but compulsive.
Woodward, B. and Bernstein, C. All the President's Men (1974) Two reporters on the Washington Post uncover Watergate
and win a Pulitzer Prize. A study of political corruption which will live as one of the greatest and most hyped scandals in
politics. Also: The Final Days
Graham T. Allison
Graham T Allison is the dean of Harvard's John F. Kennedy School of Government. He is also the Don K. Price Professor of
Politics, having served as a professor at Harvard since 1972.
Professor Allison's teaching and research concentrate on political analysis, American foreign policy, and ethics and public
policy. His works include Hawks, Doves, and Owls: An Agenda for Avoiding Nuclear War and Essence of Decision:
Explaining the Cuban Missile Crisis.
A North Carolinian educated at Harvard and Oxford, Dean Allison is a director of the Council on Foreign Relations, special
adviser to Secretary of Defense Caspar Weinberger, and a consultant to various government agencies.
Raymond Aron. Peace and War: A Theory of International Relations (1962). Richard Howard and Annette Baker Fox, trans.
Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1966.
A magisterial overview of the stuff of international relations.
Winston S. Churchill. The Second World War, Volume I: The Gathering Storm (1948). Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1983.
An insider's account of the West's failure to prevent the most avoidable world war.
Thomas C. Schelling. The Strategy of Conflict. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1960. (Pb)
The heart of the logic of both conflict and conflict resolution.
Frans De Waal. Chimpanzee Politics: Power and Sex Among Apes. Janet Milnes, trans. New York: Harper & Row, 1983. (Pb)
Insightful analysis of our closest relatives—with whom we share more genes than horses do with zebras.
Hale Champion
Hale Champion continues his many-faceted Harvard career, now as executive dean of the John F Kennedy School of
Government and faculty chairman of the Senior Executive Fellows Program. He began his career as a reporter. In 1958 he
joined Governor Edmund Brown of California as press secretary and then became director of finance. He served as
undersecretary of the Department of Health, Education and Welfare in Washington, D. C from 1977 to 1979.
The challenge of every century (and I hope the twenty-first will not be wholly different) is to keep humanity's ever-increasing
capacity for self-destruction within bounds, and to shape political behavior and governance to that end. Our one best hope is to
understand the human condition better and give it an appropriate politics.
Anthony Powell. A Dance to the Music of Time (1962-75). 12 vols. Boston: Little, Brown, 1976.
This is the life of a modern man in urban society (London), his sensibility, his relationships, his experience and his reflections
over most of the same decades in which I lived. It has, for me, all the values of comparative studies. It is also wonderful
reading.
James MacGregor Burns. Roosevelt: The Lion and the Fox (1956). New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1963. (Pb)
This may not be the most scholarly Roosevelt (FDR) biography, but it came early and strongly shaped my sense of the
intersections of politics and governing at a time that both became permanently part of my emotional life.
Herman Melville. The Confidence-Man: His Masquerade (1857). Herschel Park, ed. New York: W. W. Norton, 1971. (Pb)
Most Melville authorities will tell you that this is one of his worst books; and, indeed, I suppose I would not miss Moby Dick
for it. But its black humor is that of the spirit of American political life, outrageous, surrealistic, and full of promises, false and
true, kept and unkept, often not even intended. It is the torturous truth about that side of the American political character that
produced Andrew Jackson, Lyndon Johnson, Warren G. Harding, Ronald Reagan, and thousands of others.
Leo Tolstoy. War and Peace (1865-69). Louise Maude and Aylmer Maude, trans. George Gibian, ed. New York: W. W. Norton,
1966.
In my view, the most memorable statement of the relationship between men and history, between individuals and events, in all
fiction. This is passionate objectivity.
Richard E. Neustadt. Presidential Power (1960). New York: Wiley, 1980. (Pb)
This is the revised version: the first edition was the first time political science ever really spoke to me with a sure sense of both
large societal purpose and the nuances of institutional responses.
Alexander Hamilton, John Jay, and James Madison. The Federalist [Papers] (1788). Benjamin F. Wright, ed. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press, 1961.
Most of our intergovernmental literature is a kind of shifting Sargasso Sea not worth ploughing through. There aren't better
insights or more ingenious polemics anywhere than in these originals.
John T. Dunlop
John Dunlop is the Lamont University Professor at Harvard University. A mediator and arbitrator in labor-management matters,
Mr. Dunlop served as the secretary of labor from 1975 to 1976. He was director of the Cost of Living Council during 1973 and
1974, prior to which he was dean of Harvard's Faculty of Arts and Sciences.
The books all deal, I believe, with persistent and continuing issues, with reflection and action, with reflection and expression,
and with individual and group relations.
Alfred North Whitehead. Science and the Modern World (1925). New York: Free Press, 1967. (Pb)
The lectures consider the aspects of Western culture that have been influenced by the development of modern science. "The
mentality of an epoch springs from the view of the world which is, in fact, dominant in the educated sections of the
communities.- I have often cited Whitehead's emphasis that "the new tinge to modern minds is a vehement and passionate
interest in the relation of general principles to irreducible and stubborn facts.-
Samuel Eliot Morison. Admiral of the Ocean Sea: A Life of Christopher Columbus (1942). Boston: Northeastern University
Press, 1983. (Pb)
The detailed account of Columbus's voyages of discovery are inherently interesting, but they also provide a suggestive
counterpoint to the opportunities and the problems of other voyages of discovery—in the realm of the mind or in organizational
building. The process of discovery is of consuming interest and importance.
Talcott Parsons. The Structure of Social Action (1937). New York: Free Press, 1968. (Pb)
The relations of economics to other systems of social analysis and social behavior is a continuing problem of the first
magnitude to anyone concerned with the economic aspects of behavior. The comparative study of the thought of Alfred
Marshall, Vilfredo Pareto, Emile Durkheim and Max Weber is instructive to this continuing problem of the relations of
economics to other social analysis. Modern economists too seldom consider these issues.
Joyce Cary. Art and Reality: Ways of the Creative Process (1958). Freeport, N.Y.: Books for Libraries Press, 1970.
This volume has helped me to understand and to appreciate the necessary gap between intuition and expression, between the
privacy of creation and imagination and the attempt to express in concept and in language. This is a continuing problem of
creativity of ideas or institutions.
Roscoe Pound. Social Control Through Law (1942). Hamden, Conn.: Archon, 1968.
Irrespective of this analysis, the problem of social control of individual and group or organizational behavior is a continuing
problem of tension in all societies and particularly in Western societies with their values. The secularization of control and its
consequences is a persistent concern.
Theodore Reik. Listening with the Third Ear (1948). Garden City, N.Y.: Garden City Books, 1951.
In the work of dispute resolution, as well as in common discourse, interpreting what parties say and what they really mean is of
fundamental importance. Reflection on this process of distinguishing the two is of continuing significance to reflection and
action.
Christopher Edley
Professor Edley's primary areas of teaching and research at the Harvard Law School are administrative law and public policy.
He is also actively involved in a number of projects related to racial justice and poverty. He served in the Carter administration
as assistant director of the White House domestic policy staff responsible for income-maintenance and social-services policy.
He joined the Harvard faculty in 1981, and hopes to spend much of his career in the public sector.
Of the genuinely uncertain questions facing the United States, the problem of color and social justice seems to me more urgent
and demanding than any, except avoidance of nuclear and environmental catastrophe. Three of these books offer important
insights on that problem. But instead of preaching a policy program, they teach a creative sensitivity. Justice Accused and
Simple Justice do this while portraying law and lawyers in works that should be required reading for anyone remotely involved
or interested in law.
Robert M. Cover. Justice Accused. Antislavery and the Judicial Process (1975). New Haven: Yale University Press, 1984. (Pb)
The project and its execution are deeply important: the tension between the formal demands of the rule of law, and an
individual's sense of truer justice. Cover's wonderful exploration of the judicial administration of slavery offers both moving
accounts of individuals pressed to apply laws they abhorred, and an enlightening exploration of underlying themes concerning
legal positivism, natural justice, and the failings of legal science. Justice Accused is only incidentally about a historical subject,
because contradictions between law's stated commitment to justice and the realities of oppression are so familiar. Finally,
Cover's powerful methodology can serve as a model for examination of contemporary legal and social questions. He has
greatly influenced my own views about law and about scholarship.
Richard Kluger. Simple Justice (1975). New York: Random House, 1977. (Pb)
This is what "a life in the law" is supposed to be about. Kluger gives a historical account of the litigation battles leading up to
the Supreme Court's 1954 decision in Brown v. Board of Education, but it reads like a best-selling novel. It's a rich, instructive,
and inspiring account of noble lawyering. For me as a black lawyer a generation and a half too young to have been in those
battles, it's a compelling exploration of my professional and political roots. Just in telling a story and introducing some genuine
heroes, Simple Justice speaks mountains of truth.
Malcolm X. The Autobiography of Malcolm X (1965). New York: Ballantine Books, 1977.
Even if I had not been a teenager, my first reading of Malcolm X would have served as something of a lightning rod,
dramatically focusing a variety of impressions, frustrations, angers and hopes. I doubt that it actually had concrete effects on
my sense of values or my life goals—too many other forces were at work to isolate any one or two books. But even if it did not
change me, this book helped me to know myself and to appreciate better the conditions of Black America.
Josef Maria Jauch. Foundations of Quantum Mechanics. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1968.
I offer this book not for itself, but for what it represents. As an undergraduate at Swarthmore College I majored in mathematics
(though I always planned on law school). Jauch's was one of several books that brought me face to face with my intellectual
limits. I worked for hours to understand half a page, and for weeks to understand just a handful of pages, feeling myself
stretched to the maximum, yet often falling short. My well-worn excuses (too tired, too busy; unprepared, uncommitted) were
unavailable. It was a pure test of a certain kind of ability. The experience of the testing, as much as the results, proved crucial in
my constitution. I gained new stores of patience, humility and, strangely, confidence. Mathematics has a pure aesthetic, and is
cruelly judgmental when your inadequacies are bared. It may be that not all fields offer such pure tests, but they should be
sought out wherever available.
Martin A. Linsky
Martin Linsky. a lecturer in public policy at Harvard's John F. Kennedy School of Government and a former Massachusetts
state representative and newspaper editor. specializes in teaching and research in the areas of the press and legislatures. His
most recent work is Impact: How the Press Affects Federal Policy Making (1986).
Plato. The Republic (370-360 B.C.). James Adam, ed. 2 vols. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1963.
I read Plato's Republic in a seminar the second semester of my sophomore year at college. It taught me that there are some
important questions to ask, that just because there are questions it doesn't mean that there are answers, and that even if there
are. the questions and the questioning might be more important anyway.
Walter Lippmann. Public Opinion (1922). New York: Free Press, 1965. (Pb)
No one before Walter Lippmann or since has understood as well the dilemmas in a free society which arise out of the complex
relationships among the governors, the governed and the mass media. When I finished Public Opinion, I knew that somehow it
would be with me the rest of my life, and so it has.
James D. Barber. The Lawmakers: Recruitment and Adaptation to Legislative Life (1965). Westport, Conn.: Greenwood
Press. 1980.
As a legislator, I was always frustrated by the gap between my own view of the integrity and inherent worth of the legislative
process and what I perceived to be the conventional wisdom about how awful legislatures were. The Lawmakers, which Barber
wrote originally as his Ph.D. thesis at Yale, was the first book I found that tried to understand legislators and legislatures on
their own terms as they really are, rather than as they might be in some theoretical world conjured up by academics or good-
government types. Barber listened to what legislators had to say. Even though the book was published back in 1965, it still is
unique in illuminating my favorite part of government.
Henry Beetle Hough. Country Editor (1940). Greenwich, Conn.: Chatham, 1974. (Pb)
Country Editor made me realize that one could live an intense, engaged professional life and a calm, secure private life at the
same time. I'm not sure that I really believed it was possible before, and the book has become a kind of guidepost for
maintaining the balance.
Richard Harris. Freedom Spent. Boston: Little, Brown, 1976 (out of print). Appeared in The New Yorker. 17 and 24
June 1974; 18 August 1975; 3, 10 and 17 November 1975; and 5, 12 and 19 April 1976.
Freedom Spent is important to me for two reasons: first, it is the most powerful reaffirmation of the values inherent in the Bill
of Rights that I have ever read. Second, it is brilliant writing and reporting—my own model of great journalism, where the
author drives you to the conclusion not by rhetoric or exhortation, but by the power of the reporting, the facts and the narrative.
George C. Lodge
George Lodge has been a member of the Harvard Business School faculty since 1961, after service in the Eisenhower and
Kennedy administrations. He is the author of six books discussing labor unions, change in Latin America, ideology and social
change and ideological transition. He continues to research, write about and teach issues regarding ideology and social change.
His books include U.S. Competitiveness in the World Economy, edited with Bruce R. Scott, and a forthcoming work with Ezra
Vogel on comparative ideology.
I have found these books especially useful in understanding both the obstacles to change in various communities and the means
of overcoming those obstacles. Whatever the twenty-first century brings it will certainly include change.
F. S. C. Northrop. The Meeting of East and West. New York: Oxbow, 1979. (Pb)
Northrop showed me how to perceive the effects of religious, scientific, philosophical and other traditions in the practices of
nations. He was particularly helpful to me in my early efforts to develop the concept of ideology for the integrated study of
national systems.
Louis Hartz. The Liberal Tradition in America. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1962. (Pb)
From Hartz I learned of the pervasive influence of John Locke in the development of government and business in the United
States.
Samuel P. Huntington. Political Order in Changing Societies (1968). New Haven: Yale University Press, 1969. (Pb)
Here is a beautifully clear analysis of the historical roots of different nations and of how those roots flowered into various
institutional forms and behavior.
Crawford B. MacPherson. The Political Theory of Possessive Individualism: Hobbes to Locke. Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1962. (Pb)
This book was especially helpful in its analysis of how Locke overcame his original constraints on the rights to and the uses of
property. It helps to explain contemporary arguments about the purposes of the corporation.
Thomas S. Kuhn. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (1962). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970. (Pb)
Kuhn's use of the notion of a "paradigm" helped me to develop a comparable one of ideology, and to explore its uses in
understanding the environment of business.
Karl Mannheim. Ideology and Utopia (1929). L. Wirth and G. Shils, trans. San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1985. (Pb)
This book gave me a definition of ideology and a way to use it in the systemic analysis of communities which has been most
useful in my thinking and teaching about the roles and relationships of government, business and labor.
Roderick MacFarquhar
Roderick MacFarquhar has been a print, radio and TV journalist (1955-67), editor of The China Quarterly (1959-68) and
member of the British Parliament (197479). He is now professor of government in Harvard's Department of Government.
Some—but not all—of the following books are classics which will last. Each individual and generation has their own
signposts. But taken together, my books underline the urgency of getting our act together so that we actually reach the twenty-
first century, while the Fairbank volume indicates the nature of a nation that will be increasingly important on the world scene
after A.D. 2000.
C. E. M. Joad. Introduction to Modern Political Theory (1924). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1953.
C. E. M. Joad's Introduction to Modern Political Theory was published by Oxford University Press in 1924 in "The World's
Manuals" series. I borrowed it from my father when I was sixteen and found myself quickly persuaded of the virtues of
socialism (and leaning toward guild socialism), which I suspect may have been Joad's objective. Although Britons were already
beginning to complain at the shortages and the controls the Labour government had to introduce in the difficult postwar years,
socialism simply seemed fairer than the prewar system, and more likely to free Britain of the shackles of the class system. I
eventually joined the Labour party, became a Labour member of Parliament, and only left the party for the Social Democrats
after its post-1979 swing toward the Marxist left.
Emery Reyes. The Anatomy of Peace (1945). Magnolia, Mass.: Peter Smith, 1969.
I read Emery Reves's Anatomy of Peace when I was seventeen and became a lifelong convert to the ideal of world government
as the only sure way to avert international warfare. It seemed to me that the Europeans, who had invented the modern nation-
state and used it as the vehicle of wars that had spread far outside their continent, had a special responsibility in striving to end
the nation-state era. I became an activist in British organizations set up to persuade our countrymen to participate in the
emerging European institutions, the ultimate objective of which was to prevent any further European wars.
Arthur Koestler. Darkness at Noon (1940). Daphne Hardy, trans. New York: Bantam, 1970. (Pb)
Arthur Koestler's Darkness at Noon inoculated me and a whole generation of Oxford students (who had not lived through the
Moscow purges of the 1930s) against any illusions about Soviet communism.
W. Olaf Stapledon. Last and First Men (1930). Boston: Gregg, 1976.
Olaf Stapledon's Last and First Men. which was one of the first science-fiction works I read, predicted the first world state
being formed after a Sino—American war and then collapsing in an energy crisis, leading to the disappearance of the "first
men," us. It made me realize that if one thinks in a long enough perspective (in his case millions of years), the disappearance of
civilization as we know it was far from unthinkable.
William G. Golding. Lord of the Flies (1954). New York: Putnam, 1978.
Robert Jungk. Brighter Than a Thousand Suns (1954). James Cleugh, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1970. (Pb)
I was reminded vividly of Stapledon's grim vision a decade later when reading Lord of the Flies by William Golding and
Brighter Than a Thousand Suns by Robert Jungk, a sobering read for a summer holiday. Golding pointed to a darkness of the
soul buried within us, Jungk to the human frailties of the scientists who are our guides in the nuclear era. These books
underlined for me the urgency of seeking disarmament agreements between the superpowers.
John K. Fairbank. The United States and China (1958). 4th ed. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1983. (Pb)
John Fairbank's United States and China was my first window on the magnificence of Chinese civilization and its modern fate.
I think it remains the best short introduction to the subject for student and general reader alike.
Thomas K. McCraw
Thomas McCraw was educated in Mississippi and Wisconsin. He taught history at the University of Texas from 1970 to 1976,
then went to the Harvard Business School. There, he teaches courses in business-government relations and writes books and
articles that take cross-disciplinary and cross-national approaches to this same broad subject. His most recent book, Prophets of
Regulation, was awarded the Pulitzer Prize for History in 1985.
Obviously, the list I have presented below is a very personal one. My advice to any student, of any age, is to read widely but
selectively, discovering for yourself the books that resonate with your own experiences and aspirations. For the twenty-first
century, some of these books obviously have not yet been written. Some actually may have to be done not by others but by you
yourself.
David E. Lilienthal. TVA: Democracy on the March (1954). Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977.
Written by a New Deal technocrat, this book represented a wartime effort to demonstrate that American democracy could be as
"efficient" as Fascism. For that reason, Lilienthal oversold his subject and drifted into the realm of propaganda. Even so, when
I read the book, I realized for the first time that I myself had grown up in the midst of a genuine American epic. My father, an
engineer with the Tennessee Valley Authority from 1933 until 1971, had been wholly dedicated to his many TVA projects and
had become a master of the difficult art of managing giant construction works. He had done this at the personal cost of
spending his life in an endless series of small towns in Appalachia—a cost shared by the rest of the family. Lilienthal's book,
flawed though it is, made me understand that the sacrifices endured by our own family, and many like us, had been well worth
the cost. When I became a historian, I wrote two small books on the TVA myself: partly to redress the imbalance created by
Lilienthal's own volume, and partly to explore the complex subject of business—government relations in modern America.
Richard Hofstadter. Anti-Intellectualism in American Life (1963). New York: Random House, 1966. (Pb)
Though not the best of Hofstadter's many influential books, this one helped me determine my own vocation. I read and reread it
as a young naval officer contemplating careers in law, medicine or college teaching in history or literature. Hofstadter's
approach in this book, though condescending and off-putting, demonstrated for me that one could be a historian without losing
touch with literature: that, indeed, any such separation would be nothing less than stupid, because it would tend to separate
ideas from behavior and individuals from historical movements.
David M. Potter. People of Plenty: Economic Abundance and the American Character. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1954. (Pb)
In this brief, highly interpretive book, Potter attempts to synthesize the meaning of America around the theme of comparative
affluence. Although his quantitative data are now obsolete, his book will endure, for several reasons. First, Potter insisted on a
cross-disciplinary approach. He became one of the first important historians to draw systematically on other social sciences
such as sociology and anthropology, in addition to economics and political science. Second, People of Plenty is an explicitly
cross-national study. Potter broke the traditional mold of histories focused solely on the United States, and tried to place
American culture in its broader world context. In the process, he drew brilliantly not only on other disciplines, but also on
foreign commentaries concerning the American character, such as the great work of de Tocqueville. Overall, the book provides
a model of open-minded wisdom and bold but unpretentious interpretation.
Walker Percy. The Last Gentleman (1966). New York: Avon, 1978. (Pb)
. The Moviegoer (1961). New York: Avon, 1979. (Pb)
These two books, together with several subsequent ones by Percy, represent attempts to express modern philosophy through the
literary form of the novel. Such a fusion, long a central aspect of European culture, has remained underdeveloped in the United
States. Percy himself came to it only in middle age, after a noncareer as a dilettante and physician who declined to practice
medicine. Influenced by Kierkegaard, Heidegger, and the French existentialists of the 1940s, Percy immersed himself
simultaneously in an odd amalgam of European literature and American popular culture. For many years, he experimented with
different literary forms, until finally he developed, through his novels, a poignant, powerfully affecting way of articulating the
central paradoxes of modern life: that affluence, for those who have achieved it, does not necessarily lead to a more satisfying
emotional condition; that the impact of science on humanistic values has proved of little help and considerable harm; and that
the very nature and purpose of man remain as elusive and mysterious now as they were in premodern times.
Alfred D. Chandler, Jr. Strategy and Structure. Cambridge, Mass.: M.I.T. Press, 1962. (Pb)
More than any other single work, this one shows how certain types of corporations grew to giant size, then diversified their
product lines, all the while remaining under the control of a new class of salaried managers. The book is made up of four
careful case studies, followed by a much larger sample, of which Chandler asks a series of simple but penetrating questions. In
carrying off this ingenious inquiry, the author framed a model of comparative organizational evolution that, in turn, has
profoundly influenced research and teaching in many disciplines: history, sociology, economics, and business administration.
Chandler himself is the greatest scholar with whom I have worked (for more than a decade now), and his influence continues to
exert itself not only through the "organizational school" of historians, of which he is the dean, but equally in his own great
books written after Strategy and Structure. These include The Visible Hand and a forthcoming cross-national study tentatively
titled Scale and Scope.
Robert H. Bork. The Antitrust Paradox: A Policy at War with Itself (1978). New York: Basic Books, 1980. (Pb)
Although I found myself offended by Bork's arrogant neoconservative viewpoint, his powerful argument jelled much of my
thinking about the historical ironies of antitrust. As I have now begun to suggest in my own books, antitrust policy in America,
though quite often as misguided as Bork asserts, frequently produced unintended but therapeutic effects that made American
business more efficient: not through any replication of the Smithian model of perfect competition—the presumed theory behind
antitrust—but instead by forcing American corporations to innovate organizationally, as a means of avoiding illegal car
telization. In this way, antitrust actually helped to turn certain American companies into the world's most efficient economic
organizations between 1880 and 1960. During and after the 1960s, the advent of global competition made the story a good deal
more complex, and this is the focus of my own current work.
Mark Moore
Mark Moore is the Guggenheim Professor of Criminal Justice Policy and Management. He is also faculty chairman of the
Executive Programs at the Kennedy School of Government. His policy interests lie in the area of crime and the criminal justice
system—the design of police strategies and the use of deceptive and coercive investigative methods. He is the author of Buy
and Bust: The Effective Regulation of an Illicit Market in Heroin.
There are two kinds of people in the world: those who live off of institutions, and those who build the capacity of institutions to
perform and develop the talents of other individuals. These books are designed to equip one to become the second kind of
individual.
Aristotle. The Politics (ca. 335 B.C.). Carnes Lord, trans. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984.
This is the classic statement of why men form institutions and the benefits they derive from them. It includes the heretical idea
that one of the purposes of institutions is to encourage virtue among those who live within them.
Thomas S. Kuhn. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (1962). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970. (Pb)
This book establishes the social basis of all knowledge and understanding of the world. It pays tribute to scientific
"revolutionaries" who insist on seeing the world differently and reveals the crushing power of "normal" science. But it reminds
us that, in the end, even science is a social and political process.
Robert M. Pirsig. Zen and the Art of Motorcycle Maintenance (1974). New York: Morrow, 1979. (Pb)
This book brilliantly evokes the intellectual and personal challenges of seeking to integrate "technical" and "aesthetic"
intuitions in the pursuit of understanding what "quality" is all about.
Richard E. Neustadt. Presidential Power (1960). New York: Wiley. 1980. (Pb)
This book is important primarily as a text in "public" management—as potentially useful to state welfare commissioners as to
presidents. It is also a model of both method and style for all those who would write about public management.
Richard E. Neustadt
Richard E. Neustadt is the Lucius N. Littauer Professor of Public Policy at Harvard's Kennedy School of Government and
formerly a professor of government at Columbia University. He is a foreinost scholar on the American presidency, having
served on the White House staff under President Truman and as consultant to Presidents Kennedy and Johnson on various
problems of organization and operation, both domestic and international. His writings include: The Epidemic that Never Was
(with Harvey Fineberg), Alliance Politics, Presidential Power, and his most recent work, Thinking in Time, coauthored with
Ernest May.
Whatever their relationship to governance, whether doing it or subjects of it, readers need to understand the essence of the
thing as it has seemed to be up to their time.
Nicollo Machiavelli. The Prince (1513). Peter E. Bondanella and Mark Musa, trans. New York: Oxford University Press, 1984.
A plea, in the form of a guide, for maximizing political power on sixteenth-century Tuscan terms by an Italian patriot out of
office, wishing he were in, concerned for strength to rally the Italian city-states against the dangers of French domination. His
realistic acceptance of the evil in political means and its inevitability, indeed indispensability, in striving for heroic ends has
shocked critics of politics for five hundred years, yet gain the book its status as what Isaiah Berlin called the first work of
modern political science.
Max Weber. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology (1946). H. H. Gerth and C. Wright Mills, eds. and trans. New York:
Oxford University Press, 1979. (Pb)
Particularly the essay on "Politics as a Vocation": a moving characterization of the ethical dilemma of the human being called
to exercise political power over other humans . . a Machiavellian dilemma, the Prince being human too, not divine. Weber
distinguishes "living for" politics, the calling, from living off it, a mere job. A commensurate "ethic of responsibility" is
distinguished from ethics for private life; their ultimate convergence is portrayed with tragic feeling.
Alexander Hamilton, John Jay, and James Madison. The Federalist [Papers] (1788). Benjamin F. Wright, ed. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press, 1961. (Pb)
Papers rationalizing and justifying the U.S. Constitution of 1787 (to influence debates over ratification), these constitute
collectively a profound assessment of the nature, uses, needs for, dangers in, correctives to—and, by implication, ineradicable
dilemmas of—human governance in secular societies legitimized by popular sovereignty.
Henry Adams. The Education of Henry Adams (1907). Ernest Samuels, ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1973. (Pb)
A rich, knotty, idiosyncratic evocation of what time, as it speeds up with the industrial and scientific revolutions, does to
values, attitudes, institutions and elites in nineteenth- and early twentieth-century America, and to the terms and conditions of
employment on which political power can be held, and by whom —all from the standpoint of a specially invested historian,
grandson of the sixth, great-grandson of the second U.S. president.
David B. Truman. The Governmental Process (1951). New York: Knopf, 1968.
An indispensable clarification of the roles of potential and organized interests in American public life—and by extension in any
political system—taking off from insights in "Federalist 10." Multiple membership in overlapping and competing interest
groups, and attitudes amounting to rules of the game, keep citizens from splitting into wholly separate groups and groups from
splitting into wholly separate governments.
William Shakespeare. Henry IV, parts I and 2 and Henry V (1596-99). Arthur Quiller-Couch et al., eds. New York: Cambridge
University Press, 1965. (Pb)
The terms and conditions of employment for kings and crown princes (whether monarchical or not)—pleasures and pains,
uncertainties and fears, pains and frustrations included—couched in sixteenth-century terms but evocative of twentieth-century
counterparts. Personal, intellectual, moral and managerial dilemmas associated with the wielding of supreme political authority,
or waiting in the wings for it, are strikingly portrayed.
Richard D. Parker
Richard Parker is a professor of constitutional law and criminal law at the Harvard Law School. He is well known to his
colleagues for his eclectic interests and voracious reading. Before joining the Harvard Law faculty he practiced law in Paris
and clerked for Justice Potter Stewart.
Friedrich Nietzsche. The Birth of Tragedy (1872). Walter Kaufmann, trans. New York: Random House, 1967.
A "scholarly" discourse on Greek tragedy that boldly celebrates the passionate, the lyrical, the personal—as contrasted to the
dryly rational, the "soundly" balanced, the impersonal "virtue" of mainstream scholarship.
Alan J. P. Taylor. English History, 1914-1945 (1965). New York: Oxford University Press, 1985.
Exemplifies a kinetic vision of politics and history expressed idiosyncratically and provocatively and joining detailed
sensitivity to contingencies with insistence on simple, deep structural tendencies.
Roberto M. Unger. Knowledge and Politics. New York: Free Press, 1975. (Pb)
An amazingly comprehensive, ambitious and mind-opening critique of liberalism combining (once again) systematics and
bold, passionate commitment.
Alexander M. Bickel. The Least Dangerous Branch: The Supreme Court at the Bar of Politics (1962). New Haven: Yale
University Press, 1986.
The best book so far on American constitutional law, exploring—in a highly personal style—the politics at the heart of the law.
James Agee and Walker Evans. Let Us Now Praise Famous Men (1941). New York: Ballantine, 1974. (Pb)
A cumulatively stunning expression and evocation of passionate, lyrical, personal idealism, embedded in a concrete description
of the texture of sharecroppers' lives.
Vladimir Nabokov. Lolita (1955). Berkeley, Calif.: Berkeley Press, 1984. (Pb)
A beautiful novel-of-authenticity, fusing romantic and empirical sensibilities in a way rather like the first two, otherwise
dissimilar, books I have listed.
Robert B. Reich
Robert B. Reich teaches political economy and management at Harvard's John E Kennedy School of Government. Mr. Reich is
the author of numerous books and articles concerning the relationships among law, politics and economics. Among his most
recent books are New Deals: The Chrysler Revival and the American System and The Next American Frontier. A former
Rhodes Scholar, Professor Reich has served in Washington as assistant to the solicitor general and as director of policy
planning for the Federal Trade Commission.
Whether the immediate problem is described as arms control, Soviet expansionism, economic growth and competitiveness or
social justice to the poor and disadvantaged—the deeper issue is the same. That is, how should we define the border between
"us" and "them"? Our overarching goal must be to expand the first realm ("us"), and contract the second ("them"). These books
suggest how we might begin this formidable task.
Fernand Braudel. Civilization and Capitalism, 15th-18th Century (1967, 1982-84). Sian Reynolds, trans. 3 vols. New York:
Harper & Row, 1985, 1986. (Pb)
Braudel weaves detailed threads into stirring tapestries. These volumes reveal the fragility of our societies—their
vulnerabilities to war, plague and human misery—but also, wondrously, their capacity to endure. Braudel is a master.
Ellis W. Hawley. The New Deal and the Problem of Monopoly, 1934-1938 (1959). Princeton: Princeton University Press,
1966. (Pb)
Hawley unwraps politics and finds economics. He then unwraps economics and finds ideology. He peers through ideology and
discovers our most basic hopes and fears for ourselves, our families and our nation. His insights explain much of our current
condition.
Joseph A. Schumpeter. Capitalism, Socialism, and Democracy (1942). New York: Harper & Row, 1983. (Pb)
This rich inkblot of a book is many different things to many different people. But above all else it suggests that the political and
economic universe we inhabit is in flux: it grows on itself, reaching outward in many directions at once, like organic matter.
Instead of equilibrium, there is omnipresent disequilibrium. Instead of secured values, there is the constant danger that values
we hold dear will be subsumed.
Samuel P. Huntington. American Politics: The Promise of Disharmony (1981). Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1983.
(Pb)
Huntington skillfully identifies the yearnings at the heart of American politics. As a nation, we are always "to be," we never
are. We feel, alternatively, guilt, anxiety, anger and resolution about our ideals. But we are animated by myths that can never be
fulfilled. A powerful and critically important book.
John Kenneth Galbraith. The Affluent Society (1958). New York: New American Library, 1978. (Pb)
As fresh and insightful today as it was thirty years ago. Galbraith reconfigures our way of thinking about a nation's economy
and the society of which the economy is but a part. How do we define economic success? What do we want for ourselves,
anyway? The influence of this book, and of the towering figure behind it, cannot be overstated.
Mark Twain. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884). New York: Harper & Row, 1984. (Pb)
I have learned more about American society, and, not incidentally, human nature, from reading and rereading Huck's accounts
of life on the Mississippi River than I have from any other single source. His knowledge always runs deep; his insights are on
target; he can smell duplicity from a mile away.
Michael J. Sandel
Michael J. Sandel is an associate professor of government at Harvard, where he teaches political philosophy. He is the author
of Liberalism and the Limits of Justice. His course 'justice" consistently fills Sanders Theater, and he is regarded by
undergraduates as one of Harvard's best lecturers.
These seem to be among the books that can help us reflect on the moral and political conditions of liberal democracy in
contemporary America.
Hannah Arendt. The Human Condition (1958). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970. (Pb)
Arendt offers the most compelling modern case for the ancient claim that politics is essential to the good life, not merely
instrumental to the pursuit of private interests and ends.
Sir Isaiah Berlin. Four Essays on Liberty (1969). New York: Oxford University Press, 1979. (Pb)
Berlin grounds liberalism in the idea that the human good is ultimately plural, that there is no single, overarching value that
orders all the rest. To acknowledge the tragic possibility that inheres in moral and political life is to respect above all people's
freedom to pursue their own ends, to negotiate their own moral circumstance.
G. W. F. Hegel. Philosophy of Right (Grundlinien der Philosophic des Rechts, 1821). T. M. Knox, trans. Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1965.
Hegel contrasts the idea of a civil society, where people cooperate to further their interests, with the idea of a political
community as an ethical life that enlarges the self-knowledge of the participants.
Fred Hirsch. Social Limits to Growth. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1976. (Pb)
Hirsch recasts economics as political economy, and political economy as moral economy. Cost-benefit analysis to the contrary,
he shows that the market is not a neutral way of evaluating goods. Not all values can be translated without loss into commodity
values, nor does all economic growth produce greater welfare.
Michael J. Oakeshott. Rationalism in Politics and Other Essays (1962). New York and London: Methuen, 1981. (Pb)
Oakeshott's romantic conservatism contrasts powerfully (and eloquently) with more familiar libertarian versions. Against a
philosophy of abstract principles and natural rights, he conceives politics "as the pursuit of intimations."
John Rawls. A Theory of Justice (1971). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1972.
Rawls provides the most important philosophical defense of liberalism in our time. Individual rights cannot be overridden by
utilitarian considerations, he argues, and the principles of justice that specify our rights do not presuppose any particular
conception of the good life.
Samuel Thorne
Fifty-five years ago, Sam Thorne graduated from the Harvard Law School, where he now serves as the Charles Stebbins
Fairchild Professor of Legal History Emeritus. He has lectured "to generations" on medieval legal history. He wonders if
today's parents read to their children as his parents read Sir Walter Scott to him.
The books listed had a significant influence on me, sixty years ago, opening up a new field. They are superseded and out of
date today, their place being taken by more recent studies.
H. A. L. Fisher. Frederic William Maitland, Downing Professor of the Laws of England: A Biographical Sketch. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1910.
A biography of the great legal historian, which awakened and then nurtured my interest in the field on which my life has been
spent.
Edward Pollock and Frederic W. Maitland. The History of English Law Before the Time of Edward I (1895). 2 vols. New
York: Cambridge University Press, 1968. (Pb)
A magnificent survey of the field, which may be understood by any literate layman, written in a style that is sure to enthuse the
reader.
Oliver Wendell Holmes, Jr. The Common Law (1881). Boston: Little, Brown, 1964. (Pb)
A valuable account of some of the great formative ideas of English law. It was one of the eye-opening books on law; one that I
read a number of times with the greatest interest.
C. H. Mcllwain. The High Court of Parliament and Its Supremacy (1910). J. P. Mayer, ed. Salem, N.H.: Ayer, 1979.
A work which threw new light on the history of Parliament and set its history in a new frame. It provided a fresh point of
departure and set the stage for much new and exciting work.
Heinrich Brunner. Die Entstehung der Schwurgerichte (1871). Aalan (Germany): Scientia Verlag. 1967.
An epoch-making treatise. For many years the best authority on the history of the jury which set the much-disputed question in
a new light.
James Q. Wilson
James Wilson is the Henry Lee Shattuck Professor of Government at Harvard University and professor of management at the
University of California, Los Angeles. Prior to these appointments, Professor Wilson was chairman of Harvard's Task Force on
the Core Curriculum from 1976 to 1977; chairman of the Department of Government from 1969 to 1973; and director of the
Joint Center for Urban Studies of MIT. and Harvard from 1963 to 1966. An expert on crime and the penal system, Professor
Wilson has served on numerous commissions and task forces including the attorney general's 1981 Task Force on Violent
Crime and the 1967 White House Task Force on Crime.
Aristotle. The Politics (ca. 335 B.c.). Carnes Lord, trans. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984.
The greatest statement of human nature and political life ever written.
Alexander Hamilton, John Jay, and James Madison. The Federalist [Papers] (1788). Benjamin F. Wright, ed. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press, 1961. (Pb)
A brilliant subtle argument for a non-Aristotelian regime.
Chester I. Barnard. The Functions of the Executive (1938). Thirtieth anniversary ed. Cambridge: Harvard University Press,
1968. (Pb)
After nearly fifty years, it is still the best account of what it means to maintain cooperative human activity.
Philip Selznick. Leadership in Administration: A Sociological Interpretation (1957). Berkeley: University of California Press,
1983. (Pb)
The runner-up to Barnard.
James Boswell. The Life of Samuel Johnson (1791). New York: Random House, 1964. (Pb)
A brilliant account of how a man may sustain a powerful moral vision in an imperfect world.
Fyodor Dostoevsky. The Brothers Karamazov (1915). Andrew MacAndrew, trans. New York: Bantam, 1981. (Pb)
An eerie foretelling of the notion of ideological fanaticism and totalitarianism.
Early Hydraulic Civilization in Egypt "K. Butzer, L. Freeman" The State
The Sources of Social Power M. Mann The State
Chiefdoms T.K. Earle The State
"The Elements of Law, Natural and Politic" J.C.A. Gaskin State of Nature
Nature and Politics A. Rapaczynski State of Nature
Lord of the Flies W. Golding State of Nature
Whatever our views about the way we are governed and the people who occupy positions of power, the business of government
is something we cannot avoid: it is all-pervading. Despite this, there is an alarming degree of ignorance and apathy about the
institutions and workings of government and the political process itself. The teaching of government in schools is generally not
well done, apart from some notable exceptions. The dilemma facing teachers and educational authorities is that of achieving
impartiality and balance. They feel they must lean over backwards to avoid charges of political bias and yet, in truth, to try to
understand government without considering the dynamic political process is like studying the human body by visiting a
mortuary.
There are many books about government in Britain and other individual countries but relatively few that attempt to cover a
wider canvas. The dearth of books on politics as an activity is also evident.
I ... could not help reflecting in my way upon the singular ill-luck of this my dear
country, which, as long as I can ever remember it, and as far back as I have read,
has always been governed by the only two or three people, out of two or three
millions, totally incapable of governing, and unfit to be trusted.
4TH EARL OF CHESTERFIELD
In Defence of Politics (1982) by Bernard Crick. The most perceptive, and readable, description of the political process.
The Nature of Politics (1965) by J D B Miller. Covering much the same ground as Crick but less of a polemic, and hence, not
quite as readable.
The English Constitution (1867) by Walter Bagehot. The definitive account of the British system of government in the 19th
century, which became the model for parliamentary democracy all over the world. The Fontana edition 1988 has a perceptive
foreword by R H S Crossman.
The Penguin Dictionary of Politics (1985) by David Robertson. A useful compilation of contemporary political ideas and
institutions.
World Political Systems: An Introduction to Comparative Government (1991) by J Denis Derbyshire and Ian Derbyshire.
An assessment of the political systems and political ideologies of all the world's nation states, assuming no prior knowledge.
Comparative Government and Politics: An Introduction (1987) by Rod Hague and Martin Harrop. A useful introduction to
comparative government, again assuming little or no prior knowledge.
Comparative Government (1986) by Roger Charlton. Another introduction to comparative government. Designed primarily
for school sixth-formers or first-year non-specialist undergraduates, but also suitable for the general reader.
Unique in Western Europe in being free from invasion for more than 900 years and having escaped violent revolution during
the last three centuries, Britain is unusual in having an unwritten constitution or external `supreme court' watchdog, a
hereditary monarch as head of state, an unelected, substantially hereditary, upper chamber, and a `winner-takes- all' first-past-
the-post, rather than proportionally based, electoral system. As a consequence, the political executive, when backed by a clear
party majority in the House of Commons, has unrestrained authority to make considerable changes to the direction of national
life. This was seen in the cases of the Liberal administration 1906-14, the Attlee Labour government of 1945-51, and the
Conservative Thatcher administration of 1979-90, which carried out sweeping pro-grammes of constitutional, social, and
economic reforms. During other periods, although the Conservatives have dominated a predominantly two-party system, a
largely centrist consensus had been adhered to.
The British Prime Minister (1985) edited by Anthony King. An outstanding collection of essays by leading political scientists
analysing the changing role of the key office in the British political system, that of prime minister. With the growing influence
of the mass media and the development of a sophisticated `Number Ten' private office, the position has become almost
presidential, with power being notably concentrated by Margaret Thatcher.
Britain since 1945: A Political History (1992) by David Childs. A popular, read-able, and reliable overview of political
developments in Britain, covering the period from the election of Clement Attlee's Labour administration in the July 1945
postwar general election to the re-election of John Major's Conservative Parry in April 1992. Organized in chronological
chapters, based around the 11 postwar administrations, the book also includes useful information on the changing social
backcloth.
Ruling Performance: British Government from Attlee to Thatcher (1987) edited by Peter Henessy and Anthony Seldon.
This fine work contains eight separate chapters, written by distinguished political scientists and historians, analysing the
records of the Labour and Conservative administrations that held office between 1945 and 1987, as well as two general
background and overview chapters. Particular attention is given to differing cabinet styles, interministerial relations, the degree
to which manifesto pledges were redeemed, and the treatment of public expenditure.
Churchill (1993) edited by Robert Blake and William Roger Louis. This volume complements the multivolume official
biography by Martin Gilbert of Britain's greatest 20th-century statesman, its outstanding war leader, and one of its most
colourful politicians, who held ministerial office as first a liberal and then a Conservative. 29 chapters, contributed by leading
political scienrists and historians, analyse various aspects of Churchill's career, ideology, and record.
Labour in Power 1945-1951 (1985) by Kenneth 0 Morgan. An outstanding account of the achievements and failures of
Clement Attlee 's Labour administration of 1945-51, which, with its welfare state and nationalization initiatives, set the agenda
for the postwar era until a Thatcherite `counter-revolution' was launched from 1979. Morgan provides expert analysis of the
policies, programmes, and personalities of the administration.
One of Us: A Biography of Margaret Thatcher (1991) by Hugo Young. A towering figure in the postwar political landscape,
Margaret Thatcher, the century's longest-serving prime minister (1979-90), shattered the centrist `Butskellite' consensus that
had prevailed between the 1950s and 1970s and sought to impose a new free-market, individualist, and nationalistic right-of-
centre consensus. A controversial figure, Thatcher has been the subject of numerous biographies and has also written her own
lengthy account, The Downing Street Years (1993), of her terms in office. This is the definitive biography.
Conservative Century: the Conservative Party since 1900 (1994) edited by Anthony Seldon and Stuart Ball. Alone or in
coalition, the Conservative Party has held power for almost two-thirds of the period since 1900, establishing itself as the
'dominant party' in a somewhat skewed two-and-a-half-party system. This edited volume provides a comprehensive analysis of
the structure of the Conservative Party, its sup-port base, social and regional, its internal factional and ideological divisions, its
public image, its leaders, and its record in power.
A Short History of the Labour Party (1993) by Henry Pelling. An excellent, succinct account of the Labour Party, from its
founding at its February 1900 conference to its defeat in the April 1992 general election and the appointment of John Smith as
leader, heralding a revival in the party's fortunes. Pelling, a social historian, discusses the role of trade unions within the party,
the relationship of the rank and file with the parliamentary leadership, the record of Labour administrations, and the ideological
divisions that, periodically, have led to electorally crippling splits.
A Short History of the Liberal Party 1900-92 (1993) by Chris Cook. An engaging analysis of the changing fortunes of the
country's `third force'. Up to the close of World War I, the Liberal Party, under the leadership of Asquith and Lloyd George,
was the country's leading progressive, centre-left force and the predominant parry of government. Subsequently eclipsed by the
rise of Labour, as the franchise was extended, the liberals regressed into third-parry oblivion until the 1962 by-election triumph
in Orpington signalled something of a revival, and in the 1983 general election the liberal-led lib-SDP Alliance attracted a
quarter of the national vote.
US POLITICS: 20TH CENTURY
Ian D Derbyshire
The US political system, with its distinct separation of executive, legislative, and judicial powers and its strong federal system,
has been copied by a number of newly emergent states, but remains in many ways unique. It is characterized by a classic two-
party system, but one in which parry discipline is notoriously weak, as is ideological cohesion. Instead, the political process is
highly atomized, with politicians acting largely as `freelances', raising their own finance to fight hugely expensive election
contests and working in Congress to promote the interests of their own constituencies. At the apex of the political system
stands the president, who, as both the constitutional head of state and the chief executive, provides unity, vision, and direction
to the political process. Strong presidents, through force of personality and empathy with changing national sentiment, have
been able to transform the direction of US politics. This was true of F D Roosevelt, who launched the New Deal during the
1930s, John F Kennedy and Lyndon B Johnson, who oversaw the Great Society reforms of the 1960s, and Ronald Reagan, who
re-established the Republicans as the dominant force in the 1980s. At other times of weak presidential leadership, Congress has
asserted itself, resulting in a gridlocked political process.
The Government and Politics of the United States (1993) by Nigel Bowles. A broad-ranging textbook introduction to
American political institutions and processes, set in their historical context. The particular focus is on the evolving
constitutional framework and the federal government system.
The Uncertain Power: A Political History of the United States since 1929 (1990) by Robert Garson and Christopher J
Bailey. A succinct history of American political developments, economic social changes, and the country's role in international
affairs between the Great Depression and the Bush presidency.
Presidential Power and the Modern Presidents: The Politics of Leadership from Roosevelt to Reagan (1990) by Richard
Elliott Neustadt. A classic, subtle study of the modem presidency. Neustadt, a Harvard professor, notes that the USA has a
'government of separated institutions sharing powers' and shows, consequently, president and Congress to be locked in a
complex relationship of mutual dependence. The underlying theme of the work is presidential weakness - that is, the gap
between what is expected of presidents and their capacity to deliver - and the attempts by such strong presidents as Roosevelt,
Truman, Kennedy, and Reagan to bridge this gap through their personalities.
The New American Political System (1990) edited by Anthony King. This excel-lent work, comprising analytical chapters
written by leading American political scientists, explains the key changes which have taken place in the US political system
during recent decades, in the post-Watergate era. There are chapters on the presidency, Congress, the Supreme Court of Warren
Burger and William Rehnquist, political parties, the electorate, the media, interest groups, federalism, and ideology.
The US Congress (1989) by Christopher J Bailey. A clear, analytical description of the organization and procedures of the US
Senate and House of Representatives, which treats Congress as a dynamic institution whose structure has varied over time.
Bailey focuses on membership and leadership of Congress, the role of parties, and the constitutional framework, and explains
why the committee system is so powerful and how it works.
The Power Game: How Washington Works (1988) by Hedrick Smith. A fascinating, vivid account which takes the reader
deep into the corridors of power in Washington and shows how Washington really works, describing the pressures exerted by
lobbyists, the `constant campaign', the influence of money from political action committees, the emphasis on image and
presentation, and the weakening of party discipline.
Franklin D Roosevelt and the New Deal, 1932-1940 (1963) by William E Leuchtenburg. A classic account of the
transformation brought about in American politics and society by the Democratic president F D Roosevelt, who responded to
the challenge of the Great Depression by instituting an interventionist programme of federal government support for farmers,
the unemployed, and the aged. In the process, Roosevelt achieved an electoral coalition that established the Democrats as the
majority parry in the country for five decades.
President Kennedy: Profile of Power (1993) by Richard Reeves. A detailed narrative account of the `thousand days'
presidency of the charismatic Democrat John F Kennedy between 1961 and 1963. Reeves reveals Kennedy, the first Roman
Catholic to become president, to have been an enormously ambitious, charming, and risk-taking politician, but one who lacked
a clear vision from the outset of what he sought to achieve during his administration.
Nixon (1987-91) by Stephen E Ambrose. A definitive account in three volumes of the dramatic political career of the
Republican professional politician Richard M Nixon, the only US president to be forced to resign from office. Volume 1 covers
the period 1913-62, when Nixon's career seemed to have been finished by defeats in challenges for the US presidency and
governorship of California. Volume 2, 1962-72, encompasses Nixon's two victories in the presidential elections of 1968 and
1972. Volume 3, 1973-90, covers the Watergate scandal, which brought about his fall from power, and his later recovery in the
1980s as an `elder statesman' and a prolific writer.
President Reagan: The Role of a Lifetime (1991) by Lou Cannon. A detailed biographical account of the career and
presidency of Ronald Reagan, the movie star turned politician, by a political correspondent for the Washington Post, who had
earlier `tracked' Reagan when he was governor of California. Cannon believes the major contribution of Reagan, the `Great
Communicator', to have been a revival of national confidence, but criticizes him for taking his role as president `too lightly'.
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Ian D Derbyshire
International relations is a term used to cover all interactions between state-based actors across state boundaries. The subject is
multidisciplinary, encompassing inter-national politics and history, military and strategic studies, transnational economic
relationships, and international law. During recent centuries the focus has been on
Great Power relationships, the balance of power, and the an of diplomacy. Between 1945 and 1991, during what became known
as the Cold War era, international relations were dominated by the global ideological, political, and military battle between
communism and liberal democratic free-market capitalism. More recently, particularly following the collapse of the Soviet
empire, the focus has shifted to international inter-dependencies, as regional economic and political power blocs have become
more developed, and the attention of the `developed world' has been redirected towards the policing of relatively localized
national and ethnic conflicts within the periphery and semiperiphery.
An Introduction to International Relations (1994) by P A Reynolds. This popular text explores the nature and structure of
international relations. Reynolds examines both `microinternational relations' - that is, individual national objectives and
motivations - and `macrointernational relations', or international state systems and behavioural systems. The author emphasizes
the increasing complexity of international relations as non-state actors, notably multinational corporations, have grown in
imponance and interdependencies have developed.
The Structure of International Society (1995) by Geoffrey Stern. An up-to-date multidisciplinary historical analysis of the
origins, development, and early networks of international relations, and exposition of the diverse ways in which modem
'international society' has been defined and interpreted. Such key concepts as sovereignty, nationalism, balance of power,
national interest, and interdependence are expertly addressed.
Classic Readings of International Relations (1994) edited by Phil Williams, Donald M Goldstein, and Jay M Shafritz. A
collection of extracts from classic books and articles by major political thinkers, statesmen, and academics. The 58 readings
include pieces by Sun Tzu, written in the 4th century BC, Machiavelli from the early 16th century, von Clausewitz from the
18th century, Hobson and Lenin from the early 20th century, and Immanuel Wallerstein and Paul Kennedy in the late 20th
century.
Diplomacy (1994) by Henry Kissinger. A magisterial overview of the history of diplomacy over the course of three centuries,
from Cardinal Richelieu, the founder of the modem state system, to the contemporary `New World Order', by one of the 20th
century's greatest exponents of the an. Kissinger, secretary of state under the US Republican presidents Nixon and Ford and an
adherent to pragmatic realpolitik, based on a hard headed analysis of the balance of regional and global power, argues that
America, protected by its own idealistic streak, has, in other times, pursued a unique, transformatory foreign policy.
The Struggle for Mastery in Europe (1954) by A J P Taylor. A classic account, by one of Britain's greatest historians, of Great
Power rivalries in Europe between the failed revolutions of 1848 and the close of World War I, with the associated collapse of
the Austrian Habsburg, Russian tsarist, and Turkish Ottoman ancien regimes. Taylor analyses the material, military, and
ideological motivations behind the shifting alliances of this period, and sketches the characters of the leading personalities,
notably Otto von Bismarck.
The Rise and Fall of the Great Powers: Economic Change and Military Conflict from 1500 to 2000 (1988) by Paul
Kennedy. A hugely popular and influential work which, based on an analysis of five centuries of world history, argues that the
rise and fall of great military powers is ultimately determined by the material resources at their disposal. Seized upon at the
time as a critique of the adverse economic consequences of 'imperial America's' high defence burden, it can be seen, in
retrospect, as providing a compelling explanation for the sudden collapse of the Soviet empire between 1989 and 1991.
The World that Came in from the Cold (1993) by Gabriel Pantos. A very readable account of the Cold War era, between
1945 and 1991, based on around 200 interviews for a BBC World Service radio series. The major themes and events of the
decades after World War II are surveyed, encompassing the spread of the Soviet Union's global influence into Africa and W
Asia to the late 1970s, the detente era and the disbanding of the Warsaw Pact in July 1991. Participants from both East and
West tell their own stories.
The Grand Failure: The Birth and Death of Communism in the Twentieth Century (1989) by Zbigniew Brzezinski. An
influential and prophetic book by one of the USA's leading strategic thinkers, secretary of state during the Democrat Carter
administration. Completed in 1988, this work anticipated the collapse of communism in the Soviet Union, as a result of its
economic failures, and the dangerous resurgence of nationalism in Eastern Europe. Characterized as 'the twentieth century's
most extraordinary political and intellectual aberration', communism has been one of the century's most influential ideologies,
leading to an exaltation of the state and the division of the world into two contending blocs.
International Politics: States, Power and Conflict since 1945 (1992) by G R Berridge. This introductory text focuses on
states, the conflicts that divide them, the instruments they employ to pursue their ideals and secure their interests, and the
system of rules and institutions through which conflicts are worked out. There are chapters on United Nations peacekeeping
and welfare works, secret intelligence, propaganda, the world economy, and economic statecraft.
World Conflicts: Why and Where They Are Happening (1992) by Patrick Brogan. A regionally arranged historical account
of the genesis and development of international and ethnic conflicts in more than 40 states and disrupted territories in the
world. The work includes coverage of the collapse of the Soviet empire 1989-91, the Gulf War of 1990-91, and the outbreak of
civil war in 1991 in the former states of Yugoslavia. Valuable, informative, and readable.
HUMAN RIGHTS
Nigel Wright
It is an impossibly difficult task to select the best books on human rights. I could have drawn up dozens of lists of `must-read'
books. From Martin Luther King to Gandhi and Mandela, prison has inspired some of the world's best minds to produce some
of the world's best literature. It is an unfortunate fact that good literature, by its power, makes its authors a target of tyrannical
regimes. With almost painful reluctance I was forced to discard some truly great works. Much of my inspiration for human-
rights work comes not only from accounts of the terrible ordeals that people suffer, but also from fiction that depicts the
strength and individuality of human beings. My list includes the relatively obscure Hanging Tree, and a comic novel to help
you get through some of the others. The dazzling flashes of humour from Sachs assured his inclusion, and Keenan's account of
his ordeal as a hostage is simply among the best-written work to be produced in the 1990s.
The Hanging Tree (1994) by Vic Gatrell. Compelling study which explodes the myth of the mob, revealing what the British
people really thought about executions in the 18th and 19th centuries.
I, Rigoberta Menchu: Indian Woman in Guatemala (1983) by Rigoberta Menchti. The riveting story of the Guatemalan
Nobel Peace laureate.
A Boy's Own Story (1982) by Edmund White. A beautifully written story of how a young boy tries to grow and develop in his
own way and, as often happens, his family and society cannot cope with anything that is `different'.
The Jail Diary of Albie Sachs (1978) by Albie Sachs. A brilliant account of his ordeal in solitary confinement in South Africa.
An Evil Cradling (1992) by Brian Keenan. The pick of the Lebanese hostage books.
The Periodic Table (1975; translated 1984) by Primo Levi. Marvellously written novel from someone who experienced at first
hand life and near death in a Nazi concentration camp.
Darkness at Noon (1940) by Arthur Koestler. A grim, but compelling, account of how a totalitarian system is not satisfied with
imprisoning or executing dissent, but tries to destroy an individual's will to live.
The Unbearable Lightness of Being (1984) by Milan Kundera. A novel that vividly portrays totalitarian society-.
The Songlines (1991) by Bruce Chatwin. A moving description of a people and their culture and what happens when others,
who do not understand them, persecute and try to destroy them instead.
Brrm! Brrm! (1991) by Clive James. Not an obvious human-rights choice, but very funny. It shows how much can be
misunderstood between different cultures. It also represents the author's desire to understand and appreciate a culture that has
caused his family great suffering as a result of the war against Japan.
Psychology
Psychology, like sociology, has been a characteristic 20th-century study, with political, social and artistic implications beyond
the horizons of formal science. At one extreme, it is a physical science, the study of the mechanisms of the brain. emotion and
instinct. (The comparative study of animal behaviour is a branch held by many "human" psychologists to be irrelevant.) At the
other extreme, it concerns the analytical observation of behaviour, particularly that of the individual in his relationships with
himself and his environment. In the work of many psychologists (including some of the most controversial) science is
inextricably blended with philosophy: observation of behaviour and response leads to programmatic theories. The books here
collected reflect but can never comprise the whole spectrum from scientific detachment to prescriptive dogmatism: their style
is accessible; their subject is nothing less than the wellsprings of man himself.
See BIOGRAPHY (Jones); MEDICINE (Freud, Laing, Kovel. Sutherland, Szasz, Wing); NATURAL HISTORY (Aitchison,
Ardrey, Lorenz); PHILOSOPHY (Ryle, Schopenhauer); SOCIOLOGY (Jacoby, Mead, G. H.); RELIGION (James)
Brown, Roger Social Psychology (1965) a Lucid treatment of some key topics in social psychology. Choice of themes is
idiosyncratic, but the discussion is elegant and entertaining.
Eysenck, H. J. Psychology Is About People (1972) a Psychological angle on a number of controversial issues: pornography,
politics, sex, the effectiveness of psychotherapy, etc. Excellent advertisement for the usefulness of the social scientific
approach. Like all popularizers. Evsenck seems frivolous to some specialists, heterodox and simplistically propagandist to
others. But he has a gift for clear exposition: a useful start. Also: Uses and Abuses of Psychology; Fact and Fiction in
Psychology; Know Your Own IQ, etc
Zimbardo, P. G. and Ruch, F. L. Psychology and Life (1975) Mammoth review of the subject; not only describes what
psychologists have discovered about human behaviour but also demonstrates the relevance of laboratory work to everyday life.
Also: Shyness: What It Is, What to Do About It
Robert Coles
Robert Coles is a research psychiatrist for the Harvard University Health Services, as well as professor of psychiatry and
medical humanities at the Harvard Medical School. Since 1963, he has served as a consultant to the Southern Regional Council
on "Psychiatric Aspects of Desegregation in the South." Among his thirty-five books are Children of Crisis (in five volumes)
and Erik H. Erikson: The Growth of His Work. In May 1981, Dr. Coles received a grant from the John D. and Catherine
MacArthur Foundation. He is now working in countries such as Northern Ireland and South Africa on the question of political
socialization, studying the way children of various nations obtain their political convictions and moral values.
The Bible.
I keep the Bible on my desk, and go back again and again to the Psalms, to certain passages in Isaiah and Jeremiah, to Matthew
and Luke, to passages in St. Paul's letters—Corinthians, Romans.
Walker Percy. The Moviegoer (1961). New York: Avon, 1979. (Pb)
Similarly with Walker Percy's The Moviegoer, a wonderfully comic yet intensely serious examination, in the tradition of
Kierkegaard, of this "present age." I use The Moviegoer, too, in teaching undergraduates and medical students, and find it quite
helpful in a course I teach at the Harvard Business School—an examination of ethical issues through certain novels and short
stories.
Georges Bernanos. The Diary of a Country Priest (1936). Pamela Morris, trans. New York: Carroll & Graf, 1984. (Pb)
Ignazio Silone. Bread and Wine (1937). Harvey Ferguson, Jr., trans. New York: New American Library, 1980. (Pb)
The Diary of a Country Priest by George Bernanos and Bread and Wine by Ignazio Silone are long-standing favorites of mine
—their evocation of the pastoral (as opposed to the prophetic), a constant help against certain occupational hazards that
accompany writing and teaching.
Charles Dickens. Little Dorrit (1857). Harvey P. Sucksmith, ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 1982. (Pb)
The later novels of Dickens mean a lot to me—especially Little Dorrit. I grew up hearing Dickens read aloud by my parents,
and I still go back to him—even teaching certain novels of his which offer glimpses of lawyers and the law at Harvard Law
School. His moral energy never fails to get us all going in class.
Clare Dalton
Clare Dalton is an assistant professor of law at Harvard Law School, where she teaches contracts and legal history. Her special
interests are legal and feminist theory. With her husband she is raising two sons for the future.
My initial response to this invitation was to think about reading that might help others toward the future world I like to imagine
us living in. Then I considered the different possibility of reading that would be valuable to people of the future, whether or not
they lived in that world. Finally, however, it seemed to me that the list, on either interpretation, should be the same. However
those people of the future turn out, they would benefit from knowing what some of their forebears thought about, and aspired
to, back in the latter part of the twentieth century.
The piece of my reading that I am taking this opportunity to share has to do with women—how some, by the 1980s, had begun
to reconceive themselves, and bring themselves, reconceived, into a dialogue with men about how they should together
conceive of the world.
G. W. F. Hegel. "The Independence and Dependence of Self-Consciousness: Master and Slave." Chapter IV.A. of Die
Phiinomenologie des Geistes (The Phenomenology of Spirit, 1807). Hamburg: Felix Meiner, 1952; New York: Oxford
University Press, 1977. (Pb)
This is Hegel's classic account of the individual's unavoidable dependence on others for recognition. From this perspective,
independence or autonomy, usually understood as separation from others, is in fact achieved only through connection with
others—through dependence. In our own time object-relations psychology, with its emphasis on "mirroring" as a key to identity
formation, contains the same core insight. But the starkness of Hegel's account, and its reminder of our potential domination of
those who depend on us for recognition, gives it added force.
Margaret S. Mahler, Fred Pine, and Anni Bergman. The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant: Symbiosis and
Individuation. New York: Basic Books, 1975.
Working within object-relations theory, Margaret Mahler describes children as struggling to reconcile their longing for
independence and autonomy with an equally strong longing for fusion with and surrender to mother. She describes the child's
tendency to grandiosity or omnipotence (denial of mother's otherness) and suggests that psychological wholeness depends on
the child's developing an appropriate sense of mother as separate. Her work provides an account of the central struggle of
childhood that is quite different from Freud's. It also suggests that the master / slave dynamic intuited by Hegel is in fact the
very psychological dynamic through which our individual identities are forged.
Dorothy Dinnerstein. The Mermaid and the Minotaur: Sexual Arrangements and Human Malaise. New York: Harper & Row,
1976. (Pb)
Dorothy Dinnerstein shares Margaret IVIahler's understanding that separation-from-mother is the key to later individual
development. But she argues that our society systematically subverts that possibility, leaving men and women differently
situated, but allied in a residual (subconscious) hatred and fear of mother, and of women. She suggests the consequences of this
malaise for relations between men and women, and for the society at large. She urges a radical sharing of parenthood, which
would present children with the same need to separate from father that they now experience only in relation to mother, as the
road to human progress.
Hester Eisenstein and Alice Jardine, eds. The Future of Difference (1980). New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press,
1985. (Pb)
Hester Eisenstein and Alice Jardine's powerful collection of feminist writing begins in the same general territory as
Dinnerstein's book—the psychological dynamics that differentiate women from men. The theme of difference is pursued in
sections devoted to current French feminism (strongly influenced by the post-structuralism of such writers as Derrida and
Lacan) and recent feminist literary criticism. Finally, the book projects the theme of difference out into the world, exploring its
potential for social and political transformation.
Suzette Haden Elgin. Native Tongue. New York: Donald A. Wollheim, 1984. (Pb)
Suzette Haden Elgin writes a science-fiction novel both grim and inspirational. The society in which it is set reflects a playing
out of some of the most dehumanizing tendencies of our own, including the firm relegation of women to a subordinate status in
the service of men. But the women, invisibly, are fighting back—through the development of their own language. In its
dramatic portrayal of the negative potential of our cultural values, and its celebration of the positive potential of difference, this
book makes a fitting postscript to my list of suggested reading for the future.
Jerome Kagan
Jerome Kagan is a professor of psychology at Harvard's Graduate School of Arts and Sciences. Professor Kagan holds a Ph.D.
from Yale University and has written many works, most notably Infancy; The Nature of the Child; and Birth to Maturity.
These books should generate a tolerance for others and appreciation of the power of historical contexts to create our deepest
assumptions about human nature.
Maurice H. Mandelbaum. History, Man, and Reason: A Study in Nineteenth-Century Thought. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins
University Press, 1971.
Mandelbaum's analysis of the relation between the European conception of human nature and historical events in the
eighteenth and nineteenth centuries helped me to understand why American intellectuals, and especially twentieth-century
social scientists, were so strongly committed, until recently, to a belief in the power of the environment and the malleability of
human characteristics, as well as resistant to all sentimental arguments that did not rest firmly on reason. The basis for our
idealistic view of perfectible children, sculpted by education in home and school to make rationally based moral decisions in
times of conflict, becomes an almost inevitable outcome of the blend of egalitarianism, evolutionism, and material science that
has dominated thought since the eighteenth century.
Alasdair C. Maclntyre. After Virtue: A Study in Moral Theory (1981). Notre Dame, Ind,: University of Notre Dame Press,
1982. (Pb)
After Virtue extends Mandelbaum's conclusions to the domain of ethics by arguing that historical conditions determine many of
the moral premises of a society. Maclntyre points out, for example, that our acceptance of the naturalness of individual rights is
not a universal, for there is no word or phrase in ancient or medieval languages that refers to an individual's right to a particular
resource. This assumption is not made until the close of the Middle Ages. I learned from Maclntyre that a society's views of
right and wrong are fragmented survivals of a series of economic and political events that lead the community to treat social
facts as moral imperatives. Thus, the role of history is a common theme that unites the books by Maclntyre and Mandelbaum.
Par Lagerqvist. The Eternal Smile (1934). Erik Mesterton et al., trans. New York: Hill and Wang, 1971.
A single sentence in this story by a Swedish novelist captures the idea that Maclntyre was trying to develop. After an
interminably long search, a large group of dead people find God and the leader steps forward and asks him what purpose he
had in creating human beings. God replies, "I only intended that you need never be content with nothing." After reading that
line I saw the meaning of the tree-of-knowledge allegory in Genesis. Human beings are prepared by their nature to believe that
there are right and wrong acts, but history and the nature of the society in which persons live will determine more exactly those
categories of intention and action that will be treated as moral or immoral.
Ernst E. Mayr. The Growth of Biological Thought (1982). Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1985. (Pb)
Mayr's history of biological thought over the past few centuries helped me see more clearly the relation between categories in
biology and those in psychological development. Mayr notes that biology, unlike physics, deals more often with qualitative
categories, rather than continua. Thus, biology is a unique science that is not easily reduced to physical concepts. Mayr
understands that in biology the most useful categories are those that have been inductively derived from phenomena, rather
than posited a priori. I believe that modern psychology is in a phase of development in which it can benefit from the inductive
strategy that eighteenth- and nineteenth-century biologists used with such profit. Such a frame is present in Darwin's great
insight that evolution should not be viewed as a series of variations on a set of ideal types, but rather as a series of
transformations on ancestors.
Jean L. Briggs. Never in Anger. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1970. (Pb)
The central message in this ethnography of the Eskimo of Hudson Bay is that despite the fact that this culture is characterized
by a continual suppression of anger and aggression, none of the systems that are typically associated with denial of anger in
Western society occurs among the Eskimo. Thus, this culture provides a refutation of the Freudian hypothesis that repression of
anger must lead to symptomatology. The obvious implication is that the validity of the psychoanalytic hypothesis is restricted
to certain cultures. It follows, then, that there are no universal outcomes of either the suppression or expression of anger,
independent of the social context.
Nicole LeDouarain. The Neural Crest. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1983.
This monograph by a distinguished neuroembryologist describes the growth and transformation of the cells that begin as a
small necklace around the embryo's spinal column and migrate to their final homes in the central nervous system of the
newborn. The main point is that although all the cells are alike originally, they become transformed over their journey into
structures that cannot be changed. The different transformations each type of cell undergoes is a function, in part, of the cells
that are encountered on the way. This story of the migration of the neural crest cells furnishes a useful metaphor for the
psychological growth of a human being, who is also transformed through the contacts he or she has in the life journey. A salient
theme in the six books noted above is that absolutes are hard to find in nature; most laws are constrained by particular contexts.
But there must be a small number of universal relations that trace their way back to biology. The final book supplies one of
these mechanisms.
Georg Von Bekesy. Sensory Inhibition (1965). Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1967. (Pb)
This book, which I read as a young psychologist, is the one exception to the relativism contained in the first six volumes. One
basic biological mechanism is that brain and mind are constructed to maximize contrasts and to improve the signal-to-noise
ratio. The mind rebels against the ambiguity and relativity in nature and tries to create simple, prototypical conceptions. If one
idea is a little more salient than another, the mind tends to exaggerate the former and minimize the latter. Hence, there is a
biological basis for our attraction to stereotype and to single ideas that mute the gradations that are inherent in nature. As a
result, we are seduced into believing in absolutes, when nature contains only families of relations among events.
John E. Mack
John E. Mack, M.D. is a child and adult psychoanalyst and is a professor of psychiatry at The Cambridge Hospital, Harvard
Medical School. He has been devoted to the development of community-based mental health services and to the application of
psychoanalytic insights to biographical studies and to a variety of social and political issues, most recently in relation to the
nuclear arms race and the U.S.—Soviet relationship. In 1977 he was awarded the Pulitzer Prize for his biography: A Prince of
Our Disorder: The Life of T. E. Lawrence.
All of these books speak to the importance of self-awareness and the transformations that can follow from it. Survival, and the
realization of our possibilities in the coming century, may depend on a new level of awareness and of responsibility for both the
darker side and the loving and creative dimensions of the human spirit.
Childhood stories.
It is much later, if ever, that we discover why a particular story of childhood has had such a powerful impact.
Carlo Lorenzini. Adventures of Pinocchio (1882-83). New York: Penguin, 1974. (Pb)
Pinocchio, in addition to being a spine-tingling adventure story, demonstrated that there was hope that an incorrigible small boy
might, in the end, turn out all right and be properly appreciated by his parents.
L. Frank Baum. The Wizard of Oz (1900). New York: Penguin, 1983. (Pb)
This story, which at first reading I experienced largely as the triumph of good over evil, contained, I learned much later, another
important idea: it is unnecessary to look elsewhere for what we think we lack. The potential for courage, love and even
intelligence ("brains") lies within ourselves. This proved to be a valuable message for someone who would one day be
committed as a psychotherapist trying to enable other people to discover the possibilities within themselves.
W. Somerset Maugham. Of Human Bondage (1915). New York: Penguin, 1978. (Pb)
This novel about the torments of misdirected love revealed to me how prone we are to form irrational attachments which hold
us in their grip, even while we know that our sense of self—life itself—is being undermined.
Sigmund Freud. The Interpretation of Dreams (1900). New York: Avon, 1980. (Pb)
The vast world of irrational behavior and unconscious impulse, feeling and motivation was opened up to me through Freud's
writings.
T. E. Lawrence. Seven Pillars of Wisdom (1919). New York: Penguin, 1976. (Pb)
I had not believed that a military leader would speak so frankly of the less attractive dimensions of his motivation. This gave
me hope that we might some day understand and master the human proclivity to indulge in war making and war following.
Fyodor Dostoevsky. Notes from Underground (1864). Jessie Coulson, ed. and trans. New York: Penguin, 1972. (Pb)
These obsessional ruminations of a prisoner impressed me with the extremes of self-doubt and their paralyzing effect. The
world of inner conflict and its determining power were vividly revealed.
Nadezhda Mandel'shtam. Hope Against Hope (1970). Max Hayward, trans. New York: Atheneum, 1976.
Written in the mid-1960s in the Soviet Union, this is the remarkable testimony of a Russian widow who has preserved the
memory and the writings of her poet husband, Osip Mandershtam, one of Stalin's countless victims. Through the painful detail
—only everyday detail can really illuminate the monstrousness of totalitarian regimes—there emerges an optimistic voice of
hope and possibility, evidence that a better human spirit may yet prevail in our blighted century.
B. F. Skinner
B. F Skinner is the Edgar Pierce Professor of Psychology Emeritus at Harvard University. A pioneer in the field of operant
behavior, Dr. Skinner began his work primarily with rats and pigeons, extending his techniques to the human organisms in the
study of psychotic behavior, the analysis of verbal behavior. the design of instructional devices, the care of infants and the
analysis of cultures. The author of more than eighteen books, he published volume three of his autobiography, Upon Further
Reflection, in the summer of 1986.
Sir Edwin Durning-Lawrence. Bacon is Shakespeare. London and New York: Gay & Hancock, 1910.
Asa Gray. How Plants Grow: A Simple Introduction to Structural Botany. 3d ed. New York: Ivison and Phinney; Chicago:
Gregg, 1859.
Ivan P. Pavlov. Conditioned Reflexes: An Investigation of the Physiological Activity of the Cerebral Cortex. G. V.
Anrep, ed. and trans. London: Oxford University Press, 1927.
Bertrand Russell. The Problems of Philosophy (1911). New York: Oxford University Press, 1959. (Pb)
John B. Watson. Behaviorism (1925). New York: W. W. Norton, 1970. (Pb)
. Psychology, from the Standpoint of a Behaviorist (1919). 3d ed. Philadelphia and London: J. B. Lippincott, 1929.
The books that have been most important in leading me to my present position as a behaviorist are not books that I would
recommend to anyone seeking to understand that position. They were important, not so much because of their content, but
because of their bearing on my life at the time I read them. A mere accident sent me to Sir Edwin Durning-Lawrence's Bacon is
Shakespeare, and that book sent me in turn to all I could find of, and about, Francis Bacon. I have acknowledged the role of
three great Baconian principles in my life, but I would not send anyone to Durning-Lawrence to discover them.
Gray's How Plants Grow, my high-school botany text, taught me, with the example of the radish, how living things pass on to
the future the contributions they have received from the past. Later I found the same theme in Hervieu's "La Course du
Flambeau," but I would not send anyone there for further instruction. I was greatly influenced by the first third of Bertrand
Russell's Problems of Philosophy. According to his biographer it was "written at speed for the American market," and it
certainly is not regarded as one of Russell's great books. Pavlov's Conditioned Reflexes taught me the importance of
controlling laboratory conditions, but I soon departed from the Pavlovian paradigm. John B. Watson was important, of course,
but I read only his Behaviorism, a book written for the general public. I am not sure I ever read his Psychology, from the
Standpoint of a Behaviorist.
This is all perfectly reasonable, since, after all, if anything I have done is "creative," should we expect to find it in anything I
have read?
We have elsewhere suggested lists of useful reference books for the British and American home. The books recommended here
offer access to a larger body of knowledge—indeed, in a more or less compact form, they offer all knowledge. But this is by no
means a comprehensive list; it is, rather, a personal choice. We have tried to offer a selection of available titles rather than
settling for definitive works in each area; each of the books listed has specific attractions, which mark it out from the
competent run of information books. Encyclopaedias and dictionaries of specific areas of knowledge (eg economics or music)
will be found in the appropriate lists.
See ARCHAEOLOGY (Bray); ARCHITECTURE (Colvin, Fleming); ART (McGraw-Hill, Murray, Osborne); CHILDREN'S
BOOKS (Uden); FILM (Bawden. Halliwell); FOOD (Johnson, Lichine, Montagne); HISTORY/ANCIENT (Heyden,
Lempriere, Radice); HISTORY/WORLD (Barraclough, Grun); HOME (Brittain. Encyclopaedia, Frewing, Hay);
MATHEMATICS (Larkin, Moore, Norton): MEDIA (Berry); MEDICINE (Gray. Parish); MUSIC (Cross, Greenfield, Hadley,
Hindley, Logan, Osborne, Sadie); MYTHOLOGY (Dowson. Larousse); NATURAL. HISTORY (Fry); RELIGION (Crosse);
SOCIOLOGY (International)
Adler, M. J. and Van Doren, C. Great Treasury of Western Thought * Massive collection of classic quotations from leading
authors and thinkers of the Western tradition. See BIOGRAPHY (Van Doren); PHILOSOPHY (Adler)
Crowley, E. T. Acronyms, Initials and Abbreviations Dictionary (1960) Not a beautiful book, but a serviceable one. containing
thousands of stunted word-forms. American, but includes British, European and other entries. Can never be completely up-to-
date, but regular supplements (latest 1978) ensure that it is never too far behind.
Encyclopedia Americana
30 volumes, 27,000 pages, 53,500 articles, 353,000 entries, 31,141,000 words, 21,500 illustrations including 1,194 maps.
Although, as its name implies, it is American in origin and written in American English, it is no more parochial in its coverage
than Britannica. Lack of colour makes it look dull; but the articles on the whole are well researched and well written. More
adult and comprehensive than World Book (qv), less specialized and easier to read than Britannica (qv). Alphabetically
arranged; good index.
Encyclopaedia Britannica
33,000 pages, 106,500 articles, 25,200 illustrations including 1,100 maps. Authoritative work for educated adults; in two main
parts, 19-volume Macropaedia containing long articles and 10-volume Micropaedia with short, quick reference articles; all
volumes have A to Z arrangement of subjects. So-called index (the Micropaedia) is deficient and cumbersome. Latest edition
(15th) essential.
Johnson, Dr Samuel Dictionary of the English Language (1755) Not the first English dictionary, far less the first dictionary of
a European language. Dr Johnson's definitions are often insular ("oats"), idiosyncratic ("lexicographer") and prejudiced
("patron"). But a work to be preserved and perused forever as the only English dictionary compiled by a writer of the first rank.
See BIOGRAPHY (Bate, Boswell, Krutch, Johnson); LITERARY CRITICISM; TRAVEL
Kaye and Ward (publishers) Official Rules of Sports and Games (1980) Immensely useful, and fascinating for the amateur
sportsman: clearly stated rules of everything from archery and athletics to volleyball and water polo. Regularly updated.
McWhirter, R. and N. (eds) The Guinness Book of Records (1963) Treasury of fascinating information on the largest,
smallest, longest, fattest, most prodigious phenomena in nature. Records of every kind, from running the marathon to holding
one's breath. Some of the information is bizarre, much of it useless—all of it riveting. Annually updated.
Onions, C. T. The Oxford Dictionary of English Etymology (1966) Advances the claims of etymology to be a science rather
than a lexical sub-art or a branch of folklore. Anyone interested in the origins of words should not be put off by its austere
scholarly presentation; these definitions are often fun. Also: The Oxford Shakespeare Glossary
Oxford English Dictionary on Historical Principles (1884-1928) With Webster's (qv), a monument both to scholarship and to
the richness, strangeness and sheer magnificence of our language. The history and meanings of each word are documented and
fully illustrated by precisely dated quotations for literary and other works down the centuries. New supplements in progress.
For home use, The Concise Oxford Dictionary is recommended.
Procter, P. Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English (1978) Stimulating, enterprising dictionary that lives up to its title
and goes a step further than exemplification by including comments on usage of a kind that you will need if you don't know the
difference between already and all ready.
Tilley, M. P. A Dictionary of the Proverbs in England in the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries (1950)
Full of wise saws and modern instances, with painstaking scholarship expended alike on the homely, the humorous, the bawdy,
and the consoling ("there is a difference between staring and stark mad", etc). Concludes with detailed bibliography and index
to proverbial uses in Shakespeare, some previously unsuspected.
Wallechinsky, D., Wallace I. and W. (eds) The Book of Lists (1977) This is one of those serendipitous ideas that, once
thought of, seem so obvious and so obviously right. The editors have commissioned and compiled lists of every kind: 20
largest lakes in the world, 12 writers who ran unsuccessfully for public office, 8 cases of spontaneous combustion, Orson
Welles' 12 best movies of all time ... Not a serious reference work—a delight. Should be on everyone's shelf—but keep a few
spare copies if you have light-fingered visitors. It's irresistible.
Yule, H. and Burnell, A. C. Hobson-Jobson: A Glossary of Colloquial Anglo-Indian Words and Phrases (1886)
Sprawling and undisciplined repository of the priceless vocabulary (bundobast, gymkhana, shikaree, etc) that sprang from the
association of English and Indian peoples down to the end of the 19th century. The curious title, for example, is an
anglicization of Ya Kasen! Ya Husayn! ("0 Husan! 0 Husain!") chanted by Muslims as they beat their breasts in the Muharram
procession.
Mary V. Chatfield
Mary V. Chatfield has been the head librarian at the Baker Library of the Harvard Business School for eight years. Her
association with the Harvard community began as an undergraduate at Radcliffe College. She earned her M.B.A. at the
Business School while continuing her duties as head librarian. She tries to read one book a week.
God, democracy, and food should prepare anyone for any century.
The Book of Common Prayer (1549), New York: Oxford University Press, 1928.
As a daily or occasional guide to behavior or as a source of comfort and guidance, it is without peer. The beauty of the
language alone is sufficient reason for a nonbeliever to read it.
Alexander Hamilton, John Jay, and James Madison. The Federalist [Papers] (1788). Benjamin F. Wright, ed. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press, 1961.
An ever-current and germane discussion of the rewards of a democratic form of government and the difficulties encountered in
implementing it.
H. H. Munro. The Short Stories of Saki (1894-1916). New York: Doubleday, 1976.
Reminds you that life is complex as are people. Justice is frequently meted out when it is least expected, and a sense of humor
leavens almost all situations.
Barbara Pym. Excellent Women (1952). New York: Harper & Row, 1980. (Pb)
. Quartet in Autumn (1977). New York: Harper & Row, 1980. (Pb)
The daily life of ordinary people is as rich and varied as that of any exotic tribe, but the discovery of this richness requires
careful study.
Judith Martin. Miss Manners' Guide to Excruciatingly Correct Behavior (1982). New York: Warner, 1983. (Pb)
For guidance, sustenance and correction.
John Williams Collins III
John Collins is the librarian of the Graduate School of Education at Harvard. His professional interests include bibliographic
instruction, information access, and database searching.
Apart from individual titles in particular disciplines, books such as A Guide to Reference Books, 9th ed. (1976), which open the
doors to information access and the printed word at large, will provide readers with the tools and skills necessary to find the
information that will enable them to meet the challenges of the twenty-first century.
Graham T. Allison. Essence of Decision: Explaining the Cuban Missile Crisis. Boston: Little, Brown, 1971. (Pb)
For its insight into the decision-making process.
Jack Kerouac. On the Road (1957). New York: Penguin, 1979. (Pb)
For its depiction of an era and a life-style.
Percy Bysshe Shelley. The Complete Poetical Works (1813-21). New York: Oxford University Press, 1974.
For the beauty of the poems.
Philip Gaskell. A New Introduction to Bibliography. New York: Oxford University Press, 1972.
Offers an opportunity to gain an understanding and appreciation of the books as a material object.
Eugene Paul Sheehy. A Guide to Reference Books. 9th ed., 2d suppl. Chicago: American Library Association, 1982. (Pb)
Because it provides access to reference books basic to research.
Sheldon Glashow
Sheldon Glashow is the Higgins Professor of Physics at Harvard. His research centers on building models for elementary
particles. His Nobel Prize was for his work on the unification of weak and electromagnetic forces. In addition to his thoughtful
writings and frequent public television appearances, his course "From Alchemy to Particle Physics" is well known on campus.
Americans love to be told what to do. "You are what you eat!" sells innumerable quack diet books, just as "You are what you
read!" brought us the Great Books, the Five-Foot Shelf, and now this colossal act of hubris: the mind-shaping favorites of a
hundred professors, annotated. See them astride Plato, Darwin and Freud. Read what they read and be what they be.
I have no list to submit. I care not for this cargo cult. Books are cheap and readily available. To read is the thing, voraciously
and eclectically. No guide is needed. Was Moby Dick more important to me than the latest Len Deighton thriller, or is browsing
through my Oxford English Dictionary even more significant? And who should care?
Scientists are often regarded as illiterate oafs, unable to write and unwilling to read, captives of their narrow expertise,
deserving candidates for humanists' contempt. Yet, most of us are well-read and can hold our own with historians, literary
critics and whatever. Humanists, on the other hand, are often (though not always) scientifically and mathematically inept and
proudly so. Our conversations must turn on matters of their concern, not ours. We are disadvantaged because we are compelled
by their ignorance to match wits on their territory.
Membership in the community of educated men and women demands competence in science and awareness of its history.
Many would dispute this claim. Here, I say, lies one explanation for the decline of American intellectualism. We have strayed
from the path set by Franklin and Jefferson, who both admired and appreciated Lavoisier as much as they did Shakespeare.
Patricia Albjerg Graham is dean of the Harvard Graduate School of Education and the Charles Warren Professor of the History
of Education at Harvard University. She has served as dean of the Radcliffe Institute and vice-president of Radcliffe College. In
1977 she was appointed by President Carter as director of the National Institute of Education, the federal government's
educational research agency. She resigned in 1979 to return to Harvard, to her teaching and research activities.
Sigrid Undset. Kristin Lavransdatter (1920-22). C. Archer and J. S. Scott, trans. 3 vols. New York: Bantam, 1978. (Pb)
Sigrid Undset's Kristin Lavransdatter, which I first read as a young wife and mother, captured my imagination, my ancestry and
my hopes for my own future. This long tale of a formidable medieval Norsewoman who fought for her ideals, embodied as
they were in her family and political allegiances, enthralled me as I pondered what the twentieth-century equivalent of her life
as an American woman would be.
Gunnar Myrdal, with Richard Sterner and Arnold Rose. An American Dilemma: The Negro Problem and Modern
Democracy (1944). 2 vols. New York: Harper & Row, 1969. (Pb)
I discovered Gunnar Myrdal's An American Dilemma some years after it was originally published. I read it while a graduate
student in history of American education at Columbia University. As a resident of Manhattan's Upper West Side I was living for
the first time in a racially mixed environment. I found two elements of Myrdal's book fascinating: the analysis of what he
called "the Negro Problem" and the response of "modern democracy" to it, and the introduction of a new generation of black
scholars and the legitimization of their research on black issues.
James Hodgson
James Hodgson has been associated with the Harvard library system for twenty years. Currently he is the head librarian at the
Frances Loeb Library at Harvard's Graduate School of Design, committed to improving the quality and scope of the collection.
Prior to joining the Graduate School of Design he managed acquisitions for the Fine Arts Library of Harvard's Fogg Museum.
I would likely recommend any book that enriches the human spirit . . . that is likely to help us keep jolly, sane and, in some
way, safe from so many others who will recommend books that champion personal power and profit.
Anthony Powell. A Dance to the Music of Time (1962-75). 12 vols. Boston: Little, Brown, 1976.
A roman fleuve in twelve parts. Suggests that a life of reflection and observation is to be prized as much as a life of action and
that life's meaning is to be found in the accumulation of small events and triumphs (often only dimly perceived) rather than in
high moments of bombast and tangible riches.
Mark Twain. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884). New York: Harper & Row, 1984. (Pb)
The essential American novel. Bleaker explorations of the same, uniquely American spirit of risk, adventure and profit—i.e.,
entrepreneurship—can be found in lesser, but still good books such as The Godfather, by Mario Puzo, and Catch-22, by Joseph
Heller.
Julius Caesar. The Gallic Wars (ca. 40 a.c.). Boston: David R. Godine, 1980.
Read as a teenager (and just reread in a modern translation with maps, illustrations and notes published by David Godine) this
book introduced me to the remarkable fact that history really did happen!
Richer books, read later and enjoyed more, that similarly reveal the spirit of their times: the journal of Eugene Delacroix; the
daybooks of Edward Weston: Bound for Glory, by Woody Guthrie.
Antoine de Saint Exupery. The Little Prince (1943). Katherine Woods, trans. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1982.
"Straight ahead of him, nobody can go very far. . . ."
Gregory Bateson. Steps to an Ecology of Mind (1972). New York: Ballantine, 1975. (Pb)
Kate Wilhelm. Where Late the Sweet Birds Sang (1976). New York: Pocket, 1981. (Pb)
Walter M. Miller, Jr. A Canticle for Leibowitz (1959). New York: Bantam, 1976. (Pb)
Two very good science-fiction novels, which suggest that man is not on an inevitable path to perfectability.
Harold Howe II
Harold Howe is a senior lecturer in administration planning and social policy at Harvard's Graduate School of Education. He
describes himself not as a professor but as a retired educator who has found a restful place at Harvard University. He has been a
history teacher, a school principal, a school superintendent (in Scarsdale, New York), a state education planner (in North
Carolina), US. Commissioner of Education, and a foundation official (vice-president of the Ford Foundation). He has served as
a trustee of Yale, Vassar and the College Board and is now a trustee of Teachers College at Columbia University. He has written
what he describes as "quite a lot of dull prose" about education affairs.
A. E. Housman. The Collected Poems of A. E. Housman (18671936). New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1971. (Pb)
As the world gets more complicated, and it certainly has during my sixty-seven years, a new resolve is needed to deal with the
unexpected. Housman conveys a somewhat pessimistic message, which I find sustaining.
Gunnar Myrdal, with Richard Sterner and Arnold Rose. An American Dilemma: The Negro Problem and Modern
Democracy (1944). 2 vols. New York: Harper & Row, 1969. (Pb)
For understanding the issue of race in the American experience, there is no book to equal this. It has influenced a generation of
scholars and the Supreme Court of the United States, and through them it helped create the civil-rights movement of the
twentieth century. Myrdal recognizes the moral aspects of the problem and weaves them together with the analysis of a social
scientist to create a magnificent insight. Much of my time and effort have been spent on racial issues in education, both schools
and colleges, and this book is the bedrock I return to on the subject. Myrdal's basic view is still relevant. "The American Negro
problem is a problem in the heart of the American. It is there that the interracial tension has its focus. It is there that the
decisive struggle goes on."
Christopher Fry. The Lady's Not for Burning (1949). New York: Oxford University Press, 1977. (Pb)
A romantic drama in extravagant language, which I read at least once a year. It helps me to stay young at heart, and it's just
plain fun in its combination of comic and serious themes of life and death and human foibles ranging from lust to moralistic
bureaucracy. Who else but Christopher Fry would call the moon, "A circumambulating aphrodisiac divinely subsidized to
provoke the world into a rising birthrate" (p. 67)?
Mark Twain. The Writings of Mark Twain. Author's National Edition. 25 vols. New York: Harper, 1899-1918. (Also
subsequently published letters and other writings by the same author.)
Twain will carry you from youth through adulthood with novels, stories, essays and social commentary. Quintessentially
American, he opens our eyes to our peculiarities and to our ways of life. His warning against the dangers of staying in bed
because so many people die there combines with deep insights into racial issues in Huckleberry Finn to provide an almost
endless cafeteria of delightful reading. For Americans who want to know who they are and how they got that way, Twain is
center stage.
Rudyard Kipling. Collected Works (1886-1932). 22 vols. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Page, 1927.
I started with the Just So Stories ("way down by the great, grey, green, greasy, Limpopo River"), The Jungle Book, Kim, and
Stalky and Co.; progressed through The Barrack Room Ballads and other verse where I learned that "the sins that ye do by two
and two, ye must pay for one by one"; and graduated to the endless tales of India, the empire, and British society. Most critics
think an interest in Kipling is a sign of a juvenile mind. If so, I plead guilty. But if you haven't read "The Taking of
Lungtungpen" (from Plain Tales from the Hills) or "The Strange Ride of Marrowbie Jukes" (from Under the Deodars), you're
missing something.
Omar Khayyam. Rubaiyat (early twelfth century). Edward Fitzgerald, trans. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, n.d. (Pb)
A slight strain of perversity in regard to my inheritance as the son of an educator and Presbyterian minister and the grandson of
missionaries in nineteenth-century Hawaii probably leads me to the affection I hold for this delightful verse. It punctures
pomposity, praises wine, women and song, and gently derides religion. I enjoy it. I have always felt the need to joke about the
things I was most serious about. Hence my life spent in education is for me joyfully teased by Omar Khayyam.
John D. Montgomery
John Montgomery is a professor of public administration at Harvard's John E Kennedy School of Government. Professor
Montgomery is currently interested in research dealing with developing countries. their agricultural productivity,
entrepreneurial behavior and central government support to urban development as well as U.S. foreign policies and
international politics.
P. G. Wodehouse. Money for Nothing (1928). London: Barrie & Jenkins, 1976.
Wodehouse demonstrates how to write.
J. S. Bach. The Goldberg Variations (1747). R. K. Kirkpatrick, ed. New York: Schirmer, 1938.
Bach enriches the soul; Kirkpatrick develops the techniques for giving the soul expression.
Thomas Mann. Joseph and His Brothers (1933-43). H. T. Lowe-Porter, trans. 4 vols. New York: Knopf, 1948.
Mann provides the philosophical insights into human experience in their most palatable form.
Thorstein B. Veblen. Theory of the Leisure Class (1899). New York: Penguin, 1979. (Pb)
Veblen shows the outer reaches of hypocrisy.
Samuel P. Huntington. Political Order in Changing Societies (1968). New Haven: Yale University Press, 1969. (Pb)
Huntington presents the most reasonably packaged definition of development.
Reginald Phelps
Dr. Phelps attended public schools in western Massachusetts, received his A.B. in 1930 from Harvard and spent the following
year in Europe, primarily in Germany. He has led a life of educational administration, teaching and scholarship chiefly at
Harvard University. During the stresses of the 1930s, his early interest in German literature developed into the study of
European and American history. His writings include many articles, largely on twentieth-century Germany. He has also written,
with Jack Stein, a useful reading text entitled The German Heritage.
I don't know that these books prepared me for the challenges of the twentieth century, and I doubt that they would prepare our
successors for those of the twenty-first century. What they did was to help me to understand the European and American past
and present.
As introduction: any such list is subjective and temporary. The books are chosen from my present view of my experience, and
are not necessarily the books I would have selected ten or thirty years ago. Mostly they have affected me by their literary
qualities, not their "messages," since most philosophies and (quasi-)theologies sound equally persuasive if skillfully presented.
These are books that have stayed with me for years, hence the absence of contemporary writing.
William Shakespeare. King Lear (1605). New York: Penguin, 1984. (Pb)
Macbeth (1606). Maynard Mack and Robert E. Boynton, eds. New York: Random House, 1981. (Pb)
William Shakespeare's plays; specifically King Lear and Macbeth, both read in G. L. Kittredge's famous course. Close to them,
Othello, Julius Caesar and The Tempest. Among these Lear seems greatest, perhaps because of seeing an overwhelming
performance of it in London during the war.
John Dos Passos. Nineteen Nineteen (1932). New York: New American Library, n.d. (Pb)
Sidney B. Fay. The Origins of the World War (1928). 2 vols. New York: Macmillan, 1954.
Erich Maria Remarque. All Quiet on the Western Front (1928). New York: Fawcett, 1979. (Pb)
John Dos Passos's powerful novel Nineteen Nineteen came quite early in the wave of revisionism and disillusion with World
War I that reached these shores well before the Depression. For the scholarly world, Sidney B. Fay's The Origins of the World
War led to revisionism. For the general reader, such works as Erich Maria Remarque's All Quiet on the Western Front, and the
magnificent film made from it, led to disillusion. If you want to know why my generation was so reluctant to go to war in the
1930s, these books will help you find out.
Thomas Wolfe. Look Homeward. Angel (1929). New York: Scribner's, 1982. (Pb)
For my generation, perhaps the great American novel—its rooted/rootless hero, its ironic naturalism, its waves of stunning
rhetoric; coming of age in this century m the small towns of eastern America. Less "literary" than Faulkner. A wider range than
that almost perfect novel about Harvard, George Weller's Not to Eat, Not For Love. Not as universal, doubtless, as Herman
Melville's Moby Dick but a clearer, more human, less strained presentation of such American themes as wandering, roots,
grand visions.
Immanuel Kant. Critique of Pure Reason (1781). New York: St. Martin's, 1969. (Pb)
. Critique of Practical Reason and Other Writings in Moral Philosophy (1788). Lewis Beck, trans. New York: Garland,
1977.
The philosopher who, like his medieval precursor Cardinal Nicholas Cusanus, defines and sets limits for human capacities and
presents, one may hope, guidelines for ethics and behavior more satisfying than those provided by hubris and wills to power.
David Riesman
David Rieman is a professor emeritus of sociology at Harvard University. One of the world's leading sociologists, his opinion
is often sought on a wide range of topics, frequently the sociology of American higher education. His most notable works
include The Lonely Crowd: A Study of the Changing American Character and Faces in the Crowd: Individual Studies in
Character and Politics. He may well be the most prolific letter writer on Harvard's campus. The following comments are
excerpted from Ries-man letters to the editors of this guide.
It seems to me that in many cases it is not a particular book, though often of course it is just that, but a particular author who
opens new visions and impels new curiosities.
Louis Auchincloss. The Rector of Justin (1964). Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1980. (Pb)
Niccolo Machiavelli. The Prince (1513). Peter E. Bondanella and Mark Musa, trans. New York: Oxford University Press,
1984.
Alexis de Tocqueville. Democracy in America (1835-40). G. Laurence, trans. New York: Random House, 1981. (Pb)
I was thinking about Louis Auchincloss the other day. He is an unduly deprecated author because, while a full-time practicing
lawyer and responsible New York citizen, he has written a large number of novels dealing, as did much of Henry James and
Edith Wharton, with the upper class, or at least the upper professional class, such as old Wall Street law firms. His novel The
Rector of Justin is about a private-school headmaster of an earlier clay and, I think, a wonderful book. But it is perhaps less
relevant to some than one of his books dealing with Wall Street life and its ethical problems, similar to those faced in other
professional callings.
It is the author, not the particular book, to whom one would want to call the reader's attention. You will recall, of course, that
the Bible is itself a collection of books, poetry, history and much else. There are of course salient books, whether Machiavelli's
The Prince or de Tocqueville's Democracy in America, but in these cases it is the author whom one would want also to bring to
the reader's attention.
Ihor Sevcenko
Ihor Sevcenko is a byzantinist in Harvard's Department of the Classics. His principal interest is Byzantine cultural history. The
first entry in his own extensive bibliography —a translation into Polish of an excerpt from Voltaire—was written when
Sevcenko was a sixteen-year-old student in Warsaw. His Harvard career as a professor of Byzantine history and literature has
been spent in Cambridge, Massachusetts; Dumbarton Oaks, Washington, D.C.; and as a visiting professor at colleges around
the world. As an avid dreg trout fisherman those same travels permit his pursuit of the Arctic grayling.
The books by Souvarine and de Man will be forgotten. The others will continue yielding insights into the minds and feelings of
men and into the behavior of groups with a depth and immediacy that cannot be gotten from treatises on psychology or
sociology. St. Mark's Gospel will remain a concise message that helps explain the appeal of the most successful mass
movement of our civilization to date.
Thucydides. History of the Peloponnesian War (ca. 431-404 B.C.). Richard Livingstone, ed. New York: Oxford University
Press. 1960. (Pb)
The most difficult Greek prose author I had previously encountered. Absorbing the whole of Thucydides was painful, but the
task, once accomplished, determined my choice of Greek texts as subject of study for the rest of my life. Reading Thucydides
was a make-or-break enterprise. I never encountered a more difficult, more concise and more deeply thinking Greek author in
my subsequent career as a classicist or a byzantinist. The Melian Dialogue and the passages devoted to Alcibiades' career stuck
with me for the duration.
The collected works of Fyodor Dostoevsky (1844-1880) (no standard collection in English).
Reading Dostoevsky is like going through an imaginary illness of late adolescence and early adulthood that, when overcome,
increases the chances of survival for the rest of one's life. The novel that produced the greatest impact was The Demons. I
looked at it (and most of my friends did the same) as a distorted but magic and prophetic mirror that revealed the doings of
those who were to stage the Revolution of November 1917 and of those whom the Revolution was to topple. The quest after
the meaning of human existence—a query to which I later chose a negative answer—first became an "accursed question"
during the reading of Dostoevsky. Critics say that Dostoevsky's prose is drab. I did not feel it at all in this second of my
massive immersions in Russian literary prose (the first was Gogol) and I was overawed by it.
Rainer Maria Rilke. Selected Poetry of Rainer Maria Rilke (1897-1923). Stephen Mitchell, ed. New York: Random House,
1982.
Rilke has been my companion throughout my life. My preferred collection of poems include: Neue Gedichte (1907) and Neue
Gedichte Anderer Teil (1908). They represnt my life's most intimate contact with poetry. As with all intimate contacts, it is
difficult to put in words. Rilke led to my discovery of German as a language in which modern poetry can be written, admiration
for subdued elegance of form and economy of linguistic means, and for the languid subtlety of the message. I translated some
of Rilke's poems into Polish and Ukranian. All of it was lost in 1945.
Boris Souvarine. Stalin: A Critical Survey of Bolshevism (1935). New York: Arno, 1972.
How could the Revolution have been betrayed and perverted? How could its "pure" message be discerned and preserved?
These, along with the problem of right and might, were the preoccupying questions of my late adolescence. Souvarine's book
gave a scholarly and, on the surface, dispassionate answer to those emotional questions, that both made sense of the past and
satisfied the expectations for the future (expectations not borne out by events, of course). At the time, I did not know the extent
of Souvarine's engagement in the Trotskyite movement. Still a book to read.
James Joyce. Ulysses (1918-20), New York: Random House, 1976. (Pb)
This was the second major English prose classic I worked through in the original, Vanity Fair having been the first. Ulysses's
role in my biography as a reader was analogous to the one Thucydides had played some ten years earlier: it was a make-or-
break affair. I had no conception of Dublin or its pubs, but was by my own makeup attuned to the stream of consciousness and
went along with Joyce on his heroes' rounds. Result: a lasting admiration for the flexibility of English and for the author's own
virtuoso play on that instrument (and on other languages as well: remember the list of ambassadors!). Mrs. Bloom's inner
monologue, a model of empathy, will remain the kind of text I wish I were able to write.
Hendrik de Man. The Psychology of Socialism (Die sozialistische Idee. 1933). Eden Paul and Cedar Paul, trans. New York:
Arno, 1974.
At a time that seemingly "eternal" values were contradicted by reality, relativized, or made into constructs that expressed the
social interest of those who propounded them, de Man offered reasoned and scholarly solutions to a young man's doubts: stress
on the writings of young Marx; the concept of intellectuals as a "free-floating" stratum, not shackled in their perceptions by
their social backgrounds; the relative autonomy of ideas; the relativization of Marxism; the derelativization of the notions of
Truth, Beauty and Justice; viewing conscience as an instinct rather than as interiorized ideology.
Sigmund Freud. Civilization and Its Discontents (1929). Joan Riviere, trans. London: Hogarth, 1930.
. The Future of an Illusion (1926). James Strachey, ed. and trans. New York: W.W. Norton, 1961.
. Psychopathology of Everyday Life (1901). A.A. Brill, ed. and trans. New York: Macmillan, n.d.
. Totem and Taboo (1913). James Strachey, ed. and trans. New York: W.W. Norton, 1962.
Otto Immisch. Wie studiert man klassische Philologie? (1909). 2d ed. Stuttgart: W. Violet, 1920.
Plato. The Republic (370-360 B.c.). James Adam, ed. 2 vols. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1963.
If it were possible to enlarge to ten, I would add the following three names: (1) Sigmund Freud, whose writings influenced me
more than several of the books I discussed in some detail above. I just did not think of him when I was taking down the names
of "influential" books as they were spontaneously coming to mind; I wonder why. I record this Fehlleistung here as a tribute to
his delightful Psychopathology of Everyday Life (1901). Other books by him that determined my intellectual climate for years
were Totem and Taboo (1913) (even if based on assumptions no longer shared by anthropologists); The Future of an Illusion
(1927); and Civilization and Its Discontents (1929). (2) Plato, Republic. Book 1 for its insights into the mechanisms of naked
power. (3) Otto Immisch, Wie studiert man klassische Philologie?, merely for autobiographical reasons: this sensible small
book confirmed me in the resolve to study the classics and helped map out the beginnings of my study program.
Judith Shklar
Judith Shklar was born in Riga, Latvia. She describes herself as having attended, off and on, various useless schools, but was
educated at McGill and Harvard Universities. She became interested in political theory as an undergraduate and has taught it at
Harvard since 1954. She is the John Cowles Professor of Government. In 1984, she was a recipient of the MacArthur Award.
Among her books are Men and Citizens: A Study of Rousseau's Social Theory and her most recent work, Ordinary Vices.
These books do not prepare anyone for anything in particular. They can only enhance our intellectual imagination and
understanding.
Plato. The Republic (370-360 B.c.). James Adam, ed. 2 vols. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1963.
The first book I read in my late adolescence which I had to recognize as both perfect and wholly alien. It set me off to asking
the question that has preoccupied me as a political theorist since then: How are we to think about our personal lives and
experiences in a world order that is entirely remote from us, but nevertheless impinges upon us constantly and often
incomprehensibly? All the other books I list play upon this theme.
St. Augustine. The City of God (A.D. 413-426). David Knowles, ed. New York: Penguin, 1984. (Pb)
Both as an account of what Christian religiosity implies and also as the most extreme vision of a moral and material order in
which we must fail especially when we think that we are behaving well.
Michel de Montaigne. Selections from the Essays (1595). Donald M. Frame, ed. and trans. Arlington Heights, Ill.: Harlan
Davidson, 1973. (Pb)
The question of how a skeptic can live his life as a social and political agent is often asked, and here it is examined in
"attempts," or thought experiments. Nothing is asserted and everything can he doubted without despair or destructiveness. For
me it is the model of how to think.
Leo Tolstoy. War and Peace (1865-69). Louise Maude and Aylmer Maude, trans. George Gibian, ed. New York: W.W. Norton,
1966.
I read it when I was very young and have reread it many times. It is both a complete world in which one lives while one reads
on and the most successful of all attempts to integrate public history and private lives.
Thomas Mann. The Magic Mountain (1924). H.T. Lowe-Porter, trans. New York: Random House, 1969. (Pb)
The political novel achieves the same effect as War and Peace, but in a different way. It allows us to rush helplessly into the
First World War, not knowing why but how the European world committed collective suicide.
In some indefinable way the mass of historical novels I read as a child turned me into a historian. Everything from Alexandre
Dumas, Sir Walter Scott and Dickens's Tale of Two Cities to an endless number of far less distinguished romances, not least
those of Rafael Sabatini, inspired an enduring passion for history. The mixture of this inbred taste for the past and the need to
explain the events of my childhood, as a refugee in and out of the Europe of the Second World War, have structured my work
as a political theorist from the first.
Zeph Stewart
Zeph Stewart's career at Harvard began in the 1940s as a graduate student and later as a junior fellow in the Society of Fellows.
He recently assumed a new position as director of Harvard's Center for Hellenic Studies in Washington, D.C. He continues as
the Andrew W. Mellon Professor of the Humanities in the Classics Department. Throughout his professional life, he has written
on the literature, philosophy and religion of the Greek and Roman world. His current pursuit focuses on religion of the
Hellenistic period.
These works give one some understanding of the human condition, of man's place in the world and of the marvel of human
creativity.
Homer. The Iliad (ca. 800 B.c.). Robert Fitzgerald, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975. (Pb).
My choice of career was partly influenced by a comparatively early reading of Homer's Iliad (probably in an abridged form).
The cast of distinct and memorable characters, the essentially simple but deftly contrived plot, the sombre atmosphere of the
opening and closing scenes, the wonderful balance of crowds in action and intimate detail, all picture a whole civilization and
yet endure both as types and symbols and as a very human story. I felt in touch with the beginnings and grandeur of both the
literature and the history of my own world.
Thomas Mann. The Magic Mountain (1924). 11. T. Lowe-Porter, trans. New York: Random House, 1969. (Pb)
Having been brought up on traditional English and American nineteenth-century novels, I was gripped by the inner world and
its outward reflections that seemed so modern and powerful in Mann's writing, even when it was most wordy. Such a tour de
force as the entrapping snowstorm was frightening and full of meaning, giving character to the physical world and to exterior
experience like that found in the post-Impressionists. It led me not only into more reading of Mann but also into an
appreciation of much other contemporary literature and art.
Cleanth Brooks. Modern Poetry and the Tradition. Chapel Hill, N.C.: University of North Carolina Press, 1970. (Pb)
This critical survey, now a little passé, opened a door for me just at the moment that I was looking for ways to appreciate the
new poets (Yeats and Eliot in particular). I found in the New Criticism some of the same methods applied to modern poetry that
were familiar in classical scholarship, and Brooks's analyses and connection-making brought me deeper appreciation, but also
showed me the limitations of his method in his treatment of Frost.
William Shakespeare. King Lear (1605). New York: Penguin, 1984. (Pb)
Many plays and films, from Aeschylus to the present, have moved me deeply, but perhaps none more than King Lear in the
three superb performances that I have seen. The power of speech to evoke man's most subtle and contradictory insights, the
interplay of good and evil in the world, the terror of the irrational and the unknown and the healing power of hope and love are
all woven into a single drama.
In the course of my professional work I have of course occasionally read books that have had an enormous impact at the time
on my thinking and understanding, but which could often not be recommended to a general audience, particularly an English-
reading one. I think of Erwin Rohde's Der griechische Roman, or E. R. Dodds's The Greeks and the Irrational (fine for a
general audience), or of A. J. Festugiere's La revelation d'Hermes Trismegiste. To someone who is seeking to understand the
thinking and literature of another people in another time such books can light up a whole cultural landscape.
Sidney Verba
Sid Verba is the Carl H. Pforzheimer University Professor and director of the Harvard University Library. He is also on the
board of the Harvard University Press but, as a serious political scientist, reserves time to teach government at Harvard.
Mark Twain. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884). New York: Harper & Row, 1984. (Pb)
It taught me about being an American—about growing up, about whites and blacks, about escape, about big rivers.
Chaim Grade. Rabbis and Wives (1982). Harold Rabinowitz and I. H. Grade, trans. New York: Random House, 1983. (Pb)
It describes the world of the Eastern European sktetl—the world of my grandparents. Grade, like Dickens, gives the texture of
life.
Alexis de Tocqueville. Democracy in America (1835-40). G. Laurence, trans. New York: Random House, 1981. (Pb)
Probably still the greatest book about American society and politics.
William Shakespeare. Henry IV, Parts 1 and 2 (1596-97). Arthur Quiller-Couch et al., eds. New York: Cambridge University
Press, 1965. (Pb)
. Richard II (1595). New York: Penguin, 1981. (Pb)
All the Histories—especially these two—are great treatises on politics, maturity and responsibility.
V. O. Key, Jr. and Alexander Heard. Southern Politics in State and Nation (1949). Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press,
1984. (Pb)
The first book that taught me to think like a social scientist. Still a classic account of a past political world.
Luise Vosgerchian
Luise Vosgerchian is the Walter W Nautnburg Professor of Music at Harvard University. She has been a teacher and active
contributor to the musical life at Harvard University for twenty-six years. In 1971 she became a professor of music, and was
appointed to her present chair in 1974. She subsequently served for four years as chairman of the Music Department.
As a concert pianist, Luise Vosgerchian has appeared with major orchestras. including the New York Philharmonic and the
Boston Symphony Orchestra, as well as with numerous chamber and ensemble groups in both the United States and Europe.
Her recordings include nineteenth- and twentieth-century works by such coinposers as Brahms. Schumann, Debussy, Ives and
Bartok.
I hope the spiritual and intellectual comprehension of the creative process so beautifully expressed in these books will fire
young students to act against all that is now and will be potentially destructive.
The following books from my reading list have strongly influencecl my teaching from several points of view:
1. The importance of discovering.
2. Awakening the responsibility to the artistic conscience.
3. The importance of total commitment to learning.
4. Stimulating the creative use of knowledge.
Alfred North Whitehead. The Aims of Education and Other Essays (1929). New York: Free Press, 1967. (Pb)
Wendell Berry. Recollected Essays, 1965-1980. San Francisco: North Point Press, 1981. (Pb)
Ben Shahn. The Shape of Content. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1957. (Pb)
Rainer Maria Rilke. Letters to a Young Poet (1929). M. D. Herter Norton. trans. New York: W. W. Norton, 1963. (Pb)
D. H. Lawrence. Studies in Classic American Literature (1923). New York: Penguin, 1977. (Pb)
Gordon R. Willey
Gordon Willey is the Bowditch Professor of Mexican and Central American Archaeology and Ethnology Emeritus and,
currently, a senior professor in anthropology at Harvard University. He has long-time research interests in Mesoamerican
archaeology, especially in Mayan studies, and has conducted fieldwork in Belize, Guatemala and Honduras. He has also had
field experience in Nicaragua, Panama and Peru.
In selecting the following books I have tried to strike a balance between the impact they made upon me at first reading and the
impressions they have left with me ever since. It is a very personalized list, most of it closer to me than to my profession.
Indeed, only one of the six books is strictly archaeological, and four of the six are works of fiction. I shall take them up in the
chronological order of my first reading them.
Robert Louis Stevenson. The Strange Case of Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde (1886). New York: Dodd, Mead, 1979.
My first reading of this was in 1922, when I was nine years old; since then I have reread it on several occasions. The magic of
this fascinating fable of good and evil never fails. While as a youngster I was undoubtedly first captured by its "mystery and
horror" aspects, I think even then I was aware of the moral tragedy Stevenson depicted so wonderfully.
F. Scott Fitzgerald. The Great Gatsby (1925). New York: Scribner's, 1981.
I read this first at the right time—as an undergraduate in college—but it continues to be an old and dear favorite. Fitzgerald's
lyric masterpiece tells us about the dreams, desires and heartbreaks that "float in the wake" (to use a good Fitzgeraldian phrase)
of the search for money and power. The whole narrative is also pervaded by the ever-present concern for social class and status
that lay—and still lies—just below the surface of American life.
Oswald Spengler. The Decline of the West (1919-22), Charles Francis Atkinson, trans. 2 vols. New York: Knopf, 1975.
I was bowled over by this vast, absurd, learned, pretentious book when I read it in 1936.1 suppose it was the first "Big Book" I
had ever read. I don't go back to it much now. As an archaeologist I am interested in many of the things Spengler has to say,
though I think many of Spengler's ideas are wrongheaded and even bad. At the same time, the book has value.
Vere Gordon Childe. The Danube in Prehistory (1929). New York: AMS Press, 1976.
This was read as part of my graduate professional education in 1939-40.1 select it as one of the finest professional and
technical works of this greatest of modern archaeologists. In it Childe shows the way archaeological syntheses should be
written. It made an initial and a lasting impression upon me and my career.
Anthony Powell. A Dance to the Music of Time (1962-75). 12 vols. Boston: Little, Brown, 1976.
I read the twelve volumes of this splendid novel serially as they appeared, and since then I have reread the whole series twice,
each time with new pleasure. I seem never to tire of it. Perhaps it is not up to Proust's Remembrance of Things Past, but I like it
better. It is witty, sensitive, involved yet remote; my sense of empathy with Nicholas Jenkins, the narrator, seems always
complete.
SPORT
Andrew Ward
Sport is a worldwide phenomenon that bonds nations by its rules and yet provides a basis for competition. Major sporting
events, such as Olympic Games and World Cups, attract record television audiences and generate enormous interest. But sport
also gives people fun and friendship at the grass-roots level, and it is a great source of stories. This reading list concentrates on
nonfiction books, but there is also a vast amount of fictional work that provides an emotional feel for sport; in particular, see
the work of P G Wodehouse (golf), Bernard Malamud and W P Kinsella (baseball), Frederick Exley (American football), David
Storey (rugby league), Jack London (boxing), and Dick Francis (horse racing). In recent years, as sport gains more credence as
a subject of serious study, it has become a fertile ground for sociologists, philosophers, psychologists, and historians, who have
all shown that sport can teach us a lot about society and relationships.
Homo Ludens: A Study of the Play Element in Culture (1938; translated from Dutch 1949) by Johan Huizinga. A classic
study of the philosophy of play.
The Football Man: Passions and People in Soccer (1968) by Arthur Hopcraft. Hopcraft provides a highly readable overview
of the traditional roles of soccer people. Concentrating on Britain, where soccer has its roots, he captures what the game means
to all participants, from players to spectators.
The Boys of Summer (1971) by Roger K. A journalist tells of his love affair with the Brooklyn Dodgers baseball team of the
1950s. Kahn not only describes the players, interviewed 20 years on, but also explains how he was captivated by sport through
his father's interest.
Sports in America (1976) by James Michener. A sports enthusiast and best-selling novelist, Michener reviews the pains and
pleasures of sport in the late 20th century.
The Oxford Companion to Sports and Games (1976) edited by John Arlott_ A comprehensive paperback which documents
the history of every sport and has entries on key people and venues.
Sport and the British (1989) by Richard Holt. Holt's book examines sport as part of the general history of Britain. He
describes the origins of fair play and amateurism, and traces the development of gambling and professionalism.
Muhammad Ali: His Life and Times (1990) by Thomas Hauser. A wonderfully researched book which reconstructs the life of
the world's greatest ever boxer in the words of those who knew him during his career.
Information Sources in Sport and Leisure (1992) edited by Michele Shoebridge. A book for serious students researching
specific aspects of sport.
The Complete Book of the Olympics (1992) by David Wallechinsky. A massive compendium which gives the result of every
Olympic final event since 1896 and documents the most fascinating stories of the Games.
The Introduction to Occult and Paranormal could stand, unaltered, here. The fact that it does not—and that making it do so
would seem both frivolous and provocative—is perhaps an indication of the abiding authority and strength of religious studies,
if not of the claims of religion itself. Certainly, whatever follies and barbarities have been inherent in religious practice, its
principle has often synthesized the best moral, ethical and philosophical thought (to say nothing of poetry and other arts) of
which the human mind is capable. Hence, the bias of the books on this list is less towards the detail of specific religions
(though some outstanding works of Christian apologetics are included) than towards discussion of those spiritual and
philosophical dilemmas to which religious thinkers have notably and regularly addressed themselves. There are, in fact, very
few recommendable books on the validity and transcendental potentiality of "paganism," or on systems of moral, philosophical
and artistic life which exclude the religious initiative—and this lack focuses attention on two fundamental questions. Is
religious belief an essential prerequisite of such matters, and are those who think they can manage without it therefore deluded?
Or does the flaw in objectivity—crucial at least philosophically—tell us something about the exclusive nature of religious
belief itself?
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Dodds, Lewis, Lienhardt, Radin); AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Augustine, Fox, Gosse); BIOGRAPHY
(Bain-ton, Renan); DIARIES (Kierkegaard, Kilvert, Pope John, Teilhard de Chardin, Woodforde); DRAMA (Sayers);
HISTORY/BRITISH (Bede, Tawney, Thomas); HISTORY/ EUROPEAN (Barraclo ugh, Cohn, Ladurie); MYTHOLOGY
(Branston, Burland, Dowson. Eliade, Frazer, Harrison, Huxley, Weston); PHILOSOPHY (Aquinas, Gilson, Marcel. Spinoza);
POETRY (Gardner); PSYCHOLOGY (Jung); SOCIOLOGY (Berger)
Abu Bakr Muhammad bin 'Abdulmalik ibn Tufail, Arab in Islamic Spain, ca. 1105-1185.
Awakening of the Soul (Hayy ibn Yaqzan). Rec: Ward
Bible PP *V
Those approaching the Bible as a central plank in their Christian faith and practice will probably use a modern translation;
those approaching it as one of the seminal books of the Western literary tradition will be more familiar with the words of the
Authorized Version (1611). There are no really good recensions for children, preserving both the poetry and the mystery:
Edwards and Steen: A Child's Bible (1973) comes nearest. See Bultmann; MYTHOLOGY (Hooke)
Various Authors, Jews writing in Hebrew and Aramaic, 2nd C BCE-1st C CE.
Apocrypha. Rec: Bloom
Various Authors, writing in Pali and Sanskrit, Indians writing in Pali and Sanskrit, 100-400 CE.
Buddhist Scriptures. Rec: Ward
Various Authors, Chinese, 6th-10th C (with commentaries from the 16th-20th C).
Ch'an and Zen Teaching. Rec: Ward (religion)
Anonymous, Indian writing in Sanskrit, 1st C CE (translated into Chinese ca. 400).
Diamond Sutra. Rec: StJE
Dodd, C. H. The Founder of Christianity (1971) 1111 Award-winning book by British New Testament scholar who
directed the translation of The New English Bible; result of a life-time's meditation on the text of the New Testament. Also: The
Apostolic Preaching and Its Development; The Parables of the Kingdom; The A uthority of the Bible
Ferraby, John All Things Made New (1957) a Comprehensive introduction to the history and teachings of the Baha'i
faith, usefully incorporating many quotations from Baha'i holy writings.
Anonymous, Indian writing in Sanskrit, 1st C CE? (translated into Chinese ca. 400).
Heart Sutra. Rec: StJE
James, William The Varieties of Religious Experience (1902) There has been much new thought since this study of religious
conversion first appeared; but it remains a classic in its field. Also: Psychology; The Will to Believe
Various Authors, Jews in Provence, Spain, and Palestine writing in Hebrew and Aramaic, 12th-16th C.
Kabbalah (Includes the Zohar and many other books). (See also Zohar) Rec: Seymour-Smith
Various Authors, Indians writing in Sanskrit, 1st C CE (translated into Chinese from 179).
Prajnaparamita. Rec: Oriental
Various Authors, Mesopotamian Jews writing in Hebrew and Aramaic, 2nd to 6th C.
Talmud (Babylonian). Rec: Ward
Sayings of the Fathers (Pirke Aboth). Rec: Bloom
Various clerics convened by Popes John XXIII and Paul VI, Latin, Pub. 1962-1965.
(See also John XXIII)
Vatican II. "Lumen Gentium". Rec: Aquinas
Wat, W. Montgomery Muhammad. Prophet and Statesman (1974) Well-researched biography; especially good on the
sociological perspectives of the man and his ministry.
Various Authors, Parsis (Persian, later Indian) writing in Avestan, Parsis writing in Avestan, ca. 300 CE.
Zend-Avesta. Rec: Seymour-Smith Ward
Various authors probably including Moses de Leon (c. 1240-1305), Jews in Spain writing in Hebrew and Aramaic, 13th C.
Zohar. (See also Kabbalah) Rec: Utne
Clarissa Atkinson
Clarissa Atkinson is Professor of the History of Christianity at the Harvard Divinity School. Her field is the history of the
family as it intersects with the history of Christianity, particularly during late medieval and early modern Europe. Her next
book will look back at the Christian ideology of motherhood. She has written Mystic and Pilgrim: The Book of the World of
Margery Kempe (1983) and Immaculate and Powerful: The Female in Sacred Image and Social Reality (1985), coedited with
Margaret Miles and Constance Hall Buchanan.
I hope these books will encourage people to think about the past in ways that are helpful in preparing for the future.
Margery Kempe. The Book of Margery Kempe. Hope Emily Allen and Sanford Brown Meech, eds. London: Oxford
University Press, 1940.
Hope Emily Allen edited this fifteenth-century spiritual autobiography by a woman of King's Lynn who was a mystic, a
housewife and a pilgrim. Margery Kempe's own story is wonderful, but when I first saw it with Allen's notes (written in the
1930s), what impressed me was Allen's sense of the existence of a women's history distinct from and connected to "history"
(that is, to men's history). Allen was not able to finish the work on Margery Kempe, unfortunately, but she was a pioneer hi the
perception of feminine experience.
William Strunk, Jr. and E. B. White. The Elements of Style (1959). New York: Macmillan, 1979. (Pb)
As far as I know, this is the only book on writing that can be read for pleasure, so that its wisdom is absorbed with delight.
Strunk and White make you want to write well: to be verbose, or to use jargon, would be to disappoint your friends. What's
more, E. B. White practiced what he preached, which fosters the comforting illusion that we can learn to write like him if we
follow these "simple" rules.
Virginia Woolf. A Room of One's Own (1929). New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1981. (Pb)
In pointing to some of the connections between the poverty of women's institutions and the poverty of women's history, Woolf
illuminates questions that we have not yet managed to resolve, and creates a new character—Shakespeare's sister—to live in
our collective imagination. This brilliant, angry, inspiring work, despite (or perhaps because of) its blindness to the injustices of
class, prompts us to look for our own blind spots.
Edward H. Carr. What Is History? (1961). New York: Random House, 1967. (Pb)
I read this book at about the time that I started to prepare to be a professional historian—that is, when I entered graduate
school. Carr's images of the historian's selection of "facts" were so vivid and persuasive that I finally grasped the point that
there is no such thing as a history that is out there, waiting for us to discover it. National, class, ethnic and gender groups
constructed their own visions of the past, and have always done so. This may no longer be news, but it was news to me then,
and Carr's is still the best brief explanation of the subjectivity of historical interpretation.
Joan Kelly. Women, History, and Theory. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984.
Joan Kelly's reflections on the way in which women's history has changed "history" broke new ground for students of society
and culture. I had known and worked with each of these individual essays, but their cumulative effect in book form is more
than the sum of its parts: this is a body of interpretation that alters the ways in which we understand the past.
Constance H. Buchanan
Constance Buchanan is director of Women's Studies in Religion at the Harvard Divinity School. For the past decade, Constance
Buchanan has been engaged in developing and directing a Harvard center for research on religion, gender and culture.
These books are about the normative dimension of human life and thought, and about diversity. They are, in particular,
concerned with how we might be more self-conscious and self-critical, examining too often the unacknowledged values and
assumptions that shape what we see and do.
Geoffrey Chaucer. The Canterbury Tales (ca. 1390). New York: Penguin, 1951. (Pb)
The Canterbury Tales is like a verbal Brueghel—a huge canvas depicting medieval English society vividly and in rich detail.
What appears to be a simple tale of religious pilgrimage is really a study of the human condition, particularly the meaning of
goodness or holiness in human life. Both, Chaucer tells us, are seldom what or where human beings expect them to be. His
stinging social criticism warns that human piety and claims for righteousness are often in individuals and institutions the
occasion for human folly and corruption. Combining as it does a deep empathy for the foolishness as well as for the dignity of
human beings, Chaucer's social criticism imparted to me at an early age the value of observing, respecting, criticizing, and
always seeing the humor of our humanity.
Michael Walzer. The Revolution of the Saints: A Study in the Origins of Radical Politics (1965). Cambridge: Harvard
University Press, 1982. (Pb)
Walzer has a rare gift for understanding how individuals are oriented and motivated by religious ideas and how these ideas
interact with social, economic and political realities. Whereas many scholars assume religion has to do with another world,
Walzer understands it as a way of seeing and responding to this world. This study of the Puritan saints is a tremendously
skillful exploration of how in seventeenth-century England religion provided the tools for reconceptualizing and reconstructing
established social and political arrangements. All too often, modern biases against religion prevent us from seeing what is
obviously true historically and around the modern world—religion is a powerful force in public life.
Virginia Woolf. Three Guineas (1928). New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1963. (Pt))
In Three Guineas, Virginia Woolf deftly examined the relationship between gender and social values in education and the
professions, and the implications of this relationship for both individuals and society as a whole. In doing so, she anticipated a
central insight of contemporary analysis of gender, society and culture: that gender and value are deeply intertwined in a
culture and in the social arrangements cultural patterns shape. She also saw that the historical exclusion of women from
education and the professions—from public power—has given them "freedom from unreal loyalties" and a distinctive moral
voice, This freedom and distinctive moral perspective, she argued, if women can self-consciously sustain both as they gain
access to power, will be an important resource for transforming the basic value structure of contemporary society and the
orientation of that structure toward war.
Margaret R. Miles. Image as Insight: Visual Understanding in Western Christianity and Secular Culture. Boston: Beacon,
1985.
This is one of those rare books that productively criticizes basic, too frequently unacknowledged assumptions in our ways of
thinking about the past. Image as Insight lets us see that our approach to understanding historical and contemporary reality is
fundamentally skewed by reliance on verbal texts. Arguing that the full task of historical understanding requires as well
interpretation of visual images, and of images and texts in relation to one another, Miles proposes a hermeneutics for
interpreting the visual as historical evidence. She demonstrates how this will alter our knowledge and conception of human
reality. Both have been restricted by traditional methods of historical interpretation which have led us to reconstruct the past as
the history largely of an unrepresentative, small elite of skilled, male language users and actors—as the history of the modern
subjective consciousness.
Diana Eck
Diana Eck is a professor of comparative religion and Indian studies at Harvard University. She is the moderator of the World
Council of Churches program on "Dialogue with Proper Living Faiths." Her most recent book is Banaras, City of Light (1982),
which followed Darsan: Seeing the Divine Image in India (1981).
The Bhagavad Gita (ca. A.D. 1). Franklin Edgerton, trans. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1944.
The Bhagavad Gita is a basic resource for understanding the spiritual life of India. and in my reading and rereading of it
through the years, it has become a resource for my own life as well. I first read it in the mid-1960s and was put off by the
setting: a battlefield, where the warrior Arjuna recoils at the prospect of fighting his cousins, and throws down his weapons.
His charioteer Krishna takes him to task for renouncing his duty to fight. It took me some time to see what Hindus have seen
here—that this is not a treatise on war, but a treatise on the nature of responsible action. Krishna teaches the yoga, or discipline,
of action: to act and be involved in the world, without personal or egotistical attachment to the fruits of those actions. It is a
scripture that has challenged and engaged Hindus for many centuries and has given rise to generations of interpretation and
commentary.
Wilfred Cantwell Smith. The Meaning and End of Religion (1962). New York: Harper & Row, 1978. (Pb)
This book completely changed my understanding of "religion." Here Smith argues that the noun "religion," as it is used today
in the West, has come to refer to a sphere of activities or beliefs that can somehow be circumscribed and distinguished from
other spheres of life, such as politics, economics, or social life. Not only does this miss the point of what it means and has
meant to be "religious" in the West, but it seriously misrepresents the nature of human religiousness in the Hindu, Buddhist, or
Muslim traditions. In essence, Smith suggests that we drop the word "religion" as a noun, and use the adjective "religious," that
quality which conditions all the activities of religious people. Of course there are objective facts to be studied in attempting to
understand the great, ever-changing cumulative religious traditions of humankind. But as students of these traditions we are
challenged, even further, to understand "faith," that is, the engagement and commitment of the people for whom they have been
meaningful. In my own work, this has reminded me repeatedly that I am not trying to understand some abstract thing called
"Hinduism," but I am trying to understand Hindus and the life, meaning and transcendence that they perceive.
Ananda K. Coomaraswamy. Yakshas (1928-31). 2 vols. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1971.
I first read this book when I was doing fieldwork in Banaras. India in 1973. It opened my eyes to an entire ancient Indian world
view that was not readily apparent from the study of classical Hindu texts. It had little to do with the renunciation of "this
shore" for the "far shore" of liberation, moksha. It was focused, rather, on the vibrant life-force deities of "this shore" —the
yakshas, associated primarily with the generativity of trees, and the ragas. associated with rivers and pools. The existence of
these ancient deities could be intimated from the classical texts, since the Buddha, Shiva, and Krishna all conquered and
subsumed them in their rise to popular prominence. The nature and history of these deities, however, was clearer from art-
historical sources. Coomaraswamy, a great cultural and art historian, helped me come to value the indispensable importance of
art and image in the study of religious traditions, especially popular traditions which have been excluded in textual sources.
Even more important, he helped me to see the persistence of the yaksha/naga deities even in the popular traditions of India
today.
M. K. Gandhi. Gandhi, an Autobiography: The Story of My Experiments with Truth (1927-29). Mahadev Desai, trans. 2 vols.
New York: Dover, 1983. (Pb)
This was my first introduction to Gandhi, and I still think it is the best introduction. Gandhi was a prolific writer; his collected
works fill over eighty volumes. Here Gandhi tells his own story, reflecting on his life as a man in his fifties, who had already
spent twenty years in South Africa, had worked out his philosophy of nonviolent social change, and had been actively involved
for ten years in the freedom struggle in India. Since it was written to be serialized in Gandhi's newspaper, Young India, this
autobiography has something of a didactic and episodic quality. What I love about this book is that here one encounters a
person, with all his foibles and faults, with his views on food and sewing machines, on social justice and political change.
Gandhi reveals so much of himself that I can say I met Gandhi here. I argued and quarreled with him, but eventually he won
my heart.
Mary Daly. Beyond God the Father: Toward a Philosophy of Women's Liberation. Boston: Beacon, 1973.
This is a powerful and important book, not only in feminist theological thinking but in feminist analysis more generally. Daly
looks clearly and critically at the patriarchal symbols that have shaped the thought and culture of the West. In this book, Daly
begins to move beyond the Christian tradition into a post-Christian feminism. In a sense, she had already made this move when
she preached at Harvard's Memorial Chapel in 1971, the first woman to preach at a Sunday service in 336 years. At the end of
the sermon, she led a dramatic walkout, inviting the congregation to affirm its faith by "rising and walking out together.- Daly's
work has had a tremendous impact on women and men, inside and outside the church, for whom the symbol of "God the
Father" has been changed forever. When I first heard and read Daly, I had already spent time in India, and the sovereignty of
my old familial notion of God the Father had already been questioned by the insights and critiques of Hindu friends and
teachers. Daly helped me to see the same key issues of Christian patriarchy and chauvinism from a feminist perspective within
my own culture. I too walked out in 1971, but walked back in almost immediately—into a church that, I think, needs to be
challenged to a larger and more inclusive theological vision.
Carney Gavin
Carney Gavin, a priest in the archdiocese of Boston, has served as curator and associate director of the Harvard Semitic
Museum since 1973. Trained in classics at Boston Latin School (founded a year before Harvard), he pursued classical
archaeology at Oxford before philosophical and theological studies in the German and Austrian university systems. As a Syro-
Palestinian archaeologist, he has been involved in excavations in the Middle East since 1962.
The Bible.
As both a priest and a Syro-Palestinian archaeologist, my involvement with the Bible renders it the paramount book in my life.
Its basic message, fascinating puzzles, and its existential significance (as the artifact of our history) have permeated my adult
studies and require daily rereadings, retranslations, and analytical explications for me to function usefully in liturgical as well
as academic contexts.
Because the Bible actually provides the atmosphere from which I draw breath as well as the excitingly mysterious world which
it is my job to explore professionally, the Bible has long ceased to seem to be "a book" for me.
Although my training (in languages, text criticism, and various exegetical disciplines) was largely directed toward reading the
Bible, its day-by-day utility for me (in bringing good news to Brighton or curating Semitic Museum mummies) together with
my life in Bible lands have transformed what I do with its pages (or what its pages do to me) from "reading" in any normal
sense. . .
Beyond permitting time travel, personality encounters and sensory flashbacks, or providing illuminating clues and criteria (for
judging present-day piety, wisdom, or pursuits of truth and goodness), "Bible reading" for me means passing back and forth
through otherwise impenetrable barriers between the finite and the infinite.
Irrespective of any deference due to realms of mystical contemplation or theological speculation, Bible reading provides me
practically with a very handy tool, a two-edged sword, for dealing simultaneously with the abstract and the concrete, the
objective and the subjective, the ideal and the real, the immediate and the perennial.
Kristina, Queen of the Swedes, the Goths, and the Vandals. The Works of Christina, Queen of Sweden (late seventeenth
century). Anonymous English trans. London: Wilson and Durham, 1753.
Usually on my night table, this book never fails to provide a chuckle or to propose a neatly turned truism before I drift off to
sleep. The Pensees of Queen Kristina of Sweden is an assemblage of over fifteen hundred short sayings, written during the last
decade of her life amid Rome's baroque intrigues. Originally, because of Innsbruck's tiny Silver Chapel (hidden way up above
the Hafkirche and almost always locked) where Kristina took her life's most decisive step (by becoming a Catholic and thereby
relinquishing the Vasa throne), her Pensees intrigued me. I, too, had chosen the Silver Chapel for one of life's decisive moments
—to celebrate Mass for the first time after ordination. Just as I had no previous idea of that chapel's link with Kristina, I had no
suspicion of how much mingled irony and hope, sardonic humor and simplicity of heart, stylistic pretense and true wisdom
were to be found in her musings during her final years.
G. K. Chesterton. The Napoleon of Notting Hill (1904). New York: Paulist Press, 1978. (Pb)
Tom Palmer. La grande compagnie de colonisation: Documents of a New Plan (1937). Worcester, Mass.: Clark University
Press, 1981.
Two twentieth-century "Utopian" fantasies have helped my own struggles to make sense of phenomena and theories of
Realpolitik as well as of economics. Chesterton's first novel, The Napoleon of Notting Hill, was addressed in 1904 to "the
human race to which so many of my readers belong." Set in the London of 1984 (amid familiar scenery utterly contrasting with
Orwell's projections for that same year) Chesterton's tale of brilliant banners, quixotic but bloody struggles, and bafflingly
poetic dialogues focuses on the romance and potential dynamism of little neighborhoods.
This paean to localism—wherein micro-autonomy is proclaimed by each tiny region's glorious gonfalons and the small-group
therapy of grassroots governance—was prompted by Chesterton's disgust at the Boer War and Cecil Rhodes's conviction that
"the one thing of the future would be the British Empire." Rejecting both H. G. Wells's mechanistic predictions and Tolstoy's
Humanitarian Return to Nature, Chesterton suggested that "eighty years after the present date, London is almost exactly like
what it is now" except for the radical change that people "had lost faith in revolutions."
Tom Palmer is a pseudonym chosen in 1937 by an extraordinarily wise financial wizard, already then expert in the international
metals industry, for La grande compagnie de colonisation is written as a scrapbook of the future, with various telegrams,
memos, organizational charts, and short notes interspersed with newspaper clippings from Paris-Soir, La Stampa, the Atlantic
Monthly, the Daily Telegraph, and the Luxemburger Zeitung, from the years 1938 to 1970.
La grande compagnie was written on the eve of World War IL by a foresighted Prussian who had already exiled himself in
1933 from a Germany going mad. In 1938, after recognizing that his appeal simultaneously to self-interest and to idealism was
falling upon ears deafened by war drums, the author left Europe to launch five decades of international efforts that were
eventually quite successfully parallel to some of La Grande Compagnie's projects.
From several points of view, each book's simple formulas contradict the other's: Palmer's far-flung development projects
(however mutually advantageous for both developers and those areas being developed) starkly contrast with Chesterton's
neighborhood chauvinism. Dynamically, the solutions represent humanity's centripetal versus centrifugal movements, yet each
book gleams with more than a few gems of truth and beauty.
John Kao
John Kao is a performing musician, psychiatrist, entrepreneur, and business school professor. The road toward these goals has
taken many turns: the study of philosophy and social science in college, psychiatry in medical school, and general management
in business school. Currently, he teaches and does research on the topics of entrepreneurship and corporate creativity at the
Harvard Business School, and "is rewarded by the annual opportunity to teach these topics to M.B.A. students."
As our technological and social milieux change at an increasing rate, our thinking as a species must be anchored by a profound
understanding of human behavior and values. Our success in addressing the challenges of the twenty-first century will be
influenced by our wisdom and by our ability to blend human skills: intuition, a tolerance for ambiguity and a comfort with
paradox combined with the deepest compassion.
A. E. Van Vogt. The Voyage of the Space Beagle (1939). New York: Woodhill, 1977.
I first read this book at age eleven, and have reread it several times since. It is an enthralling science fiction, an outer-space
version of Darwin's original journey. What particularly captured my attention was Van Vogt's creation of a new science of
human behavior. Called "nexialism," it was a sophisticated blend of psychology, medicine and organizational politics which
allowed the protagonist to help his parochial colleagues and save their mission from disaster. Seeds of an interest in human
behavior, interdisciplinary studies, "underlying knowledge" and iconoclastic people were sown by this book.
Carl G. Jung. Memories, Dreams, Reflections (1963). Aniela Jaffe, trans. New York: Random House, 1965. (Pb)
While all of Jung's work had a deep influence on me, I was particularly struck by this work, his autobiography. Jung writes
with the excitement of a detective, the skill of an artist, and the flair of a mystic as he develops a new vision of human
personality. I was particularly struck by his humanity as a clinician, which led me to follow his path into clinical psychiatry.
Jung inspired me as someone who was not afraid to confront the mysteries of life, art, dreams and the unconscious through the
"science" of human personality.
Erich Neumann. The Origins and History of Consciousness (1949). R. F. C. Hall, trans. New York: Pantheon, 1954. (Pb)
Reading Neumann provided an important complement to my work with Jung. He extended Jungian psychology on a grand
scale to show the beauty and logic inherent in a wide range of human experience: dreams, art, mythology, social organization,
history, culture.
Joseph Needham, with Wang Ling. Science and Civilisation in China (1954). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1985.
Joseph Needham is a particular hero of mine for his erudition and intellectual scope. Science and Civilization in China presents
a vast panorama of the emergence of scientific and technological thinking in China over three millennia, no mean achievement
by any standard. Needham approaches his subject as a historian, sinologist, natural scientist, sociologist, philosopher. The
result is a delicious and enormous banquet.
Lao Tsu. Tao Te Ching. Witter Bynner, trans. New York: Putnam, 1944.
Any work that can capture science, philosophy and human nature in eighty stanzas of verse deserves special comment. The Tao
Te Ching has been a bedside companion of mine for many years. Its relevance is never-ending; always surprising. For example,
when I studied psychology it was a valued text on human behavior. As an organizational specialist, I learned a great deal from
it about politics and leadership. I use it as a favorite present to friends who are entrepreneurs and senior managers. The book
says it all.
Gordon D. Kaufman
Gordon Kaufman is a professor of theology at the Harvard Divinity School. As a Mennonite conscientious objector in World
War II, and thus as a member of a cognitive minority in a time of intense emotion, Professor Kaufman early became aware (a)
of the relativity and plurality of all human convictions about right and truth, and (b) of the great power of religion in human
affairs, and also its extremely problematic character. Most of his intellectual life, he writes, has been devoted to attempting to
understand and address these issues, and the following books have been important in pursuing that quest.
These books explore fundamental questions about human nature and the nature of truth, about the role of religion in human
affairs and the meaning that faith in God can have today; they have been particularly important to me in my struggle with the
significance of modern cultural and religious pluralism, a problem that can only become increasingly urgent as we move into
the twenty-first century.
Immanuel Kant. Critique of Pure Reason (1781). New York: St. Martin's, 1969. (Pb)
. Critique of Practical Reason (1788). Lewis Beck, trans. New York: Garland, 1977.
I read the first Critique in its entirety at age eighteen, and have done so probably about twelve times since. Kant's "Copernican
revolution" taught me (a) that what we call "knowledge" is no simple matter of "external objects" leaving their imprint on the
mind, but is rather a complex process of interaction between subject and object; and (b) that all intellect, morality and religion
are grounded on the creativity and freedom of the human agent. These positions have helped to provide a philosophical basis
for my views on the social and historical relativity of all knowledge and also on the function and importance of religious
symbols.
George H. Mead. Mind, Self and Society from the Standpoint of a Social Behaviorist (1934). Charles W. Morris, ed. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1967. (Pb)
My understanding of the social and personal relativity of all human thought and practice was especially influenced by Mead's
theory of selfhood and mind as social and linguistic through and through. rather than fundamentally individualistic and
rationalistic. I first encountered Mead at about age twenty-three, and his ideas have provided a reference point for virtually all
my subsequent reflection on human nature.
Ludwig Feuerbach. The Essence of Christianity (1841). E. Graham Waring and F. W. Strothmann, eds. New York: Frederick
Ungar, 1975. (Pb)
Feuerbach's claim that all theology is actually disguised anthropology, that all religion is really a projection of human
subjectivity and feelings onto a cosmic screen, is the fountainhead of much modern interpretation of religion. This view has
usually been understood as essentially destructive of religion and theology, but it has provided me with fundamental insights
without which I would not have been able to develop my own reconception of theology as essentially "imaginative
construction."
H. Richard Niebuhr. The Meaning of Revelation (1941). New York: Macmillan, 1967. (Pb)
. Radical Monotheism and Western Culture. New York: Harper & Row, 1960. (Pb)
Niebuhr, through articulating a thoroughly sociohistorical conception of selfhood (influenced by Mead), showed that, precisely
because all our experience and thinking is historically and culturally relative, both selves and societies need systems of value
and meaning to orient themselves in the world; faith in God has special significance because of the sort of orientation it can
provide. Niebuhr thus showed me both that theology is still important in our modern pluralistic world and how theology can
best be done today. Of all my teachers he probably influenced me the most.
R. G. Collingwood. The Idea of History (1946). T. M. Knox, ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 1956. (Pb)
. An Essay on Metaphysics (1940). Lanham, Md.: University Press of America, 1984. (Pb)
I wrote my doctoral dissertation on "The Problem of Relativism and the Possibility of Metaphysics," and Collingwood (along
with Wilhelm Dilthey and Paul Tillich) was a principal resource. Collingwood helped me to understand both that all our
thinking is inescapably historical and that all history is the work of human imagination. With his conception of "absolute
presuppositions" he helped me see what metaphysics and theology can be in a historicist world.
Karl Barth. The Epistle to the Romans (1918). Edward C. Hoskyns, trans. 6th ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 1968.
(Pb)
Barth's greatest book, powerfully showing how human religiousness—especially Christian religiousness—instead of relating to
God in fact turns us away from God, showed me that the theological critique of religion is actually more profound and
devastating than any secular critique, for it can take up into itself all the insights of a Feuerbach and a Marx, a Nietzsche and a
Freud, and go beyond them. Theology, thus, has an autonomy and a unique significance of its own, and it need not be
constrained by any specific commitments to religiosity.
Henry N. Wieman. The Source of Human Good (1946). Carbondale, Ill.: Southern Illinois University Press, 1964. (Pb)
This book, read for the first time shortly after its publication, enabled me to understand from very early on that the importance
of the idea of God is to be seen principally in terms of the functions it performs in human life and thought (rather than in terms
of its putative "meaning"); and those functions may well be more effectively performed in the contemporary world by a
conception utilizing metaphors like "creative event" rather than the more traditional personalistic and political metaphors of
"father," "lord." and "king." These insights of Wieman have become increasingly important for my recent work.
Margaret R. Miles
Margaret Miles is a professor of historical theology at the Harvard Divinity School. She is the author of many works, most
notably Augustine on the Body (1979); Fullness of Life: Historical Foundations for a New Asceticism (1981); Image as Insight:
Visual Understanding in Western Christianity and Secular Culture (1985); and coeditor with Clarissa W Atkinson and
Constance Hall Buchanan of Immaculate and Powerful: The Female in Sacred Image and Social Reality (1985).
The books I chose all challenge settled impressions of the "natural" inevitability of North American life-styles, assumptions,
language and social practices. They expose the extent to which all of these are constructions requiring examination and
reevaluation in the face of the issues of social injustice, the nuclear world and the crisis of meaning as we approach the twenty-
first century.
St. Augustine. The Confessions (ca. A.D. 400). Rex Warner, trans. New York: Penguin, 1961. (Pb)
This book provided my first intimation of the massive conditioning of social, sexual and religious attitudes by the culture of
one's birth. I also got from it both Augustine's sense that destructive aspects of one's conditioning can be changed, and his
realistic respect for the difficulty of change—the stability of the social neuroses.
Jonathan Schell. The Fate of the Earth. New York: Avon, 1982. (Pb)
Schell's description of the possibility and results of nuclear war emphasizes the necessity of rapid and fundamental social
change if the attitudes and ideology that have brought us to the nuclear world are not to lead to the destruction of human Fife
and of the planet that is our home.
Mary Daly. Gyn/Ecology: The Metaethics of Radical Feminism (1978). Boston: Beacon, 1979. (Pb)
Daly here gives a vivid analysis of sexism, using cross-cultural examples to demonstrate the victimization of women's bodies
and psyches by patriarchal cultures. She also draws an alternative: women bonding in communities of support and
empowerment.
Nancy Chodorow. The Reproduction of Mothering: Psychoanalysis and the Sociology of Gender. Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1978.
Chodorow analyzes the complex conditioning for motherhood in Western culture, destroying the myth of biological
naturalness. An important book for laying the foundation for egalitarian parenting.
Michel Foucault. Discipline and Punish: The Birth of a Prison. New York: Random House, 1979. (Pb)
A powerful historical description of Foucault's thesis that it is not primarily submissive mentalities but docile bodies that social
and political power seek to achieve; the book asks how bodies are subtly or unsubtly coerced, and for what/whose ends.
Roland Barthes. The Pleasure of the Text. Richard Miller, trans. New York: Hill & Wang, 1975. (Pb)
"Pleasure is a critical principle," writes Barthes, "interpretation is passion." This book has been inspirational to me in its
insistence that the task of interpretation requires a dialectic between the passion of the interpreter and the pleasure of the text.
Richard R. Niebuhr
Richard Niebuhr has been teaching theology and the history of modern religious thought at the Harvard Divinity School since
1956. Because of his strong interest in undergraduate education, he was named chairman of the Committee on Study of
Religion when the undergraduate concentration was first established at Harvard in 1973-74. Besides his well-known book on
Friedrich Schleiermacher he recently delivered and published a series of lectures in Japan on Samuel Taylor Coleridge, William
James and Jonathan Edwards. He also enjoys photography, particularly in Wyoming.
I have been a teacher of theology at the Harvard Divinity School for thirty years. The list of books I have chosen today for this
guide would likely have been different ten years ago and would probably be different five years hence. Some of the titles
represent specific works that have affected my thinking deeply and some represent authors more than the contents of a single
book. I believe these books assist in the one indispensable duty of obtaining self-knowledge.
Jonathan Edwards. A Treatise Concerning Religious Affections (1746). New York: Baker, 1982. (Pb)
Stylistically, this is the finest of Edwards's works and probably of all American theology. In this and in many of his other
writings I value his acuity in observation of the soul as well as of the natural world, his passionateness, lyricism, and rigor of
thought. I first read Edwards at the age of twenty-three in a nineteenth-century edition and have been returning to him ever
since.
Samuel Taylor Coleridge. Aids to Reflection (1825). James Marsh and H. N. Coleridge, eds. Burlington: Chauncey Goodrich,
1840.
. Biographia literaria (1817). J. Shawcross, ed. London: Oxford University Press, 1962.
. The Poetical Works (1796-1819). New York: Oxford University Press, 1969.
Coleridge the poet, critic, philosopher and theologian taught me that words are "living powers- and that our duty is "self-
superintendence"—the attaining of distinctness of consciousness. In addition to his poetry, Coleridge's Biographia literaria and
Aids to Reflection have been unfailing socratic interlocutors.
William James. Pragmatism (1907). Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1975. (Ph)
Everything James wrote, from his Principles of Psychology to Radical Empiricism, remains fresh and provocative. James is my
antidote to all forms of reductionism and dogmatism,
Herman Melville. Moby Dick (1851). Berkeley: University of California Press, 1983. (Pb)
I can give no single reason for the abiding grasp this book, which I first read at the age of twenty-five, has on me. Ahab says,
"Gifted with the high perception, I lack the low enjoying power; damned, most subtly and most malignantly! damned in the
midst of Paradiser Melville is one of the few authors who has brought forth an authentic American myth.
James Agee and Walker Evans. Let Us Now Praise Famous Men (1941), New York: Ballantine, 1974. (Pb)
This book is the only successful marriage of photographs and text I know and belongs to no genre. Its descriptive power (three
tenant families in Alabama, 1936) is unsurpassed in exhibiting "the cruel radiance of what is."
The Battle for God K. Armstrong Religious Fundamentalism
Fundamentalism Observed "M.E. Marty, R.S. Appleby" Religious Fundamentalism
Fundamentalism and American Culture G.M. Marsden Religious Fundamentalism
The Satanic Verses S. Rushdie Religious Fundamentalism
Man and his Destiny in the Great Religions S.G.F. Brandon Reincarnation
Reincarnation "J.Head, S.L. Cranston" Reincarnation
Karma and Rebirth in Classical Indian Traditions W. O'Flaherty Reincarnation
Anticlericalism in Late Medieval and Early Modern Europe "P. Dykema, H. Oberman" Anticlericalism
Idol Temples and Crafty Priests S.J. Barnett Anticlericalism
The Enlightenment P. Gay Anticlericalism
The Life of Vivekananda and the Universal GospelR. Rolland Religious Pluralism
The Wider Ecumenism E. Hill Religious Pluralism
Inter-faith OrganizationsM. Braybrooke Religious Pluralism
Whether we are aware of it or not, each of us builds our life and actions on belief and ritual, be they religious or secular. Much
of the study of religion has been as psychology, philosophy, anthropology, or Christian theology. There are many works dealing
with religion from these viewpoints, but this book list is intended to serve as an introduction to the study of religion in general,
as well as giving reference information about the world's faiths, their beliefs, practices, and distribution. The study of religion
as a human phenomenon is different from the study of any one particular religion, but each study feeds the other. The more we
know of the details of how a religion is lived and celebrated, and how it colours and shapes the lives of its adherents, the more
we can recognize similar dynamics at work in another faith. Conversely, the more we have studied how different religions
approach a particular aspect of life (the problem of suffering, for example, or what happens at death), the greater insight we can
have into the traditions of one particular faith.
Sainsbury's Religions of the World (1993) by Elizabeth Breuilly and Martin Palmer. Although written for readers aged 10
upwards, this is of interest to anyone wanting a brief summary of the beliefs and practices of the major world religions. Fully
illustrated.
From Primitives to Zen (1967) by Mircea Eliade. A fascinating thematic source-book of religious writings, compiled by a
recognized pioneer of the systematic study of the world's religions. As the title implies, the material ranges from accounts of
preliterate religions, through historic religions, to the major world faiths. However, Christianity and Judaism are omitted, since
biblical material in English is readily avail-able elsewhere.
Contemporary Religions: a World Guide (1992) edited by Ian Harris, Stuart Mews, Paul Morris, and John Shepherd. Part I
contains essays on the history, beliefs, and current trends of five major religious traditions - Christianity, Islam, Judaism,
Buddhism, Hinduism - and new religious movements, together with a general survey, `Religions in the Contemporary World'.
Pan II is an alphabetical dictionary of religious groups and movements, and Pan III is a country-by-country summary.
A Handbook of Living Religions (1984) edited by John Hinnells. Detailed articles on the history, beliefs, and practices of
religion worldwide, including indigenous faiths and new religious movements as well as established religions.
Who's Who of World Religions (1991) edited by John Hinnells. An impressive and very readable A-Z reference to 1,500
religious figures, both contemporary and historical.
The Study of Religions (1977) by Jean Holm. A clear and readable introduction to the whole field of religious studies, what it
is, and what problems it presents, written for students.
Themes in Religious Studies Series: Worship, Sacred Writings, Making Moral Decisions, Attitudes to Nature, Myth and
History, Human Nature and Destiny, Picturing God, Rites of Passage, Women in Religion, Sacred Place (all 1994) edited by
Jean Holm and John Bowker. Each book takes a central theme which touches on a wide range of religions, and has an
introductory essay, followed by chapters from authorities on different religions.
The State of Religion Atlas (1993) by Joanne O'Brien and Martin Palmer. Thirty-four maps with notes illustrate the history,
distribution and present activities of world religions.
The World's Religions: Old Traditions and Modern Transformations (1989) by Ninian Smart. A richly illustrated
exploration of all the major religions of the world - their beliefs and practices, and how they have shaped the history of the
world. The arrangement is by areas of the world, which gives a clearer picture than many books of the interaction and
development of religions in varying contexts.
BUDDHISM
Michael Carrithers
Buddhism is a system of spiritual practice and thought which arose 2,500 years ago in N India. The founder of Buddhism is
known as the Buddha, meaning 'awakened one', and this notion of awakening is central to Buddhism. It was a widely held
understanding in the Buddha's India that the experience of ordinary life is shot through with unsatisfactoriness and suffering.
The Buddha's solution to this problem stressed that a right understanding of human experience, combined with wisely guided
behaviour and meditation, allows one to wake up to the real character of experience and, in awakening, to escape its painful
character. By attending minutely to the nature of experience as it occurs moment by moment, the successful Buddhist meditator
learns that the fruits of our desires are transient and hence painful - that is the bad news - but also that the ultimate subject of
our desires, namely our self, is quite insubstantial and transient as well, and so is not pinned helplessly and eternally to a world
of pain. That is the good news, and leads to the cessation of suffering and to release.
Although Buddhism may seem to be a matter of thought, its realizations are in fact based on practice and the transformation of
oneself through practice. Buddhism now has a robust presence throughout the world and is making its way confidently in the
West. In the two and a half millennia since the Buddha taught, Buddhism has shown itself to be adaptable to almost any
cultural and social setting, and Buddhists have created a wealth of widely varying systems of thought and practice. Some
Buddhists come close to a Christian style of spirituality in their stress on sin and salvation, whereas others have taken a more
austerely intellectual path. The Buddha and many of his disciples down the ages were celibate monks, but Buddhists have also
developed forms of behaviour consistent with ordinary life in the world. And though the Buddha's teaching seems to stress
thought over feeling and contemplation over morality, in fact Buddhist ethics have proven to be a powerful and compelling
feature of Buddhist life wherever it is found.
The Buddha (1983) by Michael Carrithers. This is a brief, clearly written, and accessible explanation of the Buddha, his times,
and his thought and practice, which can easily be read in bed.
The Forest Monks of Sri Lanka (1983) by Michael Carrithers. This is the most extensive and intimate account available
concerning the meditating monks of S and SE Asia who represent the living tradition that is closest to the Buddha's original
way of life. It has been used by Buddhists in the West as a basis for criticizing and commenting on their own practices.
Theravada Buddhism: A Social History from Ancient Benares to Modern Colombo (1988) by Richard Gombrich. This
well-written book demonstrates one strand in the complex and sometimes ironic fate that awaited Buddhism as it developed
into a widespread religion involved with ordinary affairs of the world.
An Introduction to Buddhism: Teaching, History and Practices (1990) by Peter B Harvey. This is a wide-ranging
introduction which includes an excellent list of further readings.
The Heart of Buddhist Meditation (1962) by Thera Nyanaponika. This is a classical account of the nature of meditation, the
central practice in Buddhism, from the perspective of southern Buddhism.
The Buddha (1979) by M Pye. This biography of the Buddha is written from a very different viewpoint than that of Carrithers
above. It shows how Buddhists themselves thought, and told stories, of the Buddha and how they preserved and expanded their
sense of who he was.
What the Buddha Thought (1967) by Walpola Rahula. This frequently reprinted volume conveys a sense of the Buddha's
teaching by weaving together admirably plain writing with quotations from the original scriptures. The overall effect is very
powerful.
The Buddhist Handbook: A Complete Guide to Buddhist Teaching and Practice (1987) by John Snelling. This book is
written by a committed British Buddhist who conveys a practical, no-nonsense flavour of Buddhism, both in the past and in the
West today. It is full of useful advice for those becoming personally committed to Buddhist practice and thought.
The Buddhist Religion: A Historical Introduction (1982) by Richard Robinson and Willard Johnson. This is a quite superb
slender introduction to Buddhism, which can be recommended for its ability to convey in a graspable form some of the
complexities of Buddhist history.
Zen Training: Methods and Philosophy (1975) by Katsuki Sekida. Sekida conveys vividly and with unforgettable imagery
the approach to Buddhist practice taken by the Zen school. Contrast this with Nyanaponika's work.
The Practice of Chinese Buddhism 1900-1950 (1967) by Holmes Welch. This book could be read as a contrast to the book on
Sri Lankan monks by Carrithers, above, since it presents an alternative development which grew out of Buddhism.
CHRISTIANITY
Andrew Linzey
The Christian tradition is so multiform and so multifaceted that any attempt to represent it in a few volumes must appear
partisan, even eccentric. Almost everything we experience in Western culture has been influenced - for good or ill - by its
Judaeo-Christian roots. Despite the appearance of secularization, Christian forms of life still flourish and prosper in a wide
variety of guises: in an, literature, sculpture, poetry; in all forms of music from classical to gospel rock; in visual
communications, specifically Christian ideas and images still retain a powerful hold on our imagination, and in intellectual Life
generally, especially the humanities: literature, philosophy, politics, and, of course, theology, specifically Christian notions of
goodness, truth, and beauty still undergird and inform common notions even in their reactive anti-Christian forms. The truth is
that even, and especially, in its pluralist forms, Christianity still remains the dominant ideology of the West. This does not
mean, of course, that Christianity remains unchanged or immutable; precisely the reverse. One of the great strengths of the
Christian tradition is the way in which it merges, collides, incorporates, sometimeseven wholly assimilates, elements or
thoughts originally alien to itself. The line attributed to T S Eliot that Christianity is always adapting itself to what is credible is
ever more true of contemporary Christianity. I have selected a handful of the major accessible works that describe some of the
main features of this tradition and also some works that provide an insight into how this tradition is remoulding itself in the
light of contemporary challenges.
A Dictionary of Judaism and Christianity (1991) edited by Dan Cohn-Sherbok. The first dictionary to explain and compare
the key concepts, beliefs, and practices of both Judaism and Christianity. In a single volume the wealth of the Judaeo-Christian
heritage is uncovered - and in direct and simple language. Specifically, it shows how Christianity is vastly indebted to Jewish
ideas and how it made use of them. An invaluable guide for the general reader.
Encyclopedia of Modern Christian Thought (1993) edited by Alister E McGrath. A wide-ranging `state of the art'
introduction to contemporary Christian thinking in its very diverse forms. Contains detailed consideration of main ideas and
issues as well as brief introductions to key thinkers. All admirably concise and - for the most part - well written and accessible
for the general reader.
Dictionary of Ethics, Theology and Society (1995) edited by P A B Clarke and Andrew Linzey. It is often suggested that
Western society has no coherent ideology left and that utter pluralism in faith and practice is now inevitable. But this view fails
to recognize the continuing indebtedness of Western society to the Judaeo-Christian tradition and the resultant synthesis with
political and social thought. This pioneering dictionary maps out the ethical, theological, and social influences which have
formed Western society. More than 250 contributions explore theoretical and practical topics from abortion to worship.
Appropriate for the student rather than the general reader, but indispensable as a work of reference.
The Wound of Knowledge: Christian Spirituality from the New Testament to St John of the Cross (1979) by Rowan
Williams. A much needed and much valued history of Christian spirituality. Takes the reader through the giants of the tradition:
Paul, John, Ignatius, Irenaeus, Clement of Alexandria, Origen, Athanasius, Basil, Gregory of Nyssa, Gregory of Nazianzen,
Augustine, Maximus, Eckhart, and finally to Luther and St John of the Cross. Impressively illustrates the coherence of
Christian spirituality: `Christianity is born out of struggle because it is born from men and women faced with the paradox of
God's purpose made flesh in a dead and condemned man.' Not always an easy read, but compelling and inspiring.
Perfect Fools: Folly for Christ's Sake in Catholic and Orthodox Spirituality (1980) by John Saward. In many ways the
natural counterpart to Williams's book. Saward recounts and explains the long tradition of `folly for Christ' found within
Catholic and Orthodox spirituality. `This is the story of those who have taken the Lord and his apostle [Paul] at their word and
received from God the rare and terrible charism of holy folly.' The `fools for Christ' described here range from the slightly dotty
to the classable insane who speak words of prophetic insight against the `wisdom of the age'. An audacious work on a very
serious subject but written with an enviable lightness of touch. A delight to read.
True God: An Exploration in Spiritual Theology (1985) by Kenneth Leech. The third in a series following his best-selling
Soul Friend (1977) and True Prayer (1980). Leech's starting point is the spiritual deprivation and impoverishment of the West.
This, according to Leech, is due to a false and inadequate picture of God as an intellectual abstraction unconcerned with, or
uninvolved in, the affairs of the world. Leech argues that orthodox belief requires a God intimately involved in human
suffering and determined to secure social justice. `The message of the crucified God includes the amazing truth that God allows
us to share in his passion and death. Made in his image, we are signed with his cross, healed by his wounds, set free by his
strange work of love.' Breathtakingly impressive vision of Christian spirituality and its relevance to contemporary philosophy,
politics, ecology, and feminism. A modem classic.
The New Oxford Book of Christian Verse (1981) edited by Donald Davie. The notion of `Christian' verse is problematical -
not only because most of the major poets have been religious but also because `good verse' is `good verse' no matter how much
- or how little - `Christian' it may be. Nevertheless, Davie insists that the content of some verse is explicitly Christian in that it
is concerned with the central narratives (creation, fall, incarnation, redemption) of the Christian faith. Davie assembles an
astonishingly wide range of poets (including John Donne, John Bunyan, Thomas Traherne, Isaac Watts, Wesley, William
Cowper, T S Eliot, Stevie Smith, W H Auden, and R S Thomas) who have made Christian themes their own and have done so
in a way that harmonizes both Christian faith and poetic insight. The result is not just an inspiring collection but also one that
introduces and illuminates the main Christian doctrines.
The Body and Society: Men, Women and Sexual Renunciation in Early Christianity (1988) by Peter Brown. A masterful
and brilliant history of the development of Christian thinking about sexuality. Illustrates with unsparing detail the full depths
and heights of Christian preoccupation with sexuality - from apparent promiscuity to a horror of carnality. `If my book gives
back to the Christian men and women of the first five centuries a little of the disturbing strangeness of their most central pre-
occupation, I will consider that I have achieved my purpose in writing it.' Indispensable to understanding the Augustinian
legacy which has so damaged Christian attitudes to sexuality. A great work of historical scholarship: lucid, imaginative, and
compassionate.
Heaven: A History (1990) by Colleen McDannell and Bernard Lang. In case this may seem a rather unlikely subject for
historical study, the authors explain: We study heaven because it reflects a deep and profound longing in Christianity to move
beyond this life and to experience more fully the divine', and the `ways in which people imagine heaven tells us how they
understand themselves, their families, their society, and their God'. The result is an ambitious and fascinating social history
which illustrates how the imagination of heaven has influenced art, politics, literature, and philosophy as well as Christian
thinking throughout the ages. The book is copiously illustrated and easy to read.
The Foolishness of God (1970) by John Austin Baker. One of the major works of contemporary apologetics offering a unified
vision of the Christian faith. Baker argues that the case for Christianity is essentially a moral one - for or against love as the
ruling principle in one's life. God creates a world which is truly contingent and free. The offering of sacrificial love is the moral
heart of the universe and is revealed to be the very nature of God: `The crucified Jesus is the only accurate picture of God the
world has ever seen.' Its impressive biblical scholarship, wide.ranging sympathy and disarmingly simple style have made it a
contemporary classic.
HINDUISM
Veronica Voiels
The great variety of belief and practice expressed within Hinduism sometimes defies any attempts to reduce it to a simple
formula. The distinguishing features of this great world religion are its great antiquity; its cyclic view of existence
incorporating a belief in reincarnation not just of human beings but the whole created universe; its understanding of the nature
of the ultimate reality as Brahman in the abstract symbol 'Om'; its acceptance of the manifestation of god in many different
forms; its understanding of dharma as the moral law governing all aspects of social behaviour and cultural traditions. The depth
and sophistication of its religious philosophy is as fascinating as its rich variety of symbolism, ritual, and mythology. So in
order to appreciate fully the various dimensions of this religion it is necessary to explore its philosophy, history, anthropology,
and sacred an and mythology.
Half the world moves on the independent foundations which Hinduism supplied.
China, japan, Tibet and Siam, Burma and Ceylon look to India as their spiritual
home. Its historic records date back for over four thousand years and even then it
has continued its unbroken, though at times slow and almost static course, until the
present day. It has stood the stress and strain of more than four or five millennia of
spiritual thought and experience.
RA.DHAKRISHNAN
The Hindu World (1982) by Patricia Bahree. A good introduction intended for the general reader and young people. It
provides a very good insight and appreciation of the cultural context of Hinduism in India, with an easy-to-read text and
wonderful colour photography.
Teach Yourself Hinduism (1995) by Mel Thompson. This is suitable for the general reader as well as A-level and
undergraduate studies. It is part of a series on Teach Yourself World Faiths which provide good reference books to promote
understanding of world faiths in a multicultural society.
The Sacred Thread: Hinduism in its Continuity and Diversity (1981) by J L Brockington. This is a historical approach to
Hinduism and suitable for A-level and undergraduate study. It is a very readable text and very comprehensive and detailed in its
treatment of various developments in Hinduism in relation to the circumstances of the time.
The Upanishads (this edition 1989) translated by Alistair Shearer and Peter Russell (there are several other good translations
available). Part of the Hindu sacred writings of the Vedas, the Upanishads contain some of the most profound insights into the
ultimate questions of life. This edition selects various passages and presents them with some commentary and carefully
selected photographs to contribute to the meaning of the text. A delightful experience to read.
Hinduism: An Introduction (1989) by Shakunthala Jagannathan. A book intended for the general reader and written by a
Hindu woman to communicate the central teachings of Hinduism to both Hindus and non-Hindus. It provides a good insight
into Hinduism from a Hindu perspective, rather than a Western scholar's interpretation. The illustrations, photographs, and
colour plates contribute to one's understanding of this intriguing religion.
Hindus: Their Religious Beliefs and Practices (1994) by Julius J Lipner. This book provides a wealth of knowledge about
both the philosophical traditions and popular religion. It approaches an understanding of Hinduism through some central
themes, including scripture, tradition, experience, time, space, and eternity.
The Camphor Flame: Popular Hinduism and Society in India (1992) by C J Fuller. An anthropological study which
explores in considerable detail the various aspects of village Hinduism. It gives some fascinating insights into the practice of
Hinduism in rural India, in the home and in the temples. It is very detailed in some of its accounts but unlike many
anthropological studies it is accessible to the general reader.
The Essential Teachings of Hinduism (1989) edited by Kerry Brown. This book collects together passages from various
Hindu scriptures related to key concepts of Hinduism, such as Brahman, the self, consciousness, and yoga. This is a valuable
resource for gaining an appreciation of Hindu teachings from their original source in scripture.
The Hindu Vision: Forms of the Formless (1993) by Alistair Shearer. An attempt to appreciate Hinduism through its sacred
an in the images of the deities and shrines and temples. The photography is splendid and provides a visual understanding of
Hinduism and the text is readable and of special interest to those who regard the visual image as the best medium for
understanding.
Indian Mythology (1967) by Veronica Ions. It is impossible to appreciate the Hindu world-view without reading some of its
mythology, and this book provides a good overview of the stories of the gods and the Mahabharata. It is well illustrated and
easy to read.
ISLAM
Mawil Izzi-Dien
The following brief selection of books tries to reflect the broad diversity of Islamic thought and experience. Diversity in any
religion can be one of the essences of the faith. In Islam, diversity is a key to understanding not only the books written about
Islam but also the culture that stems from it. Islam, as the youngest divinely inspired religion, offered all cultures a firm ground
from which they can present themselves without being lost within the main
Arabic culture which was the original cradle of Islam. When Muhammad started the call for Islam, the notion of `submitting to
God' represented a new and effective ground upon which human life and society was to be established. Submitting to God took
the place of race, wealth, or any other social underpinning. Yet, despite this ideal vision of life, the history of Islamic culture
contains examples of how distant theory can be from practice. Muslims, like the rest of the human race, seem to have ignored
Islamic instructions in many stages of history, raising the very interesting question of why man has always been a rebel, even
against what he appears to believe in.
God is the Light of the heavens and the earth; the likeness of His Light is as a
niche wherein is a lamp (the lamp in a glass, the glass as it were a glittering star)
kindled from a Blessed Tree, an olive that is neither of the East nor of the West
whose oil wellnigh would shine, even if no fire touched it; Light upon Light (God
guides to His Light whom he will).
A J ARBERRY, KORAN TRANSLATION
What Everyone Should Know About Islam and Muslims (1979) by S Haneef. A well-written quick reference to Islam.
Written by an American Muslim, it is a comprehensive survey of the basic teaching of Islam for the Western reader with
emphasis on the significance of Islam's central concept, faith, and submission to the divine. The author is active in the field of
Islamic education and has travelled widely in the Muslim world.
Islam the Straight Path (1988) by John L Esposito. Combining the best of Western scholarship with an insider's
understanding of the Muslim world, the author has produced a well-written introduction to Islam from its origin in the 7th
century to the con-temporary resurgence. The book has the added advantage of a large number of excerpts from a wide range of
original sources.
The Legacy of Islam (1979) by Joseph Shacht and C E Bosworth. One of the classic analyses of the achievements of Islamic
civilization. The relationship of Islam to the rest of the world is examined with accuracy and scholarship. This includes a large
area of interests written by renounced Western scholars like the famous French scholar Maxim Rodenson, and the Indian Aziz
Ahmad.
Islamic Art (1989) by David Talbot Rice. A valuable book, describing and portraying Islamic an as a supreme triumph of
pattern and colour. These qualities of Islamic art are colourfully and elegantly presented in an academic and historical manner
that makes the book worthwhile reading.
A Popular Dictionary of Islam (1992) by Ian R Netton. This work is a unique dictionary and glossary of Islamic terms. It
provides a key general source on the popular area of Islam. A well-written, comprehensive, cross-referenced book intended for
the student, scholar, and general reader, whether Muslim or non-Muslim.
Islam: Its Meaning and Message (1976) by Khurshid Ahmad and others. A good general introductory book to Islam with a
pinch of specialized flavour written by a reputable range of Muslim academics and modern scholars. The editor is an
internationally established Islamic scholar who occupied academic ministerial posts in Pakistan and other parts of the Muslim
world. The book is divided into four parts covering the Islamic outlook to life, the prophet and the Koran, the Islamic system,
and Islam and the world.
The Eternal Message of Muhammad (1979) by `Abd ar-Rahman Azzam. This book discusses Islam through the life of the
prophet of the faith. He also offers a good account of Islam as a social religion that does not recognize either nationalism or
racism. The author was founder and first secretary general of the Arab League 1945-52.
Morals and Manners in Islam (1986) by M I al-Kaysi. A concise account of the unique area of Islamic culture that is often
unknown by the West. The book covers a large range of patterns of behaviour regulating Islamic conduct at personal, family,
and social levels. The book contents are derived mainly from Islamic legal sources. The author is a Jordanian university
professor and scholar who has travelled extensively in the Muslim world.
Shari'ah: The Islamic Law (1984) by A R I Doi. One of the few comprehensive standard books on Islamic law available in
English. Despite some topographical errors, the book offers an excellent detailed overview of Islamic law in general and in
relation to family, crime and punishment, inheritance and disposal of property, economics and external relationships.
An Introduction to Islamic Law (1964) by Joseph Shacht. This book is considered one of the best accounts of the history of
Islamic law. A fascinating book with its accuracy and detailed knowledge. Although the book is described by the author as not
intended for the specialists, many specialists find it extremely useful as a starting point within the complex phenomena of
Islamic law. The author, who died in 1969, was professor of Arabic and Islamic studies at Columbia University, New York.
JUDAISM
Julia Neuberger
The books that follow are my absolute favourites. A complete reading list would have to include the Hebrew Bible (the Old
Testament), the main rabbinic works such as the Mishnah and Talmud, and a huge corpus of historical and philosophical works.
So what follows is an idiosyncratic selection, which I hope will give the reader some of the flavour of what Judaism is, and
what being Jewish might be like.
Atlas of the Jewish World (1984) by Nicholas de Lange. The best of the atlases of Jewish history and modern existence, by
far. You get a feel for where Jews were, where they are, and why it is they moved from one country to another.
World of our Fathers: The Journey of the East European Jews to America and the Life They Found and Made (1976) by
Irving Howe. Just what it says it is, but brilliantly expressed as a journey from one world to another, with a great deal of the
atmosphere of eastern Europe included.
The Jewish People: Their History and Religion (1987) by David J Goldberg and John D Rayner. Clear, concise, helpful. A
good one-volume treasury of information about who Jews are, what they practise, and what the varieties of Judaism are.
The Holocaust: The Jewish Tragedy (1986) by Martin Gilbert. The authoritative book on the history of the Holocaust.
Painful reading, but essential to understanding present-day Jews.
Benevolence and Betrayal: Five Italian Jewish Families under Fascism (1991) by Alexander Stille. A strange choice, but it
tells the tale so well of Italian Jews who had lived a peaceful life, very happily, utterly integrated into Italian life, and then were
betrayed. It raises lots of questions, and is beautifully written.
Konin: A Quest (1995) by Theo Richmond. Richmond researched and recreated in words the small town in Poland from which
his family came, and where the Jews were completely destroyed during World War II. It is a remarkable achievement, and
people long dead live again, as does a vanished world.
If This Is a Man (1960) by Primo Levi. Records what it means to be a Jew, and to experience the concentration camps.
Anything else by Levi is also recommended.
The attempt to apply a criterion of literary merit has kept this list short. But if reading turns you on .. .
See BIOGRAPHY (Masters); MEDICINE (Belleveau, Boston Women's Collective, Kaplan)
Brecher, R. and E. An Analysis of Human Sexual Response (1967) If more people read this book there would be more happy
— and successful—lovers around. A layperson's guide to Masters and Johnson's (qv) Human Sexual Response. Also: The Sex
Researchers
Cleland, John Fanny Hill: Memoirs of a Woman of Pleasure (1749) Has Westminster School ever recovered from producing
the author of what the British Dictionary of National Biography once described as a "scandalously indecent book"? A "novel"
but marvellously instructive in its lubricious vitality.
Kinsey, Alfred C. et al Sexual Behaviour in the Human Male (1949); Sexual Behaviour in the Human Female (1953) J
;
Although now a little outdated and attacked for his research methods, the peeking Dr Kinsey produced what was in its time a
classic catalogue of the rich variations of human behaviour and a form of liberation through statistics from the secrecy and
falsehood which prejudices morality.
From its 19th-century beginnings, sociology has been an analytical rather than a dogmatic study: its role is to examine the
beliefs, principles and processes which control social behaviour, to codify them where possible, and to draw conclusions.
Increasingly, however, as the study develops, those conclusions are tending towards dogma, theories of social change becoming
recipes, blueprints for vast upheavals of human behaviour and organization. Many of the books on this list show a proselytizing
zeal for this or that political way; others, perhaps purer in sociological terms, take the detached stance of the observer.
preserving that coolness of analysis of ideas in action which, at its best, makes sociology a true counterpart of philosophy.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Dumont, Lloyd, Thrasher, Tiger); ARCHITECTURE (Newman); FILM (Durgnat); GEOGRAPHY
(Pahl); HISTORY/BRITISH (Blythe, Bragg, Thomas, Thompson): MEDIA (Hoggart, McLuhan, Packard, Williams); MUSIC
(Frith); POLITICS (Mackenzie, Mannheim. Mill, Moore, Niebuhr, Piven, Rousseau, Schumpeter); PSYCHOLOGY (Aronson,
Erikson)
Anderson, Perry Considerations on Western Marxism (1976) Lucid survey of "Western Marxist" theorists, including Lukacs,
Gramsci, Althusser, Sartre, and the Frankfurt School (Horsheimer, Adorno, Marcuse, Benjamin, etc). Their main common
feature for the uninitiated is their relative inaccessibility; Anderson's book eases initiation. Also: Lineages of the Absolutist
State
Barnes, Barry Interests and the Growth of Knowledge (1977) Sound introduction to the sociology of knowledge. See
PHILOSOPHY (Mannheim)
Bottomore, T. B. and Rubel, M. Karl Marx: Selected Writings in Sociology and Social Philosophy (1963) 9
Marx would have been amused by present attempts to allocate his work to such narrow disciplinary categories as "sociology",
"economics", and "philosophy". However here is a useful "sociological" set of extracts from his work grouped under such
headings as "class", "alienation" and "ideology". See Marx; ECONOMICS (Marx); POLITICS (Marx)
Lipset, S. M. Class, Status and Power in Comparative Perspective (1966) Lipset is a leading analyst of class structure,
recommended for coolness, balance and readability. Also: Sociology; Revolution and Counterrevolution, etc
Reeves, Magdalen Pember Round about a Pound a Week(1913) itPa British working-class life before World War I, seen
through the eyes of the wives of London workmen. An almost incredible story of cramped, confined life on a meagre budget.
Riesman, D., Denny, R. and Glazer, N. The Lonely Crowd: A Study of the Changing American Character(1962)
This book created a great controversy and its title passed instantly into the language. Its analysis of inner- and outer-
directedness may be finally somewhat superficial but was important for explaining how we felt (and feel?) about ourselves.
Roberts, Robert The Classic Slum: Salford Life in the First Quarter of the Century (1971)
Wonderfully detailed picture of life in a slum district of northern England. Particularly impressive account of the effects of the
Great War in bringing new attitudes and experiences into the lives of ordinary people.
Whyte, W.F. Street Corner Society (1955) 0 Whyte spent three and a half years living in an Italian slum area of Chicago before
writing this sensitive, readable account of perhaps the most famous small group in sociological literature—"Doc and the
Nortons". See Suttles.
The Islamic View of Women and the Family M.A. Rauf Marriage
History of the Wife M. Yalom Marriage
Pride and Prejudice J. Austen Marriage
The Egyptian Book of the Dead E.A. Wallis Budge Eternal Monuments
The Pyramids of Egypt I. Edwards Eternal Monuments
The Egyptians C. Aldred Eternal Monuments
Daniel Bell
Daniel Bell is the Henry Ford II Professor of Social Science at Harvard. Besides writing articles and books in his field of
sociology, he cofounded The Public Interest, is on the Board of Editors of Daedalus, and is a contributing editor of the Partisan
Review. He is a trustee of the Institute for Advanced Study in Princeton, New Jersey and a member of the National Research
Council's Board on Telecommunications and Computers. His most recent book is The Deficit: How Big? How Long? How
Dangerous? written with Lester Thurow, to be followed by a book funded by the National Science Foundation on the new
technology.
Mortimer J. Adler, ed. The Great Ideas: A Syntopicon of Great Books of the Western World (1952). Chicago: Encyclopedia
Britannica, 1955. (Vols. 2 and 3 of Great Books of the Western World.)
Alan L. Bullock, ed. The Harper Dictionary of Modern Thought. New York: Harper & Row, 1977.
My list would be constantly changing with new books being added all the time. Readers need to understand that no book stands
by itself. It is part of a continuing dialogue with its predecessors. Each book is a part of a river of books. Books are embedded
in a historical context; Aristotle's Metaphysics cannot be understood without an understanding of the pre-Socratics, for
example. You need to lead from one book to another—maybe using Mortimer Adler's Syntopicon. You don't have to go back
and read everyone that came before. Then you would be a part of an infinite regress. You have to start somewhere. The point is
to be aware that reading and ideas do not arise de nova. There is an element of history behind all reading—that continuing
dialogue again. Any intelligent reader has to keep in mind the question, What was it about previous answers and writings that
was unsatisfactory and insufficient and gave rise to the new formulation?
In picking books you cannot be a magpie picking one Aristotle, one Shakespeare. First, the reader must ask, What are the
relevant questions? and then, What books address themselves to those questions? If it's a question about the nature of justice
then proceed from Aristotle to John Rawls. Readers should have a sense of purpose for reading and they need to know how to
relate one book to another. Readers need to know ways of reading—how to trace out an idea by following its threads.
My own earliest reading was boy books—Nick Carter detectives. But they got me into the habit of reading. My own experience
of life on the Lower East Side of New York drew on one thematic and problematic definition that shaped my entire life. My
father died early and my mother was a factory worker. I was surrounded by slums, garbage scows, Hooverville. It was the
"why" and the "does it have to be this way" that led me and my reading to the socialist movement, and on to my profession of
sociology.
The answer to your question is more complex, rich and variegated than the notion that somewhere there is a set of books that
impressed you. It is too simplistic an approach. Maybe we should be urging people toward favorite encyclopedias as a
beginning point. A good one is Alan Bullock's Harper Dictionary of Modern Thought.
Archie C. Epps
Archie C. Epps, dean of students at Harvard College, is a native of Lake Charles, Louisiana. He came to Harvard as a graduate
student in 1958 after he received his A.B. degree from Talladega College in Alabama. He was awarded an S.T.B. by the
Harvard Divinity School in 1961. His main intellectual interests are sociology of religion and Afro-American literature and
history. He edited the speeches of Malcolm X at Harvard, which were published by William Morrow in 1968 and which
included an introductory essay entitled "The Paradoxes of Malcolm X." His forthcoming book, Coping with College: Issues
Faced by Students in the 1980s, will be published in the winter of 1987.
Each of these books illuminates an area of human thought that seeks to project man beyond the everyday. They were important
to me for the special vision of the future they contained.
Robert N. Bellah. The Broken Covenant: American Civil Religion in a Time of Trial (1975). Minneapolis, Minn.: Winston
Press, 1976. (Pb)
Robert Bellah's seminal work, The Broken Covenant, was published just before the bicentennial of this country. It portrays an
American people who have interpreted their history as having a religious meaning. They saw themselves a chosen people.
Bellah traces the myths that helped shape the American identity and underscores how they were being reexamined in light of
the difficulties facing the nation. He shows the interplay between religion and secular myths. He achieves new perspectives on
the constant struggle in the republic to reclaim values and a true sense of freedom. This book will whet your appetite for more
Bellah, especially Beyond Belief and Habits of the Heart.
Harry A. Wolfson. Religious Philosophy (1961). New York: Atheneum, 1965. (Pb)
These secular essays are vintage Wolfson. A scholar in the ancient tradition, his studies range from Judaism to the patristic
Fathers and finally Islamic theology. His work lays the foundation for understanding the common threads and differences in the
three religious traditions that arose in the Middle East. Wolfson wrote books on many of the subjects discussed in the essays.
This book illuminates the whole corpus of his work and renders him somewhat more accessible to the nonspecialist.
I read Religious Philosophy because Professor Wolfson directed my attention to the last piece, a sermonette given in Appleton
Chapel, 17 March 1955. It is called "The Professed Atheist and the Verbal Theist," and begins with a quotation from Psalms
14:1: "The fool bath said in his heart, there is no God." Lasting less than six minutes in delivery, Wolfson's sermon summarizes
the history of religious philosophy and the misguided efforts to provide secular versions.
W. E. B. DuBois. The Souls of Black Folk (1903). New York: New American Library, 1969. (Pb)
This small book introduced me in a detailed way to the richness of black life at the beginning of the twentieth century. Its
marriage of a grasp of fact and soaring poetic prose makes it a tour de force that sweeps the reader along and immerses him in
the Negro world. It encouraged me to read other books by DuBois who was one of our pioneer sociologists. He must have
believed, as did F. R. Leavis, that scholarship should in part serve to produce an educated and informed public, because he
wrote for general consumption.
Ralph Ellison. Shadow and Act (1964). New York: Random House, 1964. (Pb)
If you want to understand the joy in black life despite suffering, this book will be an invaluable aid. This collection of essays by
the author of Invisible Man has been my guidepost since it was published, in the midst of a debate between Ellison and
Baldwin. Ellison stressed the particularity of black experience but also the way it embodied the universality of mankind. It
contains an important review of Leroi James's Blues People and a discussion of the centrality of black life in the American
experience. It held out the view that it is possible to live beyond race. Of course, Ellison is a superb craftsman, essayist and
conversationalist of charm, intelligence and force.
Gerald E. Frug
Gerald Frug teaches contracts, property, administrative law and local government law at the Harvard Law School. He teaches
all of them, he writes, in a way that demonstrates why the kinds of books he has mentioned here are essential to understanding
law. He has spent almost as much of his professional life as a government administrator as he has as a law teacher. He believes
that books of this kind are as important for government officials as they are for lawyers.
These are the six books that have most influenced my thinking.
Jean-Jacques Rousseau. Social Contract (1762). Maurice Cranston, trans. New York: Penguin, 1968. (Pb)
This book presents the most readable, passionate account I know of the promise and dangers of democracy, and it offers an
essential critique of the narrow meaning we give to the concept of democracy in America today.
Alexis de Tocqueville. Democracy in America (1835-40). G. Laurence, trans. New York: Random House, 1981. (Pb)
Like Rousseau, de Tocqueville makes the democratic ideal come alive; his eloquence and insights make the book thrilling to
read. De Tocqueville's historical and sociological analysis, like Rousseau's political theory, help the reader get outside the
commonplace understandings of democracy prevalent today.
Karl Mannheim. Ideology and Utopia (1929). L. Wirth and G. Shils, trans. San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1985. (Pb)
Mannheim shows us that the way people think about the world is contingent rather than universally shared. He argues that
thinking is not a way of getting at the truth about society from the outside; instead, ways of thinking are themselves products of
society. The difficulty that Mannheim has in coming to terms with his own thesis at the end of his book adds to the excitement
of reading it.
David Shapiro. Neurotic Styles (1965). New York: Basic Books, 1965. (Pb)
Shapiro, like Mannheim, describes how different people can understand the world in radically different ways, but Shapiro
relies on psychoanalytical rather than sociological insights in his account of the variable nature of thinking. His book makes
learning about alternative ways of experiencing the world fun; classifying yourself and your friends in terms of the obsessive-
compulsive, hysterical, paranoid and impulsive styles is irresistible.
Norbert Elias. The History of Manners (1978). Edmund Jephcott, trans. New York: Pantheon, 1982. (Pb)
Elias provides insight into the historically contingent nature of our own experience of the world through a historical analysis of
some of our most mundane experiences: using a fork, blowing one's nose, spitting. Elias's book is not only a fascinating social
history but it provides a valuable way to understand how our attitudes toward the world are formed.
Jacques Derrida. Of Grammatology (1976). Gayatri C. Spivak, trans. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1977. (Pb)
The books listed above describe how not only democracy but also the normal routines of daily life can be lived in different
ways; Derrida's book focuses on the experience of difference itself. Derrida's book is difficult and often puzzling, but he
provokes his readers to think about their own ways of thinking in a powerful and insightful way.
Kenneth W. Haskins
Kenneth Haskins serves as both senior lecturer on education and codirector of the Principal's Center at Harvard's School of
Education. A trained social worker, Mr. Haskins has had extensive experience in administration and program development in
education. He has participated in the development of several national organizations and programs such as the National Black
Child Development Institute, and serves on advisory boards of trustees of numerous local science and educational agencies.
W. E. B. DuBois. Black Reconstruction in America (1935). New York: Atheneum, 1969. (Pb)
This book describes the attempt to recast the political and economic structures of the United States in a manner that offered
hope for a truly advanced society. It further depicts the events leading to the betrayal of the newly freed population's hopes.
John Langston Gwaltney, ed. Drylongso: A Self-Portrait of Black America (1980). New York: Random House, 1981. (Pb)
This is a very sensitive presentation of the thinking of those the author considers "ordinary people." The wisdom and sensitivity
of black America is demonstrated in what is essentially a political commentary on American race relations.
William Hinton. Fanshen: A Documentary of Revolution in a Chinese Village. New York: Random House, 1968. (Pb)
The work of a people attempting to put into practice the dreams of a revolution is portrayed by examining a small village. The
process of including the formerly excluded; the struggle to develop mutual respect and self-criticism; the substitution of
cooperation for exploration all are sketched in ways that point out the extreme difficulty in transforming ideas into programs.
Albert Memmi. The Colonizer and the Colonized (1957). Howard Greenfield, trans. Boston: Beacon, 1966. (Pb)
This work provides a frame of reference for examining current relations between the "haves" and the "have nots." The roles of
race and class are delineated as well as the recognition of everyone's contribution to the existence of these relationships.
Milton S. Mayer. They Thought They Were Free: The Germans, 1933-45 (1955). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1966.
(Pb)
The title describes the major contributions of this book. An "advanced" nation, in which citizens enjoy their freedom often at
the expense of the freedom of others, discovers that it too (or at least a portion of it) is subject to domination and exploitation.
Although there are many other instances in our history, this one demonstrates the negative extremes of human behavior.
Winthrop Knowlton
Winthrop Knowlton is the director of the Center for Business and Government of Harvard's John F. Kennedy School of
Government, Mr. Knowlton, former chief executive officer of Harper & Row, Publishers, is the Henry R. Luce Professor of
Ethics, Business and Public Policy at the Kennedy School.
The books I have selected deal with the nature of tyranny and freedom and with scientific and cultural change (how they come
about and what they bring in their wake). None of them falls readily into a single category such as "economics" or "ethics."
Four of the six are about individuals. Their heroism provides insight into problems that endure across centuries and inspiration
about how best to lead one's life in the face of those challenges.
Maria Dermout. The Ten Thousand Things (1958). E. M. Beekman, ed., Hans Koning, trans. Amherst: University of
Massachusetts Press, 1983.
Freeman J. Dyson. Disturbing the Universe: A Life in Science (1979). New York: Harper & Row, 1981. (Pb)
Friedrich August von Hayek. The Constitution of Liberty (1960). Chicago: Regnery, 1972.
Joseph A. Sehumpeter. Capitalism. Socialism, and Democracy (1942). New York: Harper & Row, 1983.
Andre Schwarz-Bart. The Last of the Just (1959). Stephen Becker, trans. Cambridge, Mass.: Richard Bentley, 1981.
Alexander I. Solzhenitsyn. One Day in the Life of Ivan Denisovich (1962). Ralph Parker, trans. Alexandria, Va.: Time—Life
Books, 1981.
Marc Roberts
Marc Roberts holds a joint appointment with Harvard's School of Public Health and the Kennedy School of Government as a
professor of political economy and health policy. He has taught primarily in the fields of industrial organization, cost-benefit
analyses, environmental economics and health economics. He is a consultant to public agencies, including the Environmental
Protection Agency and the Massachusetts Department of Public Health, and author of books that examine environmental and
health challenges in modern society.
Ernest Hemingway. For Whom the Bell Tolls (1940). New York: Scribner's, 1982. (Pb)
I think almost everyone reads a novel when they are still young that first brings them face to face with the reality of life and
death. I read this my freshman year and argued about it endlessly late at night sitting in cafeterias while the traffic lights
glistened in the rain on the streets outside. Best of all, I liked the Spanish woman, Pilar, and years later felt vindicated in my
preference when I discovered Hemingway had named his favorite boat after her.
Thomas S. Kuhn. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (1962). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970. (Pb)
I read this my first year in graduate school. For years I told people about the book, how much it had to say about all academic
work and the ways in which we all think. For years it was an underground classic and I was an ardent devotee. Now it has
received its well-deserved fame.
Max Weber. On the Methodology of the Social Science (190417). Edward A. Shils and Henry A. Finch, trans. Glencoe, Ill.:
Free Press, 1949.
I read this my last year in graduate school. Since reading Kuhn, I had been struggling with the question of how, if at all, social
science was "different." What role should numerical measurements play in such work? How could I make sense of the
tendency of economic models to oscillate from descriptive to prescriptive and back again? The translation was obscure, the
ideas flashed across my mind like skyrockets. I now urge every graduate student to read the essay "Science as a Vocation."
John Rawls. A Theory of Justice (1971). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1972. (Pb)
I have struggled with this book for the past ten years. It took two readings for me to figure out what it meant and one more to
find out where and how I disagreed with it. The effort to define my reactions has been extraordinarily educational but it is not
one for the faint-hearted nor a task to be undertaken lightly.
John A. McPhee. Encounters with the Archdruid. New York: Farrar, Straus & Giroux, 1971. (Pb)
Since I was introduced to McPhee five years ago, I have read almost everything. This is certainly one of the best. It is about
both people as individuals and people as representatives of ideas and causes. It reminds us that those we like most may not be
those we think are right and that there should be room in our lives for both kinds of regard. It reminded me why I used to
belong to the Sierra Club and made me unembarrassed by that youthful enthusiasm.
Ezra F. Vogel
Ezra Vogel is a professor of sociology at Harvard and director of the US. Japan Program at Harvard's Center for International
Affairs. He is well known in the United States and East Asia for his research and teaching on contemporary Chinese society,
Japanese society and economy, and industrial East Asia. He is the author of Japan as Number One and, most recently,
Comeback.
Talcott Parsons. The Social System (1951). Glencoe, Ill.: Free Press, 1964. (Pb)
Talcott Parsons did not always find the simplest, most concise way to express his views, but he was constantly thinking about
the general characteristics of society, and his book The Social System was a powerful effort to think systematically about the
linkages between different parts of society. I have found his framework an extraordinarily stimulating general perspective from
which to think about all societies, present and future. It provides a broader framework for considering all the implications of
policies than the narrower, more mechanical perspectives provided by economics, decision-making theory, law and the like.
Daniel Bell. The Coming of Post-Industrial Society (1973). New York: Basic Books, 1976. (Pb)
Daniel Bell is one of the best-read social scientists anywhere, and his work on the year 2000, and his thoughts about the
transition from an industrial society to a post-industrial society, though ten years old, still provide a powerful intellectual
framework for thinking about changes in the future.
Richard W. Bolling and John Bowles. America's Competitive Edge. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1982.
Dick Bolling for decades was one of the most knowledgeable and systematic thinkers in Congress, and his work with John
Bowles represents a deep understanding of how our national politics work and presents a vision of what might be possible
within our American system.
George C. Lodge and Bruce R. Scott, eds. U.S. Competitiveness in the World Economy. Boston: Harvard Business School
Press, 1985.
The work that George Lodge and associates have done at the Harvard Business School, more than that of any other group that I
know, has charted the nature of the new competitive international economic climate in which we find ourselves, They have
been thinking systematically about the changing nature of business and of the world's political and economic climate from a
broad-gauged yet well-grounded perspective. These factors will have a far greater impact on the future than myopic Americans
realize, and they provide a framework for thinking about these issues.
Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development. Industrial Policy of Japan. Paris: O.E.C.D., 1972.
No country has done more to chart a meaningful program for guiding national economies than Japan. When Japan was
admitted to O.E.C.D. membership, they were asked to present a report to the O.E.C.D. explaining their industrial policy. This is
the result, MITI's classic statement about how it approached questions of economic strategy.
I know of no good book in any language that charts the future developments in Japanese commerce and industry, but I am
convinced that just as America in the 1960s and 1970s was the country to observe because it was at the cutting edge, so Japan
is the country to observe in thinking about the future because it is replacing us at the cutting edge. I am amazed how provincial
most American intellectuals are, how little they understand about the most dynamic part of the world and how blind they are to
the impact East Asia will have on the United States. I find that the best way to think about the world's future is to visit Japan
and know intimately the grassroots of Japanese research, industry, agriculture, business and government. Speaking the local
language and visiting these places frequently, I now find this field work far more useful in thinking about the future than any
book in Japanese or English.
Abraham Zaleznik
Abraham Zaleznik is the Konosuke Matsushita Professor of Leadership at the Harvard Business School. He has taught at
Harvard since 1947 and is known internationally for his research and teaching in the field of social psychology in the business
setting, and for his investigations into the distinguishing characteristics of managers and leaders. A psychoanalyst, Professor
Zaleznik maintains that he studied psychoanalysis because the way to advance in our understanding of people at work is first to
understand people. His courses not only examine leadership within the business organization but also address issues such as the
family, the individual's emotional life and the tension between career goals and personal aspirations. His works include: Human
Dilemmas of Leadership (1966), Power and the Corporate Mind (1975) and The Managerial Mystique: The Changing Realities
of Business Leadership (1985).
If you believe as I do that human beings change only microscopically in their biological and psychological structure, then you
will believe that the books I have listed will probably have enduring value into the next century.
Sigmund Freud. The Complete Psychological Works: Standard Edition. James Strachey, ed. and trans. 25 vols. New York:
W.W. Norton, 1976.
Sigmund Freud has had the most influence on my intellectual life. I cannot restrict myself to only one of his books. Among the
most important, I would list his The Interpretation of Dreams, Three Essays on Sexuality, and his case studies, including Dora,
Little Hans, The Rat Man, and The Wolf Man. For those who want to study Freud seriously, I would recommend that they read
Ernest Jones's three-volume biography, The Life and Work of Sigmund Freud.
F. J. Roethlisberger and William J. Dickson. Management and the Worker (1934). Cambridge: Harvard University Press,
1946.
This book was my introduction to the study of human relations in business, and it opened my eyes to a field of study as it
changed the way executives thought about their work and about themselves.
Bronislaw Malinowski. Argonauts of the Western Pacific (1960). New York: Waveland Press, 1984. (Pb)
Alfred R. Radcliffe-Brown. The Andaman Islanders. New York: Free Press, 1964. (Pb)
Conrad M. Arensberg. The Irish Countryman. Garden City, N.Y.: Natural History Press, 1968. (Pb)
William F. Whyte. Street Corner Society (1943). Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981. (Pb)
My third selection is a group of books. They were written by anthropologists and opened my eyes to the aesthetics of field
work in the scientific examination of social organization.
George C. Homans. The Human Group (1950). London: Rout-ledge and Kegan Paul, 1975.
. Social Behavior: Its Elementary Forms. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1974.
George C. Homans wrote two books that taught me something about evidence and inference in social research.
Saul Bellow. Humboldt's Gift (1975). New York: Avon, 1976. (Pb)
Saul Bellow's novels lifted the veil that hides the dilemmas of modern man; the intellectual, the artist and the humanist.
Humboldt's Gift is a powerful book.
Arthur Miller. Death of a Salesman (1966). New York: Penguin, 1977. (Pb)
. The Price (1967). New York: Penguin, 1985. (Pb)
. A View from the Bridge (1957). New York: Penguin, 1977. (Pb)
The plays of Arthur Miller taught me about survival in a world that is for some tragic heroes a very unfriendly place. Three of
his plays are especially important to me: Death of a Salesman, The Price and A View from the Bridge.
The Brahmo Samaj and the Shaping of the Modern Indian Mind D. Kopf Indian Westernization
Vidyasagar: a Reassessment G. Haldar Indian Westernization
Renaissance and Reaction in Nineteenth-Century Bengal M.K. Haldar Indian Westernization
Hecker Studies: Essays on the Thought of Isaac Hecker J. Farina American Exceptionalism
Keeping Faith P. Gleason American Exceptionalism
The Great Gatsby F. Scott Fitzgerald American Exceptionalism
The Right Stuff T. Wolfe American Exceptionalism
Race and Manifest Destiny R. Horsman American Expansionism
Under an Open Sky W. Cronon American Expansionism
How the West was Won L. L'Amour American Expansionism
Chivalry M. KeenChivalry
The Return to Camelot M. Girouard Chivalry
Chivalry and Exploration J. Goodman Chivalry
Don Quixote M. Cervantes Chivalry
The Code of the Woosters P.G. Wodehouse Chivalry
A History of Private Life (5 vols) "P. Aries, G. Duby" Marriage for Love
Marriage and Society R. Outhwaite Marriage for Love
Romeo and Juliet W. Shakespeare Marriage for Love
A Framework for Understanding Poverty, Ruby K. Payne, 1998, 204 pages, $22
Aha! Processing, Highlands, TX 77562, 800/424-9484
DEVELOPMENT STUDIES
Deborah Eade
Strengthening people's capacity to determine their own values and priorities, and to organize themselves to act on these, is the
basis of development. It is about women and men becoming empowered to bring about positive changes in their lives; about
personal growth together with public action; about both the process and the outcome of challenging poverty, oppression, and
discrimination; and about the realization of human potential through social and economic justice. Above all, it is about the
process of transforming lives, and transforming societies.
The Open Veins of Latin America (1971) by Eduardo Galeano. A compelling account of colonialism in Latin America, and its
contemporary repercussions. Although the historical detail varies from one region to another, the legacy of deepening poverty
and an ever-widening gap between rich and poor lives on today through-out Latin America, Africa, and Asia, and also distorts
human development within the industrialized nations.
Where There Is No Doctor (1977) by David Werner. First written in Spanish for peasant farmers in the mountains of Mexico,
this influential manual is inspired by the belief that 'health care is not only everyone's right, but everyone's responsibility'. Its
lasting message is that even the poorest and most oppressed people can take control of their lives when given the means to do
so, and is a classic depiction of primary health care in practice.
A Quiet Violence: View f om a Bangladesh Village (1983) by Betsy Hartmann and James Boyce. A powerful case study
demonstrating how global, national, local, and household forces combine to consign millions to hunger and deprivation in a
world of plenty. Written from a grass-roots perspective, this study shows that in the context of skewed power relations, aid may
be part of the problem rather than part of the solution.
Woman at Point Zero (1975) by Nawal El Saadawi. This novel explores the real human suffering caused by class and gender
oppression. It is a terrible indictment of intolerance and the abuse of power as it affects all human development.
The Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948) by theUnited Nations. This comprehensive document remains
touchstone against which to measure the distance separating humankind from development. Stressing the universal and
indivisible nature of human rights, the Declaration underlines that all development is undermined as long as there is one
woman, man, or child whose rights are not fully realized.
Hunger and Public Action (1989) by Jean Dreze and Amartya Sen. A ground-breaking examination of the role of
governments and of social actions by the public in eradicating famines and eliminating deprivations. It stresses how
discrimination against women creates a `sex bias in famine'. A free press is critical in ensuring that governments are exposed to
public scrutiny; and may be `the most effective early-warning system a famine-prone country can rely on'.
Rising from the Ashes: Development Strategies in Times of Disaster (1989) by Mary B Anderson and Peter J Woodrow.
Building on several case studies, this book shows that relief programmes are never neutral in their developmental impact. It
presents a deceptively simple framework for understanding the dynamic relationship between different people's needs,
vulnerabilities, and capacities. Criticizing most current relief practice, the authors show various ways in which it might be
improved.
Women and Development Series (1989-95). Prepared under the direction of the UN liaison service for nongovernmental
organizations. Consisting of ten volumes on topics including human rights, empowerment, employment, literacy, and refugees,
the series provides a detailed overview of women's exclusion from development, and of ways in which women's and other
organizations around the world, as well as the UN system itself, have attempted to `mainstream' women's rights.
Rural Development: Putting the Last First (1983) by Robert Chambers. A major work that has influenced recent
development thinking and practice, contending that poor people are themselves the best sources of information about their
poverty. 'Experts' have only a limited role to play, helping to articulate and give shape to the actions of the poor.
The Pedagogy of the Oppressed (1973) by Paolo Freire. In this seminal book demonstrating the political nature of education,
Freire explicitly links literacy to popular empowerment and social mobilization. His work in Brazil has had an irrevocable
impact on adult education and social development work in Latin America and elsewhere.
Travel and Exploration
The catlike curiosity of the human race guarantees vivid interest in the people across the valley; the traveller, who turns that
interest into action, is a kind of outsider, a privileged scapegoat who breaks through the barriers of the local, the familiar, and
reports on what he sees. The more extraordinary his tales, the more matter-of-fact his narration—for he is not amazed, he is at
home with himself wherever he goes—and the more wide-eyed our listening amazement. For those who wish to sample the
new global village for themselves, a handful of standard guidebook series are recommended here (not Michelin, not Baedeker,
for they go without saying, everywhere—and who reads them in any case?); from the other books on the list, armchair
excitement is guaranteed.
See ANTHROPOLOGY (Greenway); AUTOBIOGRAPHY (Hudson); BIOGRAPHY (Morison. Parkman);
HISTORY/AMERICAN (Coleman, Parkman); HISTORY/ASIAN (Severin. Stanley); NATURAL HISTORY (Banks, Burton.
Cousteau_ Moorehead, Waterton)
Burton, Sir Richard A Personal Narrative of a Pilgrimage to Al-Madinah and Mecca (1855) 9
Victorian traveller uses his knowledge of the languages and cultures of the Middle East to travel in disguise to Muslim holy
cities in Arabia, forbidden to non-Muslims under pain of death. See NATURAL HISTORY; SEX (Boccaccio, Nefzawi,
Vatsyayana)
Heyerdahl, Thor The Kon-Tiki Expedition (1948) *1' Six men sail across the Pacific from Peru on a raft of balsa wood, to
prove it can be—and could have been—done. Also: Aku-Aku; The Ra Expeditions. etc.
Kingsley, Mary Travels in West Africa (1897) * l' Intrepid Victorian lady travels extensively in West Africa, discovers
vocation, writes engrossing, Jane Austenish account, a monument to unflappable competence and confidence. " `Senora, you
see more bare skin here than on a regiment of grenadiers!' I worried for a week at the awfulness of the pun." A perceptive,
funny book.
Lawrence, T. E. Seven Pillars of Wisdom (1926) * Ostensibly a military chronicle, by an Englishman who took part in a
revolt in Arabia against the Turks. In fact a tapestry of memoirs, philosophy, travel writing, anthropology and fiction. The
opening of Chapter 121 tells all, about the style and about the Man: "Quiveringly a citizen awoke me, with word that Abd el
Kadir was making rebellion. I sent over to Nun Said, glad the Algerian fool was digging his own pit ..." Also: The Mint. See
BIOGRAPHY (Aldington)
Ley, Charles David (ed) Portuguese Voyages, 1498– 1663 (1947) Contemporary accounts of the great age of Portuguese
discoveries in South America. Africa and Asia. See Morison; BIOGRAPHY (Morison)
Magnusson, M. and Paisson, H. (trans) The Vinland Sagas: The Norse Discovery ofArnerica (1965) 9 Two medieval
Icelandic accounts of the discovery by Norse seamen of Greenland and the land beyond.
Murphy, Dervla Full Tilt: Ireland to India with a Bicycle (1965) Author pleasantly describes how she cycled across Europe
and Asia, meeting mishaps and dangers with unassailable verve and courage. A touch of the blarney—and none the worse for
that.
Neatby, Leslie H. The Search for Franklin (1970) A -1 Franklin found the Northwest Passage and then got lost; the search
for Franklin took another 11 years (1848-59). This book is a well-told narrative of outstanding bravery, large personalities,
beautiful and hostile landscape. Also: In Quest of the Northwest Passage
Patterson, J. H. The Man-Eaters of Tsavo and Other East African Adventures (1907)
From the days of the British Empire, a gripping account of the hunt for man-eating lions preventing work on a railway in East
Africa.
Pausanias Guide to Greece (2nd century) P * Untiring antiquarian's tour of the ruins of classical civilization. Makes Baedeker
seem casual; but full of delectable nuggets for the occasional hellenophile. Good translation: Levi.
Ronay, Gabriel The Tartar Khan's Englishman (1978) A -/ By the mid 13th century Tartar armies occupied half
Europe, stood at the gates of Vienna. Their leader, Batu Khan (grandson of Genghis) depended on an English envoy, diplomat,
adventurer, spy. This book is the story of his life, his incredible travels, and his role in the convulsive conflict between
Christendom and the Mongol hordes.
Thesiger, Wilfred Arabian Sands (1959) *i? Thesiger crossed the Arabian deserts with Bedouin companions, and his book
makes the reader feel both the hardships of the journey and the tension that builds up when there is nobody else around who
shares one's background and ways of thought. Also: The Marsh Arabs (and see Gavin Maxwell: A Reed Shaken by the Wind
for another version of the same events). See Lawrence, T. E.
Turnbull, Colin M. The Forest People (1961) *.1 Elegant memoir of author's encounters with the pygmies of central
Africa. Turnbull shares with Van Der Post (qv) an ability to enter the mind and spirit of the people he visits; but he avoids Van
Der Post's arachnoid philosophizing. Also: The Mountain People; Man in Africa
Howard Green
Howard Green is a professor of cellular physiology and chairman of the Physiology and Biophysics Department at the Harvard
Medical School. He is a medical doctor who is a scientist—an award-winning cell biologist—doing skin research as it relates
to skin disorders, including burns.
Hermann Alexander Keyserling. The Travel Diary of a Philosopher (1912). J. Holroyd Reece, trans. New York: Harcourt,
Brace, 1928.
On the eve of the world's transition to modern times (1912), an aristocrat looked at the declining great civilizations and
attempted to extract the significance of what they had created.
Hermann Alexander Keyserling. The Recovery of Truth (1927). Paul Fohr, trans. New York: Harper and Brothers, 1929.
In the late 1920s, the same aristocrat put the meaning and eternal problems of human existence (problems of the mind,
problems of the soul) into a form assimilable by the thinking man of the twentieth century.
Alexander I. Solzhenitsyn. The Gulag Archipelago, 1918-1956 (1973). Thomas P. Whitney, trans. New York: Harper & Row,
1985.
The greatest witness to life in the world's most powerful totalitarian state gives his testimony. As he himself wrote, anyone who
reads and understands this book can no longer harbor illusions about communism.
Henry James. The Bostonians (1886). New York: New American Library, 1984. (Pb)
Apart from its quality as a novel, this book was prophetic: the author foresaw the disappearance from the world of the
masculine spirit and the sentiment of sex.
Fu Shen. Chapters from a Floating Life (ca, 1800). Shirley M. Black, trans. New York: Oxford University Press, 1960.
A beautiful and moving story of conjugal love.
EXPLORATION
Chris Murray
Exploration is an inevitable consequence of man's success as a species: as groups thrive, habitats are exhausted and new ones
have to be sought: having spread from the savannas of Africa to exploit every inhabitable corner of the Earth, man is now on
the point of exploring space. This need to explore is, consequently, a central theme in the early literature of most societies, the
search for new lands and the fascination of the unknown acquiring a mythic dimension; Homer's Odyssey is one of the best-
known examples. Books on exploration can be roughly divided into those that aim to convey its adventure and those that seek
to explain its social, economic, and cultural aspects.
…towards the North, as it were thick Cloudes, which did put us in some hope of Land; knowing how that part of the South Sea
was utterly unknowne; and might have Islands, or Continents, that hitherto were not come to light.
FRANCIS BACON
Travels (many editions) by Marco Polo. Recounting his travels (1260-95) across Asia and a 17-year stay in China as guest of
the Mongol emperor Kublai Khan, this book remains one of the most colourful and fascinating accounts of exploration. It is all
the more remarkable for being - unlike so many early accounts of travel - largely true and accurate. Polo's account stimulated
an interest in the Far East that led eventually to the voyage of Columbus, and until the early 19th century it remained
(astonishingly) Europe's prime source of information about the Far East.
Mandeville's Travels (late 14th century; several modem editions available). The authorship of these travels is unclear; they
have their origins in several 14th-century French books based on much misinterpreted reports of the Crusades. This is largely
exploration in the mind, to worlds full of fantastical beasts; one of the ancestors of the Italian novelist Italo Calvin's Invisible
Cities.
Principal Navigation, Voyages and Discoveries of the English Nation (1589; several modem editions) by Richard Hakluyt.
Brings together salty accounts of early English exploration by such contemporaries as Francis Drake, Walter Raleigh, Martin
Frobisher, and Jacques Cartier. Exploration now goes hand in hand not only with trade, but also with piracy and colonization.
Age of Reconnaissance (1970) by John Parry. The economic, political, and religious aspects of the 'Age of Exploration' are
described in this scholarly but highly readable account of exploration, trade, and settlement beyond Europe from the 15th to the
17th century. The same period - the age of Ferdinand Magellan, Christopher Columbus, Vasco da Gama, Amerigo Vespucci,
Francis Drake, Henry Hudson, Francisco Pizarro, and others - is covered in the lavishly illustrated Time-Life Age of Discovery
(1966).
Christopher Columbus: The Dream and the Obsession (1986) by Gianni Canzotto. The story of the discovery of the `New
World'. Canzotto gives a vivid account of Columbus's many adventures, concentrating on what drove him on against all odds.
The True History of the Conquest of Spain (1632; several modem translations) by Bernal Diaz. An eye-witness account of
the Spanish in South America by Diaz, who accompanied Cortes on his fateful and bloody journey through Mexico.
In the Wake of Cook: Exploration, Science and Empire 1780-1801 (1985) by David Mackay. Looks at the broad context of
18th-century exploration and its close links with the rapid development of science, the growth of industry, and the economics
of empire.
Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa (1857; modem edition avail-able) by David Livingstone. A classic of
African exploration. It is still fascinating both as a vivid first-hand account and (for the modern reader) as a revelation of 19th-
century cultural imperialism.
Heart of Darkness (1902) by Joseph Conrad. The moral bankruptcy of the `opening-up' of Africa is exposed in this short
novel based on personal experience of the Congo. Here again exploration has taken on a mythic quality as exploration of the
terra incognita of the modern psyche.
Scott and Amundsen (1979) by Roland Huntford. A controversial account of Robert Falcon Scott's polar exploration, which
deflates the heroic image built up by largely uncritical earlier biographies.
The Myth of the Explorers (1993) by Beau Riffenburgh. The heroic role of 19th-century and early-20th-century explorers in
popular culture is examined in this book.
For the armchair explorer who wants to sample a wide range of the literature, the best selection is the Oxford Book of
Exploration (1993) edited by Robin Hanbury-Tenison.
For those who want a broad view of exploration, there is Discovery and Exploration: A Concise History (1982) by Alan Reid
and The Discoverers: An Encyclopedia of Exploration (1980), edited by Hellen.
Misc
The Mind Map Book, Tony Buzan with Barry Buzan Rec: cooltools
1996, 320 pages
$17
The Complete Animation Course: The Principles, Practice, and Techniques of Successful Animation
Chris Patmore
2003, 160 pages
$15
The Animation Book: A Complete Guide to Animated Filmmaking -- from Flip-books to Sound Cartoons to 3-D Animation
Kit Laybourne
1998, 426 pages
$16
Graphic novels
Nobel Laureates
Unknown works
URL: http://www.interleaves.org/~rteeter/grtalphaw.html
Others:
A Personal Library